JP7430351B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, typified by pachinko machines, operate various drive bodies during games (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2017-70548A

The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 is configured such that the driving body performs a predefined operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the game becomes monotonous and there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. was there.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in interest in gaming.

a game board having a game area; a main body frame that removably supports the game board;
a door frame provided with a game window that is supported so as to be openable and closable on the front surface of the main body frame and allows a player to view the gaming area of the game board supported by the main body frame from the front when the door frame is closed; ,
A starting prize opening that can accept game balls;
a display device capable of displaying the results of a special lottery that can be executed in response to the acceptance of game balls into the starting prize opening;
A driving body operated by power,
At a position below the gaming window provided in the door frame, an operating means is provided that accepts an operation by a player and can change the display of the display device,
The game board is equipped with a special prize opening that operates to accept game balls when the result of the special lottery is a special result,
The display device is capable of displaying a specific display effect,
The specific display effect can be displayed when the result of the special lottery is a special result,
The operating means capable of accepting an operation by a player and changing the display of the display device includes a first operating section capable of accepting a rotating operation by the player, and an operation different from the rotating operation on the first operating section. having a second operation section;
The second operation unit capable of accepting an operation different from a rotation operation is configured to be able to accept a pressing operation by a player,
When the tip position of the second operating section is at the initial position, the player can pull out the second operating section and displace the tip position of the second operating section to the protruding position. A gaming machine with special features.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above problems and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of an arithmetic circuit within the main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory ratio calculation and display processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure showing the composition of an accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. It is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a load register selection table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 3; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display processing. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection bulb sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control input circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 98 is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process shown in FIG. 101. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of base calculation processing. It is a diagram showing calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine having a setting section seen from behind with the door open. 131 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 when viewed from behind with the door closed. 131 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from the back. 136 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 135, seen from behind. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 151(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 151(B). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of security signals. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of setting confirmation processing. This is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of a final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. This is an example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a setting suggestion presentation table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance. (A) is an example of a performance restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of a performance restriction table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new starting winning performance restriction table. This is an example of processing table 1. This is an example of processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 7 is a flowchart of performance display processing of another example 1. 7 is a diagram showing a notification mode of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing notification priorities of another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing according to another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2 of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. be. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch input level/edge data area of other example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing in another example 1. FIG. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the setting state management area of the other example 1. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1. FIG. 202(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. 7 is a diagram illustrating a command transmission order in another example 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing state transitions of a setting state management area in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing in another example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of abnormality of RAM outside the game area of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of an outside-of-use area RWM initialization process in another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 2. FIG. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting state management area in another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command in another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power OFF processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interruption processing for normal games of another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 4. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 4. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the presentation unit of the table unit of the game board as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a connection between a serial/parallel conversion circuit and an LED. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of a main control MPU and peripheral components on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of storage areas provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and the ROM area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a parameter information setting area of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of periodic processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing. 12 is a flowchart of initialization processing of another example 5. 275 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of alternative example 5 of FIG. 274. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in another example 5. It is a diagram explaining an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which defines the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning hole. It is a figure showing an example when the number of prize balls is included in the prize winning information, (A) is a case where the number of prizes is aggregated for each general prize opening, and (B) is a case where the number of prizes is aggregated by general prize winning holes. This is the case. It is a diagram showing an example in which winning information is stored in the order of winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information transmitted from a main control board to a ball|ball information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, (B) is an example of main control recognition information. It is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a diagram explaining communication between the main control board and the ball information control board at the time of starting up the gaming machine. In communication between the main control board and the ball information control board, it is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board. In communication between the main control board and the ball information control board, it is a diagram showing another example when there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area contained in an input information storage area, (A) shows the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), (B) shows the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). It is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of switch input processing to acquire information detected by a sensor etc. provided in a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the big prize opening opening process. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball enters the big prize opening. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball enters the second starting hole. It is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins in a variable probability area (V-AT area). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an overview of a bit transfer procedure. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of types of bit transfer instructions. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of processing using a bit transfer instruction “RBT”. 296 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 296) of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT.” FIG. This is an example of a flowchart in which index creation processing is made into a subroutine, where (A) is the process that calls the index creation processing, and (B) is the index creation processing that is made into a subroutine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table structure. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a diagram illustrating a case where a single piece of data is read from a table to be referred to. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is successively read from a referenced table. FIG. 2 is a diagram explaining a bit transfer instruction for data whose size is larger than 1 byte, (A) is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and (B) is a diagram explaining a procedure. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an application example of a bit transfer instruction, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a corresponding range, (B) is a program code showing a fluctuation pattern table, and (C) is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a corresponding range; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of a pre-compression table and a post-compression table for corresponding variation pattern tables. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the program which selects a variation pattern. It is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of a storage area of a main control board of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of program implementation of a processing address table in which addresses of processing (subroutines) are stored. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored at an address stored in a process address table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an operation when an INVD instruction is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process to be called by an INVD command. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program for port reading processing (PORT_RD). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of data setting processing (DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL). It is a diagram showing a program example of jackpot information command setting processing (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage processing (COM_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a program example of output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of a variation information number search process (TI_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of an unauthorized notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of data search processing (HLA_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). FIG. 2 is an excerpt of a part of a program that calls a process using an INVS command, in which (A) is an excerpt of a program that calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, and (B) is an example of a program for a solenoid drive process. Parts) and (C) show an example (part) of a program for motor drive processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the procedure of an INVI command. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a PSW, in which (A) is a configuration of the PSW, and (B) is an explanation of each configuration. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example program for explaining the arrangement of processes called by an INVI command, in which (A) shows an example program of an area from which the process is read, and (B) shows an example program of the actual process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing using various process call instructions. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing. This is an example of a program code for processing when a game is stopped in timer interrupt processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of an area related to programs/data in the ROM area of the main control board of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of a fluctuation pattern selection process (Hp_select). It is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of the structure for performing SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram explaining the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), (C ) are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3). It is a time chart showing the state from when the gaming machine of this embodiment is initialized until it becomes possible to start SPI communication. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of this embodiment. It is a circuit diagram mainly showing the configuration for receiving signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of switch input processing to acquire information detected by a sensor etc. with which the game machine of this embodiment was equipped. 343 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for switch input processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 342. FIG. This is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) when starting reception of an input signal through SPI communication according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) when initializing a communication circuit for SPI communication according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an area for storing level data and edge data according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of SPI twice reading processing (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. 348 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code for the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 348. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of level/edge data creation processing according to the present embodiment. 350 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for level/edge data creation processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 350. FIG. 3 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the start of switch input processing to the completion of data transmission through SPI communication according to the present embodiment. 7 is a time chart chronologically showing the process from the completion of data transmission through SPI communication to the start of switch input processing at the next timer interrupt in the switch input processing of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game-enabled processing executed by the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. 354 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for processing when play is possible according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 354. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit diagram excerpting the configuration up to inputting signals output from a contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and a firing stop switch (firing stop button) to the main control MPU in the game machine of the present embodiment. . 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of switch-related control processing according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data structure of history area creation data of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of history area creation data of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of an area (data area) that stores signals input to the main control MPU 1311 of the present embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of history monitoring switch data creation processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code for the history monitoring switch data creation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 361. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a flow of creating history monitoring switch data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of switch history command transmission determination data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of switch history command transmission determination data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of switch history command transmission determination data corresponding to input edge data of the present embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of switch history command transmission determination processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code for switch history command transmission determination processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 367. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an internal function register of the main control MPU according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of random number clock error history area creation data stored in an internal function register of the main control MPU of the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of applying switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment to an internal function register (random number clock error). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of switch passing command data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of switch passage command data according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of switch address data of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of switch passing command data according to the present embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of switch passage command transmission processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code for the switch passage command transmission process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 376. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of safe switch abnormality determination processing of this embodiment. This is an example of a program code for safe switch abnormality determination processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 378. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection form of connection lines that supply power to various boards that control the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of an operation for executing a setting function of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart of processing at power-on of the gaming machine of this embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of startup confirmation processing at power-on according to the present embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of RAM clear determination processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code for RAM clear determination processing according to the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 384. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of setting value confirmation processing of this embodiment. This is an example of a program code for the setting value confirmation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 386. It is an example of the program code corresponding to the definition of the storage area related to the power interruption flag of this embodiment. It is an example of the program code corresponding to the definition of the setting value related to the setting of the gaming machine of this embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of setting operation determination processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code for the setting operation determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 390. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination processing of this embodiment. If the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board of this embodiment, and the power supply is restarted after reconnecting the wiring, an unauthorized act of performing a setting confirmation operation is performed. It is a timing chart explaining control. If the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board of this embodiment, and the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected, an unauthorized act such as setting change operation is performed. It is a timing chart explaining control. In this embodiment, the wiring connected to the main control board is disconnected, but the power supply is not cut off, the wiring is reconnected, and when the power is turned on again, the setting change operation is executed to restart the game. It is a timing chart for explanation. It is a timing chart illustrating control when the wiring connected to the main control board is disconnected and reconnected during the occurrence of a weak error in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the control to shift to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the gaming machine of the present embodiment is powered on after executing the first operation. It is a timing chart explaining an example of control when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on by executing the second operation. It is a diagram showing an example of a command transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when transitioning to a time saving state due to special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the time saving state ends in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game board of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a counting ball entry hole arranged on the game board 5 of the game machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of an example of a counting ball opening unit arranged in a modified example of the game board of the game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement path of a game ball when the counting ball entrance unit of the modification of this embodiment is in a ball entry permission state, (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view, (B) is a cross-sectional view. It is a figure which shows the movement path of a game ball when the counting ball entrance unit of the modification of this embodiment is in a state which does not permit ball entry, (A) is a sectional perspective view, and (B) is a sectional view. It is a timing chart showing changes in the time saving transition count in a modified example of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart in a case where the second starting prize opening functions as a counting ball opening in a modification of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of state transition determination processing for determining whether to transition to another gaming state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of state transition processing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of state transition data of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a work area that stores state transition data according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition data of this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the control to shift to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of values stored in a storage area provided by the main control RAM of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the operation of a RAM clear switch and the storage area that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of setting data at the time of transition to a jackpot first interval, which is set when transitioning to a jackpot gaming state when winning a special lottery in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the big winning opening closing setting data that is set when closing the big winning opening in the jackpot gaming state of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. This is a sample module that performs initial settings based on the big winning opening closing setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a program example of data initialization processing (DAT_SET_CLR) according to the present embodiment. This is a sample module that performs initial settings in the gaming machine of this embodiment using the conventional procedure based on the big winning opening closing setting data. It is a diagram showing an example of a setting state management area and values set in the setting state management area in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a table for selecting initialization setting data when initializing the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the output timing of an external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a modification of the time chart showing the output timing of an external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control configuration of a peripheral control board. This is an example of a memory map of storage areas accessed by VDP. It is a figure explaining allocation of the storage area provided by production data ROM. 3 is a flowchart illustrating processing executed when the peripheral control board is powered on. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like used in performance control by the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H". It is a diagram showing an example of a function in performance control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a mechanism of 3D display using a lenticular method, in which (A) shows an area that is visible from the left eye (L), and (B) shows an area that is visible from the right eye (R). It is a diagram showing an example of a lenticular image in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of images stored in an image data area, in which (A) shows the arrangement of the entire image data area, and (B) shows details of the arrangement of the area where 3D images are stored. It is a diagram explaining the arrangement of layers on which images displayed on the effect display device of the gaming machine of the present embodiment are drawn. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for writing an image to be displayed on the effect display device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment into a frame buffer. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for generating a 3D display image (lenticular image) by combining a side-by-side 2D image (such as a background image) with a 3D image in which a left-eye image and a right-eye image are arranged side by side. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for creating image data in a 3D display effect in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a first method for generating side-by-side images. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second method for generating side-by-side images. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a third method for generating side-by-side images. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for synthesizing a full-screen image from side-by-side images. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a layer structure when there is a single 3D layer. 445 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for drawing in each layer in the layer structure of FIG. 444. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a layer structure when there are multiple 3D layers. 447 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure of FIG. 446. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the screen of the performance selection mode of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for using an image for 3D display performance in the 2D display performance mode in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. 450 is a flowchart showing a procedure for using an image for 3D display effect in the 2D display effect mode shown in FIG. 449. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an abnormality notification screen that is displayed when an abnormality occurs during execution of a 3D display effect. It is a timing chart showing the state of each component when the power supply to the main control board is cut off during 3D display performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when power supply to the main control board is cut off during 3D display performance. It is a timing chart showing the state of each component when the power supply to the peripheral control board is cut off during 3D display performance in the jackpot game state. It is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the power supply to the peripheral control board is cut off during 3D display performance in the jackpot game state. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a structure for storing frame data for generating a moving image. 7 is a graph showing the relationship between the interval at which one reference frame data is arranged and the amount of data. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of arrangement of areas for displaying images. It is a diagram illustrating images corresponding to each region, with the upper row showing the image corresponding to each region, and the lower row showing the display image generated as a result of drawing the images corresponding to all the regions. 3 is a table showing configuration information of each area. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the context of each layer. It is a figure explaining the 1st procedure of generating a moving image. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of a decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated in the first procedure. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement interval of reference frame data when a moving image is generated in a second procedure. It is a figure explaining the 2nd procedure of generating a moving image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of a decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated in a second procedure. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of a decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated by combining the first and second procedures. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of image management information. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an excerpt of a configuration for testing an external RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a command for inspecting external RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating registers set in order to execute an external RAM test by a RAM diagnostic circuit. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external RAM inspection processing (glitch margin check) in the boot program. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure for testing an external RAM (R/W test) in a peripheral control program. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external RAM inspection processing (glitch margin check and R/W test) executed after power is turned on. It is a diagram explaining the types of hits of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating random numbers for determining a win in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in which (A) is pattern 1 and (B) is pattern 2. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud detection processing in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of big prize winning opening fraud detection processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud notification setting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when the first winning is won in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a second winning is won before the number of consecutive winnings of the first winning reaches the upper limit value in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a second winning is won in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. This is a timing chart illustrating the operation when a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won in a gaming machine designed to maintain the gaming state when a small hit is won. This is a timing chart explaining the timing of updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) when a small hit is won. FIG. This is a timing chart illustrating the timing of updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine having a specification that shifts to a non-time saving state when winning a small hit, and is a diagram showing a case where a game ball passes through a specific area after winning a small hit. This is a timing chart in which the timing of updating the continuous time saving number is improved in a game machine having a specification that shifts to a non-time saving state when a small hit is won, and is a diagram showing a case where a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won. Explaining the operation when a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time-saving state when a small hit is won, and then start a special gaming state due to a jackpot after the special game state due to a small hit ends. This is a timing chart. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the types of variation pattern tables that are set when the special symbols of the gaming machine of the present embodiment are displayed in a variable manner. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern which selects a variation pattern table according to the remaining number of times to the upper limit which can occur the time saving state continuously. It is a diagram showing an example of the type of random number and the range of the random number value obtained when a game ball enters the starting slot. It is a diagram showing an example of a range in which the result of a special lottery for each setting value of a gaming machine is a jackpot. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol/special electric accessory control processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol/flag setting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol determination processing of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the means for determining the lottery result, and (A) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of the special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 6 in a high probability state. , (B) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 1 in a high probability state, (C) is the setting of the gaming machine in a high probability state A table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 1 (special lottery) when the value is 6, (D) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 6 in a low probability state. (E) shows a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 1 in a low probability state. It is something. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a process in which some bits of a random number for jackpot determination are changed due to factors such as noise and change to a value outside the range. It is a figure which shows an example of the data for special symbol determination, (A) shows the case of the special symbol 1, (B) shows the case of the special symbol 2. It is a figure explaining the symbol type corresponding to a special symbol random number, (A) shows the case of the special symbol 1, and (B) shows the case of the special symbol 2. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. It is a figure showing an example of reach fluctuation pattern selection data. It is a figure for explaining the comparison value in order to operate an excessive prize ball suppression means. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the relationship between a command and a remaining number. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of canceling the game stop by the game stop first release means. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of canceling the game stop by the game stop second release means. It is a timing chart showing an example of control for canceling the game stop by turning on the power again when the door is opened. It is a timing chart showing an example of control in which the game stop is not canceled by turning on the power again when the door is closed. It is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing a setting change while opening a door after a game is stopped. It is a timing chart showing an example of control in which a setting change is executed while opening the door after the game is stopped, and the door is closed after the gaming machine is started. It is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting changes while closing the door after the game is stopped. It is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting confirmation while opening the door after the game is stopped. It is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting confirmation while closing the door after the game is stopped. It is a timing chart showing an example of control in which opening of the door is used as a condition for canceling a game stop and as a condition for starting a setting change. It is a diagram showing an example of a configuration for executing a bell-throwing effect in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a front view (surface view of a door frame) of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pan unit containing a production operation part, (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (B) is a front view of the pan unit when the press operation part is in a raised position. , (C) is a front view of the dish unit when the central press operation section of the press operation section is pressed. It is a figure which shows the initial position of a performance operation part, (A) is a top view, (B) is a sectional view cut along the plane containing the center. It is a figure which shows the raised position of a performance operation part, (A) is a top view, (B) is a sectional view cut along the plane containing the center. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the rotary operation section by lifting the press operation section, in which (A) shows a state in which the press operation section is lifted, and (B) shows a state in which the rotation operation section is rotated by lifting the press operation section. shows. It is a figure which shows an example of a screen transition when one worshiper rings the bell once and it is successful. It is a figure which shows an example of a screen transition when one worshiper rings the bell once and fails. It is a figure explaining the rotation amount of the rotary operation part and the movement of the bell corresponding to the intensity of striking the bell in a bell-beating performance, (A) the intensity is "strong", (B) the intensity is "medium", (C ) is a case where the strength is "weak", and (D) is a case where the bell fails because the strength is less than a predetermined value. It is a figure which shows an example of a screen transition when the intensity|strength with which a bell is struck is specified in the bell-strike performance in which one worshiper rings a bell once. It is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions of a bell-ringing performance in which a plurality of worshipers ring a bell one after another. It is a diagram showing an example of a configuration for executing a point performance of a bell ringing performance in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the setting of point performance. It is a diagram explaining the transition of points acquired from the start of point performance. It is a figure which shows an example of screen transition of point production. It is a diagram showing an example of a preview performance executed based on the total points acquired in the point performance, in which (A) is when the total point is 0, (B) is when the total point is 20, and (C) is when the total point is 20. This is the case where the total points are 50. It is a figure showing an example of bell ringing strength by attribute of a worshiper. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the transition of points acquired from the start of point performance when bell-ringing intensity is specified depending on the attributes of worshipers.

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main body frame 4, and outer frame 2, as seen from the front, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 as seen from behind.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 which has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and is attached to the lower front side of the door frame base unit 100 to play the game. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200 and stored in the upper tray 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a tray unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and is used to catch game balls that fail to hit into the game area. a foul cover unit 520 that discharges game balls to the lower tray 202 of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that feeds game balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680; It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a ball launcher 680 are attached to the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L that is attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and that pays out game balls to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, by constantly displaying the accessory ratio on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player may be informed of the accessory ratio and the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be explained later, the prize ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the number of balls won by the total number of balls won.For example, a pachinko machine with a high percentage of prize balls (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls due to jackpots. I can say that I am doing well because I have been able to do so. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has fewer jackpot games and fewer prize balls during jackpots, so it can be said that the machine is not performing well. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play by considering the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the role ratio is 70% or more, the value will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in red, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the value will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the accessory ratio in such a manner that it cannot be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it is not changing, or the size of the number indicating the proportion of the accessory may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed depending on the numerical value of the accessory ratio, and the player may be notified of the accessory ratio. For example, if the proportion of the accessory is 70% or more, the decorative pattern will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will light red or blink, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the decorative pattern will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Alternatively, the information may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or it may be displayed not only with the proportion of the accessory but also with other information. Other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive jackpots), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Moreover, not only the accessory ratio, but also the continuous accessory ratio, base value, etc., which will be described later, may be displayed in a changed manner as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a sealed transparent resin main control board box 1320 that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is arranged on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, if the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen from the back side of Machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio display 1317 to make the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1 appear low, and to ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling nature.

In addition, if the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 transparent, pachinko The accessory ratio display 1317 may be made visible from the back side of the machine 1.

Furthermore, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be made flat or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio display 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

A discharge port is provided at the bottom of the back of the pachinko machine 1 to collect game balls flowing out from the gaming area 5a via the out port 1111, winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharge them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. The display switch 1318 is preferably installed near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not have to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as it is in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and allows the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 to be guided by the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full ball path unit 850, and the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801; A normal guide path that guides the released game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and a normal guide path that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3 to the through ball passage 526. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path leading to the full bulb receptacle 530 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a bass speaker that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein; An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player; a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 that is equipped with ), and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 with game balls stored in the upper tray 201, the ball launcher 680 fires the game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in a winning hole (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. . Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of the game ball, the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. The main control unit 1300 has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 that is arranged at a predetermined position within the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning hole sensors 3015 that detect game balls accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is used to detachably attach the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and is used to discharge game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit is installed near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the back box 3010, and is used to discharge game balls received into the second grand prize opening 2006 or the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. 3035.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and an upper relay board cover 3041 that is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, a performance drive board 3043 housed in the performance drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the board.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

A shot ball sensor 1020 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007) to detect game balls hit into the game area 5a. For example, the firing ball sensor 1020 is configured with a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and entered the game area 5a. Note that the firing ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the ball launch sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be made common among multiple models, and inspections at the manufacturing site and after installation in the hall become easier.

Further, the firing ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the gaming area 5a near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls that are not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an outlet 1111 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1111 by the out guide part 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and two LEDs based on the normal lottery results drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbols related to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003. Among them, there is a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met, and a display for receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting winnings). After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by (occurrence), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result. Among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of game balls into the first special symbol display device and the first starting port 2002, the number of pending variables is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met. A first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs is displayed, and eight LEDs are blinked based on the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting winnings). A second special symbol display device that variably displays the second special symbol by controlling and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays a reservation number, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition for the fluctuation display has not yet been met among the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol, and a first special symbol. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 when the lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly has the following. Note that some of the displays (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and a liquid crystal display control section 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center thereof. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece that protrudes outward from the right side when viewed from the front. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and then move the locking mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the bottom.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and its rear end passes through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The game machine is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning holes 2001 described above, the general winning hole 2001 located near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front is placed directly above the second starting hole 2004. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged above the first big prize opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting mouth 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged along one channel through which game balls flow. It is made up of. As for the second big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the gaming area 5a, and the second bottom big winning hole 2006b is located in the front view of the second big winning hole 2006a. It is located at the bottom on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained. The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left and right direction, directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a flat unit base 2101 having a first prize opening 2005 attached to the front surface of a panel board 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and penetrating back and forth, and a first winning opening 2005 in the unit base 2101. Above the big prize opening 2005, a ball receiving part 2102 protrudes forward from the upper part approximately in the center in the left-right direction and forms the first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding part 2103 that guides the game balls received in the first starting port 2002 downward; a first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding part 2103 and detects the gaming balls received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with approximately the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. a box-shaped unit case 2111, and a horizontally long rectangular flat plate-shaped first grand prize opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and drives the opening/closing of the first big winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and is accepted into the first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2114 that detects game balls that have been played, a first starting opening sensor 2104 that is attached to the top surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, a first big winning opening sensor 2114, and a main control board 1310. A starting port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the starting port unit, and a starting port unit decorative board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and that decorates the first grand prize port 2005 with light emission. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward and is large enough to receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating through the unit base 2101 opens toward the front and has a size that can accept a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6 balls) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the unit base by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be passed through the first attacker unit 2110 and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is installed. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity due to insertion of an unauthorized tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning port door member 2112 of the first attacking unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. This first big winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is the front and By rotating it so as to move it downward, the first big prize opening 2005 can be brought into an open state from a closed state.

The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is de-energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. In other words, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that it becomes higher toward the front from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big winning hole 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning hole door member 2112, the direction of flow of the game ball is changed from below due to the inclination of the first big winning hole door member 2112. It changes backward, is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, and enters into the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a liquid crystal display control section 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and input/output devices (I/O devices). A main control I/O port 1314 as a /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control It is equipped with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a second starting port 2004. 2551, general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, detects the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 A first large winning hole sensor 2114 to detect the game ball accepted into the second upper large winning hole 2006a and second lower large winning hole 2006b as the second large winning hole 2006, and a second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, Detection signals from the second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, the ejected ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. are sent via the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is input.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs control signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, and first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I/O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole For the sensor 2557, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas for the general winning opening sensor 3015, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and also frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently thrown. In order to enter the ball, detection of the game ball by the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015.

The main control MPU 1311 also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is also transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. Note that, upon receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1311 to store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

An accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

CPU13111 executes a program stored in ROM1313. RAM 1312 stores data required when executing a program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the lottery results of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the presentation contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are used in the lottery for winning special symbols, the lottery for winning symbols in the special symbol variation display game, and the lottery for winning normal symbols.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port into which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout of game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a processing address table determined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. The external bus interface 13117 can input and output I/O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7).

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated run prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an unspecified address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated run prohibition circuit estimates that the access is by an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer period has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 using a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function for the arithmetic results without depending on a program, and includes a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product using a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a 16-bit or less multiplier and multiplicand in a multiplication input register A131212 and a multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result to the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisor, dividend) into quotient and remainder using functions and outputs the results.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in a division input register A131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in a division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored values at a predetermined timing and calculates the quotient that is the result of dividing the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Furthermore, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not need to be erased at the read timing. Furthermore, even if values are already stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 obtains the division results from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 After the values are stored in registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and remainder can be obtained by referring to division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value, and the division processing performed by the CPU 13111 by executing the program is performed by multiple multiplications and subtractions, so it takes a considerable amount of time. Such is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see Figures 75 and 80). . Furthermore, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting and receiving circuits, and each data transmitting and receiving circuit transmits and receives data for one channel to and from a predetermined device. Note that in FIG. 20, only the data transmitting circuit is illustrated, and a description of the data receiving circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio. Three channels are used, channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured with a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

Command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to confirm the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores baud rate settings for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings will be explained in detail below. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether to use parity, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 are in FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1×××1010B, which means even parity. In channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B, which means parity is not used, are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Furthermore, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data outside the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise than communication with other boards via communication wires. Furthermore, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. Note that along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, along the left and right and/or thickness directions of signal lines provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board) A ground pattern is provided in the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, if the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

Note that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if no data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the relevant bit of the status register is not set, it means that there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data is not transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 Channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that data for controlling the ball hitting, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has no relation to ball launch. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command request retransmission. If the retransmitted command is determined to be normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, data can be transmitted at a high rate in communication with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting slot to the start of fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between . If the data transmission rate is increased, switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may cause other circuits to malfunction. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data will be retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display contents of the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because the transmission rate returns to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to check the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC Flag indicating completion of transmission; 0 indicates transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that the transmission data is empty; 0 indicates that the data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data register 3142 is in a state where no transmission data is stored.

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, this flag indicates the transmit FIFO trigger level; 0 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data currently being sent is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in FIFO mode, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 after confirming that the bit is 1.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed at 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written externally. For example, to forcibly clear the contents of the buffer, set the relevant bit to 1. More specifically, this is used when a command has been written to the FIFO, but due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred), transmission of the written command is canceled. Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for start-stop synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be provided separately.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating the data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a shootout solenoid 682 that controls shooting, and a ball feed solenoid 551 that controls the ball feed, although detailed illustrations are omitted. A firing control section 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball ejecting switch for ejecting game balls in the dispensing device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball ejecting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 951 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustrations are omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing control I/O port, etc. Detection signals from a detection sensor 842 and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit, and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. Ru.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Note that the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and If the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically, the shuttlecock is Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout blade, and the number "3" is displayed. When there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842), the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error". ” (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game balls are "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input into which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. a circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. A firing solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and is output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 500, there is a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which a game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse and inputs a driving current for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a with a firing strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507. When this occurs, an output is sent to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received into the sending unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball is sent to the ball firing device 680 side. In this way, the drive current outputted from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current outputted from the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

Note that the power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. , and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the performance drive board 3043, Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided in Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as the vibration device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272, and the collar provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side driving light emission data consisting of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side. control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control portion to the liquid crystal display control portion 1512, In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various performance units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via a performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the production button press sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that indicates that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music in accordance with various performances from speakers 921 installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects, etc. are played. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 on the main body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This performance drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs a received game board side lighting/blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on this is output to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the performance drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. or output to .

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game production and pachinko etc. are output from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and are stored in the peripheral control RAM as current calendar information in the calendar information storage section. and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal, which will be described later, that is executed upon input of a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU is ready to be accepted. The value 1 is set during interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is to be reflected in the game performance.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with a built-in sound source transfers drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with a built-in sound source to the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the side of the door frame in the display data creation process described later. Output to the decorative board 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and also outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process to be described later. Sound data such as sounds and notification sounds are output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP with a built-in sound source, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, Update pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission mode, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of various LEDs. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound data that instructs the sound data such as music, sound effects, etc., and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the command data is to be output to the VDP with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command (receiving means) analyzes the various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands that are classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program also issues various abnormal notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Or extract it from the peripheral control RAM and set it in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the production control program analyzes the commands analyzed in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) as various commands categorized as status displays, e.g. In the case of an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (performance device), the door frame side A visual warning is given to the outside using a decorative board 233 (presentation device) and a lamp (presentation device), and an audible warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which was acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the calendar information stored in the time information storage unit. Update the time information. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hours, minutes, and seconds, which are the time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and the calendar information, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, is updated based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Peripheral control controls game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emitting data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the section 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is generated. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and sends it to the game board side decorative board 3053. And one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to a first backup area and a second backup area, and The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 in step S1008, the steps from step S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal is input from the VDP with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU shown in FIG. 61 is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value is 1, and the value is 1, and the peripheral control They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 60. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the number of 1ms timer interrupt execution times STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers are selected from among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and peripheral control RAM. According to the drive data instructed by the controller, various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, Update pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side performance receiver IC of the door frame side decoration board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Once it has been determined, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and a backup 2nd area and back them up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with built-in sound source are mounted. Even in manufacturing lots of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. LCD display control section]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the top liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal An image ROM (effect data ROM) that stores various data of the screen displayed on the display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244, and various types of data stored in this image ROM (effect data ROM). and an image RAM to which data is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the main liquid crystal display device 1600, It controls the drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of schedule data, non-resident area transfer schedule data, and the like corresponding to the control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order in which the screens are drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is composed of non-resident area transfer data arranged in chronological order that defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM (performance data ROM) is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. has been done. This non-resident area transfer data transfers screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244 in advance from the image ROM (performance data ROM) to the image RAM as the schedule data progresses. The order in which various types of data are transferred to the non-resident area is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to notify that fact. do. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This is a method in which the retained drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244.

An image ROM (effect data ROM) stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM (effect data ROM) increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the capacity of the image ROM (effect data ROM) increases. access speed cannot be ignored, and this will affect the speed of drawing on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, sprite data stored in an image ROM (effect data ROM) is transferred and copied to an image RAM having a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM (effect data ROM) in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the top liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device, with the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the "overlapping order of sprites") set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using an even larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning in which the display state of each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting that one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the signals are sequentially output from left to right to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as sub-scanning, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 10, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more clockwise the handle lever 504 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. In other words, game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the speed of the game ball flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, making the movement enjoyable. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and enters the center accessory. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 which is open within the frame of 2500 and passes through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and goes back and forth from side to side, leading to a central guide section 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or side guide sections 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from either of the When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding part 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding part 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game ball released from the central guiding part 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guiding part 2532, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released into the gaming area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in an open state, etc.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf section 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general prize opening of the lower side unit 2200. 2001, first starting port 2002, etc. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 (the ball is driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500). ) and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in this upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the direction of flow in various ways. This upper right circulation space 3541 is provided with a gate part 2003 at the top, a general prize opening 2001 at the bottom, and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549.

The game ball that has flown down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is transferred to the second upper prize opening 2006, which closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b lined up on the left and right. Pass through the second attacker passage 2543a in which the upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower large prize opening door member 2555 form the bottom surface, and enter the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. released. The downstream end (discharge plate part 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball heads toward the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while an increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In addition, in very rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b will enter the game area 5a. The game board 5 is discharged from the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, a normal random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal random number is obtained from among them, and a normal lottery is performed by comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. When the time-saving control described later is not executed and the result of this normal lottery is a "normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opens the second starting port. 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when time saving control is being executed, a normal lottery is conducted to determine whether the "normal win" is the "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". Then, when the time saving control is being executed and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is one of "first normal win", "second normal win", and "third normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 opens. After opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating it in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the second starting port 2004 is opened. Opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 Repeat for several times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "1st normal win", the period for each of the 5 times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and if the regular lottery result of the regular lottery is "2nd regular win" The five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is enabled to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," "1.1 seconds," and "0.28 seconds." , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "3rd normal win", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can accept the game ball. The periods are ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' and ``1.1 seconds.'' The "win" is a win that is more advantageous to the player (the game ball is easier to receive into the second starting port 2004) than the "first normal win". Furthermore, when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal variable time) until the display stops (usually until the lottery result is indicated). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates and enters the open state after the normal variable time has elapsed. Note that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is executed to shorten the normal fluctuation time compared to normal (state where time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating the second starting port door member 2549 may be changed depending on the gaming state, for example, when time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbols that are fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display stop being displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball passes through the gate section 2003. 2003, it is not possible to start a new fluctuating display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display, so the fluctuating display of normal symbols will not be started until the previous fluctuating display of regular symbols ends (the normal lottery result I am trying to put it on hold until the suggestion is finished. Specifically, the normal random number obtained by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and a state is reached in which the fluctuating display of normal symbols can be started. The start of fluctuating display of normal symbols will be postponed until then. The maximum number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is 4, and even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being held. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first starting port sensor 2104 updates the first starting port sensor 2104 with a numerical value range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By obtaining a first special random number from among the special random numbers and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a "jackpot") is created. , "small win", etc.) A first special lottery result is drawn. Then, after controlling the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result, the first special lottery result is displayed. The first special lottery result is indicated to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result (after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the first special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the first special lottery results that are drawn when game balls are accepted into the first starting slot 2002 include "miss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "10R jackpot". By comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is the case, and furthermore, after a jackpot game, it is normally (low probability state: in this example, with a probability of about 1 in 395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/44) to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute it (whether it is a definite variable jackpot or not) and whether to execute time-saving control (time-saving state) that shortens the variation time more than usual when the first special lottery result is a loss (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not). ) and the period for executing the time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special stroke symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 is selected. By obtaining a second special random number of ) will be drawn for the second special drawing result. Then, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result, and then the second special lottery result is displayed. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result (after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the second special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the second special lottery results drawn when game balls are accepted into the second starting port 2004 include "miss", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", which one of these is determined by comparing the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1 in 395. Probability improvement control that increases the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): this example There is a probability of about 1 in 44 of winning the jackpot), and whether or not the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1 in 44 (probability of winning the jackpot is 1 in 44). It also determines whether to execute (time-saving state) (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not) and the period during which time-saving control is executed (time-saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is now possible to do so.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening is Either of the opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 becomes in a state where it is possible to receive a game ball in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 while the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number of balls (for example, 11 when game balls are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or 15 when game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006) from the payout device 830. Game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are able to accept game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot", the first big prize opening 2005 will hold the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice) in which the opening and closing are performed in an acceptable open state and then closed. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to receive game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. When either of the following conditions is satisfied: a number of game balls (for example, 7 pieces) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``4R jackpot'' is repeated for 4 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``16R jackpot'' is repeated for 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) In the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed after being in an open state capable of receiving a game ball), it is practically difficult to allow the game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (After the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first grand prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball in a closed state where it cannot be accepted. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot will be won. After the opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that brings the game balls into a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as the actual special lottery result, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, , 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. An opening/closing pattern in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot". It is also possible to provide a device that executes a plurality of rounds including an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept the game ball and then closed for a period of 0.6 seconds). For example, if a special lottery result is ``8R jackpot that is actually 4R'', a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or the second grand prize opening After repeating the opening/closing pattern four times in which a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are accepted in 2006, the game balls are brought into a closed state where they cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) An opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept a game ball and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in this embodiment, the second big winning hole 2006 is composed of a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged on the left and right, and the second big winning hole 2006 is used. In the case of "Jackpot", for example, in the first round (1R), the second big prize opening 2006a opens and can accept game balls, is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions that make it impossible to accept, and then can be accepted next time. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2nd round) in which game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unable to accept, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning hole 2006a is opened again and the game balls can be accepted. Then, the second upper large winning hole 2006a and the second lower large winning hole 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "jackpot", either the second upper jackpot 2006a or the second lower jackpot 2006b is in a state where it can accept a game ball, so this state When the ball is hit right and the game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is always accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, thereby eliminating the chance of losing a game ball and entertaining the player. I can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, for some of the above-mentioned plural types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. In addition, in a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both probability improvement control and time saving control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are jackpot games, and then the probability improvement control is executed. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are in a state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state.2R probability variation in which the probability improvement control is executed after the jackpot game If it is a jackpot, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol executed on the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, but only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and Until the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start slot 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is accepted into the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a new manner. Since the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be displayed, the fluctuating display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will not start until the fluctuating display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery) We are putting this on hold until the results and second special lottery results are finalized. Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the first starting port 2002 by the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 The second special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols (symbols) can be started. The maximum number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is four each, and for more than four, the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is stored in the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded instead of being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured so that the second special random number is digested with priority. In other words, regardless of the timing of receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined period of time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting manner, and the special lottery result is indicated by the combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern commands, judgment result notification commands, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery results are displayed using effect images. A suggestion is made. Specifically, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows each consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in multiple rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The decorative pattern row starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and then is stopped and displayed in order (in this example, the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows stop. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player. In other words, multiple decorative pattern rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the starting winning occurs. After being displayed, a performance image is displayed that is stopped and displayed to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). Note that the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, players generally pay attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Note that there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuating time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row changes and the final image is displayed). The time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed is different from the time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed.

In addition to displaying an effect image to suggest the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also displays the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left side, etc. according to the special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back lower/back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the system/user reset process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and the timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIGS. 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure for initializing the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and then "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the specified voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power outage warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined period of time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating a watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time necessary for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for accessory ratio calculation (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is a flag that is set when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing, such as when a power outage occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether the work area for calculating accessory ratio (region 13128 for calculating accessory ratio) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is erased (step S26).

Note that when providing one or more backup areas in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using the check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first is copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Regarding the area for accessory ratio calculation, data in the area for accessory ratio calculation 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, for each predetermined number of balls fired, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each type of data (game control data 13132 and role object ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent the concealment of an abnormal state of the ratio of accessories. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low accessory ratio.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes initial settings for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initial settings of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, initial settings of the serial communication port and test signal output port are performed. Starts the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, settings are made for the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, and accessory ratio display 1317. Further, after the serial communication circuit 13114 starts operating, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

The power-on commands include a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the gaming state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process in step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated. Incidentally, the process of updating random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery and the regular lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that it is not necessary to clear all output ports; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, power consumption during the time until the main board side power-off process is completed can be reduced, and the main board-side power-off process can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46). Furthermore, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal.

Next, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the accessory ratio calculation work area (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing instead of the main board power-off processing.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as a check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the accessory ratio calculation/display process instead of during the main board side power-off process.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area along with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , it is possible to calculate the role ratio in long-term operation.

Furthermore, a value indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched and used each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered winning holes such as general winning holes, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the above is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, and the normal period determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is sent. When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and small winning numbers are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312 in the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio. (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped if there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.), and sends the above-mentioned transmission information as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game ball is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. If the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game is then shifted to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state, resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to the state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25), and displays the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data.

Note that regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated or not, the accessory ratio may be displayed as long as the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. . In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good too. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game has stopped. In this way, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division and subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of how to display the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated; however, each time the display switch 1318 is operated, You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and suspends the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the accessory ratio even when fraud is being reported.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), it also outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output signal. It outputs various information (gaming information) signals and security signals regarding the game, such as signals, time saving information output information, starting gate prize information output signals, etc., to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 You may also perform calculation processing of the physical ratio. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or from the payout control section 952 to the peripheral control section 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may also be transmitted.

[5-3. Accessory ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The accessory ratio calculation/display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the performance in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold smaller than a reference value), the preview performance may be changed to provide a preview performance that is more interesting than a normal preview performance.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the same as the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so execute the accessory ratio calculation process and extract the accessory from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The decimal part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process advances to step S160.

In addition, in step S156, each time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and divided to calculate the accessory ratio. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of pitches acquired is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 are taken out of the number of acquired pitches stored in 32 bits. It is recommended to store it in a register (16 bits) for division. Note that if the number of acquired pitches is less than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of pitches acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down to the nearest whole number) and used as the dividend (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculations using decimals can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculate the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 1. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in backup area 2. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), executes the accessory ratio calculation process, reads out the data in the main area, and calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating ratio of accessories 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is reported (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing because if the main board side is reset during power-off processing, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated, so the check code is stored in the RAM 1312 during the initialization processing. The backed up data will be initialized, but if you calculate and memorize the check code periodically during the character ratio calculation/display process, even if the pachinko machine is powered on again, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved. This is because the data in (accessory object ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destinations of data in the main area based on the backup area allocation counter value and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written to multiple backup areas.

Note that when three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas into which data is written may be allocated based on the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, refer to a conversion table (not shown) to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of accessory ratio is accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process, data on the number of pitches acquired is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (i.e., the work area for accessory ratio calculation shown in FIG. 27). , data cannot be written to the storage area related to the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired pitches in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As explained above, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is copied to the backup area, so if the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , it is possible to protect the data used to calculate the role ratio.

Incidentally, since the processing in steps S156 and S172 is common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure it with one or more common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side, separate from the common program module. This is because data checking and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if data checking and backup methods are made common among models, they may be placed in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be explained. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation/display. It includes an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. and an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating accessory ratios, such as accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. Note that the value stored in the free area may be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value that is different from the values set in the game area and the debug area, or a value that occurs less frequently. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the code 13135 for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories and the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the area for calculating the ratio of accessories. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the game control area and other areas, it is possible to eliminate processing in the accessory ratio calculation area (accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, Ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that defects (bugs, etc.) in the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 will affect game control.

Note that the debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and configured to not be able to write to the area. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code 13131. is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed separately, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 where copies of data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the role ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (Fig. The settings may be made in steps S50 to S54) of No. 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data on the number of pitches acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23), which is timed by the main control MPU 1311, and is written in the accessory ratio calculation process (step in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process. The information is read out in step S156). In this way, the accessory ratio calculation/display process reads the data on the number of balls acquired from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. By writing the above, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program that executes the processing of calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories, and the program for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories can be made common to gaming machines with different specifications. .

Note that the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process uses the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to ratio storage. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects are stored. The number of balls acquired for the accessory is the number of prize balls that are won by hitting the accessory that is in operation (for example, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of balls won by winning a winning object while the winning object is continuously operating (for example, the prize opening is open during a series of jackpots). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired as accessories divided by the total number of balls acquired. The continuous yakuza ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive yakuza acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of accessory balls acquired, the number of consecutive accessory balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as role objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as role objects, and the total number of balls acquired correspond to the total number of balls acquired in FIG. 27(B), which will be described later. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

FIG. 27(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are stored. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of won balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of balls acquired as accessories, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The write pointer may also be moved.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects as explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning in a prize other than the accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close, for example, the general prize opening 2001). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the number of balls acquired for the accessory, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27(C) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be obtained, including the number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, the number of special electric accessory balls acquired, and the number of starter pitches acquired. , and store the number of winning balls acquired, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls acquired, the winning prize ratio, and the consecutive winning prize ratio. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, if data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Among the work area structures shown in Figures 27 (B) and (C), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects in the ring buffer, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, and the normal number of balls acquired as electric accessory objects. The number of balls obtained, the number of balls obtained for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained in the starting hole, and the number of balls obtained in other winning holes are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Number of balls acquired as accessory items, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory items, total number of balls acquired, number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of balls acquired as starter openings, and other balls acquired as prize openings. Each cumulative number has a storage area of 3 bytes, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of balls acquired as accessories, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories, total number of balls acquired, ratio of accessories, ratio of consecutive accessories, number of balls acquired as ordinary electric accessories, number of balls acquired as special electric accessories, starting port The total number of balls acquired and the total number of other winning holes acquired are each a 3 or 4 byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in a prize other than an accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close). The number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired is the prize ball obtained by winning the ordinary electric accessory object (the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of a lottery with normal symbols. It is a number. The number of special electric accessory balls acquired is the number of prize balls that are won by entering special electric accessory objects that are in operation (for example, the opened grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) as a result of a lottery based on special symbols. The number of balls won in the starting hole is the number of prize balls that are won by entering the starting hole (first starting hole 2002). The number of other winning holes acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning into a winning hole (general winning hole 2001) which is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of balls acquired for ordinary electric accessories, the number of balls acquired for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained for starting openings, the number of balls obtained for other prize openings, the number of consecutive balls obtained for accessories, and the total number of balls acquired are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process, but other The data will not be deleted when the Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the totals shown in FIGS. 25(B) and 25(C) may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, or the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of acquired pitches for accessories>total number of pitches acquired, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, when the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, a 7 segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but they may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp correspond to. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is a common anode type or a common cathode type, but an example of the common anode type is illustrated.

A resistor 13174 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 to determine the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, 8x4 data selector 3174, decoder 3175, 2x8 data selector 3176, constant current driver 3178, driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control section 3181, a duty ratio control section 3182, a data selector control section 3183, a standby mode control section 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16 bits of data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. Note that the 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and connects D15 to D8 to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section). 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Furthermore, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15-D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits D7-D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects the 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal is sent to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided in the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses a character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to a 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178.

Constant current driver 3178 uses data from 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 accepts the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXXX0011B, the setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that × indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, 16 levels of duty from 0/16 to 15/16 are set in the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182. Ratio settings are written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the settings of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 based on external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the setting to use the decoder is written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000×××. By inputting the data XXB, the NO DECODER setting, which does not use a decoder, is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. The ×8 data selector 3176 is controlled to select data from the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode settings and data clear settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In standby mode, the current settings are maintained as they are, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Furthermore, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held internally by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches is cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates a clock used within driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of implementation example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without destroying the box once closed.The model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface of the main control board box 1320. (sticker affixed, engraved, printed, etc.) or an opening sticker is affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 31(A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310. Note that the main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made by arranging no parts around it.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 is preferably the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 be the same. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to implement the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control MPU 1311, and the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that the orientation is oriented.

In addition, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are located at the ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (in the figure, the upper length Although it is mounted at the upper end along the side, it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or at the end along the left and right sides. That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio display 1317 and does not obstruct the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

By implementing the accessory ratio display 1317 in this way, the accessory ratio display 1317 and the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 are displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the manufacturing process and game hall. Even during post-installation inspections, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without having to take an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but the circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 or the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are of low importance when inspecting for unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the signal of the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 be placed as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13191). L1) Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are placed around the main control MPU 1311, as shown by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 ends up being a certain length, but the wiring length L2 is made as short as possible.

Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in separate packages, and in either case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram in the implementation example shown in FIG. 32(B). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), ground patterns 13192 are provided on both sides of a signal line 13191 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13196 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13191. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13197 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13196.

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13193 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13196 (that is, the signal line 13193 and the signal line 13191 ) arranged so that they do not intersect. Further, the signal line 13194 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through a through hole 13195. In this case as well, the signal line 13194 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13196 (that is, so that the signal line 13194 and the signal line 13191 do not intersect).

Note that, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board with patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It is also applicable to multilayer substrates having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting whether or not to decode or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data selector control unit 3183 decodes It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, and data to be displayed on each digit of 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latch 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence or absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and only need to be set once, so they are initialized in step S28 of FIG. 21. is set as . Note that if you set the initial settings only once, there is a possibility that the settings will be changed due to the influence of noise etc. after the initial settings. may be reset each time the button is pressed). This makes it possible to always display the correct display even if the settings change due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using a character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Furthermore, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so the calculation results can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

Note that lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: initial state, data input state, LED lighting state (0000), LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and LED lighting state (all lighting). is being prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions: blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. The blank command cuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179. The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set to the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights up all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby command is divided into two types depending on parameters: a standby command that transitions to a standby state, and a clear command that transitions to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. Further, the clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and also turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a type of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state in which the 7-segment LEDs are all on, some of the segments are on, and all the lights are off.

Display examples in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(A). becomes a non-lighting state in which all segments of the light are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized, so it is preferable to set it to standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

After completing the initial setting by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171, when display data is input, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. This predetermined display may be performed by displaying "-" in all digits or lighting all segments, as shown in FIG. 36(B). It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Moreover, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED turns on (lights up according to the input data). Specifically, the system enters the accessory ratio display state, displays a code indicating the display content in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, if the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display a display that allows identification of this fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) may be displayed blinking, or the decimal point may be lit or blinking.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to provide a display that allows identification that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later using FIG. 37.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is a good idea to turn off the lights and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same as after the initial setting is completed, but may be in a different format as long as it is distinguishable from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a different form from that illustrated, as long as it can be distinguished from a normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

Furthermore, in any state, when an all-lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 light up. Furthermore, if a blank command or standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. Furthermore, when a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in registers and latches is cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of role ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be explained.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits and the type of value in the upper two digits. Display.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured with a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in different display formats depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). By changing the display mode based on the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the proportion of the accessory is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured with one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different manners. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, the display blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (accessory object ratio or continuous accessary object ratio, recent data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so it will be displayed in a different display format (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of pitches acquired is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when it exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between displaying the latest data, displaying medium-term data, and displaying long-term data. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The mid-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C).

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the accessory ratio display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is changed by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of accessories is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the remaining time cannot be displayed fluctuatingly. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of winnings for each type of winning hole or the number of paid out prize balls per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball output rate during normal times, excluding special prizes (during jackpots), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe pitches by the number of out pitches. The number of fired balls (number of out balls) is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020. As described above, the firing ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball firing device to the gaming area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out pitches may be detected by the ejected ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharged ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104, 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. Furthermore, there is a shot supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680, and game balls that are launched from the ball launcher 680 but do not reach the gaming area 5a (so-called foul balls). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball firing device 680 detected by the shot supply ball sensor to calculate the number of out balls (number of fired balls). May be detected.

The number of out pitches may be counted using any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the ejected ball sensor 3060 or the ejected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe pitches is equal to the number of prize pitches paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball payout rate for each gaming state (during normal play, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated as the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each gaming state. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check on the spot for each game machine the deviation from the design value of ball launch performance during operation. Furthermore, since the ball hitting performance can be checked without using a hole controller, it becomes easier to inspect each gaming machine during on-site inspection of a gaming hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information regarding other winnings and prize balls of the base (the number of winning balls in the general winning hole 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, the number of winning balls in the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, The number of winnings in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after displaying for a predetermined time, the display disappears. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317, good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is opened, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the displayed content may be changed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the ratio (total) of prize balls, is displayed in the first two digits, and a prize ball for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits changes to A6, which means the continuous role object ratio (cumulative), and the lower two consecutive role object ratios for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 prize balls) are displayed. It may be displayed in the digits (FIG. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the ratio of bonus balls (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the ratio of the accessory according to the latest data is displayed in the bottom two digits (recent data display). (Figure 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the first two digits will change to y6, which means the ratio of bonus balls (cumulative total), and the ratio of bonus balls to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) will be changed to the bottom two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 does not need to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as the display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch to be operated by the attendant at the game parlor, and it is possible to reduce the number of erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136, and if the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 is deleted, so the incorrect ratio of accessories is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under conditions different from the deletion conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, so accurate prize ball number data can be maintained. , it is possible to calculate accurate role ratios.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased by mistake due to operation by a game hall attendant. Since the physical ratio calculation/display data is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the system is configured to prevent the data from being erased due to an erroneous operation by an attendant at the game hall. Furthermore, since the gaming hall cannot intentionally erase data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a high accessory ratio can be prevented.

[9. Base display]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, we have described an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays an accessory ratio.Next, we will describe an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described, but an accessory ratio may also be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004), a lottery is held using random numbers and a special symbol fluctuation display game is executed. . The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a relatively short fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is often selected when there are many pending numbers). There are also relatively long fluctuation patterns (such as super reach that last more than 1 minute). When calculating the base value in a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of an error, so the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variable display game switches to the next variable display game. However, if the fluctuating display time is long, instead of waiting for the end of one special symbol fluctuating display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (fired balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are met during a game (for example, during a special symbol fluctuation display game), such as the number of out balls (number of fired balls) or the number of prize balls (number of paid balls) ), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that operates as described above will be explained.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by the reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of an accessory ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, or may use other digits (for example, 2-digit). A 7 segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the role object ratio calculation area update process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, In accessory ratio calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following explanation, the "accessory object ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. This will be explained by replacing it with "calculation/display processing". In addition, the "accessory object ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as the "base calculation area 13128", and the "accessory object ratio calculation/display code 13135" is read as "base calculation/display code 13135", The description will be made by replacing "accessory object ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136."

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The gaming state is in the special prize mode when the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even when the opening and ending times of the jackpot game are included, good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted as in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). This also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls based on the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation will be explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that a palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of prize balls that entered the general prize opening and the starting opening were counted even during the special prize. , the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out pitches excluding the number of pitches that entered the grand prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of pitches awarded is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. Good too. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value will be calculated up to the 1's digit in 100ths, and fractions below the decimal point will not be calculated. Furthermore, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated as a 100th fraction to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the 100th fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that during the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 can perform other processing even if it waits without performing any processing. You may do so. For example, the random number for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time The hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processing related to the game includes at least processing for updating random numbers for determining wins and losses. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated one or more times.

Further, if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the base value may be notified constantly or at a predetermined timing using the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in terms of the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You can.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 configured with 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 with "data n setting" and sets the data whose display contents are specified in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is recommended to set a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%, etc.) for the base value, and change the display mode when the reference value is exceeded. . For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for times exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow. Additionally, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage when the base value is low, such as ``I'm doing great,'' ``I'm getting worse,'' ``It's not bad,'' and ``In a sense, it's amazing.'' If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. For this reason, it is desirable to display the warning in a manner such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command may be generated to display a message indicating that base notification is not possible on the liquid crystal display device. By sending the notification command to the sub-board that generated it, the performance device controlled by the sub-board can notify the status of the base, which allows for a wider variety of notifications than the main board, and reduces the load on the main board. It can be reduced. Furthermore, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to display. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality in the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality in the base value without looking at the back side of the game board where the base display 1317 is provided.

Function display unit 1400 may also serve as base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to provide constant notification. Further, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game ends).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, if the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out pitches), as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Alternatively, a signal having a length that roughly represents the calculated base value may be output (for example, if the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%, a 30 millisecond pulse). Further, a number of continuous pulses representing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Note that the base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command does not need to be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if a base notification command is not generated, the base value continues to be displayed.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 56, it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command to notify the abnormality of the base value, and informs players and hall employees of the abnormality of the base. You may notify.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly informed of the base value, they may become less attentive to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. It is.

Furthermore, based on the calculated base value, the performance of the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select effects from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or lowered during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The presentation may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in different manners when the base value rises and falls beyond a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area updating process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. Note that the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is sent to the main control board 1310. There's no need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the status of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, abnormalities in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when determining that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and if it straddles the predetermined threshold and goes up or down, it becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined that it is, the game is not stopped and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time ones such as normal fluctuations, and long-term ones such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. If the condition is satisfied multiple times, it is recommended to calculate the base value each time and update and display the base value each time. This means that if you limit the calculation of the base value during the special symbol fluctuation display game (for example, calculate and update the base value only once at the end of the fluctuation display), the change in the base value may take a long time depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the player may not be aware of the time, and the information necessary for hall operation may not be output at an appropriate timing, which may cause trouble to the hall.

Further, if the fired game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is in a loss, so for example, an additional effect is added to the effect being performed on the LCD (for example, an effect related to winning or losing that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears in conjunction with a change in the base value). Adding a special performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot (among performances that are not related to changes in the base value, a preview performance that has a high degree of expectation such as the next preview performance, or a preview performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot) Among the specific effects that will appear, a preview effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting hole or the general winning hole, and can be motivated to continue playing the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls enter the starting slot or the general winning slot (if they win more than the average number of past winnings), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player will feel less disappointed because the player has received a payout of more game balls than usual. The presentation of the variable display game may be changed to a presentation with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations in update timing of prize pitch count and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 44. An overview of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value → Send the payout command ・Figure 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・Figure 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 45: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Payout completion notification → Update number of prize balls → Base value calculation The variations shown in FIGS. 41 to 44 above include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). - Execute display processing (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and uses the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90), and a base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) are performed. Execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and base ratio calculation/ The base value is updated in display processing (step S89). Note that the prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data on the number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost when a power outage occurs. For this reason, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the notification of completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later) The base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In addition, in the procedure shown in FIG. 44, in order to prevent data on the number of unpaid prize balls from being lost when a power outage occurs, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the main control board 1310. For this reason, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when predetermined conditions are met. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the lag between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. The problem becomes particularly serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after a prize is entered into the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is carried over to the number of prize balls, payout command, reception confirmation, and payout completion notification resulting from the winning. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the ball is a prize ball that is being awarded a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from entering the winning slot to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for a single game machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 maintains the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected is stored. Add to the number of pitched balls. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of unpaid balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after transmitting the payout command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected. A payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, a payout command is sent, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Furthermore, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, it may update the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of prize balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. Furthermore, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1, every time a prize is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), , steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base value is displayed in real time on the base display 1317. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be explained using FIGS. 46 to 51. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of awarded pitches ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches Calculation/Figures 50 and 51: When either the number of award pitches or the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). Note that in FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the ball is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is defined as an abnormality in the number of prize balls that occurs during a predetermined period of time other than during special prizes (e.g., a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize pitches, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of prize pitches to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813, and instead subtract the number of prize pitches added to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813. Good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, etc. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, if the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is made by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal will be notified. May be used for base value calculations. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started by checking the operation in the initial state. Another method for stopping the game is to temporarily stop the game (for example, stop the variable display of special symbols), and then return to the original state after stopping the error notification and restart the game. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, it outputs a power failure detection signal, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in that state, so the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, there is a possibility that 100 game balls (i.e., out balls) will be fired into the game area 5a and all of the game balls will enter the general winning slot or the starting slot, so an abnormality in the number of winning balls will be notified. It is desirable that the mode is a quiet mode (for example, a lower volume or lower light intensity than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Further, the display time may be the same as that for a normal error, or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and no notification may be made.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In addition, in step S824, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches, but after obtaining the number of out pitches, there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches in comparison with the number of out pitches. (In other words, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of out balls in a predetermined period of time, or if the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening is counted, a high percentage of out balls (for example, 50% or more) enter the prize. For example, when

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 40) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the judgment result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the value of the prize ball number buffer is It may be determined whether or not is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). In other words, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the award pitch count buffer in the award pitch count buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total award pitch count buffer), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100 balls, the prize ball number buffer value is 99 balls, and when 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning slot, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 balls. However, 100 balls are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four balls are left in the number of prize balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used to calculate the base value the next time the prize ball number buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Furthermore, although the description has been made using the threshold value Th1=100 pieces, other numerical values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the discovery of fraud may be delayed. If there is a jackpot (for example, a 4th round jackpot and an 8th round jackpot), it is preferable to set it to a value below the minimum number of prize balls for the jackpot. Also, from the perspective of early detection of fraud, it is recommended to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to have 10 thresholds Th1 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every time a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) are won without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, in addition to the case where the total number of out pitches is 0, when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, if the total number of out balls is less than the total number of prize balls, the base value will be 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) has been obtained, and the game is being played normally. Therefore, there is no need to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, an abnormality in the base value may be determined using 1500% as a threshold value. The theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls per winning opening of 15 is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and indicates that the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be any other value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is filled with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are the cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, as will be described later in FIG. It may be initialized at timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time it acquires the number of prize balls, so that fraudulent activity can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of fired balls) do not win in the general winning hole 2001 or the starting holes 2002, 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, abnormalities in winnings to the winning openings that are always open (general winning opening 2001 and starting openings 2002, 2004) are determined and notified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, so the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (e.g. The load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of the determination in step S812, if there is a prize ball, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, if a game ball enters the starting slot and it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is different from normal (blinking display, red pending, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read suspension will be a jackpot, but if the special symbol variation display game is a loss, the player will be disappointed. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in this embodiment, the player's disappointment as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so a higher base value is reported due to the prize ball that has entered the starting slot. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed when a prize is won at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out when winning at the starting opening is added, the number will not reach the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100 balls). If the value is not reached, the base value will not be updated. In other words, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (due to the number of displayed digits, only the lower numbers change, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a failure, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the player is doing well), and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Furthermore, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number. .

Note that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, the selection can be made using the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, when it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform a effect that can notify of a delay in base value calculation. In addition, if the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if a prize is entered in the starting slot. Even in this case, since prize balls are paid out as they enter the starting slot, the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In addition, in the event of a specific error, even if a winning ball enters the starting slot or general winning slot, it will be treated as if there was no winning and the prize ball will not be paid out.The number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the winning, the base value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out pitch count buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be configured with 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out pitches with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49), the number of out pitches is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether the threshold value Th2 is greater than or equal to the threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out pitch count buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, a base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the same timing (for example, when a predetermined prize is given). It may be initialized for each number of pitches or for each predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value, one that reports the base value with a specific effect, or one that reports an abnormality in the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more interesting.

In addition, each time a prize ball is received (detection of prize winning, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding up the number of prize balls, the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the ball is not fired for a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 minute), the slinging condition that occurs when the game ball gets caught on a nail placed in the game area will be resolved, and the game ball will arrive at the prize opening after a delay. This is because you may win a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of awarded pitches regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out pitches and the buffer value of the number of out pitches are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out pitches is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out pitches may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so it takes more time to calculate the base value than when calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculations (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. Note that a base notification command may be generated each time a base value is calculated, or a base notification command may not be generated even if a base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are stored in the base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, FIG. 51, etc.), and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the award pitch count buffer and the out pitch count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311. - Read out during display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (gaming control program), and the program for accessory ratio calculation/display process can be shared among gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. The prize ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to players other than during special prizes, and is based on the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out pitch count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out pitches meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out pitches). It will be done. The number of winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning slot or starting slot. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning in a specific general winning hole or starting hole. The winning pitch count buffer is used when counting the number of out pitches based on the number of pitches passing through the out gate (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific number of winning balls buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls by the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches x 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the work area structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches correspond to each area of the total cumulative total in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It can store numbers up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area should be prepared to store the data for a long period of time. Furthermore, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

FIG. 52(B) shows another example of the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the explanation in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (or every predetermined number of out pitches, or every predetermined time) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer with n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of prized pitches (number of out pitches, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base cumulative value is the cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches. It is a value calculated from the value, and when one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer goes through the cycle, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. will be recalculated. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total value calculated from the cumulative total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning pitches and the total number of out pitches in the ring buffer each have a 2-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches each have a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since the total will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area will be provided to store long-term data. Furthermore, the base cumulative total and total cumulative total each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total cumulative total shown in FIG. 52(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, it may be reported that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the normal data in the backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 may be visually checked. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the base value starts to be displayed, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display is turned off. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the base display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , it is better to reduce the power consumption of gaming machines. This base non-display state is in the same manner as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different manner as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display on the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may continue. By continuing the progress of the game, the base display can be quickly switched to the game state display when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time has elapsed, a variable display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-mentioned embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (accessory object ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Furthermore, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such gaming machines, by opening the main body frame 4 of one of the pachinko machines, the bases (accessories ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when displaying the base value even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value may be displayed in a form that the player can recognize (for example, on a display device that displays the effects of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). It is recommended to display . This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the performance of the pachinko machine, and is valuable for players to see. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via a relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 does not change even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light intensity of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside of opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined period of time elapses after a game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuations. Further, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a video is played that shows the motif of the gaming machine, and an explanation of the gaming machine is provided. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light from the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light intensity of these display devices. Good too. Further, unless the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty machine can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if a game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, when a game ball is fired toward the playing area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players are eager for revenge.

By notifying such a player of the game status through the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, it is possible to revive the interest in the game. In other words, even if the player enters the demo mode or energy saving mode, the display format of the display that displays the base value may be maintained at the same level as before the transition to the demo mode or energy saving mode, or the light intensity may be increased. It would be good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, we have explained how to maintain or increase the light intensity of the display that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on reducing energy consumption, it is also possible to lower or turn off the light intensity of the display that displays the base value. good. For example, during energy saving mode, certain operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, supply of power to the gaming machine) It is preferable to reduce the amount of light on the display on which the base value is displayed when an operation of an operating means provided on the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button that switches the presence or absence of the base value, is detected. Furthermore, not only in energy saving mode, but when you perform the above-mentioned prescribed operations, the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during energy saving mode. Good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like that consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, resulting in a significant reduction in power consumption. In addition, the light intensity of the display device that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off before the lamp etc. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine can be maintained even in the energy saving mode. be effective. Additionally, during energy saving mode, the lamps etc. that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . Note that the terms "before and after" in these descriptions (meaning "first" and "same time") also include the order of timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player's perspective.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode at each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display device for displaying the base value may be constructed of multi-color LEDs, and the luminescent color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and at each stage, the base value is low. Sometimes self-deprecating comments may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value, it is also possible to perform an effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 where the decorative pattern is displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of pitches passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described using FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out pitches is calculated using the number of winning pitches and the number of pitches passing through the out mouth, and a base value is calculated. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 55 and 56: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

If out balls are detected by the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out exit 1111, there is a problem in that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game balls launched toward the game area 5a flow out of the game area 5a via the general winning hole 2001, the starting hole 2002, and the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out hole 1111. For this reason, the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out exit, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has almost the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. An out-outlet passing ball sensor 1021 is provided to detect the number of balls passing through the outlet. The out exit passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out exit 1111. By installing the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out exit 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed in a position that is not seen by the player, such as in a gathering gutter where game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the out-port 1111 are lined up. If it is installed in a position where the player cannot see it, the player does not need to be conscious of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the exit exit passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the exit exit 1111, sufficient space can be secured for placing the liquid crystal display device and accessories (movable objects), improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 are placed on the rolling surface so that they do not bounce back. It is best to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of winning balls, the number of balls passing through the outside exit, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the outside exit every timer interrupt cycle. Note that in FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

Thereafter, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out hole and the number of winning pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out hole is recorded in the out pitch number buffer, and the number of winning pitches is recorded in the winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of pitches passing through the out mouth is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of pitches passing through the out mouth is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning pitches is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning pitches is added to the winning pitch number buffer (step S821).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out mouth and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 Now, the acquired number of pitches passing through the exit and the number of winning pitches are added to separate storage areas (number of out pitches buffer, number of winning pitches buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

In addition, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when entering the winning hole. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after both the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning balls buffer are updated. At that time, if both the out pitch count buffer and winning pitch count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, should the number of balls passing through the out mouth be given priority in counting, or the number of winning pitches should be given priority in counting? It is better to determine this in advance, instead of deciding it by random drawing. At this time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the payout process for the prize ball can be executed quickly, but this may be determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, the winning pitch number buffer value is added to the out pitch number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out pitches (buffer value of number of out pitches + buffer value of winning pitches) and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out mouth, so the number of out balls can be accurately counted and the base value can be calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by checking the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base abnormality notification]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches and for each predetermined number of out pitches The pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches, the predetermined Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends. The method for notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method for notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify abnormalities in the base value. If a player is notified of an abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality in the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be expressed as a percentage and displayed on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify abnormalities in the base value. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You can.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for abnormal conditions, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality in the base value. Furthermore, information on abnormalities in the base may be outputted from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches at the timing when the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches using the acquired number of awarded pitches and number of out pitches, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so the player can know the status of the gaming machine, and the pachinko machine can notify the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation of the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to detect and notify abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected using conventional error detection methods.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies changes in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally fluctuates up and down. Since the base value represents the performance of the gaming machine, players who are playing the game are concerned about changes in the base value as well as the base value itself. For this reason, it is desirable to notify players of changes in the base value. When a display indicating the upper or lower value of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value and the history of past base values. Note that in FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or multiple base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, 10 base values for a predetermined period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches for a predetermined time x n are stored, A base value may be calculated if necessary.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the most recent past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measurement timer. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is being lowered is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is continuing to drop is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than the current base value (equal to or greater than), the base lowering continuation time measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table for base increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it was determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether it is greater, equal, or smaller. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is determined by division. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal, taking into consideration a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on random numbers selected in response to winning in the starting hole (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). Display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or there is no change in the base value, and display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items such as performance number, performance content, variation time, notes, and distribution. The performance number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the performance selected in the display selection table. The performance content is the name of the performance. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the performance. The notes are information that describes the outline of the performance so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the performance will be selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

Display selection table 1 (loss) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged. Display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot that derives a probability variable state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged.

Display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing.

As shown in the figure, display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

In addition, if the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started decreasing, the display selection table 3 is used to select the effect and the selected effect is applied. You may switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect to notify of a change in the base value may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly notified of changes in the base value, they may become less focused on the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. This is because there is.

For example, when a special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed (a gaming situation where the result of a jackpot lottery is not shown), the performance of the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not fluctuating, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that indicates the change in the base value) when the base value changes.

The particular performance may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific performance is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension will continue and fatigue will accumulate. When a game ball enters the starting hole while the specific performance is being displayed, the display of the specific performance is stopped and the performance of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won in the starting slot, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of award balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation where the number of out pitches has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Furthermore, the specific performance may be displayed depending on the result of the lottery, but it may also be configured so that it is always executed if the same conditions are met.

Further, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but is displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because when players are informed of an increase in the base value, their expectations increase, and if the base value does not increase to the extent that the players expect, there is a possibility that the players will be disappointed due to the gap between their expectations. be. On the other hand, this is because when players are notified of a decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing or steady), but the display is divided into three states: while the base value is decreasing, steady, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player when the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular performance may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, in a state where the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are playing rock, paper, scissors, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the rock, paper, scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of Special Reach 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are competing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the competition.

Figure 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom right of the screen). Display a recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decrease is placed in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a recognizable indication of continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be placed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating a decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, the display may pop up in the center of the display screen.

Although the example in which the degree of change in the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may also be changed. Furthermore, instead of the upward and downward trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value can be the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the predetermined time with the base value calculated in the current time interval, or the change in the base value calculated before the predetermined time. It may also be a comparison result between the total value and the latest base value.

[9-8. Base calculation considering specific general winning slots]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winnings in a specific general winning hole will be explained.

In pachinko machines, players aim to win a prize in a specific winning hole where the game ball is likely to win during a jackpot (for example, the opened big winning hole 2005, 2006). Adjust the strength of the shot. Even during a jackpot, you can aim for the big winning hole 2005 by firing the game ball at the same spot as when hitting normally, or you can aim for the big winning hole 2006 by hitting the ball to the right, which increases the strength of the shot to the maximum. There are variations. Among these variations, a game board may be designed such that a starting hole or a general winning hole is placed downstream of the big winning hole to pick up balls that spill from the big winning hole.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that allows players to hit right during a jackpot will be explained in detail. During the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened jackpot. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win in the grand prize opening 2006 which is currently open. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. When a prize is not won in the grand prize opening 2006, a prize is entered in this general prize opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the game ball hit right does not enter the open big winning hole 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting hole and the general winning hole when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (in other words, the number of prize balls paid out for the number of 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls thrown out, the number of game balls fired that flowed into the gaming area but have a low possibility of entering the starting hole and general winning hole (high possibility of entering the grand prize hole) (Number of out pitches), it is assumed that when calculated as a base value, it will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 is defined as a specific general winning hole, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning hole during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. Calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Obtain the number of pitches and the number of specific winning pitches. Note that in FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning pitches from the number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer and calculates the base value at the timing when the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is obtained (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning pitch number recorded in the specific winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning pitches is subtracted from the total number of out pitches and a threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. In other words, if the total number of award pitches and total number of out pitches are not updated, the same value will be calculated as the base value, the base value will maintain the same value, and if the total number of award pitches or total number of out pitches is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have entered the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, so there is no deviation from the actual base value. A small number of base values can be calculated accurately.

In addition, although the case has been described in which there is a general winning hole 2001 downstream of the big winning hole 2006 in a pachinko machine where you hit right during a jackpot, the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 with a normal hit during a jackpot. The present invention can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

Further, in the gaming area 5a, there are provided jackpots 2005 and 2006 which do not normally accept gaming balls, but can accept gaming balls depending on the jackpot lottery results. Prize balls that are won into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball enters the starting hole 2002, 2004 and the special symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning hole 2005, 2006 opens (jackpot opening), the big winning hole The period from the close of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending) is regarded as a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of prized balls and the number of out pitches during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being won in step S810 in FIG. 39 or the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed due to one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given. Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

Further, a second starting port 2004 is arranged in the gaming area 5a, which normally does not accept game balls, but can accept game balls depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball that is won into the second starting hole 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal symbol is drawn, the normal symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is determined until the opening (opening), the second starting port 2004 The period from when the game closes until the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) is considered to be a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only the time saving period but also all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing as described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than special prizes (jackpot, time saving, etc.) without determining whether a special prize is being won in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches while the player is batting right-handed.

Furthermore, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when there is no jackpot or time saving (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand when there is a jackpot or time saving. Such a gaming machine is provided with a general winning hole 2001 and a first starting hole 2002 that win when playing left-handed, and a general winning hole 2001 and a second starting hole 2004 that win when playing right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side to the center of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the right) The rate of balls entering each winning hole differs depending on the placement and position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed are different.

The base value of a pachinko machine is set assuming that a player plays left-handed in a normal state. However, as mentioned above, if the base value is different when hitting left-handed and right-handed (for example, the base value when hitting right-handed in normal conditions is designed to be lower than when hitting left-handed). , if the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

The hall assumes that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or determines that the machine has poor ball payout performance. Even in pachinko machines where the ball payout performance is determined to be poor (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting the ball left-handed, so the starting hole that acts on the base when hitting left-handed Adjustments will be made to increase the entry rate of the general winning slot. Then, adjust the nails with abnormalities to increase the base value. If you hit left-handed with a game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even under normal conditions. In other words, you can receive many lottery tickets for a small amount of money. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole expected, the hole will misunderstand and make adjustments to increase the probability of the ball entering the winning opening or general winning opening when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole will be disadvantageous due to such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when the player is hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that allows you to play right-handed while saving time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 that performs the normal symbol lottery to open the second starting port 2004, It is placed in the area where the game balls roll. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the probability of winning the common symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or the normal symbol is drawn. Even if a symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting hole 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize through the second starting hole 2004 under normal conditions.

Here, in order to increase the base value when the ball is hit right in the normal state, the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 must be increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate a corrected base value using the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out pitches, a higher calculated base value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be determined as appropriate based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate section 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 (such as when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate section 2003 without entering the starting gate), (conditions may be added), it is not necessary to use the number of out pitches counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate section 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" may be output without actively notifying the player that it will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Furthermore, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is being hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or a message indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

As explained above, by excluding the number of balls that pass through the gate section 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right-handed) from the number of out balls, it is possible to increase the number of balls that hit right-handed in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent variations in the calculated base value due to the player's gaming style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value to confirm the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be retained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the erase conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. This allows accurate data on the number of prize balls to be maintained and accurate calculation of the ratio of bonus balls.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1. By the second operation of shutting down, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be performed by installing a single switch to realize this operation, or by having an employee of the game parlor remove the connector of the backup power line that is supplied to the main control board 1310 to connect the pachinko machine to the The power may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, but the second operation erases the calculated base value. Erase all data, including data related to game progress.

With this configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased due to an erroneous operation by a game hall attendant, increasing the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio and preventing concealment of a high accessory ratio. .

[9-10. Base calculation taking into account winning abnormalities]
FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts of base calculation area update processing that takes into account winning abnormalities.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot being derived in a special symbol fluctuation display game, or when a winning opening 2004 is detected as a result of a winning being derived in a normal symbol fluctuation display game. If a winning is detected while the game is not being opened, it is a winning abnormality. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and mainly occurs when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a case where a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball due to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update process that takes the winning abnormality into account, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, prizes are entered into the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 only during special prizes, so winning balls into these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and are not counted as winning balls. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded pitches is directly updated using the number of award pitches calculated in step S814, and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822). Note that in FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation has already been explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as mentioned above, when a winning is detected in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special winning (conditional device is in operation) that occurs due to a jackpot being derived in the special symbol fluctuation display game, If a win is detected in the starting opening 2004 even though the winning is not being released due to a win being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

A winning abnormality may be determined when one winning ball that has a winning abnormality is detected, or a winning abnormality may be determined when a predetermined number of winning balls that have a winning abnormality are detected. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected consecutively, it may be determined that a winning abnormality has occurred, or if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that a winning abnormality has occurred. You may.

Then, the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and is obtained by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to winning abnormality from the number of out pitches obtained may be added to the total number of out pitches, or after adding the number of acquired out pitches to the total number of out pitches, The number of winning pitches due to an abnormality may be subtracted from the total number of out pitches. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of the determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the out balls are corrected by the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. There is no need to correct out balls for winning balls that have a specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball involved in the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out for the winning ball. It is preferable that whether or not to pay out prize balls in response to this winning abnormality is determined for each winning hole. In this case, for winning abnormalities in which no prize balls are paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as the total out balls and should not be used in calculating the base value. On the other hand, regarding the winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, it is preferable to count the winning balls as the total number of out balls, and also count the prize balls that are paid out as the total number of prize balls, and use these to calculate the base value. Note that even in the case of a winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total number of out balls, the prize balls that are paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and they do not need to be used in calculating the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance on a malfunctioning gaming machine (such as clearing a jammed ball), a hall employee may manually put a gaming ball into the starting hole and compensate for the ball being thrown out to prevent the player from losing money. In this case, the prize ball will be paid out for the winning ball in the starting hole. Although winning into this starting hole is detected as a winning abnormality, the prize ball is paid out. When a prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to determine it as a winning abnormality. In this case, the prize balls are paid out in the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are paid out in the other winning openings (big winning openings 2005, 2006). It is better to determine whether there is an abnormality in winnings without paying out the winnings. A winning hole that determines a winning abnormality is one that pays out fewer prize balls due to winning than a winning hole that does not determine a winning abnormality (3 winning balls for the starting hole and 15 winning balls for the big winning hole). For this reason, although abnormal winnings are determined in the big winning opening, even if abnormal winnings are not determined in the starting opening, it does not become a major security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent activities. In this manner, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to winning abnormalities that do not generate prize balls, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out balls that cause the winning balls.

As mentioned above, winning abnormalities can be determined in various winning holes, but a specific example of implementation in a pachinko machine will be described.

First, a winning abnormality may not be determined in the general winning hole 2001, but a winning abnormality may be determined in a winning hole other than the general winning hole 2001 (big winning hole 2005, 2006, starting hole 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to win a prize with multiple game balls at the same time, general winning openings are designed to improve the security resistance of gaming machines against fraudulent activities, as well as large winning openings 2005 and 2006, which are electrically operated accessories that open and close, and starting openings 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the ball hitting the ball into the general winning hole 2001 (total of 4 holes), which is larger than the general winning hole 2001 (total of 3 holes). In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by a hall employee, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the gaming area, and that electric accessories (grand winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the general winning hole is small, there is an effect of improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. Note that winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but winning abnormality may be determined with other general winning openings.

In addition, winning abnormalities are not determined in the large winning holes 2005 and 2006, which have a large number of prize balls, and winnings are won in winning holes other than the large winning holes 2005 and 2006 (general winning hole 2001, starting hole 2002, 2004, which has a small number of prize balls). An abnormality may be determined. Since the large prize opening has a large number of prize balls per winning ball, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, it is convenient because changes in the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting a pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only in a specific big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 2005 in which it is easy to insert a game ball by hand), but in other big winning holes (for example, 2006). .

Moreover, the winning abnormality may not be determined in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the winning abnormality may be determined in the winning openings other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning opening 2001, large winning opening 2005 and 2006). Since the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the starting hole is smaller than that in the big winning hole, it is possible to compensate the player for hitting the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against goths. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only based on a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to locate), but the winning abnormality may be determined using other starting openings 2004.

Furthermore, in the case of a big winning opening or a starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member of the opening/closing opening can be easily operated by a hall employee, and a winning abnormality is determined. Instead, a winning abnormality may be determined for a winning opening where the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member is difficult for a hall employee to operate. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member, which is vertically located in the closed state, is tilted to an oblique position so that the opening/closing member picks up game balls (so-called electric tulip) can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning hole is blocked by a flat plate-like member, and when the flat plate-like member is retracted, the entrance to the winning hole opens. is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning hole used to compensate players for hitting the ball, so it is easy for hall employees to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying an abnormality in prize winning may be the same as the method for notifying an abnormality in the number of winning balls (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, or displaying a warning on a game board or frame). It is preferable that the notification of prize winning abnormalities be made more relaxed than the notification of other abnormalities (such as lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of audio, sound effects, warning sounds, etc.). Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the abnormality notification characters are small, the lamp does not light up when an abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is lowered (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound during other abnormalities. ).

In addition, in the notification of a winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if a winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time will not be extended and the notification will be continued for the first time. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, if the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine rather than a fraudulent act by the player. Therefore, by notifying the winning abnormality for a predetermined period of time and not continuing the notification after that, it is possible to improve the work efficiency without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Furthermore, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined period of time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not disturbed and the work continues to be performed correctly. Specifically, although the display device and lamp continue to provide notification, it is preferable to stop the audio notification (or reduce the volume).

In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting hole, big winning hole). However, for the first type of winning hole, the number of out balls is corrected based on winning balls detected while the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning hole, The number of out pitches is not corrected based on winning balls detected while conditions are not met (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviations in the number of out pitches when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out pitches. Furthermore, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as maintenance. This allows accurate base values to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the ball will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is preferable that winning balls determined to have a winning abnormality not be reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

Further, winning abnormalities detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). This winning abnormality notification may be performed when one winning ball affected by a winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls affected by a winning abnormality are detected. In addition, a winning abnormality may be notified when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected in a row, or when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time. You may also make a notification.

Further, the notification of winning abnormality may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened next (conditional device is activated).

Note that it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes, rather than when the CPU 13111 executes the division using a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), the detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020 are read in the switch input processing (step S74), and the number of out balls is calculated. is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in base calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, but the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in slow division processing by a program, time-consuming processing must be included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it is difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until reading the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), so a description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is determined by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the detection signal from the ejected ball sensor 3060, and the ejected ball sensor 1020. Count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation process 1, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later using FIGS. 76 and 78.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later using FIGS. 77 and 79.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify players and hall employees of the base (base value or abnormality in the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) or speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. and sound output commands. In addition, when making a notification using the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. This is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by a driver, the base notification command is a drive signal that includes a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver). Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Further, if the total number of awarded pitches is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed every time the timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, one minute, which is a longer cycle than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 78 to 79. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, a large number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (for example, a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). Note that in step S9815, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality was notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt processing described above (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95), so the same processing will be explained. is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In base calculation processing 3, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later using FIGS. 81 and 84.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later using FIGS. 82 and 85.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads out the command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) during the timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 84 and 85. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are received in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (e.g., 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). For example, when Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold value Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out pitches is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). Note that in step S8903, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the arithmetic circuit 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or before the special symbol or normal symbol. Preferably before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether the number of prize balls or the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning hole that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one winning ball) to be awarded when a game medium determined for each winning hole provided in the gaming area wins is 1, 3, If there are three types, 5 and 5, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out pitches need not be used in calculating the base value. This is because if a winning ball with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value will be large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). ), the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the hole to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is achieving the set ball payout rate).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of one award pitch and the corresponding number of out pitches for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the single prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing method are rounded. This is because the displayed base value may not change if it is displayed (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), so processing that does not contribute to changes in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the minimum is explained, the number of prize balls with an intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum number does not have to be used for calculating the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, so by averaging the maximum and minimum numbers, the number of prize balls and number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine is shown, and the appropriate Base value can be indicated.

Although the explanation has been given using three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types or seven types may be used.

Furthermore, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1 ball, intermediate value of 3 balls, maximum value of 5 balls, etc.) is not used to calculate the base value, the winning ball will be All winnings in the gaming state at the time of detection do not need to be used for calculating the base value. For example, if a win to a winning slot that awards 5 prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state where a winning to the winning slot is detected, the winning slot will not be used until the end of the gaming state. Winnings in the winning slot or other winning openings are not used to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, winnings in the winning hole and other winning holes are not retroactively used in calculating the base value.

In addition, if the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not need to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected will transition to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winnings up to this point in calculating the base value. By not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value has a large change in the calculation of the base value, it is possible to check whether the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball output rate). This is to eliminate the possibility that the decision will be delayed.

Note that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the prize ball that is the maximum (or minimum, or intermediate) for one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning hole sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the winning is to be used for calculating the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of awarded pitches and total number of out pitches for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the number of winning balls is excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. Further, if all the detected winnings are not used for calculating the base value, it is not necessary to execute base calculation process 1 (step S97) and base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from base value calculation is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and base calculation process 4 (step S94) In this case, it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. In addition, if all detected winnings are not used to calculate the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), base calculation process 4 (step S94), and base display process (step S95) in FIG. 80 are not executed. You can.

A method similar to the method for correcting out balls due to abnormal winnings described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted as a method for excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used for calculating the base value from the number of out balls.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning pitches whether the detected winnings are to be used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 1 (step S97), base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether there is a special prize.

In this way, by excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches required for a given prize winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, making it easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately, especially at the development stage. can be confirmed. In addition, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as lottery processing and processing for determining fluctuation patterns) can be executed accurately. can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest award is awarded to the player, it will not be used for calculating the base value, and the base value will be displayed without changing due to the awarding of the award. Ru. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize was awarded ends.

[9-12. Another configuration of the gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Note that either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects the game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The total number of out pitches is the number of out pitches.

As described above, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting results of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are compared, and the two counting results are obtained. An error may be notified if a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Furthermore, an error may be notified if two counting results within a predetermined period of time differ by a predetermined amount or more.

Note that in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and confirmed section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (see FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than those described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17.

FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in one line in a ball channel 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B. . The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the ejected game balls to flow down to the right side when viewed from the front and to be arranged in one line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball channel 960 provided on the back side of the game board are caused to flow down in two lines and counted by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002, 2004, and the big winning ports 2005, 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the ejected game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be arranged in two strips. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each row.

Although the frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be formed into a unit together with the bulb flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the connection between the discharge bulb sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to a connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is provided on the main control board 1310. It is recommended that it be installed below the .

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board-side discharge ball sensor The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharged bulb sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or relay board, connect it to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a, and is located near the sensor that detects winnings in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions marked with stars in the figure). established in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and the detection range is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player brings a magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the ejected ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted higher than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, the game parlor may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value that is different from the actual value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play the game in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain more balls in the game. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such fraudulent payout of balls. Note that the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided in locations other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include other winning ports (for example, the large winning port 2005 provided above the out port 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an ejection ball sensor 3060 and winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor sensor 2554, second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), and the output signals of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 converts the level of signals input from various sensors, shapes them (for example, removes chattering), and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at a timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal that has been level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and is sent to the buffer. It is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection results from each sensor are taken into the main control MPU 1311.

Interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the A1 to A8 terminals, and detects whether the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or at a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage - 0.1V), it detects a break in the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit in the switch, and if the input to any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, an abnormality signal E is generated. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. In other words, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit in response to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process input signals depending on whether or not the power of the switch has decreased, reducing the processing load and reducing the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, it is possible to output a signal at a level that turns off each sensor.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives input signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prized balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation will not be executed and the display contents of the base display 1317 will be maintained and unchanged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signals from the sensors used for calculating the base value and the signals from the sensors not used for calculating the base value, and if either signal becomes abnormal, Outputs an abnormal signal to stop base calculation.

93, FIG. 94, and FIG. 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so as not to intersect with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A but also to the output line from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side ejected bulb sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided on the lower side of the main control board 1310. Signals from the ejected bulb sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components placed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, where the solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed circuit board. shows. Note that illustration of the ground pattern and power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and are connected to the cathode-side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333), and are passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is output at the timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Furthermore, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data in response to the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level of the data line between the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current necessary to drive the LED elements flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a source of noise. If the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, noise will be added to the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur when the wiring patterns on the front and back sides of the printed circuit board intersect, or when the wiring patterns on the inner layer and the surface layer (front and back sides) intersect.

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should not normally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, causing the game to stop or the gaming state to be erased. . In addition, if the gaming state is erased at a timing that should not occur in the first place, the normal power-off processing will not be executed and will be reset, so the data stored in the RAM 1312 will be cleared, and the jackpot will end or the fluctuating display will change. The game may end midway, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game may be canceled.

The main control board box 1320 has parts that are low in height and other parts that are high depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other parts when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area to the left of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted thereon. On the other hand, in the area to the right of where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and short components such as ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be placed). Note that the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and areas where tall components can be mounted are indicated by hatching. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface), and other It is best to ensure that there is no problem in inserting and removing the cable (connector) that connects to the board.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to attach unauthorized components (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is placed at the upper right of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display 1317 is placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see the displayed content. It is preferable to arrange a display 1317. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to check whether there are game balls in the supply tank), if the player can see the display content on the base display 1317, the player Since players often do not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, players may request an explanation of the display content on the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to place the base display 1317 in a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, inquiries from players can be suppressed. In other words, the base display 1317 displays the base value for a maximum of 52,000 out pitches, but this is different from the base value for a short game played by the player, so complaints about the ball exit rate may arise. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the accessory ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content.

As illustrated, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in a low height area of the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs), but they may be composed of lamps (bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in input data at the timing of a clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signals, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12V) that is input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs it to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED forming the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light up the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) receives the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of base display 1317 becomes HIGH. Driven.

In addition, in order to light up the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) transfers the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 to the segment data (low when lit). ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the common anode type, current flows from driver 1 to driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V) when the segment is lit, and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

Note that latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as is to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and are connected to the data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from the terminal.

Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Furthermore, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since the common data and segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are generated in different processes within the timer interrupt process, and output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same program is executed. In order to prevent common signals from being transmitted at different timings, control data that is common to the two codes may be used to control the common signal transmission timings so that they do not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided, and for example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the value is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317. In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, the subroutines are called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram of an example in which The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be explained below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 as segment data (LOW when lit). Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by using a common driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board that has patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if it is possible to physically arrange components on the main control board 1310, which is composed of a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board is forced to be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) takes in common data (during driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. The 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit on the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. Latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 lights up.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described process, and outputs the digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, output the segment data in a time-sharing manner, and use the common common data to connect the base display 1317 and the function The LED elements of the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIG. 93(B) and FIG. 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (e.g. Components can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310, where it is impossible to use a multilayer board or place components close to each other.

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 using common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are 1317, the segment data is output at different timings. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display 1317. becomes longer. This is by increasing the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility from being directly illuminated by hall lighting. This is to prevent it. Furthermore, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, which is darker than the front side, even if the LED emits light at low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is less affected. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a first LED and a second LED that are controlled by the main control MPU 1311, and the luminance of the first LED is set higher than the luminance of the second LED.

Note that, contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is outputted first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is outputted later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is changed to the display time of the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a provisional section display and a confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section under measurement is displayed. Specifically, the first two digits display "bA." to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the bottom two digits display the base value A being measured as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the provisional interval display, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (for example, with a cycle of 0.6 seconds). (The light repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is a predetermined number (for example, 6,000) or more, the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, "bb." is lit in the first two digits to indicate that base value B is displayed, and the bottom two digits are the base value of the previous interval (the lower part of the previous period). The base value B), which is a two-digit final value, is displayed as a two-digit percentage by lighting. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

Note that in the first section, since the previous section is a test section, no base value is measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinking in the first two digits, and "--" is blinking in the bottom two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) of fewer than 500 out balls from the initial power-on is treated as a test period and the base value is not calculated. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is fired a predetermined number of times after it is powered on for the first time, the ball launch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, and the base value will not be stable, making it impossible to measure a meaningful base value. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is made undefined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits and "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and in the confirmed section display, "bb." is displayed in the first two digits. , "--" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits on the base display 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. Note that the base value may also be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be left undefined.

Here, the first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on after completion of Pachinko machine 1, or the time immediately after the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). state. In addition, the power-on time generally used in this specification refers to a power-on time other than the initial power-on time.

Furthermore, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may blink at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

Note that when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (during jackpot, normal play, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section will start. , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out pitches in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the daily operation (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A round number such as 50,000 or 100,000 may be used.

Note that the configuration may be such that the number of out pitches in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (such as a DIP switch or a rotary switch) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out pitches in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if you change the settings of the switch, you can initialize the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) in the RAM 1312 and restart base value calculation from the test section, or restart from the beginning of the current section. good. Immediately after a pachinko machine is introduced as a new machine, it is often operated, so the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the operating period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means that can set the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation is set based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

In addition, as a confirmed interval display, an example will be explained in which the interval immediately before the provisional interval currently being measured is displayed, but the base value of multiple confirmed intervals (for example, the interval 1 to 3 intervals before) can be switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched in the order of provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → confirmed section 3 at predetermined intervals, the display can be changed by operating a separately provided display changeover switch: provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the confirmed interval display are not "bb." It would be good to display it differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or more immediately preceding sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. Furthermore, a display that allows distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and a measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a 7-segment LED with multiple digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and the - sign can also be displayed. Additionally, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the check code calculation for the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized are when the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18) and when the power outage flag is abnormal (step S20) where the power outage flag is not set. , a RAM abnormality in which the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (gaming work area and gaming stack area) The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each type of data (gaming control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, preventing erasure of the base calculation area 13128 by the operation of a game hall attendant, and hiding an abnormal base value. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111), and peripheral control board 1510 is executed (step S32), and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number updating processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), output ports are cleared, and operations of devices controlled by outputs from each port are stopped (step S44). Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 using the checksum calculation result. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the base calculation process, instead of during the main board side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be stored even when the power is cut off. can be maintained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. In addition, in a modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating that the backup has been successfully performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S56). S58), waits until recovery from power outage (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a part of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches.

The base value A storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the temporary section currently being measured. The base value B storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the interval immediately before the provisional interval. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. Note that the section counter is preferably controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, to not exceed 2. Specifically, in the test section, the section counter = 0, in the first section, the section counter = 1, and after the second section, the section counter = 2. Further, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so that it does not become larger than 255, and after the second section, the section counter becomes equal to or greater than 2.

The storage area for the total number of out pitches is composed of 2 bytes, and stores the total number of out pitches regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of pitches out is used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measurement. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with approximately one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out pitches. As mentioned above, the total number of out pitches is a storage area for counting all the number of out pitches for each section regardless of the game state, and the total number of out pitches in the above-mentioned example (the number of out pitches in the special prize) This is different from the total value since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability/non-time-saving number of out pitches consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of out pitches (the number of out pitches in game states other than the special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls in game states other than special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. Note that the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving winning pitches should be 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, they should be the same number of bytes. It is preferable to do so.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out pitches in one section.

Furthermore, when providing a main area and a backup area of the base calculation area 13128, storage areas with the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later using FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as mentioned above, the winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be performed. In addition, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out (for example, a magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, a vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or a radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value will be accurately calculated. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that this error has occurred, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that causes a game stop (e.g., magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not involve a game stop (e.g., prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) For failures that are not directly related to calculation (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that they are not errors (NO). In other words, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal conditions, but not to execute the base calculation process if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of out pitches (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. When out balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation is as explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out pitch is detected, the detected number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is an initial value of 0. It has become. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test period, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). Determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded can be made in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. When the game status is in the special prize mode, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot and the player can win many prize balls, but it does not include the opening and ending times of the jackpot game. You can. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state but does not become a time saving mode (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is not included in the special prize. The base value may be calculated using the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which base is being displayed.

A latent gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is not aware that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent gaming state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the slot is released during business hours. In some cases, a player may look at the base indicator 1317 and recognize that he is in a latent gaming state (ie, high probability). That is, when a hall employee takes care of a ball in the winning hole or sends a ball to the out hole with the slot open, the player can know the gaming status by seeing whether the base display changes. Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of a hall, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in low probability/non-time saving states, and if the base value is calculated including the latent gaming state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the business form of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding latent gaming states. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state. In other words, since the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state are different gaming states to begin with, depending on the operating format of the hall, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each gaming state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each gaming state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving out ball count since the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of out pitches received is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the special prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027 reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as step S8019.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of awarded balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or prize ball other than a special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving award balls is changed to a low-probability/non-time-saving out ball. A base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128) is a predetermined value of less than 500, and the section counter indicates that it is a test section; If the total number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if the test section is in progress and the timing is to end the test section, the process advances to step S8032 in order to transition from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this process, the test section is ended and the process moves to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out pitches is less than 52,000, the process advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128, and writes it into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As mentioned above, the interval counter is controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to be larger than 2, so if the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter does not The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process moves to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later using FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the final section display explained in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time period for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is the period of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low probability/non-time-short out pitches in each section is less than 6000. It is better to make the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same frequency, it will be difficult to tell whether the blinking display (i.e., whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6,000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the check code calculation process in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). In addition, if you want to use a fixed value without calculating the check code, it is recommended to use a multiple-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, such as A55AH (1010010101011010B)) ). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( (in real time), and it is possible to judge without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is the storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, so a check code is written at the end of each base calculation process. Even if calculated, there is little effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, when the base value of prize balls is calculated and displayed using the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing at which the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing at which the prize balls are paid out may differ. are different. In other words, there is a problem with the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, the upper tray is full, a failure of the payout number counting sensor installed in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) The base value is calculated and displayed even if the system is stopped (such as when the system is stopped).

Note that in the base calculation process described above, the base value was calculated using the number of out pitches detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process was called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval described above (the number of out pitches is 52,000) arrives during one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval should be calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt processing described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so when the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed, and when the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past confirmed section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the most recent confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low-probability/non-time-saving out pitch count is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). If the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6000, the number of active pitches (number of out pitches) after starting base value measurement in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is lit without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process advances to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined intervals, by switching the display contents on the base display 1317 using the display switching counter that is updated regularly, the current The base value A currently being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the base value is displayed blinking in the range where it is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display on the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that the base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. Note that in FIG. 108, the steps up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be explained, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processes (from step S8014) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal or not every timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be explained. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations regarding which processing (timing) to perform this normality/abnormality determination step and check code calculation step.
- Figures 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
・Figures 21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
- Figures 106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case in which the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described using FIGS. 101 and 106.

If the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106), the base calculation area 13128 A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to base value calculation is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and base value calculation starts from the test period.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining a check code calculated at power-off at power-on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) using the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be explained using FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

Note that when a fixed value is used for the check code instead of a checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Furthermore, the determination may be made using both a checksum and a fixed value as the check code.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and then a predetermined number of variable display games are completed, the time saving state is completed, and the normal state is returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball enters the opening opening 2004.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning of the starting hole 2004. That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to any winnings in the starting opening 2004 shown in the figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, so the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time-saving out ball count. The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability/non-time-shortened out pitches.

In the above, the explanation was given regarding the end of the time saving state, but the same applies to the end of the probability change due to ST.

In addition to when the above-mentioned time saving state ends, a similar phenomenon occurs when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol variation display game. It is assumed that in a normal state, one game ball wins while a starting hole 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a jackpot state starts after that, and further a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole 2004 while it is open.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time-shortened out pitches.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. Assume that under normal conditions, one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and then a game ball enters the winning starting port 2004 while it is open. . As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that prevents accurate calculation of the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since out balls in which a specific error has occurred are not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is are not added to the number of low-probability/non-time-short out pitches.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, under specific conditions (such as when the time shortening ends, when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol variation display game, when a specific error occurs, etc.), a plurality of game balls that have won a prize while the electric accessory is activated There are cases in which it is used for calculating the base value and cases in which it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the special drawing can start to fluctuate in any winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the pre-read performance of the special symbol variation display game that is on hold, the first prize entered into the starting opening 2004 in the time-saving state is not subject to the pre-read performance, and is not performed in the normal state. The second prize that has been won may be the subject of a look-ahead presentation. On the contrary, the first prize won in the starting slot 2004 in a time-saving state may be subject to the pre-read effect, and the second prize won in the normal state may not be subject to the pre-read effect.

Note that although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be explained.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is generally configured as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 as storage areas for storing data. The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes the program (for example, a flag representing the state of the calculation result, the execution state of the program, data input/output to the CPU 13111, etc.). The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, random numbers updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and intermediate values in the random number update calculation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the CPU internal auxiliary storage unit 13142, so that the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of a signal input from a switch, or detection results of edge information) can be temporarily stored. Store in.

In addition, when acquiring a random number at the time of winning a starting prize and storing it in the reserved storage area, the random number is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage section 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. to be memorized. In addition, when acquiring the random number at the time of winning the starting slot and performing a look-ahead determination (judgment of winning or losing at the time of winning the starting slot) based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the prefetch determination may be performed by reading out (again) the random numerical value stored in the reserved storage area into any storage area of the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142.

The CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 is configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313, and is provided separately from the memory space specified by the address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The intra-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 includes a switching section 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of multiple storage areas (Area 0 to 6) of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is created for each predetermined number of storage areas (7 in the figure). are configured, and access from the processor core 13141 is possible for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can only access the auxiliary storage area 13145A, and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

The selection of this auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group at once with a single CHANGE command, as will be described later. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0, and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but any number of groups may be used as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage areas (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are storage areas provided separately from the RAM 1312 to temporarily store data during program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. It is also possible to use a plurality of bits as a set (for example, a set of Area 0 and Area 1, 2 bytes = 16 bits). Therefore, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating surplus capacity in the storage area. Furthermore, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area that is used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by dividing it into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured with storage areas of multiple capacities, and storage areas that can be used in arbitrary combinations are provided, so the storage area can be used selectively depending on the purpose of calculation processing (for example, data length). be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, an address can be specified in one (or a combined set) of storage areas. Therefore, the number of command arguments can be reduced, and the command can be executed with a reduced number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the storage area group that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area that stores data for determining an accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between 4 areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching command will be executed again) and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) representing the state of the calculation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. Base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction causes the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be used in the base calculation process of the call destination from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller. Switch to group 1. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Furthermore, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312, and saves the stack pointer value. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1, which is used in the call destination's base calculation process, to group 0, which is used in the call source's timer interrupt process, and then the RET instruction is used to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the call source's timer interrupt process. return. Generally, an instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction to restore data saved to the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from base calculation processing to timer interrupt processing, By returning the data saved to the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

In this way, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that interrupts may be prohibited using the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled using the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above example, the switching register 13144 was saved in the caller's timer interrupt process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 and stack area were switched in the callee's base calculation process. These processes may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves outside the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the caller's timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. By using an interrupt between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during that time.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the calling source to group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the called destination. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312 using the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is evacuate. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1 used in the base calculation process of the call destination to group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source, and the POP instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 used in the call source timer interrupt process. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process was called by the return of the switching register 13144, so there is no need to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched using the CHANGE instruction.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, as described above, interrupts may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and interrupts may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example has been described in which the timer interrupt processing, the base calculation processing, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 are switched, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may also be switched in the inspection processing executed by the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing using a CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In addition, initialization processing (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21) , timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.), and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed within the gaming control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and processing executed outside the gaming control area (for example, debugging) The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched between processes executed in the inspection function area, base calculation area, etc. (for example, debugging processing, base calculation processing, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 can be used inside and outside the game control area. Good too.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 will be used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing, but since the main control side main processing that is being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started, the timer interrupt At the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the gaming control stack area 13137, and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, if data is saved to the stack area one unit (byte or word) at a time, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. In addition, in this case, if the order of processing for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area is incorrect, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and restore all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area at once, The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved to the stack area, there is a possibility that the stack area will overflow and data outside the area scheduled as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. be. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, there is also an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area. , an instruction may be provided and executed to collectively restore a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area.

In this way, when moving to a process outside the gaming control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to a process within the gaming control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so the data is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. Processing can proceed without saving the data to the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to processing within the gaming control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

In addition, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing within the gaming control area is , Processing inside and outside the gaming control area can be completely separated without being updated in processing outside the gaming control area.

Also, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, the saved value is used for switching. Since it is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the process outside the game control area, and the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. The memory arrangement shown in FIG. 113 shows a stack area in the RAM 1312 that is omitted from the memory arrangement described above in FIG. 26, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also includes a stack area.

The ROM 1313 stores game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. Contains storage space. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) is allocated to store programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. It is preferable that the predetermined length be 16 bytes or more because the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. Note that the value stored in the free area is preferably the same fixed value, and is set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area, or a value with a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debugging (inspection function) area, and base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the gaming control area and other areas, we can reduce the amount of data in the debugging area (debugging (inspection function) code, debugging (inspection function) data) that is not directly related to controlling the progress of the game. ) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area to prevent problems (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 from affecting the game control. Avoiding risks that could have an impact.

Note that the debugging (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 in addition to game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. is configured so that it can be executed, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be done separately, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models, regardless of the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and it is possible to read and write data from the game control area 13126. In addition, although data cannot be written to the game control area 13126 from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, read access is possible. - The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debugging area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area where data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving data stored in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113(B) is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the base calculation results are stored, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (see Figure 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the base calculation/display process, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display process. It is sufficient if the entire main area or only the updated value area is copied to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

[11. Recording of gaming history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a performance that matches the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of prepared performances, and displays the determined performance on the main liquid crystal display. Display on device 1600. At this time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect among the plurality of prepared effects (for example, two types of specific effects among the three types of super reach), the peripheral control unit 1511 starts from the switching of the gaming state. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays information on how many times the special symbol variation display game has been played and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, in what rotation the effect has appeared) along with the progress of the game. to be displayed.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appeared at the 34th spin at 10:25, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and at the 127th spin at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and Super Reach 2 appeared at the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a sure-fire jackpot. The following message is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, a jackpot on the 15th spin and a jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed on the data display installed in the hall, but the specific performance that appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is doing well or not based on the extent to which a particular effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, they think that they will win the jackpot in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the performance is displayed in a visible manner. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared, the player can It takes time to confirm the extent of the appearance of the problem, and the operation of the game machine may decrease. For this reason, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each performance may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information on the effect that has appeared based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required for a limited specific effect to appear is added and displayed, instead of all the effects that have appeared. All you have to do is process it.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 that is in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees of the hall. The form of this notification is to display the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or to display the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to determine the cause of the error. , outputs an alarm sound, or outputs an error signal shown in FIG. 116 from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if there is a poor connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the middle right of the door is Lights up in blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as minor malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnected connectors), severe malfunctions that require parts replacement, and fraudulent acts.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decline in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know detailed information about the error that has occurred, it can quickly resolve the error and shorten the time during which the Pachinko machine 1 stops operating.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use the following information: Game history information such as "number" is required. If there is a malfunction in Pachinko machine 1, it is not a big problem as it can be resolved by repair or replacing parts, but if game balls are acquired through fraudulent acts, chances for normal players to earn profits will be reduced, and the This may interfere with the operations of the hall, and ultimately, the hall may find itself in financial difficulties.

If such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 will increase, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 will increase. Furthermore, since events such as "winning in the general prize opening", "winning in the grand prize opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbols change" occur frequently, when all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the information, which increases the burden on halls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes the stored data referable later. This makes it possible to check the details of the circumstances leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the occurrence times of events that occurred in the process leading up to the occurrence of these errors (number of wins in the general winning opening, number of winnings in the big winning opening, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol changes, etc.) are recorded, so you can find out how much time has passed. You can see how many events have occurred. For example, abnormalities such as the number of winnings in the general winning slot being 50 per minute can be detected.

Note that recording the date and time of occurrence for each event increases the amount of data used to find the cause of error occurrence, and it takes time to find the cause of error occurrence. Therefore, if a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, it is possible to enter the general winning slot in any gaming state, so if there are more than a predetermined number of wins in a predetermined time, it would be a good idea to output error information and notify you, but it is possible to enter the big winning slot only during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of jackpots are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, a peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 includes a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, if the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of occurrence of an event, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 122. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in order to retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and has low power consumption.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing game history recording processing at an early stage of peripheral control unit steady processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if processing related to game control is stopped midway and some performances are not executed. In other words, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the results of the lottery that have already been conducted on the main control board 1310 will not change, and the benefits given to the player will also change. Since there is no such thing, gaming history is recorded with priority over performance. Furthermore, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared among multiple types of pachinko machines.

Next, a process will be described when the memory capacity of recorded game history reaches the upper limit. If the amount of data of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not need to be updated. In other words, the information stored in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, a game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, there is no need to check the free space of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing by the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes. Control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and the free processing time can be used to start new processing (for example, processing that is executed across multiple peripheral control unit steady processes due to lack of processing time). Alternatively, a process that does not need to be executed every time and is executed once every several peripheral control unit steady processes (for example, a process for switching the selection table) may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands to be recorded as the game history among the commands that the peripheral control unit 1511 receives from the main control board 1310, that is, the events to be recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation conditions of the commands and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the winning of a game ball to the starting port 2002 and starting port 2004 is detected, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering each starting port. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbols start changing, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2. Can count the number of changes.

Further, a power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain a ram clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of variation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the time the special symbol starts to fluctuate. There are four states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving.Changes in state can be obtained and the state starts in each state. The number of fluctuations that occurred can be counted. Here, low probability is a state in which the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is the normal probability, and high probability is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is a state where the probability of a jackpot is derived is the normal probability. This is a state in which the probability that is derived is higher than normal. Time saving means that the probability that the second starting port door member 2549 will be in the open (or enlarged) state is higher than that of non-time saving, or the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to when it is fixed. This is a state in which the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state more frequently than in a non-time saving state, such as when the time is shortened. Accordingly, the probability that a performance with a short time for one special symbol variation display game will be selected increases.

The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the great winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 and the grand prize opening 2006, respectively. The command is sent, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

Big winning opening 1 winning command (below the stipulated prize) and Big winning opening 2 winning command (below the stipulating winning) command is for the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, where only the specified number of game balls can be won by the end of the round. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The big winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulating winning) are used when a game ball exceeding the specified number wins in the big winning opening 2005 and big winning opening 2006, respectively. When the opening is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winnings in one round for each big winning opening. Note that this command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each grand prize opening 2005, 2006, when a specified number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) determined in one round are detected and the grand prize opening is When the game ball is closed, there is a possibility that an undetected game ball is present in the grand prize opening, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even in such a case of over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of jackpots. The transfer destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

The small win OP command is used when the big prize opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple openings is less than 1.8 seconds). When there is a hit in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (a so-called small win), a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the normal symbol and count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The common figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a player enters the starting gate or passes through the gate (for example, due to overflow or no memory), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the starting gate 1 prize. Send the time command, starting gate 2 winning command, and common gate passage command. Therefore, the peripheral control section 1511 can count the number of winning balls that enter the starting port and the number of balls that pass through the gate section.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain the timing of error occurrence and count the number of errors.

The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command are commands that are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters each general winning hole 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001. In addition, it is preferable that the general winning hole winning commands are determined by the number of general winning holes 2001 provided in the gaming area 5a, and the case where three general winning holes 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning holes 2001, so four types of general winning holes can be entered, from the general winning hole 1 winning command to the general winning hole 4 winning command. Commands are defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of event occurrence time. The event occurrence date and time may be recorded as the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, or the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the occurrence of the event may be recorded to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded down to the second.

By analyzing the gaming history in the format shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know details of events that occur in connection with commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in gaming status, results of variable display games, etc.) . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the contents of the command indicate that the RAM was cleared and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. In other words, the hall opened for business at 3:30 p.m., the Pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the player started playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and won a prize in General Winning Port 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol fluctuation start event You can see the results of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game was started based on the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result. Although the results of the special symbol fluctuation display games are not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol fluctuation display game is determined based on the numerical value indicating the result of the fluctuation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. The results of the variable display game (loss, normal 4th round, high probability 4th round, high probability 16th round, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hole to refer to the information (gaming history) recorded in the memory will be explained.

First, a history output interface 1590 is provided to output information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, upon receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1, and upon receiving a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured with a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control section 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control section 1511. The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (eg, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history may be a history reference command exclusively for outputting the game history, or a command that is not sent when the pachinko machine 1 is playing a normal game after being powered on (Fig. 121 The history reference command may be a command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (not defined in ). The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even if a command is sent during a normal game, a history reference command may be sent under conditions of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, if 50 prizes are won in the starting slot or the general winning slot in one minute. Furthermore, the game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that is normally impossible.

Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (in a place that cannot be seen by the player) to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs production control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also communicates control commands and various information (various data) with the production display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that controls the drawings of the peripheral control unit 1511 that communicates with the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc.) and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special performance flags). a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control information (such as information for managing the peripherals), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (in the case of a long-term power outage), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power through an electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. It becomes impossible to do so and loses its content.

In addition, power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 that is different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is supplied with power by the backup power source 1513, and is configured so that the stored contents can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured with a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of retaining data in at least a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for a period of several weeks to about one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a separate package from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured together with the peripheral control MPU in the package of the peripheral control CPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has an area for storing game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the gaming history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. It will be done.

When operating the RAM clear switch to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (area for performance control) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data in the area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which constitutes an area for storing game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 and a game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably configured to be physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured with a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which no power is supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 124(A) and 124(B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be initialized using any method that is different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored gaming state information and the gaming history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if you turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch, and if you continue to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, both the stored gaming state information and gaming history will be initialized. may be converted into

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from a normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, the main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when power-on commands are received continuously, the gaming history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing a means for initializing the data in the gaming history storage area in this manner, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is performed.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door-side motor drive data is sent from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and is used to drive frame decoration to output drive signals to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. Sends data from the serial I/O port for the amplifier board motor to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board from the serial I/O port for the LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 provided in the production operation unit 220 is also transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As explained above, in the game machine of this embodiment, events that occur during a game are recorded as a game history according to commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Events can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall has closed) to understand the performance and malfunctions of gaming machines. Furthermore, since the gaming history is stored in a non-volatile memory (SRAM to which backup power is input), the gaming history can be checked even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc. For example, if you win the starting slot 1, you will need to know (1) the fact that you won the starting slot 1, (2) the time you won the starting slot 1, and (3) the events that occurred before you won the starting slot 1. As such, more information is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This means that when a prize is won in the starting slot, the minimum necessary information ((1) information indicating the fact that the winning opening was won in the starting slot) is output from the external terminal board 784, and in special cases (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when the player investigates the information stored in the pachinko machine 1. This is because if all the information stored internally is output from the external terminal board 784 when a prize is won in the starting slot, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will increase, which may put a burden on the hall. It is. In other words, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. The information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked in special cases by outputting it to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

[11-2. Compact proposal 1]
Next, a modification of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. Note that some of the modified examples described below partially change the embodiment described above, and form a part of the embodiment.

In the embodiment described above, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time of event occurrence were recorded for a predetermined command among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. For this reason, in modification 1 (compact plan 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of modification 1, commands to be recorded as the game history are defined separately into commands for counting and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which attributes of both are set are defined. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for the convenience of explanation; if the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and creates a record for counting the number of events. Add.

For example, the power-on command, the status command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands that are issued depending on the state change. It can be grasped as a change in state such as the start of a jackpot state, the end of a jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using a counting command, the number of events that triggered the issuing of the counting command is counted. Specifically, with the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command, the number of winning balls to each starting opening can be counted. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of changes in each special symbol. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the grand winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls into each grand prize opening. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified number of prizes) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified number of winnings) can count the number of rounds that ended with the specified number of winnings or less. The big prize opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) can count the number of rounds that have ended in excess of the stipulated number of winnings (that is, over-winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small wins. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The general game gate passage command can obtain the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1.

The game history of modification 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. This includes the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of the event (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time point at which the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The counting events are recorded separately in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/no time saving state, high probability/non time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The status may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, the counting events include the number of winnings in starting opening 1, the number of winnings in starting opening 2, the number of changes in special symbol 1, the number of changes in special symbol 2, the number of wins in general winning opening 1, the number of winnings in general winning opening 2, The number of wins in the general winning hole 3, the number of wins in the big winning hole 1, the number of wins in the big winning hole 2, the number of gate passes, and the number of normal symbol changes are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of winnings from general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

Further, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. The counting event after the state change is then recorded in a new record.

Note that the counting results of the counting events in the current state are preferably recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state changes. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, but a new record may be created at the start of a period in which counting events are counted. In this case, even if no data is stored in the created new record while the counting event is being counted, 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting results of counting events for the relevant period are stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is stored. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, if the number of counting events detected during the relevant state (from the previous state change event to the relevant state change event) is recorded as the game history, the counted value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in history storage area.

That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up in the event of a power outage. , will be initialized by a normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability/non-time-saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings in starting port 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of modification 1. In No. 1, after the gaming state changes, it is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, unless the gaming state changes, no gaming history is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM is cleared while the probability is low and the time is not saved, the number of winnings of 50 will be initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the counted value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Furthermore, even if the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, it is not necessary to continue recording the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and store the cumulative number of counted events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. can. Furthermore, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As explained above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is characterized in that more information is recorded internally than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is Information (gaming history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state where no new record is created in the gaming history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to discover the fraud. As mentioned above, in order to analyze the information (gaming history) written in the memory, the hall can check the information written in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of modification example 1, Since information is not written to the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the gaming state changes, the current state information (gaming history) cannot be confirmed even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Even in such cases, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, a first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the gaming history of the most recent state is recorded and a second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the gaming history of the current state is recorded. If the comparison result satisfies a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the game ball is fired in a rolling manner on the right side of the gaming area 5a in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, there is a transition from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to the high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state changes, the player is usually hitting the right hand, so the possibility of winning in the general prize opening on the left side of the game area 5a is low. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. It is preferable that the allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls entered into the general winning hole between states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error is reported. This is because if the player takes his hand off the shooting handle, the shooting force may become uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from an external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects errors by predicting the game based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is likely to hit right because it is in a high probability/time saving state), so inexperienced players can There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you hit the ball in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact proposal 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the number of counting events in each state during the switching is recorded. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state that repeatedly occurs. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of a state event history and the cumulative number of each counted event for each state. The state event history includes a state change event that triggered a state change of the pachinko machine 1, a state after the state change event, and a time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. Ru. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 include the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command).

Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in nonvolatile memory, and the counting event described above is performed in accordance with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

[11-4. Compact proposal 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded as a state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counted events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hole to estimate the number of occurrences of an event (for example, the number of jackpots, etc.) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they can be further subdivided. Counting events may also be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the counting events described above is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

As explained above, in Modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is recorded once in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing it in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal RAM clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Let me briefly touch on hall operations here. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening time is 10:00 and closing time is 23:00. Therefore, during times when there are many players, such as when the store has just opened or in the evening, it may be difficult for store staff to monitor whether the players are playing illegally. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high probability/time saving state just before closing time, the pachinko machine with a high probability/time saving state is initialized in preparation for the next day's operation, and the pachinko machine with a low probability/time saving state is It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines that are in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it can be seen whether the most recent games have been fraudulent. In other words, considering the fact that there are some pachinko machines that do not require the most recent gaming history, it is possible to provide a more efficient gaming machine by allowing the clerk to select whether or not to leave the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by performing a ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for events that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The gaming history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only has to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of events recorded in the work area, The clerk only needs to perform the ram clear operation. The reason why we decided to use the RAM clear operation to delete only the gaming history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, rather than erasing all the gaming history, is because the RAM clear operation does not erase all gaming history. This is because the store staff has not seen the events that have occurred up to that point (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, not only the information that a prize has been won in the starting hole is recorded, but also the winning in the general winning hole that is unrelated to the lottery is also recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( Even if the symbol (which starts to fluctuate when it enters the starting hole and shows the lottery result of winning or losing by the way this symbol stops) does not fluctuate, the game continues as long as the game ball is launched into the gaming area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in response to a winning or losing lottery, but is a process that may be executed at all times while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in a low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the starting hole 2002 like a so-called left-handed hit or a short hit. In such a case, a moderate amount of prizes should be won in the starting hole 2002 and the general winning hole 2001. However, there are cases where there are no (or very few) winnings in the general winning hole 2001 but many game balls are winning in the starting hole 2002, or conversely, there are no (or very few) winnings in the starting hole 2002. ), but if many game balls are won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole where game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning hole is a predetermined multiplier of the number of winnings in the second winning hole. An error may be reported when the limit exceeds the limit.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error will be detected if an inexperienced player plays in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated over a plurality of games is collected as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, so if you record every single game (one change), you won't be able to record many games (for a long time). There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function for changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section as seen from the back side with the door open. 130 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 viewed from the back side with the door closed, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting section of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting key 971 for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The settings board 970 functions as a settings change operation unit that accepts settings change operations.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952. The finalized settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. Note that, as described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is used to change to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contacts. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. Note that instead of providing the setting key 971, another switch may be used. In this case, by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is activated during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. You may exit the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode by pressing and holding the button for a long time.

Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages; in the neutral position (normal position), the key can be inserted and removed; turning it to the left is the operation to start the setting change mode; turning it to the right is the operation to set the setting This is an operation for selecting a value (when turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation that can hold the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation that does not hold the right position (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the proportion of variable jackpots, the proportion of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time saving times, the number of rounds and counts of jackpots, the probability of winning a regular pattern, the general prize opening, starting opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as to avoid operating both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary type toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, the operation of the ball lending button, etc. The selected settings may be confirmed by operating the return button, detecting winning of game balls into the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including a setting key) in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set it up.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only with the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch can be used. 954 for a predetermined time or longer (long press), the set value can be determined. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is finalized.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type display by a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error, but this error type display and the setting display 974 are also used, The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 alongside the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and power switch 932, which are operated when changing settings, are placed close together, making it easier to change settings. can be improved.

Further, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

In still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on either the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, on the frame side, not on the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, obstructs insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change settings by making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation section). It functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the board 970, it is possible to prevent players from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The setting change difficulty device configured by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971, which is the trigger for starting the setting change mode, with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case includes a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and each switch 972, 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid body that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body is provided on the outer frame 2 to cover various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started due to careless operations, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent actions by unauthorized players who change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

It is preferable to arrange the setting board 970 near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing settings and the power switch 932 are arranged close to each other. In this way, the operability when starting the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

FIG. 132(B) is a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, causing the setting key 971 to Key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It has become difficult to check the current settings of a pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970.

In this modification, as in the above-described example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4, not on the side side, so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, and the side surface (i.e., the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is located in the right frame member 40. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modification of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modification, a setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modification, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from behind, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132(A) or the one shown in FIG. 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operating state of each switch. controls the display on the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as in the embodiments described above, and common explanations will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. The base display 1317 normally displays the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the confirmed section (straight section) while switching at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, four digits are used to display the base value, but only one predetermined digit (eg, the rightmost digit) may be used to display the set value, and "-" may be displayed. Digits that are not used in displaying set values may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used in displaying base values. Furthermore, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting values are displayed in six alphabetical stages: A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value be displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and that the set value that has been determined may be displayed lit. In addition, it is preferable to display the current set value by lighting it up. Furthermore, in the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numbers are displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. Note that if the base display 1317 and setting display 974 are used together, the setting value will be displayed with priority during setting change mode and setting confirmation, so even though the base value is being calculated, the base value will not be displayed. Not done. Thereafter, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

In addition, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display contents are output to the base display 1317. The output processing is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, the process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided within the game control area. By sharing processing, the program capacity can be reduced and memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation and display outside the game control area. When executed with code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, improving security.

Further, settings change and setting confirmation processing may be executed outside the game control area.

In other words, even if the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is used also as the base display 1317, both cases fall within the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 in a way that is not confusing during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

Further, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off or turned on completely while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value. By not displaying multiple displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may include a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction, differs depending on the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted perpendicularly into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated perpendicularly to the setting board 970 between the front and back sides of the setting board 970, or the main control board box 1320 is separated into a front side box ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be structured so that they can be opened and closed using a hinge on one side. On the other hand, when inserting the key 975 from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is inserted in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends by using the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which the key 975 is slid and separated in the direction in which the key 975 is inserted.

In this modification, operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and The switch is difficult to operate. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). Fraudulent acts such as changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that setting change processing is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the setting value data and the gaming state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, prize balls) (information related to) is left, other data is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power outage flag. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that has not been executed (step S20), a RAM abnormality in which the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power failure flag error or RAM error, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area is cleared. Area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is recommended to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate will be described.

When the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. These conditions may be determined by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(2) When the settings change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a settings change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of an accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the settings This is because it interferes with the modification work.

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means that determines whether the conditions for setting change are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. is displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. This setting change end command notifies the main control MPU 1311 of the finalized setting value.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In addition, in the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may also determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage However, a signal at an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, the main control unit 952 sends signals related to the operation of the setting key 971 using signals that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the board 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

Note that in the above, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the setting values, and the setting values are stored in the payout control unit 952. The set values may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch. Moreover, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of an accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the settings This is because it interferes with the modification work.

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, turning off or lighting up all the LEDs for displaying special symbols). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 performs a setting change that determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is finalized. It functions as a permissible state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 acquires the main body frame release switch detection signal from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. The settings change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change process described in FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, it is preferable to invalidate the setting change mode and temporarily stop the setting change mode. Then, by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value in a state where no setting value is selected = 0).

It is preferable to record a history of changes to set values a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the settings were finalized and the finalized setting values are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of setting values in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Furthermore, the recorded history of setting value changes can be output. For example, it is preferable to display a recorded history of setting value changes on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by performing a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out pitches in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, that section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to understand the transition of the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Furthermore, when the set value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditioner, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because in such a case, there is no need to change the interval for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Compared to turning on the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, considering the operation method and arrangement of the operating means, operating the setting key 971 is less likely to be accidentally operated, so starting the setting change mode This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and base value are cleared, so even if you wish to clear the RAM, it is considered that starting the setting change mode is sufficient. .

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without starting the setting change mode. This is because if both are being operated, it is considered that the operator wishes to at least clear the RAM. Further, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In clearing the RAM in steps (3) and (15) described above, the gaming state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of special symbols may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the starting slot, but since the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game, the conditions after changing the setting value are What is necessary is to judge the random value that has been held and stored. For this reason, a reserved memory of special symbols may be maintained.

Furthermore, in the RAM clearing of steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area that is erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clearing process during the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased (playing state data is also erased), but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. Normally, settings changes are made between the time the hall closes and the next day's opening, so data on gaming conditions (variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) will be erased. There is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
The details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be explained. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will also be collectively referred to as starting ports. In addition, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big winning hole. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of a game ball into the starting hole, that is, the starting prize is triggered (starting condition is met), and a jackpot is achieved for each starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether this random number for determining a jackpot matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery results, and if the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot judgment value (predetermined winning conditions are met), the normal To shift from a game state to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained along the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won in the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins in the grand prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a grand prize opening prize designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole is determined by checking the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Main control MPU1311, when the game ball wins in the starting hole (result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the starting hole winning process, you can set the starting hole winning command that is sent when a new game ball enters the starting hole, extract random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. and store them in a predetermined area, and create special symbols. It executes processing for executing a look-ahead effect.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable that specifies the type of branch process to be executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process moves to a branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the branch process that has been moved is finished, special symbols and special electric accessories are controlled. Finish the process. Note that the values of game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, so they are backed up in the main control side power-off processing.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, branch processes include special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol miss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), big winning opening opening process (step S142), big winning opening closing process (step S144) or the big winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B enters the starting hole, processing for starting variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, etc. is performed.

In the special symbol variation process (step S132), processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol, etc. is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting hole, it is determined whether the special symbol that has been fixed and stopped will generate a jackpot game state.

In the special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), when a jackpot game state is not to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the effect is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, processing is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol and notify that fact.

In the interval process before opening the jackpot opening (step S140), processing for generating a jackpot game state and notifying that the jackpot operation is started is performed. In the big winning hole opening process (step S142), processing related to the jackpot operation that makes it easy for game balls to enter each big winning hole by opening the big winning hole is performed.

In the big winning hole closing process (step S144), processing related to a jackpot operation that makes it difficult for game balls to enter each big winning hole by changing the big winning hole from an open state to a closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation has ended, a process is performed to notify that fact.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, and if the variable display is on hold, preparations are made to start the variable display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is pending (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol activated pending balls is not 0 or not. In addition, the number of special symbol activation reserved balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not pending (the result of step S420 is "no"), the process ends because the display of the variation of the special symbol is not started.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a command for designating the number of reserved balls as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol/flag setting processing (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on random numbers for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as a command value (step S452). Furthermore, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the fluctuation type type value is acquired from the fluctuation type type area (step S460), and the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is added to the command value set in the process of step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variable pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created through the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved pitch number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be explained. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol activation reserved balls (step S530). The number of special symbol activated pending balls is stored in the special symbol activated pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type type value acquired by the fluctuation type determination process is set (step S550).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time depending on the number of pseudo-runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information state table), loss (loss fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) depending on the gaming state etc. This is a data table in which table information for referring to a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a winning variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number 1 for variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won the jackpot or the small jackpot (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (step S350). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the loss fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved pitches (step S372). S376).

On the other hand, when generating a reach in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, a variation pattern selection value data table is obtained through the variation information number search process, and a variation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages using two types of random numbers: random number 1 for variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and random number 2 for variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ series reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation patterns. Furthermore, a variation pattern to be finally displayed in a variable manner (a value set in a variation pattern command) is selected from a group of variation patterns selected by random number 1 for variation patterns based on random number 2 for variation patterns. Note that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, but may be a method in which drawings are drawn in three or more stages, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one random number for variation patterns.

[12-3. [Explanation of effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the performance in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be explained. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls paid out for the number of special drawings. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability variable state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4:1/270 , setting 5:1/250, setting 6:1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest setting possible, the player's desire to play increases by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern using one random number for variation patterns in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 executes the following process in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether it is a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state) and the result of the special lottery (if you have won the jackpot) (or not) and select a variation pattern table depending on the result. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for a fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a failure, it is further determined whether a reach has occurred, obtaining a random number for a variation pattern, and distributing the obtained random number for a variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table. A variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table based on .

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding performance content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying variation patterns in the table. The variation time column stores information specifying the variation time in the corresponding variation pattern type. The corresponding performance content column stores information specifying the performance content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining fluctuation patterns stores the distribution by which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is a loss (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) is and when no reach occurs, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be explained. First, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be explained while also using FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the losing variation pattern 20, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a winning result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is a winning result. A confirmation display indicating that is the case is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then A setting suggestion performance is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In this way, in fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a failure, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that even if the temporary display is executed. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion performance to occur and maintain a sense of anticipation. In addition, when a setting suggestion performance occurs in a losing variation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result and further increase his sense of elation.

In addition, in the variation of the losing variation pattern 24, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although a fake performance suggesting execution is performed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion performance itself.

Note that SP reach is a reach effect that has a high probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a low probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high when SP reach is executed.

Hereinafter, effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically explained. In each production, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, movement of various movable bodies, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. You can.

In the out-of-reach variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the pre-reach performance is first performed. In the pre-reach performance, all decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the normal reach performance develops. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern is in the reach state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half performance of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and play a game of rock, paper, scissors. In the first half of the SP reach 1 performance in the losing variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be smaller and displayed at a position closer to the periphery of main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, compared to the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half performance of SP reach 1 develops. In the second half performance of SP Reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival performance is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half performance, the voice of the main character such as "Not yet!" is output from various speakers, and the main character's voice is output from various speakers. On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game is played again between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half performance of SP reach 1 in the losing variation patterns 24 to 29, a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner that appears to oscillate within a small width.

Subsequently, in the losing variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a final display indicating that the special lottery result was a losing result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without any other effects being performed. In the losing variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion false effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the final display, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols as the combination displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In addition, in the tentative display and the final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance.

In the setting suggestion fake performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 24, for example, a performance is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but is unable to catch them. It is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion false effect is performed is equal or approximately equal for all settings, such as the distribution of the out-of-range variation patterns 24 in FIG. 144(A). This is because if the distribution is not equal, the false setting suggestion effect will suggest the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the outlying variation pattern 24 to the total distribution of variations in which SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, false setting suggestion performances will occur frequently when the SP reaches 1, and there is a risk that the player's expectations for the occurrence of setting suggestion performances may be diminished.

In the setting suggestion effect in the out-of-order variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and captures the enemy characters, and then the three characters play rock, paper, scissors. The performance will be executed.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 25, a performance is performed in which all three players play rock-paper-scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game and end up falling in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation pattern 25 is a performance that confirms a low setting.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 etc. in the high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If this occurs, there is a possibility that the player will stop playing the game early, so the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmed effects in other settings, or the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 25 itself may not exist.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game between three people, a performance is performed in which all three players take out the scissors and fall in love with each other. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the off-set variation pattern 26 is a performance that confirms the high setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 27, a performance is executed in which all three players make par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and the game ends in a match. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 27 is a performance that confirms the even number setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 28, a performance is performed in which all three players make different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people and the game ends in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 28 is a performance that confirms the odd number setting.

Note that, for example, when odd number settings and even number settings have different characteristics, by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the performance. .

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is highest in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The ratio of probability-variable jackpots among the jackpot wins is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. It is assumed that the probability of winning the jackpot and the variable probability ratio for each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the winning number of game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state, but the probability variation ratio is lower, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game from the first hit also tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to even number settings, odd number settings have a lower probability of winning the jackpot under normal conditions, but have a higher probability of winning. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game is likely to be large. In such a case, a situation may occur where one player prefers the ball output tendency with an even number setting and another player prefers the ball output tendency with an odd number setting, so the odd number setting confirmation performance or the even number setting confirmation Players' interest in the performance increases. Furthermore, compared to odd number settings, even number settings may have a feature such as a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state, but a jackpot with a smaller number of rounds is more likely to be selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the presentation until the setting suggestion presentation is started is the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion presentation are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game between three people are different). Note that it is preferable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game presentation be used only in the losing variation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, when the three-player rock-paper-scissors competition performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion performance has started, and his sense of excitement is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect that confirms a high setting is executed, but it may also be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that a high setting is likely to be established is executed. Specifically, for example, if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 is present even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern 25 is is not an effect that confirms a high setting, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which a performance that confirms a high setting is performed, a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting as described above is likely to be performed may be determined. What has been described above also applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

Furthermore, according to the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 144(B) (the fluctuation pattern table during normal times and when winning a jackpot), if the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning fluctuation pattern other than the winning fluctuation pattern 34 in which the highest setting is determined is determined. The setting suggestion effect is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is a failure. As a result, the setting suggestion performance is mainly performed when the special lottery result is a loss, and even when the special lottery result is a loss, the player can feel a sense of anticipation.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening variation]
The deviation variation pattern 30 will be explained below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation whose variation time is short compared to other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern starts on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are completed without developing into a reach state. This is a variation in which the pattern stops. In a normal variation, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may stop at once.

Subsequently, in the losing fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is likely to be a loser, a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a loser. Descriptions of the tentative display and final display are the same as those described above, and will therefore be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which shortening variations such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 are executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the out-of-line variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which a shortening variation is executed and that suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns in which a shortening variation is executed (for example, (10% or less of the minimum allocation) is desirable. Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the final display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the losing variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortening variations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortening variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time like the variation patterns 1 and 2, which have many distributions, but when the variation variation pattern 30 is executed, the player assumes a variation time that is different from the expected variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the performance where the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when the player is out of reach, so when the shortening variation is executed, the player loses his or her expectations and loses interest in the shortening variation. I can't hold it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion performance using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is only selected when the player is out of reach, and this suppresses a decline in interest. can do.

Moreover, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is the same, only the shortening variation time is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the maximum setting confirmed performance.

Note that the deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed, but for each setting other than the maximum setting, there is also a variation in which the setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other outlier variation patterns in which shortening variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before provisional display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 147 as well. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. Special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, that is, it is an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are different from the losing variation patterns 25 to 30, etc. in that the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). Thereby, the player can feel a sense of excitement as he waits for notification of the jackpot lottery result with the highest setting determined. In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the settings of the Pachinko machine 1 are at their highest settings, and in turn, the players The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players, and it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to the other players that they are using the highest settings.

[12-7. Setting suggestion performance that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 will be explained with reference to FIG. 148 as well. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, for example, a special movie 2 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the losing variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win, and then a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win.

Therefore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the jackpot in the variation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is a failure after Special Movie 2 occurs, the high setting will be confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being a failure, and in turn, the high setting will be confirmed. You can feel a sense of elation as the result has been confirmed.

In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player may feel superior to other players, and furthermore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, If the special lottery result is a loss, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion performance in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the time saving state will be explained. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 in the case of a non-reaching deviation. Further, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the more likely it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the There is a risk that the number of game balls paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example in FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are distributed, making it difficult to equalize the number of game balls paid out by jackpot per unit time in each setting. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of outlier fluctuation pattern 3, which has a longer fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including shortening fluctuations, so that outlier fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern that suggests a high setting. I can do it.

Similarly, when there is a reach and a miss, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the miss variation pattern 11 with a long variation time becomes, and the smaller the distribution of the miss variation pattern 12 with a short variation time. Similarly, when winning a jackpot, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the winning variation pattern 2 with a longer variation time is, and the smaller the distribution of the winning variation pattern 3 with a shorter variation time.

As mentioned above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting is, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the greater the number of game balls fired until the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with longer fluctuation times, and the lower the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, if a player stops firing a game ball during fluctuation, each It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the settings.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which a setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emitting effect may be exclusive ones that are executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. In addition, particularly in a setting suggestion performance in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect or a predetermined light emitting performance be performed only in the setting suggestion performance.

Note that it is desirable that the distribution of a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting or a maximum setting is determined or is likely to be performed is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, even if the player has only been playing for a short time, if the high setting suggestion performance or the highest setting suggestion performance is not executed, the player will lose expectations and may end up stopping the game early. This is because there is a risk of cancellation.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which a performance indicating that a low setting or minimum setting is fixed or highly likely is executed is extremely low compared to distribution of other variation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion performance and the minimum setting suggestion performance will be executed frequently, and there is a risk that the player will lose his sense of expectation and eventually stop playing the game at an early stage.

Moreover, although the setting suggestion performance that suggests groups of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting groups in the setting suggestion performance are not limited to these. A setting suggestion performance may be performed for an arbitrary group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above explanation, the setting board 970 was connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquired the operation status of each switch and controlled the display on the setting display 974. The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation status of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

FIG. 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A). In the example shown in FIG. 150(B), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to a main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. Note that, as will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

Setting board 970 is provided close to main control board 1310, and setting board 970 and main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying settings or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out the authentication code set on the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 will not be able to start playing. That is, although it is possible to shoot game balls toward the game area 5a, the prize balls are not paid out even if they enter the winning slot, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each model of pachinko machine, or a serial number may be set for each pachinko machine. The authentication code can be set using, for example, a DIP switch provided on the setting board 970, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a pattern short-circuit, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent incorrect mounting of the setting board 970 into the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 150(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A).

As mentioned above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a gaming performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding prize balls won by a player, such as jackpot probability in a special symbol variable display game, and the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, there are some halls where a conventional pachinko machine without a setting function is sufficient and the setting function is not necessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers need to design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a need for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have a setting function, a dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same way as when the setting board 970 is mounted. Make it. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that does have a setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on the setting board 970, such as the setting keys 971 and the setting display 974, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed circuit board, but may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Furthermore, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or grounded on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. The setting function is provided by providing a small door on the main control board box 1320 that can be moved to close the hole 971A so that it can be operated from inside the main control board box 1320 but cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Note that an authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in a dummy board 979, which will be described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not require setting an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), press the pachinko machine. Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The implementation example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the implementation example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided in the small door 1321, and by inserting a key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed, allowing settings to be made. The mode switch 976 can now be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the lock 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the lock 1323 is inserted into the catch 1324, and the lock 1323 and the catch 1324 are are engaged, and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bolt 1323 retreats from the maximum protrusion position and the engagement between the bolt 1323 and the catch seat 1324 is released. , the small door 1321 can be opened about the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is released from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 closes and fixes the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. Setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 includes a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. [Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (step S17, step S30). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

Note that it is preferable that the RAM clear switch 954 is detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result is stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value is determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, this is a normal RAM clear operation, and the process advances to step S30, where a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on with both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since the operation of two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 into setting change mode during a game, and it is possible for fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified if the setting change mode is entered during business hours because of the nature of the change.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the settings change mode, or output from the start to the end of the settings change mode, or from the start of the settings change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the settings change mode. You can also output it. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it into the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured as a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned once to the right, the setting value is changed by one step. The main control MPU 1311 then generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Thereafter, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be ended by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the process described above, the process proceeds to step S30 after the setting change mode ends or if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), and the power outage flag is not set and the power outage flag is checked. If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. Note that if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process advances to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, setting value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and gaming state (for example, probability variable state, The data regarding the time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, and information regarding prize balls) are left, other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. Note that the gaming state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and a setting change operation is further detected.

Further, if no operation of the setting key 971 is detected in step S17, in step S30, the setting value data and base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128 ) is left and the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Further, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and performs a check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cut. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up the data in the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases in which at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the case that the power outage flag is initialized. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that is not set (step S20), an abnormality in the RAM where the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (Figures 155 and 156). May be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and confirmation of setting values due to careless operations while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation can be prevented.

In this case, apart from the setting key 971, an operation section (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the settings is provided (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of an operation section for confirming the settings), and when the power is turned on, When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data to be displayed on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It's good to do that. In this case as well, it is preferable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (the setting change mode ends). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 performs control so as to remember that the RAM clearing process is to be executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above, and next, clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be explained.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may also be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Furthermore, whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by operation. For example, if you turn on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will be cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, but the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operating method, it is possible to clear a part of the main control RAM 1312 and execute processing that does not clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952.

In addition, when clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing when the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the timing when the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. This may occur. That is, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), although the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, a state may occur where the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310 but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 or the power supply board 931, it is possible to change the setting value while operating the RAM clear switch 954. It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM in response to a RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 clears the RAM. It is determined whether the operation is being performed, and it is determined whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is to be cleared. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being compatible with various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. [Details of settings confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 and FIG. 104 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates a base value (step S801; see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying setting values indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, a hall employee performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using FIG. 156.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to its normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting It is better not to display it. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the settings.

The setting values may be displayed at any time while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Further, a setting display condition may be provided that allows display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on (or the CPU initialization in step S28), and to enable display of the set value until the timer times out.

Furthermore, a setting display condition may be provided that allows the setting value to be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided that allows the setting value to be displayed during periods other than during special symbol fluctuations and during jackpots. Note that the set value may not be displayed in game states other than those described above. In this case, if the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or jackpot game, the setting value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display conditions are met, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during play, and this can be a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, from the start to the end of the set value display, or from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display ends, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display conditions are met, but even if the setting display conditions are not met, a security signal may be sent if a setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

Thereafter, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974.

Note that if the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions will be checked until the setting display conditions are met, but there is a possibility that you will not be able to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be ended. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, if the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition will be satisfied with the end of the special symbol variation display. The setting value will be displayed. Further, if the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a gaming situation where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check changes in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal when changing settings or checking settings]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of security signals output in conjunction with setting changes and setting confirmations.

As described above, a security signal is output during setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(C). The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, but for a period from the start to end of setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) after the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 157(D). If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time after the error is detected, as shown in FIG. 157(E). That is, a security signal caused by setting confirmation and a security signal caused by error detection are output continuously for more than a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time from error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Note that during the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not detect errors, so the security signal caused by setting confirmation and the security signal caused by error detection do not overlap. That is, during the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal is extended.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation process]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above explanation, we have mainly explained an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process, but below, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1. An example will be explained below.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process moves to the setting confirmation process. The details of this process will be explained below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. The differences from FIG. 154 will be explained. If the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 moves to a setting confirmation process in step S807, and then moves to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be explained. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the set display conditions are satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display conditions are not satisfied (step S8062: No), it executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination in step S8071 again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time for the special symbol, etc. are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 in the on state), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the settings are set without turning the power off) After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation is restarted. At this time, for example, the effects that were being executed along with the special symbol change (effects using display devices, effects using lamps, sound effects using speakers, effects using movable objects, etc.) Nothing will be done after the fluctuation resumes.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. The performance that was being executed at the same time may be restarted. For example, the interrupted performance using the display device, lamps, and speakers may be resumed. In addition, for performances using movable bodies, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the performance pattern of the performance after the special symbol variation is restarted or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the performance pattern.

In other words, if the movable object moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it will be returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or the setting confirmation process is completed, and then If the determined performance includes a performance that causes the movable body to move (move), the movable body may be operated (moved). Note that if the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state while it is in motion (movement), the movement pattern for the motion (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to its initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated from the front.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. Among the performances that were being executed at the same time, the performances using display devices, performances using lamps, and sound performances using speakers are restarted, and the movable body is returned to the initial position after the special symbol variation is restarted or when the power is turned on. There is no need to return it or perform a performance using a movable body.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuations and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, the main liquid crystal display The variation of the decorative pattern displayed at 1600 may be restarted (resuming the performance originally scheduled to be performed), or the variation of the decorative pattern may be restarted until the pattern is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the pattern is confirmed). ) A high-speed fluctuation may be performed with the decorative pattern made transparent, or the decorative pattern may be hidden until the pattern is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the pattern is confirmed). Further, when a pattern is determined, for example, a combination of decorative patterns planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this case, at the end of the special symbol variation after restarting, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal special symbol variations may be selected. The combination (for example, "XXX", etc.) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuation, the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, and when the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is turned off. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is turned on normally) may be performed (for example, operations such as checking a predetermined operation of a movable body, a predetermined light emission of an LED, etc.). (The above-mentioned effects, etc. may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is resumed, the pre-read effect and the pre-read effect for the special symbol change that was suspended immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, a special stage that shows the player that there is a high expectation of a jackpot across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse performance described later to the horse racing performance) Developing zones (horse racing performances are special zones that have high expectations for themselves (for example, expectations are relatively higher than the dialogue performances described later))) are displayed on standby, and the special (Erase the display effect in the zone, or return the pending display to normal white if it is blue instead of normal white.) However, a pre-read effect may be executed for special symbol changes corresponding to winnings after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is restarted, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol fluctuation is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone that was displayed during the special symbol fluctuation that was being performed before the power was turned off) The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone can be erased, or if the pending display is, for example, blue instead of the usual white, it can be returned to the normal white), but the following The pre-reading effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (returning the erased display to its original state, or if the effect pattern was to promote the pre-reading effect at the start of the variation, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion). good). In this case, the pre-read performance to be executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted, for example, assuming that the pre-read production during the special symbol variation has not been stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-read performance that was scheduled to be performed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new pattern of pre-reading effect may be set, and the effect of the new pre-reading pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
An example of a process in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described below. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 under normal conditions are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively, and It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for Settings 1 to 6 are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. Further, it is assumed that the probability change ratio at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the explanation of FIG. 142, etc., an example was explained in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning/losing type of special lottery results, but in the example of FIG. is defined. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the performance of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation patterns of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning/losing type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach effect that has a high rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a very low rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a loss. It is. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high for the variation in which Movie Reach is executed. Furthermore, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" described in the summary column when the winning type is "miss" means that after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, the decorative symbol that fluctuates until the end is in the reach state. Indicates that the machine will stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol "7" enters the ready-to-win state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". A "+1 symbol" when the win/loss type is "Jackpot" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end passes one decorative symbol that is in the reach state and once stops. After that, the decorative pattern stops as the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after entering the reach state with the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that had been fluctuating until the end appears to have stopped once at "8", and then the decorative pattern stops at "7". and announce the jackpot.

In addition, in the summary column in the example of Figure 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "jackpot (non-probable variable)" among jackpots, but in the case of "jackpot (probable variable)" It may be selected only in the case of "Jackpot (non-probable variable)" and "Jackpot (probable variable)". Further, the "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the win/loss type is "lost".

Further, "+Pseudo 1" and "+Pseudo 2" written in the summary column indicate that two pseudo continuous performances and three pseudo continuous performances are executed, respectively. Pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . "Ending the variation of the decorative pattern" includes, for example, a mode in which part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative pattern has ended, and a mode in which the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, a pseudo-continuation pattern (a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation is determined if this pattern stops) stops in part. In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called a pseudo-continuous performance of N consecutive performances. (the following natural numbers) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, the player is given a hint that there is a possibility of performing the action again, but the action is actually executed again. A production that does not do this is called a ``pseudo-false production''. Furthermore, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous performance will also be simply referred to as a "pseudo-continuous performance."

A pseudo continuous performance occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. If it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous pattern on at least one of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "Continued!" as a pseudo-continuous pattern in a medium decorative pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, all of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are odd or even numbers and no reach occurs) may be used as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that the pseudo false effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal fluctuation" or the like. Furthermore, for example, even in a variation pattern in which "+pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo false effect suggesting the occurrence of a third pseudo series in "+pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final pending color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, a peripheral main control ROM. The final pending color table includes, for example, the display color of the pending display at the end of the variation (hereinafter referred to as the final pending color) for each variation pattern (the type of win or loss of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern). ) is maintained.

Note that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a pending display area that shows the number of pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command that designates the reservation number of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the reservation display area, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (the starting condition is met), the number of pendings (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number designation command increases. , one pending display is added and displayed in the pending display area. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display (starting conditions are met), the number of pending items (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number specification command decreases. , erases the pending display in the pending display area.

Note that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the plurality of display modes include a display mode of pending display using a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, and rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expectation of a jackpot for the special lottery result corresponding to the pending display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored pending display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Additionally, the peripheral control MPU responds to the pending display by, for example, changing the display mode of the pending display during the display period from when the pending display is displayed in the pending display area until the pending display is erased. It is possible to execute a pending notice performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in this embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed. Note that the hold change effect and the hold preview effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as the hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a suspension notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, for example, the reservation notice table defines the change timing of the display mode of the reservation display and the display format (display color) of the reservation display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final reservation color. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing.

Note that the display mode of the pending display at each change timing is preferably a pending color that has a jackpot expectation level that is lower than the jackpot expectation level of the final pending color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation level indicated by the pending display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue pending display does not change to the white pending display). It should be noted that a different reservation notice table may exist for each number of reservations stored at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, the start of a special symbol variation that was held before the relevant pending display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the pending display described above. , a timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

In addition, the pre-read effects including the pending pre-read effects are executed based on the pre-determination command sent from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. Ru.

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the first special symbol will be explained. Note that the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, so only the first special symbol will be described here. In the preliminary determination process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there will be a jackpot by comparing the preliminary determination table (not shown) with the special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuating random number. The type of jackpot, whether a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the jackpot is not achieved, or the mode type of the game performance to be executed are specified.

Then, the specified preliminary determination information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the type of game performance to be executed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the performance pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number. .

Then, by sending a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning occurred, a special symbol based on the starting winning that occurred is added. Whether or not the displayed result of the variable display is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game production to be performed before starting the variable display according to the starting prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern in setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in a similar case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in a similar case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation level. Also, the higher the setting, the higher the expectation level of jackpot for each color. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability for each setting mentioned above, and the final reserved color table in Figure 161 is used for all settings. It is assumed that there is.

Note that the peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same pending display, the selection rate of the final pending color table of the final pending color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. Thereby, for example, when the player wins a jackpot in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the player can feel a sense of exhilaration because the expectation level for a higher setting increases.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation level when the pending display mode is red is 50% in setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% in setting 6, which is a high setting). %). As a result, even if, for example, the player does not win the jackpot in the special symbol variation that corresponds to the red pending display, the level of expectation for the high setting will be high, suppressing the player's disappointment and encouraging him or her to continue playing. can be promoted.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the final pending color in the final pending color table is The selection rate may be set. This makes it difficult, for example, to estimate the setting from the combination of the final pending color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the anticipation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the pending display. Further, for example, if a jackpot is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possibility of a low setting increases.

[12-14-3. Preview production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a preview effect table. The preview presentation table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The preview performance table holds, for example, the selection rate of the preview performance for each variation pattern (specified by the win/loss type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the preview performances include a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance. The dialogue performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and says a dialogue in the variation. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes during the change. The rival horse performance is a performance in which a rival horse of the horse raised by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

Note that it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance using a preview performance, and the selection rate of each preview performance depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed is stored in the preview performance table. In the example of FIG. 165, "no set" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and "set present" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the preview effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the preview effect table.

In addition, in each preview performance in each variation pattern of the preview performance table, it is desirable that the selection rate without setting suggestion performance is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with setting suggestion performance. When the selection rate of settings-suggesting effects is high, setting-suggesting effects occur frequently. This is because if in this state the frequency of occurrence of setting suggestion effects suggesting high settings is low, there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing the game in a short period of time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is set to a low setting, will drop significantly, and there is a risk that an excessive burden will be placed on the hall. On the other hand, for example, if setting suggestion effects that suggest high settings occur frequently, the number of players who guess that the settings of other pachinko machines 1 in the hall are low will increase, and the operation of the other pachinko machines 1 will increase. There is a risk that the rate will decrease and an excessive burden will be placed on the hole.

In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the expectation of jackpot increases as the number of pseudo series increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is generally not changed depending on the number of pseudo series. , the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table is determined. In other words, for example, for variation patterns whose summaries are "SP Reach", "SP Reach + Pseudo 1", and "SP Reach + Pseudo 2", pseudo setting suggestion effects are created so that the appearance rates of setting suggestion effects are approximately the same. The selection rate for whether or not to execute has been determined. As a result, although the expectation of a jackpot is low for variable patterns with a small number of pseudo consecutive runs, the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effects is not low compared to variable patterns with a large number of pseudo consecutive runs, so players can You can also be interested in fluctuations with small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined such that the higher the number of pseudo repeats is, the higher the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, if the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased as the number of pseudo sequences decreases, the above-mentioned problem may occur. It is preferable to set them to almost the same numerical values (for example, 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of failure, and 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 6 is selected). 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (or a production with a relatively high expectation of the performance that appears, although it is not a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a production in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than a predetermined value) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects increases in the order of "normal variation", variation including "normal reach", variation including "SP reach", and variation including "movie reach", The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 165, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur in all of the preview effects (line production, weather change effect, and rival horse effect), but for example, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur. May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects will be higher when the special lottery result is a jackpot without probability variation than when the special lottery result is a jackpot with probability variation. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined. As a result, when winning a jackpot with no probability variation, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased, and it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the probability variation is not awarded. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, three types of preview performances, namely, a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance, have been described, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to three types.

[12-14-4. Line production]
The details of the dialogue production among the preview production will be explained below. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue production without setting suggestion production as a preview production, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the variation, the peripheral control MPU causes character A to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , "What day is it today?" is displayed as character A's line. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's line is displayed, and character B's line is ``Now...'' is displayed. Note that, for example, the lines of character A and character B may suggest the jackpot expectation of the change.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue performance with a setting suggestion performance as a preview performance, it selects the character B's dialogue (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from a dialogue performance table to be described later. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays a message on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as when character A appears without the setting suggestion effect described above). Character A is made to appear, and Character A's line is displayed as ``What day is it today?'' For example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and displays the selected character B's dialogue. Note that character A's lines may be, for example, lines that directly express setting values, such as "Do you know the settings of this machine today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a line production table. The dialogue production table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of character B's dialogue content for each setting. Note that the production types include "patterns that are the same until the middle" and "patterns that suddenly diverge," and for each of these two patterns, there are "Kamone-type" lines and "Determined-type" lines. .

Each line belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" includes the same line until the middle, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, the lines belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" all start with "Now..." and then branch into different lines. On the other hand, lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch into different lines from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that are the same until halfway" is higher than the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that suddenly diverge." This is to create a sense of expectation.

Lines belonging to the "Kamone series" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, ``But I feel like it was an even-numbered day...'' is a ``maybe-type'' line that suggests an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "maybe" type of line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even on an odd-numbered setting. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-type" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, lines belonging to the "definite type" are lines that definitively announce settings. For example, ``Ah! I remember! It's an even number day!'' is a ``definite'' line that definitively announces the even number setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the line in odd number settings is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in even number settings.

Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Kamone type" is higher than the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Determined type". If the selection rate of lines belonging to the "determined" category is high, there is a good chance that the high setting will be definitely notified to the player within a short time after the start of the game, and in this case, other people in the hall This is because there is a certain number of players who assume that the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are not good, which may reduce the operation of other gaming machines.

In addition, in dialogue performances when performing specific reach performances such as SP reach and movie reach, and dialogue performances when performing pseudo-reactions, lines that suggest settings for character B are written in red (in the productions that suggest jackpot expectations, etc.) The lines of the normal production may be displayed in white text). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the lines of the expectation-suggesting performance and the lines of the setting-suggesting performance, allowing the two types of performances (setting-suggesting performance and expectation-suggesting performance) to coexist without making the player feel unnatural. can be done. Note that the expectation-suggesting performance is a performance that indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value, and specifically, it includes a preview performance that suggests expectations for a jackpot within one fluctuation, and multiple It includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a jackpot across fluctuations in

Note that the peripheral control MPU may also determine setting suggestion effects for the weather change effects and rival horse effects using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect for a weather change effect, thunderclouds are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to lightning (a "kamone type" effect that suggests an even number setting), In the setting suggestion performance for the rival horse performance, a combined horse performance between the horse that the main character is raising and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and for example, a number such as "135?" is displayed on the bib of the rival horse. (a ``Kamone-kei'' effect that suggests an odd number setting).

In the example above, character A's line in the dialogue production is ``What day is it today?'', but in addition to this line, character A can also say ``What score did you get on last week's test?'' Character B says, ``It's 66 points! (``Confirmation type'' that confirms setting 6)'' or ``I feel like it was 55 points... (``Maybe type'' that suggests setting 5)''. A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, it is preferable that performance B (for example, a performance that asks about test scores) increases the credibility of the setting suggestion more than performance A (for example, a performance that asks about the date). Specifically, for example, when someone says, ``I feel like it was a day with a 6 on it... (maybe type)'' in production A, the expectation level for a setting of 6 remains at 30%, but in production B, the expectation level is only 30%. When someone says, ``I feel like I got a 66 point... (maybe)'', the expectation level, which is setting 6, should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of a preview presentation table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the preview presentation table. In the example of FIG. 167, the preview effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the preview effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in FIG. 165, the preview effect table in FIG. 167 does not hold information regarding whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of preview effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the preview effect table in FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected preview effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the preview effect. be. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “Normal reach + 1 symbol” and “Line effect” is selected as the preview effect. It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and preview effects, as shown in FIG. 168, is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM.

Note that in the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the preview effect, but it does not decide whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and then determines the content of the preview effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than the table shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of the effects in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this separate example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. The production that progresses in the order of (A), (B), and (C) in Figure 169 is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. This is an overview of the performance.

In FIG. 169(A), special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line ``It's the day when there will be 4, 5, or 6!'' is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169(C), the line is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

The production that progresses in the order of (A), (D), and (E) in Figure 169 is an overview of the setting suggestion production when "It's a day with a 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. be. In the production that progresses in the order of Fig. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production occurs while the special symbol variation ends. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when 4, 5, or 6 will be added!" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when there's a 6!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by Character B's lines is elevated.

Specifically, for example, for each line in the line production table (line that is finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined separately. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

Note that in this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the line production table may not hold a scenario in which the line ``It's an even number day!'' is displayed after the line ``It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!'' desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion performance is performed in the special symbol variation, but other performances (for example, a performance suggesting the jackpot expectation level, etc.) may be performed in parallel. Although an example has been shown in which character B's speech is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's speech is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the special symbol variation ends. It should be noted that character A appears before character B's lines, and a scene in which character A talks to character B is performed, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170(A), a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 during the special symbol variation without any pending special symbol variation. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays character B's lines, "It's the day you get a 4, 5, or 6!" be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is uncertain, character B may be displayed immediately without displaying character A, or character B may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since winning the prize. Alternatively, character A may be displayed first and then character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170(B), the number of reservations indicated in the reservation display area has increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation ends. Furthermore, character B's line ``It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!'' continues to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Furthermore, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the character B's line displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there will be a 5 or 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize winning ends. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning, the character B's line displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there's a 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a line pre-read effect table (not shown) that defines character B's lines and the timing at which the lines change. Specifically, for example, the line pre-read effect table defines the change timing of character B's line, and the character B's line at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing. Note that it is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. Note that there may be a different line pre-read effect table for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the pre-read effect based on the advance determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-read effect by referring to the pre-read effect table at a predetermined rate, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in Figure 170, the promotion is done one step at a time ("It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!", "It's a day with a 5 or 6!", "It's a day with a 6!") !'') may be promoted to multiple levels at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the line (E) may be displayed without displaying the line (D).

Note that the setting suggestion performance may be executed under specific situations other than those described above. For example, a setting suggestion effect may be executed when a condition for a pending connection is satisfied. The pending series means that the next jackpot will be realized using special random numbers that have been held until the end of the jackpot game. In this case, for example, after the suspension is performed and before the end of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is executed. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern continues a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion performance may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, restrictions on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions will be explained.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special conditions]
First, restrictions on setting suggestion effects after the special state will be explained. In the following, settings confirmation mode and error occurrence are both examples of special states. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values that starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of a production restriction table in setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of a presentation restriction table when an error occurs. The performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table in error occurrence are stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode will be explained. The setting confirmation mode production restriction table shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode starts while a variation determined to execute a setting suggestion production (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict setting suggestion effects.

The effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode is set in the setting confirmation mode before the setting suggestion effect starts (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect will be performed). A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag when the setting suggestion is started, and a record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when the setting suggestion change starts (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion presentation is to be performed and the presentation related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). and a record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped when the settings confirmation mode starts, and when the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game continues even during the settings confirmation mode. . Therefore, the performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode includes a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Column 1704.

Furthermore, if the game continues during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the production restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in the hall, etc. It can be set using any operating medium (an operating medium that can be operated may also be used). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to acquire lottery information and award a prize ball for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, the special symbol variation that is already on hold will be executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

If the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts, the value of one of fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714-1717 are 0.

In addition, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, the value of one of fields 1708 and 1709 is 1, and the value of the other is 0, and the value of field 1710 is 0. and one value of field 1711 is 1 and the other value is 0, the value of field 1712 and field 1713 is 0, and one value of field 1714 and field 1715 is 1 and the other value is 0, The value of one of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the performance restriction table at the start of the setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 1 and value of field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 0 and value of field 1707 is 1). For example, if a sound or image indicating that settings are being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during settings confirmation mode, by not performing settings suggestion effects in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion presentation of the setting suggestion variation in the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion presentation starts and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1708 is 1 and value of field 1709 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when sounds and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are given priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. . In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1708 is 0 and value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuations corresponding to winnings in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode when setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues during setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion direction.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1710 is 1 and value of field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1710 is 0 and value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. There is a possibility that a display confirming the odd number setting will be displayed in the subsequent setting suggestion performance, which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

Note that it is preferable that the images, sounds, lights, etc. that indicate the above-mentioned setting confirmation state appear regardless of the values of the above-mentioned fields. Further, it is assumed that a new winning prize will be valid even if the game is stopped after moving to the setting confirmation state, so in that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and the game stops when setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1712 is 1 and the value of field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1712 is 0 and the value of field 1713 is 1). For example, if a sound or image indicating that settings are being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during settings confirmation mode, by not performing settings suggestion effects in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion change in the case where the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when sounds and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are given priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the text indicating the setting confirmation mode, such as "Setting confirmation mode in progress", do not overlap. ). Note that regarding this display, etc., the same processing can be performed even when an error occurs, which will be described later. Note that "do not overlap" here refers not to the image data actually set in the RAM, but to the fact that the appearance from the player's perspective does not overlap.

In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 0 and the value of field 1715 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts after the setting suggestion effect starts while the setting suggestion is changing, and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1716 is 1 and value of field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1716 is 0 and value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. In a later setting suggestion performance, a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed), which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode spans multiple variations, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after starting the setting confirmation mode. When the first symbol is confirmed or when the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, it performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion performance differs from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting is suggested such as "Maybe it is a high setting?") If the effect occurs), the player may feel distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Next, the performance restriction table when an error occurs will be explained using FIG. 171(B). The performance restriction table when an error occurs is a setting suggestion performance for a variation that is determined to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) when an error occurs while the variation is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict.

The performance restriction table when an error occurs includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of a setting suggestion performance, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs while the setting suggestion variation is changing and after the setting suggestion performance starts in the setting suggestion variation. A record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case of

Note that there are two types of errors: strong errors that are notified after stopping the game, and weak errors that are notified while the game is in progress. An error in which illegal magnetism is detected in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the gaming area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, there is a performance restriction table when an error occurs, a column 1803 that stores a restriction flag corresponding to an error that is notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 that stores a restriction flag that corresponds to an error that is notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Furthermore, if the game continues even during the occurrence of an error, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during the occurrence of an error.

Note that the restriction flag in the performance restriction table when an error occurs is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. It can be set using an operating medium (or an operating medium).

In addition, in the performance restriction table when an error occurs, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0, One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1816 and field 1817 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the performance restriction table when an error occurs. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 1 and value of field 1807 is 0). By executing the settings suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have not been changed even when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 0 and value of field 1807 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation in the case where an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1808 is 1 and value of field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1808 is 0 and value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') If an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion performance and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting opening while the error occurs Regarding the setting suggestion of variation.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1810 is 1 and value of field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1810 is 0 and value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

(3) Regarding the case where an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1812 is 1 and the value of field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1812 is 0 and the value of field 1813 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion presentation may be canceled, which may be disadvantageous for the player, so the player is encouraged to proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error).

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 1 and the value of field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``Was the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting displayed?'', all setting suggestion effects were hidden. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 0 and the value of field 1815 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled, which is disadvantageous for the player, so the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. This allows for smooth progress and reduces the burden on the hall.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot while an error occurs when an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1816 is 1 and value of field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1816 is 0 and value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on performance for new start-up prizes]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the restrictions on the production in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize winning in a state where the special symbol variation is in progress and the new variation can be suspended. FIG. 172 is an example of a new starting winning presentation restriction table. The new start winning presentation restriction table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

The new starting winning presentation restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by assumptions regarding the performance of the previous change and performance restrictions for the performance in the new starting prize winning under the assumption. In addition, the previous fluctuation in this chapter is the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. As a condition for the performance of the previous fluctuation, there are cases in which only a performance suggesting the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a jackpot is performed, and cases in which a performance suggesting the expectation and a setting suggestion performance are performed.

In addition, as a performance restriction for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize, only the setting suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance is restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is not executed), and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance are restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is limited). (in other words, neither the setting suggestion presentation nor the expectation suggestion presentation in the look-ahead presentation is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion presentation and the look-ahead presentation are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table that is included in the corresponding condition and is referred to when executing the prefetch performance restriction for a new starting prize. The flag column stores flags indicating which condition is to be executed and which processing table is to be used to determine the processing for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize.

Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag columns corresponding to the other two processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning performance restriction table is set, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or at the hall, etc. It can be set by

When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new starting prize while the special symbol is changing and a new variation can be suspended, and that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the new starting winning effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column whose value in the "previous variation effect" column is "expected suggestion only" and which stores 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag field and determines the content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU determines that if there is a new starting prize during special symbol fluctuations and in a state where new fluctuations can be suspended, and when the expectation suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, the new starting prize winning occurs. The value in the "previous variation production" column of the production restriction table is a flag column corresponding to "expected suggestion + setting suggestion", and the flag column stores 1 as the value, and the new The content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the starting prize is determined.

Each condition indicated in the condition column will be explained below. The first condition (condition under which processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. It is to be done. Under the first condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's awareness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the performance of the previous change is There is a risk that the feeling of elation may decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that the player may confuse the setting suggestion performance with the expectation suggestion performance, causing the player to be overjoyed. Therefore, by implementing the first condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

In addition, under the first condition, an expectation suggestion performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, but in this state, if a setting suggestion performance is further performed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, the player , even if it is assumed that the player loses due to the previous fluctuation, he or she can still expect a fluctuation corresponding to the new start-up win, so it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting a performance based on the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines the performance based on the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating that setting suggestion performance is to be limited is 1 or not. (to restrict or not), and if it is 1 (to restrict), even if set is selected, it will be rewritten and displayed as without set, thereby restricting the setting suggestion effect. do. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion performance using the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the performance. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold a presentation table for each restriction type of presentation, the amount of data can be reduced. Note that, similarly to the expectation suggestion effect described later, even if the prefetch pending display selects a color other than white using the final pending color table in FIG. 161, when the expectation suggestion effect is limited, Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition under which processing table 2 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is to limit both aspects of performance. In the second condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion performance and a period attitude suggestion performance are executed as a prediction performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's consciousness is directed to these performances as well. There is a risk that the exhilaration of the performance of the pre-fluctuation may be reduced. Therefore, by implementing the second condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

The third condition (condition under which processing table 3 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is not to limit any of the performances. In the third condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In this state, the setting suggestion presentation is executed as a look-ahead presentation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, so that in addition to the elation of winning the jackpot, the elation of the setting suggestion presentation (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggestion presentation) (or when a high setting confirmation effect, etc. is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition under which processing table 4 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. only. In the fourth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a sense of exhilaration that he might win the jackpot in the previous fluctuation, and (especially a high setting-suggesting performance or a high-setting confirmation performance) ) If performed, you will feel a sense of elation due to the setting suggestion. In such a situation, if a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, there is a risk that the excitement of expecting a jackpot while the previous fluctuation is pending may decrease. .

Specifically, for example, if setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, then The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (it also suggests the possibility of setting 4, even though the setting is originally 5 or higher). In such a case, the player infers that not only the setting suggestion performance in the previous change but also the expectation suggestion performance contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, if the display format is red There is also a possibility that the expectation level of jackpot is not high even for the hold that is held, and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement about the performance suggesting the expectation may be lowered. By implementing the fourth condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition under which processing table 5 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. and expectations-suggestion effects. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, if the setting suggestion performance is performed in the look-ahead performance corresponding to the new starting prize, the setting suggestion performance will occur multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, if an odd setting suggestion performance and a high setting suggestion performance are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting is 5). In such a situation, if the player determines that the setting is low, there is a risk that the player will stop playing on the pachinko machine 1 in question, and if the player determines that the setting is high, the player may cancel the game at other pachinko machines in the hall. There is a risk that the operation of machine 1 will decrease. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if an expectation-suggesting performance and a setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, and even in the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, the expectation-suggesting performance and setting-suggesting performance are performed as a look-ahead performance, many performances occur in a short period of time. However, there is a risk that players may be confused. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (the condition under which processing table 6 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. There should be no restriction on any of the above and the performance that suggests expectations. In the sixth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous variation, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expectation-suggesting performance in the setting suggested by the setting-suggesting performance. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are performed, so that there is a possibility that the level of expectation due to these two expectation suggestion performances will increase.

Specifically, for example, if a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 4 or more is executed in the previous variation, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new starting prize, the player Regarding the expectation-suggesting production in the previous fluctuation, we assume a level of expectation at setting 4 or higher. However, after that, a setting of 5 or more is suggested by a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance in a new starting prize winning, so the expectation level for the expectation suggestion performance comes to assume a setting of 5 or more, and the player The feeling of elation increases.

In this way, each of the pre-read performance restriction contents that correspond to a new starting prize win will be effective, so by allowing halls to set such pre-read performance restriction contents, it will be possible to meet the needs of the business style of the hall etc. We can provide gaming machines tailored to your needs.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Note that each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the common contents of each processing table will be explained. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new starting prize corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

Note that the processing contents held in each processing table are defined as processing contents for prefetch effects that are not subject to restrictions. Specifically, for example, the processing contents of processing table 1, which is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect, as a pre-reading effect restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, includes information regarding expected suggestion effects. Processing details are defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3, which is a table that is referred to when restricting both the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production, as a look-ahead production restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, include the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production. Processing details regarding setting suggestion effects are defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-read effects to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start-up winning effect restriction table, and based on the processing table, determines the prefetch effect to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

Note that the processing table 3 and processing table 6, which will be described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new starting prize from a plurality of processing content. Note that the flags in the processing table are, for example, the operating media installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. ) can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new starting prize defined by the processing table 1 will be explained. Processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. Below, an example will be described in which pending prefetching is performed as a prefetching effect that suggests expectations.

The process with process number 1 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 1, if the mode of pending display of a new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, pending display mode of blue, green, red, etc.), for example, , at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous variation, the pending display mode of the new starting prize is returned to the default (white display mode in the final pending color table in FIG. 161). However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the pending display mode of the new starting prize to the specific display mode (that is, leaves it as the default display) at the time of time reduction transition after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of displaying the pending display of the new start-up winnings to the specific display mode even if the pending display of the new starting winnings has not been completed at the end of the time saving (i.e. (Leave as default display).

Process number 2 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 2, if the mode of pending display of the new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of pending display of new starting prizes is returned to the default. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, even when the system shifts to a normal state which is controlled after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the pending display of the new starting prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display remains).

Process number 3 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of pending display of a new starting prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small winning won in the previous fluctuation. However, when the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small winning opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays.

Process number 4 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-reading performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. be. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction on the variation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. Processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion production nor the expectation suggestion production is restricted as a pre-read production restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. be.

The processes with process numbers 5 and 6 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with a time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 5 to 6, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process number 5 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player is aware that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. In addition, since a jackpot with a time reduction was won in the previous fluctuation, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation corresponding to the new winning will start after the end of the time reduction. If you win frequently and there is a hold on the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation will be executed in priority to the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the process of process number 6, the setting suggestion performance is executed after the time saving ends, so that it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the end of the time saving.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 7 to 8, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to process number 7, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process of process number 8, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the jackpot ends, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time saving is not given.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 9 to 10, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. By the process number 10, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

Processes with process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 11 to 13, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the processing of processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old reservation is the reservation corresponding to the previous change, and the new reservation is the reservation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the pending display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot, the peripheral control MPU suggests a setting as a look-ahead presentation for the new starting prize. Do not perform the performance. Due to the process of process number 13, even though a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot appeared in the previous variation, it was missed, and furthermore, even in the variation corresponding to the new starting winning, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect did not appear. , it is possible to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. Processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. .

Process number 14 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 14, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

Process number 15 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process with process number 16 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process with process number 17 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In addition, processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance restriction for fluctuations corresponding to new starting winnings, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, new starting winnings It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to winning a prize.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Processing table 5 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is the table that will be used. Processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. Processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion performance nor the expectation suggestion performance is restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is a table that

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected using a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the processes regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning are the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process of process number 18 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. (Specifically, for example, when it is announced that setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting is set as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize) Only when it is announced in the suggestion performance that the setting 5 or more is confirmed, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol.

By the process of process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion performance at the latest during the time saving jackpot, so that he can obtain a double sense of exhilaration due to the time saving jackpot and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is announced that setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. If this is announced, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is a wasteful performance that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, and processing is not required. By processing number 19, such wasteful effects can be omitted. Conversely, for example, if it is announced that the setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation, the setting 5 will be set in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the player is likely to continue playing even if the above is not confirmed, there is a high possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be a wasteful effect, and the process number 19 will eliminate such wasteful effects. Performance can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 20, the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the time saving state ends, so that the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state can be alleviated.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing for the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to the process of process number 22, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. By the process of process number 23, if the setting suggestion performance is started at the latest during the jackpot game, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with the disappointment reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 24, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the end of the jackpot, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time has not been shortened.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at not entering into the time saving period. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, players who are disappointed that the time will not be shortened will be shown an even more wasteful setting suggestion performance, and the game There is a risk that the person will be adversely affected.

Processes with process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 26 to 29, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. By the process of process number 27, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment due to only small merits being given in small wins.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. Through the process number 28, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process of process number 29, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment that only a small merit is given in a small win. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, it will further waste the setting suggestion performance for players who are disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small win. This may lead to the player being exposed.

Processes with process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 30 to 34, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the failure of the previous fluctuation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the process No. 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU controls the setting of the previous variation when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. Only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion performance, the new starting winning During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process of process number 32, the player's disappointment that the previous variation, which was a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot, was a failure can be alleviated by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU displays the new starting prize only if the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) that has a high expectation of a jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process No. 33, a player who has continued to be disappointed because he was not able to obtain the level of expectation for a jackpot with the pending look-ahead performance of the previous change can be relieved of such disappointment by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion presentation of the previous change when the pending display mode is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high jackpot expectation. Therefore, only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better, only during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, A setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. Due to the process No. 34, the player's frustration is amplified in that the pending display mode of the previous variation is low in expectations and the setting suggestion performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize suggests a low setting. The occurrence of can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned process, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a pre-reading effect restriction on fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not perform the setting suggestion effect. There is no need to perform the performance. For example, if the new starting prize is made during a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. This is because immediately after a jackpot game, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if no incentive is provided through the setting suggestion performance.

As in the examples of processing table 3 and processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each process related to a new starting prize determined by each processing number, it is possible for the hole etc. to set the process related to a new starting winning. This makes it possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of halls, etc.

In addition, for example, the new starting prize is just before the end of the ST state (a variable probability state that continues until the jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, the special symbol change until the ST state ends). (e.g., the number of remaining changes in the symbol is less than or equal to the maximum number of special symbols reserved, 4, or the number of remaining changes in the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.). In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot in the ST. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations after the ST state ends and the transition to the normal state (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state to Immediately after transitioning to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and taking this into account, the new If a starting prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. Immediately after the ST state ends, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will immediately win the jackpot. In particular, immediately after the ST state ends, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is likely to win a type of jackpot that is of great benefit to the player will be executed. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, if it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that can be completed independently is executed in multiple holds, one setting suggestion effect that spans the fluctuations corresponding to the multiple holds will be executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 1]
Another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described below. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 takes in the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the data of the taken level in the register (step S201). Note that the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 has been reliably started. Therefore, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM may be cleared unintentionally. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts a key operation early after turning on the power, the To reliably detect the operation of a RAM clear switch 954 or a setting key 971 during a power-on operation.

Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be made different. For example, the polarity of the logic may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when it is at a high level, and the setting key 971 is turned on when it is at a low level. Further, the voltage for determining ON may be changed using the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves, thereby making it difficult for fraudulent acts to activate the setting change mode. Furthermore, as will be described later, it is no longer necessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, and the pachinko machine 1 waits for initialization by a reset signal (step S203). Abnormal settings are not corrected because the settings are not in the range in which the checksum is calculated and are not erased by a RAM clear operation. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to normal games such as special drawings and general drawings is not executed.

The set value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when entering the starting slot, when starting a variable display game, and when the gaming state changes (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state). , from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.) is also determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This prevents a lottery from being conducted based on an incorrect set value even if the set value is erroneously set to an abnormal value.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game will stop and the state of abnormal set value (RAM abnormality) will be maintained until the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. . If the set value is determined to be abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the setting value storage area using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning the power back on. This is because RAM abnormalities may be caused by fraud as well as malfunctions, and if RAM abnormalities caused by fraud can be resolved by turning the power back on, RAM abnormalities can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, setting key 971, and RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since this includes the operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by an employee of the hall who has the key, security performance against unauthorized acts can be improved.

In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized attempts to change the setting value to an undefined value, if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to setting 1, which indicates the lowest setting, will improve the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve your performance.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation modes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, such as the normal gaming state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, and setting change mode. , an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power-off is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and stored in step S48. Note that instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM has been successfully backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the value in the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (including the area where values are stored) (step S207), and the process advances to step S216. Note that erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization," but "RAM clear" is also used with the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values in the checksum and backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine whether the If the operation is not a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and/or setting key 971 are OFF), the settings are set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state was in the process of changing settings before the power was turned on. It is determined whether a value (02H) indicating that the change is in progress is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that a setting change operation has been performed, then the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated to enter setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the condition is the same. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the settings are being changed is recorded in the settings state management area, it can be determined that the power was turned on after a power outage during the settings change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

Note that when transitioning to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area in step S208, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. In this case, there is no need to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, so when it is determined that the transition to setting change mode is to be made based on the value stored in the setting state management area, setting changes will be made in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the status.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether the status of is RAM abnormal, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process advances to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register because the state before the power is turned on is not a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal). It is determined whether it is (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize the area (the clear area when the RAM is normal), the process advances to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, since the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, a power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 was operated when the power was turned on and the setting confirmation operation should start, so the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting status management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

Thereafter, the devices built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command that notifies the operation of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state at power-on (step S218).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a state in which a game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process advances to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is ended and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial settings at the start of the game or initial settings at the time of recovery from power outage are performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command that notifies the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command that notifies the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Note that the various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in timer interrupt processing.

Further, a setting value command notifying the setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), an interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that the setting change process is executed within the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide as many LED common counters as there are indicators.

Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG. 23.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in timer interrupt processing, so normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, performance display processing (FIG. 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, a setting change/confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236, S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. Note that if the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit value, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (a value indicating setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, setting change/confirmation mode termination processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode termination process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a state in which gaming can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or at the time of recovery from a power outage is recorded. (step S241), and transmits a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (low probability/high probability, game state such as time saving/non-time saving, etc.) when the power is turned on. is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after a power outage is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory (state of each process related to the special symbol/special electric accessory (standby, fluctuating, judgment, jackpot, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state regarding the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in a buffer to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process advances to step S245.

Note that the command for notifying the setting value may be sent not only during the setting change/confirmation mode termination processing when the power is turned on, but also at the time of starting fluctuation or switching the gaming state. At this time, the setting value command transmitted at power-on and the command transmitted during normal gaming, such as at the start of fluctuation, may be the same command or different commands (for example, the upper byte values may be different).

If the set value command is different between power-on and normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands including the set value (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, it is determined whether any commands are missing. By changing the content of the command depending on the timing at which the command is sent (such as when the power is turned on or during normal gaming), the peripheral control board 1510 can check whether the set value was correctly received when the power was turned on or whether the set value is different from the set value when the fluctuation starts. It can be determined whether a fluctuation pattern command or a symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, settings are made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or setting display 974 if it is separate) (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the settings in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing starts, a setting value changing operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt, and the setting value is displayed (setting value display ). The setting value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, instead of performing settings change/confirmation processing when the power is turned on, it is performed within the same timer interrupt processing that is used when normal gaming starts, so that settings change/confirmation processing can be performed while the settings change/confirmation processing is being executed. Even if the power is restored after a power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state, the settings at the time of the power outage will be changed even if the setting key 971 and setting change switch 972 are not moved to the same position as they were at the time of the power outage. It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change/confirmation process, processes that are also executed in normal game processes, such as command transmission process and dynamic LED lighting control, can be made common.

Then, a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing branches depending on whether to execute the normal game or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) (step S232 in FIG. 181), but multiple timer interrupt processing may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal gaming state, the setting change mode, and/or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or may be composed of different routines. In other words, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called, and in the normal gaming state, timer interrupt 2 (for normal gaming) is called, and these two timer interrupt processing It has a process (module) that is executed and a dedicated process (module) that is executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process that captures the output of various detection switches such as a prize opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process that sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the processing executed in the normal game and the processing executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since the two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, they can share one register bank. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank, and the main control side main processing that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. 1 (during normal gaming) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) which is executed periodically, and is common to the main control side main processing and at least two of timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the registers in the bank.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode are preferably executed at the same cycle, but may be executed at different cycles. The sampling of switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so while the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4ms, it is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be fast (for example, 2 ms) or slow (for example, 8 ms). In addition, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will be different from the base display during normal gaming. become. When there are 8 common LEDs, if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms), and if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms). The cycle is 32ms (display ON: 4ms, OFF: 20ms), and the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the LED lighting flickers become larger, so the display mode differs from the base display during normal gaming. It becomes possible to recognize them differently.

Further, when starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is enabled, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is turned on to start in the normal gaming state (not to shift to setting change/confirmation mode), timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of performance display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed at the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state mentioned above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or in the base display device output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address within the gaming control area, sets the stack address outside the gaming control area (step S260), and saves the registers used within the gaming control area to the register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used within the game control area in step S261 is preferably a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. In addition, the save destination of the register used within the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and when the area outside the gaming control area is initialized, 5AH is set. be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on has been initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area has also been initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialize.

If the power outage flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power outage flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and ejection ball sensor 3060 are detected and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time for the base value calculation section (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes displaying a test section in which the number of out pitches is less than 500, and a blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000). Step S269).

Thereafter, the register value is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine is notified to the hall employees. Let us know the status in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, this is executed in the setting display process in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. Note that a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). Note that an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over other abnormalities or conditions.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs blinking at high speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "RAM error" Sound (sound effect) Outputs RAM abnormality notification sound (RAM abnormality notification sound can be changed by setting) (It may be the same as the notification sound for modes other than mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (audio) Output volume of the sound "RAM error" Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp installed on the door frame 3) Panel decoration LED (excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) flashes in red All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release conditions By changing the settings on the main control board 1310 The RAM has been cleared or the power has been turned on to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on, or all LEDs flash at medium speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "Settings changing" Sound (sound effect) Outputs setting change mode notification sound (sound) "Settings are being changed" sound is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp installed on the door frame 3 ( Display panel decoration LED (including top lamp, excluding out-of-bulb or stock notification LED) flashing in white All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition Peripheral control board 1510 is "A001H" was received as the power-on operation command.

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on, or all LEDs flash at low speed at the same cycle Main LCD display 1600 Displays the words "Settings confirmation in progress" Sound (sound effect) Outputs setting confirmation mode notification sound (Setting confirmation mode notification The sound may be the same as the notification sound in settings change mode)
Sound (audio) Outputs the voice "Settings are being checked" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED installed on the door frame 3 Specified frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) blink in white Display panel decoration LED All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification Release conditions A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as the power-on operation command.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, followed by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be determined in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 is a high notification priority, and priority 9 is a low notification priority. That is, if multiple notifications are to be made, the notification with a higher priority (lower number) is performed. In addition, if multiple notification conditions with the same priority are met and the notifications conflict, even if you switch between the conflicting notifications and notify them, the notification that was established first will be performed, and after the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be made. Specifically, at priority level 3, RAM clear notification and setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. At priority level 4, the excessive prize balls abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification in setting change mode Priority 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing due to setting changes)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Priority 4: More than a predetermined number of consecutive prize balls are paid out when the normal electric accessory is not activated Ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning is detected or when a winning of more than a predetermined value is detected in one ordinary electric burning object activation Priority 5: Difference between the number of winnings and the number of discharges from the big winning opening Discharge abnormality notification priority 6 when the number exceeds a predetermined number: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority 7 when vibration is detected: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: If a predetermined number of wins or more are detected consecutively when the jackpot is not activated, or if more than a predetermined number of wins are detected in one jackpot Big winning opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, details of the aforementioned power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be explained. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2006). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and a reset signal for the pachinko machine 1 is sent. Wait for initialization. The set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, so even if the set value is an abnormal value, it will not be corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set values, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where pachinko machines are installed, you want to initialize the gaming state while maintaining the settings (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time saving) and return to the normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting values are initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, in order to reset the setting values and continue business operations, the power is cut off, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting values are reset. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the set values are maintained without being cleared by a RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub startup wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 151 Waits for startup (step S2008). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2009). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power outage occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to a normal state. In addition, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, since the values in the setting state management area are different when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031, the program can be shared by both, and the program Size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operations of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and since 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, a RAM abnormality can be resolved only by changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2020).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and the value shown in FIG. The process advances to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, the determination can be made in step S2032 based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming control area (step S2033), and the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is saved by RAM abnormality initialization processing. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, inhibiting writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled is written to the RAM protect register, writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the system waits until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and saves all registers. The value is stored in a register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the value of the initial power-on flag when the power is turned on (step S2053). The first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on as a pachinko machine, and the time the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 has been erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power source (installed in the main body frame 4, for example) is disconnected, the supply of backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 can no longer be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the ejected bulb targeted for base calculation is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the ejected ball targeted for base calculation is outside the predetermined range, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the ejected ball to be calculated as a base is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within a normal range (step S2055). If the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling source process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written to all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2056), and 00H is written to all the stack areas outside the used area. is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2604 is NO, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is preferable to turn on only the gaming state error signal and turn off the others.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

Next, FIG. 191 will be explained. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 to detect the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. (Step S2080). Specifically, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and if a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information is stored in the input information storage area. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as excessive winnings of large winning openings and ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch, and to set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and base display output processing is executed (step S2087). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers is saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not to migrate. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Thereafter, the process advances to step S2070 in FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling source process without executing the setting process.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling source.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops outputting the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. In the case of hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, the output of the security signal must be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Accordingly, it can be determined whether there is an abnormality in the security signal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The process returns to the calling process without executing the call.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of setting display processing. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , returns to the calling process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 202(A).

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2121). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2123).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). The power-on state command, as shown in FIG. 202(B), is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The return destination command when the power is turned on is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 202(C).

Furthermore, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is sent to the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The pending number display may be restored to the state before the power outage occurred. In addition, the order in which the special design reservation number command is sent is after sending the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, or before sending these commands, or during the sending of these commands. You can.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not set, or when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. , power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command) are sent when recovering from a power failure in neither setting change mode nor setting confirmation mode, when setting change mode ends, or when setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2. Random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in special lottery and regular lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Interrupts are enabled after initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number is a random number for jackpot determination to draw a jackpot for a special symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot for a regular symbol, and a symbol type (low probability/high probability/time-saving/non-time-saving, etc.) when a special symbol is a jackpot. ) is a random number used to change the initial value for each period, such as a random number that determines a random number.

Thereafter, random numbers other than the winning/losing random numbers (excluding the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 is preferably initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not function to switch the confirmation mode, but only functions as an operation for changing setting values.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of switch input processing 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. do. Note that in step S2141, switch input processing 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of switch input processing 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change/confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passing command output processing is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved to the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Furthermore, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt. do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of switch input processing 3. Switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the input information to the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of repetitions of the process from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Furthermore, input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If the mode is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to obtain the bits of the input ports that are used during normal gaming.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the setting change/confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits of the input port used in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode can be acquired.

Thereafter, input level data is generated from the bits obtained through the masking process, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, edge data of a change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

Thereafter, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether processing for all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all switch input ports has been completed, switch input processing 3 is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logic correction value, and a normal game mask. Contains the value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n pairs of input level data area addresses and input edge data area addresses.

As shown in the figure, the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area, so it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. The addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area are 16-bit (2 byte) values, but they are set as the addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be the value of the lower 8 bits (1 byte). In other words, the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the values in the input level data area or input edge data area, so the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set, so the data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another example of the structure of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199(A) shows an example of the structure of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199(B) shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is composed of n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode include ports with different logical correction values and mask values. In other words, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 In this system, different switch winning information data tables are used in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, so that different switch winning information data can be obtained.

In order to accommodate such a configuration, switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is modified as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the result of the judgment. Then, in step S2166, without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process is ended and the process returns to the process before the interruption. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports into which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, at bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. For bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. For bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned on, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting status management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded.For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined Not yet. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once during hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and created twice in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, once when the power is turned on and when settings change/confirmation ends.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs notification in the manner described above depending on the setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game is ready to start. The series code for each model of pachinko machine may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, using bits 6 to 4, eight types of series can be identified. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (the gaming state before the power outage).

FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a return destination command at power-on. The power-on return destination command is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the gaming state regarding the special symbol. show. The return destination command at power-on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of a power outage. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command that notifies a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The set value command is transmitted when the mode returns from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also transmitted at the start of special symbol fluctuations and at the time of changes in the game state (at the start and end of jackpots, probability changes, time savings, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command sent when the power is turned on, it will be changed to the correct setting value in subsequent games (for example, when the special symbol starts changing), so that incorrect settings can be corrected. The effect is no longer based on the value. A production based on set values is a production that suggests a set value using display devices, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc., and it is a production that suggests a setting value with a predetermined probability that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) under normal circumstances. This indicates the setting value by generating it. This setting value suggestion performance may include other forms of performance as exemplified below, and may also include false information. As a set value suggestion effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays effects such as a notice corresponding to the set value, or changes the way the symbols fluctuate from normal (for example, changes between left and right middle symbols). The start and confirmation timings are different from normal times (normally, each symbol starts changing at the same time, but in the case of high settings, it starts changing in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), audio If you use , a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when you win a prize at the starting opening, or a voice that is different from the normal sound during the performance (normal time is a male voice, and when the high setting is set, a female voice is generated). voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following explanation, n is a counter value indicating the processing state regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start when the normal gaming state starts, the operation command at power-on (A001H) → state command at power-on (3001H) → return destination command at power-on (310nH) → set value command (A10mH). Sent in order.

Furthermore, when initializing the main control RAM 1312 by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command ( A10mH).

In the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is sent, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. The command is transmitted in the following order: command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

In the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is sent, and then the setting value is confirmed and the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is sent. → Status command at power-on (3001H) → Return destination command at power-on (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

In addition, when a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and a setting change mode is started by a setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. A power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

When a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and if no settings are changed when the power is restored after power-off, the RAM abnormality continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is sent. ) is sent. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

As explained above, when the main control board 1310 starts up in a normal gaming state, a group of commands (combination of multiple commands in a predetermined order) indicating power restoration are sent to the peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after the reception of all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands in the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal gaming state cannot be started, and a notification that the normal gaming state cannot be started is notified.

In other words, similar to the above-mentioned performance when the gaming commands are disabled, the performance that satisfies the predetermined conditions among the received gaming commands is performed (for example, the movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc. The player may perform an effect corresponding to the command given), and use the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it compensates for the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on using the set value command sent at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it sets a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command, it sets the set value as the set value. It may be updated to a setting value corresponding to the command.

Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the state transition of values set after power is restored from the state before power cutoff in the setting state management area.

The operation of a pachinko machine with a setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns considering convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of operation will be described in which the game is in the normal gaming state (VALID_PLAY=00H) when the power is cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 204(A). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control area including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power outage. Note that even if all the storage contents in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area where information for returning to the gaming state before the power outage is stored (memory where information related to gaming is stored) It is only necessary that the areas (areas related to special symbols, normal symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (fluctuating pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) are maintained, and it is necessary to return to the gaming state before the power outage. After the power is restored, the area in which the information that is not specified may be stored may be in a different state than before the power outage. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in operation example 1 when the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode at the time of the previous power cut and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area including the stack area other than the setting value and base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area along with the storage area initialized in the initialization process that was already executed when a power outage occurred. good. For example, if the power is cut off during initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas for which initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of a power outage, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power outage occurs during initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clearing processing flag) is provided to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and while the RAM clearing processing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of initialization processing.

Further, the process of monitoring power outages in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), the power outage warning signal may be monitored by, for example, a timer interrupt.

The power outage monitoring process and the power outage process can be executed as a common process in the setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and normal gaming state, or as separate processes. A common process may be executed in the mode, and a separate process may be executed in the normal gaming state. That is, out of three or more operating states (operating modes) of the pachinko machine, the power outage monitoring process and the power outage process may be performed in common in at least two states.

As explained above, in pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power outage occurs during setting change work in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 for starting the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the system may start up in setting confirmation mode instead of setting change mode, or only RAM clear switch 954 may be operated. If the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is started, and if no switch is operated, the normal gaming state is started. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1, the device is always started in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If it was in the setting change mode when the power was cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, it may operate in another pattern shown in Figure 204(C), unlike pattern 2-1. good. If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 The memory contents of will not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H, which indicates an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes). The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing.

In other words, in Pattern 2-1, the setting key and RAM clear switch are unconditionally switched to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in Pattern 2-2, the settings are changed when the power is restored. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). shall be. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is restored, the normal game does not start as the RAM is in an abnormal state, and the normal game resumes after going through the setting change mode. Start playing. Therefore, when no operation is performed to start the setting change mode, the normal game is not executed in a state other than the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode such as when there is a RAM error, and the game is stopped by notifying the hall. The employee may be prompted to activate the settings change mode.

If a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the gaming control area and the stack area within the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Wait in game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing. After that, by turning off the power, operating the setting key and RAM clear switch to setting change mode, and turning on the power, the value of the setting state management area will be updated to 02H, and the value of the main control RAM 1312 game control area will be updated. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) in the case where the setting confirmation mode was in effect at the time of the power cut immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power outage will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the space used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. (The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an example of the operation when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays information for changing settings.

When the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main The storage contents of control RAM 1312 do not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes).

In addition, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power cut, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored, and (1) Initial settings are made for devices built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of (3) setting interrupt permission.

Furthermore, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are Determine whether or not there is an operation. If a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is activated). (Regardless of whether the startup operation is being performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, or neither is being operated), the RAM abnormal state is maintained. In other words, normally, when starting the settings change mode and when starting the settings confirmation mode, the settings change mode processing and settings confirmation mode processing are executed within the timer interrupt processing, but when the power is turned on again due to a RAM error state. , different processes are executed in settings change mode and settings confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again and the power is turned on again from a RAM abnormal state, when starting up in setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed within the timer interrupt handling as usual, but the setting change mode is started in setting confirmation mode. When this happens, different processing than normal is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, there is no need to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be explained using a time chart. The outline of the time chart explained below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Figure 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Figure 206)
・Time chart when in setting change mode during a power outage and transitioning to setting change mode with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 207)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting change mode in setting change mode during power outage with setting key 971 ON and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 208)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting confirmation mode in setting confirmation mode during power outage with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. Note that the display mode of the function display unit is as described above in FIG. 184.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above in accordance with the received power-on command.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value from N+1 to N+2, and the base display 1317 is updated. The next set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. Ru.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 ends all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly seen, and operational errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that both the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) are used to notify the state in which normal gaming can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is necessary to select either one from the main control board. It is enough to send it to .

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time for the security signal is This is to ensure that

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, when the power was turned off immediately before, the user was in the normal gaming state or the setting confirmation mode, and when the power was turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated and the setting key 971 was turned ON. , the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a setting confirmation mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 01H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Shift to confirmation mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, as a general rule, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so the state before the power outage is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), if the mode was set when the power was turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set to the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 when the power is turned on. Indicates when to start.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed. to move to. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

At timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operating mode is changed depending on the level of the 954 signal. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates a setting change (02H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area remains at 02H. be done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power outage is in the process of changing settings, YES is determined in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before power-off is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be started even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting change mode starts when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Setting change mode can be started even if it is not turned on.

Note that, as indicated by a broken line at timing T12, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is 00H may be recorded and the game may be restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be played (for example, due to a RAM error) without returning to the setting change mode. In other words, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even if the device is in the setting change mode at the time of a power outage, if no setting change operation is performed when the power is restored, the device is restarted in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if it was in the setting confirmation mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage, executes a power-off process, and stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates setting confirmation (01H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the device is restarted in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, and if the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the settings confirmation mode.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

During the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the setting value is not updated and the setting value is displayed as the base display. 1317 and continues to be displayed.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 starts the performance in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting performance) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since it learned that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. You can. In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learns that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state. For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some of the presentation devices perform a notification that the settings are being changed. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. We will continue to carry out public announcements. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot judgment threshold table stores the hit judgment thresholds of random numbers for jackpot judgment for drawing jackpots of special symbols.

The jackpot threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 is comprised of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table stores a threshold value when the probability is low (normal state) and a threshold value when the probability is high (variable probability state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, a threshold value for jackpot determination is obtained from the selected threshold value determination table. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is within the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each setting value is the lower limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the upper limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state), and the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, determine whether the selected threshold value judgment table is a low probability block or a high probability block, and set the lower limit threshold and upper limit for jackpot judgment. Get the threshold. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for selecting a setting value table for low probability, a determination threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a setting value table for high probability, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state), and the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state). defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value of high probability (variable probability state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table for low probability stores a lower limit threshold when the probability is low (normal state) and an upper threshold when the probability is low (normal state). Each setting value determination threshold table for high probability stores a lower limit threshold at high probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold at high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, it is determined whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the address table for selecting the high probability setting value table based on the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability). A setting value is acquired as an offset from an address table for selecting a setting value table, and a determination threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected using the acquired offset. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculations in processing calculations) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the registers in bank 0 are used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312, and the information is erased without being retained in the event of a power outage, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up in the event of a power outage. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2206). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2206 until the power supply voltage stabilizes.

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2207). The peripheral control board 1510 may wait for startup at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2208). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, so the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2208.

Thereafter, a setting value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is to ensure the independence of the processing outside the gaming control area and the processing within the gaming control area, so that the information used in one process does not affect the other process. Thereafter, a RAM outside gaming area confirmation process at power-on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the process for confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose registers in bank 0 are used in the process when the power is turned on.

The values set in the setting state management area in another example 2 are different from those shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2218), and the process advances to step 2219.

Thereafter, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). The register in which the value of the PF port is stored is a general-purpose register that is different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to a normal state. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. In this way, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, it is not possible to distinguish the calling source even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2227).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is entered. Note that if the state at the time of the power outage is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power outage confirmation mode as before the power outage instead of the normal gaming state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the gaming control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2232), and the processing when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal is executed (step S2233). Details of the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clearing process outside the gaming control area will not be executed unless the settings are changed. When there is an abnormality in the RAM outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting status management area and the game stops, just like when there is an abnormality in the RAM inside the game control area.The RAM abnormality cannot be recovered unless the settings are changed. It is now impossible to do so. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the gaming control area is only a setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the gaming control area is changing the setting and operating the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM abnormality has occurred). There are two cases (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the gaming area in step S2235, the setting value and setting state management area are excluded because damage will occur to the hall if the setting value is set to a high value due to an unauthorized RAM clearing operation by the player. In particular, if a malfunction (RAM abnormality) occurs during a game with a high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clearing operation will change the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This means that if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is turned back on without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In addition, in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when transitioning to configuration confirmation mode.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is not activated at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. You can. Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation process. The setting value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. do. Note that the setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Furthermore, it may be executed at the start of special symbol fluctuations or at the time of changes in the gaming state (at the start and end of jackpot, probability change, time saving, etc.).

In the setting value confirmation process, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area, so if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is outside the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the values and setting values recorded in the setting state management area, it is also determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal during the progress of the game (at each start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, there are two conditions for determining a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and setting values during gaming, and a RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area within the gaming area excluding the setting state management area and setting values, and the work area outside the gaming area). The two conditions for determining that the work RAM is abnormal are different. Note that a part of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two judgment conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the conditions for determining a RAM abnormality are different because if a RAM abnormality regarding setting values is determined only when the power is turned on, if the setting values are changed due to malfunction due to fraud or noise, This is because it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period during which the disadvantage occurs, since it may cause a disadvantage to the person.

In addition, by creating a subroutine for RAM abnormality determination processing regarding the setting state management area and setting values during a game, the same program can be executed multiple times by calling the subroutine and determining RAM abnormality as necessary during the progress of the game. The size of the program can be reduced without having to provide it at a specific location.

Furthermore, although the setting state management area is not subject to RAM abnormality determination when the power is turned on, it may be treated as a RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as a target for RAM abnormality determination when power is turned on, if the setting change mode is present before a power outage and it is determined that RAM is abnormal when power is restored, priority is given to RAM abnormality. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (that is, a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in the main control RAM 1312 in which the setting values are stored may be subject to RAM abnormality determination at power-on, or may be excluded from RAM abnormality determination.

It should be noted that in the order of priority in the determination when the power is turned on, RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and entering the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing RAM clear processing by a RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the derived states' priorities, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the highest priority even if a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the process of confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on outside gaming area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2262). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on, etc.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, a checksum of the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal or not. is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, a RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. Furthermore, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the gaming control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 seconds). milliseconds) (step S2268), and set the mode switching time (5 seconds) in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the LED blinking cycle timer times out. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times up, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is initialized by setting 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

Thereafter, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register saving buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2272), and are saved in the SP saving buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of processing when a RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal. The out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2281), All register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2282). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use area RWM initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

Thereafter, a RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the outside gaming area RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the gaming area outside RAM abnormality determination area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on next time.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. A switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , restores the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2289), and returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the out-of-use area RWM initialization process. The out-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process, and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). Thereafter, the process returns to the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to perform the initial setting when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As described later in FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a 2-byte command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, where the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. The value is the area value plus 1.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2301). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2304).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command consisting of 2 bytes, with the upper byte being 30H and the lower byte indicating the state before the power outage.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in Figure 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a 2-byte command that notifies the gaming status regarding the special symbol, with the upper byte being 31H and the lower byte being the special symbol when a power outage occurs. Shows the state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

Further, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the setting value command is a 2-byte command that notifies the setting value, with the upper byte being A1H and the lower byte indicating the setting value.

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is transmitted to display the pending number on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is also possible to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. In addition, the order in which the special symbol reservation number command is sent is that it can be sent during the transmission of these commands, even after the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command are sent. You can.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of whether the setting change mode is set. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF of the setting key 971 is detected and the setting change/confirmation process is ended. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

Note that when executing the setting change/confirmation process, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only in the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted in order for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 makes notifications corresponding to states such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormality.

In addition, in the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment function by the hall employee (the peripheral board box 1520) is stopped. (Adjustment of volume and brightness using the volume provided on the screen) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display whether the mode is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is in an abnormal state. . In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, notification may be made using some or all of the lamps (which may include lamps provided on the door frame 3).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike what is shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and the A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on process in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command, once at the end of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs the above-mentioned operations according to the normal game start ready state (A001H), setting confirmation mode (A002H), setting change mode (A003H), and RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is made in this manner (see FIG. 184). Although not shown in FIG. 184, the notification of the state in which the normal game can be started is performed by displaying a demonstration screen or performing a standby state to explain the game contents.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. Different from that shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of another example 2 defines four states: 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and also notifies the state before the power outage. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. Further, if the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

In addition, as mentioned above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information about the gaming state at the time of a power outage in order to restore the state before the power outage, but the power-on state command , the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving mode, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 1 is added to this value, and 2 is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred.

If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2312). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2314), and a power-off process is executed to execute necessary processes before the power is turned off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2316).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled to the RAM protection register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. Therefore, by setting the prohibited area of the RAM protect register to be invalid, the reset function caused by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), thereby allowing access to all areas. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. The power OFF process is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main process (FIG. 221), and necessary processes are executed before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Thereafter, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the gaming area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process is being executed normally. In this sense, the power down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage processing has been executed normally, the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been determined to be normal, and if 5AH is set in the power down check area as a result, the main control Initialization of the area outside the gaming control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been executed normally are provided within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. . This is because double determination is made between inside the gaming control area and outside the gaming control area, and since the inside of the gaming control area and the outside of the gaming control area do not share a single storage area, they cannot be determined independently. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage processing was executed normally, if 5AH is set to that flag by mistake and the power is restored without performing the power outage processing, it will be mistakenly assumed that the power outage processing was executed normally. will be determined. By performing double determination in this way, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, an area where the lower bytes (**00H to **FFH) or upper bytes (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap). This allows the data to be restored correctly even if the data is rewritten due to a problem such as noise.

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2325), and are saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326) and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2335 is NO, so winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed. For example, since settings changes and settings confirmation operations are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member, are likely to sway. There is a possibility of erroneously detecting vibration. Therefore, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection sensor from detecting fraud in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. In addition, employees at the hall are equipped with magnets for collecting balls that have fallen on the floor, which can prevent false alarms caused by the magnets held by employees when changing or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for disabling (or restricting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after transitioning to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). (after completion of the above), fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during a setting process), fraud detection is disabled (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when a setting process for changing a setting value is executed. This is because the hardware random numbers that determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether settings are changed or settings are confirmed, so the random numbers generated by the software are also updated at the same time as the hardware random numbers are activated. By updating settings even during the processing of setting changes and setting confirmation, inconsistencies between hardware random numbers and software random numbers are less likely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in the game and the design value of the expected value that will lead to a jackpot during a specific performance. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the setting value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the setting value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it can be used at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the gaming state (for example, when changing the jackpot probability). It is preferable to perform this in response to the establishment of a specific condition, such as at the time of switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), or at the time of fraud detection (for example, when a door is opened, or when a magnetic field is detected). The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed by making the determination when a specific condition is satisfied, instead of making the determination periodically at short intervals like when executing the timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value in the setting status management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value in the setting status management area immediately after can be checked (S2335). It is controlled so that normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2338). Then, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and register are saved as in other out-of-gaming area processes, and returned after the process is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a process outside the game control area. In addition, if the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area and does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process within the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area, saving and restoring of the flag register (steps S2337, S2340), which are executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339), becomes unnecessary.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO format transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating a RAM abnormality is transmitted every timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM error is sent only once, the RAM error will not be re-notified if the command is missing, and the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to know the status of the gaming machine. It is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the status of the gaming machine, abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the status of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, no commands other than the power-on operation command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 because no games are played, so the power-on operation command is repeatedly sent as long as the RAM abnormality continues. are doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of this embodiment executes a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is executed at a predetermined cycle in the same system of commands (for example, a power-on operation command). , 1, 2, 3, etc.), and the second case is that the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at a predetermined period without limiting the number of times while the pachinko machine is operating. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly sent regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 receives it correctly, and other game-related commands are not sent when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command that is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command regarding the RAM abnormality, it issues a notification regarding the RAM abnormality. Note that even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command regarding the RAM abnormality and continue the current notification. By invalidating subsequent commands, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

Commands related to RAM abnormalities may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing at which they are sent. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the timing at which it is sent. For example, by setting the power-on operation command (A004H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at power-on, and the power-on operation command (A005H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the setting values and setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during normal gaming) can be determined to have become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality continues when the power is turned on, it can be reported that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it can be notified that the set value is abnormal.

Note that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined to be the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2354), executes the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 (step S2355), and returns to the calling process.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when clearing the RAM due to a setting change, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and starts outputting the security signal in conjunction with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. If the power goes out before the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the delay time elapses, and if a hot start is performed after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, the output of the security signal must be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Accordingly, it can be determined whether there is an abnormality in the security signal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is selected, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359, S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The process returns to the calling process without executing the call.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and executes the process of displaying the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment ports (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , returns to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. The main difference between the third example described below and the second example described above is that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the second example described above.

In addition, in another example 3, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this third example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set correctly, the game machine will stop functioning as a RAM error and will not be able to play, but the settings will not be changed. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, if the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is enabled, a reset may occur due to incorrect access to the prohibited area of RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes power-on processing, Since the power outage process has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only will the game be initialized by RAM clear processing, but the RAM protection register will be prohibited because the game cannot be restarted unless the RAM abnormality is cleared (setting change operation) by a hall employee. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

Note that the prohibited area may be set to be valid. By enabling the prohibited area, if there is unauthorized access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. This can improve resistance to fraud.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state that is not a power outage).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2406). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage becomes stable. In the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is not cleared, so the watchdog timer generates a reset unless the power outage is canceled. In this watchdog timer reset, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing a security check unlike a system reset, and power-on processing is executed. Therefore, unless the power outage warning signal is canceled in the loop of step S2406, the process does not exit from the loop.

In this way, the power outage determination process for detecting a power outage warning signal is performed firstly in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and secondly in step S2450 of the main control side main processing during normal gaming. It is executed in some places. In the latter (step S2450), power outage processing is executed after step S2462 by detecting a power outage, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), power outage processing is not executed even if a power outage is detected. Note that during the loop period, the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained, so that the state at the time of the power outage can be correctly restored without executing power outage processing.

Note that the reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by accessing a watchdog timer or an area other than the designated area of the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, a program is started after a security check is executed for several hundred milliseconds, but in a user reset, the program is started immediately without executing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal gaming processing, the power outage processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Ru. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the gaming state is initialized by RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. On the other hand, even if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, the RAM error release operation (setting change operation) by the hall staff is not performed and the state at the time of the power outage is not correct. I can return.

In this way, regarding resets caused by the watchdog timer, the reason why there are cases where a setting change operation is required to cancel the RAM error in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 and cases where it is not necessary is that it is normal. The occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during game play is when a software malfunction occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the game state different from the game state at the time of the power outage is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during power-on processing occurs when a hardware malfunction occurs, and the possibility of data stored in the main control RAM 1312 being destroyed is low, so the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to change the

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, similar processing is performed for other types of user resets than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described process can be executed by a reset that occurs due to one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2407). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2408). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2408. Note that the determination as to whether the power outage warning signal indicates a power outage does not need to be performed in both steps S2406 and S2408, and may be determined in either one.

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2410), and the RAM outside the game area confirmation process at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2412).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in another example 3 is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415, S2416). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2418), and the process advances to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, so in the subsequent processing, a RAM abnormality is determined as a determination of "RAM abnormality" and "gaming state before power cut." There is no need to re-execute processing (processing to determine whether checksums and backup flags match), and the size of the program can be reduced.

In addition, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power outage or the judgment result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is tentatively set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting this, you can delete unnecessary processing and reduce the size of the program. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, and YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436 It is necessary to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, the JUMP You can reduce the number of commands.

Source code example when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436 ;Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
Source code example when temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, abnormality in the gaming control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common, the calling source cannot be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it has not been determined whether 01H or 00H will be recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but in this case, 00H will be set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on. Recording processing is required. For this reason, the processing contents differ between the processing at power-on and the RAM clearing processing at the time of setting change, and therefore, dedicated processing is required for each section other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 common both when the settings are changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: Setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;Equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W ;Increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;Increase
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436
Source code example when temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, when the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal, The work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be restored by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the RAM will be cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, the power will be cut off, and when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the settings When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the power outage (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side can display effects (backgrounds, decorative patterns) corresponding to each gaming state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command is used when creating.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process advances to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power failure is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, abnormalities outside the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2432), and the process shown in FIG. 217 when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that an unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. Note that in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately; however, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when proceeding to confirm the settings.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. Note that the time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is not set, and the interruption of the CTC1 for the normal gaming remains set to be prohibited.

Then, a hardware random number (for example, a winning/losing random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number, and a power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting change processing. In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area. Determination is made (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, where the first main loop process for setting change processing is repeatedly executed. .

If it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) Execute. Before executing the second main loop process, first set the timer interrupt cycle time in CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting process), and stop the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing is started (step S2455), and interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the power-off processing in the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 228, processing for backing up data to restore the state before the power outage occurs is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may also be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the third example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided, one for the setting change processing and the other for the normal game timer interrupt. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can switch between executing the process of calculating the base value and not executing the process. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal gaming. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2473 is NO, so winning detection is performed. , no fraud is detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like. For example, while a parlor employee is changing or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position close to the neighboring pachinko machine. For this reason, while a setting change operation or setting confirmation is being performed, it is possible to detect any misbehavior by radio waves or the like in the neighboring pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing, normally the value in the gaming state management area is other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value indicating the start of gaming (00H) is set in the setting state management area. Although it is not necessary to determine whether or not the game is recorded, this determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized transition to setting change mode during normal gaming.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474).For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when receiving a command to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is limited, unsent commands may remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit may be in a full state or full state. If it is close to , it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit depending on the free status of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is It may also be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. In addition, a predetermined upper limit is set on the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit each time a command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed. Without determining free space, if the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, it is preferable to store the remaining commands in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmit them to the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the upper limit number is preferably set to be the same as or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, if the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible with one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80÷20=4, so it is preferable to set the upper limit to 4 commands. Note that, in practice, the upper limit may be set to five commands, which is one more. This is because although the maximum length of a command is assumed to be 20 bits, there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Note that regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area is It is preferable that the capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229, unlike other timer interrupt processing, random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. Similarly to random numbers, random number update processing may be executed in timer interrupt processing for setting change processing.

In addition, in another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it cannot be called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good too.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations; one can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel serial communication circuit for output, and transmits commands to the peripheral control board 1510 through one channel, and to the payout control board 951 through the other channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have gaming value, so they are not easily affected by noise etc., and are transferred at low speed to avoid abnormal prize ball commands due to garbled or missing commands. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, commands for effects without any gaming value are sent, so the effects only need to be restored with the next command.Furthermore, a large number of commands are sent, and the effects are performed with good response and the game is completed. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly so as not to make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, the response of the performance is poor (for example, even if a game ball enters the starting prize opening and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy about the possibility of a malfunction.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and base display output processing is executed (step S2501). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers are saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not to migrate. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2508), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 4]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4, which will be described below, processing related to setting changes is executed in the main control side main processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the third example described above.

In addition, in another example 4, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the fourth alternative example executes steps S2481 to S2484 in place of step S2452 of the main control side main process of the third example (FIG. 228). The setting change and setting confirmation process is executed in the main control side main process, not only when the timer interrupt process for setting process and the timer interrupt process for normal game process are provided separately as in Example 4. It is also applicable to other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458), Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of Alternative Example 1, FIG. 223 of Alternative Example 2) is executed, and the setting process (Step 2068 of FIG. 190, Step S2341 of FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt process. ) and normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, CTC switching in steps S2454 and S2455, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processes as the main control side main processing of Example 3 (FIG. 228) are given the same reference numerals.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when a power outage occurrence is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

Thereafter, depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF. If the operation to end the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing has not been completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, changing the set value multiple times with a single operation is prevented. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is executed once. This is to prevent setting changes using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process to be executed later. Note that only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. Thereafter, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450 to repeatedly execute the first main loop process for setting change processing. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In addition, in the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is continued to be cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing (inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is not referenced.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, set the timer interrupt cycle time to CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the interrupt of CTC0, start the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2455), CTC1 is set to enable interrupts (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. In addition, if it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned ON during normal gaming (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that and controls the peripheral control. The board 1510 may perform notification effects on the display device. Since this notification effect is normally performed during the game, it is desirable that it not interfere with the progress of the normal game. Characters or specific symbols may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is turned on may be displayed as the game progresses.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is an access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the access area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by accessing this prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may be configured to be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the fourth example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal gaming, and there is always one main loop for setting change processing. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can switch between executing the process of calculating the base value and not executing the process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is something that

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

In addition, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, special symbols, normal Processing related to the progress of the game, such as displaying fluctuating symbols, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection is performed regarding the progress of the game, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shock (vibration) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism and vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the gaming state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent activity that involves unauthorized transition to setting change processing. Further, it is determined whether a value indicating the start of the game (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area before switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476). Note that if a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command may be generated to notify that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed. If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and this is because some abnormality has occurred. This abnormality notification may be performed by using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or sound, such as magnets, radio waves, vibrations, or the like, or by outputting a security signal from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted and notification may be made singly or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474).For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when receiving a command to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similar to the process of setting change/setting confirmation.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the completion of the main process S2480 or S2481 instead of the timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike other timer interrupt processes, random number update process (R_ATART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random numbers generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but random number updating processing may be performed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine including a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 that emits light when illuminated, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a special symbol variation display game is performed. This type of pachinko machine uses a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate to make complex effects possible, for example, by superimposing images. Further, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the liquid crystal display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Additionally, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax between the left and right eyes, providing an even greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the production using light guide plates has become boring, and there is a need to improve the interest through a new light emission production. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single sheet, and there is a demand for displaying even more diverse patterns to create highly interesting performances.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the presentation unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 as seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit.

The presentation unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The presentation unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The display unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a first picture board 2611 and a second picture board attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first picture board 2611, and a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the second picture board 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of emitting light are mounted.

The first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are arranged perpendicularly to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be irradiated onto the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible, and the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by numerous uneven first reflecting portions that reflect light from above toward the front side, and a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) that reflects light from above toward the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a countless number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, when the display unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 to emit light, the first picture 2621 can be displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 emits light. When the light is emitted, a second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are light emitting sources with strong directionality (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 using any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 has finely formed unevenness that constitutes a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622. , when the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and the back side arranged on the rear side The various decorations of the unit 3000, the performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600, etc. can be clearly viewed. The light guide plate 2610 has a transparent area where the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back surface can be seen even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, and a transparent area that does not reflect the light irradiated onto the light guide plate 2610 and has a polished area. A matte area with glass-like processing, a lame area where a reflective pattern is formed that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation within the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting area of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area is provided in which a reflective pattern is formed so that the light emission changes depending on the direction in which light travels within the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes part of the effect of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first picture 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first picture 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, by lighting a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and switching the lighting locations, the moving area 2621a emits light and the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be made to appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are repeated twice, but the repeating may be repeated any number of times. By configuring the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area multiple times, the first pattern 2621 can represent a complex movement. In addition, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, moving areas and lame areas are alternately repeated, but the characteristics (i.e., because the moving area emits light) without sandwiching the lame area between the moving areas. Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color changes depending on the light guide plate LED 2613, each moving area 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light rays extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that diagonally extending light lines correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one LED 2614 for a light guide plate emits light, a streak of light that extends diagonally downward of the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the portion of the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 where the LED 2614 for a light guide plate emits light.

This second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610, so the brightness of the light streak becomes darker as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the further down the light guide plate 2610 is, the more the light streaks appear to extend backward, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. It is possible to create the illusion that the light guide plate 2610 is illuminated, and to enjoy the light emitting effect produced by the light guide plate 2610.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflective portion so that stereoscopic vision is possible due to the parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, if we focus on one light streak that makes up the second picture 2622, the second reflecting section that emits the light that images the light streak on the player's retina can be placed on different light guide plates 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at a certain position, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment has a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a first pattern 2621 that is projected by light irradiation from one direction. The moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are formed with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel. , the first picture can be composed of a moving picture area (dynamic picture) that appears to move and a static picture area (static picture) that appears stationary.

Moreover, a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 can be displayed with one light guide plate 2610 depending on the direction of illumination. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red with a single wavelength or white with a mixture of light of multiple wavelengths) is irradiated from the side, and light of multiple colors is irradiated from above (for example, adjacent LED groups 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, when irradiated with light from the lateral direction, a static pattern appears in the matte area 2621e and glitter areas 2621b, 2621d of the first pattern 2621, and a moving pattern appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a. is reflected. That is, the first pattern 2621 that is irradiated with light from the lateral direction creates a light guide plate effect using both a static pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture based on the first picture 2621 will be displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is performed using a first picture 2621 as a static picture that is irradiated with light from the side, and a second picture 2622 that is irradiated with light from above. In this case, the static picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, a moving pattern may be displayed after a static pattern is displayed, or a static pattern may be displayed after a moving pattern is displayed. In this way, by displaying the static picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform a variety of effects. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a static pattern, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character appears to descend. On the other hand, by displaying the background as a static image and then displaying the character as a moving image, it is possible to create an effect in which the character moves at a specific location.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged to overlap. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and from above, in the area on the light guide plate 2610 where the two patterns overlap, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, if the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. If the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transparent area 2621f is provided where the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and a pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is displayed in the game. This allows people to easily see stereoscopic images.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping each other. If the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the picture 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622 is provided and projecting the picture based on the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622, it is possible to easily show the second picture 3D to the player. can be made to see.

[13-2. Configuration of light guide plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be explained. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (in particular, the arrangement of the reflective portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transparent region 2621f through which the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen, and a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the direction in which the light travels. Lamé regions 2621b and 2621d are provided with reflective patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are provided with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting section.

The reflecting portion is formed by a recess provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflecting the light at the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light, allowing the player to visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain degree of spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second picture 2622 are visible when light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by a reflecting section 2650, which will be described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along a light streak. Note that the size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably from several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, and is extremely smaller than the light streak appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown large in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and so that the perpendicular to the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and hits the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 237(B).

Further, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the light streak appearing in the moving area 2622a, that is, light traveling parallel to the reflective surface 2651 along the reflective surface 2651 does not hit the reflective surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflective portion 2650 and is reflected onto the light guide plate 2610. No radiation is emitted from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction that is at an angle (particularly an acute angle) with the light streak appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650, leading to Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light of the wavelength that reaches the player more often is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown by the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the direction in which the reflected light is emitted may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that illuminates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits highly directional light, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a directional light beam. Therefore, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth. That is, since the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are located at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are different. There are no virtual intersections on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear recessed, and the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light is located in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear to be in the foreground.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflective surface 2651, or may be arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, may be formed at an angle that does not reflect light toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. The light arriving at the reflecting section 2660 (through multiple paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. The reflective portion 2660 of the lame area reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, so when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame area 2621b will sparkle. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit light in different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in different colors, the lame area 2621b will sparkle with a mixture of a plurality of colors.

Note that the matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflective portion, but is processed into frosted glass-like amorphous irregularities, and does not reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 toward the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first picture and the second picture has been described, but next, an example of the light guide plate representing different pictures will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflecting portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on its back surface, and reflects the light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels within the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Four of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 are illustrated: a first specific light incident section 2630a, a second specific light incident section 2630b, a third specific light incident section 2630c, and a fourth specific light incident section 2630d. A specific light incident section 2630a to a seventh specific light incident section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident sections 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and it is preferable to determine the number of specific light incident sections depending on the type of emitted light color. The first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section (not shown) are repeated in order from left to right in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 (seventh specific light incident section 2630a).

The reflecting section 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 travels inside the light guide plate 2610), and also serves as a guide. It has a boundary surface that is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflective portion 2670 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 and outputs the reflected light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 to which it does not correspond, and outputs the light in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflecting section 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective section 2670 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the uncorresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflection section 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the light enters the pachinko machine 1. To the player seated in front of the player, it appears that the reflecting section 2670 does not emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflecting section 2670 is shown as having a triangular recess and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630. It is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630.

The plurality of reflection sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entrance sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflection sections 2670a and second specific light entrance sections 2630b correspond to the first specific light entrance section 2630a. A plurality of second reflection sections 2670b corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d. 2670d and the like.

In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be displayed by emitting light in different manners by causing a specific reflecting section 2670 among the plurality of reflecting sections 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflection sections 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflection sections 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections. It includes a pattern 2623d consisting of a portion 2670d, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the pictures are arranged sequentially and circularly from the center to the outside.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip shape extending left and right, and has LEDs 2614 mounted at positions corresponding to each specific light incident section 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident section 2630b, and a third specific light incident section 2630c. a third LED group 2614c corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident section (not shown). (not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light incident part (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light incident part (not shown) (not shown). Note that in FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are illustrated, and the illustration of the fifth to seventh LED groups is omitted. Each LED group consists of a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second picture board 2612, divided in the left-right direction of the second picture board 2612, and arranged in order from left to right. (in the order in which the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be explained in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident part 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflective parts 2670b, third reflective part 2670c, fourth reflective part 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the first reflective part 2670a appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance part 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, third reflecting section 2670c, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the second reflecting section 2670b appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of second reflection parts 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident part 2630c, and is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting section 2670c appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d toward the front of the light guide plate 2610, Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, third reflecting section 2670c, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the fourth reflecting section 2670d appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of fourth reflection parts 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident part 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is illuminated by the corresponding reflection part 2670. The light is reflected toward the front, and the other reflecting sections 2670 reflect the light toward other than the front, so that only the corresponding reflecting section 2670 appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern on the screen glow.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, each of the plurality of pictures 2623 can be made to emit light, and by making the plurality of pictures emit light in sequence, it is possible to create a moving animation. You can create a light-emitting effect like this. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 in which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is created in which the patterns emit light like an animation that expands from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. I can do it.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by switching the position of the group of LEDs that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f and the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g reflect the incident light, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light enters from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e and the sixth specific light incident section 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is transferred to the fifth reflecting section. 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f reflect, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d and the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, the light guide plate The fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflect the light incident on the fourth reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light enters from the third specific light incident section 2630c and the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflecting section. 2670c and the fourth reflective part 2670d reflect, and the pattern in which the third reflective part 2670cd and the fourth reflective part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light incident section 2630b and the third specific light incident section 2630c, the light guide plate The second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c reflect the light incident on the second reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position of the LED groups (LED elements) that emit light without changing the number, the size of the picture can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light moving outward from the center. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident section 2630b to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is transferred to the second reflecting section 2670b. - The seventh reflecting section 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b - the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the third reflective part 2670c to the seventh reflective part 2670g. The pattern in which the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the fourth direction. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflective portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light incident part 2630e to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflective part 2670e to the seventh reflective part 2670g. However, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflective portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, the size of the picture (light emitting range) can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the first reflection part 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection section 2670f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern changes. The color changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of pictures on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting section 2670 constituting one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, control is performed so that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident section 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directionality and illuminate a predetermined angular range from the front of the LED.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (which are light emitting sources constituting one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second picture board 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where light enters. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the area where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (in the same pattern The pattern is spaced apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length that is 0.87 times α (distance between LEDs that emit light).

Generalizing, when the length of the repeating unit of the LED group is α, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L=tanθ×α/2

In this way, when a moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be placed a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610. That is, a moving pattern area that displays a moving pattern is smaller than a static pattern area that displays a stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 is made to have the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the light guide plate 2610 can produce a moving effect in an area narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the performance of the variable display game, the player can be made aware of the progress of the variable display game without obstructing the visibility of the special symbols normally displayed near the ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. . Furthermore, by performing the moving effect in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player is watching, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by creating a sense of excitement for the player due to the moving effect.

In the embodiment described above, an example was explained in which the light guide plate 2610 was attached to the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000. In this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (the An area where moving performance is not possible is created within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 (opening window part) which is visible from the light guide plate 2610, and the area where moving performance is not possible is visible to the player. Furthermore, the area in which moving effects can be performed becomes narrower, and the effects of the effects are reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where a moving effect is not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where a moving effect is not possible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is possible to make a moving effect in all (or most) of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located away from the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 is equipped with various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable presentation units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. Thereby, the board serving as the light source can be placed in a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs that cause the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made into an area where moving effects can be performed, making the player aware of the unnaturalness caused by the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED are arranged in correspondence with each specific light incident section. A group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting section 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light incident section 2630a, and the pattern where the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting part 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting part 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflecting part 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the sixth reflecting part 2670f reflects the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light in seven-colored streaks.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 235, which has a pattern in which two lines of light intersect, by changing the emitted light color of each LED group 2614 in the same way as explained in FIG. 244, The color of the pattern (streaks of light) changes, creating a moving effect in which the pattern lights up in seven colors of flowing light. Further, by using left-right eye parallax so that the light beams appear farther back or toward the front as they move away from the light source, a picture with a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern using the light guide plate 2610 will be explained.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern is displayed when viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), the reflective section 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflective surface, so the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in multiple directions. , reaches the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflecting section 2660 reflects light that travels within the light guide plate 2610 and arrives at the reflecting section 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, via a plurality of paths), and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), there is no parallax between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting section 2660, so the player can view the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610. It will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting section 2650R The light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective part 2650L and the reflective part 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less apart), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 constituted by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eyes is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern located at the rear of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

In this way, according to the presentation unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by a single light guide plate 2610, so it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation, etc. Therefore, the thickness of the display unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable presentation unit 3100, the upper rear movable presentation unit 3200, the upper front movable presentation unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the inside of the gaming area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. By performing movable performances using the upper front movable performance unit 3300 and the like, it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, entertain the players, and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the presentation unit, the decoration, and the presentation display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns appear due to the light emission of the plurality of reflection parts 2670, and a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation is displayed. This makes it possible to have a strong impact on players who are accustomed to light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, to surprise and entertain players, and to create something good for players. It is possible to make the player think that something may happen, increase the player's expectations for the game, and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the light-emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610, the light-emitting display of the picture 2623 can be seen from other players who are far away from the front. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed. To enable a player to play a game without worrying, to enjoy the game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the illuminated symbols do not interfere with the game within the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be seen in good condition from the player's side, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent players from feeling distrustful and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern board 2611 and the second picture board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player's side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610, so when the picture is displayed by emitting light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact and surprise the players who thought that there is no such thing, and it is possible to enjoy the light-emitting display of a plurality of pictures by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of mutually different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be combined. Since the effects can be shown to the players, various effects can be created by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making the players entertained by the effects provided by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to prevent players from losing interest in playing games.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 2610, and to give a sense of depth and three-dimensionality to the patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light. A performance (display performance) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochrome LEDs or full-color LEDs. Furthermore, the number of specific light incident parts, reflective parts, and LED groups can be selected as appropriate depending on the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained. FIGS. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using light guide plates.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or preview effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249(A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen turns black (blackout). This blackout causes the player to focus on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first picture board 2611 is turned on, and the first picture 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to focus on the first symbol 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the movement effect may be to move the image 1611 toward the first picture 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same color as the first picture 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first picture 2621, as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape, as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the moving image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 may be images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the character's name) with different fonts and colors. It can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, so the back of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249(D). It is also preferable that the image be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are determined over time. It may be changed accordingly.

During the moving performance, the aspect of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first picture 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or gradually (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving performance. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Moreover, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. The first picture 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is extinguished from the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen darkens to black (blackout). This blackout creates a gap for making the player look at the liquid crystal display device 1600 and increasing his or her anticipation for the next performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with high probability of winning) that is different from the first picture 2621 or the moved and displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, increasing the size of the character image 1612 increases the player's expectation of winning, but decreasing the size of the character image 1612 lowers the player's expectation of winning. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first pattern 2621. Furthermore, in addition to displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from a certain direction. Alternatively, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. By projecting character images with different sizes and facial expressions on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, it is possible to provide a dramatic display with a sense of depth, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600.

In the above-described moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first picture 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is displayed, the first pattern 2621 is A movement effect is started in which an image moving toward the projected position is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time during which the first picture 2621 is projected (the time for the light guide plate effect) and the time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the same as the first picture 2621. The light guide plate effect in which the image 1611 is displayed may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Moreover, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time for the image 1611 to move.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern at which the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the pattern appears to be stationary.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, expectations for a jackpot are high when a moving symbol appears, and expectations for a jackpot are low when only a static symbol appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed static pattern 2621 A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to a moving pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(C). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), a static pattern 2621 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved toward the pattern 1613 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 254(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends without switching the static pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the production shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display production (for example, a specific reach production, pseudo-continuation production, or specific look-ahead production) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned specific display production is displayed. The specific image 1611 performs the moving effect together with the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern does not need to perform the moving effect.

In this way, in the performance of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the light guide plate 2610 is used to selectively display a static pattern and a moving pattern, the player has expectations for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Next, an example of a performance in which a performance using a moving body is added to a performance display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears and disappears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in short cycles as the variable display game progresses. Repeatedly increases the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a movement effect is created in which a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610, and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 255(D). .

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light emission mode (emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the pachinko machine more interesting.

In the example described above, the movable body 3601 was made to appear instead of the pattern where the images are gathered, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the movable body 3601 represents a torso and the light guide plate 2610 represents a face, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the production shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as a production that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), a pattern 2621 is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), a pattern 2621 is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. A movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 256(C). You can. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(D), the movable body 3601 appears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), a pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), a pattern 1613 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) toward the pattern 1613 on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 256(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable object does not appear and the variable display game ends in a loss.

In this way, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate can be used to suggest that a movable object will appear.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In conventional pachinko machines, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port where one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. There have been cases where fraudulent acts have been carried out by reading data output from the main control MPU 1311 or inputting fraudulent signals to the main control MPU 1311. For this reason, a configuration is required that makes it difficult to detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside. It becomes difficult to read or input data in accordance with the timing of the lines.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when an inspection agency inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, the signal input to the solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, 5V on/off signal) was branched off and used as a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted within the main control board 1310 described above is output as a test signal, the testing agency will need a device to analyze the serial signal, making it difficult to use the serial signal as a test signal. It is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits signals through serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise ways to output test signals. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, a test signal whose level changes at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is generated. was assumed to be generated. If the output transistor of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured with an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level can be changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting input through serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and a part is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise ways to accept input signals. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be input directly to a general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without inputting it to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before interrupt processing is executed, so the signal level can be detected even when the timer interrupt processing is not performed, such as immediately after power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use expansion I/O using chip select, and the number of signals input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 is not necessary. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is a block diagram of the main control MPU 1311 and its surroundings. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310. Note that in FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, dispensing control board 951, etc.) and a main control board 1310. A synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, outputting control signals for other devices (solenoids, etc.), and outputting from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors. It has a general-purpose port into which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception ports is not limited to what is illustrated.

Note that even more serial-to-parallel converter circuits may be connected by making connections like the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, converts it to a predetermined clock signal. Output data from the serial port at the timing of . The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (starting winning opening, big winning opening counting switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch), photo sensor, etc. The game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but it may also have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having 8-bit input ports in parallel.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level, The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after a serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at any timing.

Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , the data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched within the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 are connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing to dynamically light up the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but may also have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having an 8-bit output port in parallel.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). Output a segment signal at the appropriate timing to light up the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED whose anode side is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a driving current is passed from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. flows. However, since integrated circuits with the same configuration are used for the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the direction of the current output from the driver circuit's output transistor) polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 may each use an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting serial signals and parallel signals may be used by switching between a parallel-to-serial conversion function and a serial-to-parallel conversion function.

Further, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the aforementioned serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, take in serial data input when chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and when CS is at 1 Output from the parallel port at the timing when the voltage rises. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and the voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. In addition, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Moreover, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can only control one channel (16 bits), and the same branched signal including chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. In other words, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Signals change at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the test terminal 1348. Note that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid with 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V test signal. In this way, by using two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Of the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thicker, and the pattern on the output side of the test signal where only a relatively small current flows is made thicker. The pattern can be thin. Note that it is not necessary to make the pattern thicker; it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. Patterns can be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the actual cross-sectional area, or inner layer patterns can be formed to increase the actual cross-sectional area. May be increased.

In addition, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal from the other conversion circuit will not be disturbed and the output signal will not be affected. does not occur. In other words, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output a test signal with the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal, regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate testing. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. Further, a testing circuit placement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and a testing terminal 1348 are provided in the testing circuit placement area. The circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) are installed only in pachinko machines 1 that are inspected by an inspection agency, and are not included in pachinko machines that are generally available on the market. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a generally commercially available pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, it is not possible to transmit the test signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. The relay test terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the test signal is not detected by a cheater and used for cheating.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no components are mounted in the testing circuit arrangement area, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction, so the wiring (printed pattern) in the test circuit placement area should be pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or connected to GND). ) to reduce the effects of noise.

Furthermore, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not use surface-mounted components, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit placement area are not mounted on commercially available pachinko machines 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the test circuit can be made smaller, the test circuit arrangement area can be made smaller, and the main control board 1310 can be made smaller. Similarly, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not have any components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310; 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

Note that among the components of the test circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the test terminal 1348 may be provided on a separate board disposed near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally available on the market. In this case as well, the inspection signal is not outputted from the generally commercially available pachinko machine 1.

In this way, by concentrating and arranging the circuit components used for inspecting the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit placement area, it is easier to find missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the addition of additional parts for fraudulent purposes. Easy to find installation. Furthermore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the test terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 can be configured with high noise resistance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit components placed in the test circuit placement area may be placed in a different orientation (for example, by 180 degrees as shown) than the circuit components of the same type placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310. (rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the testing circuit placement area and other locations on the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish between the components used for normal gaming and the components for testing. In the manufacturing process of a commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the testing circuit placement area.

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed, for example, by silk printing. It is preferable that the numbers be attached together with the symbols and numbers that follow the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are designated as IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits placed in the testing circuit placement area are designated with symbols after IC12. In this way, it is possible to attach consistent symbols and numbers to the game control circuit components mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to easily check the circuit components after they are mounted on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the gaming control parts, it will be easier to distinguish between the connectors connected to the gaming control parts and the inspection terminals. It is possible to distinguish between cables and prevent incorrect wiring. In particular, if the symbol or number of the testing terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the other party's testing device to which it is connected, it is convenient to connect the cable during testing, and connection errors can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused and empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the empty ports so that they are concentrated at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable to arrange the terminals of the unused ports at a location where they are concentrated. By arranging empty terminals in a concentrated manner, areas on the main control board 1310 where no printed pattern is provided are consolidated, making it easier to discover missing parts and detect fraudulent attachment of additional parts. It's getting easier.

In addition, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged in a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, to which a solenoid is connected) in terms of the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) of the side where the vacant port terminal is located. Therefore, when adding additional functions to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without having to route a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, data bus wiring can be reduced, and unauthorized attachment of additional parts can be easily detected. In other words, the large number of data buses connected to multiple parallel interface circuits has been eliminated and now only a few signal lines, including control lines, have been created, resulting in wiring with complex circuit patterns for the large number of data buses. This results in a clean circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the data line routing distance, the main control board 1310 can be configured to be resistant to noise.

Furthermore, since the number of data lines is reduced, circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of data lines, so I/O ICs (parallel interface circuits, serial interface circuits) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 can be configured to be more resistant to noise.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (anode terminal of the LED). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). Output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Furthermore, the parallel output port at address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

On the common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED), the output port to be turned on is switched at a constant cycle (for example, an interrupt every 4 ms). If you pay attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms), and only PA7 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms). is repeatedly turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, if you focus on the output ports of channel A by grouping the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A, turn ON only PA0 and PA4 in the timer interrupt processing, and then turn on only PA0 and PA4 in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON, and only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later) at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By performing this constant cycle operation using serial communication, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as a serial signal and read as a signal at address D5.

Furthermore, the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311 are input with operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, a power outage notice signal, a main payment ACK signal, and a detection signal of the frame open detection switch. ing. Because these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the point requested by the program) or outside of timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Furthermore, general-purpose input/output ports (input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (cheating, malfunction, etc.) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and since they need to be monitored in real time (at the time the program requests them), a parallel/serial conversion circuit is required. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without any intervention. Further, based on detection signals from these sensors and switches, an abnormality is notified by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or by voice. This abnormality notification causes an employee of the pachinko parlor to come to check the status of the pachinko machine, effectively stopping the game. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to a general-purpose input/output port and detect them multiple times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress false detections due to the influence of noise.

This double-reading process is performed by continuously executing read commands in one timer interrupt process to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, You can execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or execute multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. This is done by executing instructions and determining the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when continuously determining the level of a port via a parallel-to-serial converter circuit, the level can only be detected at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when determining the level of a general-purpose port continuously, the level can only be detected within 1 microsecond. Levels can be detected at the following intervals, and signal levels can be detected in short cycles.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, signals from various switches and sensors that require real-time performance can be directly input to the general-purpose input port and general-purpose output port without using expansion I/O using chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 are transferred to the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7. You may also enter

Furthermore, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V through a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential and reduce the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce it. Furthermore, if the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be left open, but it is better to pull it up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent level changes at the output port from becoming noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the test signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are input in a single port, making it easier to handle in the game control program.

Also, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period of time (so-called twice reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serially detected. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level multiple times in a short period of time and make a decision by eliminating the influence of noise. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

The general-purpose input port can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311, but the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and the signal output from the main control MPU 1311. Since both can be assigned, general-purpose input/output ports have high versatility against changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the ports reserved as spares for the addition of new functions be general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-use), and it is preferable to allocate the general-purpose input ports with priority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal will be explained.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected among PA7 to PA4. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected among PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is normally output at the data acquisition timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. Note that during this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) to prevent new data from being taken in.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, so the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described using FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be used in common by multiple models without redesigning it. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311, which is common to each model, is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is as follows. By making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component arrangement, etc. the same, performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. The main control board 1310, whose quality is stable, can be commonly used in multiple models without redesigning.

Furthermore, when mounting the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 on another input/output board 1351, a problem arises as to where to separate the circuits. One is to separate the signals using a serial signal line, and the second is to separate the signals using a parallel signal obtained by converting the serial signal. The former case is more desirable than the latter because it allows the number of interconnections between the boards to be reduced. Furthermore, even if the serial signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which data is transmitted, and it is unclear which data is being transmitted at which timing. Furthermore, it is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 using a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are installed inside the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or general-purpose port. Boards can be connected with fewer wires. The serial signal line may be connected with an electric wire or with an inter-board connector.

Further, if serial communication is used between the boards, even if the signal is obtained, it is difficult to analyze the data, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the data being transmitted will be known to an unauthorized person. In addition, the input/output board 1351 that inputs and outputs signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output signals that vary depending on the model are set on the input/output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 can be modified. The number of models that can be applied to the main control board 1310 increases without having to do so, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Furthermore, when using the main control board 1310 in other models, all you need to do is change the design of the input/output board 1351, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model, so the pachinko machine The main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. Furthermore, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without changing the size of the input/output board 1351 or the position of the mounting hole, without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, noise countermeasures that vary depending on the model may be performed on the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output drive signals for the base display 1317 are preferably placed on the main control board 1310. Note that when the base display 1317 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are placed on the input/output board 1351, and the signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are transferred to the input/output board. It is best to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the test signal is preferably placed on the main control board 1310. That is, the test circuit arrangement area and the test terminals 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the test terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so if the test terminal 1348 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the input/output signal will be connected to the main control board 1310. This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached outside the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, so even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common. Furthermore, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Furthermore, if the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input/output board box 1350 in which the input/output board 1351 is housed are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes more flexible. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must be visible on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is Since it does not have to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the board installation position can be freely determined. In this way, the form shown in FIG. 263 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that in the form shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to serial signals. In a pachinko machine, it is desirable that the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 not be output outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent a fraudster from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will be able to detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and has a constant data rate, so it is easy to guess the data rate from the outside, and as a result, the signals transmitted on the data bus cannot be obtained. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted.

Above, we have described an example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of signals that are model-dependent is mounted on the input/output board 1351. If there is a part where the resistance to fraud and noise does not deteriorate even if it is placed, it may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. For example, outputting signals that require driving current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, outputting driving signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be installed on the input/output board 1351. In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display Output to 1317 is a function that is preferably installed in 1310 on the main control board.

In addition, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 can be configured by inputting a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to an empty input terminal or connecting a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be introduced and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if a fraudster attempts to obtain some signals using a parallel bus or general-purpose port while transmitting other signals as serial signals, it will be difficult to analyze the serial signals. A fraudster needs to obtain signals from multiple locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, which increases deterrence against fraud.

[15. slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of a pachinko machine has been described.Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of a slot machine (player-type gaming machine) will be explained. Note that although the pachinko machine has been briefly described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM, similar to the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment has a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front, and various devices are provided inside the casing 4100. 4200 is provided in a single-opening manner so that it can be opened and closed. At the top of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that displays effects and information according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces sounds, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to presentations related to games. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by an effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means that can display an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means that can control the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel that prevents the rear from being seen and has a decorative pattern drawn on it, and a front panel that makes the rear visible (for example, a transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured with a display device, and when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, the reels 4301 are made visible, and images that produce the game are mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed within the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement by winding strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which is a stepping motor, and independently drives and stops rotation of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It is now possible to do so. That is, reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as a driving source for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method to increase their driving torque and static torque, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. This makes it possible to use a small-sized motor as the drive source, thereby reducing costs.

Note that in the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are defined as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are designated as a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols visible from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from the top to the bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game are visible.

A predetermined enablement line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the symbols in the middle of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line (middle line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower part of the left reel 4301a to the middle part of the middle reel 4301b to the upper part of the right reel 4301c ( The line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper left reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b to the lower right reel 4301c (lower right line) is the activation line. Then, the activation line is activated by the player inserting medals or inputting credits (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the pattern combination (roll) formed on this activation line, It is determined whether a prize (win) is achieved or not.

When a winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the active line, there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line visually. Such a line includes a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. In addition, a line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a front part (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The patterns may be visually aligned with the virtual line where they are located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle row, upward-right, downward-right lines), lines where symbols can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (symbol alignment). line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the pattern combination formed on this activated line. Determine whether or not the winning combination is successful/unachievable. For example, for bet number 1, the middle line is the active line, for bet number 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are active lines, and for bet number 3, in addition to the upper, middle, and lower lines, the upward-right and downward-right lines are active lines. shall be. Further, all lines may be made valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be made exclusive to 3-coin bets.

A payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out in the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display that displays the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion protruding toward the front is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward on the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game becomes executable when the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-card insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet input button 4205 allows one credit card to be input by pressing the button once. By pressing the max bet button 4206 once, you can input up to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) from credits, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It looks like this.

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted through the medal slot 4203, medals input as the number of bets (bet medals) using the 1-Piece Input button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or when a winning is established, and is stored as credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medals (accumulated medals) stored in the medal tray 4201 to the medal receptacle 4201. In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay win (replay win), or when medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are used as medals via the medal selector 4207, It is returned to the tray 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operating lever for starting one game. The key device 4215 is used to insert a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (eg, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and stuck inside the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, middle reel 4301b, and right reel 4301c, respectively. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c in response to a stop operation.

Furthermore, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower area of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Furthermore, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting audio, and the like.

A main board (gaming control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed at the top inside the housing. An accessory ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display provided on the front of the slot machine 4000 (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500), and the payout number display LED 4562 Alternatively, the ratio of the accessory may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not need to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the performance control board 4700) as long as it is located in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided approximately at the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. Further, inside the casing of the slot machine 4000, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided for outputting signals from the main board 4600 to an external device.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the bottom inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 accepts and stores medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination pattern is formed on the active line and a winning is achieved, the winning is achieved. The number of medals corresponding to (payout medals) or the amount of medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to additions due to winnings are paid out to the medal receptacle 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals equivalent to the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal dispensing device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal dispensing device 4110 and flow in are stored, and medals that flow in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 that displays the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 that switches the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The aforementioned one-piece input button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are operated by sensors (not shown). is used to perform operations by the player, and the detected operation signals are output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 that starts the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starts rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c), and the reel stop button 4211a is activated. , 4211b, 4211c, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 to stop the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 houses a main board 4600 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently, and when rotating, multiple types of symbols are displayed from above in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation of the reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-mentioned solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. Input sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from medal input port 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the inserted sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the input sensor 4207b within the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals is no longer accepted. The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal receiving tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also disabled, so neither bets nor accumulation of medals are made by inserting medals.

The medal dispensing device 4110 has a dispensing sensor 4110e in the dispensing port that detects the dispensed medals one by one, and a dispensing medal signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 4110e to the main board 4600. . Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is performed on the image display 4500, error lamp 4554, etc. to inform of an abnormality in medal storage, and the players, hall employees, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the main board 4600 outputs a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the aforementioned reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. Further, a drive signal is inputted to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormality signal of the medals being paid out to the main board 4600, and in response, the main board 4600 sends a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, image display 4500, etc. to notify players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and this production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input/output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC 4706, etc. are installed. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to a hall computer 4800 of the gaming hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays the role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates multiple types of DC power from the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: +5V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V"). Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies, +5V and +12V, are supplied to the reels 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. The symbol fluctuation display device 4300 is supplied with the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further, the reset switch 4112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When obtaining drive torque for rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 to rotate the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Control is performed by outputting +12V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque to maintain the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 in a stopped state, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage, control is performed.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In a game played by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to bet, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotates, and then the player presses the reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When you operate the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line and Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be awarded.

As mentioned above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel strip with a symbol drawn on it. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is selected from the display contents displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line). It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. Note that it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, if it is determined that symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in an amount equal to the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602, RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Note that the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined in FIG. 24, but is configured in the same way as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of the access area for game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 4910, which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602, in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area assigned addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Furthermore, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I/O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area; one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be explained below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 4910 will be explained. ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains its stored contents even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and although it is possible to read the stored data, it cannot be updated or deleted. It is now impossible to do so. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any nonvolatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be updatable.

The ROM area 4910 is assigned addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "1FFFH" from "0000H".

The ROM area 4910 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for controlling games. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for controlling the game is stored. That is, the game is controlled by executing the program stored in the first control area and referring to the data stored in the first data area. Note that the area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (function testing) the control program, and the like. Further, the second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional testing). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debug data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) in which programs and data for debugging (function testing) the gaming control program without being used for gaming control is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function) ( (second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. The third control area also stores data for calculating the accessory ratio. A third data area may be provided to store data for calculating accessory ratios. Note that an area (third control area) in which programs and data for calculating accessory ratios are stored without being used for game control is referred to as an area for accessory ratio calculation (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. This can be done separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the effort required to inspect the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas to which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, if the isolated area is accessed, the CPU 4601 is configured to forcibly execute reset processing. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the starting address of the first isolated area is the next one of the ending address of the first control area. The end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the third isolation area is the debug (function test) area. It may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is located between the debug (function test) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (function test) area in FIG. It may also be treated as an area for calculating physical ratios.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of RAM area 4920 will be explained. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores data derived by executing programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be capable of reading and writing data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Further, in the event of a power outage, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period of time by the backup power source.

The RAM area 4920 is assigned addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 4920 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The accessory ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating accessory ratios and calculated accessory ratios (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). In addition, it is not necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the debugging (inspection function) work area and the role object ratio calculation work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control A debugging (inspection function) work area or a role object ratio calculation work area may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area will be reduced. However, if the program is structured so that it does not use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area, it is not necessarily necessary to use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area. Good too.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers of the CPU (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area, After processing is completed, the copied values are returned to the various registers of the CPU. Note that the evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation; however, similar to the work area, it can be used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation. It may be calculated separately. Thereby, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and accessory ratio calculation.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of accessories. This area is continuous with each area (previous and subsequent areas). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the previous address ("307FH") of the debugging (inspection function) work area. Furthermore, the isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows details of the accessory ratio calculation work area on the right side. The accessory ratio calculation work area may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) may be set. In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when data is deleted, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). good. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set to the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each piece of data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation.

FIG. 269(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of paid out bonus items, the number of consecutive paid items, the total number of paid items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous area games, the number of non-advantageous area games, and the advantageous area. Store the percentage. The number of accessory payouts is the number of medals that are paid out during the operation of the accessory (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls acquired is the number of medals that are paid out during continuous bonus items operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of accessory items paid out by the total number of paid items. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive prizes paid out by the total number of prizes paid out. The number of games played in an advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is difficult to reduce, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous period is the number of games played in a non-advantageous period. , is the number of games executed in gaming states other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of paid out accessories, the number of consecutive paid out characters, the total number of paid outs, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total number of payouts in FIG. 269(B), which will be described later. Each storage area corresponds to a cumulative total of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

The number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the accessory ratio , the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272) and stored.

FIG. 269(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the consecutive bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of bonus payouts. The number of games played in advantageous sections and the advantageous section ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the storage area for each data is a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of games have been stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that lags behind the write pointer by one. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of consecutive accessory payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each 2-byte storage areas, Can store numbers up to 65535 in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the cumulative number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games if n=15), a large storage area is provided. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the total number of games are each a 3 or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games each have a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal notation. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Note that by increasing the number of games (for example, 600 games) corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer, the number of consecutive storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, data for the same 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of paid out bonus objects, the number of consecutive paid out bonus items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are as follows: This is the same as the explanation in FIG. 269(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winnings and payouts is the number of all medals paid out in the game. The number of games is the number of times the game has been played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are determined by the bonus rate calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), and the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). However, the data will not be deleted due to other triggers. For this reason, data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 269(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories or the calculated ratio of accessories is abnormal (for example, the ratio of accessories is over 100%, or the calculation result of the ratio of accessories has changed significantly from the previous calculation value) , number of accessory payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. I/O area configuration]
Next, the I/O area 4930 will be explained. Input/output ports correspond to the I/O area 4930, and by accessing the I/O area 4930, the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port. The input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, ports related to outputs such as big prize opening solenoids, and LED drive signals. The input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be explained. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 4940 of this embodiment. Parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 270. In addition, in FIG. 270, the definition of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for accessory ratio calculation, and the save area for accessory ratio calculation is omitted from illustration, but the third control area start setting and the third control area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for accessory ratio calculation are the same as the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other retreat areas. Areas other than the area set here are considered as unused (unset) areas. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although FIG. 270 shows the settings as continuous areas, the settings need not be continuous; for example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 4910 and the isolated area of the RAM 4920) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset, it becomes possible to initialize the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolated area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and initial settings can be executed again. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during a game, the initial setting can be executed again to reset the normal value. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined based on the power outage flag, but it is possible to forcibly cause RAM clearing by accessing the isolated area without setting the power outage flag. Become. On the other hand, in the pachinko machines mentioned above, games are played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue playing, but in the case of slot machines, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the processing for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 4940 are not set sequentially through user program processing such as initialization of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information to be managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset startup processing that is executed when slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset startup process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power outage occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset startup process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process to set various parameters necessary for playing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area allocated to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a setting value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 4920 as a used area, and an area that is not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is treated as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 4910, similarly to the RAM area 4920, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas that are not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an incorrect ROM, so starting up of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

Note that the process from the power-on of the slot machine until the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but is a process configured by hardware within the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It becomes.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, processes such as startup setting of a periodic process (timer interrupt process in FIG. 272) that periodically executes a predetermined process are executed. In this embodiment, functions such as random number function settings that prevent game lottery settings from being rewritten by the user program after a security check are executed in the parameter setting process, and functions other than these are executed in the device initialization setting process. is running. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or a hot start to return to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power outage flag is not set, etc.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes processing to return to the game based on the backed up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process that was interrupted when the power was cut off. Specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset start-up process, which will be described later, or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 272), the process that was interrupted at the time of power outage is returned to.

Note that in the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) You can also use it as The reason why the checksum is calculated only in the gaming control work area is that the debugging (inspection function) processing is designed to maintain independence from the gaming control processing, and to ensure that it does not affect the gaming results. Since this is a non-standard process, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. Using the checksum as a target for calculation may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big problem in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled, and in this case, there is a high possibility that it will cause significant damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of costs, etc., so please take thorough precautions. This is because the work area for game control has higher reliability than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because verification is performed on a regular basis.

When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process is executed in which information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls is returned to the initial setting state.

When the game initialization process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes information signal 1 output process for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Note that the information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (reel rotation start, start lever ON, information regarding winning combinations) accompanying the game start in the game start process, debug (inspection function) regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process Inspection function) When outputting signals (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.), debugging (inspection function) signals related to confirmed roles in the winning determination process (defined roles stopped and displayed on each reel, payouts associated with confirmed roles) At the time of outputting information on the number of coins, output signal information regarding the number of medals to be paid out at the time of payout (number of medals to be paid out, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process to perform a process before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the starting lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether a replay execution instruction has been given, whether medals have been inserted, whether medals have been settled, etc., and further, Confirmation of game setting values, etc. is performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing to start the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, winning combinations, etc. are determined, and the reels 4301 start rotating. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process to wait until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach a normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing to perform processing until all reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 stop, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process to determine a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, settings are made corresponding to the winning combination, and settings are made to execute a payout process corresponding to the winning combination.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the work area for calculating the accessory ratio in the RAM area 4920 (Fig. 268, see FIG. 269) (step S1038). The process in step S1038 can be skipped if there are no award medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification by executing these processes.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game ending processing to perform processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game end process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no win or a win without a payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the regular process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As mentioned above, periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed, so by saving the CPU registers used in main loop processing, processing can be continued after return. It is necessary to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built into the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing to sample input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of the driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reels 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, etc. are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing to update various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process x the set number of times.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, the CPU 4601 calls the accessory ratio calculation/display process and displays the medals stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation/display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific method of calculating the accessory ratio and the specific method of displaying the accessory ratio are the same as the method described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt processing and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the display You may calculate only the value that is Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing to control the LEDs (step S1120). The LEDs to be controlled are those controlled by the main board 4600, and are, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED.

The CPU 4601 executes information output processing to output a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the production control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing to update the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, updating processing is performed for soft random numbers built into the CPU. With software random numbers built into the CPU, the counting itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). While periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is being executed, even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending and waits until the previously executed timer interrupt processing has successfully completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is set to be executed. For this reason, the configuration is such that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset startup processing and the like will be explained. Information signal output processing is provided for each output signal function (1 to N), and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signals (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)." Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so a description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing information signal output processing (to ensure that they are restored even if destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to let you do so. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is allocated to a separate area from the game control save area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information to be referred to in order to select (ON/OFF) the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). In each information signal output process, the information stored in the RAM 4603 is only referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 during the process, and if writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so that it is not used (including referenced) in processes other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other gaming control programs, it does not use a common area and can ensure independence from other gaming control programs. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. Thereafter, the values of all registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the number of debugging (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). Note that this embodiment is configured such that multiple types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table that defines the output signal corresponding to the function is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function). Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing signals in two data areas, selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in this embodiment, a program that executes information signal output processing (signal output program) is stored in an area that is clearly separated from the area that stores the gaming control program (gaming control area). By providing the area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1 can be placed independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for purposes other than this (for example, to make up for the lack of capacity in the gaming control area by arranging gaming control programs or general-purpose programs), programs will not be placed in the debugging (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and executed, and at this time, the address of the called destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Additionally, as mentioned above, when program processing in the game control area is being executed, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and program processing in the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, the game control work area is configured so that only reference to it is permitted and writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debugging (inspection function) area. Programs placed in the debug (inspection function) area, including signal output programs, are always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, a return instruction returns immediately after the call. Note that the modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (program placed in the debugging (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating accessory ratio) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data of the gaming state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects explained in the pachinko machine example described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the role parts of the slot machine in operation, and to improve the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described above in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents can be made within the spirit of the appended claims. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are representative examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main control device includes:
transmitting data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit via serial communication;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use a stop bit are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control devices.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of the proportion of the accessory due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of accessories even when the power is turned off.
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of accessory ratios using data in the RAM with incorrect contents.

(3) The main control device is
It has the function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer through serial communication,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that, after power is turned on, a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of sending out data from the FIFO buffer.

This allows data to be transmitted with any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing any parts around the main control device. Furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and display device can be easily discovered. By making the line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the proportion of the accessory can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts around the main control device, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and furthermore, the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display orientation of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

With this, it is possible to easily check whether the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced;
In the game described in each of the preceding items, the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where it cannot be seen in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine can be prevented when displaying the accessory ratio is not necessary.

(11) A gaming machine that awards prize balls as gaming value to a player by winning a game ball launched toward a gaming area into a predetermined prize opening,
a main control device that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
There are two types of entry winning holes: general winning holes whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state, and electric winning holes whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by at least the number of first prize balls paid out upon winning in the general winning hole and the number of first prize balls paid out in response to winning in the electric winning hole. Count the number of second prize balls paid out separately,
The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory if the check code is not normal.

Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, if at least one of the game control data and the prize ball number data for accessory ratio calculation is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is powered on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the proportion of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to a state where the ratio of accessory objects is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the ratio of accessory objects is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is calculated as the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls fired into the gaming area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine). The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the base by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means may use, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal that detects a winning in the winning opening, a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command, or a timing of receiving a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing of receiving a winning ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting a prize ball payout command that instructs payout.

(15D) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal that detects winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the gaming area, calculates the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving a confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that received the reception confirmation;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a prize of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving from the payout control means the completion of payout of the prize balls according to the instruction;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received for completion of the payout;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with the gaming situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the gaming value is the base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer;
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls hit into the game area). , the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby removing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; and an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game nature while maintaining the game nature within the constraints of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine counts .

(17D) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of out pitches used to calculate the base,
Calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state and storing it in a buffer;
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out pitches at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of pitches consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out pitches, thereby calculating the total number of out pitches from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the gaming machine moves a predetermined number to a number.

(17F) The control means:
Executing a special symbol fluctuation display game that derives the special gaming state, triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is at an upper limit value, the number of prize balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game quality while maintaining the game quality.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area where the game is played is removably attached;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information regarding the gaming value even when the main body frame is in a closed state.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to island equipment of a game center,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
information updating means for updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
It has a game execution means for performing a special symbol fluctuation display game triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
Each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The game machine described.

(19B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means sets the predetermined condition at any one of the following timings: detecting a winning in the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball paying out command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes sufficient measures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance of a special symbol variable display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting slot;
and a gaming value information display means for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value,
The performance control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is lower than the normal mode;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means.

(20B) displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game, comprising an effect display means constituted by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is comprised of a light emitting diode, and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) comprising a performance display means for displaying a performance of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted;
The gaming value information display means is characterized in that it does not change the display mode to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
comprising a normal gaming state and a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
As described in each of the preceding items, the information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(21B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means:
When the special symbol variation display game results in a jackpot, the advantageous gaming state is derived and control is performed to open a winning opening through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The period from the confirmation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is set as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means:
In the advantageous gaming state, control is performed to open winning openings through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of gaming balls entered into the winning slot is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that awards game balls when predetermined conditions are met,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and a display means for displaying information regarding the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting port that is a trigger for deriving a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means includes:
It is also possible to control a special game state in which it is easy to derive the open state of the starting port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is the number of balls awarded to the player, excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of consumed balls consumed by the player when controlled in either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming balls is calculated and updated by dividing the information by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the period from confirmation of winning in the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expansion state, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. Gaming machines listed in each section.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area;
a prize ball giving unit that gives a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected in a prize opening provided in the gaming area;
a main control means that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning hole among the entered prize holes;
A gaming machine comprising a peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means that can update information regarding the given game ball either to increase or decrease,
a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated either to increase or decrease by the information updating means; and a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means; There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information regarding the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The main control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
Calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting the timing when the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means:
Writes information regarding game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls;
Comparing the information regarding the gaming balls written in the storage area with the information regarding the gaming balls stored in the storage area before the writing to determine an increase or decrease in the information regarding the gaming balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game remains interrupted for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by a player at a predetermined timing;
and a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player,
The control means includes:
If the predetermined timing and the detection of consumed balls by the consumed pitch number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are determined within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
an out port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out port provided at the bottom of the gaming area;
Winning ball detection means for detecting winning balls entering a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
Counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player by the sum of the counted number of game balls that passed through the output port and the number of prize balls entered,
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls launched into the gaming area from the output of the detection means, and counting the consumed game balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls ejected from the game machine,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means to count the number of consumed balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(26A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
a prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning slot in which winning is possible;
a consumption ball counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value using the counted number of prize balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning hole that is considered to be a winning hole;
counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
As described in each of the preceding items, the control means calculates the information regarding the gaming value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(26C) The control means controls the control means for a predetermined period after detecting passage of a game ball through a gate provided on the right side of the game area or detection of winning into a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period based on either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time when a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or the time when a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate provided on the right side of the gaming area and the number of winning balls entering the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, and controls the number of winning balls and The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed is counted.

According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to the result of the game;
a second data setting means for setting second data not depending on the result of the game;
third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from first data set by the first data setting means and second data set by the second data setting means;
a second converting means for obtaining second converted data from the first converted data obtained by the first converting means and third data set by the third data setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that it multiplies the first data and the second data to obtain first conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27E) The first data is the gaming value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls),
The third data is the gaming value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out pitches),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information regarding the awarded gaming value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display device displays information (for example, base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, base values necessary for evaluating gaming machines can be accurately displayed in real time. Furthermore, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means for executing periodic processing for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a conversion means for calculating information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations,
It has a divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means includes:
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
After a predetermined time has elapsed since writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game media number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined gaming state;
a consumed gaming media number counting means for counting gaming media consumed by the player in the predetermined gaming state;
The control means includes:
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game media number counting means by 100 into the dividend number register;
writing the number of consumed gaming media counted by the consumed gaming media number counting means into the divisor register;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions 28A to 28C, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed in one repetitive process (timer interrupt process), complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A prize opening where game balls can be won;
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a consumption ball counting means for counting consumption balls consumed by a player;
comprising a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the entry winning holes is a specific winning hole that can be switched between an open state in which winning a game ball is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult;
The control means includes:
updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and number of prize balls;
If a winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and when this determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. A game machine characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding the number of balls consumed from the number of balls consumed.

(29B) At least one of the entered winning holes is a starting winning hole that becomes an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls;
When a winning in the starting winning opening is detected while the starting winning opening is in a closed state, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the entry prize holes is a big prize hole that is opened in a special gaming state,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the big winning opening is detected when the big winning opening is in a closed state, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player;
Each of the foregoing features is characterized in that the consumed balls counting means counts the consumed balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed balls number detecting means. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed, which is used to calculate information regarding the gaming value;
The consumed pitch counting means adds the number of consumed pitches detected by the consumed pitch number detecting means to the total number of consumed pitches, and subtracts the number of winning pitches related to the prize entry abnormality from the total number of consumed pitches to calculate the consumed pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value,
The consumed pitch counting means counts the consumed pitches by adding a value obtained by subtracting the consumed pitch count related to the prize entry abnormality from the consumed pitch count detected by the consumed pitch number detection means to the total consumed pitch number. A gaming machine as described in each of the preceding items, which is characterized by:

(29G) The entry prize opening is switchable between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the input prize opening is detected in the closed state and no prize balls are paid out in connection with the winning, and controls the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) If a winning abnormality in the entered prize opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of Nos. 29A to 29H, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls associated with winning abnormalities from the number of out balls, information regarding gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that awards gaming media as a prize to a player,
A gaming area with multiple winning openings,
an award awarding means for awarding a predetermined specific award from among a plurality of awards when a gaming medium is detected in each of the winning openings;
arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of gaming media flowing into the gaming area and the number of gaming media awarded as prizes awarded by the awarding means;
processing means for processing the results of the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the results of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific award among the plurality of awards occurs in the game, the award awarding means awards the specific award, and the displaying means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so that it does not change. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 30, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, awards (for example, prize balls paid out when a prize is placed in a winning slot where a high-value prize is awarded (such as a general winning slot with a large number of prize balls or a grand prize opening)) The result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change even if the ball is awarded, making it easy to judge whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball rate). can.

(31A) A game comprising a main control means including a lottery means that performs a lottery regarding winning or losing when specific conditions are met, and a peripheral control means that controls a predetermined performance based on a signal from the main control means. It is a machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to grasp the status history of the gaming machine.

(31B) Equipped with a general prize opening where game balls launched into the gaming area can win prizes even if there is no special gaming state;
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winnings to the general winning opening to the outside when predetermined conditions are satisfied.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, further comprising information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means.

(31D) comprising a first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
The game described in each of the preceding items is characterized by comprising: limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
a second initializing means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means is capable of retaining stored contents even when the gaming machine is powered off,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first initializing means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal was received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event that is counted according to the progress of the game, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including;
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means includes:
counting the counting events based on a signal received from the main control means and storing the counting results in the temporary storage means;
Upon receiving a signal regarding the state change event from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for managing the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time at which the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counted event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the counting results of the counting events stored in the information storage means are added to the counting results of the counting events.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for the management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the history of changes in the number of balls. In particular, according to the inventions 31D and 31E, information regarding games can be stored appropriately.

(32) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but during a period in which the selection signal is output, at least one of the first light emitting element group a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals in order to light up one light emitting element; and a signal outputted to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; A gaming machine characterized in that the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is controlled within one periodic process by outputting at different timings.

According to the invention of No. 32, the circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value (for example, base value and accessory ratio) can be configured simply, and the information regarding the gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
a selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group in response to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to a selection signal outputted to one terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; and a selection signal outputted to the third terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal. A gaming machine characterized in that the process of outputting the signals to be outputted to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic process by different processes within the same periodic process. .

According to the invention of No. 33, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value. Therefore, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
and calculation result display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means that is controlled by the control device and outputs at least a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means;
In a board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction when viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed apart from a timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between signals related to game control and signals for displaying information related to games. Therefore, the influence on game control can be suppressed, and information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information regarding the gaming value;
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes:
first initializing means that determines whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined that the data is abnormal; ,
a second initializing means that determines whether or not the input means is operated when the power is turned on, and initializes a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is operated; have,
The first area initialized by the first initializing means and the second area initialized by the second initializing means are also initialized by the first initializing means. Including duplicate areas that are commonly initialized by the
At least the first area includes an area that does not overlap with the second area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process is executed repeatedly at a predetermined time interval. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. .

(35F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores information regarding the game value to be awarded (base value and accessory ratio). Therefore, information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
Display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value;
an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, if multiple game media win a prize while the electric accessory is activated due to a single win, information regarding the gaming value of some of the winning game media may be displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, although other gaming media are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, any of the gaming media can serve as a trigger for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means:
Execute a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving, high probability state, jackpot, etc.) and a second gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state (normal state) and control either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information regarding the game value, and the game media won in the first game state are The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, although game media won in a winning state are not used to calculate the information regarding the gaming value, any of the game media can serve as an opportunity for a variable display game.

(36C) The control means:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
If a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won while a predetermined type of error is detected are not used to calculate the information regarding the game value. First, although a game medium that wins without a predetermined type of error being detected is used to calculate the information regarding the game value, any game medium can be used as a trigger for a variable display game. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, since it is switched whether or not game media are used to calculate information regarding gaming value depending on the state of the gaming machine, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it more difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame than when the main body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame. 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for converting.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported in an openable/closable manner relative to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided; A gaming machine comprising a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a visibility-improving means that makes it difficult to view the display contents of the setting state display section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation section in which a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to a game is performed. A gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determination difficulty making means for making it difficult to operate the setting determination operation section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame and has a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
The settings change operation section has a settings key insertion section into which a settings key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions No. 37A to No. 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation section.

(37F) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a probability determining unit that determines the probability that the winning result will be derived as one of a plurality of probabilities based on the operation on the specific operating unit,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when a probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine different variation times depending on the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized in that a probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to specific setting information of the setting information, the production control section controls the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion performance that suggests a result and a setting suggestion performance that suggests the content of setting information determined by the setting information determining section are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of No. 37E to No. 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting state in a new manner and improve his/her interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls games; a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit; and the game control board. A gaming machine comprising: a setting-related operation section for changing a setting state related to a game played by the department;
The game control section has a setting change permission state generating means that allows an operation related to changing the setting state on the setting related operation section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change permission state generating means allows an operation related to changing the setting state when information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of No. 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to change the setting state illegally, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting change operation section that changes the setting state related to the control performed by the game control section, and the game area is controlled by the player's operation of a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that grants gaming profits when a gaming ball launched towards a player enters a predetermined winning slot,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means for disabling the firing of game balls by operating the firing operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 37J, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the setting state.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a game control section that performs control regarding the game, and a setting operation section for changing settings regarding the control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) The case is characterized in that, in place of the setting operation section, a dummy unit that cannot perform operations for changing settings can be accommodated together with the game control section. Game machine.

(38C) The setting operation section is
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the settings and terminating the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by having a setting display that displays the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation section, the second operation section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions No. 38A to No. 38D, specifications can be shared between a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine without a setting function, and efficient design and production can be achieved.

(39A) a game control unit including a processor that executes a program for controlling games, and a memory accessed by the processor;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings related to control performed by the gaming control section,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed,
The game control section includes:
When the gaming machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation section;
The gaming machine starts the setting state when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated.

(39B) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section controls the game control section in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous settings change operations.

(40A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting operation section that changes settings related to the control performed by the game control section,
The game control unit includes a game value display means for displaying information regarding the awarded game value,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the settings,
The game machine, wherein the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means in a manner that does not confuse the game value display means in the setting state.

(40B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control section and the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are comprised of one display.

(40D) the gaming value display means displays information regarding the awarded gaming value on the display without delay as the game progresses;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting on the display in place of information regarding the assigned gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are constituted by separate displays.

(40F) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, displaying any of letters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, the light is turned off or turned on completely,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion among a plurality of displays arranged on a substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
a setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
and a setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on a predetermined display section when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
A gaming machine characterized in that even if the different operation is performed when the performance determining means has determined to perform the setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance can be executed.

(41B) A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the starting port;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
a performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
an error detection means for detecting an error;
Error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error that satisfies a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by restricting execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions.

(41E) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but not the starting condition;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. . A gaming machine, wherein execution of the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance is restricted in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but not the starting condition;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of Nos. 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve gaming enjoyment.

(42A) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
using the first storage means when executing the first program;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A gaming machine characterized in that accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means is switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction to make the first storage means accessible and the instruction to make the second storage means accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (within a game control area) that performs a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second program is a program (outside the gaming control area) that calculates information regarding gaming value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means;
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is switched to be inaccessible and the second storage means to be accessible,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the second program so that the second storage means cannot be accessed and the first storage means can be accessed.

(42G) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means;
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
When starting the second program, switching the first program so that the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the second program ends, the arithmetic means switches to make the second storage means inaccessible and to make the first storage means accessible in the first program returned from the second program. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the inventions No. 42A to No. 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple command when processing is transferred between programs, and precautions when creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a dynamic picture on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section;
A game machine characterized in that a static picture is displayed on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device.

(43B) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means changes the emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, so that light of different colors travels through different routes within the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflections. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the parts.

(43C) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light within the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection parts. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by changing the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts.

(43D) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light within the display panel, and controls the number of light emitting elements of the plurality of first reflecting parts. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflection parts is changed over time by emitting light from at least a part of the part.

According to the inventions 43A to 43D, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(44A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflecting section includes a plurality of first right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction that reaches the player's right eye; a plurality of first left eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflection parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
the plurality of first left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a different position from the right-eye pattern;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflection section and the first left eye reflection section, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern can be changed. is displayed on the display panel to make the player recognize a three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device on the second reflecting section.

(44B) The second reflecting section directs light traveling through a plurality of paths within the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in a direction in which it reaches the player's right eye and in a direction in which it reaches the left eye of the player. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the flat pattern.

(44C) The second reflecting section includes a plurality of second right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye; including a plurality of second left eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye;
the plurality of second right-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern;
The plurality of second left-eye reflecting parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The peripheral control means includes:
A dynamic picture and a static picture can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized in that by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture, a performance suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting parts that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel and emits it to the front side of the gaming machine; a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling through the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting section is changed, thereby displaying a changing pattern on the display panel. displayed on the
displaying a stationary picture on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern, an effect suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

According to the inventions No. 45A to No. 45B, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(46A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect image under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect light traveling within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a target pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target symbol is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or text.

(46C) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel after displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

According to the inventions 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns in different formats, and it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(47A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
In the settings change state or the settings confirmation state, after the settings corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state are executed, the process corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state can be executed in the periodic process. A game machine characterized by:

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the processes related to changing the set value, the process related to confirming the set value, the process related to normal gaming, and the plurality of processes. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a process executed in the above-mentioned items.

(47C) The periodic process includes at least a first iterative process that executes a process related to the normal game, and a second iterative process that executes a process related to changing the settings,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repetitive process and the second repetitive process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is turned off;
The game control means is
In the setting change mode, setting the fact that the setting change mode is in the setting state management area as the predetermined condition;
In the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that, as the predetermined condition, the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The periodic processing enables execution of normal game processing related to normal games and setting processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common in the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means capable of storing information related to the game,
In a power-on process executed when the gaming machine is powered on, an output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means;
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, the determination is made based on information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means stores information about the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing the
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when initializing the storage means, the specific A gaming machine characterized in that a storage means is not initialized.

(49B) Comprising a peripheral control means for controlling the presentation on the display device,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode in which the gaming machine is started based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started.

(50A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
comprising a storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means is
initializing the first storage area and the second storage area if it is determined that the set value is not a normal value;
If it is determined that the first setting operation means among the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is being operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , a gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
In each of the preceding items, the game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in normal games,
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power outage occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and controls the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the storage area of the gaming machine is initialized.

(51A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means that can retain game-related information even when the power is turned off.
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The storage means includes a setting state management area in which, at least in the power-on process, a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored in accordance with the operating state of the setting operation means. A game machine comprising:

(51B) comprising a setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing setting values related to control performed by the game control means;
The game control means is
When an operation is performed to start the gaming machine in the setting change mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and the setting change mode is stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting change mode, a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in a normal gaming state in which game balls can be fired. Start the machine,
If the gaming machine is operated to start up in the setting confirmation mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting confirmation mode.

(52) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, a first periodic process that is executed every predetermined first period, and a second periodic process that is executed every predetermined second period. possible,
In the power-on process, determining whether an operation accompanying a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means,
If it is determined that an operation accompanying a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed, depending on the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
If it is determined that an operation associated with a setting operation is not performed in the setting operation means, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. This makes it possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second periodic process is executed after normal game start processing is made executable in the power-on process.

(53A) a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of being equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A game machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, but a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mounted component. .

(53E) a game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
a first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the periodic processing among events related to the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event captured by the game control means in a process other than the periodic process among events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which the signal of the first detection means or the second detection means is input individually,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory that is driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once within one periodic process,
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal multiple times within one periodic process,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means detects the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within one periodic process and determines the signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting the signal that repeats at the predetermined period from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) Can be equipped with a test signal generation circuit for outputting test signals used for testing gaming machines,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

[16. Communication with various boards when executing the setting function]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a setting function, the setting function (confirming ("setting confirmation") and changing ("setting change") of setting information) can be executed when a specific operation unit is operated. The method of starting the setting function is as described above, but the processing on the main control board side when the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing will be explained using other examples.

In this embodiment, main control recognition information, which is information for recognizing the main control board 1310, is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951) when the gaming machine is powered on or when setting information is changed. . The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, the ball information control board side determines whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is a regular one, and if it is not determined to be a regular one, the ball information control The board can stop the operation related to the prize ball, making it possible to prevent fraud such as tampering with the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310), and to prevent changes in setting information on the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board. can be reflected at the appropriate time.

[16-1. Initialization process]
First, the initialization process (another example 5) in this embodiment will be described. 274 and 275 are flowcharts showing initialization processing of another example 5. The initialization process of another example 5 is one in which a process related to the setting function is added to the initialization process explained in FIGS. 21 and 22, and a process related to the accessory ratio calculation is omitted. Processing related to the calculation of accessory ratios does not need to be omitted, and is removed for the sake of simplification.

When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs power-on processing. Specifically, first, a stack pointer is set (step P10). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step P10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first. The power-on process corresponds to steps P10 to P52.

Following step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12), and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step P14). Note that the voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply suddenly stops temporarily), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit of the bulb information control board as a power outage warning. It is output and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the bulb information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step P12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step P14 is made based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After the power is turned on, when the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is not output, and the process proceeds to step P16.

Proceeding to step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch (FIG. 76) is operated (step P16). This determination is made based on whether the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, while when the detection signal is not being input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not being operated.

When it is determined in step P16 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step P18), and proceeds to step P30. When it is determined that the clear switch has not been operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step P19), and the process moves to step P20.

This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is used for games related to probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1311 (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when gaming information is to be erased, and is set to a value of 0 when gaming information is not to be erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step P18 and step P19 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Proceeding to step P20, the main control MPU 1311 executes a combination authentication process to determine whether the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the ball information control board is appropriate. The frame maker identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage section of the main control MPU 1311, and it is verified whether or not proper frame maker identification information has been output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step P30, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality is notified using a speaker, a liquid crystal display, or the like.

When the main control MPU moves to step P30, it performs wait timer processing 2 (step P30). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system for controlling drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

When the main control MPU 1311 completes wait timer processing 2 (step P30), in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is an operation to change the setting information (step P3031). The operation for changing the setting information is not an operation for checking the setting information, but an operation for changing the setting information.

If there is an operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 will proceed with the game after the power is turned on based on the new setting information. In order to clear the gaming information, the processing from step P44 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if there is no operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, and clears the RAM. The process is branched based on the value of the notification flag RCL_FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. If it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, if the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step P34, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not there is one (step P36). If they match, it is determined whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step P38). This backup flag BK-FLG determines whether backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the power-off processing is normally completed, and is set to a value of 0 when the power-off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag determination process (step P38) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is an operation to confirm the setting information (step P3038). If there is an operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3038 is "YES"), setting confirmation information indicating that the setting information is being confirmed is set (step P3039). In order to prevent the game from continuing while the setting information is being checked, by setting the setting checking information, it is possible to control so that the processing related to the game and prize balls is not executed. If there is no operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3039 is "NO"), or after setting the setting confirmation information (step P3039), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set for when the power is restored. (Step P40). In addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0, this setting reads out power recovery information from the ROM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and Set the time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power restoration" refers to not only the state where the power is turned on from a state where the power was cut off, but also the state where power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state where high frequency radiation is detected and reset. It also includes the state of return after that.

Following step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs power-on command creation processing (step P42). In this power-on command generation process, gaming information is read from the backup information and various commands corresponding to this gaming information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when erasing gaming information, or if the checksum values (sum values) match in step P36, If the backup flag BK-FLG is determined not to have a value of 1 (value is 0) in step P38, that is, if the power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1311 Clear all areas of RAM (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" into the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power is turned off. When the timeout processing has not been completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is retrieved, and a counter is fixed to update a random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the numerical range, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, the result of step P32 is "NO"), or if information is not normally stored in the RAM (RAM abnormality, the result of step P36 is "NO", step When the result of P38 is "NO"), or when the setting is changed (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" into the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power is turned off. When the timeout processing has not been completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is retrieved, and a counter is fixed to update a random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the numerical range, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

Note that the areas to be cleared in the main control built-in RAM are not all areas, and the areas to be cleared may be changed depending on each situation. For example, when performing a RAM clear operation, all areas other than the work area related to the setting values and settings (including some RAM areas related to game processing) are cleared; when a RAM error occurs, all areas within the RAM are cleared; and when changing settings, Only a part of the RAM area related to game processing may be cleared. In other words, when a RAM error occurs, all areas are cleared, but in other cases, the corresponding area is cleared depending on the operation content. For example, work areas related to setting values and setting processing are cleared unless a RAM error is determined. Try not to.

In addition to setting "00h" in each area, the area may be cleared by setting an initial value that does not disadvantage the players or the gaming hall. For example, if the setting value is "00h", which is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting), when the RAM is cleared, 00h will be set and the game will start from the high setting, which will be advantageous for the player. However, since this is disadvantageous for the hole, when clearing the work area of the set value, the lowest setting (for example, "05h") is set.

When the processing in step P42 or step P48 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is any setting processing, that is, whether there is setting confirmation or setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), settings are made to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information (step P3049). Note that if there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the process from step P50 onwards is executed without setting to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt process, after setting confirmation or setting change is completed, settings are made to notify the main control recognition information to the ball information control board.

Moreover, the main control MPU 1311 clears the storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the ball information control board when setting notification of main control recognition information. For example, if the area that stores unsent information is in a ring buffer format, the read counter and write counter that indicate the read and write positions in the buffer are initialized (both are set to 0), and the Also clear the buffer. If any information remains in these buffers, the remaining information will be sent first when the power is restored, so in order to ensure that the main control recognition information is sent to the ball information control board first after the power is turned on. It is configured like this. When the ball information control board receives the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, it executes the corresponding process and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal from the time the notification of the main control recognition information is set until the response signal is received. When the main control recognition information response signal is received, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52) to permit execution of the timer interrupt processing. In addition, in this embodiment, when settings are made to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information, the process for performing the normal game is not executed until a response signal is received from the ball information control board. Ru. For example, it is determined whether or not a response signal has been received in timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, and if the response signal has not been received, the processing is skipped. With this configuration, it is possible to start the game after ensuring the activation of the ball information control board.

When execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop process. Specifically, first, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step P56). As described above, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step P56 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs a non-winning random number update process (step P58). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, for example, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, the random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step P58, the process returns to step P54 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and in step P56 it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step P58, and steps P54 to P58 are repeatedly performed. Note that the processing from step P54 to step P58 corresponds to "main loop processing".

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step P60). This setting prevents timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step P60, the main control MPU 1311 controls the starting opening solenoid 2550, the big winning opening solenoid (attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556), special symbol display ( Drive signals output to the first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 1185, special symbol memory display, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display, game status display, round display, etc. (Step P62).

Following step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step P64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step P66). This completes storage of the backup information.

Following step P66, the main control MPU 1311 clears the watchdog timer (step P68). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

Following step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process of repeating a state in which nothing is executed. Note that the processing from step P60 to step P68 and the loop processing are referred to as "power-off processing." In this loop process, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Therefore, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a timeout signal, and the main control MPU is reset by the timeout signal, and then the main control MPU performs the power-on processing again from the beginning.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and performs power-on processing when the power is subsequently restored.

In addition, in step P36, it is checked whether the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step P38, it is checked whether the power-off processing has been completed normally. There is. In this way, by double checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is verified whether the backup information has been stored by fraudulent activity.

[16-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing (another example 5) in the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of another example 5. The timer interrupt process of Example 5 is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process shown in FIG. 274. In the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for checking and changing setting information is added.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in a state of waiting to receive a main control recognition information response signal (step P3070). As described above, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is a state in which the main control recognition information is on standby after the main control recognition information notification is set until the response signal output from the ball information control board is received. When the main control MPU 1311 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (result of step P3070 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the subsequent processing and ends the timer interrupt processing. Note that in the process of step P3070, in addition to determining whether or not the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is in progress, a process of communicating with the ball information control board may be executed. For example, in the process of step P3070, various signals transmitted from the ball information control board are received, and if a response signal of main control recognition information is included, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled, and other signals are received. In the case of a signal, processing corresponding to the received signal may be executed. When the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, a firing permission signal is input to the ball information control board, and the game ball can be fired from the batted ball firing device and the game can be started.

If the main control MPU 1311 is not in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is "NO"), it sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step P54 of the main loop process.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

Following step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step P74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer subtraction processing (step P76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 1185 light up according to a variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the time at which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) Time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball information main ACK signal that indicates that the ball information control board has normally received the ball information is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs win/loss random number update processing (step P78). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and initial values for small win symbols are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in FIG. The random number for value determination is also updated. These random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols are updated in the main loop process and this timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing randomness. On the other hand, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are random numbers related to win/loss determination (jackpot determination), so each counter is updated only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. counts up. For example, the counter that updates the random numbers for jackpot determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is the value 0 to the maximum value (32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time this timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the count is counted up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. At this time, the updated value is always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter where the main control MPU retrieves the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing is executed to derive a fixed value of , and this derived fixed value is set as the initial value. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated as the initial value with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, etc. are the same as the method of updating the random numbers for jackpot determination described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the winning/losing random number update process in step P78 ends, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a process related to setting information (setting process) is being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting information is being changed or confirmed. For example, it may be determined whether the setting confirmation information is set.

If the process related to the setting information is not being executed (the result of step P3080 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 performs the prize ball control process (step P80). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a prize ball command is created to be sent to the ball information control board, and the main control board 1310 and ball information control Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are sent to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening, a prize ball command representing 15 balls as the number of prize balls is created and sent to the ball information control board, and this prize ball command is sent to the ball information control board. If the ball information main ACK signal indicating that reception has been completed normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board to control the ball information. or send it to the board.

Following step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step P82). The ball information control board transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands divided into status displays. In the frame command reception process of step P82, when these various commands are normally received as ball information main serial data, information that informs the ball information control board to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. do. Further, the command normally received as the ball information main serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step P84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above and the detection signal from the count switch is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot), an abnormality is detected. A winning abnormality display command classified as notification display as the status is created and stored in the transmission information storage area mentioned above as transmission information.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination described above is taken out, and it is determined whether it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as a "special lottery"), takes out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol, and uses it as the probability variable hit determination value that is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Determine whether or not they match (determine whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 32,438. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step P86, it is determined whether the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The determination is made based on whether the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these judgment results are based on the first starting port sensor 2104, various commands related to the special drawing 1 synchronization effect are created, while if the lottery results are based on the second starting port sensor 2511, special commands are created. Figure 2 Various commands related to synchronized production are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and at the same time commands are sent to the special symbol display 1185 to light up the special symbol display 1185 according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a jackpot gaming state, various commands classified as jackpot-related are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or commands such as commands to open and close the opening/closing member are created. Set the output of the drive signal to the winning hole solenoid and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big winning hole changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the round indicator Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15th round display on the round indicator Set the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round display lamp so that the lamp lights up, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or send it to the game status display so that it lights up in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not a probability change has occurred. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step P88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

On the other hand, if the process related to the setting information is being executed (the result of step P3080 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the process such as the prize ball control process (step P80), thereby controlling the progress of the game. make it stop. Then, a setting change/confirmation process for changing or confirming the setting information is executed (step P3082). In the setting change/confirmation process, setting information is displayed on a touch panel or liquid crystal display device 1600, or changes in setting information are accepted from an input device such as a touch panel.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting process (setting change/confirmation process) is completed (step P3083). If the setting process is not completed (the result of step P3083 is "NO"), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation process is completed (the result of step P3083 is "YES"), main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board (step P3084), and the processes from step P92 onwards are executed. At this time, the storage area (work area) used temporarily to execute the setting process is initialized, and settings are made so that the setting process will not be executed thereafter, such as by canceling the setting confirmation information. Thereafter, the main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal until the main control recognition information response signal is received from the ball information control board.

As described above, when changing or confirming the setting information, the main control recognition information is sent to the ball information control board after the setting process is completed, while when the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the power-on process is performed. and transmits the main control recognition information to the ball information control board (step P3039). In this way, the present embodiment is configured to transmit the main control recognition information to the ball information control board only once when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is configured to be transmitted to the ball information control board only once after the setting process is completed. This prevents the ball information control board from unnecessarily executing the process related to the setting information multiple times, and reduces the load upon startup of the gaming machine, thereby allowing the gaming machine to complete startup quickly. Furthermore, until the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response signal from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal (step P3070), so that setting changes are reliably notified. After that, it becomes possible to execute processing on the main control board side.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276, the processing from step P80 to step P90 was skipped during the setting processing, but the switch input processing (step P74), timer subtraction processing (step P76), winning/losing random number update The process (step P78) may be skipped. Alternatively, the port output processing (step P90) may be skipped. Since the processing for playing the normal game is not executed during the execution of the setting processing, there will be no problem with subsequent gaming even if these processing are not executed. Therefore, the load on the gaming machine during the setting process may be reduced by skipping random number-related processing, or random number-related processing may be performed while the setting process is being performed by an employee of the gaming parlor. By executing , the random numbers may be updated so that the randomness of the random numbers becomes higher. In addition, regarding switch input processing and port output processing, the load on the gaming machine may be reduced by skipping the processing while the settings are being changed, or by allowing the processing to continue even while the settings are being changed. The result of the switch input received during the setting change may be immediately reflected after the return, or the port output may be continuously performed to prevent processing at the output destination from being delayed.

When the processing in step P88 or step P3084 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 performs port output processing (step P90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the ball information control board are successfully received from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314 based on the output information, a main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board, or a jackpot is detected. When in the gaming state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the big winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening, and outputting a driving signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the movable piece, Games such as 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. various information (gaming information) signals related to the ball are output to the ball information control board.

Following step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. Commands, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, and various commands classified as status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission. Note that the processing from step P74 to step P92 will be referred to as "gaming control processing".

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step P70. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the registers (step P96), and ends this routine. Here, when the timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, the main control MPU 1311 stacks and saves the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack using hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the initialization process from being destroyed. In step P96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt permission after returning at step P96.

[16-3. Data transmission to ball information control board]
In the gaming machine described above, the transmission of data (main ball information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board was executed by port output processing of timer interrupt processing. As mentioned above, the main ball information serial data includes information regarding the prize ball (prize ball command) and information for checking the connection status (self-check command), and also includes main control recognition information in this embodiment. It will be done.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4ms, the main ball information serial data was frequently sent to the ball information control board, but the total number of prize balls is correct and the player does not feel any discomfort. It is not necessarily necessary to pay out the prize balls in accordance with the order in which the winnings occur in the winning openings. If multiple types of winning holes occur in a short period of time, for example, after a winning hole with the number of prize balls set to "4" occurs, a winning hole with the number of prize balls set to "15" occurs. Even if a winning occurs in the (big winning opening), there is no problem even if the winning balls are processed in the order of "15" prize balls and "4" prize balls. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which prize ball commands are frequently created, such as in a jackpot game state, there is a risk that the load will temporarily increase.

Here, in this embodiment, the interval at which data is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is set to be longer than the execution interval (4 ms) of the timer interrupt processing (for example, 100 ms), and the number of communications is By reducing this, the load of transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is reduced. In addition, instead of generating a prize ball command every time a prize is won, prize ball information is aggregated at each communication cycle to the ball information control board, thereby reducing the amount of data to be communicated, further reducing the load. Plan. An example of the structure of prize ball data to be transmitted to the ball information control board will be described below.

FIG. 277 is a diagram illustrating an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, the number of winnings for each winning opening including the gate is counted and stored as winning information. Then, each time a communication cycle arrives, the stored winning information is transmitted to the ball information control board. At this time, if the number of prizes won is 0, it may not be transmitted.

When the ball information control board receives winning information from the main control board 1310, it calculates the number of prize balls by comparing it with the prize ball number table shown in FIG. 278. In the examples shown in FIGS. 277 and 278, the number of winnings in the gate is 1, the number of winnings in the upper opening is 2, the number of winnings in general winning opening 1 is 1, and the number of winnings in general winning opening 2 is 1. The prize ball at the gate is 1 x 0 = 1, the prize ball at the top opening is 2 x 3 = 6, the prize ball at general opening 1 is 1 x 1 = 1, the prize ball at general opening 2 is 1 x 1 = 1, and the total number of prize balls is 0+6+1+1=8.

Alternatively, the ball information control board may transmit the prize information including the number of prize balls without holding the prize ball number table. Furthermore, like a general winning hole, even if the balls are arranged in multiple game areas, if the number of prize balls is the same, they may be aggregated. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the number of prize balls is included in the winning information. This is a case of counting numbers. This eliminates the need to maintain a prize ball number table on the ball information control board, and enables unified management on the main control board 1310.

In the examples explained in FIGS. 277 to 279, winning information was created ignoring the winning order within the communication cycle, but conventionally, the winning order could be grasped by generating commands sequentially when winning a prize. Ta. Here, FIG. 280 shows an example in which winning information is transmitted all at once for each communication cycle, while information regarding the winning order is added. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example in which winning information is stored in order of winning.

In the example shown in FIG. 280, each time a game ball enters the winning hole, the order counter is incremented by 1, and a record consisting of the order, winning type (winning hole), number of winning balls, and number of winning balls is generated. The number of prize balls may be omitted if it is held by the ball information control board. Further, since the number of winnings is usually one, it may be omitted, but if winnings occur continuously in the same winning slot, the number of winnings may be added by the number of consecutive winnings.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, 1 is added to the number of winnings for each winning, and the winning information for transmission is created at the timing of transmitting the winning information to the ball information control board, but in the example shown in FIG. 280 Now, each record of winning information is generated for each winning, and the generated winning information is transmitted for each communication cycle. In either case, the transmitted prize information is discarded, and the number of prizes won is cleared to 0 in the examples shown in FIGS. 277 to 279. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 280, it is sufficient to delete records that have already been sent.

As in the examples shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, by counting only the number of winnings while ignoring the winning order, it is possible to reduce the processing load when winning. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 280, it is possible to maintain the winning order by creating winning information at the time of winning a prize, and there is no need to create winning information again when transmitting the winning information. Since it is sufficient to transmit winning information as is, it is possible to reduce the load when transmitting winning information. In addition, by adding up the number of winnings when winning from the same winning opening consecutively, the number of records of winning information can be reduced. Normally, if it is a jackpot game state, a game ball is fired aiming at the big winning hole, and if a winning hole is arranged that allows winning only in a specific game state (for example, a variable probability state), the game ball is fired in a specific game state. Since the game ball is fired aiming at this winning opening, it is possible to suppress the number of winning information from increasing especially in a state where the number of winnings is large.

The configuration for transmitting winning information from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board has been described above. The information sent from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board includes not only winning information (prize ball information, prize ball command), but also game status signals and connections between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. A self-check command for checking the status is transmitted, and furthermore, in this embodiment, main control recognition information is transmitted when the power is turned on or during setting processing (setting change/confirmation).

Here, it is necessary to transmit a gaming state signal to the ball information control board at least every time the gaming state changes. Therefore, the transmission process is standardized by transmitting the winning information in the same communication cycle as the winning information, and collecting the winning information, gaming status signal, and other information sent to the ball information control board as gaming information in a common format. Control can be simplified.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, in which (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in FIG. 281, in order to distinguish the type of data to be transmitted, "data type" is defined as a major classification, and "type 1" and "type 2" are defined as minor classifications. Items for distinguishing data types can be changed as necessary; for example, by defining data types in detail, other types can be excluded, or even more detailed classification can be set. You may add more items. In addition, in FIG. 281, the names are written as they are in the items for distinguishing the types of data for easy understanding, but in reality, pre-coded information is set. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

FIG. 281(A) shows data corresponding to winning information, and the data type is set to "winning" (also known as "prizing ball") indicating that it is winning information (prize ball data). Further, type 1 is set to the type of winning hole, and type 2 is set to information specifying the winning hole. At this time, if only the information specifying the winning opening is required to be set, one of the items may be left blank. In the example shown in FIG. 281, two types of data can be set, and in the example shown in (A), the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls can be set. In addition, since the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls will not realistically exceed 100, the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are set in the upper 4 bits and the number of winning balls in the lower 4 bits, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are set in one item. may be set. Furthermore, if there is no winning, data indicating that there is no winning and that the number of prize balls is 0 may be transmitted.

FIG. 281(A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball commands) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle, but more information (for example, (10 types) of prize ball information may be transmitted all at once. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, it takes a unit time for the data (command) transmitting side (main control board 1310) and receiving side (ball information control board 110) Since the load per transmission becomes high, an upper limit may be set for transmission in one cycle. In this case, the data (commands) that could not be transmitted in one cycle (exceeding the upper limit) are transmitted in the next cycle. In addition, when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a jackpot, there may be a time lag between the actual winning and the addition of the prize balls, giving the player a sense of discomfort. is 600ms, while the data (command) transmission cycle is approximately 100ms, so even if the upper limit is temporarily exceeded, the number will immediately fall below the upper limit, reducing the possibility that players will feel uncomfortable. ing. Also, although the firing cycle (600ms) is fixed, the command transmission cycle can be set arbitrarily, so the shorter the data (command) transmission cycle is set than the firing cycle, the faster the data (command) to be transmitted will be. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag due to the number exceeding the upper limit number.

FIG. 281(B) is an example of transmitting a chip ID for identifying the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and data for two records is stored. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311, defined in a specific register, for example, and can be read from the program. In this embodiment, it is possible to send data (commands) of multiple types of data in one cycle, but if the maximum number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle is exceeded, , a priority may be set for each data type, and data (commands) with a higher priority may be transmitted preferentially. For example, as mentioned above, prize ball information is more likely to be transmitted in large quantities than other data, but as mentioned above, even if a slight time lag occurs, it is unlikely that players will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, data (commands) of other data types may be transmitted with priority. Note that data (commands) may be transmitted up to the upper limit number in the order in which they are generated, regardless of the data type.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, since the data size is fixed, there is a problem that the number of records increases when a large amount of data is transmitted. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in FIG. 281(B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to send data for 5 records, and all information such as data type is set in each record. There is a need. Therefore, by setting a data length for each record and making the data variable length, the system is configured to be able to handle data in many types of formats. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 282, an item indicating data length is added, and data of any size within the allowable range can be stored in the item indicating data. In the example shown in FIG. 282, there is no need to divide the data, so the number of items indicating detailed classification is reduced from two to one. Note that since the data to be transmitted has a variable length and may have a large capacity, checking items such as a checksum may be added.

Next, communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be explained. FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board when starting up the gaming machine. In the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 is activated, main control recognition information is notified to the ball information control board by initialization processing or timer interrupt processing (main control recognition information notification ). As described above, the main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310, and the ball information control board determines whether the received main control recognition information is normal. If the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, if the main control board 1310 is not a regular one and an unauthorized MPU is installed, it is reported that the main control board 1310 is abnormal.

Furthermore, if the time from power-on to sending the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence is notified. At this time, the activation of the main control board 1310 may be continued as is, or if the activation processing is completed during the abnormality notification, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the notification may be continued as is. good. If the notification is to be continued as is, an employee of the gaming hall or the like may check the situation and decide whether or not to continue using the gaming machine.

When the ball information control board receives the main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response notification from the ball information control board, it becomes ready to start the normal game.

Thereafter, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). As mentioned above, the transmission interval of game information is 100 milliseconds. A specific example of the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command). When the ball information control board receives the game information from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (gaming information response notification) to the main control board 1310. In this way, by transmitting a response signal from the ball information control board in response to the game information notification from the main control board 1310, it is possible to ensure that communication is being performed normally. Note that when notifying the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board, a response signal is similarly transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

Next, a case where an abnormality occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be described. FIG. 284 is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to a notification from the main control board 1310 in communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 284, game information is notified from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board at a predetermined communication cycle, and an abnormality occurs when there is no response from the ball information control board a predetermined number of times in a row. As a result, communication will be cut off and an abnormality will be reported. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to eight, and the same game information is notified a maximum of eight times. Note that even after communication from the main control board 1310 is cut off, if a response signal is received from the ball information control board, the communication cutoff is canceled as the normal state has been restored, and the process is restarted. do. Note that in the example shown in the figure, if a response signal is not received within one communication cycle, the notification is sent again, but the next cycle's notification is canceled, a response is waited for, and the next cycle ends. If a response signal cannot be received later, it may be determined that one communication has failed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid missing a response signal.

Additionally, if there is no response from the ball information control board, in addition to the case where the game information has not reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310, the game information may not be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. Even though the response signal has arrived, the response signal may not have reached the main control board 1310 from the ball information control board. Here, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), in the latter case, there is a risk that prize balls will be paid out consecutively based on the same prize ball information, and the lottery result of the game and the payout There is a risk that a discrepancy will occur in the number of prize balls issued. Therefore, in order to avoid such a problem, an example will be described in which the next game information is transmitted without retransmitting the game information even if the response signal cannot be received normally.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing another example of a case where there is no response from the ball information control board in response to a notification from the main control board 1310 in communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board. Here, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 284, game information is transmitted every communication cycle, and even if a response signal cannot be received, the next game information is transmitted. If the response signal cannot be received for the maximum number of consecutive transmissions (for example, eight times), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, communication is cut off, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that discrepancies will occur in the number of prize balls when the game information is prize ball information.

Further, by retransmitting the same game information, there is a possibility that game information newly generated in the course of the game will stay in the buffer and cannot be held, but this can be prevented. Note that only in the case of prize ball information for which a large amount of data may be created, the next information is sent without retransmission, while for other information for which a relatively small amount of data is created, the following information is shown in Figure 284. Processing may be performed differently depending on the data type, such as by retransmitting as shown. In this case, the number of times a response signal cannot be continuously received (the number of transmission failures) is counted, and when a predetermined number of times is reached, communication is cut off and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified.

[17. Fraud judgment edge buffer]
The gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) can be obtained by winning a gaming medium in a winning device. Winnings of game media are detected by sensors and switches provided in the winning device, and the detection results are input at predetermined intervals and stored in a predetermined storage area.

Furthermore, winnings of game media have a validity period such as a period during which winning devices can accept winnings. On the other hand, in order to detect malfunctions and fraudulent activities, winnings outside the valid period are also counted, and if the number of winnings outside the valid period reaches a predetermined value or more, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside. or to notify of abnormalities.

In this way, when paying out prize balls, it is necessary to detect only winnings within the validity period, while when detecting an abnormality, it is necessary to detect winnings of game media regardless of the validity period. Therefore, there is a risk that input determination processing for various signals inputted by sensors, switches, etc. may become complicated.

In this embodiment, there is a buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals inputted by sensors, switches, etc. and a buffer 2 (second storage area, edge buffer for fraud determination) for counting and storing various input signals. As a result, most of the processing associated with input determination can be shared by simply switching the location where the area to be referenced is specified depending on the state when executing the input determination process, simplifying the entire process associated with winning determination. becomes possible.

[17-1. Buffer structure]
First, the structure of a buffer that temporarily stores information in order to execute various processes will be explained. This buffer is allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1311 as an input information storage area. Note that the input information storage area may be allocated to a RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1311. The input information storage area stores various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311. In addition to the input information storage area, the main control built-in RAM contains backup flags and checksum information to determine whether the contents of the RAM are normal when the power is turned on, random numbers for various drawings, and peripheral control boards. An area for storing commands and the like to be sent to the payout control board 951, payout control board 951, etc. is allocated.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control by the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each storage area includes a backup flag area, a checksum area, an input level data area, an input edge data area, a prize ball determination area, etc. In addition to this, various random numbers used for lottery are stored, Contains an area for storing commands to be sent. Furthermore, each area is divided into 1-byte units, and is a 1-byte or multiple-byte area.

Next, the configuration of the input information storage area will be explained. Here, we will explain the configuration of the input information storage area that stores input information indicating the detection of winning of a game ball into the winning opening, specifically, the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). do. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing an example of the data area included in the input information storage area of this embodiment, in which (A) shows the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and (B) shows the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). show.

As shown in (A), the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each bit is stored. Specifically, Bit0 is the first starting port sensor 2104 that detects the ball entering the first starting port 2002, Bit1 is the second starting port sensor 2511 that detects the ball entering the second starting port 2004, and Bit2 and Bit3 are the general General winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the ball entering the winning hole 2001, 2201, Bit 4 is a count switch (big winning hole sensor) that detects the ball entering the big winning hole 2005, Bit 5 is unused, Bit 6 is the input to the ejection port. The information is input by a sensor that detects the ball. In addition, the gaming machine in this embodiment has a variable rate area (V area of V-AT) in addition to the starting winning hole and the big winning hole, and Bit 7 is a sensor that detects passage of the game ball through the variable rate area. The information is input by The probability variable area sensor is a sensor that detects only passing into the V area, and unlike other sensors, it is not a sensor that involves a prize ball. In addition, the bit arrangement may be any arrangement; for example, bit 0 corresponds to the second starting opening 2004, bit 1 corresponds to the big winning opening 2005, and the sensors that are the targets of determining whether or not the validity period is within the validity period are connected in succession. It may be arranged as follows.

In addition, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR), like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the switch corresponding to each byte ( (sensor) input information is stored. Each bit in the prize ball determination area corresponds to each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but the second starting opening (Bit 1), big winning opening (Bit 4), and probability variable area (Bit 7) are valid during the valid period. It is set to "1" (ON) only when the sensor detects this. In other words, the input information from each sensor is set as is in each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but among the bits in the prize ball determination area, the winning device (winning device) that has a validity period set for accepting game balls The bit corresponding to the area) is set to "1" only when it is detected by the sensor within the valid period.

The valid period of the second starting port 2004 is that the normal electric accessory is opened when a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can receive a game ball, and then the normal electric accessory is opened. In addition to the period until the accessory is closed (normal electric accessory opening time), the validity determination period takes into account the time during which the game ball stays inside the second starting port 2004 after the ordinary electric accessory is closed. (OFF delay, for example, 1000 msec) is set. In addition, the validity period of the big winning opening 2005 is the same as the second starting opening 2004, in addition to the time to open the big winning opening 2005 (big winning opening opening time), the period of validity of the big winning opening 2005 is the time when the big winning opening 2005 stays inside the big winning opening 2005, and the count sensor A validity determination period (OFF delay, for example, 1994 msec) is set in consideration of the time lag until detection. On the other hand, in the variable variable area (V area of V-AT), the variable variable area validity period is set at the timing of opening the V attacker (big winning opening), and the validity determination period after the variable variable area valid period ends is no longer set. ing.

[17-2. Switch input processing]
Next, a procedure for setting data in the buffer described above will be explained. FIG. 288 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input process procedure for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The switch input process is executed in step S74 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The procedure shown in Figure 288 is an excerpt of the procedure for storing winning information for the starting winning hole and the big winning hole in the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). The same processing can be performed when storing information such as the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951. Further, in the switch processing shown in FIG. 288, an example is explained in which data for one port (1 byte) of one input edge data area (INPUT_EDG1) and prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is processed, but this is not limited to this. First, if the input port of the switch is 2 or more bytes, processing for the corresponding number of bytes is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines a change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Furthermore, the generated switch edge information is stored in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002), and the number of winning validity determinations is set (step P6003). Note that the switch edge information is data in which individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch is summarized in bytes. Further, the number of winning validity determinations may correspond to the number of switch input information included in the switch edge information, or may be the number of bits of the switch edge information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the switch corresponding to the winning determination is within the valid period (step P6004), and clears the update of the switch input information outside the valid period. Specifically, if it is not within the valid period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the winning determination in the input edge data 1 area is cleared (step P6005). ).

Next, after clearing the update of the switch input information outside the valid period, or if it is within the valid period (result of step P6004 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 changes the switch input information to be determined. In order to do so, the winning validity determination count is updated by -1 (step P6006). Further, the validity period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination is updated by -1 (step P6007). Note that for a switch for which a valid period has not been set, the process from step P6006 onwards is executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the validity period can be determined by unconditionally skipping processing if the switch input information does not have a validity period set, or for example, by setting a large value as the validity period, it will always be valid. It may be set within the period.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the number of winning validation determinations has reached 0, that is, whether or not the winning validation determination for all switch input information included in the switch edge information has been completed (step P6008). . If the winning validity determination of all switch input information has not been completed (the result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is executed again from step P6004. Note that in this process, the timer that determines the valid period is updated after determining whether or not it is within the valid period, but it is updated along with other timers in various timer update processes that are executed for each timer interrupt. You can do it like this.

The main control MPU 1311 completes the winning validity determination of the switch input information for which the validity period is set among the switch input information included in the switch edge information, and when the winning validity determination number of times becomes 0 (step P6008). If the result is "yes"), switch edge information reflecting whether or not the valid period is within the valid period is stored in the prize ball determination area for the switch input information for which the valid period is set (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information as it is in the input edge data 1 area, and by storing the switch input information in the prize ball determination area considering the validity period, it is possible to refer to the area corresponding to the process. Processing can be simplified. For example, in the prize ball control process (step S80 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)) that is executed when paying out a prize ball, when determining the presence or absence of a prize ball, a sensor that only pays out prize balls within the validity period is used. There is no need for processing such as determining whether or not it is a prize ball or determining whether or not to execute a prize ball depending on whether it is within the validity period, and when paying out a prize ball, refer to the information in the prize ball determination area. The prize ball can be paid out simply by this, and the prize ball paying out process can be simplified. In addition, when counting the number of game balls entered outside the validity period for a sensor that does not win a prize outside the validity period by the fraud detection process (step S84 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)), the input edge By referring to the information in the Data 1 area, it is possible to detect fraudulent winnings by counting the number of winnings that were won outside the validity period (the number that appears to be fraudulent winnings). In addition, it is possible to count fraudulent wins based on the difference between the number of wins detected by the input edge data 1 area and the number of wins detected by the prize ball determination area.

[17-3. Big prize opening process]
Next, a description will be given of a grand prize opening opening process that controls the grand prize opening 2005 that is opened by winning a lottery. In the big winning hole opening process, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, it is detected by a count switch (big winning hole sensor), and the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005 is counted by the switch input process described above. Ru. FIG. 289 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big prize opening opening process of this embodiment. The big winning opening opening process is called from the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, after each starting opening passage process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol/electric accessory operation number including the big winning opening opening process is called. In the big winning hole opening process, the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole is counted based on the information of the big winning hole (count) switch generated in the switch input process described above.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first obtains the number of big winning openings from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, the number of big winning opening count switches is set as the number of loops, and the big winning opening counting switch 1 bit is set as a determination bit value. The presence or absence of a win is determined based on the value of the big winning hole count switch in the prize ball determining area and the determination bit value for the number of loops, and the number of winning holes is counted. Furthermore, it is determined whether the acquired number of winnings from the big winning hole is less than the maximum number of winnings from the big winning hole (step P6012). The maximum number of winnings in the big winning hole is the specified number of winnings for the big winning hole 2005 to be opened and then closed in one round. Even if the game balls corresponding to the maximum winning number of the grand prize opening do not win, the grand prize opening 2005 is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, in the process of step P6011, the number of big winning holes is counted by looping for the number of count switches of the big winning hole 2005. At this time, if the count switch is single, the number of loops is set to 1, and the number of big winning holes in the prize ball determination area is counted for one time. In addition, in a configuration including a plurality of big winning holes, the number of loops is set by the number of count switches, and the number of winning holes in the big winning hole in the prize ball determination area is counted by the number of loops. If there is a single count switch, the number of winnings in the big winning hole may be counted only once without setting it as the number of loops, but the number of count switches in the big winning hole 2005 differs depending on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is necessary to provide two types of big winning opening opening processing for one counting switch and one for multiple counting switches, so the big winning opening opening processing can be executed in common without affecting the number of big winning opening switches. In order to do this, the number of loops is set to 1 even in the single case.

In addition, regarding over-winning during a jackpot (game balls entering the jackpot 2005 exceeding the maximum jackpot number), the value of the prize ball judgment area is determined because the jackpot 2005 is still within its validity period. (Note that the same determination can be made based on the value of the input edge data area 1). On the other hand, since fraudulent winnings other than jackpots (illegal winnings to the jackpot 2005) cannot be counted using the values in the prize ball determination area, fraudulent winnings are determined based on the values in the input edge data 1 area.

The main control MPU 1311 controls the main control MPU 1311 when the number of prizes from the special winning opening is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings from the special winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "no"), since the winning is over in the special winning opening. A large winning opening over winning flag is set in the flag (step P6013). In addition, over-winning is determined by acquiring the number of big winning holes from buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), but over-winning is determined by counting the number of big winning holes in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area). may be determined. In addition, the number of winnings from the big winning hole will continue to be counted even while the big winning hole 2005 is closed, and if the number of wins from the big winning hole exceeds the maximum number of winnings from the big winning hole, the large winning hole over winning flag will be displayed. Set the winning opening flag. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the grand prize opening state number to "00H", and then closes the grand prize opening 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, if the number of prizes won in the special winning opening is less than the maximum number of winnings in the special winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the timer that measures the opening time of the special winning opening. , it is determined whether the opening time of the big prize opening has ended (step P6014). If the opening time of the grand prize opening has not ended (the result of step P6014 is "no"), this process is ended and the acceptance of game balls into the grand prize opening 2005 is continued.

When the opening time of the big winning hole 2005 has ended (the result of step P6014 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 performs settings for closing the opened big winning hole 2005 (step P6015). In the process of step P6015, data necessary for closing the big prize opening 2005 is set.

When the process of step P6015 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets the operation of the big prize opening 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, the big winning hole opening/closing time data is acquired from the selected big winning hole opening pattern and set in the special electric operation signal output timer. A time (validity period) for determining whether or not the big prize opening switch is valid is set in the special electric operation signal output timer. The validity period is the interval time between opening of the big winning hole (big winning hole closing time) - α. In addition, if the validity period is longer than the closing time of the big prize opening, a time longer than the closing period will be set, so the new value will be set by opening the big winning opening 2005 before the timer reaches 0. is set. When the opening of the big winning hole 2005 starts, the opening time corresponding to the big winning hole opening pattern is set in the special electric operating signal output timer. For example, if the opening pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is 1 to 7 rounds, 29 seconds for 9 to 16 rounds, and 5 seconds for 8 rounds, the special electric operation signal output timer will be set for 1 to 7 and 9 to 16 rounds. 29 seconds will be set before the start of the round, and 5 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to continue opening the big prize opening 2005, that is, whether or not it is the final round (step P6017). If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is to be continued (not in the final round) (result of step P6017 is "yes"), this process is ended. If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is not to be continued (this is the final round) (result of step P6017 is "no"), execute processing after the jackpot ends, such as setting an ending command to perform settings at the time of ending. (Step P6018). In the process after the end of the jackpot, a validity determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending is set, in which detection of game balls by the count switch is enabled after closing the big prize opening 2005. The validity determination period corresponding to the ending time may be the same as the time for each big winning opening opening interval, but may be a different time (for example, a time corresponding to the ending period, etc.).

[17-4. Timing chart (big prize opening)]
Next, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball in the big winning hole 2005 will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 290 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins in the big winning hole 2005 in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

In the example shown in FIG. 290, as described above, the valid time is set at the start of the jackpot. The valid time is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening when opening, and the closing interval period - 4 m seconds when closing. For the fraudulent count value, the initial value is set to a value (L) corresponding to the type of jackpot, and is sequentially subtracted when a game ball is detected entering the jackpot 2005, regardless of whether it is within the validity period or not, and reaches 0. If this is the case, it is assumed that fraud has occurred. The initial value of the fraudulent count value is, for example, 16 x (10 + 3) = 208 in the case of jackpot 1 with 10 counts in 16 rounds, and 4 x (9 + 3) = 48 in the case of jackpot 2 with 9 counts in 4 rounds. do. In addition, in the case of 3 jackpots in 12 rounds (actually 2 rounds with 5 counts), the number is 2×(5+3), and in the 10th round, at most one prize is won (10×1), so the total is determined to be 26. The timing chart will be explained below.

First, at time t1, there is a prize in the big winning hole 2005 during the validity period (win sensor (count switch) OFF → ON), and the corresponding bit (big winning hole) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)) Similarly, the corresponding bit (big winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is set to 1. At this time, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number N of big winning openings. Furthermore, the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-1). Further, the peripheral control board 1510 is sent a production command related to the big winning hole winning command, such as the big winning hole winning command, and the payout control board 951 is sent a prize ball number command for winning the big winning hole.

At time t2, similar to time t1, a win occurs in the big winning slot during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (big winning slot count switch) of buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Further, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the big winning opening (N+2), and "1" is subtracted from the fraud count based on the value of buffer 1 (M-2). Furthermore, corresponding commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951.

At time t3, the jackpot game ends and the initial value (15) of the fraudulent count value is set. As described above, the valid time of the big winning hole 2005 is a time that allows winning detection in addition to the big winning hole opening time. In addition, the initial value of the fraud count may be set at the end timing of the jackpot ending, for example, at the special symbol change waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process.

After that, from time t4 to t6, an illegal winning occurs in which a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 in a state other than a jackpot (the big winning hole is not activated), and the corresponding buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data area 1 The bit (big winning opening count switch) is set to “1” (valid, ON), while the corresponding bit (big winning opening counting switch) of buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area is set to “0” (invalid, ON). OFF). Then, based on the value of buffer 1, the illegal count is subtracted by "1". The production command and prize ball command are sent based on the value of buffer 2, but at this time, the value of buffer 2 is "0" (invalid, OFF), so if the prize is not properly won, These commands will not be sent.

At time t8, another fraudulent winning occurs, and by subtracting 1 from the fraudulent count, the fraudulent count reaches "0". As a result, output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start unauthorized notification. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the unauthorized notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t9, the illegal count number is set to 1. Thereby, even if fraudulent winnings continue to occur, it is possible to continue outputting the security signal (external output signal) and reporting fraud. Note that time t8 and time t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, another fraudulent winning occurs, and the fraudulent count is subtracted by "1". Since the fraud count is set to "1" at time t9, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start false notification again. Note that if an unauthorized winning is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset (extended) while continuing to output the security signal. Subsequently, at time t11, the fraudulent count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t10 and time t11 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

Thereafter, at time t12, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and the valid time and the number of fraudulent counts during the jackpot are set to initial values (L). At time t13, similar to time t2, a win occurs in the big winning slot during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (big winning slot count switch) of buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Then, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the big winning opening (1), and "1" is subtracted from the fraud count based on the value of buffer 1 (L-1). Further, a prize ball command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and a performance command is sent to the payout control board 951.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is a grand prize opening that pays out prize balls based on the result of fluctuating display of symbols based on the acceptance (passage) of game balls (game media) in the starting opening (starting area). 2005 (gaming medium receiving means) becomes able to accept game balls (gaming value imparting means). The accepted game ball is detected by the count switch (big win hole sensor, game medium detection means) provided in the big win hole 2005, and is stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (first storage means) that constantly stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the big prize opening 2005, and a buffer 1 (first storage means) that stores the result of fluctuating display of symbols (lottery result). ) is allocated a buffer 2 (second storage means) that stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is accepted during the validity period (predetermined period) based on the period of validity (predetermined period) based on . With this configuration, when paying out prize balls, it is possible to refer to buffer 2, refer to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), detect fraudulent winnings (abnormal occurrence), and count the number of fraudulent winnings, etc. becomes.

[17-5. Timing chart (second starting port)]
The case where a game ball wins in the big winning hole 2005 has been described above. Next, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 2004 equipped with a normal electric accessory will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 291 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 equipped with a normal electric accessory in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, an effective time is set at the start of the release of the normal electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the normal electric accessory. Also, an initial value (for example, "15") of the fraud count is set. The initial value of the fraud count is, for example, the maximum number of winnings when the electric accessory is operated normally + α.

At time t2, a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004 during the validity period, and the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) Set “1”. Furthermore, based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the pending storage number N, and based on the value of buffer 1, "1" is subtracted from the fraud count. Then, a lottery based on the occurrence of a prize is executed, and various production commands (for example, a pre-read command, a command to increase the number of reservations) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the lottery result and the increase in the number of reservations. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Also at time t3, since a win to the second start opening 2004 occurs during the validity period, it is treated as a normal win and is processed in the same manner as at time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting game balls at the second starting port 2004 has elapsed (ended), and the initial value of the fraud count value (number of fraud determinations: "10") is set. As mentioned above, the valid time for accepting game balls at the second starting port 2004 is the operating time of the normal electric accessory, as well as the time that allows winning detection after the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state. There is. The number of fraud judgments is set to a different value when the normal electric accessory is opened and after it is closed, but it may be the same, or it can be set to a larger value when opening the ordinary electric accessory than after closing. May be set. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of opening times for the normal electric accessory, the number of illegal winnings may be changed according to the opening times. For example, the number of illegal winnings is set to 3 for a short opening and 15 for a long opening (or multiple openings).

After that, from time t5 to t8, due to an illegal prize winning in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 when the electric accessory is not activated, the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data area 1 (second starting port switch ) is set to "1" (valid, ON), and the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Then, based on buffer 1, the illegal count is subtracted by "1". At this time, since fraud is determined based on the value of buffer 1, no production command or prize ball command is sent if the winning is not proper. In other words, when determining whether the winning to the second starting port 2004 is valid, processing is executed based on the value of buffer 2, and when determining fraud (counting the fraud count), the process is executed based on the value of buffer 1. Execute processing based on.

As mentioned above, if a winning (normal winning) occurs in the second starting port 2004 within the validity period, “1” will be set to the value of the corresponding bit (second starting port switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2. The settings are made, and various commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. In addition, if a winning occurs in the second starting slot 2004 outside the validity period, only the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 is set to "1", and various commands that would be sent in normal cases are not sent. Update the fraud count without. Note that instead of updating the fraud count when setting the value of each buffer, the fraud count may be updated based on the value of each buffer after updating the value of each buffer. This makes it possible to make the module that updates the value of each buffer and the module that updates the illegal count independent, making it possible to share the processing from switch input to setting the value of the corresponding buffer. For example, updating the fraud count based on the value of each buffer may be performed in cases other than when the values of the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are both "1", or when the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 is This may be performed when the value is "1" and the value of the corresponding bit in the buffer 2 is "0".

At time t9, another fraudulent winning occurs, and by subtracting "1" from the fraudulent count, the fraudulent count reaches "0". As a result, output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start unauthorized notification. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the unauthorized notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t10, the illegal count number is set to "1". As a result, even if fraudulent winnings continue to occur, it is possible to output a security signal (external output signal) and immediately notify when fraudulent winnings occur. Although it is not necessarily necessary to set the fraudulent count number to "1", it is desirable to set it to a value smaller than the initial value ("15") so that it can be recognized that fraudulent winnings are continuing. Further, a value larger than "1" may be set in order to prevent frequent false notifications even though they are not fraudulent due to erroneous detection due to noise or the like. Time t9 and time t10 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, another fraudulent winning occurs, and the fraudulent count is subtracted by "1". Since the fraud count is set to "1" at time t10, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start false notification again. Note that if an unauthorized winning is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset while continuing to output the security signal. Subsequently, at time t12, the fraudulent count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t11 and time t12 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

Thereafter, at time t13, similarly to time t1, the valid time is set as the normal electric accessory is released. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the normal electric accessory. Also, an initial value (for example, "15") of the fraud count is set.

At time t14, similar to time t2, a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004 during the validity period, and the corresponding bits (second starting port switch) of buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of pending memories N, and "1" is subtracted from the illegal count based on the value of buffer 1. Then, as the number of reservations increases, various production commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At time t15, similarly to time t4, the valid time during which game balls can be accepted in the second starting port 2004 has elapsed, and the initial value ("10") of the fraud count value is set.

In addition, since the first starting port 2003 can always accept game balls, when a game ball is won, bit 0 of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) is set to "1". All you need to do is set it, and there is no need to count fraudulent counts. In other words, for winning openings such as starting openings and big winning openings that have a validity period in which prizes can be won, they are set in buffer 2 with the condition of whether or not they are fraudulent winnings, and for winning openings that can be accepted at any time, they are set in buffer 1. The contents may be set in buffer 2 as is, or buffer 1 may be referenced as a reference destination.

In the game machine of this embodiment, when a game ball (game medium) enters the starting hole, a lottery is executed based on the occurrence of a winning prize. The lottery only needs to be executed if a prize is won within the validity period (in the case of a normal prize), but regardless of whether the prize is won within the validity period or outside the validity period, buffer 1 and buffer It may be determined whether or not the lottery is to be executed based on the value of the corresponding bit of 2. That is, after setting the value of the corresponding bit of each buffer, the lottery is executed by referring to the value of the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and buffer 2 without determining whether the winning is within the validity period. . A modification example in which a lottery is executed based on the values set in each buffer will be described below.

First, if the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different, it is assumed that the winning prize is invalid due to some abnormality (it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred), and the lottery is not executed and the surrounding area is A dedicated command may also be sent to the control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives this dedicated command, it can notify that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in winnings. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, in order to notify the occurrence of fraud when multiple winnings occur outside the valid period, when the fraud count reaches "0", a command different from this dedicated command is issued. may be sent to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Further, the value of the illegal count may be included in the dedicated command. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the illegal count is "0", and if the illegal count is "0", It is sufficient to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, it may be possible to give priority to one of the buffers and to make it possible to perform a lottery when the value of the corresponding bit of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 2 (giving priority to the value of buffer 2) with emphasis on the effectiveness of winnings. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on the value of buffer 1 (giving priority to the value of buffer 1), with emphasis on the fact that the game ball has entered the winning slot. At this time, a dedicated command indicating that the values of corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be sent to peripheral control board 1510. If this dedicated command is received consecutively a predetermined number of times or more, or if it is received a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period, an abnormality notification may be performed, assuming that an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, the buffer to be prioritized may be determined at the time of execution of the lottery process using parameters or the like. For example, a table containing information specifying priority buffers is maintained in advance, and the table is referenced during execution of lottery processing to specify the priority buffer. This allows the priority buffer to be switched by changing the data value in the table without modifying the program code. By configuring it in this way, for example, even if the priority buffers differ depending on the model, it is possible to use a common program code, increasing the versatility of the program and improving development efficiency. .

Furthermore, the procedure for specifying a buffer to be given priority will be described. At the start of execution of the lottery process, the start address of a table that stores data values indicating buffers to be given priority is stored in a predetermined register. A table is specified from the address stored in this predetermined register, necessary information is taken in, and a prioritized buffer is specified. The information stored in the table is the address of buffer 1 when the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 1, and the address of buffer 2 when the lottery is executed based on the value of buffer 2. When executing the lottery process, the address of the buffer specified in the table is referenced, so it is possible to switch the reference destination simply by changing the data value stored in the table, and it can be configured as a common process. I can do it. In addition, it is also possible to switch the reference destination depending on the gaming state, etc. For example, in a gaming state where a game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, there is a high possibility that winning will be valid, so the game ball will be placed in the winning port. Priority may be given to buffer 1 with emphasis on the fact that a prize has been won, and in a gaming state where game balls cannot be accepted into the second starting port 2004, priority may be given to buffer 2 with emphasis on the effectiveness of winning.

In addition, if a lottery is executed when the values of the corresponding bits of buffers 1 and 2 are different, commands based on the lottery results (variation pattern commands, symbol type commands, etc.) will be sent at the start of normal fluctuations. (same as the command), and also sends a dedicated command indicating the difference to the peripheral control board 1510. Regarding the transmission order of the command based on the lottery result and the dedicated command, the command based on the lottery result may be transmitted first, or the dedicated command may be transmitted first. Furthermore, instead of transmitting the dedicated command, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. At this time, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands based on the lottery results, or information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands based on the lottery results. It may be added only to a command (for example, the first command to be sent). Adding information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are different, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command during normal (matching) is set to "3001h" to "30FFh", an abnormality (difference) is added. The time fluctuation pattern commands are set to “B001h” to “B0FFh”. Specifically, by changing the first bit of the variable pattern command, the upper one byte of the variable pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110000b") to "B0h" ("10110000b").

In addition, if the corresponding bit values of Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are both set to "1" (valid), the information stored in Buffer 1 (corresponding) is not used and the A lottery is executed based on (corresponding to) information stored in a buffer 2 that is set when a prize is won. Thereby, a lottery can be executed based on information whose validity is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on (corresponding to) information stored in buffer 1 instead of (corresponding to) information stored in buffer 2. In this case, the buffer 2 only needs to hold the minimum amount of information related to the switch input, so that the required storage capacity can be reduced.

In the gaming machine described above, a lottery is executed based on a game ball (game medium) being received (passed) in a starting hole (starting area), and a fluctuating display of symbols is started (lottery execution means). , the state shifts to a state (special gaming state) in which gaming value can be given to the player, such as by paying out prize balls depending on the result of the lottery. The accepted game ball is detected by a starting port switch (gaming medium detecting means) provided in the starting port, and is stored in an input information storage area (gaming medium detection information storing means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) that constantly stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the starting port, and a second starting port 2004. Buffer 2 (prize ball) stores input information (gaming medium detection information) during the period (validity period) in which game balls can be accepted only when the electric accessory is released (when the conditions for accepting game balls are met). determination area, second storage means) are allocated. With this configuration, a lottery is executed based on the input information stored in buffer 2, and by referring to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), fraudulent winnings (abnormal occurrences) are detected, and the number of fraudulent winnings, etc. It becomes possible to count.

[17-6. Timing chart (variable area switch)]
The case where a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 has been described above. Next, a process for detecting a win of a game ball in a variable probability area that changes to a variable probability state after the jackpot ends when a prize is won at a specific timing (specific round) during a jackpot game will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 292 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball wins in the variable probability area (V-AT area) in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, passage of the game ball through the probability variable area switch is detected. As a result, the variable probability region switch is turned from OFF to ON. At this time, since it is a specific round (V passable round) (valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)) is set to "1", and , the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to "1", and if the corresponding bit is set to 1 based on the value of buffer 2, the probability variable is set. Set the judgment flag. After the jackpot is over, if the probability variation determination flag is set, the game shifts to the probability variation state. Further, when the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of buffer 2 are set to the same value, the probability change determination flag may be set. At this time, an AND value (logical product) may be calculated between the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of buffer 2, and if the value is 1, the probability change determination flag may be set. At time t1, since it is determined to be normal, a production command regarding the V passing production is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (V passable round) ends at time t2, but a plurality of specific rounds may occur in one jackpot game.

Subsequently, at time t3, similarly to time t1, passage of the game ball through the probability variable area switch is detected. At this time, since it is not within a specific round (within the valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 1 corresponding to input edge data area 1 is set to "1", and the corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) is set to "1", which corresponds to the prize ball determination area. The corresponding bit (probability variable area switch) of buffer 2 is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Since the corresponding bit of Buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of Buffer 2 have different values, it is determined that there is an abnormality, that is, V passing outside of a specific round, and there is no transition to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot. A security signal is output as a V passing abnormality notification until time t4, and a V passing abnormality notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the security signal may be the same as the signal at the time of abnormality in the big prize opening 2005 or the second starting opening 2004, or may be a different external output. Further, the output time may be a predetermined time, and does not need to be the same time as the big winning opening winning abnormality or the like. Furthermore, either one of the V passage abnormality notification and the security signal may be output.

In addition, after detecting the passage of the variable variable area switch in a specific round, if the passage of the variable variable area switch is also detected in a round other than the specific round, only an abnormality notification will be executed (an abnormality notification command will be sent) at the time of passage other than the specific round. However, it may be possible to shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variable judgment flag is maintained), or it may not be allowed to shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variable judgment flag is cleared). ). In addition, when the passage of the probability variable area switch is detected outside of the specific round, an abnormality notification command is sent, but the security signal is not output, and the abnormality notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side such as a lamp or voice is sent. Alternatively, although the notification command is sent, the peripheral control board 1510 may not notify the abnormality in response to the command.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 292, an abnormality is determined by determining whether the corresponding bits of buffer 1 and buffer 2 match, but in the same way as when determining the winning abnormality of the big winning opening, A method may also be used in which the count number is set in advance. For example, the fraud determination counter is set to "2" at the start of a specific round, and the fraud determination counter is subtracted based on the information in the buffer 1. Alternatively, it may be set to "1" at the end of a specific round, and when the result of subtracting the fraud count becomes 0, it is determined that fraud is occurring. Note that the initial value of the fraud count that is set at the start of a specific round does not need to be limited to "2" because it can be set to a value that would never occur under normal circumstances, and if two or more game balls pass, If not, set it to 2. In addition, since it is necessary to determine that it is fraudulent if even one game ball passes in a round other than a specific round, "1" is set at the end of a specific round, and the result of subtraction is "0", and after reporting fraud, it is set to "1". Set to .

The gaming machine described here shifts to the variable probability state under the condition that the game ball enters the variable probability region at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during the jackpot game. If the variable rate area is not in a state where it can accept game balls, the game ball is in a state where it is difficult (or impossible) to win, and if a game ball is accepted in the variable rate area in such a state, it is a fraud. It will be judged as a prize winner. Therefore, as mentioned above, the bit corresponding to the probability variable area switch is provided in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), and set in buffer 1 regardless of whether it is valid or invalid. Set in buffer 2 only when it is valid. Thereby, in the process of transitioning to the variable probability state, it is sufficient to refer to the buffer 2 without determining whether there is an illegal winning, so the process can be simplified. On the other hand, by referring to Buffer 1 and Buffer 2, it is possible to determine whether or not to win a prize illegally and to count the number of illegally won prizes.

[17-7. Summary/Modifications]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment uses a detection sensor (switch) to detect reception of a game ball (gaming medium) in the grand prize opening, starting opening, etc. (detecting that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area). ) A game medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing detection information (game medium detection information) of these game balls (game media); The means includes a buffer 1 (a first storage means, an edge buffer for fraud determination, and an input edge data 1 area) that can store gaming media detection information at all times, and a buffer 1 that can store gaming media detection information at all times within a valid period (when a predetermined condition is satisfied). For example, when a game ball enters a prize within the validity period and the prize ball is paid out (processing is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition). If so, the process is executed with reference to the game media detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

In addition, if a valid period is set for accepting game balls in a prize opening or variable probability area, the number of times switch input information (gaming medium detection information) is stored only in buffer 1 (number of fraudulent wins) is counted. By doing so, it is possible to determine an abnormality. The number of fraudulent winnings may be counted by using the threshold for abnormality determination as an initial value and subtracting it by 1 each time a fraudulent winning occurs, and when it reaches 0, it is determined to be abnormal, or by setting the initial value to 0 and subtracting by 1 each time a fraudulent winning occurs. The values may be added together, and when a threshold value for determining an abnormality is reached, an abnormality may be determined.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the area to be referred to when executing the input determination process, it is possible to standardize the process associated with the input determination and simplify the entire process. As mentioned above, it is possible to pay out prize balls based on information detected within the validity period, or to determine an abnormality by counting the number of game balls that have won outside the validity period. development efficiency can be improved. For example, when determining the winnings of the big winning hole 2005, in the embodiment described above, the determination was made based on the value of the prize ball determination area, but regarding the counting of winnings to the big winning hole 2005 in the jackpot state, The determination may be made based on the value of the input edge data area 1, and the value of the prize ball determination area may be referred to only for winning determination associated with the prize ball.

In this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which there are two types of buffers: the buffer 1 that constantly stores inputs and the buffer 2 that stores inputs within the valid period. It may be configured to have a buffer of

Furthermore, in the embodiment described so far, the winning hole has a valid period set at the time of winning, but the first starting hole 2002, which can always accept game balls, determines the valid period when a game ball wins. Without doing so, the corresponding bits (first starting port switch) of buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) are set to "1" (valid). Therefore, for the first starting hole 2002, a prize ball may be awarded based on the value of the buffer 1, or a prize ball may be awarded based on the value of the buffer 2, similar to the second starting hole 2004. In addition, since the value of buffer 1 and the value of buffer 2 match, and the result of the validity period determination process in the second starting port 2004 is always normal, for example, when the prize ball is won in the first starting port 2002, The processing may be the same as the processing of the prize ball in the second starting port 2004.

Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are included in the input information storage area allocated to RAM (main control built-in RAM), but these buffers may be placed in consecutive areas or in separate areas. You can. When allocating Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 to consecutive areas, when storing values in each buffer, settings can be made to each buffer simply by executing an INC instruction/DEC instruction, simplifying processing. can. On the other hand, when Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are allocated to separate areas, each buffer can be freely arranged, which increases the degree of freedom in designing the storage area and improves development efficiency.

[18. Bit transfer instruction]
In recent years, gaming machines are required to have complex gaming controls in order to further enhance the interest of gaming. On the other hand, certain restrictions have been added to the gaming control device that actually controls the gaming in order to ensure the fairness of the gaming and to prevent excessive gambling, and the gaming is now conducted within a predetermined framework. ing.

Therefore, in order to realize complicated game control, the structure of the program becomes complicated, which may cause problems such as malfunctions. Therefore, they attempted to simplify the program by converting game control into data. For example, by having a program sequentially process data that defines control details, the structure of the program has been simplified, and by changing the data, it has become easier to respond to changes in specifications.

On the other hand, the conversion of game control into data has increased the reliance on data, and the complicated specifications of gaming machines have led to an increase in data capacity. Furthermore, since there is a limit to the capacity for storing data for controlling gaming machines, it is necessary to suppress an increase in data capacity.

The gaming machine of this embodiment was created in view of the above circumstances, and in order to suppress the increase in the data capacity used by the gaming machine, it is possible to reduce the data capacity by compressing and storing the data. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that does the following.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by compressing data, it becomes possible to hold more data, and it becomes possible to provide games incorporating complex specifications, thereby increasing the interest of the games. becomes possible. Furthermore, by further converting game control into data, it becomes possible to further simplify the program, suppress the complexity of game control, and reduce the probability of occurrence of malfunctions. Furthermore, it becomes easier to respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, and by replacing some data, it becomes possible to easily provide gaming machines with various variations.

Specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by improving the instruction to read gaming data, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the structure of the table that holds gaming data, and to simplify the process of reading gaming data. This compresses the capacity of game data and simplifies game control that involves data reading. The configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be described below.

[18-1. Overview of bit transfer procedure]
First, an overview of the configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be explained. In the data transfer procedure in this embodiment, data can be read out in bits from a specified bit position in the table, rather than reading out data in bytes from a specified address.

FIG. 293 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the bit transfer procedure of this embodiment. The bit transfer procedure in this embodiment is configured to identify a position (address) from which data is to be read based on an index (index information) that specifies the source from which data is to be read, and to read data for the specified number of bits. There is. When this procedure is executed, an index, extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read, and a storage location of the read data are specified as parameters. For the index, a register storing index information may be specified, or a value may be directly specified.

The index in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the start address of the data table (table position information), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position from which data is read from the specified data table (data relative position information). ing. In this embodiment, by correcting the specified index, the address of the specified data table is specified, and the reading position of the data in the data table is obtained. Specifically, the index after correction is created by setting the upper 13 bits of the index before correction to the lower 13 bits, and adding "000" to the upper part to make 2 bytes (16 bits).

Next, the reference address (N) of the data is obtained by adding the corrected index to the value set in "TP (register)" which indicates the reference address of the data storage position (table arrangement). Calculate and identify the storage location (address) of the table. Furthermore, the reading position (reading start bit position) of the data at the reference address (N) is specified from the value of the lower three bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in FIG. 293, the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction (the lower left hatched part) is the read start bit position of the reference address (N). For example, the value of the lower 3 bits is " When "100" is set, the read start bit position of the reference address (N) is the 4th bit ("100").

In this way, in this embodiment, the address of the area where data is stored can be specified by adding the value set in the TP register to the index value, so it is only necessary to specify the lower address of the data storage location. , the area for storing upper addresses can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area (lower three bits of the corrected index) for specifying the data reading start bit position. With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to specify the address of the data storage area and the data read start bit position using a 2-byte index. In other words, it is possible to specify the storage location of data bit by bit and read the data without increasing the capacity compared to the case where data is read by specifying an address like a conventional load instruction. It has become.

Furthermore, in the bit transfer procedure in this embodiment, extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read is specified as a parameter at the time of execution. The extraction designation information is set to a value equal to the number of bits of data to be acquired minus 1. In the example shown in FIG. 293, data for 6 bits (in the case of extraction designation information=5) from the 5th bit of the table indicated by the reference destination address (N address) is read and stored in the designated storage location.

In this embodiment, the address where the data is actually stored is the value obtained by adding the corrected index to the value of the start address (reference address) of the data area set in advance in the TP register. Further, when the CPU is reset when the power is turned on, etc., the value set in the TP register is set to the start address of the data area as a default value (initial value). Furthermore, the TP register can be rewritten to any value by a program. With this configuration, by appropriately rewriting the value of the TP register according to the gaming status etc., it is possible to change the data reference destination without changing the program code, simplifying the program code and improving the game playability. The development efficiency of the machine can be improved. Note that details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 299 and subsequent figures.

The TP register is a dedicated register for specifying an index that is a reference address among the registers of the CPU. Although general-purpose registers used in calculations and the like are composed of two or more banks, the TP register, like the flag register, does not have a bank composition, but is composed of one register. Note that a TP register may be provided for each bank like a general-purpose register, and the TP register of one bank may be made usable in the same way as a general-purpose register every time banks are switched. For example, if bank 0 is used in initialization processing and general-purpose registers in bank 1 are used in timer interrupt processing, the TP register used in initialization processing uses the one set as bank 0, and the timer interrupt processing uses the TP register set as bank 0. The TP register used in this will be the one set as bank 1. This makes it possible to switch the value of the TP register according to the process, and for example, it is possible to switch the data reference destination for each process. Note that even if a TP register is provided for each bank, it can be rewritten by a program in the same way as when a TP register is not provided for each bank, and a default value is set at reset. Furthermore, the default value may be a common value regardless of the bank, or may be set to a different value for each bank.

[18-2. Types of bit transfer instructions]
Next, the instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction) will be explained. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a bit transfer instruction is executed using an assembler (mnemonic), but the same applies to other development languages. FIG. 294 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction in this embodiment.

The bit transfer instruction is composed of an instruction code "RBT" and parameters. The parameters are the storage location of referenced data, an index indicating the referenced address, and extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be extracted. In this embodiment, the reference data is stored in a register, but the data may be written directly to a storage area on the RAM. The index value specifies the address of the table storing the data to be read and the position of the data to be read, as in the example shown in FIG. 293.

Next, an example of actually using the instruction code will be explained. FIG. 295 is a diagram showing an example of the types of bit transfer instructions of this embodiment. As mentioned above, the instruction code is "RBT", and the acquired data is stored in register r. As the register r, for example, the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, H register, and L register, which are general-purpose registers, are specified. Note that if the data to be read is 2 bytes, pair registers such as the WA register, BC register, and DE register may be specified.

In addition, parameters (storage location of referenced data, reference destination address, and extraction specification information) can be specified by directly specifying the index (address) value mm, or by specifying register rr for address specification. . When register rr is specified, the value stored in the register is read and processed. Since a 2-byte value is stored in the addressing register rr, it corresponds to the DE register, HL register, index register (IX register, IY register), and the like. An example of the bit transfer instruction code shown in FIG. 295 will be described below.

"RBT r, (mm).n" directly specifies the address mm of the table that stores data, reads data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n, and stores it in the register r. The extraction specification information n directly specifies a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or specifies register A. When register A is specified, data corresponding to the number stored in register A is read out.

Furthermore, to explain the specific operation (procedure) of "RBT r, (mm).n", as explained in FIG. Therefore, mm/8 corresponds to the corrected index. The value set in the TP register described above is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the table to be referenced. Furthermore, the lower three bits of the index mm are extracted (mm∧07H), and the bit position at which data is read from the table to be referenced is specified. Then, data corresponding to n+1 bits of extraction designation information is extracted from the specified position and stored in register r. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 11, and the capacity for storing instructions is 5 bytes. Further, even after the instruction is executed, the J flag and the Z flag of the flag register become zero, and the values before the instruction execution are held for the others. Note that the change in the flag register is the same for the instruction codes described below.

"RBT r, (rr).n" specifies the register rr that stores the address of the table, reads data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n from the table, and stores it in the register r. The other parameters are the same as the parameters of "RBT r, (mm).n". Specifically, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register, and when the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes "RBT A, (HL).n". The specific operation of "RBT r, (rr).n" is the same as replacing the address mm of "RBT r, (mm).n" with the value stored in register rr, so we will not explain it. Although omitted, the detailed procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 300. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 9, and the capacity for storing instructions is 3 bytes. Note that if the target to be read is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity is 1 byte in order to specify a register such as the DE register, HL register, or index register (IX register, IY register) as the storage destination. This increases to 4 bytes. The detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later with reference to FIG. 302.

“RBT r, (rr+).n” is executed in the same operation as “RBT r, (rr).n” and then adds n+1 to the value of the address stored in register rr. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing instructions is 3 bytes. This allows the specified area to be read out continuously. For example, after executing “RBT A, (HL+).n”, by executing “RBT W, (HL).m”, the address from the specified position in the table of addresses originally stored in the HL register is After n-bit data is read and stored in the A register, m-bit data can be read from the next area and stored in the W register. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r, (rr+).n", multiple pieces of data can be read from a continuous area. It is possible to simplify the processing when reading a record (data group) made up of data with a number of bits of . Note that the detailed procedure for reading a plurality of data from a continuous area will be described later with reference to FIG. 301.

"RBT r, (rr+d).n" reads data from the position where the value d is added to the address of the table stored in register rr. This makes it possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. At this time, the number of cycles for processing instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing instructions is 4 bytes.

"RBT r, (rr+W).n" reads data from the position where the value stored in register W is added to the address of the table stored in register rr. This makes it possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. Furthermore, by updating the value of register W, data can be read from consecutively specified positions using a common code. "RBT r, (rr+A).n" can be processed in the same way by simply changing register W to register A. The number of cycles to process these instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing the instructions is 3 bytes.

[18-3. Program example]
Next, an application example of the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction "RBT" will be explained. FIG. 296 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 297 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 296) of processing using the bit transfer instruction "RBT" in this embodiment. The corresponding flowchart steps are described as program comments. The process shown in FIGS. 296 and 297 is a process of reading data from the table in units of 6 bits. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table as an index value as the initial value of the reference destination address (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program of FIG. 297, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register ("LD HL, table_Top"). The address of the table to be referenced is specified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. In this table, the number of bits allocated to one data (total number of bits of the basic configuration block) is six, and four pieces of data ("25, 48, 32, 63") are stored. Regarding the start address of the data area, the "start address of the data area" is set in the TP register as a default value every time a reset signal is input such as when the power is restored, so if the TP register is not rewritten, that is, If the starting address of the data area is still stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the starting address of the data area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 extracts pointer information (pointa_a) of data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register (“LD A, (pointa_a)”).

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the reference table (step P8003). A basic configuration block indicates an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in a reference table. Further, the total number of basic constituent blocks is the number of bits of the area for storing data, and corresponds to the data capacity in units of records. For example, in a table that stores integer values in the range from 0 to 30, an area for 5 bits is required to store each piece of data, so the total number of basic configuration blocks is 5. In this embodiment, the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is six. The multiplication result is stored in the A register ("MUL A, 6") as shown in the program.

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the basic unit number (step P8004). The basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) of the gaming machine of this embodiment is 8 (the number of bits in 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register as shown in the program ("LD C, 8→DIV WA, C"). Note that when the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the W register.

The main control MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register and the value stored in the WA register is added (“ADD HL,WA”). If you refer to the program, before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register, the WA register is saved to the stack area by executing "PUSH WA". This is because the value of the W register in which the remainder is stored is cleared ("XOR W"), and then the remainder value is used as a calculation value ("POP WA→LD A, W→...").

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of the process in step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). In the program, the value of the HL register is multiplied by 8 by performing a left shift (SLA HL) three times (shifting 3 bits).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder value of the division in step P8005 to the calculation result of the process in step P8006, and sets it as reference destination address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register serves as the start bit position for reading reference data from the start address of the reference table. In the program, the remainder value is calculated (“POP WA” → “LD A, W” → “XOR W”), and the remainder value (value stored in the WA register) is stored in the HL register where the index value is stored. Adding (“ADD HL, WA”). Through these processes, the index (pre-correction index) shown in FIG. 293 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction specification information based on the number of information to be acquired (the number of bits of reference data, 6 in this embodiment), and uses the bit transfer instruction from the reference destination address information to store the reference data. Set first (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the pre-correction index, and data for the number of bits (6 bits) corresponding to the extraction specification information n is stored in the A register ("RBT A, (HL).n"). ).

[18-4. Modified example]
As mentioned above, the procedure for executing a bit transfer command in this embodiment is (1) specifying data to be referenced, (2) creating an index (pre-correction index), and (3) reading/storing data. ing. Here, a modification will be described in which the structure of the program is simplified by making a process that can be executed independent of the process of executing a bit transfer instruction independent as a subroutine.

(1) Specifying reference data is to set information for specifying data (reference data) necessary for the process being executed, and in the flowchart of FIG. 296, this corresponds to the table referenced in step P8001. This corresponds to the process of specifying information and specifying information corresponding to the data read position in step P8002. These processes are specialized for the content being executed (caller) and are individually specified when executing various functions. (3) The same applies to the processing of reading/storing data, which is executed in subsequent processing based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creation of an index (pre-correction index), in addition to the address of the reference table specified in (1) and the pointer information of the data reference position, the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is specified. This allows the index before correction to be created independently of the process being executed. Therefore, (2) index creation processing can be made into a subroutine.

FIG. 298 is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process in this embodiment is made into a subroutine, where (A) is the process that calls the index creation process, and (B) is the index creation process which is made into a subroutine. The flowchart shown in FIG. 298(A) executes the same process as in FIG. 296. The flowchart of index creation processing in FIG. 298(B) is a subroutine of the processing from step P8003 to step P8008 in FIG. 296. In this way, by making the index creation process a subroutine, it is possible to simplify the process of the caller, and it is possible to improve development efficiency.

Input parameters for the index creation process are an "index value" which is the start address of the reference table, "pointer information" of the data to be referenced, and "total number of bits of the basic constituent block" of the stored data. In this embodiment, the result of subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table is set as an "index value" in the HL register (step P8001), and "pointer information" is set in the A register (step P8002). ). Furthermore, the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting "index value" and "pointer information" as input parameters for index creation processing, it is done by setting (specifying) them in registers that are treated as "index value" and "pointer value" in index creation processing. . Further, regarding the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block", the numerical value itself may be specified, or it may be set (designated) in a register that is treated as the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block".

[18-5. Compressed data]
In conventional data read instructions, data storage is managed in a predetermined basic unit (byte unit), so it is necessary to read data from a table in this unit. In the conventional table structure, which is managed in units of 1 byte (8 bits) like the gaming machine of this embodiment, data is managed in units of bytes even if the data does not require the capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It needed to be stored. For example, for numerical values in the range from 0 to 63, although it is sufficient to secure 6 bits of capacity for each data, it is necessary to allocate and hold 1 byte of capacity for each data.

On the other hand, with the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, data for a specified number of bits can be read from a specified position in a table to be referenced. Therefore, it is only necessary to allocate a data area as much as necessary, and data can be compressed and retained. The structure for compressing and holding data will be described below with reference to FIG. 299.

FIG. 299 is a diagram illustrating an example of the table structure in this embodiment. The table shown in FIG. 299 holds four records (data) "25, 48, 32, 63". When converted into hexadecimal numbers, these data become "19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "00011001b, 00110000b, 00100000b, 00111111b". Since the basic unit of data handled by the arithmetic unit of a gaming machine is 8, conventionally the table structure is such that data is held in 8-bit units, such as the 4771 area shown by the dotted line, and the top 2 of each record is The bit was "0".

With the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction, data can be read from any bit of a specified address, so in this embodiment, data for 6 bits of each record, that is, data included in area 4772, is stored continuously. By doing so, data can be arranged as shown in area 4773. As a result, "19h, 0Ch, FEh" is stored.

As described above, the conventional table structure required a capacity of 4 bytes (32 bits), but by reading data using the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, unnecessary bits can be deleted and 3 bytes (24 bits) have been required. It can be a table structure compressed into bits). In this way, according to this embodiment, it is possible to minimize the area for holding data, and it is possible to save storage capacity. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

[18-6. Detailed steps for bit transfer instructions]
Next, a typical pattern of the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment will be explained. Here, when reading specified single data (RBT A, (HL).5), when reading data continuously from the table ([1] RBT A, (HL+).5 → [2] RBT B, (HL).5), and the case where data with a capacity larger than 1 byte is read (RBT DE, (HL).9) will be explained. In the example described below, the value of the TP register is assumed to be "8000h" which is the start address of the data area.

[18-6-1. Reading individual data]
FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where individual data is read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the same as the table shown in FIG. 299. Further, the bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBTA, (HL).5".

As shown in FIG. 300, a pre-correction index "4C6E" is stored in the HL register. The address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and the example described here shows a case where the second stored data (30h) of the referenced table is transferred. As mentioned above, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the table to be referenced is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). By executing the index creation process (FIG. 298(B)) based on this information, the pre-correction index "4C6E" can be calculated.

When the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL).5" is executed, first, a reference destination address for reading data is specified. Specifically, the reference destination address (“898Dh”) can be calculated by dividing the pre-correction index “4C6E” by the basic unit number (8) (“098Dh”) and adding the TP “8000h”. .

Furthermore, by calculating the AND of the pre-correction index "4C6E" and "07h", the lower three bits ("110b") are obtained, and the read start position (bit) of the reference destination address is specified. In the example shown in FIG. 300, this is the 6th (="110b") bit of the reference destination address. Then, by extracting 6 (n+1) bits of data from the 6th bit of the reference address “898Dh”, “110000b” (=48 (“30h”)) can be obtained. The obtained value is matched with the basic unit number (8), the upper two bits are complemented with "00", and the result is stored in the A register.

[18-6-2. Continuous reading of data]
FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is successively read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the table shown in FIG. 299, as in the case of FIG. 300. Also, a case will be described in which after bit transfer instruction [1] "RBT A, (HL+).5" is executed, [2] "RBT B, (HL).5" is executed. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction, and correspond to the reference destination address arrows in FIG. 301.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL+).5" is the same as "RBT A, (HL).5" (FIG. 300) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. The bit transfer instruction “RBT A, (HL+).5” stores the acquired data in the A register, and then adds the value of the extraction specification information n+1 (5+1) to the index value “4C6Eh” stored in the HL register. do. Note that the value stored in the HL register (index before correction) is not changed from the value set before executing the bit transfer instruction even after executing the bit transfer instruction (after reading the data). It has become. By executing the index update process of updating the index value to the storage position of the next data in this manner, it is possible to specify the storage position of the data following the read data. In the example shown in FIG. 301, it is "4C74h".

Thereafter, the reference destination address and the read start position (bit) are specified, similar to the case of reading individual data explained with reference to FIG. 300. In the example shown in FIG. 301, 6 bits of data from the 4th (="100b") bit of the reference address "898Eh" is read out and stored in the B register.

In this way, when reading data continuously from a specified table, first calculate the index value by executing index creation processing, and then add the number of bits of the read data to the index value. The index values can be updated sequentially.

Additionally, if each record in a table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits, data can be obtained for each record by specifying extraction specification information according to the number of bits that make up the record. It becomes possible. For example, if a record consists of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, one record's worth of data can be obtained by specifying 4, 6, and 10 as the extraction specification information and sequentially executing the bit transfer command. can do. At this time, when the data is composed of 4 bits, 6 bits, and 10 bits, the total number of basic constituent blocks (number of bits) is 20 (=4+6+10). In this case, for example, the program is configured to execute bit transfer instructions in the order of "RBT A, (HL+).4", "RBT B, (HL+).6", and "RBT DE, (HL).10". This makes it possible to obtain each piece of data that makes up a record. With the above configuration, there is no need to create index values individually while retrieving data, so it is possible to simplify the program for retrieving data on a record-by-record basis and speed up the execution time.

[Reading data with a capacity larger than 18-6-3.1 byte]
FIG. 302 is a diagram explaining a bit transfer instruction for data larger than 1 byte in this embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and (B) is a diagram explaining the procedure. be.

The table shown in FIG. 302(A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and holds three records (data) "55, 258, 942" as an example. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "37h, 102h, 3AEh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "0000110111b, 0100000010b, 1110101110b".

However, the table shown in FIG. 302(A) has an upper limit of 1000, so it can be stored in 10 bits. As mentioned above, the basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit of a gaming machine is 8, so it is necessary to store data in units of 8 bits (1 byte), and in order to actually store data, 16 bits are required. needed capacity. Therefore, conventionally, the table structure was as shown in 4801 shown by the dotted line, and "0" was assigned to the upper six bits of each unused record. Therefore, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 299, data for 10 bits of each record, that is, data in area 4802, is stored consecutively, thereby arranging the data as shown in 4803. As a result, "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah" are stored. In this way, data with a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be similarly compressed and held.

Note that the total number of basic configuration blocks may be determined by specifying the number of bits of the maximum value of the configured data. For example, as in the above example, if the upper limit of the data to be configured is 1000 (3E8h), the number of bits, 10, is the total number of basic configuration blocks. Furthermore, if the total number of basic configuration blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored is from 0h to 3FFh (1023). Furthermore, as mentioned above, if each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits (for example, first data, second data, third data), the maximum value of the first data The number of bits, the number of bits of the maximum value of the second data, and the number of bits of the maximum value of the third data are respectively the total number of basic constituent blocks of the first data, the total number of basic constituent blocks of the second data, and the basic configuration of the third data. This is the total number of blocks.

As mentioned above, FIG. 302(B) is a diagram explaining the procedure for executing a bit transfer instruction for data larger than 1 byte, and the bit transfer instruction "RBT DE, (HL).9" is executed. do. The HL register stores a pre-correction index "4C72h". The start address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and an example is shown in which the second data of the referenced table is transferred. Further, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the table to be referenced is 10, and the basic unit is 8. By executing the index creation process (FIG. 298(B)) based on this information, the pre-correction index "4C72h" can be calculated.

The reference destination address is specified in the same manner as the procedure shown in FIG. 300, and "898Eh" is calculated. Furthermore, the read start position ("010b") of the reference destination address is specified using the same procedure. Then, “0100000010b” (=258 (“102h”)) is obtained by extracting 10 (n+1) bit data from the 2nd (“010b”) bit, which is the read start position of the reference address “898Eh”. be able to. Since the retrieved value exceeds the basic unit number (8), the upper 2 bits (“01b”) of the retrieved value are extracted and the upper 6 bits of the retrieved value are complemented with “000000”. (“00000001b”) and stores it in the D register. Furthermore, the remaining lower 8 bits (“00000010b”) are stored in the E register.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even data that requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and stored, and the data can be read out using a simple procedure. It becomes possible.

[18-7. Application example]
Next, an example in which the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment is applied in game control will be described. Here, a process of extracting a random number and selecting a variation pattern of a symbol variation display (dynamic display) in game control based on the extracted random number will be described as an example. In this process, the extracted random numbers are sequentially compared with the threshold values obtained from the fluctuation pattern table, and when the extracted random numbers are greater than or equal to the threshold value, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to this threshold value is selected as the lottery result. This will be explained below with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 303 to 305.

[18-7-1. Structure of fluctuation pattern table]
First, the variation pattern table in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 303 is a diagram illustrating an application example of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a variation pattern and a corresponding range, (B) is a program code showing a variation pattern table, (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of a table before compression and a table after compression regarding the variation pattern table corresponding to (B).

In this embodiment, the range of extracted random numbers is from 0 to 63 (integer value), and as shown in FIG. 303(A), when the extracted random numbers are included in the range corresponding to each fluctuation pattern The variation pattern number corresponding to is selected. In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns from pattern 1 (PT1) to pattern 5 (PT5) are defined, and when the random number value is 0 to 32, pattern 1, when 33 to 45, pattern 2, and 46 to 54. , pattern 3 is the case, pattern 4 is the case of 55 to 60, and pattern 5 is the case of 61 to 63. Furthermore, the larger the pattern number is, the higher the expectation level for the player to be in an advantageous state (the lottery result will be a jackpot). Note that instead of arranging patterns so that the higher the pattern number, the higher the expectation level, the lower the pattern number, the higher the expectation level.Also, pattern numbers may be set based on criteria other than management expectations. You can do it like this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 303(B), the fluctuation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as one set of a random number threshold and a pattern number and one record. Random number thresholds and fluctuation pattern numbers are continuously held in the same table.

As mentioned above, the range of random numbers to be extracted is from 0 to 63, and the threshold requires a maximum capacity of 6 bits. Similarly, since the variation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, it requires a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7). When storing data using the conventional method, the gaming machine of this embodiment requires a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) to store one piece of data. Thus, if the number of records constituted by the random number threshold and the variation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 303(C), by employing the data compression technology of this embodiment, it is only necessary to secure a capacity of 6 bits for the threshold value and 3 bits for the fluctuation pattern number, and these data can be stored continuously. Therefore, if the number of records is 5, data can be stored with a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), and the capacity can be reduced by more than 40%.

Note that the table shown in FIG. 303 is an example, and the compression ratio of the table changes depending on the threshold value of the random number, the range of the fluctuation pattern number, and the like. For example, if the random number threshold capacity is in bytes (8 bits), the data cannot be compressed, but if the random number threshold capacity is not in bytes, that is, if there is a fraction of 1 to 7 bits, each data The capacity can be reduced by a fractional bit from 8 bits. In particular, when the data capacity is 9 bits, 17 bits, or the like, where the fractional bit is 1 bit, it is possible to reduce the capacity by 7 bits with one piece of data, and the maximum effect can be obtained.

[18-7-2. Steps to select a fluctuation pattern]
Next, an overview of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment will be explained. In addition. If a plurality of types of variable pattern tables are defined, the variable pattern table is selected in advance according to the gaming state and the like.

First, a random number in the range of 0 to 63 is extracted as a random number for lottery of a variable pattern. Next, a random number threshold and a fluctuation pattern number are sequentially acquired from the fluctuation pattern table in record units starting from the top of the table. Further, the obtained random number threshold and the extracted random number are compared, and if the random number value is greater than or equal to the obtained threshold, the corresponding variation pattern is selected as the lottery result. On the other hand, if the value of the random number is less than the acquired threshold, the next record is acquired from the fluctuation pattern table, and a fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing it with the threshold in the same procedure. Thus, the threshold value corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers for selecting the corresponding variation pattern. Furthermore, since the threshold value of the last record in the variation pattern table is 0, the variation pattern is always selected in the last record. To give a numerical example of the variation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is "48", it is less than the threshold when first compared with the threshold "60" corresponding to the first record in the table, so the next record is compared with the threshold value "54". Similarly, when further compared with the threshold value "45" of the next record, the extracted random number "45" exceeds the threshold value, so the same pattern "PT3" (variation pattern number 3) on the corresponding end right side is selected.

Here, the procedure for acquiring a fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern selection process) will be specifically described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. FIG. 305 is a diagram showing an example of a program for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. The flowchart in FIG. 304 corresponds to the program in FIG. 305. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure of the variation pattern selection process is to first identify a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (number). Next, an index is created in order to obtain data from the specified variation pattern table using the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment. Next, random numbers are extracted for selecting a variation pattern. Finally, a random number threshold and a corresponding fluctuation pattern number are obtained from the fluctuation pattern table using a bit transfer command, and a fluctuation pattern number is selected by comparing the random number threshold and the random number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first obtains the address (Hp_no_table) of the variation pattern table (step P8021). In this embodiment, one variable pattern table is defined, but if a plurality of variable pattern tables are defined depending on the gaming state etc., the variable pattern table is specified at this timing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets parameters for index creation for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT of this embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating an index is performed according to the procedure explained in FIGS. 296, 297, etc.

To be more specific, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the fluctuation pattern table identified in the process of step P8021 as the initial value of the index in the HL register as the index value. (“LD HL, Hp_no_table-9000h”, “9000h” corresponds to “TP” in the program code shown in FIG. 297, and is the value stored in the TP register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets parameters for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, first, pointer information of the data to be referenced (record of the fluctuation pattern table) is extracted and set as a parameter. Here, data is acquired from the beginning of the variation pattern table, so the data pointer information is 0. Furthermore, the total number of basic configuration blocks is set as a parameter. As described above, the total number of basic constituent blocks corresponds to the data capacity of an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the random number threshold is 6 bits and the variation pattern number is 3 bits, a capacity of 9 bits is required to store one record, and the total number of basic configuration blocks is 9.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes index creation processing to create an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the pointer information (0) of the data to be referenced (variation pattern table) is multiplied by the total number of bits (9) of the basic constituent block. The result of the multiplication is 0, which is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value of the WA register by the basic unit number (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder is stored in the W register (0). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register and adds the value of the WA register to the HL register. As described above, the value before clearing the W register is saved in the stack area in advance for use in later calculations. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 shifts the value of the HL register to the left by 3 bits (multiplies it by 8). Furthermore, the value of the saved W register is added to the HL register to complete index creation.

When the creation of the index is completed and the preparation for acquiring the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table is completed, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for drawing a fluctuation pattern (step P8024). The extracted random number is a 6-bit integer from 0 to 63, as described above, and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Subsequently, processing is performed to identify the fluctuation pattern number by comparing the extracted random number value with the threshold value stored in the fluctuation pattern table. The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a random number threshold from the variation pattern table based on the index created in step P8023 using a bit transfer command (step P8025). Specifically, 6 bits of data are acquired from the position specified by the index and stored in the A register (RBT A, (HL+).5). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern numbers stored in the continuous area are acquired by a bit transfer command (step P8026). The fluctuation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBTW, (HL+).2).

Next, upon acquiring the random number threshold and the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the threshold is 0 (step P8027). In this embodiment, the threshold value of the last record of the fluctuation pattern table is set to 0, so determining whether the threshold value is 0 is to determine whether the final record is detected (AND A, FFh →JR Z, hp_select_2). If the threshold value is 0 (the result of step P8027 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process by using the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as a lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, if the random number threshold is not 0 (the result of step P8027 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the random number threshold is smaller than the variation pattern selection random number (step P8028). If the random number threshold is larger than the variation pattern selection random number (the result of step P8028 is "yes"), the process of step P8025 is performed to select the next record and obtain the threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number. Return to

In addition, if the random number threshold is less than or equal to the random number for variation pattern selection (the result of step P8028 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process by using the variation pattern number obtained in the process of step P8026 as a lottery result. (Step P8029).

In the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment, by looping the processes from step P8025 to step P8028, the variation pattern is selected by sequentially comparing the threshold value of the first record to the last record of the variation pattern table with the acquired random value. The system is configured to exit from the loop when a fluctuation pattern is identified. On the program, as shown in FIG. 305, the processing from tag "hp_select_1" to tag "hp_select_2" corresponds to this loop.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment, an index is created using the top address of the table as the data reading start position, and the bit transfer commands "RBT A, (HL+).5" and "RBT W, (HL+). 2” are executed sequentially. As a result, data reading starts from the beginning of the table, and it becomes possible to read the next data continuously without recalculating the index. In this way, data can be acquired without resetting parameters even when data is acquired continuously, making it possible to simplify the program.

[18-8. Other application examples]
Here, although the application example shown in FIG. 303 uses the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment for a table for selecting a variation pattern, there is no need to limit the application to this, and other It can also be applied to tables for other purposes. For example, it is a table for specifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, and is composed of the port address, logic correction value, mask value, data area address, etc. for each port. It can also be applied to those who At this time, the effect of the data transfer command in this embodiment can be obtained unless all the data making up the table are in byte units.

Further, as another example, the present invention can be applied to data for creating commands to be transmitted to various boards, for example, data specifying parameters of commands to be transmitted. Specifically, if the command specifies the number of prize balls in the prize ball command that instructs the number of prize balls to be paid out, if the number of prize balls is from 1 to 15, it can be specified with a capacity of 4 bits. At this time, in order to be able to specify the number of prize balls of 16 or more, a capacity for 5 bits may be secured, or the first bit may be fixed to "1" to specify the number of prize balls, The number of prize balls may be specified using the lower 4 bits.

As yet another example, the present invention can be applied to a table for specifying areas for storing various data. Specifically, it is a table composed of records including information for specifying data (information for identifying data) and information for specifying the address of an area in which the data is stored. The information that specifies the address of the area where data is stored is not stored as the address itself, but the reference address is stored in a separate area in advance, and the difference value from the reference address (difference address) is stored in the table. You may also do so. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity for storing addresses. Furthermore, it is possible to flexibly respond to cases where the number of data or data capacity is large, or when the data capacity changes.

In addition, as another example of a table for specifying areas for storing various data, the address (2 bytes) of the area for storing data can be specified by combining the upper address (1 byte) and the lower address (1 byte). It may be configured to do so. In this case, the upper address may be stored in a separate area as reference address information in advance, and only the lower address may be stored in the table. Data capacity can be reduced by allowing lower addresses to be stored in an area smaller than 1 byte. Furthermore, since the address for storing data can be specified without calculation (or by simple calculation), the process for specifying the address can be simplified. Furthermore, since the address where data is actually stored can be easily specified by referring to the table, maintenance can be facilitated, such as when reviewing the address where data is stored.

Furthermore, as described above, the data compression technique in this embodiment makes it possible to acquire data with a specified number of bits, so it can be applied even when data of different sizes are stored consecutively. However, when data of different sizes are stored contiguously, it is necessary to specify the size of each data, and it is not possible to efficiently reduce the data capacity by storing each data size separately. there is a possibility. Therefore, by securing an area corresponding to the data capacity corresponding to the maximum value of a series of data and storing each data, data can be obtained without specifying the size for each data, simplifying the entire process. be able to. As mentioned above, when storing multiple types of data as one record in a table, first identify the size of each data that makes up the record, and then change the size of the table based on the identified data size. By acquiring each record, it is possible to reduce the amount of data and simplify processing.

Further, if the tables have the same structure, it is possible to obtain data compressed by common processing, so it is preferable to share the structure of similar tables. For example, if multiple variable pattern tables as mentioned above are defined depending on the gaming state, even if it is possible to reduce the data capacity for each table due to reasons such as a small number of types of variable patterns, a common structure may be used. By doing so, it becomes possible to obtain data from the variable pattern table through a common process regardless of the gaming state, and the entire process can be simplified.

[18-9. Effects, etc.]
As described above, by reading data using the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment, unnecessary bits can be deleted and a compressed table structure can be created, so the area for holding data can be minimized. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

Further, since it is possible to make the process of creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment independent, it is possible to suppress the original game control from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity while suppressing the complexity of conventional game control.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to read multiple pieces of data from consecutive areas by successively executing bit transfer instructions while incrementing the index, so it is possible to read data with the same number of bits as needed. It is possible to simplify the processing when reading only one record (data group) made up of data of multiple types of bit numbers.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even data that requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data can be read out using the same procedure as data less than 8 bits. This makes it possible to provide highly versatile data reading means.

The data structure that can be read by the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment is effective when the data size is not in bytes, and the larger the number of data, the more capacity can be saved. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of data defined, such as data used for processing related to special symbols and normal symbols, such as variation patterns. Note that if the data is composed of byte units, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction ("LD") or the like. On the other hand, the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment requires more steps to read data than the load instruction, so when routine processing such as power-on processing or power outage processing needs to be performed quickly, or when handling data If the number of bit transfer instructions is small, the load instruction may be used preferentially instead of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment. In this way, when controlling games based on a wide variety of data, such as control related to the fluctuating display of special symbols and normal symbols, the data capacity can be adjusted using bit transfer instructions that can obtain data in bit units. This makes it possible to reduce the On the other hand, when a routine procedure needs to be processed quickly, the process can be simplified by using a load instruction that can directly access data stored at a specified address without the need to create an index. Alternatively, the speed may be increased.

[19. Improvements to instructions that call processing]
The means for reducing capacity by compressing the area in which data is stored has been described above. Next, by shortening the word length of the instructions (commands) that make up the program, the number of steps (number of clocks, number of steps) processed by the calculation means (main control MPU 1311) can be reduced to speed up the processing, A method for simplifying a program by collectively executing instructions that are previously executed will be explained. In particular, an improved instruction (INV instruction) for executing predefined processing will be described. Since the INV command is executed very frequently, by speeding up the execution of the INV command, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process. Further, by implementing an instruction that integrates processes that are executed in combination when the INV instruction is executed, the program can be simplified.

[19-1. INV command]
First, an outline of a normal INV instruction will be explained. The word length of the INV command varies depending on the type of MPU (processor), but in the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in this embodiment, it is 4 bytes.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, a return address that is a return destination for returning to the calling process after the execution of the called process is completed is stored in the stack area. As a result, by executing the return instruction in the called process, the value of the program counter is rewritten to the return address stored in the stack area, and the process returns to the calling source, and processing continues from the instruction following the executed INV instruction. be able to.

Furthermore, since the INV instruction can specify all addresses in a storage area, it is possible to call all processes stored in memory. Therefore, the arrangement of programs and data can be freely set. On the other hand, because of the high degree of freedom, the number of steps for calling a process (required number of clocks) may increase, resulting in overhead, so it is desirable to reduce the overall processing load by reducing this.

Therefore, in order to solve the above problem, in order to reduce the load of calling frequently executed processes, a table containing the addresses of the processes to be called is defined in advance, and processes are placed based on the table. Prior art has been proposed that makes it possible to call a process while reducing the load for identification (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174833). An outline of the INVD instruction having functions similar to those of the prior art will be explained below.

[19-2. INVD command]
In the INVD instruction, as described above, a process address table containing addresses storing frequently executed processes is created in advance, and a process to be called when the INVD instruction is executed is specified based on the process address table. An index (1 byte) is assigned to each process in the process address table, and it is possible to call a specific process by simply specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). Become. This makes it possible to shorten the word length of instructions to speed up processing, and to simplify the program structure. Furthermore, even if the program location in memory (process storage destination) is changed, the data defined in the processing address table only needs to be changed, so even if the program location or configuration is changed, This also makes it possible to respond flexibly, improving the efficiency of program development.

Here, the configuration of the storage area that stores the processing address table will be explained. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of the storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. A storage area is provided by RAM 1312 and ROM 1313.

Areas accessed for game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment include a RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), an internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), and a ROM area (8000h to C12Fh). ) and expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used areas), and access by the game control program is prohibited in principle.

To explain each area, the RAM area is an area that temporarily stores data read and written during program execution. Further, the internal function register area stores setting values of various registers for controlling internal functions. In this embodiment, the internal function register areas are arranged in two locations, but they may be one area or may be divided into three or more areas. Note that although the internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, unlike the RAM area, values are not stored in the process of calculations etc. of the main control MPU 1311, but are executed by the main control MPU 1311. It specifies the functions for In other words, once the value of the internal function register area is set at the timing when the power is turned on, the set information is not changed, unlike information stored in a RAM area.

The ROM area includes a program/data area (8000h to BFFFh), a ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), a processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and an HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program/data area stores read-only data and programs. Data such as the program title and version are set in the ROM comment area. The processing address table area stores data regarding a process (subroutine) that is called when a specific process call instruction (for example, an INVD instruction to be described later) is executed. In the HW parameter area, parameters related to hardware for executing internal functions of the main control board 1310 are set.

The expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated as an unused (access prohibited) area in normal (mass-produced) gaming machines, but it is an area that can be allocated as a program/data area in development gaming machines. The program/data is allocated to a different ROM from the stored ROM. By doing this, the mass-produced game machine does not have an expansion ROM, so that programs/data placed in the expansion ROM area for development will not function by mistake.

Note that the expansion ROM area may be stored in the same ROM as the ROM in which programs/data are stored. In that case, the expansion ROM area must be set as an inaccessible area in mass-produced game machines. Even if development programs/data are left in the expansion ROM area by mistake, the HW parameters may be set so that the programs/data do not function.

Next, the structure of the processing address table will be explained. FIG. 307 is a diagram showing an example of program implementation of a processing address table in which addresses of processing (subroutines) are stored. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 307, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table that stores the addresses of the processing executed by the INVD instruction, there is also an interrupt processing address table that stores the addresses of the processing executed when various interrupts occur. There may be cases where In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "processing address table" refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used in the INVD instruction.

The process address table stores addresses of processes that are frequently executed and used for general purposes. Examples of frequently executed processing include timer interrupt processing and processing executed within the main loop processing of initialization processing in the main control board. Further, the commonly used processing includes processing for reading a signal from a designated port, processing for performing a predetermined calculation on a designated numerical value, and the like, which will be specifically described later. In order to avoid loss of versatility, these processes are extremely simplified (for example, due to the program capacity (e.g., less processing or processing with shorter processing time, etc.).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306, the processing address table is stored in an area different from the area where the program is stored. As mentioned above, the process called by the INVD command has high versatility, so it may be used as a common process in the development of other gaming machines. By arranging the areas separately in this way, it becomes possible to manage them separately from the processing programs that depend on the machine type, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game control program. In addition, since a ROM comment area is located between the area where the processing address table is stored and the area where the program is stored, if a problem occurs during program execution, processing may occur beyond the program/data area. Even if the program is executed, data that does not match the program code, such as the program title, is stored in the ROM comment area, resulting in unexpected processing being executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table. This can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 307, 16 types of processing, INVD0 to INVD15, are defined. For example, INVD0 includes port reading processing (PORT_RD), INVD1 includes data setting processing (DAT_SET), and so on. When executing the INVD command, it is sufficient to specify a number (processing index) corresponding to the process to be called.

Here, the processing index will be explained with reference to FIG. 308. FIG. 308 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored at an address stored in a process address table. In the program code shown in FIG. 308, processing indexes that can be called by the INVD command are defined in advance. In the program, instead of directly specifying a numerical value, you can specify a variable that corresponds to the process name (function name). For example, when executing port read processing (PORT_RD), instead of directly specifying the constant "0", it is sufficient to specify it using a label (_PORT_RD). Thereby, the readability of the program can be improved, and the development efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

Furthermore, in the prior art described above (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174833), the upper address is set in advance and the lower address is specified, and as in this embodiment, a number (processing index) is specified. It's not something you do. Therefore, when the address of a process is changed, it is necessary to modify the instruction for executing the process each time, so development efficiency cannot be improved compared to the case of specifying a number.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the processing indexes are 0 to 15 and the number of processings defined in the processing address table is 16, so the index capacity is 4 bits. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to specify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction compared to specifying a (lower) address. Furthermore, since the instruction part (opcode) of the INVD instruction is made up of 4 bits, it can be made up of a total of 8 bits (1 byte) including the index capacity (operand). Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, which reduces the number of clocks required for the main control MPU 1311 to call the process specified by the INVD instruction, compared to when calling a process with a normal call instruction (INV instruction). This also makes it possible to reduce the program capacity.

In addition, in this embodiment, the INVD command is frequently used in the process executed when the power is turned on and the process that continues the game (main process on the main control side, timer interrupt process, etc.), while it is used in the process when the power is turned off. The frequency is decreasing. This is to prevent an increase in overhead when calling a process due to an increase in reference locations in memory while the power is turned off, and to suppress power consumption as much as possible. In addition, the power-off processing is executed less frequently than the processing while the game is continuing, the specifications do not change frequently, and there is a limit to the number of processing that can be called by the INVD command. The process called when the power is turned off is configured not to be executed by the INVD command except for general-purpose processes. In this way, the power-off processing is configured to simplify control and reduce the processing execution load rather than reducing the program capacity using the INVD command.

Next, a procedure for executing processing using the INVD command will be explained. FIG. 309 is a diagram illustrating the operation when executing the INVD instruction in this embodiment. In FIG. 309, changes in the program counter and stack pointer upon execution of the INVD instruction stored at address "80A4h" will be explained.

When the INVD instruction is executed, first, the address that will be the return destination after the processing executed by the INVD instruction is completed is saved on the stack. In the example of FIG. 309, the INVD instruction stored at address "80A4h" is executed, and the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, so the value saved to the stack is "80A5h".

Next, 2-byte length data (call destination address) corresponding to the number (operand, processing index) specified by the INVD instruction is extracted from the processing address table. The retrieved 2-byte length data (call destination address) is set in the program counter and the specified process is called. Here, a procedure for calling a specified process will be described with reference to FIG. 310.

FIG. 310 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process to be called by an INVD command in this embodiment. Here, a procedure for executing port read processing (PORT_RD) will be described. As shown in FIG. 307, the port read process (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (0th) of the process address table.

The number specified by the INVD command shown in FIG. 310 is "_PORT_RD", and when referring to the INVD command processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Next, the processing address table is referred to and the instruction corresponding to the designated number is identified. Specifically, “PORT_RD” is specified. Note that the left column of the processing address table in FIG. 310 corresponds to the number of rows and is added for explanation. As shown in FIG. 307, it is not included in the actual processing address table. The INVD command specifies the command corresponding to the specified number. “PORT_RD” is a label indicating the processing address (“80D4h”).

When the address of the process specified by the INVD instruction is specified, the program counter is updated to the address of the specified process. Returning to the explanation of FIG. 309, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to "80D4h" which is the start address of the port read process "PORT_RD". At this time, the value of the stack pointer moves by 2 bytes and is updated from "01F8h" to "01F6h" because the address at the time of return of the caller's process is stored in the stack area.

Thereafter, the process of the called destination (port reading process "PORT_RD") is executed, and instructions are executed sequentially from the called destination address ("80D4h"). Thereafter, in order to return to the caller using a return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and subsequent processing is executed sequentially. At this time, the value of the program counter is updated from the address "80E8h" of the return instruction to the address "80A5h" saved in the stack area. Further, by changing the stack pointer from "01F6h" to "01F8h", the area where the address to which the stack area is to be returned is stored becomes usable again. After returning to the calling source process, the process is executed sequentially starting from address "80A5h".

As described above, the INVD instruction in this embodiment allows a process to be called with fewer clocks than a normal process call instruction, that is, at a higher speed, and furthermore, it is possible to compress the program capacity. In particular, as described above, by configuring a process that is frequently called so that it can be called with an INVD command, it is possible to speed up the entire control process. In this embodiment, 16 types of processing are defined as defined in the processing address table (FIG. 307). Specifically, port read processing (PORT_RD), data setting processing (DAT_SET), work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL), and command buffer setting processing. 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage processing (COM_SET), output judgment common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), variation information number search processing (TI_SRCH), unauthorized notification These are setting processing (ILG_OUTSET), data search processing (HLA_SRCH), multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL), and SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA).

Each process executed by the INVD command in this embodiment will be described below. Examples of programs (modules) for each process are shown in FIGS. 311 to 324. A comment at the beginning of each program describes input registers, output registers, protection registers, and callers. The input register is a register in which values set by the calling module are stored. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register in which a value set in the called module is stored. Process execution results are stored. A protection register is a register whose use is restricted by the called module. Note that it may be used as long as the value at the start and end of execution of the called module is the same. For example, when destroying (using) the register, it may be stored on the stack, etc., and then restored after use. If so, there is no problem in using it. The caller is the module that calls the module. If the number of modules listed here is large, it can be recognized that they are frequently used. Note that the actual number of executions depends on the calling frequency of the calling module itself, so even if the number of modules is small, it does not necessarily mean that the usage frequency is small.

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating a program example of port read processing (PORT_RD) of this embodiment. The port reading process is a process of reading an input signal of a specified port. Specifically, the port read process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register), and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read multiple times, and depending on whether the acquired signals match or not, a predetermined flag (for example, J flag, Z flag) included in the PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) is set. Update. This makes it possible not only to read input signals from a designated port, but also to determine whether or not signals are being input normally.

FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a program example of data setting processing (DAT_SET) of this embodiment. The data setting process is a process of collectively setting a series of data defined in a table specified by a setting data address set in the HL register into a work area (for example, DE register). In addition, the number of data settings (number of data in the table) is defined in the first data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process, and the subsequent data (records) are (lower) in the work area that stores the setting values. It consists of an address and a setting value stored in the work area. The setting values are sequentially read by calling work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), which will be described later, using an INVD command. As described above, when data setting processing starts, the number of data settings stored in the address specified in the input register is first obtained, and then the data (records) for the number of data settings are obtained. It is possible to acquire a series of data without depending on the number.

FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a program example of work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD) of this embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process for setting a work area that is temporarily used during program execution. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table specified by the address stored in the HL register. Further, the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) is also called from processes executed by other INVD commands. In this way, the processing executed by the INVD instruction consists of a very short program that implements a general-purpose function, and can be called multiple times. Thereby, by combining and configuring the processes called by the INVD command, it is possible to realize speeding up of the overall game control. Furthermore, since duplication of program codes can be avoided, the program capacity can be compressed.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing a program example of work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of this embodiment. In work area setting process 2, after executing work area setting process 1, it is possible to simplify the process of successively setting work areas by setting the specified setting data address to the next address. Become.

Here, regarding an example of using the data setting process, work area setting process 1, and work area setting process 2, the (lower) address of the work area and the work area are set according to the data setting process program shown in FIG. The process of acquiring data from a table consisting of stored setting values and storing it in the work area will be explained.

In the data setting process, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the setting data address is obtained, and the work area is set by the work area setting process 2 for the number of records, and the data is added to the work area. Repeat settings (loop processing). In the loop process, first, the setting data address is updated (incremented) and the process moves to the next line, and then the work area setting process 2 is called by the INVD command.

In the work area setting process 2, a work area is set using the address specified by the setting data address in the work area setting process 1. Subsequently, by updating (incrementing) the setting data address, it is updated to the address of the data storage area. Thereafter, the process returns from the work area setting process 2 to the data setting process, and the data specified by the set data address (the value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (the value set in the DE register). When data for the number of records in the table is set in the corresponding work area, the loop process is exited and the data setting process is ended.

With the above configuration, the structure of the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced by calling the data setting process, the work area setting process 2, and the work area setting process hierarchically using the INVD command.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of this embodiment. The 2-byte data search process is a process of selecting an address set in the data table specified by the HL register (input register) and setting it in the HL register. The address value is 2 bytes, so by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, the address of the target data table is specified, and the address is set in the HL register (output register). Reset. For example, when moving to various processes in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, it is used when executing the process of selecting the destination address based on the job number (selection value) based on the jump table.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a program example of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET) of this embodiment. Usually, in a process called by an INVD command or the like, a return (BK) command or the like is placed at the end to return to the calling process. Since the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in FIG. 316 do not have an instruction for returning to the calling process, after the jackpot information command setting process is completed Then, command buffer setting processing 1 is executed, and then command storage processing is executed. Then, a return instruction placed at the end of the command storage process returns to the calling process.

If you try to call command buffer setting process 1 with the INVD command in the jackpot information command setting process, as explained in FIG. By arranging them consecutively, these processes can be omitted and the program capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, since the stack area is not used, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory used.

The jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is a process of setting a jackpot information command that specifies an operation when a jackpot occurs. A jackpot information command corresponding to the opening/closing operation of the jackpot in the jackpot state is set according to the situation. Thereafter, the data is transmitted from the transmission buffer to the destination by the command buffer setting process 1 and command storage process which are continuously executed.

Command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1) identifies the command to actually be transmitted using reference command data (MODE value) and command addition data for specifically identifying the command, and stores it in the transmission buffer by the command storage processing described later. Store. The commands stored in the transmission buffer are appropriately transmitted to the destination. "Standard command data" consists of 2 bytes. For example, in the case of the variation pattern of special drawing 1, "1001h" (upper 1 byte: variation pattern type, lower 1 byte: command reference value (starts from 01h) ). When variation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the variation pattern of special figure 1, the result of adding the value of variation pattern 5 (05h) to the lower 8 bits of the above reference command "1001h" ("1006h") ) is the command to be sent.

Command storage processing (COM_SET) is processing for storing commands and the like in the transmission buffer. As a specific procedure, first, the state of the transmission buffer is determined to determine whether or not there is a predetermined number of bytes or more free space. If there is no space in the transmission buffer, the process ends, while if there is space in the transmission buffer, the status and mode constituting the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmission buffer. Further, a sum value obtained by adding the value of the H register and the value of the L register is set in the transmission buffer. In the case of the command "1006h" which selects the variation pattern 5 (05h) as the variation pattern of the above-mentioned special drawing 1, the sum value is "10h" + "06h" = "16h". Note that the sum value does not necessarily need to be set in the transmission buffer.

In addition, the command stored in the sending buffer consists of 2 bytes (excluding the sum value), the 1st byte indicates the type of command to be sent (fluctuating pattern, symbol stop, pending memory, jackpot, etc.), and the 2 bytes The eye indicates a specific action for the type (if it is a variation pattern type, a specific variation pattern number).

Note that the transmission buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built into the main control MPU 1311, and is a separate memory from the RAM 1312. The transmission buffer is configured to be able to store multiple bytes of information (has a capacity of 64 bytes). The commands stored in the transmission buffer are serially output to the transmission destination by hardware in the order in which they were stored first.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a program example of output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of this embodiment. Output determination common processing 1 acquires data from information determination output data (value indicated by the HL register) and determines whether a flag is set in the work area (lower address) set in the information determination output data. , if a flag is set, the information set corresponding to the flag (work area) is set in the A register (port output calculation value). By looping the above operations the number of times set in the information judgment output data, the value to be output to the port is stored in the A register. For example, when the information judgment output data is "solenoid information judgment output data", 3 is set as the number of loops, the content of the big prize opening 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) is judged first, and DSOL1_FG is set to 1 (flag value ) is set, _TDSOL1_PB (big winning hole solenoid 1 bit data) set corresponding to DSOL1_FG is set as the output value (by outputting this value, the big winning hole solenoid 1 (turned on). Such processing is repeated the number of times (3 times) set in the solenoid information determination output data.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing a program example of output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of this embodiment. The output determination common processing 2 acquires data from the state determination output data and processes the LED port output value and the like. The status determination output data, like the information determination output data, has a table structure, and the number of records in the table is acquired and the data corresponding to the number of records is processed.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a program example of output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) of this embodiment. Output port data setting processing is a process for setting I/O area information to an output port or built-in register. ) Outputs the setting value set corresponding to.

FIG. 320 is a diagram showing a program example of the variation information number search process (TI_SRCH) of this embodiment. The variation information number search process is a process of searching a predetermined data area for an information number that matches a specified comparison value, and is used when selecting variation pattern information based on variation pattern random numbers. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written in the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random value, etc.) are compared with the information set in the table specified by the HL register (value to be compared with the random number (judgment value)), and if a condition (for example, random value < The process is repeated until the condition (determination value) is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, the information (search result (eg, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) set corresponding to the determination value) is stored in the A register and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing a program example of the unauthorized notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET) of this embodiment. The unauthorized notification setting process is a process for notifying when an abnormality occurs. Specifically, a specified abnormality display command is set by command storage processing, and a time for false notification is set.

FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a program example of data search processing (HLA_SRCH) of this embodiment. The data search process is a process of searching specified data from specified search data. In the data search process, first, data matching a comparison value is searched from an area (address) in which specified search data is stored. At this time, the data to be searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Furthermore, a search is performed from the area of the searched address based on the designated selection value. The data search process is executed by combining a plurality of search processes, and the subsequent search process is executed based on the search results of the preceding search process. In this embodiment, the first search is performed by a 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by a variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). This makes it possible to specify a plurality of tables defined according to the gaming state etc. in the first search, and to obtain a specific fluctuation information number in the next search. By implementing in this way, it is possible to easily perform a multi-stage search, and the amount of data can be reduced by holding data in stages.

As described above, in this embodiment, one process is configured by combining a plurality of processes that can be called by the INVD command, which has a shorter word length than other call commands. By calling the process configured in this manner with the INVD command, it is possible to speed up the entire process while reducing the program capacity. In addition, it is applicable not only to data search processing as long as it is a process that is executed in multiple stages.For example, if multiple calculation processes that can be called with the INVD instruction are defined, they can be combined to perform more complex calculations. It becomes possible to realize the processing.

FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL) of this embodiment. The multiplication value addition address acquisition process is a process of multiplying a specified base value by a multiplication value and adding the multiplication value to the specified base address value. It is a collection of frequently executed routine operations and can simplify programs.

FIG. 324 is a diagram showing a program example of SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) of this embodiment. The SPI 2-byte output process is a process for setting output data to the SPI port when outputting 2-byte data through SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used when transmitting data to a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor or solenoid.

As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction in this embodiment is made up of short processes of several to several tens of bytes, increasing its versatility, and the INVD instruction can call the process with a word length of 1 byte. Therefore, the overall speed of the game control program can be increased, and the program capacity can be compressed.

[19-3. INVS command]
The INVD instruction streamlines the procedure for calling a process (subroutine) by storing an address in a process address table in advance. However, since only predefined processes can be called, when adding or changing a new process to be called, the contents of the process address table and the definition information of the process address table number must be updated. Ta. In addition, the word length was set to 1 byte by limiting the number of processes that can be called with the INVD command to 16 types, but if you try to apply it to 17 or more types of processes, it will result in a deterioration of processing speed, and the INVD command There was a risk that the effectiveness of using the product would be impaired.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an INVS instruction is proposed which has a shorter word length than a normal INV instruction but has a higher degree of freedom than an INVD instruction. By storing the process (subroutine) in a specific area, the INVS instruction reduces the overhead (procedures, number of clocks) for calling the process, and can achieve equivalent processing with a smaller word length than the INV instruction. . Further, as long as the process is stored in a specific area, an arbitrary number of processes (subroutines) can be defined, so the degree of freedom can be increased compared to the INVD command. Note that the specific area (third area) is included in the program/data area of the ROM area explained with reference to FIG.

Next, the INVS command will be further explained. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing a part of the program that calls the process using the INVS command of this embodiment, in which (A) is the program that calls the solenoid drive process and motor drive process, and (B) is An example (part) of a program for solenoid drive processing; (C) shows an example (part) of a program for motor drive processing. The example program shown in FIG. 325 is composed of "address", "program", "mnemonic", and "comment". The "address" is the location where the program is stored. The "program" is a so-called machine language, and is an instruction that can be directly interpreted and executed by the main control MPU 1311. A "mnemonic" is a simple memory symbol used to make it easier to program machine language (a sequence of numbers) used to execute a program. The value of "program" corresponds to the value of "mnemonic". A "comment" is an explanation to make the program easier to read, and is ignored when processing is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 325, the solenoid drive process ("89A6h") and the motor drive process ("89CCh") are called by the INVS command. In the INVS instruction, the upper 4 bits (“Ch”) constitute an instruction to access the first area (8000h to 8BFFh) among the specific areas, and the lower 12 bits indicate the address of the process to be called. Specifically, the lower 12 bits (“9A6h”) of the program “C9A6” that calls the solenoid drive process specify the address where the solenoid drive process is stored, and the upper 4 bits of the first area are fixed and “ 8***h", so in combination with the lower 12 bits of the program, the address of the storage location for the solenoid drive process becomes "89A6h", as shown in FIG. 325(B). Similarly, regarding the motor drive process, since the lower 12 bits are "9CCh", the address of the storage location is "89CCh". As described above, in this embodiment, by storing the process in a specific area, the process (procedures, number of clocks) required to specify the process to be called is reduced, and the process is stored in the first area with a 2-byte length instruction. It is possible to perform processing.

Also, it is possible to access the second area (8C00h to 93FFh) among the specific areas, but in that case, unlike when accessing the first area, the upper 1 byte becomes the operation code of the INVS instruction, and the lower 2 Since the byte is the call destination address, the instruction is 3 bytes long.

The game control program is designed with address 8000h as the starting address, and the frequency of accessing the first area is much higher than the frequency of accessing the second area. Therefore, by shortening the word length when accessing a frequently used area, it is possible to compress the program capacity and reduce the processing time (number of clocks) for the instruction.

On the other hand, in an INV instruction that executes a process stored in an arbitrary area in memory, the upper 2 bytes are the code information (opcode) of the INV instruction, and the lower 2 bytes are the call destination address (operand). This is a byte-length instruction. Therefore, in this embodiment, by using an INVS instruction that executes a process stored in a specific area, processing is performed with a smaller word length than an INV instruction that executes a process stored in an arbitrary area in memory. It becomes possible to execute.

In this embodiment, processes (subroutines) that are called frequently are arranged in a specific area (especially the first area), and processes that are called less frequently (for example, error processing and test signals) are placed in areas other than the specific area. By arranging data (such as processing for output) and data, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. Note that if there is a limit on the capacity of the program code due to regulations or the like, the program is placed with priority given to the first area. If possible, such as when the program code capacity limit is smaller than the capacity of the first area, all processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area. Further, all processes (programs) called by the INVS command may be stored in the first area, and no programs may be stored in the second area. By clearly defining the area in which programs are stored, the configuration can be simplified and management can be facilitated.

Further, at least processes directly related to game control are arranged in the first area, and error processing and display of a winning ratio monitor (base monitor) that are not directly related to game control are arranged in the second area. As mentioned above, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by placing processes that are called frequently in the first area, but by consolidating related processes, the readability of the entire program can be improved and developed. They may be arranged to increase efficiency. Processes that can be called with the INVS command can be placed freely within a specific area, so for example, if the same model has multiple specifications, controls common to each specification can be consolidated into a predetermined area and Processes that require different control (depending on specifications) are consolidated and placed in separate areas. Specifically, special figure-related processes, special electric accessory-related processes, ordinary figure-related processes, ordinary electric accessory-related processes, etc. are not distributed and are placed in related processes (for example, fluctuation start processing, fluctuation Special pattern related processing such as medium processing, symbol confirmation processing, fluctuation stop processing, etc.) are consolidated and arranged. Further, even within the area where the programs are arranged in a concentrated manner, the programs may be arranged in accordance with the execution timing, for example, in an order that follows the control executed in a normal game. Specifically, in the special figure related process, it is only necessary to arrange them in an order according to the timing such as the start winning time, the start of variation, and the end of variation.

On the other hand, even game machines of different models can be used universally, and error processing and display processing of the winning ratio monitor (base monitor), etc., which are not affected by the game specifications, are also consolidated and arranged. These processes may be used by multiple types of machines, so it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if there is a team that develops multiple types of machines in parallel, the processes that depend on the game specifications mentioned above are shared within the team, while the processes that are common among these machines are shared between the teams. It becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of the entire game machine development. In addition, even if the upper limit of capacity is fixed, processing that depends on gaming specifications may differ depending on the machine model, so there are processing programs (modules) that can be used universally even for different gaming machine models. By arranging them in two areas, the addresses can be shared even when calling processes from game control programs of different models.

As described above, with the INVS command, it is possible to arrange programs (modules) for arbitrary processing in a specific area in accordance with development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). As a result, in the INVD instruction, general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading were defined with priority in order to limit the number of processes that could be defined, but processes that depend on the game content are placed together. This makes it possible to simplify management by consolidating processing by function, and improve development efficiency.

It is also possible to execute processing by an INVD command within a module called by an INVS command. With this configuration, it is possible to further speed up the processing called by the INVS command and compress the program capacity, and furthermore, it is possible to speed up the entire gaming control program and compress the program capacity. becomes. Note that it is also possible to call a module with the INVS command within a module called with the INVD command. Since there is a limit to the number of processes that can be defined in the process address table, highly versatile processes that cannot be defined in the process address table can be called by the INVS command. In this way, the configuration is such that processes can be mutually called within the modules called by the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

In addition, while processes that are executed at predetermined intervals and are executed very frequently, such as timer interrupt processing, are placed in a specific area (first area), even if they can be called from timer interrupt processing, such as setting operation processing, Processes that are actually called less frequently may be placed outside the specific area. With this configuration, the capacity of the specific area can be secured without reducing the processing speed.

Furthermore, the program may be placed only in the first area where the speed-up effect of the INVS instruction is more effective, and the second area may not be accessed from the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to simplify storage area management such as program placement. For example, by placing a program that defines processing that can be shared between different models in a specific area with fewer restrictions rather than in the second area, the degree of freedom in program placement increases, and when sharing a program, the program It is possible to reduce constraints caused by differences in capacity and the like. In addition, even if the specifications of the INVS command are changed due to changes in the specifications of the main control MPU 1311, it will be easier to deal with it if there is only one area that can be accessed by the INVS command, and the basic structure of the game control program can be changed. Since there is no need to make major changes, existing programs and data can be used, improving development efficiency.

[19-4. INVI command]
Up to this point, we have described a method for speeding up instructions that call processes, but now we will explain means for simplifying programs by implementing instructions that integrate processes that are frequently executed in combination.

When executing a specific program when executing game control, if the information in the memory is rewritten by other processes executed in parallel, the progress of the game may be hindered. Therefore, in order to prevent information stored in an area commonly accessed by multiple processes from being rewritten, means are generally used to inhibit interrupts until the process is completed. In particular, a procedure is frequently performed in which interrupts are prohibited when a specific process is executed, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled after the specific process is completed.

In game control, procedures such as disabling interrupts, calling processes, and canceling interrupt disablement are frequently executed, but since the size of the program area is limited, common procedures can be omitted to reduce the program size. It was hoped that it would be smaller. Therefore, this embodiment proposes an INVI instruction that extends the INV instruction that calls a process and disables interrupts before calling the process.

Since the INVI command specifies and executes the process to be called, the execution procedure is the same as that of the INV command. However, as an internal process when executing the INVI instruction, necessary data is stored in the stack area and interrupts are prohibited before moving the program counter to the specified address. Then, execute the called process. At the end of the called process, a BKI instruction is executed to return to the calling process while returning to the interrupt state before the process was called. That is, if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained, and if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is an interrupt enabled state, the inhibition of interrupts is canceled. A series of procedures for the INVI command will be described below with reference to FIG. 326.

FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating the procedure of the INVI command in this embodiment. The procedure for executing the INVI instruction stored at address "8200h" will be explained.

Since the storage destination of the process specified by the INVI instruction is "A800h", the value of the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h". At this time, the stack area stores the address "8202h" (the next address of the caller, the return address after the callee finishes the process) indicating the position to return to after execution of the process, and the PSW (Program Status Word) at the time of the process call. do. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h". In the example of FIG. 326, the return address is stored in "01F6h" and "01F7h", and the PSW is stored in "01F8h".

PSW is a control word (status register) used to control the order in which instructions are executed in the main control MPU 1311 and to indicate and maintain the state of the computer system related to a specific program. The status of the control MPU 1311 is also included. It also stores the contents of the flag register, interrupt status, etc. in one byte. PSW will be explained with reference to FIG. 327.

FIG. 327 is a diagram showing an example of the PSW of this embodiment, in which (A) is a configuration of the PSW, and (B) is an explanation of each configuration. PSW includes jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF), register bank flag (RES), and interrupt master enable. It is configured by a flag (IMF).

The jump status flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of jump instructions and subroutine instructions. ZF or CF is set depending on the executed instruction.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 when the calculation result or transfer data is "00H (0000H)", and is cleared to 0 in other cases. Further, in a bit/flag manipulation instruction, if the specified bit is 0, 1 is set, and if the specified bit is 1, it is cleared to 0.

The carry flag (CF) sets carry/borrow during carry flag calculation. Furthermore, a shift/rotate instruction or a bit/flag manipulation instruction sets the instruction execution content. The half carry flag (HF) sets the carry/borrow of the 4th bit in the case of 8-bit operation.

The sign flag (SF) is set to 1 when the MSB (maximum number of significant bits) of the operation result is 1, and is cleared to 0 in other cases. If the most significant bit indicates a positive or negative sign, the sign flag can be used to identify the sign. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 when an overflow occurs in the calculation result, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.

The register bank flag (RES) indicates the selected bank of general purpose registers. 0 is set for bank 0, and 1 is set for bank 1.

The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) disables interrupts when IMF=0, and enables interrupts when IMF=1. Furthermore, when a DI (disable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=0 and interrupts are prohibited. Furthermore, when an EI (enable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=1 and interrupts are enabled. Interrupts that can be inhibited or enabled in this way are called maskable interrupts.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 326. When the INVI instruction is executed, the value of IMF included in PSW is set to "0" and interrupts are prohibited. At this time, interrupts are disabled upon execution of the INVI instruction without executing an interrupt disabling instruction (DI instruction). Further, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and processing is executed sequentially from address "A800h". Then, when processing is executed up to address "A80Eh", a BKI instruction to return to the calling source is executed. The BKI instruction sets the return destination address stored in the stack area to the value of the program counter, and returns the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to "8202h" which is the return destination address. Further, in order to return the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW before executing the INVI instruction, if the value of the IMF (interrupt master enable flag) before executing the INVI instruction is 1 (interrupt enabled), interrupt prohibition is canceled. Since the value stored in the stack area is erased when the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, when processing is executed using the INVI instruction, it is possible to prohibit interrupts until execution of the specified process is completed without explicitly executing an interrupt disabling instruction (DI instruction). Furthermore, by returning to the caller by executing the BKI instruction, if interrupts are enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, interrupts can be issued without explicitly executing the interrupt disable release instruction (EI instruction). It becomes possible to cancel the inhibition, and if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled state is maintained. Note that it can be used not only for executing the INVI instruction, but also for returning to the original processing after executing processing with interrupts inhibited by a DI instruction or the like. In addition, the BKI instruction is not an instruction that directly cancels interrupt prohibition, but simply returns the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to the value before executing the INVI instruction by returning the PSW to the state before executing the INVI instruction. If interrupts are enabled before the instruction is executed, the interrupts are returned from the interrupts disabled state to the interrupts enabled state, whereas if the interrupts are disabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupts continue to be disabled even after the return. Further, since there is no need to execute an interrupt disabling instruction and an interrupt disabling instruction, control can be simplified and program capacity can be compressed. This allows processing to be executed without data being changed by other processing.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the area (usage area, gaming area) in which the program can be implemented is defined in advance, and it is basically prohibited to run the program outside the usage area. However, some processes such as test signal processing are not directly related to game control, so they are allowed to be executed outside the usage area. In addition, processing related to the role ratio monitor (base monitor) and errors are not directly related to game control, so they are allowed to be executed outside the usage area. When executing such a process, the influence on other processes can be suppressed by disabling interrupts using the INVI instruction and saving the PSW (status register) before executing the process.

Furthermore, when calling a process stored in an area outside the used area using the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage destination using the process address table, as with the INVD instruction described above, but This may cause inconvenience because the process directly specifies an address outside the area and calls the process. Therefore, a temporary area that must be passed through for executing the INVI command may be set. In this case, the process called from the INVI instruction is defined in a limited temporary area (for example, in the range of "A800h" to "A8FFh"). However, it is not possible to define all processes within this limited range, so the calling process specifies an address within the temporary area, but the process actually stored outside the used area is retrieved from that address. Execute. Specifically, it moves from the address specified within the used area to the address where the process specified by a jump instruction or the like is stored. A specific example is shown in FIG.

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing an example program for explaining the arrangement of processes called by the INVI instruction of this embodiment. An example program is shown. Here, the area up to address "A8FFh" is the used area, and the area after address "A900h" is outside the area.

As shown in FIG. 328(A), the process called by the INVI command is defined by a pair of a label indicating the process and a jump command (JP). For example, when the performance display monitor process is called by the INVI command, it is written as "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is predefined in another area. The value of “_EX_MONITOR_OUT” is “A900h”.

When the instruction "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is executed, the value of the program counter is updated to the address "A800h" corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW is saved to the stack area. Furthermore, the value of the IMF (interrupt master enable flag) of the PSW is set to 0 (interrupts disabled). Thereafter, the performance display monitor process ("EX_MONITOR_OUT") defined at the address "A900h" which is the jump destination set in the operand of the jump instruction is executed.

Since the performance display monitor process is a process outside the used area, the contents of the registers are saved so as not to affect the processes within the used area (register saving process within the used area). Thereafter, the performance display monitor processing main body is executed. Finally, the contents of the saved registers are restored, and the BKI instruction returns to the calling process and returns to the interrupt state before execution of the process.

By configuring as described above, it becomes easier to separate processing outside the used area, and program management becomes easier. In addition, since interrupts are prohibited when executing the INVI instruction, interrupts are prohibited while processing outside the used area is being executed, ensuring independence from processing stored within the used area and ensuring safety. can be ensured. Note that in the example described with reference to FIG. 328, the area for storing the process called by the INVI command is limited, but the area is not limited to this. This makes it possible to simplify calling a process stored in an arbitrary area to be executed with interrupts disabled.

[19-5. Application example of extended process call instruction]
Specific application examples of various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) for calling the processes (subroutines) described above will be explained. Here, it is applied to timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. A specific application example of the process call command will be described with respect to the game stop process included in the timer interrupt process, together with the program code.

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing using various process call instructions of this embodiment. The basic functions of timer interrupt processing are the same as those described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first specifies register bank 1 (step P101). As described above, the main control MPU 1311 includes two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and uses either one by switching banks. Bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used in main control side main processing. Note that it is not always necessary to switch banks in the timer interrupt processing, and for example, the register value may be saved in a stack area and restored after the processing is completed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step P102). In the switch input processing, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a setting value confirmation process to determine whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

When the setting value confirmation process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming machine is in a playable state (step P104). If the game is not in a playable state (the result of step P104 is "NO"), that is, if a setting operation is to be performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), a setting operation process is executed (step P105).

In the setting operation process, a process for changing or confirming the settings of the gaming machine is executed. Load the configuration data for configuration operations and set them to the corresponding output ports. Specifically, the power failure clear signal is output OFF and the ACK output port is cleared. Further, the LED common port and the LED cathode port are turned off, the motor port and the solenoid port are cleared, and a security signal is output. Thereafter, setting display processing and setting confirmation/change processing are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine is in a game ready state (the result of step P104 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is a cause for stopping the game (step P106). If there is a game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "YES"), a game stop process is executed (step P107). In the game stop processing, processing necessary to stop the gaming machine is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 330.

Furthermore, if there is no cause for stopping the game (the result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a game-enabled process in order to proceed with the game (step P108). The game-enabled process is a process for playing normal games. Specifically, switch input special processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, command output processing when passing a switch, performance display monitor processing, special symbol/special electric accessory control processing , solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, output data setting processing, etc. Each process is as described above.

When the game-enabled process or the game-stopped process ends, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output process (step P109). Further, after the display LED output process or the setting operation process is completed, a test signal output process is executed (step P110). In the test signal output process, a process is performed to output a test signal to be output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111) and returning the register bank to 0. , ends timer interrupt processing.

The outline of timer interrupt processing has been explained above. Next, processing using various process call instructions will be explained. As mentioned above, the game stop processing of the timer interrupt processing will be excerpted and explained. First, the procedure of the process when the game is stopped will be explained, and examples of application of various process call instructions will be explained as appropriate while referring to the program code.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. FIG. 331 is a program code of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. The game stop processing is a process for stopping the game when an abnormality such as magnetic abnormality or vibration abnormality is detected or when changing settings. In addition to magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities, there are cases where the door/body frame is open, radio wave abnormalities, winning abnormalities, and in addition to setting changes, settings may be being checked. Depending on the type of gaming machine, only an error notification is made or the game is stopped. In particular, in the type where you can win a jackpot by passing through a specific area (V area) in the accessory, you can win the jackpot by winning illegally, so the system is configured to stop the game as a fraudulent act when an abnormality is detected. Ru.

When the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command that notifies the outside that the game machine is to be stopped. Referring to the program code, the game stop command is set by adding a command addition value (game stop cause; PLAY_STOP_NO) to the A register when determining whether or not there is a cause for stopping the game in the process of step P106 described above. In this state, after setting the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) in the HL register, command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

Command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by an INVD command. The variable “_CMBF_SET1” specified by the INVD command is a number corresponding to the address of command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the process address table, and is “4” (INVD4) in this embodiment. There is. When the number of the processing address table is specified by the INVD command, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the processing address table and executes the process corresponding to the specified number. This makes it possible to execute a process without directly specifying an address, making it possible to speed up process calls and reduce program capacity.

In the command buffer setting process 1, as described above, the game stop command is specified based on the standard command data (the value of the HL register) and the command addition data (the value of the A register, the value corresponding to the game stop factor), The command is stored in the transmission buffer through command storage processing, and a game stop command is output.

After storing the game stop command in the transmission buffer, the main control MPU 1311 executes external output processing (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information (Step P123). The external output information includes, for example, symbol confirmation data, starting hole data, big winning hole winning data, main prize ball data, security data, and the like.

External output processing (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. With the INVS instruction, as described above, by storing the process in a specific area, the process can be called more quickly than when the process is stored at an arbitrary address. The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is stored in a specific area because it is frequently executed, such as being called from the output data setting process (PORT_SET) during the game (when the game-enabled process is executed). Note that in the output data setting process (PORT_SET), in order to speed up the entire process, in addition to the external output process (GAIB_OUT), output judgment common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), etc. The configuration is such that many processes are called by the INVD command defined in the process address table and by the INVS command stored in a specific area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing for outputting various signals to be transmitted to a drive body such as a solenoid or to the outside via SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication process, data to be output is set in the WA register, and an address to which the data set in the WA register is to be output is set in the E register, and then SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) is executed. SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA), like command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), is a process called by the INVD command, and the variable "_SPI_TX__WA" specified by the INVD command becomes "14" (INVD14). There is.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data to the output port is executed (step P126). The game stop data is, for example, data for turning off a power outage clear signal, an LED common port, an LED cathode port, etc., and clearing a motor port, an ACK output port, etc.

Output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), like command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), is a process called by the INVD command, and the variable "_PORT_DAT_SET" specified by the INVD command becomes "10" (INVD10). ing.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes performance display monitor processing to display various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor (step P127). The performance display monitor process only displays various information, and no processing directly related to game control is executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, the performance display monitor process of this embodiment is stored outside the usage area, and while the process of displaying performance information on the performance display monitor is executed by the INVI command, interrupts are prohibited and it is independent of the game control process. can be executed. Note that at the end of performance display monitor processing, the BKI command returns to the interrupt state before the process was called before returning to the caller, so even if the interrupt state before the process is called is interrupt enabled, the caller There is no need to disable interrupts.

Furthermore, the test signal output process in the timer interrupt process is also a process that is called during a test, not during a normal game, and outputs game information, so it is stored outside the usage area. Initialization processing, backup processing, and the like for executing processing at power-off or processing outside the used area may be stored outside the used area.

Note that when executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, interrupts may be disabled to prevent multiple interrupts, but if the design is such that there is no problem even if multiple interrupts occur, the timer It may be set to an interrupt enabled state during interrupt processing. The INVI instruction of this embodiment returns to the interrupt state before processing execution, so it can be used without any problem regardless of whether multiple interrupts are allowed or not.

[19-6. Placement of the program called from the extended process call instruction]
Next, the arrangement of programs in which processes to be executed by various call instructions in game control of the game machine of this embodiment are defined will be explained in detail. The program is stored in a program/data area (8000h to BFFFh) included in the ROM area of the storage area provided by the main control board 1310.

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of an area related to programs/data in the ROM area shown in FIG. 306. The left side of FIG. 332 shows the configuration of the program/data area, and the right side of FIG. 332 shows the details of the configuration of the first area of the program/data area.

Areas related to programs/data in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment include a first area (8000h to 8BFFh) and a second area (A800h to BFFFh) (left in FIG. 332). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used area), and access by the game control program is prohibited in principle. Furthermore, data 00H is set as unused data in the area, and 00H is a NOP (non operation instruction) as a CPU instruction, so even if the area is accessed by mistake, unnecessary control will occur. It is no longer executed. In addition, when the area is accessed by mistake, a reset signal is input to the CPU, so that the game processing can be immediately resumed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 332, the first area is placed on the start address side of the program/data area, the second area is placed on the final address side of the program/data area, and between the first area and the second area. An unused area (outside the used area) is placed. As will be described later, the first area contains programs that define processes for executing main game control, including processes related to game results, and the second area contains programs for error processing, test shooting processing, and role-playing. A program is arranged in which processes that are not directly related to the result of the game, such as processes related to object ratio calculation, are defined. By arranging an unused area between the first area and the second area, the independence of each area can be increased. For example, even if the first area is expanded, the influence of specification changes can be minimized by securing enough unused area to the extent that it is not necessary to change the address of the second area.

Next, each area will be explained. The first area stores processes (programs) related to game control, including processes (programs) called by various call commands. As shown in FIG. 332 (right), in the first area, a start process is placed at the beginning of the address (8000h). The start process is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started, and is a process that is not easily dependent on the machine type. Specifically, it corresponds to the power-on processing (FIG. 213, etc.). Further, by arranging the start process at the beginning of the area and setting the initial value of the program counter to "8000h", it becomes possible to automatically start the start process at the time of initialization. Note that the initialization time is when a reset signal is input to the core of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. Specifically, when a reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on, malfunctions inside the main control MPU 1311 are detected (execution of illegal instructions, access outside the specified area of ROM/RAM, watchdog timer). etc.) when a reset signal is input.

Following the area where the start process is stored, there is an area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored. Since the capacity of the area where the start process is stored is small, the area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored is an area close to the start address of the first area (relatively small address). The processing group called by the INVD command is the processing defined in the processing address table, and the entity (program) of the processing defined in the processing address table is stored in this area. Note that it is preferable that processes called by all INVD commands are centrally arranged in the area where the process group called by the INVD command is stored, but processes called by other than the INVD command are stored in the area. may be included.

As described above, the process group called by the INVD command is a general-purpose process, and like the start process, it is a process that does not depend on the machine type (does not depend on it easily). In this embodiment, processes that are less dependent on the machine type, such as start processing and processes called by the INVD command, are stored at the start address (8000h) of the first area, rather than an area that stores machine-dependent processes such as game control processing, which will be described later. By arranging it in an area close to , it is possible to have a common arrangement (address) even for different models. This makes it easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, making it possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the early stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start of gaming control processing for each model. Furthermore, even when a gaming machine is developed by multiple teams, each process (program) can be easily shared, and the development period can be shortened.

The remaining area of the first area following the area that stores the processing group called by the INVD command is the area where the program that defines the gaming control process is stored, and is the area on the final address side of the first area. ing. The game control process is a variety of processes for controlling the progress of the game, and includes processes that depend on the model. Specifically, the process called from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 190, FIG. 329, etc.) that controls the game, for example, the process such as controlling the fluctuating display (dynamic display) of symbols (special symbol/special electric accessory control) processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089 in FIG. 190), normal symbol/normal electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090 in FIG. 190), etc.).

Note that the program that defines the process called by the INVS command is included in the area where the program that defines the game control process is stored. As mentioned above, by calling a process based on a program placed in a specific area with the INVS instruction, it is possible to execute it with a word length (2 to 3) smaller than the word length (4) of the normal INV instruction. Become. Note that the word length refers to the combined length of the opcode and operand that make up the instruction. The opcode is the part that is decoded by the instruction decoder after being fetched into the processor, and is the part that specifies the type of operation to be performed. The operand is a part that specifies a value or variable to be operated on.

The second area (A800h to BFFFh) stores processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (fluctuation display/dynamic display of symbols), such as error processing, test firing test processing, processing related to accessory ratio calculation, etc. . Processes that are not directly related to the game results include, for example, outputting a test signal to an inspection device connected to a gaming machine in the process of controlling the game in timer interrupt processing (Fig. 190, Fig. 191, Fig. 329, etc.). This includes test signal processing (step S2067 in FIG. 190, step P109 in FIG. 329) and performance display monitor processing for displaying various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor process is called and executed in the game-enabled process (step P108 in FIG. 329) or the game-stop process (step P107 in FIG. 329, step P127 in FIG. 330). Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89 in FIG. 23) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) is also included in the process that does not directly relate to the result of the game. In the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. This allows you to confirm the gambling nature of the gaming machine. Although the performance display monitor processing and the accessory ratio display processing have different terminology, they are common in that they display information to confirm the gambling quality of the gaming machine, and the processing is necessary depending on the type of gaming machine. Display information. For example, pachinko machines display the base (total number of balls that enter the winning slot during non-time saving periods (excluding balls that come out during jackpots)/total number of balls fired during non-time saving periods), and Now, display the role ratio.

Further, when calling another process from the process stored in the second area, only the INV instruction is used. The INV instruction (4 bytes) has a longer word length than the extended process call instructions (INVS instruction (2 bytes), INVD instruction (1 byte), INVI instruction (2 bytes)), but the extended While the specifications of the process call command may differ depending on the processing device (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310), the INV command that calls a specified process without any special restrictions can be guaranteed even if the processing device is changed. compatibility is maintained. Therefore, by configuring the program by using only the INV instruction when calling other processes in the process defined in the second area, the independence of the processes defined in the second area is ensured, Programs can be easily reused even when there is a major change in the specifications of the game machine, such as not only a change (update) of the model but also a hardware update such as a change in the arithmetic unit.

On the other hand, for the processes stored in the first area, the program is configured using not only the INV instruction but also the INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction, which are improved process call instructions. Further, the program has a program configuration in which the processes called by the INVD command and the INVS command are placed only in the first area. Therefore, in the process called by the INVS command, it is possible to call the process by the INVS command or the INVD command as needed (any number of times), thereby further speeding up the process and simplifying the program. I can do it.

For example, in the setting operation process (step P105 in FIG. 329) that executes processing for changing or confirming the settings of a gaming machine, as described above, setting data for the setting operation is loaded and output to the corresponding output port. After that, setting confirmation/change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS, FIG. 192) and setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY, FIG. 193) are executed. The setting confirmation/change process and the setting display process are configured to be called by an INVS command from the game control process (timer interrupt process; FIG. 190, etc.).

In the setting confirmation/change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS), when the setting key 971 returns from the ON position to the OFF position without detecting a RAM error, the INVS command is used to determine the state at the start of the game when the power is turned on. The program is configured to call the setting process (step S2104 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194, etc.).

In the power-on setting process, the program is configured to execute the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, FIG. 316) using the INVD command in order to set the power-on operation command (step S2120 in FIG. 194). Next, in order to initialize the work in the game area, the program is configured to set the initial data at power-on specified by the data setting process (DAT_SET, Figure 312) in the work area all at once using the INVD command. (Step S2123 in FIG. 194). If the game is in the game start state, specify the game start data when initializing the RAM or the game start data when the power is restored, and use the INVD command to send the power-on state command and the power-on return destination command to the command buffer setting process ( CMBF_SET1 (FIG. 316)) (steps 2124 and 2125 in FIG. 194). Further, the program is configured to execute a setting value command transmission process for transmitting a setting value command by the INVS command (step 2126 in FIG. 194).

In the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), first, it is determined whether the setting state is abnormal or not, and if it is normal, the current setting value is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). ), an error is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 if it is abnormal (step S2112 in FIG. 193). After that, the LED common signal is output to the LED common output port (step S2113 in FIG. 193), and display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display is output to the base display 1317 (step S2114 in FIG. 193). . In the process of outputting to the base display 1317, first, in order to obtain the LED port output value (LED common signal) based on the LED status determination output data address table, output determination common processing 2 (_OHAN_SUB2; The program is configured to execute 318). Furthermore, in order to send output data to the base display 1317 by setting the LED common signal to the SPI port (LED common output port) by SPI communication, SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA; Figure 324) is executed by the INVD command. The program is configured to do so.

In the timer interrupt process, in addition to the setting confirmation/change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS) and setting display process (SET_PROCESS) described above, various processes are executed by an extended process call instruction. The processes called in timer interrupt processing are listed below. Note that the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 329 includes some processing, so it will be explained in correspondence with the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 190 and 191.

Processes executed by the INVS command include switch input processing 1 (SW_INPUT; step S2062), random number update processing 1 (R_ATAR_K; step S2063), peripheral board command transmission processing (SCM_JOB; step S2070), and setting processing (SET_PROCESS; step S2068), setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY; step S2069), switch input processing 2 (SW_INPUT2; step S2080), timer update processing (TIM_DEC; step S2081), prize ball control processing (PAY_JOB; step S2082), frame command reception processing ( WK_CM_JOB; Step S2083), command output processing when passing a switch (SW_COMSET_JOB; Step S2085), special symbol/special electric accessory control processing (TOK_JOB; Step S2089), normal symbol/normal electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; Step S2090) , output data setting processing (PORT_SET; step S2091). Since these processes are modules with a relatively large amount of processing or cannot be reused due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the program is deliberately configured to be called by the INVS command.

In the process executed by the INVS instruction, as described above, various processes are executed from within by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction, thereby compressing the program capacity and increasing the processing speed.

Further, the processes executed by the INVI command include a test signal output process (KENIG_OUT; step S2067), a fraud detection process (ILG_ACT_JUDG; step S2084), and a base display output process (EX_MONITOR_OUT; step S2087). . As mentioned above, the programs that define these processes are stored in the second area, and the configuration is such that the processes based on the programs stored in the second area cannot be called by the INVS command or INVD command. There is. These processes are easy to reuse regardless of the specifications of the gaming machine, and since they do not affect the outcome of the game, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVI command.

As described above, the program is configured such that within one timer interrupt process, processes called by the INVS command and processes called by the INVI command coexist. With this configuration, the structure of the program code can be simplified while compressing the program capacity. Furthermore, a program may be constructed by consolidating calls to a process by the INVS command and calls to a process by the INVI command. For example, the call to a process by the INVI command is made at the beginning or end of a program that defines timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, they may be arranged in a concentrated manner at a specific location. Since the INVI instruction returns to the interrupt state before execution, by configuring the process calls by the INVI instruction to be concentrated at a specific location in the program, while the processing concentrated at the specific location is being executed. Since the interrupt status is maintained, it becomes easier to understand the interrupt status, making debugging easier. Furthermore, since the process called by the INVI command is not related to the game result, by configuring the process calls by the INVI command to be concentrated at a specific location in the program, the process called at the specific location can be used for the game. It is possible to easily determine whether the process is related to the result of the process.

Further, regarding power-on processing (start processing), the program is configured to execute various processing using extended processing call instructions, similar to the timer interrupt processing. As the process called in the power-on process in FIGS. 213 and 214, the process executed by the INVS command includes a setting value confirmation process (SET_LV_CHK; step S2209) and a power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET; step S2239). . In addition, the processing executed by the INVI command includes processing for checking the RAM outside the gaming area at power-on (EX_RWMSUMCK; step S2211) and processing for abnormal RAM outside the gaming area at power-on (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233; FIG. 217). There is.

In this way, the program is configured such that various processes are called by the INVS, INVD, and INVI instructions not only in the timer interrupt process but also in the power-on process (start process). In particular, by using the general-purpose processing called by the INVS instruction in timer interrupt processing and the like in the power-on processing (start processing), it is possible to compress the capacity of the entire gaming control program, compared to executing it by the INV instruction. Since the processing can be performed at high speed, it is possible to speed up the startup of the gaming machine. In addition, even if interrupts are disabled to ensure the execution of various initialization processes when starting a gaming machine, there is no need to add interrupt control to the program code using the INVI instruction, so the program size can be compressed. Program readability can be improved.

The INV, INVS, and INVD instructions all use the BK instruction to return to the calling source process, but the INVI instruction uses the BKI instruction to return to the calling source process and return to the interrupt state before execution of the process. That is, if the interrupt state at the time of execution of the INVI instruction is an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained, and if the interrupt state at the time of execution of the INVI instruction is an interrupt enabled state, the inhibition of interrupts is canceled. Note that the BKI instruction is a return instruction that can also be used when returning from timer interrupt processing, and is designed to maintain the interrupt enabled/disabled state before execution of timer interrupt processing. For example, since the power-on processing outside the game area RAM abnormality processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233) is called by the INVI instruction in the power-on processing, as shown in FIG. The system is configured to execute processes other than game control by calling the outside-of-use area RWM initialization process (EX_EXRWMCLR) with an INV command. Furthermore, by returning with the RET command (corresponding to the BKI command) after executing the process in step S2289, the system is configured to return to the interrupt state before calling the RAM abnormality processing outside the game area at power-on (EX_INITIAL_RWM). There is.

In the process executed subsequent to the start process (such as in FIG. 221), the process is also called by the INVS command or the INVI command. In the main loop that repeatedly executes the process of step S2310 and the process of step S2311, the random number update process (R_OTHE_K; step S2311) is repeatedly executed by the INVS instruction and waits until the next timer interrupt process is started. In addition, in the power outage process (processing after step S2312), the INVI command executes the power OFF process (EX_POWER_DOWN), and the INVS command calls the checksum calculation process (S2317). The process placed in the second area (power OFF process) is called, and the INVS command is used to check the check sums of the work RAM used for processing outside the gaming area and the work RAM used for processing within the gaming area during power outage processing. (Work RAM inspection value) calculation processing (arranged in the first area) can be executed. In this way, the power outage process is configured so that the process based on the program placed in the first area and the process based on the program placed in the second area can be called as necessary. Since it becomes easy to configure a program by combining processing and processing unrelated to games, the degree of freedom in program arrangement is increased and management efficiency can be improved.

In addition, a process for calculating a checksum inside the gaming area and a process for calculating a checksum outside the gaming area are provided separately, and the process for calculating the checksum inside the gaming area is placed in the first area, and the process for calculating the checksum outside the gaming area is placed in the first area. The process of calculating the checksum may be placed in the second area. In this case, the INVS command calls the process to calculate the checksum in the game area placed in the first area, the INVI command calls the power OFF process, and then the INV command calls the process to calculate the checksum in the game area placed in the second area. It is also possible to call a process that calculates a checksum outside the game area where the game area is located. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the independence of processing for areas outside the gaming area.

The game control process also includes a process for selecting a variation pattern when performing a variable display (dynamic display) of symbols, and is called by the INVS command within the timer interrupt process. In the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select), the variation pattern number is specified by using the bit transfer instruction described above. FIG. 333 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code for the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). Note that the processing by the program code shown in FIG. 333 realizes the same function as the processing by the program code shown in FIG. 305, and uses a process call instruction with some functions expanded. Similar to the program code shown in FIG. 305, this corresponds to the flowchart of the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 304.

Referring to FIG. 333, when selecting a variation pattern, it is first necessary to specify a variation pattern table corresponding to parameters such as special symbols (types of dynamic display results) and gaming status (step P8021). To explain the process of step P8021 in more detail, first, the identification information of the special symbol (result of dynamic display) is set as the selection value, and the address of the selection data address table is set as the search data address (step P8021-1). The configuration is such that the 2-byte data search process (FIG. 315, LD_HLA_HL) is executed by the INVD command (step P8021-2). The selection data address table corresponding to the identification information (dynamic display result) of the special symbol is specified by the 2-byte data search process, and the specified selection data address table is used as the search table (step P8021-3), and is used as the selection value. Set status flags. Thereafter, by executing the 2-byte data search process using the INVD command (step P8021-4), the variation pattern selection table can be specified.

Furthermore, an index for using the bit transfer command is created by executing an index creation process (step S8023; GEN_IDX) that creates an index for data transfer based on the address of the specified variation pattern selection table. At this time, the index creation process is configured to be executed by an INVS command. Finally, a bit transfer instruction is used to obtain a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern selection extracted from the specified fluctuation pattern selection table (step P8028). In this way, by configuring a program by combining extended process call instructions (INVD instructions, INVS instructions) and bit transfer instructions, it is possible to speed up processing and reduce capacity.

Note that the process using the extended process call instruction and the bit transfer instruction in combination is not limited to the process of selecting a variation pattern, and may be any process stored in the first area. Additionally, by configuring the program so that the index creation process required to execute the bit transfer instruction is defined in the processing address table and called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to both compress the data capacity and speed up the processing. becomes. In this way, the bit transfer instructions can be used for general purposes by putting together the processes necessary for executing the bit transfer instructions.

On the other hand, for the process stored in the second area, it is preferable that interrupts be prohibited when the process is called. For example, this is to stop the progress of the game when an error occurs, or to prevent the number of acquired balls from changing during the calculation of the accessory ratio, making it impossible to calculate the accurate accessory ratio. For this reason, in this embodiment, by configuring the program to call the process stored in the second area with the INVI instruction, interrupt control (disables interrupts during process execution, and interrupts before the process is executed after the process is executed) control to return to the current state) has been simplified. In addition, when the INVI instruction is executed, the PSW including interrupt disable/enable information is stored in the stack area, and when returning from the called process, the PSW stored in the stack area is returned to the state before the return. Since it is necessary to use instructions to individually save/restore PSWs to the stack area, control can be simplified. With this configuration, processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (fluctuation display/dynamic display of symbols) can be consolidated and stored in a specific area, thereby simplifying game control while managing program placement. can be achieved.

[19-7. Usage frequency of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Although there is a concern that the game control will become more complex and the program capacity will increase as a result of trying to improve the game's interest, it becomes possible to compress the program capacity by using expanded process call instructions. In particular, the INVD instruction has a shorter word length than the INVS and INVI instructions, and by replacing it with the INV instruction, the program capacity can be expected to be most compressed. However, the number of processes that can be called by the INVD command is limited to 16 that can be defined in the process address table, so in this embodiment, particularly frequently used processes are defined. Therefore, in this embodiment, the program is configured such that the most frequently used of the three types of extended process call instructions is used. For example, in the game control process in this embodiment, the frequency of use of extended process call instructions in the program code (number of lines of process call instructions/total number of lines of the program) is approximately 8% for the INVD instruction and approximately 8% for the INVS instruction. 4%, and the INVI instruction accounts for about 0.3% of the program. Note that the frequency of use of the extended process call instructions varies depending on the model of the gaming machine, and is not limited to the above numerical values, but the frequency of use of the extended process call instructions should be increased in the order of INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. It is possible to compress data capacity and speed up processing.

On the other hand, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (number of lines of the process call instruction/total number of lines of the program) is different from the frequency of execution (number of executions) of the extended process call instruction during program execution. For example, if it is used in a process that is called frequently, such as a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically, the actual execution frequency will be high because it will be executed repeatedly even if it is used less frequently in the program code. . The timer interrupt process (FIG. 329) of this embodiment is configured such that the INVD instruction is executed more frequently than the INVS instruction within one cycle. In this way, by increasing the number of executions of the INVD instruction, which has a shorter word length than the INVS instruction, it is possible not only to compress the program capacity but also to speed up the processing of the program.

As described above, the process that can be called by the INVD instruction is highly versatile and consists of a program with a relatively small number of bytes (short number of steps) compared to the process called by the INVS instruction. A program with a small number of bytes can speed up processing because the overhead when executed by the arithmetic unit is reduced, so by calling it with a frequently used INVD instruction, the overall gaming control can be speeded up.

On the other hand, although the process called by the INVS instruction is limited by the program storage area, there are fewer restrictions on the number of processes and capacity compared to the process that can be called by the INVD instruction, so the call frequency may vary depending on the model. It is considered to be a high-quality process. Since the INVI instruction calls a process stored in the second area, the program is configured so that it is used less frequently than the INVD and INVS instructions.

[19-8. Summary of process call instructions]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a main control MPU (CPU) 1311 of a main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game by executing a program stored in a ROM 1313. The program defines processes for realizing various functions necessary for controlling the gaming machine, and is executed by a process call instruction. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, multiple types (four types) of process call instructions are implemented.

The INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction (first specific process execution instruction), differs from other process call instructions in that it does not use a value that directly indicates the address where the process to be called is stored, but an identification information number from 1 to 16. is set as an operand. The INVD instruction calls a process (first specific process) selected from the process address table based on identification information set as an operand during execution.

In addition, the processing address table used in the INVD instruction is information stored in the same ROM (storage means) as the program/data area, but although it is used as an address table within the program, it is not used to store the program or data. It is stored in an area different from the program/data area. Specifically, it is stored in an area (C080h to C0FFh) with a larger address than the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh).

The INVS instruction, which is the second process calling instruction (second specific process execution instruction), is an instruction to call the process (second specific process) specified by the identification information set as a parameter. Furthermore, the INVS instruction is an instruction whose word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area where the program that defines the process to be called is stored. Specifically, when the area where the program is stored is from address 8000h to 8BFFh, The word length is 2 bytes, and in the case of addresses 8C00h to 93FFh, the word length is 3 bytes.

The INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction (third specific process execution instruction), stores and saves the PSW including interrupt disable/enable information in the stack area when executing the instruction, and then sets the interrupt disable state. , is an instruction to call the process (third specific process) specified by the identification information set as a parameter.

Furthermore, unlike other process calling instructions, the INVI instruction uses the same return instruction (BKI instruction) used when executing the timer interrupt process when returning from the called process, thereby changing the interrupt disabled/enabled state to the INVI instruction. You can return to the state before execution. Specifically, after saving the interrupt disable/enable information (PSW in Figures 326 and 327 (B)) stacked in the stack area when executing the INVI instruction to the stack area, the value of IMF of PSW is set to 0 (interrupts disabled). By setting , interrupts are disabled, and by restoring the PSW that was saved when the BKI instruction was executed, the interrupts disabled/enabled state can be returned to the state before the INVI instruction was executed.

The INV command, which is the fourth process call command, is a command to call a process specified by identification information set as a parameter. The INV instruction has a longer word length than the INVS instruction.

The gaming control program for the gaming machine in this embodiment uses at least the first to third process call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction). Also, the word length of the INV instruction is longer than any of the INVD, INVS, and INVI instructions, so the INVD instruction and INVS instruction (INVI instruction) should be used with priority over the INV instruction. By doing so, it is possible to compress the program capacity, speed up process calls, and simplify the program code, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

The program process (module) called by the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, is placed at the start address (8000h value), which is the relative start address, of the program/data area (8000h to BFFFH). There is. The INVD command is a process that does not easily depend on the model, and by arranging it in an area close to the start address of the program storage area, it is possible to have a common arrangement (address) even for different models. This makes it easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, making it possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the early stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start of gaming control processing for each model. Furthermore, even when a gaming machine is developed by multiple teams, each process (program) can be easily shared, and the development period can be shortened.

Furthermore, the program process (module) called by the INVS command, which is the second process call command, can be placed at any position within the program/data area, unlike the program process called by the INVD command. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the INVS instruction, the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area where the program that defines the process to be called is stored, but it is shorter than the word length (4) of the INV instruction and can be processed at high speed. I can do it. Therefore, the INVS instruction allows programs to be placed more flexibly than the INVD instruction, and can be called more quickly than the INV instruction, making it possible to speed up processing and reduce capacity.

The program process (module) called by the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, is an instruction for calling a process that is not related to the result of the game placed in the second area as described above, and is a By making it possible to use the same for gaming machines, it is possible to improve the development efficiency when developing new gaming machines. Therefore, if you port the program that defines the process called by the INVI instruction to another model by placing it relatively at the last address (BFFFh number value) in the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh). However, the impact is kept to a minimum. Furthermore, in order to maintain compatibility even when the hardware configuration of the game machine is changed, the program is configured to call a process using an INV command instead of an extended process call command such as an INVD command. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reuse the program even if the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

On the other hand, in the process stored in the first area (the area on the first address side), not only the INV instruction but also the improved process call instructions INVD, INVS, and INVI can be used. It is possible. Further, the program has a program configuration in which the processes called by the INVD command and the INVS command are placed only in the first area. Therefore, in the process called by the INVS command, it is possible to call the process by the INVS command or the INVD command as needed (any number of times), thereby further speeding up the process and simplifying the program. I can do it.

In the game control program of this embodiment, the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, the INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction, and the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, are the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI instruction. The program is structured so that the frequency of use (number of uses; number of executions) increases in the order of instructions. Since the INVD instruction is the instruction with the shortest word length among these process call instructions, by configuring it in this way, it is possible to compress the program capacity and speed up the processing of the program.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by improving the existing command that calls the defined process, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process and reduce the program capacity. Furthermore, by implementing an instruction such as the INVI instruction that integrates interrupt control and a process call instruction, it is possible to simplify the program.

[20. Arrangement of electronic components on main control board]
The SPI communication procedure in the game stop processing has been described above. By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by employing serial communication such as SPI communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus. That is, the circuit pattern can be simplified by eliminating a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and performing communication using fewer signal lines including control lines. This makes it easy to arrange various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311, a connector for outputting external information, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit (first electronic component) for serial communication on the main control board 1310. It can be done. An example of the arrangement of electronic components on the main control board 1310 will be described below with reference to FIG. 334.

FIG. 334 is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the mounting diagram shown in FIG. 334 corresponds to the circuit diagrams shown in FIGS. 93, 259, etc., and the symbols and explanations of each electronic component are as described above.

In the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, a main control MPU 1311 is arranged near the center of the board. The main control board 1310 has a first area 6100 centered on the main control MPU 1311 and a second area 6200 other than the first area (outside the first area). The main control MPU 1311 may be arranged as long as it can secure a predetermined distance from the end of the main control board 1310 and secure the first area 6100 and the second area 6200.

The first area 6100 includes an unmounted area 6101 in which electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311 such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components are not placed, and a non-mounted area 6101 in which electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311 are placed, such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components, and discrete parts that need to be placed close to the main control MPU 1311. There is a component mounting area 6102 where the components are placed. A discrete component is an electronic component that basically has one circuit function. By providing an unmounted area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, the heat generated by the operation of the main control MPU 1311 can affect other electronic components, and the heat generated by other electronic components can affect the operation of the main control MPU 1311. This can be prevented.

In the second area 6200, various logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) are arranged. Components that need to be placed near the main control MPU 1311 (for example, parts that are susceptible to noise) are placed in the second area 6200 in an area close to the main control MPU 1311, and other logic components are placed further outside. placed in the area. Hereinafter, a typical arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

The reset circuit 1335 is arranged in a region of the second region 6200 that is close to the main control MPU 1311 (a region that is close to the component mounting region 6102 of the first region 6100). Specifically, it is placed as close as possible to the main control MPU 1311, and the number of electronic components placed between it and the main control MPU 1311 is reduced so that it does not intersect with other wiring. This allows the configuration to be configured to prevent incorrect signals from being input due to factors such as the generation of noise due to crosstalk, and if an incorrect signal is input to the reset circuit 1335, the game will be interrupted and the progress of the game will be interrupted. It is possible to prevent significant problems from occurring.

A clock oscillator 1336 (second electronic component) is placed in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. If the wiring distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is long, or if the wiring intersects with other wiring, noise is likely to occur, causing variations in the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock oscillator 1336. , there is a risk that the progress of the game will be hindered. On the other hand, if the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is too short, the clock oscillator 1336 may not operate normally due to heat generated by the main control MPU 1311 or the like, which may cause variations in frequency. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, an unmounted area 6101 is provided around the main control MPU 1311 to suppress the effect of heat generation of the main control MPU 1311, and a clock oscillator is provided in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. 1336 prevents the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 from being separated from each other, thereby suppressing noise generation.

As described above, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 includes a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, big winning opening counting switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, gaming board discharge switch) and a photo sensor. Signals such as the following are input, and game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. Since the switches and sensors that output these input signals are distributed in the gaming area, a plurality of parallel/serial conversion circuits 1341 are provided (in this embodiment, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341a ~1341c). Furthermore, these input signals are once input to a buffer and then input to a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is arranged in the second area 6200, but because it receives a signal for imparting gaming value such as detecting winning in the starting winning hole or big winning hole, it is not affected by noise or the like. It is placed in such a way that it is difficult to receive.

As described above, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). Since the displays on the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 do not directly affect the result of the game, they may be positioned relatively far from the main control MPU 1311, increasing the degree of freedom in arrangement. For example, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1343 is arranged on the end side of the main control board 1310. Further, a drive circuit 1344 is provided after the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and once the drive circuit 1344 receives a signal, it outputs it to the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317).

The base display 1317 is arranged in an outer region of the second region 6200 (on the end side of the main control board 1310), that is, in a position relatively distant from the main control MPU 1311. The base value is displayed on the base display 1317, but even if an incorrect base value or no base value is displayed due to the influence of noise, the display of the base value itself will affect the result of the game. It does not give Further, it is also possible to output base value information from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in a game hall, or to display the base value on a liquid crystal display device, and alternative means can also be provided. Therefore, in order to place other logic parts (first logic parts) near the main control MPU 1311 with priority, which may affect the game if a malfunction occurs, the base display 1317 is separated from the main control MPU 1311. Place it in a remote location. In addition, logic components that output signals to the base display 1317 that do not easily affect the game (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and second logic components) are located away from the main control MPU 1311. The base display 1317 may be placed in the vicinity of the base display 1317.

As described above, in the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, the external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports of channel A (PA0 to PA7), and various solenoids are connected to the output ports of channel B (PB0 to PB7). . The various solenoids include a grand prize opening solenoid, etc., and since they affect the gaming value given to the player, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 is connected to an area of the second area 6200 that is close to the first area 6100. will be placed in Thereby, the signal line connecting the main control MPU 1311 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit can be shortened. Furthermore, the number of data lines can be reduced by transmitting and receiving the solenoid drive signal from the main control board 1310 via serial communication (SPI communication), making it easier to route data lines when arranging electronic components. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions caused by noise or the like.

Note that the serial/parallel conversion circuit that outputs signals for controlling motors other than solenoids directly outputs the output signals without going through buffers, transistors, etc., so the main control MPU 1311 and the output destination connector (for example, connector 13103).

As mentioned above, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1346 has a test terminal 1348 connected to the output port of channel B, and outputs a signal from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, a normal electric accessory release signal, object release signal, etc.) is output. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is arranged in a test component mounting area (test circuit arrangement area) 6300, and in addition to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347 and a test terminal 1348 are provided. The electronic components provided in the inspection component mounting area 6300 are mounted only on gaming machines that are inspected by an inspection agency, and are not mounted on gaming machines that are generally sold on the market. However, since no components are mounted in the inspection component mounting area 6300, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction. Therefore, it is arranged at a location away from other electronic components (first logic components) that affect the game. For example, the serial/parallel converter circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel converter circuit 1343 that provide an LED display are more suitable for inspection than the serial/parallel converter circuit 1345 that outputs a signal to control a solenoid for opening and closing the big prize opening. It is placed near the mounting area 6300 (serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346).

In the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 334, the setting key 971 is provided on the main control board 1310, and is arranged at the end of the main control board 1310 (outside the second area). Since the setting key 971 is directly operated by an employee of the game, in order to avoid the influence of vibrations during operation, various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit that performs the main control of the game ( (first logic component). Furthermore, control based on the signal input by operating the setting key 971 includes changing the settings of the gaming machine, and therefore may directly affect the progress of the game. Therefore, the wiring between the setting key 971 and the main control MPU 1311 is wired to reduce the number of wires, thereby making it less susceptible to noise and the like.

As described above, in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the basic guidelines for circuit design are clarified by specifying the arrangement for each area according to the function and characteristics of each electronic component. It can be done. This makes it possible to maintain and improve quality without reducing development efficiency, even when the system is changed due to the design of new gaming machines or the transfer of developers.

[21. Control of serial communication (SPI communication)]
Here, the serial communication function (SPI communication) for outputting signals from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be further explained. The serial communication function is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but here, the SPI communication procedure will be explained in more detail with reference to the program code.

As described above, the gaming machine in this embodiment uses serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310. Typical serial communications include I2C communication and SPI communication. SPI communication has the advantage of higher communication speed than I2C communication although the number of signal lines increases. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, SPI communication is used when the main control MPU 1311 receives signals from various switches and when the main control MPU 1311 transmits control signals for various LEDs, solenoids, etc.

Note that all signals are not input/output using SPI communication, but some signals, such as signals for detecting fraudulent activity on gaming machines during the initial setting process when the power is turned on, are mainly input/output using parallel communication. It is input to the control MPU 1311. For example, signals such as "setting key switch," "main RWM erase/setting change signal," and "power outage warning signal" are input directly from the general-purpose input terminal of the main control MPU 1311 through parallel communication. The “setting key switch,” “main RWM erase/setting change signal,” and “power outage warning signal” are checked during the initial setting process when the gaming machine is powered on (for example, the initialization process shown in Figures 21 and 22). This is a necessary signal, and if the input signal is taken in through the SPI circuit, it will take time to take it in and make a decision, so it is taken in by parallel communication. In this way, since parallel communication can communicate faster than serial communication, it is possible to speed up the initial setting process compared to sending and receiving various signals using serial communication only, and the time until game processing starts. can be shortened.

In addition, some signals are input/output using parallel communication, and other signals are transmitted using serial communication (SPI communication), so that when a fraudster attempts to obtain signals for controlling the game, Since it is necessary to acquire signals from multiple locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, deterrence against fraud can be increased.

SPI communication outputs signals based on information stored in the SPI communication buffer register. For example, when outputting a stop signal to a solenoid during game stop processing in timer interrupt processing, when outputting a signal to an LED cathode port or an LED common port during display LED output processing or setting display processing, etc. In the gaming machine, the signals transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication are mainly signals for controlling light emitting bodies such as LEDs and driving bodies such as motors and solenoids.

In addition, signals input from various sensors via SPI communication are input to an arithmetic unit such as the main control MPU 1311. For example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the winning is detected by the starting opening switch, and a signal is input to the main control MPU 1311. The configuration and procedure for transmitting and receiving signals input to and output from the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be described below.

[21-1. Control configuration of serial communication (SPI communication)]
First, a configuration for realizing SPI communication will be explained. The basic configuration is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but the settings of parameters necessary for each configuration and control will be further explained with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337, and also shown in FIG. 338. We will also supplement the startup procedures, such as the initialization of various parameters when starting SPI communication, with reference to .

FIG. 335 is a block diagram of a configuration for performing SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 constitutes a master that controls communication, and the various ICs arranged on the main control board 1310 constitute slaves. Specifically, the slaves are a serial/parallel conversion circuit (1342, 1343, 1346, 1349) and a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. Note that some of the slaves may be arranged not on the main control board 1310 but on a relay board connected to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, two types of communication are possible from the master (main control MPU 1311): SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is performed for slaves 1 to 4. Communication via SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is basically communication for normal gaming control, including inputting signals from various switches and sensors, controlling solenoids that open and close the grand prize opening, and emitting light from various LEDs. A signal for control is output. On the other hand, communication by SPI transmission (CHB) is performed with respect to the slave 5 and is mainly used for communication for outputting test signals.

In communication using SPI transmission/reception (CHA), it is possible to start communication with all slaves (1 to 4) at the same time, and at this time, each slave starts communication in a predetermined order. In this case, communication start (“1”) is set in the enable setting (SPENBAn; n corresponds to an individual slave) of all slaves. If no data is stored in the communication (transmission) buffer, communication of the next slave is started without performing communication of the corresponding slave.

It is also possible to start communication by specifying slaves individually. For example, when lighting up the LEDs connected to slave 1 and slave 3, it is possible to communicate enable settings to slave 1 and slave 3. By setting the enable setting of slave 2 and slave 4 to start (“1”) and fixing it as (“0”), communication of slave 3 is started after communication of slave 1 is completed.

As described above, each slave is capable of inputting and outputting signals, and takes in the input signal when outputting the output signal. Further, each slave may be controlled by limiting (specifying) its function by setting it as output-only or input-only, and in the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) communication of this embodiment, slaves 1 to 3 are output-only, slave 4 is is for input only. For this reason, the input-only slave is configured to capture input signals while transmitting dummy data. The procedure for the master (main control MPU 1311) to take in the signal received from the slave will be described later.

Next, the SPI communication of this embodiment will be further explained. As mentioned above, in the SPI communication in the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are two channels: SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). The number of SPI transmission/reception (CHA) channels is four. Furthermore, the communication speed can be set for each channel, and a 16-byte transmission/reception buffer is provided for each channel. There are four types of SPI communication operation modes, which are common to each channel. The bit direction can be set to LSB first or MSB first, and can be set for each channel. LSB first starts communication from the least significant bit, and LSB first starts communication from the most significant bit. Further, SPI transmission (CHB) is for transmission only, and the number of channels is one. Other settings are the same as for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), but all reception-related settings are unused (fixed at "0"). The registers for setting the operation mode and each parameter will be described below with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337.

First, the operation mode of SPI communication will be explained. FIG. 336 is a diagram illustrating the operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Four types of operation modes are defined for SPI communication, and as shown in Figure 336, the initial state of the clock is "Low" or "High", and the timing of data change is "at the falling edge" of the clock. It is specified by whether the sampling timing is "at the rising edge" or "at the falling edge" or "at the rising edge". The initial state of the clock is a state in which communication has not started, and one bit of data is transmitted between the timing of data change and the timing of sampling. The operation mode is set according to the specifications of the slave (serial-parallel conversion circuit), and the master (main control MPU 1311) outputs a signal according to the set operation mode.

Next, the configuration of a register for setting parameters for controlling SPI communication in this embodiment will be explained. Here, the case of SPI transmission/reception (CHA) will be explained, but the same applies to the case of SPI transmission (CHB). FIG. 337 is a diagram explaining the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1). ), (C) are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3).

The control register 1 shown in (A) is composed of 8 bits and includes bit shift settings (SPBSFAn), operation mode (SPMODA), and initialization settings (SPRSTA). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are set when the power is turned on (at the time of initialization), and the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is set when the power is turned on or if communication cannot be performed normally in each slave. If determined, initialize all slaves. Note that when initialization is executed, bit shift settings (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are reset. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the SPI communication circuit, it is possible to recover from the abnormality quickly, and it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) specifies whether to transmit data from the most significant bit (“0”: MSB first) or from the least significant bit (“1”: LSB first). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) can be specified for each slave, and in this embodiment, 4 bits corresponding to the number of slaves are allocated and can be set individually (bits 6 to 3). Specifically, bit 6 corresponds to slave 4, bit 5 corresponds to slave 3, bit 4 corresponds to slave 2, and bit 3 corresponds to slave 1.

The operation mode (SPMODA) specifies the four types of operation modes described above, and is commonly set for each slave. Since there are four types of operation modes, an area of 2 bits is allocated, and "00" is mode 1, "01" is mode 2, "10" is mode 2, and "11" is mode 4 ( bits 2, 1).

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) has different functions depending on whether it is read or written, and is set in common to each slave. When the initialization setting is read, a setting value of "0" indicates completion of initialization, and a setting value of "1" indicates that initialization is in progress. On the other hand, when "1" is written in the initialization setting, control is performed to initialize SPI communication, and when "0" is written, control is continued without doing anything in particular. For example, if it is determined that communication cannot be performed normally, "1" is written in the initialization setting and initialization is executed. Further, the communication circuit can be initialized by writing "1" to the initialization setting regardless of the communication state such as whether communication is in progress or not. When the communication circuit is initialized, various parameters need to be reset.

When reading the initialization setting (SPRSTA), it is possible to determine whether or not it is being initialized, and after checking whether it is being initialized (“1”) based on the value of the bit, Initialization may be executed or communication may be started. When the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is initialized (setting bit 0 to (“1”)), the initialization time can be executed in a shorter period than executing one instruction. When the next instruction is executed later, the initialization is completed. Therefore, if you read the initialization setting (SPRSTA) after setting it to initialization and it is still initializing (“1”), it is possible that some abnormality has occurred in the SPI communication circuit. Therefore, in that case, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset (reset by a watchdog timer) by forcibly transitioning to game stop, abnormality notification, and power outage processing. As a result, even if the SPI communication circuit becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to quickly restore it.

Note that each slave is started in an initialized state when the power is turned on, so there is no need to initialize it. On the other hand, when reset by watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset, etc., the state before the reset is maintained. Therefore, even if the program is started due to any reset factor such as system reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset, initialization is performed without initializing the SPI circuit. I am trying to make initial settings other than the settings. In addition, if a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset occurs, it may be because the gaming process is not being executed normally, and the SPI circuit settings may have been changed. . Therefore, when starting a program from a reset, it is determined whether a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset has occurred, and then the watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset is activated. If it is determined that the reset has occurred due to any of the out-of-area access resets, the stability of game control after the reset can be improved by initializing the SPI circuit (writing "1" to SPRSTA). It is possible to improve the performance of the game and to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered as much as possible.

The control register 2 (SPICNA1) shown in (B) is composed of 8 bits and is set every time communication is started. Control register 2 includes the reception status (SPRVSAn) and enable (SPENBAn) of each slave. The reception status is set for each slave (bits 7 to 4), and is set to "1" if there is received data, and "0" if there is no received data.

Enable is set for each slave, and the function differs between reading and writing (bits 3 to 0). When reading, "1" is set if communication is in progress, and "0" is set if communication has ended. On the other hand, when "1" is written in the enable field, communication of the corresponding slave is enabled and communication is started. By acquiring the enable value at the start of communication, it is possible to determine the communication status, and if the value is "0" (communication completed), "1" is set to start communication, and the value is " 1'' (communication in progress), control such as waiting until the communication ends is possible.

The prescaler register shown in (C) consists of 16 bits and is provided for each slave. The prescaler register consists of a 5-bit transmission buffer status (bits 15 to 11) and a 10-bit baud rate setting (bits 9 to 0) (bit 10 is an unused bit).

The number of transmit data is stored in the transmit buffer status; if it is "00h", there is no transmit data, and if it is "01h" to "10h", the transmit data in the transmit buffer is 1 to 16 bytes. shows. The transmission buffer status can also be used to check the number of remaining data in the transmission buffer. If the value of the transmission buffer status is "10h", all data has been stored in the transmission buffer (full state), so data writing is ignored. Note that whether or not communication is in progress can be determined by referring to the enable value of the corresponding slave in the control register 2.

The baud rate setting corresponds to the communication speed during communication, and is set once when the power is turned on. The set value can be set to a value from "000h" to "3FFh", and in this embodiment, the actual baud rate can be calculated by system clock (20 Mhz)/(set value x 4). Note that when the set value is "000h", it is calculated as "001h". Note that it is necessary to reset the settings when initializing the SPI communication (when "1" is set in the initialization setting of the control register 1).

[21-2. Control when starting SPI communication]
Next, control from when the gaming machine is started (initialized) to when SPI communication can be started will be explained. FIG. 338 is a time chart showing the state from when the gaming machine of this embodiment is initialized until it becomes possible to start SPI communication.

In FIG. 338, at time a, a reset signal is input by powering on the gaming machine, etc., and the gaming machine is started (initialized). When a gaming machine is started up (initialized), before user programs such as initial setting processing are executed (started up), checks are made to see if any unauthorized equipment has been installed or unauthorized modifications have been made. Execute the security check to be inspected (period A).

When the security check is completed, the initial setting process, which is a user program, is executed by the main control MPU 1311 (time b). The initial setting process includes processing specific to the model of the gaming machine, and processes necessary to enable the start of the game are executed (period B).

The initial setting process includes initializing various parameters set in SPI communication. Specifically, control register 1 (SPICNA0, SPICNB0) shown in FIG. 337(A) is set (time c). As described above, the control register 1 performs bit shift settings for each slave and setting of an operation mode common to each slave.

In setting the operation mode, the clock initial state is set according to the set operation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 338, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to "1" (High) when the power is turned on, so when mode 1 and mode 2 are specified, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to "0". ” (Low). Changes in the signal at the clock terminal in each mode are as shown in FIG. 338. The bit shift settings are set appropriately according to the slave specifications, etc. Since the SPI circuit is automatically initialized when the gaming machine is started, there is no need to initialize the SPI circuit (write "1" to SPRSTA) when setting the mode through initial setting processing. This eliminates the need to implement initialization processing in the user program, making it possible to reduce program capacity and reduce the initialization load.

Thereafter, when the initialization setting process ends (time d), the game process starts (period C). The start of the game process corresponds to the start of the main loop process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22) in the initialization process (FIG. 21, etc.), and the timer interrupt process can be executed. When timer interrupt processing is executed (time e), processing for performing SPI communication such as switch input processing is executed (time f).

In addition, resets when a reset signal is not input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 (user reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset) (referred to as a "user reset"), the program starts running immediately after the reset is released, and regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, settings related to SPI communication are performed using the same process. ing. As a result, the same SPI communication settings can be made without distinguishing whether it is a system reset or a user reset, thereby reducing the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization.

Furthermore, the period from reset cancellation until the operating mode is set (period from time a to time c) is set to be longer in the case of a system reset than in the case of a user reset. Since rebooting due to power-on is highly likely to cause security problems, various function checks of the main control MPU 1311 are ensured to be completed by rebooting after power-on.

[21-3. Control during output signal transmission in SPI communication]
SPI communication is performed in various processes called from timer interrupt processing and initialization processing. For example, in timer interrupt processing, switch input processing that processes signals input from various switches and sensors via SPI communication, display LED output processing that outputs signals to control the lighting of various LEDs via SPI communication, and external output processing. This includes a game stop process that outputs a signal to an external output terminal via SPI communication. Here, a procedure for outputting a signal through SPI communication in the game stop processing will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the process for executing SPI communication is simplified while using a process call command such as the above-mentioned INVD command.

The outline of the procedure for transmitting a signal through SPI communication is to set data to be transmitted in a predetermined SPI communication buffer register, and execute SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) called by the above-mentioned INVD command. Here, we will use the SPI communication process in step P124 of the game stop process (Figure 330) as a specific example, and the program code for the game stop process (Figure 331) and the program code for the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) (Figure 324). Explain the procedure with reference.

As shown in the program code of FIG. 331, when the game stop process is started, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmission buffer and executes the external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information. The process is executed (step P123), and external output information to be output is set in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the external output information set in the A register in the W register by loading (storing) the value stored in the A register into the W register (“LD W, A”). Then, by setting the contents of the A register to "0" ("XOR A, A"), the solenoid signal output when the game is stopped is set to OFF.

Then, set the address value of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) in the E register, and perform the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) called by the INVD command and the output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) called from the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). ), the external output information set in the WA register and each solenoid signal are set in the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) indicated by the E register, and output by SPI transmission (CHB). The contents of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) will be explained with reference to FIG. 339.

The SPI communication B0 port corresponds to the parallel output port of address DA, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 and various solenoids via the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 (FIG. 257). FIG. 339 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. The SPI communication B buffer register has 16 bits, and ports for outputting external information (PB0 to PB7) and ports for outputting data (drive signals) to the solenoids (PA0 to PA7) each consist of 8 bits.

Signals output from the external information output port include a security signal, a ball payout signal, and the like. Various signals output from the external terminal board 784 are detected by the hall computer. The hall computer accumulates signals received from each gaming machine, and monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machines, gaming information, etc.

To further explain the ports that output drive signals to the solenoids, as shown in FIG. 339, output port PA1 corresponds to solenoid 1, output port PA2 corresponds to solenoid 2, and output port PA3 corresponds to solenoid 3. In this embodiment, other ports are not used, and the number of output ports increases or decreases depending on the model. The solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the big prize opening, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, the second upper big winning hole 2006a and the second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow. The ports are the output destinations of the solenoid drive signals.

Furthermore, although each solenoid is associated with (connected to) one output port, it may be configured with a plurality of bit outputs (for example, 2-bit output). For example, output ports PA0 and PA1 are solenoids that open and close the first big prize opening 2005, output ports PA2 and PA3 are solenoids that open and close the second big winning opening 2006a, and output ports PA4 and PA5 are solenoids that open and close the second big winning opening 2006b. It may also be configured to correspond to (connect to) a solenoid that opens and closes. In this way, by bundling a plurality of output ports (output terminals) and outputting a drive current connected to one solenoid, it is possible to prevent a shortage of drive current and reliably drive the solenoid. On the other hand, when outputting a drive signal from one output port (output terminal), the drive signal may be amplified by an amplifier circuit arranged on the main control board 1310 or the relay board.

Returning to the explanation of the program code for the process when the game is stopped in FIG. 331, when the SPI communication B buffer register is set in the E register and the output destination by SPI communication is specified, the main control MPU 1311 performs the SPI 2-byte output process. (SPI_TX__WA) is called by the INVD command to start SPI communication. SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) is called in each processing of setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY), output data setting processing (PORT_SET), and LED_DISPLAY (display LED output processing) in addition to the game stop processing (Play_Stop). This is a process that is called when communication (SPI communication) is executed.

Next, details of the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) will be described with reference to FIG. 324. When the SPI 2-byte output process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first outputs the contents of the W register to the SPI communication B buffer set in the E register (“OUT (E), W”). As described above, the W register stores the port output value created in the external output process (step P123) of the process when the game is stopped. Furthermore, the contents of the A register are loaded into the W register ("LD W, A"), and the contents of the W register are output to the SPI communication B buffer ("OUT (E), W"). Through the above processing, after setting the data for outputting external information, it is possible to set the data (drive signal) for the solenoid.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets definition information for performing SPI communication (“LDT HL, SPI_COMTX_B-_OFS_TP”). SPI_COMTX_B is a table in which setting data for outputting by SPI communication is defined (SPI common output setting data), and _OFS_TP is an initial value address of an area in which various tables are defined. The SPI common output setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 340.

FIG. 340 is a diagram showing an example of SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of this embodiment. In the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B), the number of data settings is defined first, and then it is defined that communication is possible for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB).

The number of data settings is the number of records defined in the table, and data for a total of two records is defined: setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA), and setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB). Therefore, the actual number of data settings is 2. In order to flexibly correspond to the table structure (increase/decrease in the number of records in the table), the value of the data setting number is calculated based on information such as the end address of the table.

SPI communication is started by writing the SPI communication enable bit to the SPI communication control register. The SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) defines setting data for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Each setting data defines a setting address of the SPI communication control register 1 and a setting value of the SPI communication enable bit. Specifically, for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), the setting address of SPI communication A control register 1 (_SPICNA1) and the setting value of SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB), and for SPI transmission (CHB), SPI communication B control These are the setting address of register 1 (_SPICNB1) and the setting value of SPI communication B enable bit (_SPI_SPENBB_PB). _SPI_SPENBA_PB is set with communication start information for slaves that execute communication in SPI transmission/reception (CHA). For example, when starting communication for all slaves 1 to 4, slave 1 to slave 1 to Since the lower 4 bits corresponding to slave 4 are "1", "0FH" ("00001111B") is set. Note that communication start information for a slave that executes communication in SPI transmission (CHB) is set in _SPI_SPENBB_PB.

Here, since the slave 4 is used as an input, there is no need to start communication with the slave 4 at the original output timing. However, even if the enable signal of the slave 4 is set to start communication, since there is no data for communication in the buffer of the slave 4, the communication of the slave 4 will not be started as a result. In this way, the reason why the slave enable signal that does not need to start communication is included and set to start communication is that the table can be used commonly during SPI communication. By doing so, it becomes possible to set the settings at the start of SPI communication and execute it with one table, thereby making it possible to reduce the program (data) capacity. Note that instead of enabling communication for all slaves, the table may be configured separately so that only slaves that require communication are enabled. By doing this, the program (data) capacity increases, but it is possible to avoid erroneous communication in a slave that does not originally need to communicate.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication by executing output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) according to the INVD command (“INVD_PORT_DAT_SET”). Further explanation will be given with reference to the program code shown in FIG. 319.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the number of data settings in the B register (“LD B, (HL+)”). The HL register stores a table "SPI_COMTX_B" (Figure 340) containing definition information of SPI communication in the SPI 2-byte output process which is the calling source of the output port data setting process, and the number of data settings defined initially is stored in the HL register. will be stored in the B register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication regarding SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Specifically, the address corresponding to the SPI communication A control register is set in the W register (“LD W, (HL+)”), and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit is set in the A register (“LD A, (HL+)”). Thereafter, by setting the SPI communication A enable bit in the SPI communication A control register, SPI communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is started ("OUT (W), A"). Furthermore, it is determined whether the loop for the number of data settings has been completed (“DJNZ P?ORTDAT_SET_1”), but since SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB) has not started, communication by SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and Similarly, after setting the SPI communication B enable bit in the SPI communication B control register, the output port data setting process ends.

Note that in the process of "LD B, (HL+)", the data at the address indicated by the HL register is loaded into the B register, and then the value of the HL register is incremented by +1. This eliminates the need to perform the process of incrementing the HL register by 1 (INC HL) when sequentially reading data at addresses indicated by the HL register, making it possible to compress the program capacity.

When the SPI communication process in step P124 ends, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Furthermore, output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data to the output port is executed (step P126). Finally, a performance display monitor process is executed to display various information regarding the game on the performance display monitor (step P127), and the process returns to the calling process (timer interrupt process).

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to execute SPI communication, the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) and output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) are called by the INVD command, so the SPI communication It has become possible to reduce the overhead for executing the process and speed up the processing.

[21-4. Control when receiving input signals in SPI communication]
Next, the configuration and procedure for receiving signals from various sensors and switches in SPI communication will be explained. First, a configuration for receiving input signals through SPI communication will be described. Note that the slave receiving the input signal corresponds to slave 4 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 335, and when applied to the specific configuration of this embodiment, corresponds to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. As shown in the main board mounting diagram of FIG. 334, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is actually composed of three ICs (1341a to 1341c).

[21-4-1. Configuration for receiving input signals via SPI communication]
FIG. 341 is a circuit diagram mainly showing the configuration for receiving signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from each switch and sensor through each connector at Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals. Further, the clock signal outputted from the SPICK terminal of the main control MPU 1311 serving as the master is input from the CK terminal. In addition, the signal output from SPITX of the main control MPU 1311 is not taken in, and when "0" data is output from SPITX, a LOW level signal is input to the CLR/LOAD terminal, and Q/D8~ A signal connected to the Q/D1 terminal is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. The specific data capture timing is based on the operation mode and is as described in FIG. 336 and the like.

The parallel signal input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314 is converted into a serial signal and input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311. The signals input to each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 are output in sequence (for example, in the order of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1314c, 1314b, and 1314a). The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314a outputs the converted signal from the Q8' terminal and inputs it to the SI terminal of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314b. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314b outputs the signals input to the Q/D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8' terminal, and then outputs the signals input to the SI terminal from the Q8' terminal. The signal output from the Q8' terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b is input to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c outputs the signals input to the Q/D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8C terminal, and then outputs the signals input to the SI terminal from the Q8C terminal. The signal output from the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c is input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311.

Next, signals input from various switches and sensors for each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 (1341a to 1341c) will be explained. In this embodiment, each parallel/serial conversion circuit (1341a to 1341c) is the same hardware.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314a receives input of signals outputted from the normal winning opening switches 1 to 3 and the big winning opening switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Furthermore, the signal output from the starting port switch 2 via the connector 13107 and from the starting port switch 1 via the connector 13108 are received. The signals input from each switch pass through an interface (IF) circuit 13105a before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a.

The interface circuit 13105a can detect disconnections, short circuits, power supply abnormalities, etc. with respect to input signals. If an abnormality is detected, an error signal is output from the E terminal. Further, the interface circuit 13105a receives input of a signal detected by the proximity sensor. The proximity sensor outputs a voltage of about 9 V when the sensor does not pass (when it is not detected), and outputs a voltage of about 0.8 V when the sensor passes the sensor. Therefore, inside the interface circuit 13105a, if the input signal is 0V, it is determined that there is a disconnection, and if the input signal is 12V, it is determined that there is a short circuit. Note that since the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b (described later) are directly connected by a wiring pattern, it is not possible to determine whether the abnormality is on the interface circuit 13105a side or the interface circuit 13105b side. It has become. This is because if an abnormality occurs in any sensor, it will hinder the progress of the game, so there is no need to detect the abnormality individually. Note that an abnormality may be detected individually for each interface circuit by connecting the E terminals of each interface circuit. The error signal is input from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 to the main control MPU 1311 like other input signals, and the main control MPU 1311 receives the error signal along with signals from various sensors during input processing, and the error signal indicates an error. If it is determined to be an error, a command is sent to the peripheral control board to notify the switch abnormality, and a switch abnormality occurs in the lamp (LED), audio, LCD display, etc. It is designed to notify you of what has happened.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b receives input signals outputted from the out switch and the safe switch via the connector 13104, and receives input signals outputted from the starting port switch 3 via the connector 13106. Further, through the connector 13101, input of signals outputted from a general-purpose input, an outlet switch, a specific area switch, a role-operated gate switch, and a general-purpose gate switch is accepted. The signals input from each switch pass through an interface (IF) circuit 13105b before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The interface circuit 13105b has the same function as the interface circuit 13105a, and receives input of a signal detected by the proximity sensor. As described above, the wiring from the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b is connected to the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a, and is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1314c receives input signals output from the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection switch, the specific area tamper prevention switch, and the starting port tamper prevention switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314c receives an error signal (SW-E) input from the E terminals of the interface circuit 13105a and the interface circuit 13105b. The specific area tamper prevention switch and the starting port tamper prevention switches 1 to 3 are phototype sensors, which output a voltage of 12V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected), and output a voltage of 0V when the sensor passes. In addition, although the vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection switch are not photo-type sensors, they similarly output a voltage of 12V when no vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected (when no vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected). When detected (at the time of detection), a voltage of 0V is output. Note that the voltages during detection and non-detection may be reversed, and a voltage of 0V may be output during non-detection and 12V during detection. Unlike a proximity sensor, since the voltage at ON/OFF is different, the transistor 13109 converts it to 5V and outputs a signal without going through an interface circuit. The transistor 13109 used at this time has a built-in removal circuit (resistance) in the input stage of the transistor to prevent false detection due to noise or the like during signal input.

Note that a pull-up resistor 13109b is connected between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314. In addition to the pull-up resistor 13109b, a capacitor 13109c is connected between GND and the signal line for noise removal. Further, a pull-up resistor 13109d is connected between the connector 13101, the interface circuit 13105, and the transistor 13109a. These pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, interface circuit 13105, and transistor 13109a are placed relatively close to the connector 13101, while the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 does not need to be placed near the connector 13101. . That is, the electronic components placed near the connector 13101 include certain circuits (pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, an interface circuit 13105 and a transistor 13109a). This is because the outputs from the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a have high drive ability and are not easily affected by noise even if the distance between them and the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314 is large. In addition, when receiving signals from outside the main control board 1310, the interface circuit 13105, the transistor 13109a, and the Electronic components to be connected, such as pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d) and capacitor 13109c, must be placed near the connector.

[21-4-2. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (switch input processing)]
Next, a procedure for inputting data input from various switches provided in the gaming machine to the main control MPU 1311 through serial communication (SPI communication) will be described. Specifically, the switch input process in step S74 in the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described. Regarding the switch input process, Fig. 288 describes the process of detecting winning of a game ball such as a starting hole and storing switch edge information in the prize ball determination area, but here, only the prize ball information will be described. First, a procedure for receiving input signals from various sensors and inputting the signals to the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be described.

FIG. 342 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input process procedure for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for switch input processing of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 342. Hereinafter, details of the switch input processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 342 and 343, and a procedure for receiving a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 through SPI communication will be shown. As described above, in this embodiment, the input signal is received using the third channel (slave 4, A3 channel) of SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Note that when explaining the processing of the program, "slave 4" will be explained as "A3 channel".

When the switch input process is started, the main control MPU 1311 sets dummy data for transmission (8 bytes) in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel (step P6001). Specifically, first, the start address of the SPI input setting data (see FIG. 344) is set in the HL register. At this time, by setting the sum of the test pointer address (fixed at 9000H; can be rewritten by program) + the value of the second operand in the HL register using the LDT instruction, the word length instruction (LD HL , SPI_SWRX_B), the word length can be set to 2 bytes, and the program capacity can be reduced. The value of the second operand is the difference value from the first data address of the data to be set, and by adding the value of the second operand to the value indicated by the test pointer, the first data address of the data to be set is set to the HL register (first operand ). As described above, in this embodiment, when receiving an input signal from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 (slave 4), control is performed to capture the input signal every time dummy data is transmitted. The dummy data set at the time of data reception is defined in the SPI input setting data, and the contents of the SPI input setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 344.

FIG. 344 is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) when starting reception of an input signal through SPI communication according to the present embodiment. In the SPI input setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, followed by an address of a transmission (communication) buffer and transmission data (dummy data) to be stored in the transmission buffer. In the example shown in FIG. 344, dummy data is set in the transmission (communication) buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel. At this time, the 1st and 5th bytes of transmission data are used as input signal load data (latch data; SPI reception LOAD signal (_SPI_LOAD_SIG=FEH)), and other (2nd to 4th, 6th to 8th bytes) The transmission data is dummy data (SPI general-purpose reception signal (SPI_COMM_SIG=FFH)). This is because the input port of the switch is allocated for 3 bytes, and the same amount of data to be transmitted is required. One set consists of a total of 4 bytes of data, including 1 byte of load signal and 3 bytes of dummy data. In this embodiment, the 8th bit of the load data is set to "0", but as will be described later, the load data is discarded without being captured, so instead of limiting it to the 8th bit, for example, the 1st bit is set to "0". may be set to "0". Furthermore, instead of outputting the load signal through serial communication, the load signal may be output from the input/output port.

In the case of a configuration in which load data is transmitted via serial communication, hardware such as the wiring pattern for outputting the load signal, the configuration for noise removal, and the arrangement of the input/output ports is more important than in the case of outputting the load signal from the input/output port. It is possible to reduce the cost of hardware (circuit) and the cost of software such as processing of a program for turning ON/OFF a load signal. On the other hand, when outputting a load signal from an input/output port, there is no need to send the load data, and there is no need to discard the data captured at the timing of the load data without sending the load data. Processing can be simplified. Note that when outputting data through SPI communication, "0" data (LOW level signal) may be output as the SPITX signal, and in that case, the input signal is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341. However, since the A3 channel transmission buffer is empty, SPI communication on the A3 channel will not start, so it is imported into the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341 at this timing. Since the signal is updated when the load signal is output during input processing, it is eventually discarded.

In the SPI communication of this embodiment, in order to prevent the game from proceeding with incorrect data due to the influence of noise, the signals input from switches etc. are read twice, and if they match, normal communication is performed. We aim to improve communication accuracy by determining that this is true. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two sets of 4-byte data (total 8 bytes), including a 1-byte load signal and 3-byte dummy transmission data, are transmitted, and the two sets of received data are compared. to determine whether communication was performed normally. Note that the first and fifth bytes of the transmission data are used as load signals, and therefore are not taken in as input signals during transmission, and the input data becomes invalid data. In addition, the input signals taken in when transmitting the 2nd byte and 6th byte, the 3rd byte and 7th byte, and the 4th byte and 8th byte correspond, and communication occurs when the corresponding input signals match. (Read twice) Create edge data as a success and control the game.

When the SPI input setting data is set in the HL register, the main control MPU 1311 executes output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) using an INVD command. As a result, 8 bytes of transmission data defined in the SPI input setting data is set in the A3 channel communication buffer, and then the enable of all slaves used for communication of CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to 1. By setting this, 8 bytes of dummy data stored in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel is transmitted.

Note that if you want to start communication only with a specific slave, such as only communicating with slave 4 for input, separate processing and setting data will be required, but if you want to start communication with all slaves. By configuring this, it becomes possible to standardize processing and data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a monitoring time until the SPI communication is completed (step P6002). If the communication is not completed by the set start time, it is determined that the communication has failed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether communication is in progress (communication is continuing) (step P6003). Specifically, first, the value set in the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) control register 2 (SPICNA1; SPI communication A control register 1; see FIG. 339(B)) is stored in the A register. Then, referring to the enable bit from the value stored in the A register, it is determined whether or not communication is in progress. If communication is in progress (result of step P6003 is "YES"), the process waits until communication is completed or the monitoring time elapses (step S6004).

If the monitoring time has elapsed while the A3 channel is in communication (the result of step P6004 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 initializes the communication circuit (step P6005). Furthermore, instead of the input data, communication error data is set in a predetermined register, which will be described later (step P6006). Thereafter, by executing the processing from step P6008 onward, control is performed so that edge data in which the signal changes from OFF to ON (the switch is not determined to be ON) is not created.

Here, the initialization settings in step P6005 will be explained. FIG. 345 is an example of a program code of setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) when initializing the communication circuit for SPI communication of this embodiment. In the SPI restart setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, followed by setting data for initializing the communication circuit. First, by setting "00000001B" in the control register 1 (SPICN0) for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), "1" is set in SPRSTA, and the communication circuit is initialized. The setting values of the control register 1 for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) are as described with reference to FIG. 337. Furthermore, the bit shift settings of slave 1, slave 3, and slave 4 are set to "1" (LSB first), and the operation mode is set to "0" (mode 0). Furthermore, the borlets of slave 1 (_SPIPSA0), slave 2 (_SPIPSA1), and slave 4 (_SPIPSA3) are set. Note that slave 3 (A2 channel) is not used, so no particular settings are made.

The "communication error data" set in step P6006 is set to "FFH" (when the input signal is OFF) so that the edge data is not set when creating edge data that changes from OFF to ON in the process of step P6008. (same value as the value of ). In this embodiment, since it is determined that the signal is ON when all the signals are Low, the communication abnormality data is the same "FFH" so that all the signals are High. Therefore, for example, if it is determined to be ON when the input signal is High, the communication abnormality data to be set will be "00H" instead of "FFH".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 is not communicating (when the communication of dummy data is completed) (the result of step P6003 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 sends the input data taken in with the transmission of the dummy data from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. It is taken in as input data and set in a predetermined register (step P6007). To explain the process of step P6007 in detail, as mentioned above, data is fetched by fetching 8 bytes of data ((load data + dummy data x 3) x 2 times = 8 bytes) from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. Do the following. First, the first byte of data is fetched, but this fetched data is discarded because it is invalid data that was fetched with the load data transmission, and the second byte and third byte of data are stored in pair registers (2 It is temporarily stored in the WA register (which can be used as a byte register), and then moved to the BC register. Furthermore, the data from the 4th to 6th bytes is taken in. As mentioned above, the data of the 5th byte is discarded because it is invalid data taken in with the transmission of the load data, the data taken in the 4th byte and the data of the 6th byte are temporarily stored in the WA register, and then Move to DE register. Finally, the 7th byte of fetched data and the 8th byte of data are respectively stored in the WA register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates edge data from the input data stored in a predetermined register (step P6008). In the process of step P6008, edge data is created based on the data taken into each register, regardless of whether the communication has been completed normally. This is because if a communication error occurs, "communication error data" is set in a predetermined register in the process of step P6006, so edge data that input data is taken in (changes from OFF to ON) is not created. . As a result, even if the communication is abnormal, edge data is created by the same processing as when the communication is normal, and the control structure of the program can be simplified.

To specifically explain the process of step P6008, first, the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged, and the start address of the SPI switch input information data is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, three types of SPI switch input information data 1, SPI switch input information data 2, and SPI switch input information data 3 are defined, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 346.

FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data of this embodiment. The SPI switch input information data is composed of adjustment data, mask data, and level area address.

The adjustment data is defined as a 1-byte bit string, and is data for adjusting input data. The adjustment data is for making it 1 when the captured input signal is ON. In FIG. 346, since the adjustment data is "00h", when the fetched value is "1", it is turned ON and the level data of the switch becomes "1". On the other hand, if it is "0", it is OFF and the level data of the switch becomes "0".

Like the adjustment data, the mask data is defined by a bit string of 1 byte, and is data for specifying data to be compared as necessary. By configuring mask data with bits used as input signals as “1” and unused bits as “0,” even if unused input bits are accidentally turned ON (“1”), they can be turned OFF by the mask data. (“0”).

The level area address is the address of an area that stores level data created from input data. Note that the edge data is stored after the level data is stored, so by making the area where the edge data is stored continuous with the area where the level data is stored, the edge data can be added to the SPI switch input information data. There is no setting for the address to store the . Further, the areas for storing level data and edge data have the same configuration. Note that if the area for storing level data and the area for storing edge data are not stored in consecutive areas, it is sufficient to set (maintain) the area for storing edge data. In this case, if the upper byte of the address of the area storing level data and the area storing edge data is fixed (common), setting only the lower byte of the address is better than keeping the address of each area as it is. Data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 347 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an area for storing level data and edge data of this embodiment. Referring to FIG. 347, the level area address of SPI switch input information data 1 is "0006h", the first bit (BIT0) is starting port SW (switch) 1, and the second bit (BIT1) is starting port SW2, 3. The bit 2 (BIT2) is the big winning slot SW1, the 4th bit (BIT3) is the big winning slot SW2, the 5th bit (BIT4) is the big winning slot SW3, the 6th bit (BIT5) is the normal winning slot SW1, and the 7th bit is the big winning slot SW1. (BIT6) is the normal winning slot SW2, and the 8th bit (BIT7) is the normal winning slot SW3. The area (edge area address) for storing edge data corresponding to SPI switch input information data 1 is "0007h", and is continuous with the area for storing level data. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to reduce the capacity of programs and data because there is no need to redefine the area for storing edge data, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of programs and data when reading data, since it is only necessary to read continuous areas. It is possible to improve processing efficiency while simplifying the process.

Here, we return to the explanation of the process of step P6008 in FIG. 342 (FIG. 343). After setting the SPI switch input information data in the HL register, the input data is checked and SPI twice read processing (TWICE_SPI) is executed to create level data and edge data. Details of the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 and 349.

FIG. 348 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 348.

When the SPI double read process is started, the main control MPU 1311 saves the value of the DE register to the stack area because the DE register may be used in subsequent processes (step P6101). Next, the level area address is specified from the address of the SPI switch input information data stored in the HL register that stores the level data, and is stored in the index register (step P6102). After level data and edge data are created by a level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) to be described later, the created data is stored based on the address stored in the index register. Further, after the processing in step P6102, the value of the HL register is subtracted and adjusted for subsequent processing. The level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) is called not only for input through SPI communication but also for creating edge data of a general-purpose IO switch (input signal from a parallel port) that does not rely on SPI communication. At this time, since there is more switch input information data for inputting signals from the general-purpose IO switch than for SPI communication, the address of the switch input information data is adjusted by subtracting the value of the HL register ("DEC HL"). are doing. Data not included in the switch input information data for SPI communication is, for example, the number of times data is read and the address of the input port.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the input data read twice match (whether the data to be compared match) (step S6103). The data to be compared is stored in the W register and the A register, and is compared by the CP instruction. As mentioned above, immediately after the input data is fetched from the communication buffer, the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 6th, 7th, and 8th captured input data are stored in the B, C, D, E, W, and A registers (predetermined registers). However, before the first SPI read process is executed, the values of the W register and D register are exchanged, so the 4th imported data and the 8th imported data are will be compared. From then on, when the SPI double read process is executed, the target data is changed by exchanging the values of the registers in which the data to be compared is stored in the calling process (switch input process) as necessary. It becomes possible to execute the process without being aware of the number of bytes of the data, and the SPI twice reading process (TWICE_SPI) can be made into a highly versatile process.

If the input data read twice do not match (the result of step P6103 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 stores "00H" as edge data in the edge data area (step P6105). Furthermore, the saved DE register is returned from the stack area (step P6106), and this processing is ended.

If the input data read twice match (the result of step P6103 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes level/edge data creation processing (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS command (step P6104), Create level data and edge data corresponding to the input data. The level/edge data creation process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 350 and 351.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the procedure of level/edge data creation processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for the level/edge data creation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 350.

The main control MPU 1311 first creates level data from input data based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the switch input information table (step P6201). Specifically, for the input data stored in the A register, the value of each bit is adjusted based on the adjustment data so that when the input signal taken in is ON, it becomes "1" and when it is OFF, it becomes "0". . Furthermore, level data is created so that bits other than the bits used as input signals are not set to ON (“1”) by mask data. Furthermore, the calculated level data is saved in the E register.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the level data at the time of the previous interrupt and the XOR value (intermediate data) (step P6203). As a result, 1 is set only in the case of an ON or OFF edge. Next, the main control MPU 1311 stores (updates) the current level data in the level data area (address stored in the index register) (step P6204). Furthermore, the AND value of the intermediate data (value of the A register) and the level data created by the current interrupt is calculated to create edge data (step P6205). At this time, "1" is stored if it is an ON edge, and 0 is stored otherwise. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 stores the edge data stored in the A register in the edge data area (an area continuous with the level data area) (step P6206).

After creating the level data and edge data, the main control MPU 1311 returns the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106) and ends this process.

Now, returning to the switch input processing in FIG. 342 (FIG. 343), the processing after step P6008 will be explained. When the creation and storage of the level data and edge data of the first input data is completed, the main control MPU 1311 exchanges the values of the C register and the E register, and stores the value of the DE register in the WA register. By exchanging the values of the C register and the E register, the DE register stores the seventh input data and the third input data, and by storing this in the WA register. Level data and edge data of the input data are created by comparing the seventh input data and the third input data. The subsequent processing is the same as the first procedure for processing the fourth input data and the eighth input data. Furthermore, the second input data imported and the sixth input data imported are stored in the BC address, and by storing this in the WA register and processing it in the same way, 3 bytes of input data can be processed. This completes the capture of the signal input from the serial port.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 takes in the data input from the parallel port, calls the level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) with the INVS command, and creates edge data of the input signal taken in by the parallel port (step P6009). This process ends.

[21-4-3. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (time chart)]
The procedure for receiving input signals through SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above with reference to the flowchart and program code. Next, the process of receiving input signals through SPI communication will be described in chronological order with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 352 and 353.

FIG. 352 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the start of switch input processing to the completion of data transmission by SPI communication in this embodiment. FIG. 353 is a time chart showing in chronological order the process from the completion of data transmission through SPI communication to the start of switch input processing at the next timer interrupt in the switch input processing of this embodiment.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 is executed. As mentioned above, the timer interrupt interval (CTC setting) is set during the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, and can be set to any value such as "0000h" to "FFFFh", as well as a fixed value (1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 1,489ms). Further, the CTC can be set to any fixed value, and among the arbitrary fixed values, the first setting, the second setting, and the third setting are set in a multiple relationship, and the fourth setting is the first setting to the third setting. It has a function that allows settings that are not a multiple of the 3 settings. In this embodiment, by setting the third setting value, a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms. The timer interrupt is not limited to the third setting value, and the timer interrupt may be generated at any of the first setting value, second setting value, and fourth setting value. , the output of the output signal, the timekeeping update reference time, the random number update period, etc.), the values are set to be appropriate as the specifications of the gaming machine. In particular, sampling of input signal capture is important, and the period of the timer interrupt is set in correspondence with the pulse width of the ON signal output when the switch detects passage of a game ball. When the switch detects the passing of a game ball, the pulse width changes depending on the falling speed, and the faster the falling speed, the shorter the pulse width becomes. Therefore, the shorter the pulse width (the faster the falling speed), the shorter the sampling period needs to be. Note that if the sampling period is too short, processing cannot be completed in one timer interrupt period, so the timer interrupt period is set according to the processing amount and the shortest pulse width from the switch.

When the switch input process is started, first, 8 bytes of dummy transmission data is set in the communication buffer for the A3 channel (SPIBFA3) using the SPI input setting data (SPI_SWRX_B; Figure 344) (step P6001). . As mentioned above, the transmission data includes a latch load signal (“FEH”; _SPI_LOAD_SIG) in the 1st and 5th bytes, and dummy data (“FFH”; _SPI_COMM_SIG) in the 2nd to 4th bytes and 6th to 8th bytes. ) is set. Note that the value of the dummy data is not limited to "FFH" but may be any value.

At the start of SPI communication, the enable terminal (SPENBA3) is updated from OFF (“0”) to ON (“1”), and a clock signal is output from the clock terminal (SPICK) at predetermined intervals. Then, a load signal is output from the transmission terminal (SPITX) of the main control MPU 1311. At this time, the load signal has no corresponding input data and is ignored on the receiving side, so the state of the receiving terminal (SPIRX) is undefined.

When the load signal is received, it changes from ON (“1”) to OFF (“0”) at the 8th clock signal, and this changed signal is input to the LOAD terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. The input signal for bytes is latched by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, and the main control MPU 1311 sequentially receives the input data from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 as a serial signal from the receiving terminal SPIRX. Specifically, when transmitting the second byte of transmission data, the first byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341c. Subsequently, when the third byte of the transmission data is transmitted, the second byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341b, and finally, when the fourth byte of the transmission data is transmitted, the input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341a. Receive byte-th input data. Subsequently, data for double reading (checking) (second time) is received. Similar to the first data reception, the load signal is output first, and after 3 bytes of input signals are latched into the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341, the 4th to 6th bytes of input data are converted to 6 to 8 bytes. The data is sequentially received from the reception terminal (SPIRX) in accordance with the transmission timing of the second transmission data, and then the data transmission ends. At this time, the reception status of the A3 channel is set to reception (“1”), and the slave 4 enable (SPENBA3) of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) changes from communication in progress (“1”) to communication end ( is updated to “0”).

When receiving the next data, the main control MPU 1311 confirms that the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB) has reached the end of communication (“0”) and starts reading input data from the communication buffer (SPIBFA3). (from step P6007). At this time, a monitoring time is set, and if it is not confirmed that the communication has ended within the monitoring time, the SPI communication circuit is initialized (steps P6002 to P6005). Note that the contents of the communication buffer are cleared each time data is read out, and the buffer becomes empty when all data has been read out. Thereafter, setting dummy data to the communication buffer and receiving input data are repeated until the next timer interrupt process is started. When the next timer interrupt process is started, the switch input process is executed from the beginning.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce data wiring on the main control board 1310 by serial communication (SPI communication), and the degree of freedom in board design can be increased. Further, by employing SPI communication, although the number of wires is greater than that of I2C communication, the communication speed can be increased.

In this embodiment, electronic components are managed by making slaves (parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, etc.) controlled by the master (main control MPU 1311) exclusively for reception (input) or transmission (output). In addition to making it easier to arrange electronic components, the degree of freedom in arranging electronic components can be increased. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring distance between electronic components, making it easier to separate the wiring that outputs clock signals from the wiring that transmits and receives data, and stabilizes communication by eliminating the effects of noise and other factors. can.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 enables synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication as serial communication, and has a plurality of channels for synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication. The communication format of asynchronous serial communication is 8 bits. In asynchronous serial communication, each channel is fixed for either reception or transmission, and each channel is provided with a storage means (communication buffer) capable of storing communication data. Multiple types of communication buffer capacities can be defined; for example, among the communication buffers, the largest size (for example, 512 bytes) is used for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510, which has a large amount of data to be sent. do. On the other hand, a small size (for example, 128 bytes) is sufficient for sending commands to the payout control board, and a buffer that can be used for general purposes may be prepared. By performing asynchronous communication, data transmission and reception can be performed in parallel with other processing, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the entire processing.

[22. Switch related control]
The serial communication function (SPI communication) for inputting and outputting signals to the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. As described above, signals are input to the main control board 1310 by switches, sensors, etc. that detect winning of game balls. The input data (signal) is taken in by the switch input process (step P102) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329). Furthermore, if the game is possible, various processes based on the input signal are executed in the switch-related control process (step 01TKS0010 in FIG. 354; FIG. 357) included in the game-enabled process (step P108; FIG. 354).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, detection signals (detection signals) from various switches and sensors are input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 outputs commands to various control boards (for example, peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.) based on input signals, and controls driving bodies such as motors and solenoids, and light emitters such as LEDs. I do things. In this way, the input signals include many types of signals, from those related to the progress of the game to those for detecting fraud and abnormalities. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute processing corresponding to each signal, there is a possibility that the program for controlling the game becomes complicated or the program capacity increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine is provided that makes it possible to execute control corresponding to input signals using a general-purpose procedure by setting data related to control processing of input signals in a specific structure. This makes it possible to simplify game control, suppress an increase in program capacity, and improve development efficiency of gaming machines.

Hereinafter, a configuration for storing data necessary for switch-related control processing that performs processing based on signals and a procedure for controlling a game using these data will be explained.

[22-1. Processing when play is possible]
First, before explaining the switch-related control process, the game-enabled process that calls the switch-related control process will be explained. As described above, the game-enabled process is a process that is executed after the gaming machine is started up so that normal games can be played. Specifically, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329) is executed when the game is in a playable state and there is no cause for stopping the game (step P108). Below, an outline of the procedure for the game-enabled processing will be explained.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game-enabled processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing an example of a program code for the game-enabled processing of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 354.

When the game-enabled processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes switch-related control processing (step 01TKS0010). In the switch-related control processing, data is created based on signals input from various switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine, and processing corresponding to the input signals is executed. Details will be explained with reference to the figures after FIG. 357.

After the switch-related control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the probability variable area passing determination process (step 01TKS0020). In the probability variable area passing determination process, if the timer set in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step 01TKS0080) is valid, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variable area, and according to the determination result. This is the process of changing the probability state. Note that the effective timer is set in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step 01TKS0080) and updated at the next interrupt, but if this process is executed when the special symbol/special electric accessory control process is executed, the corresponding interrupt Since the switch input in is determined to have passed through the probability variable area, it is called at the time of starting the timer interrupt process (before executing the special symbol/special electric accessory control process).

After the variable probability region passing determination process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step 01TKS0030). In the timer update process, various timers necessary for the progress of the game are updated. These timers include 1-byte timers and 2-byte timers depending on the time to be measured.

After the timer update process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step 01TKS0040). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information. Furthermore, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. In addition, processes such as checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are executed.

After the prize ball control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step 01TKS0050). In the frame command reception process, the received command is stored as information to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 or the peripheral control board 1510, or a command is generated.

After the frame command reception process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraud detection process (step 01TKS0060). In the fraud detection process, abnormal states of prize balls, etc. are checked. For example, it includes a large winning opening winning abnormality detection process, a magnetic detection abnormality detection process, a random number abnormality detection process, a normal electric accessory winning abnormality detection process, and the like.

After the fraud detection process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the performance display monitor process (step 01TKS0070). The performance display monitor process is a process that displays various information. As mentioned above, processing directly related to game control is not executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the performance display monitor process is stored outside the usage area, and can be executed independently of the game control process by the INVI command.

After the performance display monitor process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step 01TKS0080). In the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, after each starting opening passage process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol/electric accessory operation number including the big winning opening opening process is called. After the special symbol/special electric accessory control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol/normal electric accessory control process (step 01TKS0090). The normal symbol/normal electric accessory control processing performs processing such as drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to open the second starting port 2004 when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003.

After the normal symbol/normal electric accessory control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the solenoid drive process (step 01TKS0100). In the solenoid drive process, an electrical drive source such as a solenoid is driven based on drive data. Note that in order to update the index register (IY register) during the process of executing the solenoid drive process, the index register is saved to the stack area before the solenoid drive process is executed, and restored from the stack area after the solenoid drive process is completed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step 01TKS0110), and outputs the output information set in each processing from the output terminals of various output ports. Thereafter, the game-enabled processing is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing while maintaining the interrupt state.

[22-2. Overview of switch-related control processing]
Next, an overview of the switch-related control processing will be explained. Some input signals among the signals input from various switches are stored in chronological order as history monitoring switch data. The history monitoring switch data includes a predetermined number of signals from the last input signal, and is configured such that when a new signal is input, the oldest signal is discarded. The main control MPU 1311 executes predetermined processing based on the history monitoring switch data. Some of these input signals include, for example, signals input from a contact detection sensor (touch sensor) or a firing stop switch (firing stop button).

Before explaining the switch-related control process, first, an overview of the configuration for receiving input signals output from various switches will be explained, and then a basic procedure of the switch-related control process will be explained. After that, detailed procedures for switch-related control processing and a structure for storing data used will be explained.

[22-2-1. Configuration for executing control based on input signals]
A configuration in which signals output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509 and the firing stop switch (firing stop button, stop button) are input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 will be described. FIG. 356 is an example of a circuit diagram excerpting the configuration up to inputting signals output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and firing stop switch (fire stop button) to the main control MPU 1311 in the game machine of this embodiment. FIG.

A contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and a firing stop switch (firing stop button) are included in a handle unit 500 provided in the main body frame 4. The contact detection sensor 509 is a sensor that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and when the handle lever 504 is touched, a game ball can be fired. The launch stop switch (launch stop button, stop button) detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. Detection signals from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the firing stop switch (fire stop button) are input to the firing control input circuit included in the payout control board 951, and then input to the firing timing control circuit. The signal input to the firing timing control circuit is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 via the connector 13104 of the main control board 1310.

[22-2-2. Overview of switch-related control processing procedures]
Next, an overview of the procedure of switch-related control processing will be explained. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the procedure of switch-related control processing according to this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the signal level from the area where the input signal is stored (input level data area), and executes the history monitoring switch data creation process for creating/updating the history monitoring switch data (step 01 TKS0110 ). As described above, the history monitoring switch data is data that holds a predetermined number of signal values input to the main control MPU 1311 in chronological order. For example, if the history monitoring switch data is 1 byte (=8 bits), the values of 8 input signals are stored. Details of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be described with reference to the drawings from FIG. 358 onwards. Objects for which history monitoring switch data is created include door open information and proximity switch error signals in addition to the touch sensor signal and firing stop switch described above.

After executing the history monitoring switch data creation process, the main control MPU 1311 executes a disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process (step 01TKS0120). In the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process, a proximity switch error signal is obtained from the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process, and it is determined whether an error has occurred. If an error occurs, a disconnection/short circuit abnormality command is sent.

After executing the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality determination process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the inoperable big winning hole prize ball prohibition process (Step 01TKS0130). The inoperable grand prize opening prize ball prohibition process determines whether winning in the grand prize opening is valid, and if valid, stores prize ball determination data in the prize ball determination area. Further, if the gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of big winning holes, the determination is made for all the big winning holes.

After executing the inoperable big winning hole prize ball prohibition process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (Step 01TKS0140). In the switch history command transmission determination process, a command is generated based on the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process. For example, by referring to the history monitoring switch data, if the signal value is determined to be ON, a command is transmitted.

In this embodiment, a set (series) of information for acquiring a signal to be determined (information for specifying an area in which the value of an input signal is stored), command information, and information for determining an input signal is provided. By structuring and defining the input signal as data, it is possible to process input signal determination and command generation in a general-purpose manner. The structure and specific example of data for executing the switch history command transmission determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. Further, the detailed procedure of the switch history command transmission determination process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368.

After executing the switch history command transmission determination process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process including the switch passage command transmission process and the safe switch abnormality determination process. The switch passing command transmission process generates a command for determining the winning of the winning opening. The procedure for generating commands can be executed by a common process regardless of the winning opening. In addition, the safe switch abnormality determination process counts the number of winnings according to the type of winning opening, and counts the number of safe balls (safe judgment count value) based on the presence or absence of prize balls. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the pitch count).

In addition, in the switch passing command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination processing, information for identifying the winning opening to be determined, command information, count information for counting the number of safe balls, etc. are structured and defined as a set of data. By doing so, it is possible to perform common processing regardless of the type of winning opening. The structure and specific example of data for executing the switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368. Further, the detailed procedure of the switch passing command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 369 to 372.

The overview of the switch-related control processing has been described above. Next, detailed procedures and data structures of each process constituting the switch-related control process will be explained.

[22-3. History monitoring switch data creation process]
When the switch-related control process is started, a history monitoring switch data creation process is executed to create history monitoring switch data from the received input signal. As described above, in the history monitoring switch data creation process, history monitoring switch data is created based on the history area creation data, which has a common data structure regardless of the type of signal. The configuration for creating history monitoring switch data will be described below. Specifically, first, the data structure of the history area creation data will be explained, and then the specific history area creation data will be explained. Next, detailed procedures of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be explained with reference to a flowchart and program code.

[22-3-1. History area creation data configuration]
FIG. 358 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of the history area creation data of this embodiment. The history area creation data is information for creating history monitoring switch data corresponding to the input signal. Specifically, for one type of input signal, the lower address of the reference destination (input level data area), the switch bit number, the lower address of the area for storing history monitoring switch data (input signal history area) (history management RWM (lower address) as one set. Since the capacity for storing each data is 1 byte, the history area creation data can be sequentially referenced by adding addresses by 1 from the start address (“XXXXh”) of the history area creation data. I can do it.

The lower address of the reference destination (input level data area) is the lower address of the area where the value of the signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 (history management switch input level data) is stored. Since the upper address is specified in advance, it is only necessary to specify the lower address, and thereby the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte. Note that instead of setting only the lower address, it may be set as 2-byte address data including the upper address.

The signals input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 are stored as 1-byte input level data by aggregating a plurality of predetermined types of signals. In this embodiment, since the input level data is composed of 1 byte (=8 bits), a maximum of 8 types of input signals are assigned to one input level data. The switch bit number is information for specifying which bit of the input level data the signal for which history monitoring switch data is to be created corresponds. The switch bit number is set to a value of 0 to 7. The specific configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. 363.

The signals constituting the input level data are signals taken in from the input port of the main control MPU 1311 through serial communication or parallel communication. For example, the proximity switch error signal is captured by SPI communication (serial communication). For the proximity switch error signal input to the main control MPU 1311, level data is generated based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the SPI switch input information data (FIG. 346), and is stored in "INPUT_LEV3".

In the area where history monitoring switch data is stored (input signal history area), the upper address is specified in advance, similar to the input signal reference destination (input level data area), so only the lower address needs to be specified. Thereby, the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte.

Next, a specific example of history area creation data will be explained. FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of history area creation data of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the input signals for which history monitoring switch data is created include a door open information signal, a touch sensor signal, a firing stop switch, and a proximity switch error signal. Here, history area creation data for a firing stop switch will be explained as an example.

The input signal of the firing stop switch is stored in the input level data "INPUT_LEV4", and the lower address (".LOW.INPUT_LEV4") of the storage location of "INPUT_LEV4" is set as the reference destination (input level data area). (history management switch input level data lower address).

Here, the area where input level data is stored will be explained. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing the configuration of an area that stores signals for which history monitoring switch data is to be created, among areas (data areas) that store signals input to the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. The frame opening information signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV5", and since the address is "000Eh", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Eh". Similarly, the touch sensor signal and the firing stop switch signal are stored in "INPUT_LEV4", and since the address is "000Ch", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Ch". Further, since the proximity switch error signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV3" and the address is "000Ah", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Ah".

The corresponding switch bit number “_DOOR_SW_BIT” of the frame opening information signal is set to “5”, and the value of the 5th bit of “INPUT_LEV5” is specified. In "INPUT_LEV5", a "frame opening information signal" is stored in the fifth bit, and the other bits are unused.

Similarly, the corresponding switch bit number “_HASSYA_TCH_BIT” of the touch sensor signal is set to “2”, and the value of the second bit of “INPUT_LEV4” is specified. “INPUT_LEV4” is the “setting key switch” in the 0th bit, the “payer ACK input signal” in the 1st bit, the “touch sensor signal” in the 2nd bit, the “fire stop switch signal” in the 3rd bit, and 4 bits. The "main RWM erase/setting change signal" is stored in the second bit, and the 5th to 7th bits are unused. Further, the corresponding switch bit number “_HASSYA_STP_BIT” of the emission stop switch signal is set to “3”, and the value of the third bit of “INPUT_LEV4” is specified.

Furthermore, the corresponding switch bit number "_SW_ERR1_BIT" of the proximity switch error signal is set to "6", and the value of the 6th bit of "INPUT_LEV3" is specified. In "INPUT_LEV3", a "magnetic detection switch" is stored in the 4th bit, a "proximity switch error signal" is stored in the 6th bit, and the other bits are unused.

As described above, the input of the frame opening information signal can be specified by the history management switch input level data lower address and the corresponding switch bit number.

Returning to the explanation of the history area creation data in FIG. 359. The address of the area where the history monitoring switch data of the firing stop switch is stored (firing stop switch signal history area "HS_STP_HIST") is, for example, "002Ch". At this time, "2Ch", which is the lower address (".LOW.HS_STP_HIST") of the firing stop switch signal history area, is used as the lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the area for storing history monitoring switch data (input signal history area). “ is set.

At the end of the area where the history area creation data is defined, the number of history monitoring switches (“_HIST_SW_CNT”), which is the number of switches targeted for the history area creation data, is defined. Specifically, it is the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes from the address of the start area of the history area creation data to the address where the number of history monitoring switches is stored by three. Since the history area creation data is composed of three types of 1-byte data for each switch, it can be defined without directly storing numerical values. By defining in this way, even if the number of monitored switches increases or decreases, it is possible to handle this without changing the program, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of program malfunctions such as bugs occurring.

In addition, in the above example, data for creating history monitoring switch data was explained for the door open information signal, touch sensor signal, firing stop switch, and proximity switch error signal, but not only these signals but also other signals can be used. It may also be managed using history monitoring switch data. For example, a signal from a position sensor of an accessory (driving body) controlled by the main control board 1310 may be managed using history monitoring switch data to determine whether the accessory has returned to its normal position. Furthermore, switches and sensors such as gate switches that are determined based only on ON/OFF switching of input signals may also be managed using history monitoring switch data.

[22-3-2. Procedure for creating history monitoring switch data]
In the history monitoring switch data creation process, history monitoring switch data of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is created based on the information defined in the history area creation data. Hereinafter, the procedure of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be explained with reference to the history monitoring switch data creation process flowchart and the program code.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the procedure of history monitoring switch data creation processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 362 is an example of a program code for the history monitoring switch data creation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 361.

When the history monitoring switch data creation process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the start address of the history area creation data (FIG. 359) (step 01TKS1010). The start address of the history area creation data is set in the HL register. At this time, by setting the difference value from the first data address of the history area creation data in the second operand of the LDT command and executing it, similar to the procedure for setting the first address of the SPI input setting data in the switch input process. , which would normally be a 3-byte word length instruction, can be made to have a 2-byte word length, making it possible to reduce the program capacity.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of history monitoring switches (“_HIST_SW_CNT”) as the number of repetitions of the history monitoring switch data creation process (Step 01TKS1020). The number of history monitoring switches is stored in the B register, for example. When the address setting of the history area creation data and the setting of the number of history monitoring switches are completed and the preparation for creating history monitoring switch data is completed, the history monitoring switch data for the number of history monitoring switches is created, and each switch (input signal) Create (update) the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area corresponding to .

The main control MPU 1311 acquires the address of the area (input level data area) in which the input signal for which history monitoring switch data is to be created (step 01TKS1030). Specifically, from the value of the history management switch input level data lower address (for example, the value of ".LOW.INPUT_LEV4"), the area where the input signal is stored (input level data area, specifically "INPUT_LEV4") The address is obtained and stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, DE register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates and updates history monitoring switch data based on the input level data area specified in the process of step 01TKS1030.

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the corresponding switch bit number and stores it in a predetermined storage area (eg, A register) (Step 01TKS104). Note that the corresponding switch bit number is set to a value in the range of 0 to 7.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the input signal for which history monitoring switch data is to be created from the bit corresponding to the corresponding switch bit number, and stores it in a predetermined storage area (Step 01TKS1050). At this time, the predetermined storage area may be a register or a temporary area allocated to RAM. Since the value of the signal is binary, ON (“1”) or OFF (“0”), in this embodiment, of the data at the address indicated by the DE register, the information of the bit indicated by the A register is transferred to the CF (carry). flag) is set. For example, in the case of a door open information signal, bit information (5) of “_DOOR_SW_BIT” of “INPUT_LEV5” is acquired, and if the 5th bit of “INPUT_LEV5” is “1”, “1” (carry flag) is "0", the CF (carry flag) is set to "0". In this way, a series of processes from acquiring arbitrary bit information from a specific address to setting the acquired information to a CF (carry flag) can be executed with one instruction. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program capacity. Note that the specific configuration will be further explained with reference to FIG. 363.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets an area (input signal history area) for storing the history monitoring switch data (step 01TKS1060), and specifies the history monitoring switch data to be updated. Specifically, through the process of step 01TKS1060, the contents stored in the DE register are updated from the address of the input level data area to the address of the history monitoring switch data (history management RWM address).

The main control MPU 1311 updates the specified history monitoring switch data to be updated based on the value of the newly acquired input signal (Step 01TKS1070). As described above, the history monitoring switch data of this embodiment is 1 byte (=8 bits), and can store the history of eight input signals. The specific process of updating the history monitoring switch data is to shift the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area to the left by 1 bit using the ROLC command, and update the input signal value obtained in the process of step 01TKS1050. The value of the carry flag (CF) in which is stored is set to bit 0. By implementing in this way, it is possible to simplify the program code, and it is possible to suppress an increase in program capacity. Further, the ROLC command is a 2-byte word length command, and the word length is shorter than when calculating history monitoring switch data before updating, so that processing speed can be increased.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the processes from step 01TKS1030 to step 01TKS1070 for all input signals for which history monitoring switch data is to be created (step 01TKS1080). After the creation of the history monitoring switch data is completed (the result of step 01TKS1080 is "YES"), this process ends.

With the above configuration, it is possible to create history monitoring switch data using a common procedure regardless of the type of signal, simplifying game control and reducing program capacity. .

[22-3-3. History monitoring switch data creation flow (summary)]
The procedure for creating history monitoring switch data has been described above, but here, the explanation will focus on the flow of data until the input signal is reflected in the history monitoring switch data. FIG. 363 is a diagram for explaining the process of creating history monitoring switch data according to this embodiment, and shows the process until a touch sensor signal is reflected in the history monitoring switch data.

The top row of FIG. 363 shows a timing chart showing changes in the touch sensor signal input from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509, with time elapsed from left to right. In this embodiment, the touch sensor signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 is periodically fetched at predetermined intervals. The predetermined interval (sampling period) is the timer interrupt period (4 milliseconds). In Figure 363, the touch sensor signals are captured in the order of "1" → "1" → "1" → "0" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1", and a new touch This shows a state in which the sensor signal "1" is captured. The captured touch sensor signal is converted as necessary and stored in BIT2 of the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" (address "000Ch") as shown in FIG. 360.

When the switch-related control process (history monitoring switch data creation process) is executed and the history monitoring switch data of the touch sensor signal is updated, first, the input level data stored in the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" is subjected to history management. Obtain as switch input level data. In the state before the update, the history management switch input level data is "0000110" and the corresponding switch bit number corresponding to the touch sensor signal is "2" (Figure 359), so the input stored in BIT2 Acquire the signal "1" and temporarily store it in the carry flag.

The program code for acquiring the value of the bit specified by the corresponding switch bit number from the input level area to be referenced can be realized with a single instruction "LD CF, (DE).A" as shown in FIG. 362. It is possible. The DE register stores the address of the input level area to be referenced, and the A register stores the value corresponding to the corresponding switch bit number. The above instruction stores in the carry flag (CF) a value obtained based on the value specified in the A register from the value stored in the input level area indicated by the DE register.

Further, history monitoring switch data is acquired based on the history monitoring switch data storage destination (HS_TCH_HIST) lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the history area creation data of the touch sensor signal. In the history monitoring switch data, input signals are stored from BIT0 to BIT7 in order of newest, and from the above timing chart, the history monitoring switch data storage destination is "11101111".

To update the history monitoring switch data, the values from BIT0 to BIT6 are shifted from BIT1 to BIT7. Further, the input signal stored in the carry flag is stored in BIT0. The program code for updating the history monitoring switch data can be implemented with a single command "ROLC (DE)" as shown in FIG. 362. The ROLC instruction shifts (rotates) a specified value one bit at a time to the left and stores the value of the carry flag (CF) in BIT0. An SLA instruction (shift instruction) may be used instead of the ROLC instruction. By executing the "ROLC (DE)" instruction, new history monitoring switch data that is shifted to the left by one bit is updated to the value of the history management RWM address indicated by the DE register.

[22-4. Switch history command transmission judgment processing]
When the inoperable big winning hole prize ball prohibition process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01TKS0140). As mentioned above, in the switch history command transmission determination process, it is determined whether or not to transmit a command based on the switch history command transmission determination data and the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process, and the determination result is Send the command defined according to the .

To determine whether or not to send a command, a change in the input signal is detected from the history monitoring switch data, and if a change is detected, it is determined to send the corresponding command. For example, the history monitoring switch data of this embodiment stores the history of input signals for a predetermined number of times (eight times in this embodiment), so the value of the last input signal and the value of the latest input signal are stored. It can be determined that the input signal has changed if the values are different.

A configuration for determining command transmission based on history monitoring switch data will be described below. First, the data structure of switch history command transmission determination data for processing a plurality of types of input signals in a general manner will be described, and then specific switch history command transmission determination data will be described. Next, detailed procedures of the switch history command transmission determination process will be described with reference to a flowchart and program code.

[22-4-1. Configuration of switch history command transmission judgment data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to determine whether or not to transmit a command based on an input signal by common processing for multiple types of input signals, a common data structure is used for each command to be transmitted. The judgment data (command transmission judgment target data) is defined.

The individual data of the command transmission determination target data includes a detection target history monitoring switch data address (lower address), a transmission command value, a detection mask value, and a detection determination value. In addition to this, the number of data for one set (one block) of switch history command transmission determination data (the number of data for one block of switch input data) is defined, and the number of data for one block of switch input data is five in this embodiment. Further, a command transmission determination target number m, which is the total number of defined switch history command transmission determination data, is defined. Note that the setting order of each data is not limited to this. For example, the number m of command transmission determination targets may be defined at the beginning of the switch history command transmission determination data, and the order of individual data of the command transmission determination target data may not be in the same order as in the above example.

The detection target history monitoring switch data address is the address of the area in which the history monitoring switch data created by the history monitoring switch data creation process is stored. Since the upper address of the area for storing the monitoring switch data has been specified in advance, it is only necessary to specify the lower address. Thereby, the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte. The transmission command value is a value corresponding to the command to be transmitted, and is composed of 2 bytes. This is because the packet that sends the command is 2 bytes, and if the packet that sends the command is 3 bytes, it will be updated with 3 bytes, and a different size will be set depending on the command size for one packet. do.

The detection mask value is a value for extracting data necessary for determining whether or not to send a command from the history monitoring switch data. It is configured such that the bits necessary to determine whether or not to send a command are "1" and the unused bits are "0". The detection determination value is data for determining whether or not to transmit a command created from a transmission command value by comparing it with masked history monitoring switch data.

Next, a specific example of switch history command transmission determination data will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram illustrating an example of switch history command transmission determination data according to this embodiment. The targets for determining whether or not to send a command based on the history monitoring switch data include the ON/OFF state of the contact detection sensor (touch sensor, handle sensor) 509 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504. This includes determining whether the firing switch is turned off, whether the firing stop switch is turned on or off, and whether the door is opened or closed. First, switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON/OFF switching of the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle lever 504 will be described.

The switch history command transmission determination data regarding the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle lever 504 includes data that the contact detection sensor 509 detects switching from OFF to ON, and data that detects switching from ON to OFF.

The same address (“.LOW.HS_TCH_HIST”) is set as the detection target history monitoring switch data address because the same area is referenced regardless of whether switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON is detected. ing.

As the transmission command value, values corresponding to each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 are defined.

A signal change of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is detected by comparing the latest four historical data (signal values). Therefore, the detection mask value is set to "00001111B" in order to specify the latest 4 bits of data. Note that the same value is set because the target bit is common regardless of whether switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON is detected.

The contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is determined to have changed from OFF to ON when the signal value continues to be ON three times in a row after switching from OFF to ON. In this case, the detection determination value is "00000111B". The first 4 bits (“0000B”) are masked by the detection mask value, so if the latter 4 bits (“0111B”) match, it is determined that the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 has changed from OFF to ON. be done. Similarly, regarding a change from ON to OFF, the detection determination value is "00001000B" because it is determined that the signal value has changed if OFF continues three times in a row after the signal value switches from ON to OFF. Note that the detection judgment value is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 365, and for example, it may be determined that the state has changed from ON to OFF when it continues to turn ON twice in a row and then turns OFF twice in a row. You can.

In addition, between the switch history command transmission judgment data that detects the switching from OFF to ON of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 and the switch history command transmission judgment data that detects the switching from ON to OFF. is defined as the number of one block of switch input data (_SW_HIST_1BLOCK). The number of data in one block of switch input data is calculated by setting the difference between the first address and the last address of the switch history command transmission judgment data that detects the switching from OFF to ON of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509. There is. The number of data in one block of switch input data in this embodiment is 5 (bytes).

Next, switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON/OFF switching of the firing stop switch of the handle lever 504 will be described. Similarly to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data regarding the firing stop switch includes data for detecting switching from OFF to ON and data for detecting switching from ON to OFF.

The same address (“.LOW.HS_STP_HIST”) is set as the detection target history monitoring switch data address because the same area is referenced regardless of whether the switch is detected from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. ing. The transmission command value is defined as a value corresponding to each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the firing stop switch.

Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, a change in the signal of the firing stop switch is detected by comparing the latest four historical data (signal values). The detection mask value and the detection determination value are the same as those of the contact detection sensor 509, and the same applies to determination of signal change.

Finally, switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON/OFF switching of the door open information signal will be explained. Similarly to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data regarding the door open information signal includes data for detecting switching from OFF to ON and data for detecting switching from ON to OFF.

The same address (“.LOW.DOOR_SW_HIST”) is set for the detection target history monitoring switch data address because the same area is referenced regardless of whether switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON is detected. ing. As the transmission command value, values corresponding to each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the door open information signal are defined.

Unlike the contact detection sensor 509 and the firing stop switch, a signal change in the door opening information signal is detected by comparing the history data (signal value) for the latest two times. That is, it is determined that the signal has changed when a signal different from the previous signal is received. The detection mask value is set to "00000011B" because it specifies the latest 2 bits of data. Further, the detection determination value for determining switching from ON to OFF is "00000001B", and the detection determination value for determining switching from OFF to ON is "00000010B".

Note that the history data to be determined is not limited to what is shown in the figure; for example, the change in the signal of the contact detection sensor 509 may be determined using two times of history data, or four times in consideration of the influence of noise, etc. It may be performed more than once (for example, 8 times). In the case of 8 times, all bits are fixed and masked, making it possible to precisely detect signal changes in a specific pattern. Furthermore, when comparing the latest four historical data, the lower 4 bits are fixed and masked, but the upper 4 bits may be fixed and masked. With this configuration, a predetermined time interval can be provided until the processing to be executed is started after a signal change is detected.

Note that the switch history command transmission determination data is defined for the signal changes of the contact detection sensor 509, the firing stop switch, and the door open information signal from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON. Switch history command transmission determination data may be defined that detects a change in only the switch history command. For example, when making a notification for a certain period of time, the notification ends after a certain period of time has elapsed regardless of changes in the signal, so it is only necessary to transmit the notification command when the signal changes from OFF to ON.

Further, at the end of the switch history command transmission determination data, the number of command transmission determination targets is defined. The number of command transmission determination targets is calculated by dividing the difference from the start address of the area where the switch history command transmission determination data is defined to the address of the last data by the number of data in one block of switch input data. By calculating the number of data per block of switch input data and the number of command transmission judgment targets from the defined data address, program code modifications can be minimized even if the data structure or number of data changes. I can do it.

Note that if the data structure or the number of data does not change, a numerical value may be directly defined in advance at the beginning of the switch history command transmission determination data. Furthermore, the switch history command transmission determination process may be controlled to end when the final data of the switch history command transmission determination data is detected without defining the number of command transmission determination targets.

In addition, although the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment targets signals that are input processed as history information (history monitoring switch data) such as touch sensor signals, determination is made based on edge information such as winning signals. It is also applicable to signals. It is also applicable to the case where the winning determination of the starting winning opening (for example, the middle starting opening switch) is targeted. Application examples will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 366 is a diagram showing an example in which the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment is applied to a switch that processes an input signal as edge information. The area for storing the input signal of the middle start switch is BIT0 of input edge data 1 "INPUT_EDG1" (FIG. 360). Therefore, the lower address (“LOW.INPUT_EDG_1”) of “INPUT_EDG1” is set as the address of the area where the input signal is stored. At this time, by setting the detection mask value to "00000001B", the input signal of the middle starting port switch corresponding to BIT0 becomes the determination target. By setting the detection determination value to "00000001B", a command ("_SID_ON_CM") defined as a transmission command value is transmitted when BIT0 of input edge data 1 is "1".

With the above configuration, it is possible to send commands in the same procedure not only to input signals managed as history information (history monitoring switch data) but also to input signals to be processed as edge information. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency and reduce program capacity.

[22-4-2. Switch history command transmission judgment processing procedure]
In the switch history command transmission determination process, a change in a signal is detected from the history monitoring switch data based on information defined in the switch history command transmission determination data. Hereinafter, a procedure for detecting a change in a signal will be described with reference to a flowchart and program code of history command transmission determination processing.

FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the procedure of history command transmission determination processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 368 is an example of a program code for history command transmission determination processing according to this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 367.

When the switch history command transmission determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the start address of the switch history command transmission determination data (FIG. 365) (Step 01TKS2010). The start address of the switch history command transmission determination data is set in the DE register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of command transmission determination targets (“_SW_HIST_ALLBLOCK”) as the number of repetitions of the switch history command transmission determination process (Step 01TKS2020). The number of command transmission determination targets is set in the B register. When setting of the switch history command transmission determination data address and the number of command transmission determination targets is completed, history monitoring switch data to be detected is acquired, and it is determined whether or not to transmit a command.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains history monitoring switch data to be detected (step 01TKS2030). Specifically, the detection target history monitoring switch data address is acquired from the switch history command transmission determination data, the history monitoring switch data to be detected is specified, and the detected history monitoring switch data is stored in the W register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a transmission command value from the switch history command transmission determination data (Step 01TKS2040). The send command value is 2 bytes and is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the signal value of the switch has changed based on the history monitoring switch data acquired in the process of step 01TKS2030 (step 01TKS2050). Specifically, first, the acquired history monitoring switch data is masked with a detection mask value (step 01TKS2050-1). Furthermore, a change in the signal value is determined (step 01TKS2050-3) by comparing it with the detection determination value (step 01TKS2050-2). If the history monitoring switch data after masking matches the detection determination value, it is determined that the signal value has changed.

If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the signal value has changed (the result of step 01TKS2050 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes command storage processing for the transmission command value acquired in the process of step 01TKS2040 and stored in the HL register. By doing so, the data is stored in the transmission buffer (Step 01TKS2060).

If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the signal value has not changed (the result of step 01TKS2050 is "NO"), or after executing the command storage process (step 01TKS2060), has the main control MPU 1311 finished determining all target commands? It is determined whether or not (Step 01TKS2070). When the determination for all commands is completed, the history command transmission determination process is terminated.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine of this embodiment not only changes ON/OFF of the signal value by changing the mask value and detection judgment value, but also adds or modifies the switch history command transmission judgment data. It is also possible to detect specific change patterns just by doing so. For example, if you know the pattern of signal changes that are likely to occur when fraud or other failures or abnormalities occur, you only need to set values that correspond to these signal change patterns. It is possible to easily add or delete data simply by registering data without increasing the program capacity, thereby increasing the possibility of discovering defects before they occur.

[22-5. Example of application to information stored in internal function registers (built-in registers)]
In the configuration described above, history monitoring switch data is created for signals input to the main control MPU 1311 from various switches or sensors, and processing such as command transmission is performed based on the history monitoring switch data. On the other hand, in the history monitoring switch data creation process and the switch history command transmission determination process of this embodiment, it is also possible to specify the internal function register of the main control MPU 1311. Below, a description will be given of means for applying history monitoring switch data creation processing and switch history command transmission determination processing based on information stored in the internal function register.

[22-5-1. Creating history monitoring switch data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of an internal function register that stores random number errors of the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. In addition to general-purpose registers, the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment can be provided with internal function registers that can store calculation results and random numbers, and store error details when generating random numbers. It becomes. FIG. 369 shows an example of an internal function register that stores random number errors, and an address is defined for each register. For example, a random number clock error indicating an error that an abnormality has occurred in the cycle (clock) for generating random numbers is stored in BIT2 of the register "_RDER3", and is set to "1" when an error occurs. Further, the address “111Ah” is set in the register “_RDER3”.

Here, a procedure for creating random number clock error history monitoring switch data will be described. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of random number clock error history area creation data stored in the internal function register of the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. Referring to FIG. 370, the address "_RDER3" of the internal function register is set as the reference address instead of the lower address of the history management switch input level data. Further, since "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" is set in the corresponding switch bit number and the random number clock error is stored in BIT2 of the register "_RDER3", the value of "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" is "2". Finally, the lower address of the area where the created history monitoring switch data is stored is set. By defining the history area creation data in this way, it becomes possible to create history monitoring switch data by processing the signals in the same way as signals input from various switches and sensors. Further, by executing switch history command transmission determination processing based on the created history monitoring switch data, it becomes possible to transmit the corresponding command. Note that if a 2-byte value including the upper address is specified when executing the work area setting process (_WORK_AD_INC_HL; step 01TKS1030), the upper address may be set as is in the DE register without being supplemented. Further, even if the upper address of the internal function register is different from the upper address of the RAM, the corresponding upper address may be complemented in the work area setting process. With the above configuration, it is possible to create history monitoring switch data through common processing, whether it is signals input from various switches or sensors or information stored in internal function registers. becomes. This makes it possible to consolidate programs for creating history monitoring switch data, thereby reducing program capacity.

[22-5-2. Sending commands without using history monitoring switch data]
Here, switch history command transmission determination data for executing switch history command transmission determination processing without using history monitoring switch data will be described. The procedure for executing the switch history command transmission determination process without using history monitoring switch data is the same as the procedure for transmitting a command based on edge information such as the winning signal described above.

FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment to the internal function register (random number clock error). The information used in the application example is a random number clock error, similar to the example of creating history monitoring switch data.

Referring to FIG. 371, an internal function register "_RDER3" for storing a random number clock error state is set to correspond to an area for storing history monitoring switch data. Furthermore, by setting the detection mask value to "00000100B", the random number clock error state corresponding to BIT2 becomes the determination target. By setting the detection judgment value to "00000100B", a command ("_RND_CLK_ERR_CM") defined as a transmission command value is transmitted when the random number clock error state is "1 (error present)". With this configuration, it is possible to send commands using the same procedure as when creating history information without creating history information (history monitoring switch data).

As described above, it is possible to apply this embodiment to information stored in internal function registers, and even signals input from various switches and sensors can be applied to information stored in internal function registers. Even if there is a detection mask value and a detection judgment value, it is possible to transmit a command through common processing. As a result, similarly to the case of creating history monitoring switch data, programs for transmitting commands can also be consolidated, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is also possible to select history monitoring switch data depending on the type of information or command to be determined. For example, if you want to stop the game immediately when a random number clock occurs, you can configure it so that the command is sent by directly referring to the register value without referring to the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock abnormality (Fig. 371 data structure), if the random number clock error continues for a predetermined period, history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock abnormality is created, and the history corresponding to the random number clock abnormality is created as switch history command transmission judgment data. The monitoring switch data may be used as a reference address, and a command when a random number abnormality continues, a detection mask value (00011111b) and a detection judgment value (00011111b) as a predetermined period may be set.

The reason for dividing into two stages in this way is when the random number clock abnormality bit information in the built-in register is incorrectly determined to be abnormal due to the influence of disturbance noise, etc., even though the random number clock is not abnormal. We have established an insurance policy to determine whether the situation continues for a specified period of time.

In addition, when issuing a command when a random number clock abnormality is canceled, use the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock abnormality as a reference address as the switch history command transmission judgment data for determining when the random number clock abnormality is canceled. , a command for canceling the random number abnormality, a detection mask value (for example, "0001111b") and a detection judgment value (for example, "00001000b") as a predetermined period may be set.

Note that the same applies to various switches and sensors as to whether or not to create history monitoring switch data depending on the purpose. By defining switch history command transmission determination data, it is possible to determine whether to send a command based on history monitoring switch data or without creating history monitoring switch data. Also, it becomes possible to make the switch history command transmission determination process a common process, it becomes possible to share the program, and it becomes possible to reduce the program capacity.

[22-6. Switch passing command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination processing]
When the switch history command transmission determination process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process (step 01TKS0150). As described above, in the switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process, when a winning is detected, a command is transmitted and the number of safe balls (safe determination count value) is counted based on the switch passage command data.

The switch passing command data and the switch passing command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process will be described below. First, we will explain the data structure of the switch passage command data to enable general processing for winnings (signals from switches/sensors that detect winnings) from multiple types of winning openings (starting openings), and then , specific switch passing command data will be explained. Next, a detailed procedure of the switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process will be explained with reference to a flowchart and program code.

[22-6-1. Configuration of switch passing command data]
FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of switch passage command data of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to universally process winnings to a plurality of types of winning holes, switch passing command data is defined in a common data structure for each winning hole (switch).

For the switch passing command data, the number of data settings (the number of winning openings (switches) for which the switch passing command data is defined) is first defined. Next, individual data for each winning slot is defined for each input edge. Individual data for each winning opening is composed of edge data reference information, command value, and safe count number. Note that the number of data settings is the number of blocks when individual data for each winning opening is taken as one block.

The edge data reference destination information stores information indicating the reference destination of the input edge data of the switch/sensor that detects winning. The edge data reference destination information includes the identifier of the storage area of the input edge data and bit information in the input edge data of the switch to be referred to.

The command value is the value of the command sent when a winning is detected (when the switch is determined to be ON). The command value is composed of 2 bytes, and is stored in the transmission buffer by command storage processing.

The safe count number is defined as a counter corresponding to the winning opening (switch) that detected winning and a value that increases or decreases the counter. For example, when a game ball enters the general winning hole, a safe determination count value (number of safe balls) is added. On the other hand, if the safe switch (switch installed at the place where the game ball is collected after entering the winning hole with the prize ball (safe hole)) detects passage of the game ball, the safe judgment count value is subtracted. do. Since the game ball that has passed through the winning hole where the prize ball is located passes through the safe hole, the safe determination count value will be 0 if it is in a normal state. Therefore, taking measurement errors into account, if the safe judgment count value is larger than the upper threshold (for example, 100) or smaller than the lower threshold (for example, -100), there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred. can be determined to be high. In addition, when a game ball passes through a prize opening or gate where a prize ball does not occur, a safe count number is set that does not increase or decrease the safe determination count value. Further, the upper limit threshold and the lower limit threshold are not limited to the above-mentioned example, and appropriate values are set according to the structure of the gaming machine and the content of the game.

Next, a specific example of switch passing command data will be explained. FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating an example of switch passing command data according to this embodiment. For the switch passing command data, first, the number of data settings is defined, and then individual data for each winning opening is defined. As mentioned above, the number of data settings is the total number of individual data for each defined winning opening, but in this embodiment, it consists of the address of the label indicating the end of the switch passing command data and the individual data for each winning opening. It is calculated based on the amount of data to be stored.

To explain the individual data for each winning opening using the middle starting opening (starting opening 1) as an example, the edge data reference destination information is the bit (``_TSHID1_BIT'') corresponding to starting opening 1 of input edge data 1 (``_SWCM_P1''). ) is stored in The value indicating the input edge data corresponds to the upper 4 bits, and the bit data corresponding to the starting port corresponds to the lower 4 bits. In this embodiment, a value indicating input edge data (e.g., corresponding to "_SWCM_P1") is extracted by performing a predetermined operation on edge data reference destination information, and switch address data "" is extracted based on the extracted value. Input edge data (for example, input edge data 1 (“INPUT_EDG1”)) is specified from “SW_ADD_W” (FIG. 372B).

Here, the structure of the switch address data "SW_ADD_W" will be explained, and the procedure for specifying input edge data will also be explained. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing an example of switch address data of this embodiment. The switch address data defines information for specifying input edge data (for example, "_SWCM_P1") and corresponding input edge data (for example, input edge data 1 ("INPUT_EDG1")). Referring to FIG. 374, “_SWCM_P1” is set to “00h” and _SWCM_P2 is set to “08h”. “_SWCM_P3” and “_SWCM_P4” are reserved for when the number of target switches increases.

Next, a procedure for specifying input edge data will be described using a safe switch as an example. The step numbers given in the following explanation correspond to the step numbers given to the program code (process for acquiring data of the target bit) in FIG. 377.

As a specific procedure, first, edge data reference destination information is acquired (step 01TKS3040-3). At this time, the edge data reference destination information is "_SWCM_P2 (08h)+_EX_SAFE_SW_BIT (06h)" and is "0Eh (14)". Next, a predetermined operation is performed on the edge data reference destination information. Specifically, it is divided by 8 (step 01TKS3040-4), and the division result (excluding the remainder) is doubled (step 01TKS3040-5). Furthermore, the obtained value is added to the start address "9138h" of the switch address data stored in the HL register (step 01TKS3040-6). In the case of a safe switch, the calculation result is "2", so the value of the HL address is "913Ah". By referring to address “913Ah”, input edge data 2 (“INPUT_EDG2”) can be specified.

By configuring as described above, edge data reference destination information can be implemented in one byte, and data capacity can be reduced. Note that, as shown in FIG. 375, the edge data reference destination information may be defined separately for the input edge data area and the corresponding bit. This configuration makes it easier for developers to understand the reference destination of edge data from the program code and improves the readability of the program. However, the capacity for each individual data item increases by 1 byte, and the capacity increases by the number of data settings. will increase.

The command value is defined as a value corresponding to a command sent when the edge data reference destination information is set to ON. The command value consists of 2 bytes. The command value of the middle starting port switch is set to the starting port 1 command (“_SID1_ON_CM”), and if the edge data reference destination information is set to ON, the starting port 1 command is transmitted. On the other hand, the command value of the right big winning hole count switch is set to "No command" (``_NO_CM"), so even if a game ball enters the right big winning hole, no command will be sent. There is.

In this embodiment, by making it possible to set "No command" ("_NO_CM") as the command value, it is possible to have a common data structure even when a command is not sent when winning a prize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to standardize processes such as data calls and calculations regardless of the presence or absence of commands at the time of winning determination, and it is possible to simplify control.

In addition, by defining "0" for the command value "_NO_CM" indicating that the command is not sent, the Z flag is set when the command value is set in the HL register ("LD HL, (DE+)"; step 01TKS3050). is set to "1". As a result, condition judgment and processing execution, specifically, command transmission judgment (“NZ” (true if the Z flag is not “1”, that is, if the command value is not “_NO_CM”); Step 01TKS3070) and command transmission (execution of command storage process “COM_SET”; step 01TKS3080) can be realized with one command (“INV NZ, COMSET”). By configuring as described above, it is possible to generalize the processing related to command transmission when winning a prize.

The safe count number of the middle start opening switch is a value indicating that it is added to the safe judgment count value (additional count when passing the winning opening; "_INC_SAFE_CNT"; "1 (01h)") because the prize ball is paid out when winning a prize. It is set. In addition, as mentioned above, the safe count number of the safe switch is set to a value indicating that it is subtracted from the safe judgment count value (subtraction count when passing through the winning opening; "_DEC_SAFE_CNT"; "-1 (FFh)"). There is. Furthermore, if the game ball is ejected from the out port without winning, the safe count number of the out switch is set to a non-additional count (“_NON_SAFE_CNT”; “0 (00h)”) when the switch passes, and a safe judgment count is set. The value is not added to or subtracted from. In addition, updating the safe judgment count value can be implemented with a common instruction, since it is sufficient to add the defined safe count number regardless of whether it is added, subtracted, or not updated. The program structure can be simplified.

[22-6-2. Switch passing command sending process procedure]
The switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process is configured to call the safe switch abnormality determination process in a state in which the target switch (winning hole) is specified when the switch passage command transmission process is executed. First, the switch passage command transmission process will be explained, and then the safe switch abnormality determination process will be explained.

FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the procedure of switch passage command transmission processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 377 is an example of a program code for the switch passing command transmission process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 376.

In the switch passing command transmission process, the target switch (winning hole) to which the command is to be sent is identified based on the edge data reference destination information of the switch passing command data, and the specified command is sent when the signal value of the switch is ON. do.

When the switch passing command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first obtains the current safe determination count value (step 01TKS3010). The safe determination count value is stored in the C register. Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch passage command data (FIG. 373) (Step 01TKS3020). The start address of the switch passing command data is set in the DE register. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of data settings (Step 01TKS3030). The data setting number is stored in the B register. When the processing in step 01TKS3030 is completed, command transmission determination and safe switch abnormality determination processing for each switch is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 identifies the switch to be processed and acquires the signal value (target bit) of the identified switch (step 01TKS3040). Specifically, first, a switch address data table is set. The switch address data table stores data for specifying input edge data that includes the target bit, and allows the address of the input edge data to be acquired. Furthermore, edge data reference destination information is acquired from the switch passing command data. Finally, the value of the target bit is specified based on the edge data reference destination information and the switch address data table, and the information (“0” or “1”) of the target bit is stored in a predetermined area (carry flag; CF).

Specifically, the edge data reference destination information acquired from the switch passage command data is set in the A register (steps 01TKS3040-1 to 3), and the calculations shown in the program code are performed (steps 01TKS3040-4 to 6). As a result, a value indicating input edge data (for example, "_SWCM_P1") is extracted. The address of the input edge data (for example, "INPUT_EDG1") corresponding to the edge data reference destination information is defined at the address obtained by adding the extracted value from the first address of the switch address data table "SW_ADD_W", and the input edge data (for example, "INPUT_EDG1") address) and stores the address of the identified input edge data in the HL register (step 01TKS3040-7).

The "LD CF, (HL).A" instruction obtains the contents specified by the lower three bits of the A register from the value stored in the HL register. The address of the specified input edge data is stored in the HL register, the edge data reference destination information is stored in the A register as described above, and the lower 4 bits of the edge data reference destination information are the start information to be determined. It is bit data corresponding to the mouth. The value of the target bit is in the range from 0 to 7, so if you specify the value of the lower 3 bits, the specified bit data will be obtained from the input edge data specified by the "LD CF, (HL).A" command, and CF ( carry flag). With this configuration, it is possible to realize both the information specifying the input edge data and the information specifying the bit corresponding to the starting port to be determined in one byte. Furthermore, once the input edge data and corresponding bits are specified, a series of processes from acquiring the specified bit information from the input edge data to setting the acquired information to the CF (carry flag) are executed in one instruction. This makes it possible to reduce program capacity.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a command value from the switch passing command data (Step 01TKS3050). Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the target bit is ON (step 01TKS3060).

The main control MPU 1311 executes command storage processing if the value of the target bit is ON (result of step 01TKS3060 is "YES") and if the command value is not a command ("_NO_CM") (step 01TKS3080). By executing the command storage process, the command is stored in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes safe switch abnormality determination processing (Step 01TKS3090). The safe switch abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379.

In this embodiment, determination of a target command value and execution of command storage processing are realized with a single instruction. In the process of step 01TKS3050, when the command value is taken into the HL register by the "LD HL, (DE+)" command, if there is no command to be transmitted, the command value "_NON_CM" is set. The command value “_NON_CM” is “0”, and if there is a command to be transmitted, a value other than “0” is set. Therefore, the Z flag is set to "1" when a command is sent, and "0" when a command is not sent. At this time, the "INV NZ, COM_SET" command determines whether or not to send a command based on the Z flag, and if the command is to be sent, a series of processes executed by the command storage process ("COM_SET") is executed. This is accomplished by the command of This eliminates the need to execute the determination of whether to transmit a command and the processing corresponding to the determination result (command storage processing) using separate instructions, making it possible to reduce the program capacity.

After executing the safe switch abnormality determination process, or if the value of the target bit is not ON (in the case of OFF) (result of step 01 TKS3060 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines that the process has been completed for all switches. It is determined whether or not (Step 01TKS3100). If the processing has not been completed for all the switches (the result of step 01TKS3100 is "NO"), the processing is executed for the next switch from step 01TKS3040. If the processing is completed for all switches (result of step 01TKS3100 is "YES"), this processing is ended.

[22-5-3. Safe switch abnormality determination processing procedure]
FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safe switch abnormality determination processing according to this embodiment. FIG. 379 is an example of a program code for the safe switch abnormality determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 378.

In the safe switch abnormality determination process, the safe determination count value is updated for the switch (winning opening) identified based on the edge data reference information of the switch passing command data in the switch passing command transmission process, and the safe judgment count value is updated to prevent an illegal winning from occurring. Determine abnormalities such as whether the

When the safe switch abnormality determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first adds the safe count number acquired from the switch passage command data to the safe determination count value stored in the C register (step 01TKS4010). Subsequently, the updated safe determination count value is stored in the total safe determination count area (step 01TKS4020).

Three types of safe count numbers are defined in this embodiment, and as mentioned above, when adding 1 (“_INC_SAFE_CNT”; “1 (01h)”) and when subtracting 1 (“_DEC_SAFE_CNT”; “-1 ( FFh)"), and there are cases where neither addition nor subtraction is performed ("_NON_SAFE_CNT"; "0(00h)"). The case where 1 is added is when a prize ball is generated due to winning. The case where 1 is subtracted is when a game ball is detected by the safe switch, as described above. If neither addition nor subtraction is performed, this is a case where a switch that does not generate a prize ball (for example, a common ball gate) detects winning (passage). In addition, the safe judgment count value can be updated by adding the defined safe count number regardless of whether it is added, subtracted, or not updated. In either case, it can be implemented using common instructions, making program development more efficient and reducing capacity.

When the safe determination count value is updated and stored in a predetermined area, it is determined whether the safe determination count value is within a normal range (whether or not it is an abnormal value) (step 01TKS4030). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first compares the safe determination count value stored in the C register with the lower limit threshold (“_ILG_SAFE_JDG1”) (Step 01TKS4030-1). If the safe determination count value is greater than or equal to the lower threshold (and less than 0) (result of step 01TKS4030 is "NO"), the safe determination count value is normal and the process ends.

Furthermore, if the safe determination count value is less than or equal to the lower limit threshold, or greater than or equal to the lower limit threshold, and greater than 0, the main control MPU 1311 compares the safe determination count value and the upper limit value (step 01TKS4030-2). If the safe determination count value is less than or equal to the upper limit value (and greater than or equal to 0) (result of step 01TKS4040 is "YES"), the safe determination count value is normal and the process ends.

If the safe judgment count value is abnormal, that is, if the safe judgment count value is less than the lower limit threshold or larger than the upper limit threshold (result of step 01 TKS4030 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the game stop cause number to safe. Set in the game stop setting data when the switch is abnormal (Step 01TKS4040). Furthermore, the safe determination count value is cleared (step 01TKS4050). To clear the safe judgment count value, "00H" is stored in all safe judgment count areas (step 01TKS4050-1) and the C register is cleared (step 01TKS4050-2).

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the control is different for each winning slot, it is possible to handle it with common processing, and it is possible to simplify the program code. Become. Further, by adding and modifying the switch passage command data, it becomes possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, thereby improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Note that the program code shown in the drawing stores values in various registers when processing is executed, but these are just examples, and the registers that store values are not limited to the registers shown in the drawing. It may be stored in the register.

In this specification, the following are typical inventions including the inventions described in the claims.

(1) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a calculation means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
input signal storage means capable of storing input signals input to the calculation means;
It is possible to periodically acquire input signals from the input signal storage means and create input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on history information creation data defined for each type of input signal. History information creation means;
history information storage means capable of storing the input signal history information;
Equipped with
The history information creation data is
first information indicating an area where the input signal is stored;
second information indicating an area for storing input signal history information corresponding to the input signal;
including;
The history information creation means acquires an input signal from the input signal storage means based on the first information, regardless of the type of the input signal, and creates the input signal history information from the acquired input signal. A gaming machine, wherein the created input signal history information is stored in the history information storage means based on the second information.

(2) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a calculation means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
input signal storage means capable of storing input signals input to the calculation means;
It is possible to periodically acquire input signals from the input signal storage means and create input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on history information creation data defined for each type of input signal. History information creation means;
history information storage means capable of storing the input signal history information;
Equipped with
The history information creation data is
first information capable of specifying the input signal storage means indicating an area in which the input signal is stored;
second information capable of specifying the history information storage means indicating an area for storing the input signal history information corresponding to the input signal;
third information specifying the position of the input signal acquired from the input signal storage means specified by the first information;
including;
The history information creation means includes:
Executed at a predetermined cycle, specifying an input signal to be obtained from the input signal storage means specified based on the first information and the third information, obtaining the specified input signal as input information, and Computing the information stored in the history information storage means specified based on the second information, and storing the acquired input information in a predetermined position of the history information storage means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the input signal history information can be created by a common process regardless of the type of the input signal.

In the gaming machines (1) and (2), it is possible to create history information in which signals input to the calculation means (main control MPU 1311) from various switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine are arranged in chronological order. . At this time, even if there are differences in the types of input signals, a series of processes such as acquiring input signals, creating and storing history information can be realized through common processing, simplifying the program structure and reducing program capacity. reduction can be achieved.

(3) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a calculation means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
input information storage means capable of storing a plurality of types of input information input to the calculation means;
input information determining means for determining a pattern of the input information based on input information determination data corresponding to the input information;
Equipped with
The input information determination data is
first information capable of specifying the input information storage means indicating an area in which the input information is stored;
second information specifying a range for determining the pattern of the input information;
third information for determining the pattern of the input information;
including;
The input information determining means includes:
acquiring the input information from the input information storage means specified based on the first information, extracting input information corresponding to the range specified based on the second information from the acquired input information, determining a pattern of the extracted input information based on the third information;
A gaming machine characterized in that a pattern of the input information can be determined by a common process regardless of the type of the input information.

In the gaming machine (3), the information is not limited to input information, but also includes, for example, periodically extracted values, results of periodically executed predetermined operations, etc. stored in a predetermined storage means in chronological order. It is also applicable. It can also be applied to cases where patterns of combinations of a plurality of related pieces of information are compared. According to the gaming machine (3), abnormalities can be detected early by determining whether changes in continuously accumulated information match a specific pattern. Furthermore, since patterns in which information changes through common processing can be identified, game control can be simplified and program capacity can be reduced.

(4) further comprising command transmitting means capable of transmitting commands for controlling the game;
The input information determination data further includes fourth information corresponding to a command based on the pattern of the input information,
The gaming machine according to (3), wherein the command transmitting means transmits a command corresponding to the fourth information based on a determination result of the pattern of the input information.

In addition to the configuration of the gaming machine (3), the gaming machine (4) can transmit commands according to the pattern of input information. For example, by detecting a pattern when an abnormality occurs, it becomes possible to send a command for abnormality notification.

(5) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a calculation means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
processing information storage means capable of storing a plurality of types of processing information that can be processed by the calculation means;
processing information determination means for determining a change in the processing information based on processing information determination data corresponding to the processing information;
Equipped with
The processing information storage means includes an internal storage means provided in the calculation means and an external storage means from which processing information can be read and written by the calculation means,
The processing information determination data is
first information capable of specifying the processing information storage means indicating an area in which the processing information is stored;
second information specifying a range for determining a change in the processing information;
third information for determining a change in the processing information;
including;
The processing information determining means includes:
acquiring the processing information from the processing information storage means specified based on the first information, extracting processing information corresponding to the range specified based on the second information from the obtained processing information, determining a change in the extracted processing information based on the third information;
A gaming machine characterized in that a change in the extracted processing information can be determined by a common process regardless of the processing information stored in any of the processing information storage means of the internal storage means and the external storage means. .

In the gaming machine (5), the same effect as the gaming machine (3) can be obtained, and even if the processing information storage means are different, it is possible to specify a pattern in which the processing information changes by a common process. As a result, changes in information can be determined by common processing not only for processing information stored in general RAM but also for processing information stored in built-in registers of calculation means such as the main control MPU 1311. be able to. Therefore, even if the storage means is changed due to a change in the specifications of the gaming machine, it can be handled simply by updating the processing information determination data, and the development efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved. Since the storage means hardware constitutes the game, game control can be simplified and program capacity can be reduced.

(6) a plurality of game media receiving means capable of accepting game media;
a game medium detecting means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has accepted the game medium;
gaming media counting means capable of individually counting the number of gaming media detected by the gaming media detection means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game media counting means is capable of counting the game media based on winning detection data corresponding to the game media receiving means,
The entry award detection data is
first information indicating a storage location of the detection information of the game medium;
second information for performing counting based on the detection of the game medium;
including;
The game medium counting means performs a process of acquiring detection information of the game medium based on the first information in a common process regardless of the game medium receiving means that accepts the game medium, and also acquires the detection information of the game medium based on the first information. A gaming machine characterized in that the process of counting the game media based on the game media is performed in a common process regardless of the game media receiving means that receives the game media.

The gaming machine (6) is equipped with a plurality of gaming media receiving means (for example, a starting prize opening, a big winning opening, etc.), and a common process is carried out for each gaming media receiving means to detect and win prizes. It becomes possible to count the number of game media. This makes it possible to share the programs that implement these functions, and to reduce the program capacity. In addition, it is possible to easily respond to specification changes such as an increase or decrease in the number of gaming media receiving means by updating the winning detection data, which simplifies the configuration management of gaming machines and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. can be improved.

(7) a plurality of game media receiving means capable of accepting game media;
a game medium detecting means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has accepted the game medium;
discharged game medium detection means capable of detecting game media discharged from the game medium receiving means;
a game medium counting means capable of individually counting the game media detected by the game medium detecting means or the ejected game medium detecting means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game media counting means is capable of counting the game media based on winning detection data,
The entry award detection data is
first information that can specify a storage location of information detected by the game medium detection means or the ejected game medium detection means;
second information for performing counting based on the detection of the game medium;
including;
The game media counting means acquires detection information of the game media based on the first information, and counts the game media based on the acquired detection information and the second information,
The gaming machine characterized in that the process of acquiring the detection information of the game medium is a common process whether the detection information is the detection information by the game medium detection means or the detection information by the ejected game medium detection means.

In the gaming machine (7), regarding the process of acquiring detection information of gaming media, the detection information by the gaming media detecting means (for example, the starting prize opening switch, the big winning opening switch, etc.) and the discharged gaming media detecting means (for example, It is possible to perform the same processing without distinction from the information detected by the safe exit switch). This makes it possible to detect gaming media not only by multiple types of gaming media detection means but also by the ejected gaming media detection means using a common process, and by standardizing processes such as counting, the program capacity can be reduced. becomes possible.

(8) The process of counting the game media is a common process regardless of whether the information is detected by the game medium detection means or the discharged game medium detection means,
Based on the result of counting the gaming media detected by the gaming media detecting means and the counting result of the gaming media detected by the ejected gaming media detecting means, the receiving of the gaming media by the gaming media receiving means is determined to be normal. The gaming machine of (7) which determines whether or not there is.

The gaming machine of (8) can obtain the same effect as the gaming machine of (7), and also uses the counting result of the gaming media detected by the gaming media detecting means and the ejected gaming media detecting means to discharge the gaming media from the gaming media detecting means. By comparing the counting results of the played gaming media, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming media detecting means or the ejected gaming media detecting means. Further, by making it possible to count by a common process without using the game medium detection means and the ejected game medium detection means, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

(9) The process of counting the game media is a common process regardless of whether the information is detected by the game medium detection means or the discharged game medium detection means,
Each time the game media are counted by the game media counting means, it is determined whether or not the game media receiving means is normally accepting the game media based on the counting result of the game media (7). gaming machines.

The gaming machine of (9) can obtain the same effect as the gaming machine of (7), and also enables counting by a common process without using the gaming media detecting means and the ejected gaming media detecting means. It becomes possible to reduce the program capacity. Furthermore, by comparing the counting result of the gaming media detected by the gaming media detecting means and the counting result of the gaming media discharged from the gaming media detecting means by the discharged gaming media detecting means, Since it is possible to detect an abnormality in the detection means and an abnormality determination is made every time the game media are counted, it is possible to quickly respond when an abnormality occurs.

(10) The second information is set to a numerical value of 1, 0 or -1,
The gaming machine according to (7), wherein the counting of the gaming media is executed by a common command that adds the second information to the number of gaming media.

The gaming machine (10) can obtain the same effects as the gaming machine (7), and can increase the variation of counting by not only adding the counting of gaming media but also subtracting and not performing calculations. I can do it. For example, even for a game medium detection means that does not have a prize ball, such as a game gate, by executing a common command such as adding the value of the second information to the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls can be detected without executing exception processing. It becomes possible to count. This simplifies the program structure and improves the maintenance efficiency of the gaming control program.

[23. Measures to be taken when disconnecting/reconnecting wiring]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a setting function that can change the setting value (setting value information) that affects the operating ratio (lottery probability) of the condition device. In the example described above, the basic operation of the setting function was explained, and furthermore, the control when a power outage occurred while the setting function was being executed was also explained.

Since the settings of the gaming machine affect the gaming value (profit) given to the player in the game, if the player is able to check the settings, there is a risk that fair gaming will be hindered. It is natural for players to wish to play games on gaming machines with settings that have a high possibility of gaining a large amount of gaming value (profit), and once the settings are confirmed, players will not be able to obtain gaming value. The operating rate of gaming machines with settings that have a low possibility of being lost will drop significantly. Additionally, if it is possible to check or change settings through fraudulent activity (so-called cheating), it is expected that there will be people who attempt to do so. For example, it is possible to try to clear the settings by cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310, or to try to confirm the settings by checking the behavior when the gaming machine is restarted.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and reconnected, or the power supply is temporarily cut off while the wiring is connected by an illegal method using some kind of unauthorized equipment. This paper proposes a gaming machine that induces malfunctions of the gaming machine by, for example, preventing unauthorized confirmation or changes of settings.

[23-1. Connection form of various control boards]
FIG. 380 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection form of connection lines that supply power to various boards that control the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board 931 to various control boards. Further, power is supplied to each of the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and payout control board 951 from the power supply board 931 through separate systems (different wiring). Therefore, even if the power supply between the main control board 1310 and the power supply board 931 is cut off (the wiring related to the power supply is cut), the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 is continued. Ru.

In addition, when the power supply from the outside is cut off, such as when a power outage occurs, the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from a backup power source that can supply power for a predetermined period of time, and the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is stored in the main control board 1310. Retention can continue. The backup power supply is, for example, an electric double layer capacitor (“capacitor”), and may be mounted on the power supply board 931 or may be mounted independently.

Further, the various information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch 954 provided on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 954 is also output to the payout control board 951.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, wiring for supplying normal power to the main control board 1310 and wiring for supplying backup power to the main control board 1310 are separately provided so that the supply of backup power is not cut off together with the normal power. There is. Thereby, even if the supply of normal power is cut off, the supply of backup power is continued, and various information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is maintained. As another example, when the supply of normal power is cut off, the supply of backup power may also be cut off. In this case, when the wiring connecting the backup power supply and the main control board 1310 is cut off, The backup power supply will also be cut off. Specifically, a backup power supply is provided on the power supply board 931, the wiring for supplying normal power and the wiring for supplying backup power are integrated, and the wiring between the power supply board 931 and the main control board 1310 is If the connection is cut off due to physical disconnection or removal of the connector connecting each board, the supply of backup power will be cut off as well as the normal power supply.

The main control board 1310 communicates bidirectionally with the payout control board 951. For example, the main control board 1310 transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, the payout control board 951 transmits to the main control board 1310 response signals to commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, a payer ACK signal for a prize ball command, etc.), various commands regarding the state of the gaming machine, etc. . Therefore, when only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the payout control board 951 can recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 has been cut off, and the error LED is displayed. An abnormality can be reported by a device, etc.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 sends various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Send to. Communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is unidirectional communication from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 has been cut off, and the main control board 1310 The current performance and screen display will continue while waiting for commands to be sent.

[23-2. Setting function]
As mentioned above, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a setting function, and the setting function will be explained again. The setting function includes a setting change function and a setting confirmation function. The setting change function is a function to change the setting values of the gaming machine, and the setting confirmation function is a function to refer to the setting values.

The setting function (change/confirmation of setting values) is not normally executed during a game, but is executed when the gaming machine is started (before the game starts) or when the game is interrupted. In addition, in order to prevent players from knowing the setting values, at least a portion of the operation parts necessary for executing the setting functions are placed on the back side of the gaming machine, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. It looks like this. The setting function in the gaming machine of this embodiment is started by performing predetermined operations on the setting key 971, RAM clear switch 954, and power switch 932.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing an example of an operation for executing the setting function of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation is started by starting the game machine through a setting confirmation operation of turning the RAM clear switch 954 to "OFF," setting key 971 to "ON," and power switch 932 to "ON." Further, the setting change is started by starting the gaming machine through setting change operations of turning the RAM clear switch 954 "ON", setting key 971 "ON", and power switch 932 "ON".

[23-3. Control at power-on]
Next, control when the gaming machine is powered on will be explained. Here, functions related to settings when the gaming machine is powered on will be mainly explained, and explanations of the processes that have already been explained will be omitted.

[23-3-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 382 is a flowchart of the power-on processing of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The power-on process is a process that is executed first when the gaming machine is powered on.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 first executes RAM protection permission setting (step 02TKS0010). An access prohibited area is set in the storage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if the prohibited area is accessed by executing a program during a game, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and a reset is executed. Taking into consideration the possibility that the power supply may not be stable immediately after the power is turned on, the prohibition of access to the main control RAM 1312 is lifted until the game starts and the initialization of the gaming machine is completed. The RAM protection permission settings are set so that any area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and the power outage clear signal is set (set to ON and then set to OFF).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes startup confirmation processing at power-on (step 02TKS0020). In the startup confirmation process at power-on, first, the power outage notice signal is read out to confirm whether or not a power outage is occurring (main power outage notice signal confirmation process before waiting at power-on). Subsequently, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a predetermined register (power-on pre-wait setting related switch acquisition process). Thereafter, it waits for a predetermined period of time (power-on wait process), and reads out the power outage notice signal to confirm again whether a power outage is occurring (power-on wait pre-main power outage notice signal confirmation process). If it is determined that a power outage is occurring, the game machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes. Finally, it is checked whether the board (wiring) connected to the main control board was reconnected before the power was shut off. Details of the startup confirmation process at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 383.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear determination processing (step 02TKS0030). In the RAM clear determination process, the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on is checked, and it is determined whether the contents of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-off are maintained normally. For example, it is determined whether the setting information of the gaming machine and the contents of the main control RAM 1312 before the power outage are stored normally. Details of the RAM clear determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 384.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a setting operation determination process (step 02TKS0040). In the setting operation determination process, transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, confirmation of RAM abnormality, clearing of main control RAM 1312, etc. are performed as necessary. Details of the setting operation determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 390.

Next, when the setting operation determination process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a random number setting start process (step 02TKS0050). In the random number setting startup process, initial settings such as a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that defines interrupt timing are executed and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, a hardware random number generation circuit (for example, a winning/losing random number) built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a game start determination process (step 02TKS0060). In the game start determination process, it is determined whether or not the game can be started, and a command (for example, a power-on operation command) to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set, and initial data when the power is turned on is set. Furthermore, settings are made to permit execution of interrupt processing such as timer interrupts (step 02TKS0070).

When the main control MPU 1311 is permitted to execute the interrupt process, it executes the main control side main process (step 02TKS0080, step 02TKS0090). In the main processing on the main control side, first, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step 02TKS0080). If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing is executed (step 02TKS0090). In the random number update process, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage warning signal, it executes a power outage process (step 02TKS0200). The power outage processing executes processing to back up data in order to restore the state before the power outage occurred. The specific process is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 188.

[23-3-2. Startup confirmation process at power-on]
Next, the startup confirmation process at power-on (step 02TKS0020) will be explained. In the startup confirmation process at power-on, in addition to checking the main power outage warning signal and acquiring switch-related input information when the gaming machine is powered on, it also checks that the wiring was disconnected/reconnected before the power was cut off. Check. In particular, it detects the case where the wiring is disconnected/reconnected in a way that interrupts the progress of the game. Note that disconnection/reconnection of wiring that allows the game to proceed (for example, connection with the peripheral control board 1510) is confirmed in the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process called by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 392).

FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the startup confirmation process at power-on according to this embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the power-on startup confirmation process, it executes the power-on wait pre-main power outage notice signal confirmation process that reads the power outage notice signal and confirms whether a power outage is occurring (step 02TKS0110). Subsequently, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port, and a power-on wait pre-setting related switch acquisition process is executed to store them in a predetermined register (step 02TKS0120).

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on wait process of waiting for a predetermined period of time (step 02TKS0130). The predetermined time is set to at least the time necessary until the rendering control by the effect display control section can be executed in the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on, pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process of reading out the power outage warning signal and confirming again whether or not a power outage is occurring (step 02TKS0140). At this time, if it is determined that a power outage is occurring, the game machine waits until the power supply voltage of the gaming machine becomes stable.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main control board 1310 has been reconnected to other boards, sensors, etc. (step 02TKS0150). Whether or not it has been reconnected is determined based on information stored in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. For example, the determination may be made based on information when an error occurs due to failure to receive a response signal from the payout control board 951, or may be determined based on error information such as a proximity switch error. Alternatively, the determination may be made based on the fact that a wiring connection failure flag is set in the backed up game control area.

The main control MPU 1311 determines that if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and other boards, sensors, etc. is disconnected before the power is cut off and reconnected when the gaming machine is started (the result of step 02TKS0150 is "YES") ), and sets the wiring reconnection flag (step 02TKS0160). After setting the wiring reconnection flag, the wiring connection failure flag is canceled (step 02TKS0170).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 notifies an incorrect setting confirmation error based on the wiring reconnection flag being set. As described above, the incorrect setting confirmation error occurs when the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and reconnected, and the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally interrupted/restarted. This indicates the possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out, such as unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine and modification or confirmation of setting value information due to an unauthorized setting change operation or setting confirmation operation. Therefore, when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, it is desirable to stop the functions of various detection sensors, stop the start or continuation of new games, and check the settings and inspect other abnormalities in the gaming machine. . The unauthorized setting confirmation error notification is made by lighting up a display device including LEDs and lamps such as the function display unit 1400 and the setting display device 974 in a specific manner, or by displaying an error screen on a liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, notification may be made by outputting a command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and displaying it in a specific manner on an error LED display (not shown) provided on the payout control board 951. .

[23-3-3. RAM clear judgment processing]
Next, details of the RAM clear determination process (step 02TKS0030) in the power-on process will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the procedure of RAM clear determination processing according to this embodiment. Further, FIG. 385 is an example of a program code for the RAM clear determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 384. In the RAM clear determination process, as described above, the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on is checked, and it is determined whether the contents of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-off are maintained normally. The specific contents of the process will be explained below.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the RAM clear determination process, it first executes a set value confirmation process (step 02TKS0210). In the setting value confirmation process, setting value information (setting value) that affects the lottery probability of the game is acquired, and if it is abnormal, an abnormal value is set in the setting state and setting value. Specific processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 386.

When the confirmation of the setting value information is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process to confirm the RAM outside the used area at power-on, and the information in the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 that is not used for games (RAM outside the used area) is abnormal. (Step 02TKS0220).

When the confirmation of the RAM outside the used area is completed, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the game control area (area where game information is stored) of the main control RAM 1312 (step 02TKS0230).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 temporarily sets the state of the game control area to an abnormal state (RAM abnormality determination value) (Step 02TKS0240). Hereinafter, the state of the gaming control area is specified based on the results of the processing from step 02TKS0210 to step 02TKS0230.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the checksum value calculated in the process of step 02TKS0230 is a normal value (step 02TKS0250). If the checksum value is not a normal value (the result of step 02TKS0250 is "NO"), the game control area is in an abnormal state, so this process is terminated, and the contents of the game control area are changed in subsequent processes as necessary. Clear.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value of the backup flag set before the power outage is a normal value (Step 02TKS0260). If the value of the backup flag is not a normal value (result of step 02TKS0260 is "NO"), it cannot be confirmed that the gaming control area is normal, so this process ends, and gaming control is performed in subsequent processing as necessary. Clears the contents of a region.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312, which was confirmed in the process of step 02TKS0220, is normal (step 02TKS0270). If the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 is not normal (the result of step 02TKS0270 is "NO"), this process is terminated as if the gaming control area is in an abnormal state, and subsequent processing is performed as necessary. Clear the contents of the game control area.

If the checksum and backup flag values are normal values and the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM normality determination value as the state of the gaming control area. (Step 02TKS0280), and set the setting state to the state before power cutoff (Step 02TKS0290). Note that the state of the main control RAM 1312 is set (stored) in the C register, and the state before power cut is set (stored) in the B register.

[23-3-4. Setting value confirmation process]
Next, the setting value confirmation process in step 02TKS0210 of the RAM clear determination process will be described. In the setting value confirmation process, the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine is acquired, and if it is abnormal, an abnormal value is set in the setting state and setting value. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the procedure of setting value confirmation processing according to this embodiment. Further, FIG. 387 is an example of a program code for the setting value confirmation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 386.

When the setting value confirmation process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first obtains the setting state from the setting state management area (VALID_PLAY; setting state storage means) (step 02TKS0310). The setting state management area is a 1-byte area, as shown in FIG. 388. The values that can be set in the setting state management area are the gaming enabled state (“0”; _SETST_NON), the setting confirmation state (“1”; _SETST_CHK), the setting change state (“2”; _SETST_CHG), and the RAM abnormal state (“3”). ”;_SETST_ERR) is set (FIG. 389). Note that an incorrect setting confirmation error (“4”; _SETST_CHER) may be settable to distinguish it from a RAM abnormal state. Although an incorrect setting confirmation error does not necessarily mean that the setting value is an abnormal value, it is handled in the same way as a RAM abnormal state in consideration of the possibility that the setting value has been tampered with.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state acquired from the setting state management area has an abnormal value, specifically, a value other than the settable value defined in FIG. 389 (step 02 TKS0320 ). In implementing the program, the value of the setting state is compared with the setting state management area abnormality determination value (_VALID_PLAY_CK), and if it is smaller than the setting state management area abnormality determination value, the value is determined to be normal. The value of the setting state management area abnormality judgment value is the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value that can be set (in this embodiment, RAM abnormal state = "3"), and in this embodiment, if the setting value is 4 or less, If so, it is determined to be normal.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the setting value ( setting value information) (step 02TKS0330). Setting values (setting value information) are stored in a setting value area (SETTEI_AR; setting value information storage means; FIG. 388) which is a 1-byte area. In this embodiment, the set value is set to a value from "0" to "5".

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value of the acquired setting value (setting value information) is within a predetermined range, that is, a value from "0" to "5" (Step 02TKS0340). Since only positive numbers can be set in the setting value area, in the same way as checking the setting status, when implementing the program, set the upper limit value (setting value upper limit discrimination value; _SETTEI_LIM="5"; Figure 389) to 1. It is only necessary to determine whether the number is greater than the added number.

If the value of the setting value (setting value information) is within the predetermined range (result of step 02TKS0340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes this process because the setting state and setting value are set normally. The process ends and returns to the calling process (RAM clear determination process).

On the other hand, if the setting state is an abnormal value (the result of step 02TKS0320 is "YES") or if the setting value is an abnormal value (the result of step 02TKS0340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 returns to the setting state. The RAM abnormal state "3" is set (step 02TKS0350). Finally, the setting values are initialized (step 02TKS0360) and the process returns to the calling process (RAM clear determination process).

Since the set values are not erased (not initialized) even if the RAM clear operation is performed, if an abnormality occurs in the set values, initialization is performed in the set value confirmation process. This is to enable the state of the gaming machine to be initialized while maintaining the set value, such as when returning a high probability state to a normal state by clearing the RAM.

[23-3-5. Setting operation judgment processing]
Next, details of the setting operation determination process (step 02TKS0040) in the power-on process will be described. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting operation determination process of this embodiment. Further, FIG. 391 is an example of a program code for the setting operation determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in FIG. 390. In the setting operation determination process, as described above, transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, confirmation of RAM abnormality, initialization (clearing) of the main control RAM 1312, etc. are performed.

When the setting operation determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first temporarily sets a value (_SETST_ERR) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting state management area (setting value information storage means) (step 02TKS0410).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (step 02TKS0420). Specifically, the levels of the signals of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the external input port (_PINSTS) immediately after the power is turned on, and the determination is made.

If the setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on (the result of step 02TKS0420 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power was turned off was a setting change, that is, the setting change mode. It is determined whether a power outage has occurred during that time (step 02TKS0430). The setting state before the power cut is stored in the B register in the process of step 02TKS0290 of the RAM clear determination process.

If the setting state before the power outage was not a setting change (the result of step 02TKS0430 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power outage was a RAM abnormality (step 02TKS0440). ). If the setting state before the power cut is that the RAM is abnormal (result of step 02TKS0440 is "YES"), this process is ended and the process returns to the calling process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 initializes the setting state management area (step 02TKS0460) if the setting state before the power cut is not abnormal in the RAM (the result of step 02TKS0450 is "NO"). Furthermore, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was ON when the power was turned on (Step 02TKS0470).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not ON when the power is turned on (the result of step 02TKS0470 is "NO"), that is, if it is OFF, the main control MPU 1311 performs the following steps in order to return to the state before the power outage: The gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step 02TKS0480). Furthermore, it is determined whether the setting key is OFF (step 02TKS0490). If the setting key is not OFF (the result of step 02TKS0490 is "NO"), that is, if it is ON, it means that the setting confirmation operation is being executed, so the setting state is set to the setting confirmation state (step 02TKS0500 ).

If the setting key is OFF (the result of step 02TKS0490 is "YES") or if the setting confirmation state is set, the main control MPU 1311 executes the door state confirmation process (step 02TKS0510). In the door state confirmation process, the open/closed state of the door frame 3 is confirmed, and if the door frame 3 is in the open state, corresponding settings are made. When the door state confirmation process is completed, the process returns to the calling process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation was executed when the power was turned on (the result of step 02TKS0420 is "YES") or if the setting state before the power was turned off was a setting change (the result of step 02TKS0430). is "YES"), the setting state is changed to a setting change state (step 02TKS0520). Subsequently, it is determined whether the RAM outside the used area is normal (step 02TKS0530). If the RAM outside the used area is not normal (the result of step 02TKS0530 is "NO"), that is, when an abnormality occurs in the RAM outside the used area, the RAM outside the used area is Abnormality processing is executed (step 02TKS0540).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON (the result of step 02TKS0470 is "YES"), or if the RAM outside the usage area is normal (the result of step 02TKS0530 is "YES"), the When the execution of the RAM abnormality processing is completed, the RAM initialization processing is executed (step 02TKS0550) and the work area is cleared (step 02TKS0560). Thereafter, this process ends and returns to the calling process (power-on process).

As described above, in this embodiment, setting value information is acquired when the gaming machine is powered on, and control related to the setting values is performed according to the operation input when the power is turned on and the setting state before the power is turned off. For example, if the setting state before the power is turned off is "Settings change", regardless of whether there is any operation input or the setting state, the setting change mode is started when the gaming machine is started, and the settings change continues to smoothly play the game. to be restarted. In this case, a RAM abnormality may occur because the setting values have not been finalized, and the setting values may not be as intended by the configurator.

On the other hand, even if the setting state before the power is turned off is "setting confirmation", if there is no operation input (setting confirmation operation) to start the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the game machine is started without continuing the setting confirmation. This is because, unlike the setting change mode, the setting values are maintained without being changed and the game can be started, so if confirmation is necessary, the operation input can be performed again. In addition, by not automatically shifting to the setting confirmation mode at startup, it is possible to prevent unauthorized confirmation of setting values by intentionally restarting the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the setting state is "RAM abnormal", the game cannot be started normally, so the startup itself of the game machine is stopped without clearing the RAM. If the setting status is "RAM abnormal", it is necessary to re-set the setting value information by changing the setting. Therefore, in order to prevent unauthorized third parties from changing the setting value, the administrator intentionally re-sets the setting value information. By not allowing players to start playing until they have made the settings, the possibility of fraudulent activity is reduced. Furthermore, if it is possible to set "Unauthorized Settings Confirmation Error" in the setting state, similar to "RAM Abnormality", by controlling the game so that it cannot be started normally, unauthorized third parties can It is possible to prevent the setting values from being tampered with and restarting the game.

[23-3-6. Disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination processing]
Here, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process (step 01TKS0120) including the process of confirming that the wiring that was disconnected during the game has been reconnected will be described. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process is a process executed in the switch-related control process (step 01TKS0010; FIG. 354) in the game-enabled process (step P108; FIG. 329) of the timer interrupt process. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the procedure of disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination processing according to this embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process, it acquires connection error history information (switch error history information) (step 02TKS0610). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the connection error history information includes error information about the wiring to be detected (Step 02TKS0620). Further, in this embodiment, the wiring to be detected in the connection error history information is all of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310, but some of the wirings are not all of the plurality of wirings. It may also be possible to target only Note that when targeting only some of the wirings instead of all of the wirings, it is desirable to have a configuration in which at least the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is targeted.

If the connection error history information includes error information of the wiring to be detected (the result of step 02TKS0620 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 waits for a predetermined time (step 02TKS0630), and flags the wiring connection failure. is set to ON (step 02TKS0640). Furthermore, a disconnection/short circuit abnormality command is transmitted (step 02TKS0650), and this processing is ended. The wiring connection defect flag may be set to ON for each wiring, or it may be set to a common flag for all wiring, and if a disconnection or short circuit is detected in any of the wirings to be detected, one wiring connection may be set. The defective flag may be set to ON. Alternatively, a wiring connection failure flag may be stored in the gaming control area, and the wiring reconnection flag may be set to ON in the power-up startup confirmation process by referring to the wiring connection failure flag when restarting the gaming machine. .

If the connection error history information does not include error information of the wiring to be detected (result of step 02 TKS0620 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the wiring connection failure flag is set. (Step 02TKS0660). If the wiring connection failure flag is not set (the result of step 02TKS0660 is "NO"), the gaming machine is operating normally without any abnormality such as disconnection, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the wiring connection failure flag is set (result of step 02TKS0660 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the wiring reconnection flag to ON because the disconnected wiring has been reconnected ( Step 02TKS0670). After the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON, the disconnection or short circuit has been resolved, so the wiring connection failure flag is canceled (set to OFF) (step 02TKS0680). Note that the wiring reconnection flag is canceled (set to OFF) when the normal setting change that is performed when the power switch 932 is turned from OFF to ON is executed and the game is started normally.

By the above-described procedure, it is possible to detect that after a connection abnormality such as a disconnection or a short circuit occurs in the wiring, the abnormality has been resolved by reconnection or the like. It is unnatural for a connection abnormality such as a disconnection or short circuit to be resolved without the gaming machine being restarted. Information may have changed or been confirmed. Therefore, as described above, an incorrect setting confirmation error is generated based on the wiring reconnection flag being set to ON, suppressing the continuation of the game, and preventing illegal exploitation of gaming value.

The power-on startup confirmation process is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started, so the wiring reconnection flag is set during the power-on startup confirmation process, and if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the game will stop starting. I was trying to do that. On the other hand, even if the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON in a process executed while the game continues, such as disconnection/short-circuit abnormality determination process, and an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the game value will be The continuation of the game should be stopped in order to prevent the player from being exploited. However, if a fraudulent setting confirmation error occurs due to fraudulent activity, in order to identify the person who committed the fraudulent activity, the game may be continued to the extent that no actual harm is caused to the hall side. For example, even after a connection abnormality such as a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wiring until it is reconnected (while a fraudulent act is being carried out), the performance devices such as liquid crystal display devices and movable accessories may To continue a performance for a predetermined period as usual. At this time, game control that newly gives game value (new lottery, award of prize balls, etc.) is stopped to prevent game value from being illegally exploited. In addition, the function display unit 1400, setting display 974, etc. are used to notify unauthorized setting confirmation errors in a way that is invisible from the front of the gaming machine, so that it is difficult for a person who commits a fraudulent act to recognize that an error has occurred. By faking it, the hall side can secure enough time to collect evidence, etc., without having the person who committed the wrongdoing leave the seat immediately, and it becomes easier to identify the whole picture of the wrongdoing.

[23-4. Control when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs]
Next, we will consider how to deal with fraudulent activity that induces malfunction of the gaming machine by disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310. Examples of fraudulent acts assumed in the present invention include inducing malfunction by forcibly cutting off the wiring that supplies power to the main control board 1310, and restarting the main control board 1310 while the wiring is being disconnected or reconnected. This is an act of attempting to obtain illegal profits by outputting special commands (for example, setting commands) in an illegal manner.

One possible way to forcibly cut off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is to physically disconnect the wiring connected to the power supply board, but it is difficult to continue playing the game after disconnecting. It is conceivable that the game could be illegally continued by temporarily removing the wiring connector and reconnecting it using some method. Detection of behavior that may be fraudulent, such as disconnection or reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, can be performed using the procedure of the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process described above.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, by detecting the reconnection of the wiring instead of the disconnection of the wiring, an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs as described above. Further, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped. That is, in a state where an incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred, the game cannot be resumed unless a specific return operation is performed. In order to allow the specific return operation to be performed only by the hall side, it is desirable to use a specific operation section that can be operated from the back side of the gaming machine. In order to simplify the configuration of the gaming machine, the setting change operation is configured to also serve as a specific return operation (details will be described later). In addition, by executing a setting change operation as a specific return operation, even if the setting value may have been checked or changed illegally, the hall can set a new setting value and safely restart the game. I can do it.

Hereinafter, with reference to a timing chart, a description will be given of control for preventing fraudulent acts when disconnection and reconnection of the wiring of the main control board 1310 is detected.

[23-4-1. When performing the setting confirmation operation after reconnecting the wiring]
First, a case will be described in which a setting confirmation operation is executed after detecting reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310. FIG. 393 shows an example of fraud in which the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, and a setting confirmation operation is executed when restarting the power supply after reconnecting the wiring. 3 is a timing chart illustrating control when a setting confirmation action is performed.

Referring to FIG. 393, the main control side power is continuously supplied until time t11, the power switch 932 is "ON", the setting key 971 is "OFF", and the RAM clear switch 954 is "OFF". There is. Since the connection state of the wiring is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared.

The setting display 974 is in a non-display state (based on the setting display 974) in which setting values are not displayed because the gaming state is the normal gaming state and setting functions such as setting confirmation and setting changes are not being executed. When it also serves as the display 1317, it is in a state where a predetermined base display is being performed. Further, the function display unit 1400 displays a mode indicating a normal gaming state, and the special symbol display included in the function display unit 1400 displays a variable display of special symbols. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command that includes information for determining the manner of displaying the fluctuation of the performance symbols and instructs the start of the fluctuation when the special symbols begin to fluctuate. Furthermore, since communication is normally performed between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the error LED indicator provided on the payout control board 951 is lit in a manner indicating normality.

Further, similar to the main control side power source, power is also supplied to the production side power source. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command instructing the start of fluctuation, it starts the fluctuating display of the performance symbols, and also displays characters and the like on the liquid crystal display device in accordance with the fluctuating display of the performance symbols based on the fluctuation start command. is executed, and furthermore, a performance is performed using performance devices such as movable accessories and LEDs and lamps.

Time t11 represents a case where the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected while the ON setting of the power switch 932 is maintained; in this case, the main control board 1310 Only the power supply to will be stopped. Therefore, the game state becomes power-cut, game control by the main control MPU 1311 is interrupted, and power-cut processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, in view of the risk that some kind of fraudulent activity may be carried out with respect to such behavior, the wiring connection failure flag is set to ON in the process of executing such power-off processing (time t11). The wiring connection failure flag is set to ON based on the mode of voltage change.

Further, if the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected, the signal from the main control board 1310 is interrupted, and the function of the function display unit 1400 stops. At this time, the LED and 7-segment included in the function display unit 1400 may be turned off, or if power is supplied from a system different from that of the main control board 1310, an error display may be displayed. Further, since the error LED display provided on the payout control board 951 cannot receive a signal from the main control board 1310, an error display indicating an abnormal connection is displayed in a specific manner different from that when the connection is normal.

As shown in FIG. 380, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the wiring for supplying power to each board is in a separate system, so even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the peripheral control board 1510 Power will continue to be supplied to the theater and various production equipment. Therefore, even after the time t11 when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the effect display on the liquid crystal display device, various lamp displays, audio effects, etc. can be continued.

The fluctuating display of the production symbols is definitively stopped when a command to stop the fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received when the special symbols have finished fluctuating. However, due to the power supply to the main control board 1310 being stopped, commands for controlling the production (commands for finalizing and stopping the fluctuating display of symbols) are not sent. The effect display will continue with the content at the time of power outage until the power is restarted. Specifically, because a command to stop the design cannot be received even though the performance design is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the high-speed display of the performance design may continue, or the performance design may continue to be displayed in a temporary stop state (the performance design may not be fixedly stopped but sway in a predetermined position). (state) continues, and the fluctuating display of the production symbols continues.

In the example of FIG. 393, if the connection of the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected while the power switch 932 is kept in the ON setting, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is disconnected. Since the supply of wiring has been cut off, timer interrupt processing (disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination processing) is not executed at the time of reconnection, and the wiring reconnection flag is not set to ON at this timing. Then, when the wiring for supplying power to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the supply of power to the main control board 1310 is resumed (time t12), and the main control MPU 1311 starts the power-on processing and performs power-on startup. The wiring reconnection flag is set to ON by the confirmation process (time t13, step 02TKS0670). In this way, if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off due to unauthorized wiring connection, and then the power supply is re-supplied, a wiring connection failure flag and a wiring reconnection flag are set to remember this fact. It is possible to sequentially turn them on and monitor unauthorized activity.

When the main control side power is supplied again and the main control board 1310 starts up (time t13), the setting display 974 etc. will notify an incorrect setting confirmation error on the back side of the gaming machine based on the wiring reconnection flag that has been set to ON. do. By notifying an incorrect setting confirmation error on the back side of the game machine, the hall side can later confirm the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 due to the power supply being supplied to the main control board 1310 being cut off.

In addition, one of the multiple wires, including the wire that supplies power to the main control board 1310, may be disconnected, and that connection path may be used for fraudulent activities (an unauthorized wire may be connected in place of another wire). Therefore, in this embodiment, the following monitoring is performed on such connection routes. In other words, in the game machine of this embodiment, if any of the plurality of wires including the power supply wire is disconnected and reconnected, the set value will become abnormal regardless of whether the power is cut off or not. Execute specific notification to notify the possibility that As an example, FIG. 393 shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 executes a specific notification when the wiring that supplies power is cut off and reconnected, but wiring other than the wiring that supplies power is cut off. A similar notification will be made when the connection is reconnected. The target for performing specific notification does not need to be the function display unit 1400, and the base display 1317 may display specific information, or the liquid crystal display device 1600 may display a specific image. You can. Further, in order to distinguish it from the unauthorized setting confirmation error, the unauthorized setting confirmation error may be reported by a separate device from the device that notifies the unauthorized setting confirmation error, or it may be notified by the same device as the unauthorized setting confirmation error.

The error LED display provided on the payout control board 951 cannot receive the signal from the main control board 1310 because the game is in a stopped state, so even if it continues to display a connection error error. However, it is also possible to receive a command from the main control board 1310 indicating that an incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred or that a game is not possible, and then perform notification of an incorrect setting confirmation error, specific notification, etc. good. Note that the error LED indicator provided on the payout control board 951 indicates that when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed, the connection itself is normal even if the game cannot be started. It may be displayed in a manner that indicates that the connection is normal.

If a fraudulent setting confirmation error occurs, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed, so continuation of the game is suppressed. Further, even when a specific notification is executed, the game may be stopped as in the case where an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, or the game may be continued with only the notification.

In addition, if an abnormality occurs such as all the contents of the main control RAM 1312 have actually been cleared when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the RAM clear determination process (Figure 383) in the power-on process In the setting value confirmation process (FIG. 385), "RAM abnormality" is set as the setting state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are determined to be normal, such as when the checksum is normal, if an incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred, fraudulent acts can be more reliably prevented. In order to do so, "incorrect setting confirmation error" may be set as the setting state so that the same processing as "RAM abnormality" is performed. If the same process as "RAM abnormality" is performed, the game will not be started and the game will remain in a stopped state until the setting change operation is normally executed.

At time t13 after the main control side power is resupplied, it becomes possible to send a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal display device is unable to start the game. A display corresponding to the setting confirmation error is performed, various lamps emit light corresponding to the incorrect setting confirmation error, and various speakers issue audio notifications corresponding to the incorrect setting confirmation error. At this time, the effect symbols that are being displayed in a fluctuating manner are stopped from fluctuating or become non-displayed. Further, regarding the performance device, at time t13, the operation of the movable accessory that is being executed is stopped, and initialization processing such as moving to the initial position is performed.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured such that if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the game cannot be started even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed. be done. This prevents profits from being illegally exploited and damage caused even if an attempt is made to illegally access the setting value information by disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310. I can do it.

Next, a description will be given of control when execution of the setting confirmation operation is determined at time t13 after the main control power is resupplied at time t12. The setting confirmation operation is a relatively simple method because there is no need to operate the RAM clear switch 954 located on the back side of the gaming machine, and it is a simple operation of turning on the setting key 971 when the power is turned on. It is possible to check the setting values. For this reason, in consideration of the possibility that the setting confirmation operation may be performed in some way in addition to the fraudulent act of cutting off and restarting the power supply to the main control board 1310, the gaming machine of this embodiment Even if the power supply to the control board 1310 is illegally cut off and a setting confirmation operation is accepted when the power supply is restarted (even if the setting key is turned on), the setting value information may be illegally confirmed. I am trying to prevent this from happening. In addition, in the setting confirmation operation, the setting key 971 only needs to be operated to the ON position at the time of execution of the startup process after the power is turned on (at the time of determination), and may be operated to the ON position before the power is turned on ( In FIG. 393, determination is possible if the setting key 971 is operated to the ON position between times t11 and t12).

Referring to FIG. 393, at time t13, execution of the setting confirmation operation is specified by determining that the setting key 971 is turned on when power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed. However, since the wiring reconnection flag was set to ON by the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process, the current setting confirmation operation was not considered valid, but was considered to be incorrect, and no processing related to setting confirmation was performed. In addition, the game is put in a game stop state where the game is not started.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted and the setting confirmation operation is performed after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the game cannot be started. configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the power supply to the main control board 1310 is temporarily stopped in order to illegally check the set values.

In addition, even if a fraudulent act of cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is carried out, no changes are made to the performance, so that the gaming machine can continue to operate normally for the time being. Since it is possible to make it appear that the person who committed the fraudulent act is doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility that the person who committed the fraudulent act will remain at the gaming machine in question, and it is expected that the person committing the fraudulent act will be identified.

Below, details will be described regarding how to cancel the incorrect setting confirmation error by a specific recovery operation (setting change operation in this embodiment). As mentioned above, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs due to fraudulent activity, etc., turn off the power, and then turn the power back on while directly operating the power switch 932 to change settings. can be started. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 393, the power is cut off at time t14, and the power is turned on again at time t15. Note that the hatched portion in the period from time t14 to time 15 in the timing chart of FIG. 393 indicates that the functions of each component are stopped due to power cutoff.

When the gaming machine is powered on again, a process for starting the gaming machine is started, and in the process it is determined whether a setting change operation is being performed. Note that the setting change operation only requires that the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 be turned on at the time the power switch 932 is turned from “off” to “on” (at the time of determination), and the power is turned on. A preliminary operation may be performed in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned "ON".

When the setting change operation is detected and the startup of the gaming machine is completed (time t16), the wiring reconnection flag is canceled. As a result, the incorrect setting confirmation error is canceled, and the specific notification and various error notifications are ended. Then, the setting state of the gaming machine is set to the setting change state, and the game machine shifts to the setting change mode (step 02TKS0520). The setting display 974 can be switched from displaying an incorrect setting confirmation error to setting values being changed. The function display unit 1400 remains completely off (or the display corresponding to the setting change may be completely on) until the setting change is completed. At this time, the liquid crystal display device may display a screen indicating that settings are being changed.

When the setting change is completed (time t17), the processing necessary to start the game, such as clearing the game control area, is executed, and the game becomes ready to start.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, when a setting change operation is executed as a specific recovery operation, the incorrect setting confirmation error is canceled and the setting change mode is activated. After that, the normal game can be started. Since the setting change operation requires the operation of multiple operation parts (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971), it is difficult for a fraudster to perform this operation, and only an employee of the hall who has the key can operate it. Since this includes the operation of the setting key 971 that cannot be performed and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, security performance against fraudulent activities can be improved.

Additionally, if an incorrect settings confirmation error occurs, a special recovery operation may be performed, but since this may complicate the process when power is turned on, it may be necessary to use the same operation as the normal setting change operation. By making it possible to restore the program, it is possible to standardize the program, suppress an increase in program capacity, and suppress the complexity of game control.

[23-4-2. When performing a setting change operation after reconnecting the wiring]
Next, a case will be described in which, after detecting an unauthorized reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board, an unauthorized setting change operation is performed instead of an unauthorized setting confirmation operation. FIG. 394 shows a setting change operation performed when the power supply is illegally cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, and the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected. It is a timing chart explaining control when an illegal act is performed.

Although it is more difficult for a fraudster to change the settings compared to the settings confirmation operation, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power supply is resumed, it is not only possible to resupply the power by reconnecting the wiring. The configuration is such that the setting change mode cannot be entered unless a regular setting change operation that requires turning on the power by actually operating the power switch 932 from OFF to ON is performed. Therefore, the timing chart shown in FIG. 394 is the same as the timing chart shown in FIG. 393, except that a setting change operation is performed when wiring is reconnected, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the setting change operation is performed after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the wiring connection flag is not cleared, and the incorrect setting confirmation error continues. , the game is configured so that the game cannot be started. Thereby, it is possible to temporarily stop the power supply to the main control board 1310 and prevent illegal acts such as illegally changing setting values.

[23-4-3. In case of unauthorized access to setting value information without power outage]
Next, while the wiring that supplies power to the main control board remains connected, other wiring (for example, wiring connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) is cut off, and when reconnected, the wiring is disconnected from the wiring route. This section explains how to prevent fraudulent activities in which setting value information is verified or tampered with by unauthorized use of input information. 395 is a timing chart illustrating control when wires other than the wires that supply power to the main control board 1310 are cut off and reconnected, unlike the embodiments described in FIGS. 393 and 394.

Referring to FIG. 395, similar to the examples shown in FIGS. 393 and 394, until the wiring is disconnected (time t21), power is continuously supplied to the main control side power source, and the power switch 932 is turned off. "ON", setting key 971 is "OFF", and RAM clear switch 954 is "OFF". Further, since the wiring connection state is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared. Various displays such as the setting display 974 and the function display unit 1400 have similar displays.

Further, the special symbol display device included in the function display unit 1400 executes a variable display of the special symbol, and the main control MPU 1311 includes information for determining the mode of variable display of the production symbol and instructs the start of variation. A command is sent to peripheral control board 1510. On the liquid crystal display device, effects such as characters and the like are displayed while dynamically displaying effects symbols are being displayed. Furthermore, in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the performance symbols, performances using movable accessories, LEDs, lamps, etc. are also performed.

In FIG. 395, among the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310, certain wirings other than the wiring that supplies power to the main control board (for example, wirings connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) are disconnected. Then (time t21), a wiring connection failure flag is set by the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process while the power supply to the main control board 1310 is not cut off (step 02TKS0640). At this time, the setting display 974 may continue to be hidden, or may display an error message. Further, although the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off to indicate that normal gaming cannot be continued, an error display may be displayed. If the special symbol fluctuation display is in progress, the symbol fluctuation is stopped at this point. In addition, although the error LED indicator provided on the payout control board 951 indicates that the connection is abnormal in the drawing, it may be indicated as normal if the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is normal. However, it may also be an error display indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the wiring connection of the main control board 1310.

Further, similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 393 and 394, the performance being executed continues. Since the power supply to the main control board 1310 continues, the performance may be stopped as soon as the wiring connection failure flag is set, but the person who committed the fraudulent act cannot be recognized by the setting display 974 etc. This makes it easier to identify fraudsters by clearly notifying game hall managers and employees about the fraud.

Thereafter, the disconnected wiring is reconnected (time t22), and a wiring reconnection flag is set (step 02TKS0670). Since the wiring reconnection flag is set, the above-mentioned incorrect setting confirmation error is notified by the setting display 974 or the like. Further, the function display unit 1400 performs specific notification. Furthermore, by transmitting a command to stop the performance from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the current performance is stopped and an error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Since the wiring reconnection flag is set at time t22, an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, and the progress of the game is stopped. As a result, the wiring that supplies power to the main control board remains connected, and other wiring (for example, wiring connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) is cut off, and when reconnected, it is removed from the wiring route. Even if an attempt is made to check or falsify the setting value information by illegally using the input, the progress of the game can be forcibly stopped after reconnection, and fraudulent acts can be deterred.

Next, in order to eliminate the incorrect setting confirmation error on the hall side, control will be described when the power to the gaming machine is cut off (time t23) and the power is turned on again (time t24) while performing a setting change operation. While the power is cut off (the shaded area in FIG. 395), the display on the liquid crystal display device and each display, the operation of the presentation device, etc. are interrupted. When the gaming machine is powered on at time t24, processing for starting the gaming machine is started, and in the process it is determined whether a setting change operation is being performed. As mentioned above, the setting change operation can be performed as long as the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power switch 932 is turned on, and the conditions before and after the power is turned on (judgment) is not a question.

Thereafter, when a normal setting change operation is detected and the startup of the gaming machine is completed (time t25), the wiring reconnection flag is canceled and the incorrect setting confirmation error is canceled. Then, the setting state of the gaming machine is set to the setting change state, and the game machine shifts to the setting change mode. The display mode of display means such as the setting display 974 and the function display unit 1400 is as described with reference to FIG. 393. When the setting change is completed (time t26), the processing necessary to start the game, such as clearing the game control area, is executed, and the game becomes ready to start.

Note that in the example shown in Figure 395, the power was turned off and then on again after the wiring was reconnected, but if the setting change operation is performed without turning off the power, the settings will be changed as in the example shown in Figure 394. The change function is configured not to run. That is, the game cannot be resumed unless the power is turned on again, including operating the power switch 932. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is temporarily disconnected and the setting values are changed illegally while the gaming machine is not operating normally.

[23-4-4. If an error occurs when disconnecting the wiring]
Next, minor warnings that allow the game to continue without stopping the game control such as symbol fluctuations and the payout control of prize balls (for example, warning notifications such as "Please return to left-handed batting", warning notifications regarding decorative malfunctions, etc.) The behavior of the gaming machine when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off while a warning notification regarding the amount stored in the tray is occurring will be described. FIG. 396 is a timing chart illustrating control when the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and reconnected during the occurrence of a weak error in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 396, at time t31, the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the foul cover unit 520 is full of game balls stored in it, and a full tank error (minor warning) is notified. At this time, a display notifying the full tank error is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, prompting the user to remove the stored game balls. At this time, the error LED display of the payout control board 951 displays a display corresponding to the full tank error.

If the wiring to the main control board 1310 is disconnected while the full tank error is being reported (time t32), the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off and the function is stopped, as in the case of FIG. 394. Display unit 1400 is completely turned off. On the other hand, since power continues to be supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and various presentation devices, the full tank error display and presentation display on the liquid crystal display device continue. Thereafter, when the wiring to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, power supply is resumed (time t33), a power-on process is executed, and the gaming machine is restarted.

When the restart of the gaming machine is completed (time t34), the wiring connection failure flag is canceled and the wiring reconnection flag is set. By setting the wiring reconnection flag, an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs and is notified by the setting display 974. At this time, the function display unit 1400 executes a specific notification, and the main control board 1310 sends a command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that an error has occurred, so that the corresponding error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Ru. In addition, the operation to recover from the state where the incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred is to cut off the power by directly operating the power switch 932 and change the settings when turning on the power, as described above, and after updating the setting values, the game becomes possible.

By configuring as described above, even if a fraudulent act of cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is performed during an error occurrence, it is possible to make it appear that the error notification continues for the time being. . This increases the possibility that even if someone takes advantage of an error to commit fraud, the person who committed the fraud will remain in the situation until the error notification is canceled, and it is hoped that hall employees will be able to identify the fraudster. can.

Furthermore, in order to further enhance the effect of preventing unauthorized settings in the above-described embodiment, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that an unauthorized settings verification error has occurred. When an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the history information is stored in the history storage section provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and can be displayed on a liquid crystal display device, etc. by accepting a predetermined history display operation. You may also do so. It is desirable that the history storage section be supplied with a predetermined backup power source so as to retain history information even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. In addition, the history information on when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurred should include date and time information extracted from the real-time clock provided on the main control board 1310 or peripheral control board 1510, and the date and time when the wiring connection failure flag was set. It is desirable to store all or part of information, date and time information when the unauthorized setting confirmation error occurred, and date and time information when the unauthorized setting confirmation error was resolved by performing a legitimate setting change operation.

In addition, in order to further enhance the effect of preventing fraud in the above-described embodiment, since the fraudulent settings confirmation error is an extremely important error related to unauthorized changes to setting values, other errors (for example, door frame 3) Error notification processing and output processing from the external terminal board 784 may be given higher priority than errors related to opening, magnetic sensor errors, etc.). Note that in terms of importance, it is equivalent to a RAM error, and it is desirable to set it to the same priority as a RAM error.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there are multiple stages of set values 1 to 6 corresponding to multiple types of operation ratios (that is, probability of hitting a special symbol) for the condition device, and any one of the set values 1 to 6 is set. Although we have shown examples of gaming machines that allow settings (gaming machines that can be set in multiple stages), only one type of operating ratio of the condition device is used, and the corresponding setting value is also set to only setting value 1 (multiple gaming machines). A game machine that cannot be set in stages) is installed as a dummy to carry out the processes related to setting confirmation and setting changes mentioned above, as well as various related parts (setting keys, etc.), and also executes the same process as the incorrect setting confirmation error as a dummy. It may be possible. For gaming machines like this that can only be set to setting value 1 (gaming machines that cannot be set to multiple levels), you can check the settings (actually, you can only check setting value 1) or change settings (actually, you can only check setting value 1). Even though it is possible to set the value (unable to set), there will be no damage to the hall due to unauthorized confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, even if a fraudster commits a fraud using the wrong model, it is possible to grasp the whole picture of the fraud without suffering any damage, or to identify the fraudster himself. It can lead to restraint of behavior.

[24. Special conditions shortened time]
[24-1. Overview of special condition time saving]
In the gaming machines described so far, it is determined whether or not to shift to the time saving state in relation to the result of the special lottery. Therefore, unless the player wins a special lottery, it is not possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (specific gaming state) such as a time saving state. Therefore, players may have to continue playing the monotonous game without being able to win the special lottery for a long period of time, which may significantly reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a gaming machine that can shift to a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player without winning a special lottery will be described. Specifically, if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to a time saving state (special condition time saving). In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is also possible to shift to a time saving state based on winning the special lottery described above (normal time saving).

To explain the time-saving state of this embodiment, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of the lottery (normal lottery) in which the second starting port 2004 is opened is set higher than the normal state, and when the lottery is won, the second starting port 2004 is opened. 2004 is set to be open for a long time. In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving state is executed with the same content whether it is normal time saving or special condition time saving, but the time saving state such as the type of special lottery result, normal time saving or special condition time saving, etc. The number of times the time-saving state continues (the number of times the time-saving state continues) and the opening time may be varied depending on the transition conditions. In addition, the probability of the normal lottery is set to be the same and high regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or in the time saving state (100% winning is possible). The opening time may be increased.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the time saving state ends by winning a special lottery and moving to the next gaming state based on the result of the special lottery. Furthermore, even if the game is played a predetermined number of times without winning the special lottery, the game mode shifts to the normal game mode and the time saving mode ends. In this way, the time saving state continues until a predetermined condition such as winning a special lottery or executing a predetermined number of symbol variations (special lottery) is satisfied.

[24-2. Basic flow of special condition time saving]
Next, special condition time saving control in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. The special condition time saving of this embodiment is controlled such that the time saving state is entered when the number of times the special lottery is not won consecutively (time saving transition count) reaches a predetermined number (time saving transition number). In addition, since the special condition time saving has the aspect of relief when it is difficult to win the special lottery, the time saving transition count may not be updated when the probability of winning the special lottery is high.

Further, in the normal gaming state, since the second starting port 2004 is not opened, the time saving transition count is updated if the special lottery when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 is not won. Note that if the game machine is capable of winning a prize in the second starting opening 2004 even if it is not in the time saving state, the time saving transition count may be updated even when winning in the second starting opening 2004. In other words, as described above, if the normal lottery is set to have a high probability of winning in the normal state as well as in the time-saving state, a game ball will enter the second starting slot 2004 in the normal state, so this winning will also cause the time-saving shift. The count may also be updated.

The time saving transition count is updated in a process called from the special symbol/special electric accessories control process (step 01TKS0080) in the game-enabled process (FIG. 354), and the specific process content will be described later. The time-saving shift count may be updated by adding from 0, or by subtracting the time-saving shift count from the initial value. Examples of updating the time-saving transition count by addition and updating the time-saving transition count by subtraction will be described separately later.

In updating by addition, when the time saving transition count reaches the number of time saving transitions, the time saving state is entered, and since the time saving transition count stored in the main control RAM 1312 when the gaming control program is executed matches the value of the actual time saving transition count, Management such as debugging can be easily performed.

On the other hand, in updating by subtraction, when the time saving transition count becomes 0, the time saving state is entered. When updating the time-saving transition count by subtracting it, the time-saving transition count will never be larger than the number of time-saving transitions, so it is possible to suppress the capacity of the area in the main control RAM 1312 that stores the time-saving transition count. It becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to simplify the control related to the time-saving transition count when the number of time-saving transitions is reached. For example, when adding and updating the time-saving transition count, control to stop the addition when the time-saving transition count is reached, etc. However, if the comparison value is 0, it can be processed with one instruction, which simplifies control, reduces program size, and speeds up the program.

When the time-saving state is entered by the special condition time-saving function and the time-saving state continues for a predetermined number of times without winning the special lottery, the game returns to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured such that when returning to the normal gaming state from the time saving state due to the special condition time saving function, the game machine does not shift to the time saving state using the special condition time saving function again until the time saving transition count is cleared. . This is because the number of time-saving transitions will not be reached again unless the conditions for clearing (initializing) the time-saving transition count are met. Naturally, if the time saving transition count is cleared at the timing of returning to the normal gaming state, it becomes possible to transition to the time saving state using the special condition time saving function, and it may be implemented in this way.

[25. Special condition time saving (time saving transition count: additional update)]
As described above, the time saving transition count for controlling the transition to the time saving state based on the special condition time saving is updated by addition or subtraction. Here, an example in which the time saving transition count is updated by addition will be described.

[25-1. Control of time-saving state by special condition time-saving]
[25-1-1. Control from start to end of time-saving state due to special condition time-saving]
First, control from the start to the end of the special condition time reduction will be explained in chronological order with reference to timing charts. Special conditions The start condition for time saving is that after the time saving transition count is cleared, if the special lottery is not won 300 times in a row (the number of time saving transitions), the time saving state is entered. Note that the maximum number of times that the time saving state can be continued is 100 times, and the maximum number of times that the time saving state can be continued due to normal time saving and the maximum number of times that the time saving state can be continued due to special condition time saving are the same number of times, but they may be different. It is preferable that the start condition for the special condition time saving is such that the number of times after the time saving transition counter is cleared is about three times the so-called jackpot probability (normal jackpot probability) (for example, 800 to 900 times). Further, it is preferable that the number of times that time saving is granted due to the special condition time saving is within a range of about three times the jackpot probability (for example, 900 times or less). Note that the number of time savings granted may be different for each setting, or may be the same regardless of the setting, but it is preferable to keep it within a range of about 3 times in any setting. .

Here, the state of each component in the control to shift to the time saving state based on the special condition time saving will be explained. FIG. 397 is a timing chart illustrating the control for shifting to the time saving state based on the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 397, the control from clearing the time saving transition count due to winning of the special lottery to transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be explained.

Time t1 is the timing at which the jackpot ending executed at the end of the jackpot game state due to winning the special lottery ends, that is, the timing at which the game shifts to the time saving state. While the jackpot gaming state continues, the value of the time saving transition count in the symbol variation of the special lottery that caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is set. Referring to FIG. 397, the values of the time saving transition count, the remaining number of special condition satisfaction, and the time saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor are set to the same value from the transition to the jackpot game state until the end. Note that the number of remaining states may be set to "1" since the number of times the jackpot game state continues is set, or may be set to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Further, the performance display monitor may display information related to game performance such as a base value and set value in addition to the value of the time saving transition count.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the time-saving transition count is cleared at the timing when the jackpot ending ends, that is, at the timing at which the game shifts to the time-saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 397, the time saving transition count is added and updated, so the time saving transition count is set to "0". Note that when updating the time-saving transition count by subtracting it, the number of time-saving transitions (300 times) is set. Further, details regarding clearing the time saving transition count will be described later.

Further, at the timing of clearing the time saving transition count, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is set to "300", and the remaining number of times of the time saving state is set to "100". The remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied can be calculated based on the time saving transition count and the number of time saving transitions, so it can be calculated when necessary, for example, when transmitting the special condition remaining number of times command to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510. You can also do this. Note that when updating the time-saving transition count by subtraction, the remaining number of special condition satisfaction and the time-saving transition count have the same value, and may be stored in the same variable within the program. Thereby, storage capacity can be reduced.

Time t2 is the timing at which the variable display of special symbols is executed for the first time after shifting to the time saving state. The time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and after the update is reflected on the display on the performance display monitor. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 is given a command to notify the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, a command to notify the symbol type of the stopped symbol, a command to notify the pending number of special symbol fluctuation displays, and a command to notify the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation ( A command to notify the user of the current gaming state) and a command to notify the remaining number of times of the current gaming state are transmitted. Details of the various commands will be explained with reference to FIG. 400.

Time t3 is the timing at which the variable display of the special symbols ends. When the variable display of the special symbol ends, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is updated. At this time, a command to instruct the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the variable display of the special symbols, a command to notify the gaming state when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, and a command to notify the updated remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is sent. be done. Details of these commands will be explained with reference to FIG. 400.

After that, when the stop symbol is determined, the next variable display starts (time t4). Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery in the time saving state, the time saving state ends (time t5). At this time, the remaining number of times in the time saving state becomes "0" and updating (counting) is stopped. On the other hand, the time saving transition count continues to be counted.

When the time saving state ends, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. At this time, the number of remaining states in the normal gaming state is not updated because it does not need to be managed (it cannot be managed). In addition, when shifting to the normal gaming state, the number of remaining states may be set as the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied. This is because if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times (number of times of time saving transition = 300 times) in succession after the time saving transition count is cleared, the normal game state shifts to the time saving state and the normal gaming state ends.

As the game progresses in the normal gaming state, when the time saving transition count reaches a predetermined number (time saving transition count = 300 times) and the relevant variable display ends (time t6), the remaining number of times the special condition is met for transitioning to the time saving state. becomes 0, the special condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to a time saving state (special condition time saving). When transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, updating of the time saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is stopped. Further, the upper limit number of times the time saving state can be continued (100 times) is set as the number of remaining states. Note that when the time-saving shift count reaches a predetermined number of times (time-saving shift count=300 times), which is the upper limit, the value is maintained without being updated.

After that, if the special lottery is not won before the time saving state continues for the maximum number of times (100 times) after shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the state shifts to the normal gaming state (time t7). . At this time, the end of the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving is not a clearing condition for the time-saving transition count, so the value of the time-saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied will be maintained, so the special condition will not be cleared until the time-saving transition count is cleared. There will be no transition to the time saving state due to conditional time saving.

By not setting the end of the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving as a clearing condition for the time-saving shift count, it is possible to suppress consecutive transitions to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving from occurring. This can prevent the player's expectations from becoming too high. Furthermore, it becomes possible to adjust the base value of the gaming machine so that it does not become too high, and it becomes possible to play the game with appropriate settings.

[25-1-2. Clearing (initialization) of conditions for transition to time-saving state due to special condition time-saving]
In the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, if the player does not win a predetermined number of consecutive special lottery after the time saving transition count is cleared, the time saving state is entered. In this embodiment, the conditions (special conditions) for clearing (initializing) the time saving transfer count are (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) according to a predetermined procedure, (2) when a special lottery is won. (After the jackpot game ends). (2) The case where the player wins the special lottery (after the jackpot game ends) is as described above.

Here, a case where the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) according to the predetermined procedure of condition (1) will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the operations for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clearing) include (a) operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone, and (b) pressing the setting key 971. There are two types of cases in which the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while being operated.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, (a) when operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone (first operation), the time saving transition count is cleared. On the other hand, in (b) when operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; setting change operation), the time saving transition count is not cleared. This is because if the setting key 971 is required to be operated when clearing the time saving transition count, the time saving transition count cannot be easily cleared. By making it easier to clear the time saving transition count, employees of the game parlor can easily manage the special condition time saving of the game machine.

Note that, unlike the above example, (a) the time saving transition count is not cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, and (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971. The configuration may be such that the time saving transition count is cleared when the time saving transition count occurs. Clearing the time-saving transfer count, which is a condition for granting the special condition time-saving, is important for the operation of a gaming parlor because it is directly linked to gaming profits. For this reason, (b) when operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971 to clear the time-saving transition count, the authority with the key necessary to operate the setting key 971 can manage the clearing. This makes it easier to properly (safely) manage the gaming hall.

[25-1-3. Update of time-saving transition count after RAM clear operation]
Here, control of the gaming machine when executing the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation) will be explained. First, before explaining the control during execution of each operation, an overview will be given of the case where the RAM becomes abnormal when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, it is determined whether the set value is abnormal (a value other than 0 to 5). If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the initial value is set to the set value, the time saving transition count is cleared, and the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming state. If the set value is not determined to be abnormal, then the checksum, power outage flag, and RAM outside the gaming area are checked, and even if any of the settings are determined to be abnormal, the RAM is set to an abnormal state. At this time, unless the set value is determined to be abnormal, the time saving transition count is not cleared and the value before the power cut is held. After that, the game is stopped due to the RAM abnormality, and when the timer interrupt processing is executed, it is determined whether the RAM is abnormal (including during setting change/confirmation), and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the processing related to the game. Determine.

The initial value of the time saving transition count is set only when the set value is determined to be abnormal and when the jackpot ending ends, except when the first operation is executed, and the initial value is not set at other times. Further, it is not determined whether or not the value of the time saving transition count is abnormal. The reason why the time saving transition count is not judged as abnormal is that if the set value is abnormal, there is a high possibility that the time saving transition count is also abnormal, so it is considered that it is sufficient to judge based on the setting value abnormality alone. It is.

Next, a description will be given of control when the first operation or the second operation is executed and the gaming machine is powered on without determining that the set value is abnormal. FIG. 398 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on after performing the first operation. FIG. 399 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on after executing the second operation. In the example shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the time saving transition count is cleared in the case of the first operation (operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone), and the second operation (operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971). ) indicates control that does not clear the time-saving transition count.

In the example shown in FIG. 398, control of each component will be described when the power is turned off while the game continues in the normal gaming state and the power is turned on while executing the first operation. In this case, the time saving transition count is cleared during the initialization process when the power is turned on.

When the power is cut off at time t11, the variable display of the special symbols is interrupted and the performance display monitor becomes non-display. At this time, the backup power supply maintains the time saving transition count in a predetermined area in the main control RAM 1312 even during the power outage. At this time, the value of the time saving transition count is "249".

Thereafter, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (first operation) and the power is turned on (time t12), initialization processing (FIG. 21 etc.) is executed. At this time, since the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the game control work area of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared. Furthermore, since the first operation has been executed, the value of the time saving transition count is also cleared during the initialization process (time t13). In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the performance display is not reflected on the display of the performance display monitor immediately after the value of the time saving transition count is cleared, but is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed after the initialization processing is completed. It is reflected in the monitor process (step 01TKS0070). Note that when information is displayed on the performance display monitor after the power is turned on, the value of the time saving transition count before the power cut is displayed on the performance display monitor. On the other hand, if the display of the performance display monitor is updated only in the performance display monitor processing executed by the timer interrupt processing, the value of the time saving transition count will not be displayed until the game is restarted, and after the game is restarted or cleared. The time saving transition count value (“0”) will be displayed.

When the initialization process is completed, the game is restarted with the value of the time saving transition count cleared (time t14). Since interrupts are permitted in the initialization process, the timer interrupt process is executed, and the value of the time saving transition count cleared by the performance display monitor process is reflected on the performance display monitor. Then, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, a variable display of special symbols is started, and the time saving transition count is updated at the start of the variable display. Note that since the time-saving transition count is updated after being displayed on the performance display monitor, the display on the performance display monitor is reflected at the next interrupt after the time-saving transition count is updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 399, control of each component will be explained when the power is turned off while the game continues in the normal gaming state and the power is turned on while executing the second operation. In this case, the setting change function is executed during the initialization process when the power is turned on, but the value of the time saving transition count is maintained at the value before the power is turned off.

When the power is cut off at time t21, the variable display of special symbols is stopped and the performance display monitor is hidden, similar to the state at time t11 shown in FIG. 398. Thereafter, when the power is turned on (time t22) while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 (second operation), initialization processing is executed. At this time, the main control RAM 1312 game control work area is cleared, but the value of the time saving transition count is maintained. After executing the initialization process, the mode shifts to the setting mode (time t23). While in setting mode, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor.

In the game machine of this embodiment, it is possible to clear the work area for game control by specifying an area. For example, even if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, the area in which setting value information is stored is not initialized (RAM cleared) and the stored contents remain unchanged. Therefore, when performing the second operation to initialize the gaming machine, exclude the area where the time-saving transition count is stored from the target of initialization (RAM clear), and restart the gaming machine while maintaining the time-saving transition count. to start.

In this way, when the gaming machine is initialized while performing the second operation, the time saving transition count (249) before the power cut is maintained even after the initialization process is executed. Then, after the game is restarted at time t24, the value of the time saving transition count at the time before the power cut (time t21) is displayed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. After that, when the game ball enters the starting winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol will start, the time saving transition count will be updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance will be updated by the performance display monitor process executed at the next interrupt timing. The updated time saving transition count is displayed on the display monitor.

In addition, if a value corresponding to the time saving transition count is displayed on the LCD screen to notify the player of the occurrence of the special condition time saving, the screen will remain displayed even if the time saving transition count has been cleared. be done. The screen display of the liquid crystal display device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the display is updated based on the command sent from the main control board 1310 to notify the value corresponding to the time saving transition count when the game is resumed. . This eliminates the need for special control on the peripheral control board 1510 side in response to clearing the time-saving transition count, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control. Note that the display contents on the screen may be cleared when an abnormality occurs.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a means for checking the value corresponding to the time-saving transition count, regardless of whether or not the value corresponding to the time-saving transition count is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. ing. The confirmation means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device, may be a display such as the function display unit 1400, or may be a display other than this. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as mentioned above, the value of the time saving transition count is displayed on the performance display monitor.

When the time saving transition count is cleared, a common notification sound is output for the first operation and the second operation. Furthermore, in the case of the second operation, a notification sound may be output at the timing of the operation of the setting key 971. At this time, the process of clearing the RAM may be executed after the setting change is finalized, or the RAM may be cleared in advance before the setting change is made, and then the setting change may be finalized. Note that the output of the notification sound can be terminated by a predetermined operation. For example, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be terminated, or the power of the gaming machine may be turned off. When the first operation and the second operation are executed, not only the notification sound but also the screen display of the liquid crystal display device may be used in common. In this case, it is not necessary that all the screen displays be the same, as long as at least some of them are the same. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the time-saving transition count has been cleared due to the occurrence of an abnormality during the game, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that different notification sounds may be used for the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation). At this time, a common sound is output as BGM, and different announcements are made for SE and audio (for example, when performing a RAM clear operation, a voice saying "RAM has been cleared", and when changing settings, a voice saying "Settings have been changed") (output) so that it is possible to distinguish the situation in which the RAM has been initialized.

As described above, (a) the time saving transition count is cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, and (b) the time saving transition count is cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971. Although we have described an example in which the time saving transition count is not cleared when (a) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 Control may also be provided to clear the time-saving transition count when the time saving transition count occurs. Furthermore, even if the time saving transition count is cleared in either of the following cases: (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone; (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971; good.

Further, in both operations (a) and (b), the RAM is cleared and the data contents related to the monitor display are also reset (cleared). From the perspective of hall management, it is considered convenient to be able to operate all at once when clearing the time-saving transition count, so the monitor display has also been cleared. Note that since the monitor display is updated as the time saving transition count is updated, it may be maintained as it is without being reset (cleared) at the time of RAM clearing. This makes it possible to reduce the process of resetting (clearing) the monitor display, thereby reducing the program capacity.

[25-2. Commands related to special condition time saving]
In the control performed from the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 until the end of the variable display of special symbols based on the special lottery due to the starting winning, the main control board is used to execute effects according to the progress of the game. Various commands are sent from 1310 to peripheral control board 1510. Based on these commands, effects corresponding to the special time saving conditions are also executed. Each command will be explained below.

FIG. 400 is a diagram showing an example of a command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The commands shown in FIG. 400 are only a part, and various commands other than the examples shown in the figure are included as needed. A command mainly consists of a "status" indicating the type of command and a "mode" indicating detailed contents of the command, each of which is 2 bytes.

[25-2-1. Special drawing prize-related commands]
When a starting prize is won for the first starting port 2002, a special lottery is executed in the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, and commands related to the starting prize and the special lottery are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. For example, the commands include commands for instructing the execution of performances associated with starting opening winnings (increase in the number of pending activations) and pre-read performances based on the predetermined results of a special lottery. Note that the preliminary determination of the special lottery is executed based on the starting memory (random value) acquired at the time of starting winning.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, commands whose category is "Special drawing prize" correspond to these commands. The "starting hole winning command" is transmitted when a game ball wins in the starting winning hole. At this time, a different command may be used for each starting port, or it may be specified by a "mode" value.

The "Specification command for the number of special drawings reserved at the time of winning" is a command for transmitting the number of pending special figures at the time of winning the starting opening. It may be transmitted at the time of winning the starting slot, that is, when the number of pending operations increases, and may be transmitted only when the pre-lottery is won and the pre-read effect can be executed. Note that whether or not to actually execute the pre-read effect may be determined by the peripheral control board 1510, or the pre-read effect (so-called fake effect) may be executed even in the case of non-winning. You can.

In addition, the "command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols at the time of winning", similar to the "command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation", sets different "status" for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, and sets the "mode". The number of pending operations may be specified. On the other hand, the "status" may be a common value, the upper bits of the "mode" specify the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the lower bits specify the number of pending operations.

The "Special symbol type pre-reading command" and the "Fluctuation pattern pre-reading command" are sent when a special lottery pre-determination is won, and may be sent together with the "Special drawing number reservation command when winning", but peripheral control It is sufficient if it is transmitted before the prefetch effect is executed on the board 1510. The "special symbol type pre-reading command" is a command that notifies the type (winning type) of the special symbol (stop symbol) specified at the time of preliminary determination of the special lottery. The "variation pattern pre-reading command" is a command that notifies the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol. "Special symbol type pre-reading command" and "variation pattern pre-reading command" may be used as separate commands as different "statuses" for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, or as a common "status" value of "mode". They may be distinguished by value.

[25-2-2. Special figure fluctuation related commands]
If the variable display of special symbols continues after winning in the starting slot, the starting memory acquired at the time of winning the starting prize is retained up to a predetermined number. When the ongoing variable display of the special symbol ends, the variable display of the special symbol based on the suspended starting memory is started. At the start of the special symbol variation, a command related to the special symbol variation display game (variable display of special symbols) corresponding to the result of the special lottery and a command related to the game state at the time of execution of the special symbol variation display game are transmitted.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, commands whose category is "special figure variation" correspond to these commands. Regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, and a symbol stop command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. You may specify whether it is special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 by "status" or by "mode". In the example shown in FIG. 400, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is specified by the "status", and different values are set and distinguished in the "status" depending on whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is used. An overview of each command will be explained below. Although the special symbol 1 will be explained here, the special symbol 2 also has a similar configuration.

"Specification command of number of special symbols on hold at start of variation" is a command for transmitting the number of pending special symbols at the start of variable display of special symbols. It is sent when the special symbol starts changing, that is, when the number of pending operations decreases. Separate "statuses" may be set for the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, and the number of pending operations may be specified in the "mode". On the other hand, the "status" may be a common value, the upper byte of the "mode" specifies the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the lower bit specifies the number of pending operations.

The "special symbol 1 variation pattern command" is a command that notifies the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol 1, and is transmitted when the variation of the special symbol 1 starts. "Special figure 1 symbol type command" is a command that notifies the type of symbol in the variable display of symbol 1 as a result of special lottery. Specifically, when the variation of special symbol 1 starts, "special figure 1 variation pattern command ” will be sent immediately after.

The "special symbol 1 symbol stop command" is transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol 1 ends, that is, after the variable time has elapsed. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the "special symbol 1 symbol stop command", it ends the performance related to the variable display of the special symbol 1 and displays the result of the special lottery.

The "Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Command", "Special Figure 2 Symbol Type Command", and "Special Figure 2 Symbol Stop Command" are used to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of information about the special symbol 2 instead of the special symbol 1. .

[25-2-3. Status-related commands]
Furthermore, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify information regarding the gaming state. Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect according to the gaming state based on the notified command. The commands for notifying information regarding the gaming state include commands for notifying the current gaming state and commands for notifying information regarding transition to another gaming state.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, commands whose category is "status" correspond to these commands. The "state command at power-on" is a command that notifies the gaming state when the power is turned on, and notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming state specified from the RAM information backed up after recovery from a power outage, and To execute a performance corresponding to a game state.

"Special symbol variation state command" is a command that notifies the gaming state at the start of variation of the special symbol, and performs an effect corresponding to the notified gaming state as necessary. At this time, commands may be distinguished by different "status" for each gaming state, or may be distinguished by "mode" as a common "status".

"Special symbol stop state end command" is a command that notifies the gaming state at the end of the variation of the special symbol, and if necessary (for example, when the gaming state is switched), the production corresponding to the notified gaming state will be executed. Execute. Furthermore, upon receiving the command, parameters related to the gaming state may be updated (initialized).

The "remaining state number command" is a command that notifies the remaining number of times the current gaming state continues (the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed). The number of remaining states subtracted according to the progress of the game is notified. Since the number of remaining states can be set to a value larger than 1 byte (255) (2 bytes), the command is divided into a command for transmitting the upper byte and a command for transmitting the lower byte. The "transition destination command at the end of variation" is a command for specifying the destination gaming state when transferring from the current gaming state to another gaming state.

In addition, the transition to another gaming state may be determined based on a change in the "remaining state number command" instead of the "special figure stop state end command". In this case, the transition of the gaming state can be determined at the timing when the number of remaining states changes from "1" to "0". Since the normal gaming state continues unless a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the player wins a special lottery and shifts to the time saving state), it is not possible to define the number of remaining states in the normal gaming state. Therefore, for reasons such as program simplification, it is conceivable to implement the system so that commands are continuously transmitted with the number of remaining states set to "0". In this case, it is necessary to determine the transition of the gaming state based on a change in the number of remaining states, rather than determining the transition of the gaming state only based on the number of remaining states.

Furthermore, by notifying the number of remaining states, it is possible to perform a countdown effect that suggests a transition to a gaming state. For example, in a countdown performance, the notification of the remaining number of times until the transition to the time saving state reaches a specific number starts to be notified, and the normal performance continues until the number reaches this specific number.

In addition, in order to prevent discrepancies between the contents of the pre-reading presentation and the actual lottery results due to the difference between the gaming state at the time of starting winning and the gaming state at the time of lottery execution due to the notified number of remaining states, a pre-reading presentation is provided. It becomes possible to suppress the execution of For example, when the table of variation patterns is divided into a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state, the pre-reading performance is prohibited for a predetermined remaining number of times (maximum number of reservations) for switching to the variation pattern table of the time-saving state.

Even if the execution of the look-ahead effect is stopped and the countdown effect is being executed, the probability of winning does not change, but there is a possibility of winning the special lottery. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a special lottery is won during execution of the countdown performance, the countdown performance is interrupted and ends without restarting even if the number of executions of the countdown performance remains. This is because when winning the special lottery, the game state shifts to a different game state from the one suggested by the countdown effect.

Further, the countdown performance is also interrupted when a RAM abnormality occurs during the execution of the countdown performance. At this time, even if the game machine can be restarted normally, the execution of the countdown performance that is being executed is stopped and the game is resumed in the normal game state. This is because values such as the number of remaining states will be initialized when the gaming machine is restarted (power cycled) to resolve the RAM error, making it impossible to continue playing from the state before interruption. be. In addition to the RAM abnormality, a magnetic abnormality is also detected and the countdown performance is interrupted even when the game is in a stopped state, and even if the magnetic abnormality is resolved, the game is started from the normal gaming state. Since magnetic abnormality cannot occur under normal gaming conditions (it can only occur due to unauthorized operation), the countdown performance is interrupted in order to intentionally reduce the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if a minor problem such as a ball jam occurs and the door is opened to resolve the problem, the countdown performance will be temporarily interrupted. At this time, the game is continued by re-closing the door that was opened after eliminating the ball jam, etc., and the interrupted countdown performance is restarted. That is, if the door is opened during the countdown performance, the countdown performance is temporarily interrupted, but the countdown performance is restarted when the door is closed. Ball jamming is a problem that can occur without any fraudulent activity, and opening the door is also performed as part of general maintenance. Therefore, the gaming machine of this embodiment controls the game to continue.

In the game machine of this embodiment, there are a plurality of factors that interrupt the execution of the countdown performance, and depending on the interruption factor, it can be determined whether to restart the countdown performance or not to resume the countdown performance while it is interrupted. Therefore, if a restartable factor occurs during the countdown performance, the countdown performance can be restarted after the interruption factor is resolved, thereby preventing the game from becoming less interesting. Additionally, if the cause of the interruption is due to a special situation (RAM abnormality, etc.), by preventing the countdown performance from restarting, it is possible to prevent the countdown performance from being restarted despite the situation where the countdown performance would not normally be executed. are doing.

Note that even if the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied reaches a predetermined remaining number of times for switching to the variable pattern table in the time-saving state, the pre-read effect may be executed without being prohibited. At this time, a look-ahead effect different from the usual one may be performed. For example, if you win a lottery based on the starting memory in which the remaining number of times the special condition is met (remaining number of times before transitioning to the time saving state) is held within a predetermined remaining number of times, an effect that notifies you that the special condition time saving will not occur. (Special condition time-saving generation suppression effect) may be executed. Thereby, a performance is executed to notify that the special condition time reduction will not occur even though the special condition time reduction should occur, thereby suggesting to the player that a jackpot will occur. In this way, the special condition time saving function is activated after a predetermined number of fluctuations have been completed after the end of the jackpot (or the end of probability fluctuation), but if a predetermined condition is met (for example, the remaining number of times until the time saving state is reached) (in the case of winning a lottery based on the start memory that is held within a predetermined remaining number of times), it is decided internally to suppress the activation of the special condition time saving function, and based on this decision, the remaining number of times display will be changed to a predetermined number of times. A special look-ahead effect (special condition time-saving suppression effect) may be executed during the display period.

As described above, by notifying the number of remaining states from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to make a performance that suggests useful information to the player, thereby diversifying the variations of the performance, and It becomes possible to suppress discrepancies between the contents and the actual lottery results, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times after the time saving transition count is cleared (initialized), the game machine shifts to the time saving state (special condition time saving). Therefore, the main control board 1310 counts the number of consecutive times the special lottery has not been won (time saving transition count). Therefore, the main control board 1310 creates a "remaining number of special condition satisfaction command" based on the counted time saving transition count, and sends it to the peripheral control board 1510. When the time-saving shift count is updated by addition, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is calculated from the difference between the time-saving shift count and the time-saving shift count. When the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the time-saving transition count may be made to correspond to the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit only the command indicating the value of the time saving transition count, without generating and transmitting the remaining number of special condition satisfaction commands to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 calculates the remaining number of times until the special condition is satisfied by executing predetermined arithmetic processing based on the command indicating the value of the time saving transition count. Specifically, when clearing the time-saving transition count, "0" is set, and when the time-saving transition count is added and updated, the calculation result (time-saving transition number) with the number of time-saving transitions managed by the peripheral control board 1510 is set. - Display the command value (time saving transition count) as the remaining number of times. If the number of time-saving transitions is different for each model (series), identify the model from the command containing the model specifications received when the power is turned on, and select the number of time-saving transitions from a predefined table of time-saving transitions. You can do it like this. On the other hand, if you set the number of time-saving transitions when clearing the time-saving transition count and subtract and update the time-saving transition count, the count value of the received command indicating the value of the time-saving transition count is used as is and displayed as the remaining number of times. You may.

When the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes "0" and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function, the value of the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes "0" while the time-saving state continues. maintained. Furthermore, when the time-saving state by the special condition time-saving function returns to the normal gaming state, since the time-saving transition count has not been cleared, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied remains "0". Therefore, as mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the game machine returns to the normal gaming state from the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function, it will not return to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function until the time-saving transition count is cleared. It is now impossible to migrate. That is, even in the same normal gaming state, there are cases where the special condition time reduction occurs and cases where it does not occur.

In addition to the commands illustrated in FIG. 400, commands classified as "state" include "state command at power-on" and "state command at power-on" that notify the gaming state at power-on. It includes a "return destination command when power is turned on" that is sent immediately after and allows specifying the return destination of gaming control.

[25-3. Control when transitioning to time-saving state]
The normal time saving is the same as the conventional control, and after the special lottery is won and the jackpot game state that occurs when the accessory continuous operation device is activated ends, the time saving state is entered. The performance during the time saving state is also the same as the conventional game control (normal time saving performance), and for example, a performance such as setting a background different from that in the normal game state is executed.

In the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as explained in FIG. (when special conditions are met), the state shifts to the time saving state. Specifically, the time saving state is entered at the timing when the remaining number of times the special condition is met becomes 0 from 1. When the time-saving transition count is updated by addition, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes a value obtained by subtracting the time-saving transition count from the number of time-saving transitions, and is updated after the variable display of the special symbol ends. Note that when the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, it may be shared with the time-saving transition count. When the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes 0, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the time saving state in the game-enabled processing of the timer interrupt processing. At this time, an upper limit number of times (100 times) is set as the remaining number of times of the time saving state.

Here, an example of the screen transition (effect mode) when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be explained. FIG. 401 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition when the game machine of this embodiment shifts to a time saving state due to the special condition time saving. In the example shown in FIG. 401, (A) shows a state in which the symbols have stopped in the last symbol variation in the normal game state before shifting to the time saving state. In the game machine of this embodiment, performances such as a countdown performance are not performed until the change immediately before shifting to the time saving state, but as shown in (B), the time saving entry performance is executed when the transition to the time saving state is confirmed.

Note that when the transition to the time saving state approaches, a countdown effect may be executed to display the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition to the time saving state. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. Furthermore, without clearly indicating the remaining number of times, a character may appear or the background color may be changed to suggest a transition to a time saving state.

In the game machine of this embodiment, when the time saving state is entered, the background for the time saving state is set from the background for the normal gaming state, so that the player can recognize that the time saving state has entered. After the time-saving entry effect is executed, the time-saving state screen shown in (C) is displayed. The background of the screen for the time-saving state is different from that of the screen for the normal gaming state, and in the example of FIG. 401, the background of the screen for the normal gaming state is a single color (colorless) for convenience, The background of the screen is shaded. In reality, it is sufficient that the normal game state screen and the time saving state screen are different, and in addition to the background color, the presentation patterns may be different, or different characters may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state of the game machine of this embodiment, since the game ball is fired into the right area of the gaming area (right-handed hitting), an instruction for right-handed hitting is displayed on the time-saving state screen. Additionally, the remaining number of times the time-saving state will continue is displayed. Note that these contents may not be displayed, or other information may be displayed.

When the special condition is satisfied and the variable display symbol is stopped (FIG. 401(A)), a special symbol stop state end command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 along with a special symbol symbol stop command. The peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the current gaming state (normal gaming state) ends with the special pattern stop state end command, and furthermore, after the symbol confirmation time has elapsed, the special condition remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is determined by the special condition remaining number of times command. By being notified that the number of times is 0, it is possible to specify that the state will shift to a time saving state based on the special condition time saving. When the transition to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving is specified, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the time-saving state entering effect (FIG. 401(B)).

When the special symbol starts to fluctuate (FIG. 401(C)), the main control board 1310 sends a fluctuation start command, a special symbol fluctuating state command, a fluctuating pattern command, and a fluctuating symbol type command. These commands specify the variation time and content of the performance associated with the variable display of the special symbols based on the gaming state and the result of the special lottery. Specifically, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern is specified, a variation pattern is selected from the specified variation pattern table, and a corresponding effect is executed. Note that an example of the variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIG. 403. Further, along with these commands, a remaining state count command that notifies the remaining number of time saving states is transmitted. The notified number of remaining state commands can be used to perform a countdown effect or the like that indicates the number of fluctuations until the time saving state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 401(C), the remaining number of time saving states (100 times) specified by the remaining state number command is displayed on the screen.

Further, when the special symbols stop changing, a special symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. At this time, a special condition remaining number of times command is transmitted in which the number of remaining times of special condition being satisfied is set to "0", and transmission of the special condition remaining number of times command is continued until the time saving transition count is cleared. Note that when the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied reaches 0, the transmission of the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied may be prohibited until the time saving transition count is cleared.

[25-4. Control at the end of time saving state]
Next, control at the end of the time saving state will be explained. As mentioned above, the time saving state ends when the special lottery is not won a predetermined upper limit number of times. Note that even if you win the special lottery, the ongoing time-saving state ends, but the time-saving transition count is cleared and a new time-saving state based on normal time saving starts.

In the time saving state due to normal time saving, the time saving transition count continues to be updated, so after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal gaming state, when the remaining number of times the special state is established reaches 0, the time saving state due to the special condition time saving occurs. . On the other hand, in the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the update of the time saving transition count is stopped when the time saving state is transitioned, and the special condition will not be satisfied until the time saving transition count is cleared, so the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. will not migrate.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even in the time saving state, there are cases in which the time saving transition count is updated and cases in which it is not updated. At this time, the player may be able to recognize whether the time saving transition counter is updated or not updated based on the difference in performance mode during the time saving state. If the player can recognize that the time saving transition counter will be updated, it will be possible to make the player expect to switch to the time saving state again even after the ongoing time saving state ends, thereby increasing the player's expectations. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the difference in performance mode while the time saving state continues, for example, contents such as "Time saving transition counter updating" and "Time saving transition counter stopping" may be displayed in the background part, or displayed in the background part of the performance pattern. You may. Further, different effect patterns may be displayed in a state where the time saving transition counter is updated and a state where the time saving transition counter is not updated. Further, the background of the entire screen may be displayed differently, or a character indicating whether or not the time saving transition counter is updated may be displayed.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the performance mode when the time saving state due to the normal time saving is ended is different from the performance mode when the time saving state is ended due to the special condition time saving. Specifically, when the time-saving state ends due to normal time-saving, a time-saving state end effect is explicitly executed, directly or indirectly suggesting the transition to the next time-saving state, and then the game shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state ends due to the special condition time saving, the time saving state end performance is not executed and the game state directly shifts to the normal gaming state. Furthermore, regardless of which time-saving state ends, effects such as changing the background based on the transition to the normal gaming state will be executed, so it is possible for the player to recognize the end of the time-saving state itself. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 402, a specific performance mode at the end of the time saving state will be described. FIG. 402 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the time saving state ends in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 402(A) shows a state in which the remaining number of times of the time saving state is one, that is, a state in which the time saving state ends with the next change.

If the time saving state currently being executed is a time saving state due to special condition time saving, the normal performance in the time saving state is executed even if it is the last variable display (FIG. 402 (B1)). Then, the last variable display ends and the stop symbol is displayed (FIG. 402 (C1)). In other words, in the case of a time-saving state due to a special time-saving condition, even the 100th variation display is controlled in the same way as the 1st to 99th variation displays, and the control is based on a common variation pattern table from the start to the end of the time-saving state. The content of the performance is selected.

When the fluctuating display of symbols ends with the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. At the end of the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving, the end effect etc. will not be executed, and the display of the background etc. will be switched to the display for the normal game state, and the right-click display (arrows, text notations, etc.) for the time-saving state will be turned off. or display it. Further, if there is a pending memory, the variable display of symbols is started (FIG. 402(D)), and the game continues as it is.

On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving, a special effect indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed at the time of the last variable display (FIG. 402 (B2)), and furthermore, the end of the time-saving state is notified after the symbol is stopped and displayed. The end effect is executed (FIG. 402 (C2)). The special performance and the end performance may be a series of performances or may be separate performances.

In addition, in the normal time shortening and the special condition time saving, the shortening fluctuation time other than the reach of the special symbol may be the same, or the shortening fluctuation time other than a part of the reach may be different. However, the stop period (period until the start of the next fluctuation) at the time of failure in the final fluctuation is set to be longer in the normal time reduction than in the special condition time reduction. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure performance time when transitioning from the normal time saving to the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by smoothing the flow of executing the ending performance. On the other hand, the suspension period due to the final change in the special condition time reduction shall be the same or almost the same as the suspension period other than the final change.

At the end of the time saving state due to normal time saving, unlike the case of the time saving state due to special condition time saving, control is executed in which the last (100th) variable display is different from the 1st to 99th variable displays. At this time, the performance content is selected based on a variation pattern table (FIG. 403(B)) that is different from the common variation pattern table (FIG. 403(A)). Thereby, for example, the final variation in the time-saving state due to the normal time-saving can be made longer than the final variation in the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving, and the player's expectations for subsequent games can be increased. Furthermore, instead of switching the variation pattern table only for the final variation, the variation pattern table may be switched in stages according to the number of variations. For example, switching may be performed at each stage from the 1st time to the 50th time, from the 51st time to the 80th time, from the 81st time to the 90th time, and from the 91st time to the 99th time. Regarding the 100th variation, the performance period after the end of the variation is set to be longer than the performance period defined in the fluctuation pattern table of each stage.

FIG. 403 is an example of a variation pattern table of this embodiment. (A) is a table that is commonly used during the normal time-saving state, and may also be used in gaming states other than the time-saving state (for example, the normal gaming state). (B) is a special table used in the case of the final change in the time saving state due to normal time saving. The commonly used table in (A) and the special table used in the final variation of the time saving state due to the normal time reduction in (B) are the variation time and performance in the case of shortening variation where the result of the special lottery is a loss. The contents are different. In addition, when the result of the special lottery of the final variation is a jackpot, the special performance etc. are not performed, and the normal jackpot performance may be performed.

Thereafter, when the symbols stop in the last variable display, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (FIG. 402(D)), and the game continues as it is in the same way as in the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. When shifting to the normal game state, the game progresses with a common performance regardless of whether the time saving state being executed is due to special condition time saving or normal time saving. Therefore, unless the player confirms the special performance and the end performance at the end of the time saving state, it is impossible to determine whether the special condition will be satisfied in subsequent games. As a result, the player will be able to watch the series of effects, thereby increasing the effect of the effects.

The performance while the time saving state continues is the same regardless of whether it is a special condition time saving or a normal time saving, except for the final change. By executing a special effect at the final change in the time saving state due to the normal time saving, it is possible to suggest that if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times thereafter, the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will occur, and the player's expectations It is possible to increase the feeling of playing the game and increase the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving state due to the normal time saving is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving state due to the special condition time saving. It turns out. Specifically, after the time saving state due to the special condition time saving ends, the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will not occur again, whereas the normal gaming state will be entered, whereas after the time saving state due to the normal time saving condition ends, the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will occur. This is an advantageous gaming state for the player in that the game transitions to a normal gaming state in which this can occur. In addition to this, in the normal gaming state after the end of the time saving state due to the normal time saving, the fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than in the normal gaming state after the end of the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, which makes it an advantageous gaming state for the player. good. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving state due to normal time-saving, it may be arranged so that it becomes easier to execute a performance that suggests setting value information of the gaming machine, or it may be arranged so that it becomes easier to perform various look-ahead performances. .

The presentation mode at the end of the time-saving state has been described above, but the relationship with the commands received from the main control board 1310 in order to perform the above-described presentation control will be supplemented. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the end of the time-saving state by the special symbol stop state end command, but since it is sent when the symbol of the final variation at which the time-saving state ends, it cannot perform the production based on the end of the time-saving state. When executed, only limited effects can be executed, which may cause inconvenience. For example, it is not possible to perform the end performance of the time-saving state until after the symbol variation has ended, so only a short-time performance with many restrictions can be performed, so there is a risk that it will not be possible to perform a highly interesting performance.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, a special performance different from the normal one is executed in the last symbol change of the time saving state due to the normal time saving. In addition, if the end of the time-saving state is determined only by the state end command when the special figure is stopped, there is a risk that the special effect (end effect) will not be sufficiently interesting, so the time-saving state included in the remaining state number command By specifying the end timing of the time-saving state based on the number of remaining states, it becomes possible to execute an effect including one or more fluctuations before the end of the time-saving state. For example, by determining the end of the time-saving state at the timing when the number of remaining states changes from 1 to 0, a special effect can be executed at the final change in the time-saving state. Since the remaining state number command is transmitted at the start of symbol variation, when the remaining state number is 1, it can be determined that it is the final variation of the time saving state.

However, although it is possible to specify the end timing of the time saving state in advance based on the number of remaining states, it is not possible to determine whether the time saving state being executed is due to normal time saving or special condition time saving. Here, in the time-saving state due to normal time-saving, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied continues to be updated, and is at least a value larger than 0 (FIG. 397). On the other hand, the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is executed after the special condition is satisfied, and the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is 0. The remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is sent from the main control board 1310 when the symbol confirmation time has elapsed after the symbol is stopped by the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied. It is determined whether the state is due to a normal time reduction or a special condition time reduction, and whether or not a special performance is to be executed. Then, if it is in a time-saving state due to normal time-saving, a special effect different from normal is executed by referring to a variation pattern table different from normal in the last symbol variation, while in the case of time-saving state due to special condition time-saving, a common variation Controls so that special effects are not executed by referring to the pattern table.

From the above, by changing only the reference destination of the fluctuation pattern table, other controls can be made common, so unique performances can be executed while minimizing the complexity of game control (performance control). be able to.

Furthermore, when the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the time-saving state or from the time-saving state to the normal gaming state, the execution of the pre-read performance may be stopped before and after the change in the gaming state. This is because, in the case of transition to the time-saving state due to normal time-saving, the result of the special lottery may have a high probability, and there is a risk that discrepancies may occur in the preliminary determination results. Furthermore, since the performance mode changes depending on the gaming state, this is to prevent performance control from becoming complicated and players from becoming confused due to changes in the performance mode. Note that even if the gaming state changes, if the probability of winning the special lottery remains the same, at least there will be no discrepancy in the results of the preliminary determination, so the pre-read performance may be continued.

Further, the period during which the execution of the pre-reading effect is prohibited may be determined based on the maximum number of reservations (for example, 4). The start of the look-ahead prohibition period is determined based on the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variable pattern look-ahead command in the case of a normal time reduction, and the remaining number of times the special condition is met and the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited in the case of a special condition time reduction. The determination can be made by comparing the period (maximum number of reservations).

Note that the special condition remaining count command is not always sent when there is a remaining count, but it is sent under a specific condition (for example, when there are only a few remaining times (4)). may also be sent. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the number of times until the special condition time saving is activated from being grasped by fraudulently detecting the remaining number of times command. In addition, if the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is sent every time, the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied cannot be immediately sent if it overlaps with another send command (unsent commands remain in the command sending buffer). There is a possibility that the game becomes less interesting due to a shift in the start timing of the performance based on the command. Therefore, by lowering the frequency of transmitting the remaining number of special condition satisfaction commands, it is possible to prevent a shift (delay) in the production start timing due to unsent commands remaining in the command transmission buffer.

[25-5. Modified example]
In the gaming machine described above, if a special lottery based on a game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is not won a predetermined number of times in a row, the special condition is established and the normal gaming state shifts to the time saving state. It was something. In this case, once the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, the time-saving transition count will not be updated, and the game will become monotonous in that the winning lotteries are repeated until the special conditions are met, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. Ta.

[25-5-1. Counting ball entrance]
Therefore, as a modified example of the gaming machine of this embodiment, a gaming machine including a counting ball entry opening unit 2007 capable of updating the time saving transfer count in addition to the first starting opening 2002 will be described. FIG. 404 is a diagram showing a modification of the game board of the game machine of this embodiment. In the gaming board 5 of the gaming machine of this modification, a counting ball opening unit 2007 is arranged on the left side of the gaming area (left-handed hitting area) and above the side unit top 2300. The configuration other than the counting ball entrance unit 2007 has the same configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. 10, so a description thereof will be omitted.

[25-5-2. Structure of counting ball opening]
FIG. 405 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of an example of a counting ball opening unit 2007 arranged in a modified example of the game board of the game machine of this embodiment. The counting ball opening unit 2007 of this modification includes an upwardly opened receiving opening 2007a, and can receive game balls flowing down the left side of the gaming area (left-handed hitting area). The game balls received from the receiving port 2007a are guided to the counting ball port 2007b via a guiding path 2007d formed inside. A sensor (not shown) that detects the passing of game balls is arranged inside the counting ball entrance 2007b, and the main control board 1310 detects the game balls that have entered based on the signal output from the sensor. Count the number of.

A movable piece 2007c that can slide toward the front/rear side of the game board 5 is arranged at the bottom of the guideway 2007d. When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the front side of the game board 5, a game ball can enter the counting ball entry opening 2007b (ball entry permission state). On the other hand, in a state in which the movable piece 2007c slides to the rear side of the game board 5, the game ball falls downward from the guide path 2007d, resulting in a state in which the ball cannot be entered (ball entry not permitted state). Hereinafter, the path along which the game balls move within the counting ball entrance unit 2007 will be explained for each state.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing the moving path of the game ball when the counting ball entrance unit 2007 according to a modification of the present embodiment is in the ball entry permission state, in which (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view, and (B) is a cross-sectional view. It is.

When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the front side of the game board 5 (ball entry permission state), the movable piece 2007c forms the bottom surface of the guide path 2007d, as shown in (A). Thereby, the game balls received from the reception port 2007a are guided from the guiding path 2007d to the counting ball entry port 2007b, and can enter the ball.

FIG. 407 is a diagram showing a movement path of a game ball when the counting ball entrance unit 2007 according to a modification of this embodiment is in a state where ball entry is not permitted, in which (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view, and (B) is a cross-sectional perspective view. It is a diagram.

In the state where the movable piece 2007c slides to the rear side of the game board 5 (ball entry not permitted state), the bottom surface of the guideway 2007d is not formed, and as shown in (A), an opening that opens downward is formed. It is formed. The opening has a size that allows game balls to pass through, and the game balls received from the receiving port 2007a fall (flow down) into the game area below the counting ball opening unit 2007. The fallen game ball rolls toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and flows down toward the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002.

[25-5-3. Ball entry control at counting ball entry port]
As described above, the counting ball entrance unit 2007 can switch whether or not a ball can enter the counting ball entrance 2007b by controlling the position of the movable piece 2007c. The main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the driver for operating the movable piece 2007c, thereby making it possible to control whether or not a ball enters the counting ball opening 2007b depending on the game state or the like.

As a specific example of control, a gate section may be provided for transitioning the counting ball entry port unit 2007 to a ball entry permission state, and the ball entry permission state may be set for a predetermined period of time when the ball passes through the gate. If the condition for transitioning the counting ball entrance unit 2007 to the entry permission state is for the game ball to pass through the gate, a lottery may be performed when the game ball passes through the gate, or the ball entry permission state may always be set. . Even in the case of transitioning to the entry permission state by lottery, the purpose of this modification is to make it easy for the special conditions to be satisfied, so the winning probability is set to be high (approximately 100%). At this time, by arranging the gate section above the counting ball opening unit 2007, the game balls aimed at the gate section are directed toward the counting ball opening unit 2007, which prevents frequent hitting of game balls. You can play the game smoothly without needing it.

Alternatively, the counting ball entry port unit 2007 may be placed in the ball entry permission state when the number of reservations stored in the first starting port 2002 has reached the maximum number. This makes it possible to promote the update of the time saving transition count, and it is possible to hasten the transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. In particular, since you can aim for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 while aiming at the counting ball entry port unit 2007, it is possible to continue updating the time-saving transition count even if the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit, and the game This makes it possible to encourage the active continuation of activities. In addition, if the number of pending memories in the first starting port 2002 has not reached the maximum number, the counting ball entry port unit 2007 is placed in a state where ball entry is not permitted, thereby suppressing the time saving transition count from being updated excessively. , it becomes possible to suppress and adjust an excessive increase in the base value.

Furthermore, the counting ball entrance unit 2007 may be switched between a ball entry permission state and a ball entry disallowance state at predetermined time intervals. At this time, if the number of pending balls has reached the upper limit, the time saving transition count will not be updated due to winnings in the first starting port 2002, so the time required to set the counting ball entry port unit 2007 to the ball entering permission state is set for a longer period of time. You may also set it to . On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls has not reached the upper limit, the player can use the counting ball opening unit to encourage the player to shoot the game balls aiming at the first starting opening 2002 in order to maintain the original gaming experience. In order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter even if you aim for 2007, the time for entering the ball entry permission state may be set to a short time (for example, a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball).

Note that the counting ball entrance unit 2007 for counting the time-saving transition count may be placed not only in the left-handed hitting area but also in the right-handed hitting area, or may be placed in both left and right areas. This makes it possible to hit the game balls differently, increasing the variety of games, and increasing the interest of the game.

[25-5-4. Time-series change in time-saving transition count in this modification]
Here, regarding a gaming machine in which the time-saving transition count is updated when a game ball enters the counting ball entrance unit 2007, time-series changes in the time-saving transition count will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 408 is a timing chart showing changes in the time saving transition count in a modification of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which the ball entry port unit 2007 is always in the ball entry permission state regardless of the number of balls on hold, the gaming state, etc.

As mentioned above, the time saving transition count is the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol 1, or the timing when the entry of a game ball into the counting ball opening 2007b is detected by the counting ball opening switch (not shown). will be updated. Referring to FIG. 408, the variable display of special symbol 1 is started in a state where the time saving transition count is "84", and the time saving transition count is updated to "85" (time t101). While the special symbol 1 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a game ball enters the counting ball entrance 2007b, and the time saving transition count is updated to "86" (time t102). Thereafter, similarly, the time saving transition count is updated by the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the entry of the game ball into the counting ball entrance 2007b. In the example shown in Fig. 408, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the counting ball opening switch changes from ON to OFF, but the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the counting ball opening switch changes from OFF to ON. The migration count may also be updated.

[25-5-5. Lottery based on balls entering the counting slot (starting prize slot)]
In the modified example described above, the time saving transition count is updated when a game ball enters the counting ball entry port 2007b of the counting ball entry port unit 2007. On the other hand, a winning slot that can perform a lottery related to awarding gaming value independently of updating the time saving transfer count may function as the counting ball opening 2007b. In this case, the time saving transfer count may be updated if the lottery is not won. Further, a function for suspending this lottery may be provided. In the case of a special lottery, a pending display is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, but it is not necessary to inform the players about a lottery based on balls entering the counting entry hole 2007b.

The counting ball entry opening 2007b that can perform the above-mentioned lottery may be used as the second starting opening 2004. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second starting slot 2004, a special lottery is executed and the time-saving transition count is updated unless the number of reservations is at the upper limit, but if no prize is won in the special lottery, the time-saving transition count is updated. It may be updated. FIG. 409 is a timing chart when the second starting opening 2004 functions as the counting ball opening 2007b in the modification of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 409, even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to win not only in the first starting hole 2002 but also in the second starting hole 2004, and the corresponding special symbols are displayed in the order in which they are won in the starting winning hole. Fluctuation display starts. Then, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2 are started.

Referring to FIG. 409, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started in a state where the time saving transition count is "71", and the time saving transition count is updated to "72" (time t111). After the variable display of the special symbol 1, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is subsequently executed (time t112) because a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004. At the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2, the time saving transition count is updated to "73". Thereafter, similarly, the time saving transition count is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning start winning hole is started. In addition, a common time saving transfer count is used regardless of the starting winning hole that won the prize.

In addition, it is possible to win in the second starting slot 2004 even in the normal gaming state, and if you update the time saving transfer count when you do not win the special lottery, you can win in the first starting slot 2002 in the normal gaming state. The second starting opening 2004 is given priority to function as a counting ball opening so as not to impair the gameplay. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a winning sound is output, while when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the winning sound is not output. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a specific display may be performed so that the player can recognize that the ball has entered. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a specific display may not be performed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the ball has entered.

As shown above, according to this modification, the second starting port 2004 can function as a counting ball port. In the normal gaming state, by giving priority to the case where the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, it is possible to easily generate the special condition time saving without impairing the gameplay. Further, since there is no need to newly arrange a ball counting hole, the interest in the game can be increased without deteriorating the design cost of the game board.

[25-5-6. others]
In order to shift to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, since the accessory continuous actuation device cannot be activated because the special lottery has not been won, the probability of winning the normal lottery must always be high. This is because if the probability of winning the normal lottery is not high, the second starting opening 2004 will not be in a winning state even if the time saving state is entered, and it will be difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, if the probability of winning in the normal lottery is set to be high, the second start opening 2004 becomes in a winning state every time a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, which may impair the gameplay.

In order to solve the above problem, the gate section 2003 may have the same configuration as the counting ball entrance unit 2007 described above. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the gate section 2003 is set to a state where ball entry is not permitted, so that the normal lottery is not executed, and in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is set to a state where ball entry is permitted, so that the second starting port 2004 is set to a state where ball entry is not permitted. All you have to do is control it so that it is possible.

Further, the second starting port 2004 may have the same configuration as the counting ball entry port unit 2007 described above. By setting the state in which ball entry is not permitted in the normal gaming state and the ball entry permission state in the time saving state, it is possible to control so that winnings cannot be won in the second starting opening 2004 unless in the time saving state.

[26. Special condition time saving (time saving transition count: subtraction update)]
The embodiment in which the time saving transition count is updated by addition has been described above. Next, an example in which the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction will be described.

[26-1. Control of time-saving state by special condition time-saving]
[26-1-1. Control from start to end of time-saving state due to special condition time-saving]
First, when the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction, control from the start to the end of the special condition time saving will be explained. Similarly to the case of updating by addition, the start condition of the special condition time saving is to shift to the time saving state if the special lottery is not won 300 times in a row (the number of time saving transitions) after the time saving transition count is initialized. The same applies to other points such as the maximum number of times the time saving state can be continued.

The time saving transition count that controls the transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is updated in a state transition determination process that determines whether the current gaming state will transition to another gaming state. The state transition determination process is called from the special symbol failure stop process that is executed when the special symbol is a failure and stops at the symbol, and the special symbol failure stop process is called from the game-enabled process (which is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329)). It is called from the special symbol/special electric accessory control process (step 01TKS0080) in FIG. 354).

Hereinafter, specific control regarding the transition of the gaming state including the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be explained with reference to the flowchart. FIG. 410 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of state transition determination processing for determining whether to transition to another gaming state in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the state transition determination process, it first sets the initial value "0" to the identification information (step 03TKS0010). The identification information is a variable that stores information for identifying whether or not to shift the gaming state, and the value is set in the register of the CPU in subsequent processing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the time saving number is 0, that is, whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (step 03TKS0020). The number of time saving times corresponds to the number of fluctuations after the start of the time saving state. In this embodiment, when the time saving state is started, the number of continuations (for example, 100 times) is set as an initial value, and is subtracted by 1 for each change in the special symbol. At this time, if it is in a time saving state, a value of 1 or more will be set for the number of time saving times. Note that the initial value may be set to 0, and control may be performed such that the value is incremented by 1.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the processing from step 03TKS0060 when the time saving number is 0, that is, when the time saving state is not (result of step 03TKS0020 is "yes").

On the other hand, if the time saving number is not 0, that is, in the time saving state (the result of step 03TKS0020 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 subtracts 1 from the time saving number (step 03TKS0030). Furthermore, in order to determine whether the current change is the final change in the time saving state, it is determined whether the number of time saving times is 0 (step 03TKS0040). If the time saving count is not 0, that is, if the time saving state continues (the result of step 03TKS0040 is "no"), the processes from step 03TKS0060 are executed.

On the other hand, when the number of time saving times is 0, that is, when the current change is the final change in the time saving state (result of step 03TKS0040 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 indicates the end of the normal time saving in the identification information. Set "1" (step 03TKS0050).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state (step 03TKS0060). If the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of step 03TKS0060 is "yes"), the processing from step 03TKS0130 onward is executed.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of step 03TKS0060 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the time saving transition count is 0 (step 03TKS0070). If the time saving transition count is 0 (result of step 03TKS0070 is "yes"), processing from step 03TKS0130 is executed.

If the time saving transition count is not 0 (the result of step 03TKS0070 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 subtracts 1 from the time saving transition count (step 03TKS0080). Furthermore, it is determined whether the time saving transition count is 0 (step 03TKS0090). If the time saving transition count is not 0 (result of step 03TKS0090 is "yes"), processing from step 03TKS0130 is executed.

When the time saving transition count is 0 (the result of step 03TKS0090 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 03TKS0100). If the current gaming state is the time saving state (result of step 03TKS0100 is "yes"), processing from step 03TKS0130 is executed.

If the current gaming state is not a time saving state (the result of step 03TKS0100 is "no"), the conditions for transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving are satisfied, and the main control MPU 1311 adds the special condition time saving to the identification information. "2" indicating the start is set (step 03TKS0110). At this time, the next state transition destination information (next state transition destination number area) is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. Further, in order to output a signal (external output signal) from the external terminal, an ON time is set in the external output 3 timer (step 03TKS0120). By setting the ON time in the external output 3 timer, the signal of the external output 3 remains ON for the set ON time. Note that the output timing of the external output signal will be described later with reference to FIG. 423.

The setting of the identification information is completed through the processing up to step 03TKS0120, and thereafter, the gaming state is shifted based on the value of the identification information. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value of the identification information is "0" (step 03TKS0130). If the value of the identification information is "0" (result of step 03TKS0130 is "yes"), there is no need to shift the current gaming state to another gaming state, so the state transition determination process is ended.

If the value of the identification information is not "0" (the result of step 03TKS0130 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a state transition process to shift the current gaming state to another gaming state (step 03TKS0140). The state transition process is a process of determining the destination gaming state based on identification information and the like, and setting necessary information. Details of the state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 411. When the state transition process ends, the main control MPU 1311 sets a command (state transition destination command at the end of variation, state end command at special stop) corresponding to the end of the time saving state or the reaching of the number of time saving transitions (step 03TKS0150). Thereafter, the state transition determination process is ended and the special symbol is returned to the stop process.

Next, a description will be given of the state transition process that is called from the state transition determination process and determines the destination gaming state and sets necessary information. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the procedure of state transition processing according to this embodiment.

When the state transition process is started, the main control MPU 1311 determines the address of the state transition data of the next state transition destination based on the start address of the state transition data and the next state transition destination information (the value of the next state transition destination number area). (Step 03TKS0210). The state transition data defines various data corresponding to the destination gaming state. Details of the state transition data will be described later with reference to FIG. 412.

Next, when the main control MPU 1311 specifies the state transition data to which the state will be transferred next time, it sets the start address of the work area where the state transition data is to be set (step 03TKS0220). Furthermore, the number of times the state transition data is set is set (step 03TKS0230), and the setting values corresponding to the set number of times are read from the specified state transition data and stored in a predetermined work area (step 03TKS0240). When the state transition data corresponding to the next state to be transitioned to is stored in the work area, the state transition process is ended and the process returns to the state transition determination process.

In addition, the state transition process is executed at the timing when the gaming state changes in addition to the state transition determination process called from the special symbol loss stop process. For example, the timing when the game state changes to the high probability state when the jackpot state ends, It is executed at the timing when the time saving state starts (transfers).

The state transition determination process and the state transition process can be executed in common when each gaming state changes at the start of normal time reduction, the end of normal time reduction, the start of special condition time reduction, and the end of special condition time reduction. Since there is no need to provide processing for each switching of each gaming state, it is possible to reduce the program capacity. Furthermore, by standardizing the processing, it is possible to improve the efficiency of debugging compared to providing separate processing, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of development of gaming machines.

Next, a configuration example of state transition data and a work area that stores the state transition data will be described. FIG. 412 is a diagram showing an example of state transition data of this embodiment. In the state transition data, the number of times the state is maintained, the state flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, the next state transition destination number, and the number of times the state is displayed are defined in accordance with the gaming state after the transition. Note that the destination number is given for convenience of explanation. The contents of each item will be explained with reference to the work area (FIG. 413) that stores state transition data.

Furthermore, the state transition data is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 412, and the information set at the time of switching the gaming state can be changed or added as necessary. For example, it becomes possible to specify the destination gaming state. It is sufficient to include at least the status flag and the next status transition destination number.

FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a work area that stores state transition data according to this embodiment. The work area for storing state transition data is allocated to a predetermined area in the main control RAM 1312, and in addition to the area corresponding to each item of state transition data, the work area stores the number of items of state transition data (the number of state setting data, It includes an area for storing "the number of times state transition data is set" set in the process of step 03TKS0230. When transitioning from a current gaming state to another gaming state, state transition data corresponding to the destination gaming state is acquired and stored in a work area.

Next, each item of the state transition data and the work area that stores the state transition data will be explained. The explanation of each item is written in the remarks column of the work area in FIG. 413.

The number of times the state is maintained is the number of times the corresponding gaming state continues after the transition, and for example, if it is a time saving state, it becomes the number of time saving times. The state flag is set to "0" in the case of a low probability non-time saving (normal gaming state), "1" in the case of a high probability time saving (probability variable state), and "2" in the case of a low probability time saving. The probability variation flag is set to "0" when the probability of winning the special lottery is low, and "1" when the probability is high. The time saving flag is set to "0" when the time saving is not activated, and "1" when the time saving is activated. In addition, in order to distinguish between time saving due to special condition time saving and normal time saving, "2" may be set during time saving operation due to special condition time saving. The next state transition destination number is a transition destination number for specifying the next gaming state to which the player will transition if the special lottery is not won for the number of times the state is maintained. The status display count is used to generate the time saving remaining count command, and is substantially the same as the status maintenance count.

To explain specifically, for example, if you win the normal time saving a in the normal game state, the state transition process is called by the big winning opening opening end interval process (at the end of the jackpot ending) (not shown) at the end of the jackpot game state. . In the state transition process, the state transition data corresponding to the normal time saving a (transition destination number 2) is selected, and the number of state maintenance times is "100", the state flag is "2", the probability change flag is "0", the time saving flag is "1", and the next time A state transition destination number "1" and a state display count "100" are set in each work area. As a result, the low probability time saving state is set to continue for 100 fluctuations. When the time saving state by the normal time saving a ends, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so the game returns to the normal gaming state. Also, the probability variation a (transition destination number 4) and the probability variation b (transition destination number 5) have the same setting value, but the production modes are different. Note that since the normal game state changes to a different game state depending on the result of the special lottery, "0" is set as the state transition data and is not defined as the next transition destination number. In addition, if you win a special lottery in the time saving state of normal time saving a and shift to the probability variable state of probability variation a, even if there is a remaining number of times in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state, in the state transition process, the probability change state will be changed. The state transition data corresponding to a (transition destination number 4) is selected and the gaming state is transitioned.

The work area for storing state transition data includes, from the beginning of the area, a state maintenance count area, a state flag area, a definite change flag area, a time saving flag area, a next state transition destination number area, and a state display. A number command area is placed. Following these areas, the number of state setting data is allocated. In addition, a 2-byte area is allocated to the status maintenance count area and status display count command area, and a 1-byte area is assigned to the status flag area, probability change flag area, time saving flag area, and next status transition destination number area. .

Since the state transition data of this embodiment has predetermined values and the setting order, by arranging the work areas according to the order in which the data included in the state transition data is set, the address of each work area can be changed to the state. There is no need to define it in the migration table. Here, the procedure for setting the value set in the state transition data in the work area will be explained. First, the number of state setting data is acquired from the work area. Next, values are obtained one byte at a time from the start address of the state transition data to be set, and the values sequentially obtained from the start of the work area (state maintenance number area) are set. Repeat for the number of state setting data while updating the address to obtain the value and the address of the work area to store the value. Since the value acquisition and work area setting are repeated one byte at a time in this way, the data included in the state transition data is defined in one byte units. Therefore, the number of times the state is maintained and the number of times the state is displayed are divided into an upper byte and a lower byte and defined separately. Further, the number of state setting data corresponds to the total number of bytes of each area, and the difference between the start address of the work area and the address of the area storing the number of state setting data is set on the program. This eliminates the need to redefine the number of status setting data even if the number or size of data included in the status setting data changes, and the program can be used for general purposes without modification. This makes it possible to respond flexibly to the development of gaming machines, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Here, data corresponding to each gaming state included in the state transition data will be explained. In the normal gaming state, the gaming state does not change based solely on the number of fluctuations, so the number of state maintenance times is set to 0. Please note that the time reduction state may be entered on the condition that the user does not win the special lottery a certain number of times consecutively after the time reduction transition count has been initialized (special condition time reduction), but if the time reduction transition count has not been initialized. Since the state does not always shift to the time-saving state, the number of time-saving shifts is not set in the number of times the state is maintained.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, three types of patterns are defined for low probability time saving in which the probability of winning the special lottery is low and the time saving state. Specifically, after winning a special lottery, if you transfer after the jackpot gaming state (normal time saving a), if you transfer based on the result of the special lottery (normal time saving b), after the time saving transition count is initialized. This is a case where you do not win the special lottery a predetermined number of times in a row (special condition shortened time).

Each item of the state transition data and the work area storing the state transition data has been described above. Each data in the state transition data is set to a value according to game specifications, etc., and the number of records increases or decreases according to the type of game state. In addition, if the gaming state to which the game state will be transferred after a specific gaming state ends has been determined in advance, the control to transfer the gaming state can be controlled by setting the number corresponding to the next state to the next state transfer destination number. This can be done based on the information defined in the state transition data, and the destination of the gaming state can be changed without modifying the program code.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing a modification of the state transition data of this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 412, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (result of a special lottery, time-saving shift count), the shifted gaming state continues for the set number of state maintenance times, After that, it was defined to shift to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 414, for example, in the case of normal time saving, the game state changes in the order of normal time saving a-1 time saving state, normal time saving a-2 time saving state, normal time saving a-3 time saving state. do. This makes it possible to vary the performance content for each game state. For example, by associating the performance content with the game state, it is possible to execute a performance that progresses step by step as the game state changes without performing complex control. becomes possible. Further, the table defining the variable time may be switched at the timing of switching the gaming state.

To explain further, if the normal time saving prize is won as a result of the special lottery, the state transition data of the destination number "2" is set and the normal time saving state of a-1 is started. After that, when the state maintenance number of times (50 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "3", so the state transitions to the time saving state of normal time saving a-2, and the corresponding state transition data is Set. Similarly, when the state maintenance number (30 times) of fluctuations is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "4", so it transitions to the time saving state of normal time saving a-3, and the corresponding state transition data is set. Finally, when the state maintenance number (20 times) of variation is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. The same control is performed in the case of a probability change hit.

In the case of special condition time saving, when the condition is met (when the value of time saving transition count goes from 1 to 0), the state transition data with transition destination number "7" is set, and the time saving state of special condition time saving - 1 is set. Start. After that, when the state maintenance number of times (100 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "8", so the state transitions to the time saving state of special condition time saving -2, and the corresponding state transition data is Set. Furthermore, when the state maintenance number of times (700 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by making it possible to transition between gaming states by simply setting data, there is no need to create processing related to gaming state transitions in program code, and it is possible to adapt to changes in specifications. Additions and changes can be easily made by simply modifying the data.

Note that each parameter set in the state transition data is not limited to the example shown in the figure as an example, and may be any information that changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, it is sufficient to include information that specifies the switching timing of the gaming state (for example, the number of times the state is maintained) and information that specifies the destination gaming state (for example, the next state transition destination number), and other information. Information can be set as necessary. Specifically, the information may be information for specifying the gaming state, and may include, for example, information indicating the probability of winning a special lottery, information indicating the probability of winning a regular lottery, and the like. In this way, by including information that specifies the gaming state after the state transition, the processing for shifting the gaming state can be made common, and the gaming control can be simplified, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

The information that specifies the switching timing of the gaming state is, for example, the number of fluctuations mentioned above (the number of times the special lottery is executed, the number of times the state is maintained), and when the game continues for a predetermined number of fluctuations, the game state shifts to the next gaming state. . Furthermore, before the game ends for a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, when winning a special lottery, the game state may shift to another game state due to the establishment of a predetermined condition regardless of the number of fluctuations. Therefore, it is preferable to define not only the switching of the gaming state based on the number of fluctuations, but also the transition of the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition such as winning a special lottery. For example, an item corresponding to a specific flag may be defined in the state transition data, and the gaming state may be shifted when the flag is set to ON. This flag may be checked in regularly executed processing such as timer interrupt processing. In this way, the timing to execute the transition process based on the state transition data as the gaming state transitions is based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and the timing based on the establishment of predetermined conditions such as the result of a lottery such as a special lottery. timing can be included. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to the timing of transitioning the gaming state according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling the progress of the game.

Further, the information specifying the destination gaming state does not necessarily need to use only the value set in the state transition data, and the corresponding value may be directly set within the program processing. For example, at the time of transition of the gaming state, the destination gaming state is forcibly set within the program, and various parameters set in the state transition data other than the destination gaming state are set. Specifically, in the special condition time saving, the state transition data is referenced when the time saving transition count becomes 0, but before executing the subroutine that references the state transition data in program processing, the next state transition destination number is By setting the special condition time saving setting number ("7" in the case of FIG. 414), the parameter corresponding to the transition destination number "7" can be set by a subroutine that refers to the state transition data.

Furthermore, the state transition data may be configured to include information regarding the performance, and a corresponding command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control means) at the time of the game state transition. This makes it possible to include the process that triggers the start of a performance in a series of processes associated with the transition of the gaming state, and it becomes possible to manage the processing related to the transition of the gaming state, including the performance, all at once. .

Next, a description will be given along the time series of the control to transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. FIG. 415 is a timing chart illustrating the control for shifting to the time saving state based on the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 415, control from initialization of the time saving transition count due to winning of the special lottery to transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be explained. Note that although the operation is the same as the timing chart shown in FIG. 397, the method of updating the time saving transition count is different. Further, the commands to be transmitted are the same as those shown in FIG. 400, but the transmission timings of some commands are different.

Time t1 is the timing at which the jackpot ending that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state due to winning the special lottery ends, that is, the timing at which the game shifts to the time saving state. While the jackpot gaming state continues, the value of the time saving transition count in the symbol variation of the special lottery that caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is set. Referring to FIG. 415, the values of the time-saving transition count, the remaining number of times special conditions are satisfied, and the time-saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor are set so that they are not updated from the transition to the jackpot game state until the end. The same value is maintained because of the In addition, regarding the number of remaining states, since the number of times the jackpot game state continues is set, it may be set to "1", or the number of rounds in the jackpot game may be set.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the time saving transition count is initialized at the timing when the jackpot ending ends, that is, at the timing when the game shifts to the time saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 415, the time-saving transition count is updated by subtracting it, so the number of time-saving transitions (300 times) is set in the time-saving transition count. Further, details of initialization of the time saving transition count will be described later.

Further, at the timing of initializing the time saving transition count, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is set to "300", and the remaining number of times of the time saving state is set to "100". The remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied can be calculated based on the time saving transition count and the number of time saving transitions, so it can be calculated when necessary, for example, when transmitting the special condition remaining number of times command to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510. You may also do so. Note that since the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the remaining number of special condition satisfaction and the time-saving transition count have the same value, and may be stored in the same variable within the program. Thereby, storage capacity can be reduced.

Time t2 is the timing at which the variable display of special symbols is executed for the first time after shifting to the time saving state. In this embodiment, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends. The display on the performance display monitor may be performed at the same time as the update, or may be reflected at the start of the change. By updating the time saving transition count not at the fluctuation start timing but at the elapse of the fixed time after the end of the fluctuation, it becomes possible to process the update of the time saving transition count and the transition to the time saving state within the same timer interrupt. Details of the various commands are as described in FIG. 400.

Note that the time-saving transition count may be updated at the start of the fluctuation, but in this case, it is determined whether the time-saving transition count is “0” at the start of the fluctuation, and if it is determined to be “0”, the time-saving transition count is updated. It is necessary to determine whether the time saving transition count is "0" at the timing of transition to the time saving state (when the fixed time has elapsed) without updating. Therefore, it is necessary to determine whether or not the time saving transition count is "0" twice, at the start of fluctuation and at the time of time saving transition, which may complicate the program code.

If the remaining state number command is sent when updating the time saving transition count, the command will not be sent at the first variation, so it is preferable to send the remaining state number command at the start of the variation. Further, if the value of the remaining state number command is displayed as it is, the special symbol will have started changing at the timing when it is actually displayed. For example, if the number of remaining states is 300, the actual number of remaining fluctuations is 299, so if it is displayed as 300, the player may misunderstand it. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the remaining state number command subtracts 1 from the notified number of remaining states and displays the value as the remaining state (fluctuation) number.

Time t3 is the timing at which the variable display of the special symbols ends. When the variable display of the special symbol ends, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is updated. At this time, a command to instruct the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the variable display of the special symbols, a command to notify the gaming state when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, and a command to notify the updated number of times the special condition is satisfied are sent. be done. Note that the command to notify the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is not sent immediately after the special symbol fluctuation stops, but after the symbol confirmation time has elapsed after the special symbol fluctuation has stopped. Details of these commands are as explained in FIG. 400.

After that, when the stop symbol is determined, the next variable display starts (time t4). Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery in the time saving state, the time saving state ends (time t5). At this time, the remaining number of times in the time saving state becomes "0" and updating (counting) is stopped. On the other hand, the time saving transition count continues to be counted.

When the time saving state ends, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. At this time, the number of remaining states in the normal gaming state is not updated because it is not necessary to manage (cannot be managed). In addition, when shifting to the normal gaming state, the number of remaining states may be set as the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied. This is because if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times (number of times of time saving transition = 300 times) consecutively after the time saving transition count is initialized, the normal game state shifts to the time saving state and the normal gaming state ends.

As the game progresses in the normal gaming state, when the time-saving transition count reaches 0 and the relevant variable display ends (time t6), the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied for transitioning to the time-saving state becomes 0, and the special condition is satisfied. Then, it shifts to the time saving state (special condition time saving). When transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, updating of the time saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is stopped. Further, the upper limit number of times the time saving state can be continued (100 times) is set as the number of remaining states. Note that the value of the time saving transition count is maintained at 0 without being updated.

In this way, the time saving transition count can be updated by timer interrupt processing, but it is not updated if it has reached a predetermined value (“0”), so the normal It is possible to prevent the special condition time saving from being activated until the next jackpot (initial value is set) without determining whether or not the condition is met.

After that, if the special lottery is not won before the time saving state continues for the maximum number of times (100 times) after shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the state shifts to the normal gaming state (time t7). . At this time, the end of the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving is not a condition for initializing the time-saving transition count, so the value of the time-saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is met is maintained, so the time-saving transition count is initialized. It will not shift to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving until then.

[26-1-2. Clearing (initialization) of the gaming area including the time-saving transition count]
As mentioned above, the conditions (special conditions) for initializing the time-saving transfer count are (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) according to the prescribed procedure, (2) when a special lottery is won (a jackpot game) (after completion). Here, unlike the example described above, (a) when operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone (first operation; RAM clear operation), the time saving transition count is not initialized, and (b) the setting key 971 When operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating (second operation; setting change operation), the time saving transition count is initialized.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, values necessary for game control such as the time saving transfer count are stored in an area allocated to the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1312. As mentioned above, when a RAM clear operation is executed, the time saving transition count is not initialized, and when a setting change operation is executed, the time saving transition count is initialized, but the number of remaining states and the remaining number of special conditions satisfied The values are cleared (initialized) no matter which operation is performed, and the area cleared by the RAM clearing operation and the area cleared by the setting change operation are different.

As mentioned above, if the time-saving transition counter is not initialized by the RAM clear operation and the remaining number of states or the remaining number of special condition satisfaction is cleared, the time-saving transition will occur even though the command indicating the number of remaining states indicates 0. Since the counter does not reach 0, there is a possibility that discrepancies will occur in the performance. Therefore, if information other than the time saving transition counter is cleared by the RAM clear operation, the peripheral control board 1510 side may ignore the command regarding the remaining number of times sent from the main control board 1310, or By not sending related commands, we are trying to avoid any discrepancies in the performance.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of values stored in the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1312 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 416, the time saving transition count is arranged in an area 9901 together with a setting state management area that shows the setting values of the gaming machine and the setting state in the setting mode (for example, setting change, setting confirmation). In this embodiment, the area 9901 is located at the beginning of the storage area, but the area 9901 is not limited to this and may be another area.

Further, in an area 9902 different from the area 9901, information such as a probability change flag, a time saving flag, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied, and the remaining number of states are stored. In addition, input/output port related data including input signals such as switches for detecting the entry of game balls into various winning openings, normal symbol related data regarding normal lottery and normal symbol fluctuation display, special lottery and special symbol fluctuations. Special symbol related data related to display, external information output related data for outputting signals to the outside of the gaming machine, etc. are stored.

Note that the time saving transition counter is placed in area 9901, but when the time saving transition counter is initialized by either a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, it is placed in area 9902 and the time saving flag etc. The information may be cleared together with information in other areas. Moreover, when a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, the time saving transition counter is not directly initialized, but after the value of the time saving transition counter is cleared, the initial value is set again.

Area 9902 corresponds to (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone (first operation; RAM clear operation); (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; This area is cleared when any operation (setting change operation) is executed, and the start address of area 9902 is defined as the "RAM clear start address" ("0005h" in this embodiment). At initialization, the area after the "RAM clear start address" is cleared.

Area 9901 is not cleared when a RAM clear operation is performed, while area 9902 is cleared when a RAM clear operation is performed. On the other hand, when the setting change operation is executed, the area 9902 is cleared, and the initial value (300) is set to the time saving transition count arranged in the area 9901. Note that 0 is set when the time saving transition count is added and updated.

As described above, in the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation, although the area to be cleared in RAM (area 9902) is the same, the areas to be initialized (set initial values) are different. Therefore, by standardizing the processing for clearing the area 9902, the program code can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, although the area 9901 where the time saving transition count etc. are stored and the area 9902 where the variable probability flag etc. are stored are continuous areas, an empty area is placed between the area 9901 and the area 9902. You can. When a free area is allocated, it is possible to increase the possibility that even if data in one of the areas 9901 and 9902 is destroyed due to a bug in the program, the data in the other area can be maintained.

Furthermore, in the area after area 9902, a stack area within the game area, a work area outside the game area, and a stack area outside the game area are arranged. The stack area within the game area is an area for temporarily storing data during execution of a program related to game control. The work area outside the gaming area is an area for temporarily storing data during execution of a program for displaying information on the performance display monitor (base display 1317). The stack area outside the gaming area is an area that temporarily stores data necessary for executing processing (for example, processing for calculating a base value, etc.) that is executed outside the gaming area. Although an empty area 9904 is arranged between the area 9902 and the stack area within the gaming area, the area 9902 and the stack area within the gaming area may be a continuous area without providing the empty area 9904. On the other hand, an empty area 9905 is located between the stack area within the gaming area and the work area outside the gaming area, and this area must be located. An empty area 9906 is arranged between the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area, but the area 9906 is not provided and the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area are treated as a continuous area. Good too.

Note that the time saving transition count may be initialized regardless of whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone or the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the setting key 971 is operated. Further, the time saving transition count may be initialized by operating means other than the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. For example, it may be provided with an operating means that initializes (clears) only the setting values related to the special condition time saving including the time saving transition count. This allows other game-related information to be maintained and the impact on the game to be minimized. For example, it is possible to initialize (clear) the setting value regarding the special condition time reduction at the end of business hours, and operate the gaming machine on the next business day without being affected by the previous day's gaming situation.

In addition, in a gaming machine that allows transition to a time saving state due to a special condition time reduction as in this embodiment, when the time saving state due to a special condition time reduction ends, in order to generate the time saving state due to a special condition time reduction again, There is a risk that the clear switch 954 and setting key 971 may be manipulated illegally. Therefore, by providing both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 on the back side of the gaming machine, unauthorized operations can be prevented.

From the above explanation, each configuration can be specified as follows.

(1) Based on the establishment of the starting conditions, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to give a profit to the player, and based on the lottery result, a special gaming state is controlled in which a gaming value is given to the player, and the type of the special gaming state is controlled. Based on the above, one advantageous game is selected from a plurality of advantageous gaming states including at least a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (low probability time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that can control the state, and includes a gaming control means (main control MPU 1311) that can control the progress of the game including the lottery, stores game information including the lottery results, and supplies power to the gaming machine. a storage means capable of storing and retaining the game information even if the supply of the game information is cut off; a counting means for counting the number of times the lottery has been drawn by the lottery means in a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied; an operation means that cannot be operated, the storage means includes an area capable of storing a count value by the counting means, and the game control means is configured to provide an advantage to the player based on the counting result by the counting means. The operating state by the operating means includes at least a first operating state (RAM clearing operation/setting changing operation) and a second operating state (setting changing operation/RAM clearing operation), and when the power is turned on in conjunction with the first operation state by the operating means, a predetermined area of the storage means is initialized, but an area where the counted value by the counting means can be stored. When the power is turned on in accordance with the second operation state of the operating means, a predetermined area of the storage means is initialized and the count value of the counting means is maintained. The information stored in the storable area can be initialized, and the area where the count value by the counting means can be stored is arranged in an area other than the predetermined area of the storage means. Further, the counted value by the counting means stored in the storage means is not updated in the third advantageous gaming state, but also in the normal gaming state during the third advantageous gaming state and after the end of the third advantageous gaming state. May be maintained.

The first advantageous gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is the same/approximately the same as the third advantageous gaming state to the extent that it is advantageous to the player. They are the same. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second advantageous gaming state is assumed to be a time saving state due to normal time saving, and the third advantageous gaming state is assumed to be a time saving state due to special condition time saving, and the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state are The probability of winning the special lottery is the same. The second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state may be the same in terms of the degree to which they are advantageous to the player, or even if they are different, the number of times saved is different and the degree to which they are advantageous is approximately the same. .

By configuring as in (1), the areas to be cleared in RAM are the same in the first operation state and the second operation state, so the program code is simplified by standardizing the processing for clearing the areas. development efficiency can be improved. In addition, by making it possible to maintain the information stored in the area where the counted value can be stored by operation, the game hall manager can decide whether or not to clear the counted value depending on the gaming situation. This enables flexible operation.

Above, we have explained how to initialize the specified storage area when performing RAM clear operation or setting change operation, but in addition to this, RAM abnormality may occur due to momentary power outage due to noise etc., and the game will continue normally. RAM clearing is performed even when it is difficult to clear the RAM. The storage area (set value) that is cleared when the RAM is cleared (when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated) and when a RAM abnormality occurs will be described below with reference to FIG. 417.

FIG. 417 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the control over the storage area and various values when a RAM abnormality occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 417 describes the RAM clear operation (first operation), the setting change operation (second operation), and the cases of RAM abnormalities 1 to 5.

When the RAM clear operation (first operation) is executed, the work within the gaming area (area 9902) is cleared, while the work outside the gaming area is maintained. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the RAM clear signal has changed to ON by operating the RAM clear switch 954, and is before the timer interrupt processing is started. The area 9901 for storing setting values and time saving transition counts is maintained. When executing the RAM clear operation, the value of the time saving transition count continues to be displayed on the performance display monitor. When executing the RAM clear operation (first operation), a notification sound corresponding to RAM clear is output. Further, the decorative lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the RAM clearing, and a screen indicating that the RAM is being cleared is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. A movable body provided in the gaming machine executes a predetermined initial operation.

When the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the work within the game area is cleared. On the other hand, the work outside the game area is maintained when the work outside the game area is normal, and cleared when an abnormality occurs. In addition, the set value is maintained. The time-saving transition count is initialized as described above. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed, and before the timer interrupt processing is started. After changing the settings, the performance display monitor will display the setting value, but you may also display a message indicating that the time-saving transition count has been initialized, or display the setting value and then displaying the time-saving transition count. You can also do this. When a setting change operation (second operation) is executed, a notification sound corresponding to the setting change is output. Further, the decorative lamp lights up in a manner indicating that the settings are being changed, and a screen indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. The movable body provided in the gaming machine executes a predetermined initial operation.

When a set value abnormality (RAM abnormality 1) occurs, the work in the game area is cleared. On the other hand, works outside the game area are maintained. Since there is an abnormality in the setting value, set "Setting 1" as the setting value. Furthermore, the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing when it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed during recovery from a power outage after a RAM abnormality is determined. The RAM abnormality continues. A RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317. When a set value abnormality (RAM abnormality 1) occurs, a RAM abnormality notification sound is output, and a lamp is lit in a manner corresponding to the RAM abnormality notification. Further, a screen indicating that it is a RAM abnormality notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. At this time, the screen may be switched to the demo screen after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The movable body provided in the gaming machine executes a predetermined initial operation. Note that the initial operation of the movable body may be started not when the RAM abnormality occurs, but after the RAM abnormality is resolved by a setting change operation.

When a power failure flag abnormality (RAM abnormality 2) of a work within the gaming area or a checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality 3) of a work within the gaming area occurs, the work within the gaming area is cleared. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality, the work outside the game area is maintained. Further, the set value is maintained and the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is not when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, but after it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the power supply is turned off and then turned on again while changing the settings. This is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed. A RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317.

If a power outage flag abnormality (RAM abnormality 4) of a work outside the gaming area or a checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality 5) of a work outside the gaming area occurs, the gaming Work within the area is cleared. Further, the work outside the game area is cleared because there is an abnormality. Furthermore, the set value is maintained and the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed. A RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317.

To further explain the control for the RAM abnormality of the work outside the gaming area, the determination of the RAM abnormality of the work outside the gaming area is executed before determining whether or not a setting change operation has been performed when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, only information indicating that the RAM is abnormal is stored, and at this timing, the work outside the gaming area is treated as RAM abnormal without initializing it, and the game is stopped. After transitioning to the game stop state, if you perform a setting change operation and then turn off/on the power again, it will be determined that the setting has been changed, and it will be memorized before the power is turned off when the settings change process is executed. It is determined that the work outside the game area has a RAM abnormality based on information indicating that the work on the game area side has been determined to have a RAM abnormality, and the work outside the game area is cleared. Furthermore, when the process for changing the settings is executed, if the information indicating that the work outside the gaming area has been determined to be abnormal in the RAM is not stored, the work outside the gaming area will not be cleared and will be stored as is. The content is maintained.

When the power is turned on while a setting change operation is being performed, if each of the setting values/works inside and outside the gaming area is determined to be abnormal in the RAM during the initial setting process, the setting change process will start as is. Each storage area is cleared at the timing when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. In addition, in the initial setting process executed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the set value is abnormal, the work inside the game area is abnormal, or the work outside the game area is abnormal, and only the determination result is stored, and after each determination is completed, Determine whether or not it is a setting change operation. That is, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, control is performed to determine whether a setting change operation has been performed after the abnormality is determined.

The case where RAM clear is performed has been described above. Next, we will supplement the control of the gaming machine when executing the first operation (RAM clearing operation) and the second operation (an operation different from the first operation, for example, a setting changing operation).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, it is first determined whether the set value is abnormal (a value other than 0 to 5). If it is determined to be abnormal, the setting value is set to the initial value, the time saving transition count is set to the initial value (300 times), and the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming state. Subsequently, the checksum, the power outage flag, and the RAM outside the gaming area are checked, and if any of them is determined to be abnormal, the RAM is set to an abnormal state. At this time, unless the set value is determined to be abnormal, the time saving transition count is not initialized and the value before the power cut is held.

The initial value of the time saving transition count is set only when the set value is determined to be abnormal and when the jackpot ending ends, except when the first operation is executed, and the initial value is not set at other times. Further, it is not determined whether or not the value of the time saving transition count is abnormal. The reason why the time saving transition count is not judged as abnormal is that if the set value is abnormal, there is a high possibility that the time saving transition count is also abnormal, so it is considered that it is sufficient to judge based on the setting value abnormality alone. It is.

Note that "abnormality determination" of the time saving transition count may be performed together with the abnormality determination of the set value. At this time, even if the set value is a normal value, if the time-saving transition count is outside the specified range, the accuracy of the RAM cannot be guaranteed, so either initialize all the contents of RAM or change the setting value and time-saving transition count. It may be initialized.

Further, when a set value abnormality occurs, the RAM abnormality is notified after the set value is initialized, and this state continues. In order to restore the gaming machine, the main work RAM (area 9902) is cleared by turning on the power again while executing the setting change operation. Further, if the work for the performance display monitor (base display 1317) is abnormal, it is cleared, but if it is not abnormal, it is maintained. After the setting state changes to a setting change state, a timer interrupt process is started, and the setting change is completed, a transition is made to a normal gaming state. At this time, the performance display monitor (base display 1317) becomes a normal display.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to indicate whether or not the time saving transition count has been initialized by the display mode of the performance display monitor (base display 1317) when the power is turned on. It becomes possible. Specifically, if the performance display monitor is displayed in the normal mode after the power is turned on, it suggests that the time-saving transition count has not been initialized, and if the performance display monitor is displayed in a specific mode, it indicates that the time-saving transition count is not initialized. Indicates that the count has been initialized. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the time saving transition count is initialized, but at this time, the performance display monitor shows that the time saving transition count has been initialized. Displayed by content. The performance display monitor normally displays the time saving transition count (normal mode), but when a setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the changed setting value is displayed (specific mode). . Additionally, when a RAM clear operation (first operation) is executed, the performance display monitor continues to display the normal mode (time saving transition count), while when a setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the settings are changed. The performance display monitor does not display the normal mode until the process is completed. That is, by displaying the performance display monitor in a different manner depending on whether or not the time saving transition count has been initialized, it is possible to suggest to hall employees that the time saving transition count has been initialized.

Above, an example has been described in which the performance display monitor (base display 1317) displays whether or not the time saving transition count has been initialized, but other indicators may be used to provide similar notification. Alternatively, the notification may be made by sound or lamp. At this time, by installing a lamp in an inconspicuous location outside the gaming area of the gaming machine or even within the gaming area (for example, in a location away from the liquid crystal display), it is possible to recognize whether the time-saving transition count has been initialized from the front side. You can also use it as For example, when the power supply is restarted by a RAM clear operation (first operation) (including when normal power is turned on (recovery)), the time-saving transition can be made by displaying in the first mode (including turning off the light). It is possible to recognize that the power supply has been restarted without the count being initialized, and when the power supply is restarted by the setting change operation (second operation), the second mode (time saving transition count is (It is not possible to identify whether the data has been converted or not.) By configuring this way, the player can understand that the special condition time reduction is likely to occur before the value indicating the number of changes in the top lamp (data display) because the time reduction transition count is maintained. The player can recognize this and can play the game while expecting that the special condition time reduction will occur.

[26-1-3. Initialization setting data (setting data table)]
Not only in the time saving state, but when transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, it is necessary to set various parameters (initial setting data such as flags) for setting the gaming state. For example, when you win a special lottery, you can set the initial setting data corresponding to the jackpot gaming state at the timing to start the jackpot gaming state, or to change to the variable probability state (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Initial setting data (setting data table) corresponding to a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of a jackpot gaming state) is set. The handling of these initial setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained below.

FIG. 418 is a diagram showing an example of setting data at the time of transition to the jackpot first interval, which is set when transitioning to the jackpot gaming state when winning the special lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The setting data at the time of transition to the first jackpot interval is set (referenced) in the jackpot start setting process executed at the timing of starting the jackpot gaming state when winning a special lottery, and is based on the setting data at the time of transition to the jackpot first interval. , necessary values are set for various parameters (data, flags, etc.).

The setting data at the time of transition to the first jackpot interval defines the size (number of bytes) of data to be cleared first (initialized) and the size (number of bytes) of data to be initialized next. Next, the parameters to be cleared (initialized) are defined (inside the frame). Finally, the data to be initialized is defined.

To further explain the specific contents of the setting data at the time of transition to the first jackpot interval with reference to FIG. Includes count (JT_HYO_CNT) and power-on state buffer (PWON_JOT_BF). Details of each data are as described above.

Initial setting data includes the conditional device operation signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG), accessory continuous operation device operation signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG), right-handed hitting flag area (R_HS_FG), and medium rotating body operation state management flag. (MOT_ACT_FG), motor 1 operation pattern area (MOT1_ACT_PT), motor 1 operation number area (MOT1_ACT_NO), and motor 1 photo detection abnormality determination timer area (M1_ERR_JDG_TM).

Specifically, a value (_T_SIG_JKN_OK) for setting the conditional device operating signal to ON is set in the conditional device operating signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG). Further, a value (_T_SIG_YAK_OK) for setting the accessory continuous actuation device operating signal to ON is set in the accessory continuous actuation device operating signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG). A value (_HASSYA_RIGHT) indicating that right-handed hitting is permitted is set in the right-handed hitting flag area (R_HS_FG). In addition, values for defining the initial operation of the intermediate rotating body (motor 1) are set.

The initial setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment is defined after defining the size (number of bytes) of data to be cleared (initialized) and the size (number of bytes) of data to be initialized, and is used to set the gaming state. Define clearing data and initial setting data for the data. With this configuration, it becomes possible to handle both the clear data and the initial setting data as one table. Note that the data for clearing is 1 byte because it is only the data (address) to be cleared, and the data for initial setting is 2 bytes because it is a set of the data to be set (address) and the initial setting value.

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of big winning holes (first big winning hole 2005, second big winning hole 2006), and the clear data and initial setting data of these big winning holes are unified. It can be treated as a table.

FIG. 419 is a diagram showing an example of the big winning opening closing setting data that is set when closing the big winning opening in the jackpot gaming state of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The big winning hole closing setting data is referred to in order to execute the process of shifting each big winning hole from the open state to the closed state in the big winning hole opening process.

The big winning opening closing setting data includes setting data for the first big winning opening 2005 and setting data for the second big winning opening 2006, and includes setting data for the first big winning opening 2005 and setting data for the second big winning opening 2006. A value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second big prize opening 2006 is defined between the setting data and the setting data. Specifically, it is the difference between the start address of the big winning opening closing setting data and the starting address of the setting data of the second big winning opening 2006, and the value of "_NX_CLOSE_OFS" is added to the big winning opening closing setting data. Accordingly, the start address of the setting data for the second big prize opening 2006 can be specified.

The setting data for the first big prize opening 2005 includes data for clearing and data for initial setting, similar to the setting data at the time of transition to the first jackpot interval. In the clearing data, the respective data sizes of the clearing data and the initial setting data and the big prize opening 1 solenoid flag are defined.

In the data for initial setting, a special electricity 1 active signal output timer (T1_SD_TM), a special electricity 1 prize ball validity determination timer (T1_SD_PAY_TM), and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number (T_JOB_NO) are defined. In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operation signal output timer has a time value for outputting the special electric accessory 1 operation signal, and the special electric 1 prize ball validity judgment timer has a special electric 1 prize ball valid extension time value (after the grand prize opening is closed). Set the time (time at which an incoming ball is determined to be valid). A number value (_TNO_CLOSE) for closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol/electric accessory operation number.

The setting data for the second big winning hole 2006 includes data for clearing and data for initial setting, similar to the setting data for the first big winning hole 2005. In the data for clearing, the size of each data of the data for clearing and the data for initial setting, and the big prize opening 2 solenoid flag are defined.

Initial setting data includes Tokuden 2 working signal output timer (T2_SD_TM), Tokuden 2 prize ball validity judgment timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM), Tokuden 2 working signal output timer 2 (T3_SD_TM), Tokuden 2 prize ball validity judgment timer 2. (T3_SD_PAY_TM) and special symbol/electric accessory operation number (T_JOB_NO) are defined. Two types of active signal output timer and prize ball validity determination timer are defined.

The special electric accessory 1 operation signal output timer (T2_SD_TM) and the special electric accessory 2 operation signal output timer 2 (T3_SD_TM) both have a time value for outputting the special electric accessory 1 operation signal, and the special electric accessory 2 prize ball validity determination timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM). and the special electricity 2 prize ball validity extension time value is set in both the special electricity 2 prize ball validity determination timer 2 (T3_SD_PAY_TM). A number value (_TNO_CLOSE) for closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol/electric accessory operation number.

Although the means for setting the initial data when the big winning hole is closed in a gaming machine equipped with two types of big winning holes has been described, it may be applied to setting the initial data at a different timing, for example, when the big winning hole is opened. It can also be applied to winning holes other than the big winning hole. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of starting winning holes, the first starting winning hole (special drawing 1) and the second starting winning opening (special drawing opening) can be applied. The initial data of 2) may be defined in the same way as the initial setting data shown in FIG. 419, and the data initialization process may be executed.

The configuration of the initial setting data has been described above, but next, a procedure for actually performing initial setting based on the above-mentioned initial setting data will be specifically explained using the grand prize opening closing setting data as an example. FIG. 420 is a sample module that performs initial settings based on the big prize opening closing setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The procedure for setting initial setting data will be described below while referring to the modules.

The main control MPU 1311 stores the address of the big prize opening closing setting data (T_CLOSE1_B) in the HL register as the reference address of the area where the setting data is stored. Next, identification information for specifying which big winning opening is to be controlled is stored in the A register. “OPEN_TD_FG” is an open special electric accessory identification flag, and is set to “00” when controlling the first big prize opening 2005, and “01” when controlling the second big winning opening 2006. Based on the value of "OPEN_TD_FG", the position to refer to the data included in the big prize opening closing setting data is specified.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second big prize opening 2006 in the W register. Furthermore, by executing the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), the reading position of the big winning opening closing setting data is specified. To explain in more detail, the multiplication value addition address acquisition process multiplies the specified base value (W register = “_NX_CLOSE_OFS”) by the multiplication value (A register = “OPEN_TD_FG”), and then obtains the specified base address value (HL register = “OPEN_TD_FG”). = start address of the big winning opening closing setting data). That is, when controlling the first big prize opening 2005 (“OPEN_TD_FG”=“00h”), the base address value itself becomes the start address, while when controlling the second big winning hole 2006 (“OPEN_TD_FG”=“ 01h"), the start address is the address obtained by adding "_NX_CLOSE_OFS" to the base address value.

When the address that refers to the big winning opening closing setting data is specified, the main control MPU 1311 executes data initialization processing (DATA_SET_CLR). The data initialization process is a process of clearing and initializing data based on the setting data referenced by the address set in the HL register. Details of the data initialization process will be explained with reference to FIG. 421.

FIG. 421 is a diagram showing a program example of data initialization processing (DAT_SET_CLR) of this embodiment. Hereinafter, details of the process will be described for the case where data regarding the first big prize winning hole 2005 is cleared and initialized ("OPEN_TD_FG"="00h").

When the data initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the work clear count and the work set count in the BC register. In other words, the number of work clears is set in the C register, and the number of work sets is set in the B register. The work clear count is the number of data to be cleared, and the work set count is the number of data to be initialized. If you refer to the data (T_CLOSE1_B) corresponding to the first big prize opening 2005 among the big winning opening closing setting data in FIG. 419, the first data is "T_CLOSE1_CLR_END-$-2", so the number of data to be cleared is Since there is only one, the value is 1, and this value is stored in the C register. The next data is "(T_CLOSE1_B_END - T_CLOSE1_CLR_END)/2", and since there are actually five 2-byte data defined between label T_CLOSE1_CLR_END and label T_CLOSE1_B_END, the value is 5, and this value is Stored in B register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the data. Specifically, the data set after the work clear count and work set count of the clear data, that is, the value from the 3rd byte onward, is the address of the data to be cleared, and the data is cleared for the work clear count set in the C register. Set "00H" to "00H" and clear the data.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 performs initial settings of data. Specifically, the value of the first byte from the head of the initial setting data is set as the address, the value of the second byte is set as the initial setting value, and the process is repeated for the number of work sets set in the B register. When processing is completed for all initial setting data, the data initialization process ends.

Note that the structure of the initial setting data is standard as described above, and can be used not only for the transition process of the gaming state but also for general purposes such as initial setting of the driving body. Therefore, by including the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) in the process address table, it can be called by the INVD command, and the process can be executed by simply specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). be able to. This makes it possible to shorten the word length of the instruction and speed up the processing.

In this embodiment, by including a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second big winning opening 2006 in the big winning opening closing setting data, data for multiple big winning openings can be shared as common data. It is possible to treat it as Therefore, if an attempt is made to perform the same processing as the sample module shown in FIG. 420 using the conventional method in which _NX_CLOSE_OFS is not defined, it will be necessary to refer to OPEN_TD_FG and branch as shown in FIG. 422. In this case, more capacity will be required than the method according to this embodiment, and specifically, the sample program of the reference example (FIG. 422) is 3 times larger than the sample program of this embodiment (FIG. 420). The capacity increases by the amount of bytes.

Note that in the sample module shown in FIGS. 420 and 422, in the process of reading data from the table (LDT instruction), the data area start address "_OFS_TP" (TP register value , for example, "9000H") is specified. That is, "LDT HL, T_CLOSE1_B-_OFS_TP" sets the value of [TP register value ("9000H") + relative data of "T_CLOSE1_B" from the data start address] in the HL register. By allowing a value based on the TP register to be set in the HL register by the LDT instruction, an instruction (“LD HL, T_CLOSE1_B”) that normally takes 3 bytes or more can be executed in 2 bytes.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, the parameters corresponding to the destination gaming state are set based on predefined initialization setting data. Set. At the time of transition of the game state, processing related to the special lottery is changed, such as changing the probability of winning the special lottery or changing the table that defines the variation time of the special symbol.

In addition, the initialization setting data is not only used when changing gaming states such as probability change state or time saving state, but also for processing related to special symbols such as waiting for fluctuation processing, processing during fluctuation, and symbol confirmation processing. , Can be used at the time of switching between each state (timing at which the progress of the game changes), such as the interval process when losing, the interval process when winning, the jackpot opening process, the big winning opening opening process, the big winning opening closing process, and the jackpot ending process. can. Specifically, when executing the fluctuation start process after the completion of the fluctuation waiting process, when executing the symbol confirmation process after the completion of the variation process, when executing the missed interval process after the completion of the symbol confirmation process, when executing the missed interval process It is used at the timing of starting execution of the next process after finishing the execution of the process, such as when executing the fluctuation waiting process after the completion of the symbol confirmation process, or when executing the hit interval process after the completion of the symbol confirmation process.

In addition, the initialization setting data is used not only for special symbol-related processing but also for normal symbol-related processing. Specifically, when executing the fluctuating process after the fluctuating wait process ends, after the fluctuating process ends, It can be used when executing symbol confirmation processing.

Switching of each state (game progress) is controlled by a job counter corresponding to each control object such as special symbols and normal symbols. The job counter corresponds to each process (state), for example, if it is a job counter for special symbols, the job counter is "0" for special symbol fluctuation waiting processing, the job counter is "1" for special symbol fluctuation processing, and the job counter is "1" for special symbol fluctuation processing. Job counter "2" for symbol confirmation processing, job counter "3" for interval processing when special symbol is off, job counter "4" for interval processing when special symbol is hit, job counter "5" for jackpot opening processing, big prize opening opening The job counter "6" is set to correspond to the process, the job counter "7" is set to correspond to the big winning opening closing process, and the job counter "8" is set to correspond to the jackpot ending process. The same setting can be made for normal symbols.

The initialization setting data used at the time of transition to the gaming state is defined in the format (data structure) described above in FIG. 418. Specifically, after defining the size (in bytes) of data to be cleared (initialized) and the size (in bytes) of data to be initialized, create an area (in bytes) to store parameters whose setting values will be cleared during migration. From the lower address of the area (second area) that stores parameters whose initial values (fixed values) are set at the time of migration (first area), and from the beginning of the area where the initial value is stored the initialization setting data Arranged sequentially. Parameters whose setting values are cleared at the time of transition can be set as necessary in the calling program, etc. when the gaming state is transitioned, and the number of executions of the special lottery in the gaming state after the transition is counted. Parameters that count up from "0", such as when the value is cleared, are used as they are after being cleared. Note that the data capacity can be reduced by defining only the lower addresses in the initialization setting data, but since it is sufficient to specify the storage area of the value, not only the lower addresses but also the upper addresses may be included. As a result, instead of increasing the data capacity, it is possible to directly specify the storage area, and address conversion is not required, so that program processing can be speeded up.

Furthermore, as described above, by specifying initialization setting data and executing data initialization processing (Fig. 421), specified parameters can be cleared or initial values can be set for specified parameters. It is now possible. Therefore, the process of setting (initializing) parameters at the time of transition of the game state or the start of processing can be done by simply specifying the initialization setting data, regardless of the game state of the source and destination or the process of ending and starting execution. It can be executed by common processing. This makes it possible to modify or add program code even when changing or adding new game state definitions due to changes in game specifications, or when adding processing to control games. It becomes possible to set (initialize) the parameters necessary for transitioning the game state or executing processing by simply adding or modifying the corresponding initialization setting data while minimizing the above.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by defining the initialization setting data in a common data structure, it is possible to clear/initialize parameters with a common process (data initialization process). . As a result, when it is necessary to set parameters at the timing of a change in game progress, such as when changing a game state, it is possible to do so using a common procedure, and it is also possible to flexibly respond to changes in game specifications. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game with a wide variety of variations, and the interest of the game can be further increased. Furthermore, the development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved by simplifying programs by standardizing parameter settings.

From what has been explained above, each configuration can be further specified as follows.

(2) Program processing (data initialization processing) that uses the setting data table (initialization setting data) is executed according to the progress of the game state as the game progresses (at the timing when the progress state changes). A caller that is called and executed from a caller's process (such as a process related to special symbols), and is executed according to the progress of the game state as the game progresses (at the timing when the progress changes) Although the processing is different depending on the progress of the gaming state, the program processing (data initialization processing) using the setting data table can be executed as a common processing, and the processing according to the setting After completing setting values for the addresses of the storage area set in the first area (area 9901) and the storage area set in the second area (area 9902) by program processing using the data table, By continuing to execute the calling process, it is possible to switch the progress of the game state.

By configuring as in (2), even when changing or adding a new game state definition due to a change in game specifications, or when adding processing to control the game, the program code can be saved. While minimizing modifications and additions, you can set (initialize) the parameters necessary for transitioning to a gaming state or executing processing simply by adding or modifying the corresponding setting data table (initialization setting data). This makes it possible to switch the progress of the game.

[26-1-4. Modified example of initialization setting data selection means]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone (RAM clear operation), the time saving transition count is not cleared, and when operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971 (setting (change operation), clear the time-saving transition count. Therefore, if the initial setting data includes the time saving transition count, it will always be initialized, so it is necessary to define the initial setting data individually or branch the process.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the operation at the time of initialization can be confirmed by referring to the value of VALID_PLAY (setting state management area). Therefore, by defining a table for selecting initialization setting data and selecting based on the value of VALID_PLAY, it is possible to specify initialization setting data according to the operation at the time of initialization.

FIG. 423 is a diagram showing an example of values set in VALID_PLAY (setting state management area) and VALID_PLAY in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Referring to FIG. 423, VALID_PLAY is set to "00h" for normal recovery, "01h" for RAM clear operation, "02h" for setting confirmation operation, "03h" for setting change operation, and "04h" for RAM abnormality.

Further, FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of a table for selecting initialization setting data when initializing the gaming machine of this embodiment. The initialization setting data corresponding to VALID_PLAY is defined in the initialization setting data selection table, and the initialization setting data may be selected based on the value of VALID_PLAY. When implemented in this way, it can be determined whether to clear or not depending on the initialization operation.

The time saving transition count is not stored in the area that is cleared when the gaming machine is initialized, and the time saving transition count is initialized based on the definition of the initialization setting data. That is, the time saving transition count is initialized only when it is defined in the initialization setting data, and if the value of the time saving transition count is to be maintained, it may be excluded from the initialization setting data. For example, since the time-saving transition count is not initialized in a RAM clearing operation (usually RAM clearing), the corresponding initialization setting data (RAM_CLR_TBL) does not include data corresponding to the time-saving transition count. On the other hand, in the case of a setting change operation, the time-saving transition count is initialized, so the corresponding initialization setting data (SET_CHG_TBL) includes data corresponding to the time-saving transition count. With this configuration, without changing the program, it is possible to maintain or initialize the time-saving transition count by defining it in the initialization setting data according to the initialization operation, and the program code This eliminates the need for branching, making it possible to simplify the program and compress the program capacity. Note that it is possible to switch between maintaining or initializing (clearing) the value not only for the time-saving transition count but also for other parameters as well, depending on the data definition.

Further, the initialization setting data may be further divided according to the initialization conditions of the gaming machine. For example, as shown in FIG. 417, initialization setting data may be defined for each cause of RAM abnormality. If the number of initialization setting data patterns is less than the value defined in VALID_PLAY, the data capacity may be reduced by allocating common initialization setting data to different VALID_PLAYs.

Note that when the time-saving transition count is updated by addition, the initial value is 0, so it is registered in the clearing data, while when it is updated by subtraction, the initial value is the number of time-saving transitions (= 300 times). Therefore, it is registered in the initial setting data. In this way, it is possible to manage using the same initial setting data even if the update methods are different, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in game specifications, and it is possible to increase the development efficiency of gaming machines.

[26-2. External output signals related to special condition time saving]
Next, the output of external output signals will be explained in chronological order from the time when the gaming machine is powered on (when a setting change operation is executed). FIG. 425 is a time chart showing the output timing of an external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The external output signal is a signal output from an external terminal board 784 provided in the gaming machine, and is transmitted to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. The hall computer can grasp the status of the gaming machine in real time based on the received external output signal.

First, the gaming machine is powered on (time t200), and initialization processing is executed. The initialization process ends and the game becomes ready for play. Thereafter, when the game is continued and the special lottery is not won consecutively for the number of time saving transitions (=300 times) after the time saving transition count is initialized, the game shifts to a time saving state based on the special condition time saving. At this time, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms), and the signal is output (time t201). By outputting an external output signal (big hit information) for a predetermined fixed time, it is shown that the state has shifted to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. In addition, the external output signal (jackpot information) is output while in the jackpot gaming state, but the time (fixed time) output when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is the same as in the jackpot gaming state. The time is sufficiently shorter than the output time. Furthermore, the external output signal (during time saving) is set to ON, and the output of the signal continues until the end of the time saving state.

Furthermore, if you do not win the special lottery after entering the time saving state under the special conditions and continue until the maximum number of continuations of the time saving state (=100 times) is reached, the time saving state under the special conditions will be terminated ( time t202). At the timing when the time saving state ends, the output of the external output signal indicating that the time saving state is in progress is stopped.

After that, when a jackpot occurs that transitions to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state (winning a special lottery with a variable probability symbol, a variable probability jackpot), the accessory continuous operation device is activated after a predetermined symbol confirmation time has passed after the special symbol stops. , sets the external output signal (jackpot information) and the external output signal (during time saving) to ON, and outputs each signal (time t203). In addition, in the jackpot game state, the time saving control is not executed, but the output of the external output signal (during time saving) is continued. Further, the external output signal (big hit information) continues to be output until the jackpot gaming state ends (variable period). This makes it possible to manage prize balls during the special prize (continuous championship). In addition, in the so-called time saving state, as described above, while the output of the external output signal (during time saving) continues, the output of the external output signal (big hit information) does not continue.

After the jackpot gaming state ends and the jackpot end interval time elapses, the gaming state is shifted to a variable probability state (high probability time saving state) (time t204). At this time, while the output of the external output signal (big hit information) is stopped (set to OFF), the output of the external output signal (during time saving) is continued until the time saving state ends. Further, an initial value (=300 times) is set for the time saving transition count. Note that in a high probability state that does not involve a time saving state, the external output signal (during time saving) is not output. This makes it possible for the hall computer to accurately grasp the gaming status and to confirm whether or not the base value is normal.

After that, when a special lottery is won with a non-probability variable symbol in the high probability time saving state (time t205), the time saving gaming state is ended, the probability state is set to a low probability, and the transition is made to the jackpot gaming state (the jackpot gaming state is always (low probability low base state). At this time, although the time saving state ends, the external output signal (during time saving) continues to be in the ON state as the jackpot game state is entered without being set to OFF. Furthermore, by entering the jackpot game state, external output (jackpot information) is set to ON.

When the jackpot game state with non-probability variable symbols ends, time saving control is started after the jackpot end interval time has elapsed, and the gaming state is shifted to a (low probability) time saving state (normal time saving) (time t206). The external output signal (jackpot information) that was ON during the jackpot will be set to OFF after the jackpot end interval has elapsed, and will enter the time-saving state (the time-saving flag is set to ON). (middle) remains on and continues outputting. At this time, an initial value (=300 times) is set for the time saving transition count.

After the jackpot game state ends, when symbol fluctuations (execution of special lottery) for the maximum number of continuation times of the time-saving state are completed (time t207), the time-saving state is ended by setting the time-saving flag to OFF, and the external output signal ( (during time saving) is set to OFF to stop output.

If you do not win the special lottery after continuing the number of time reduction transitions (= 300 times) after the end of the jackpot game state (when the time reduction transition count reaches 0), the special condition time reduction (time t208). At this time, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms) and the signal is output. After that, if you win the special lottery with a non-probability variable symbol, the special symbol will stop, and after a predetermined symbol confirmation time has passed, the accessory continuous operation device will start operating, and the external output signal (jackpot information) will be set to ON and output. is started, and the time saving flag is set to OFF, while the external output signal (during time saving) is output continuously while being ON (time t209).

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to a (low probability) time saving state (normal time saving) (time t210). After the jackpot end interval time has elapsed, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to OFF to stop the output, and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the external output signal (during time saving) continues to be output while being ON. . After the jackpot game state ends, when the symbol variation (execution of special lottery) for the maximum number of continuation times of the time saving state is completed (time t211), the time saving flag is set to OFF, and the external output signal (time saving) is set to OFF. to stop output.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the external output signal (jackpot information) that notifies the hole controller that it has won the special lottery and entered the jackpot gaming state (special prize in progress) is transmitted without becoming a jackpot. By outputting the signal to ON in the same way after a predetermined number of deviation fluctuations have been completed (when special time saving conditions are established), one external output signal can be outputted both at the time of a jackpot and at a specific deviation. ing. In addition, when an external output signal (big hit information) is sent to a device other than the hall controller, for example, a data lamp (a data display installed outside the gaming machine as equipment on the hall side), it is also possible to send the external output signal (jackpot information) to a jackpot and when special time-saving conditions are met. One external output signal can be used for both. By turning on the external output signal (jackpot information), it is possible to reset the number of fluctuations of the data lamp.This not only allows the player to identify the number of fluctuations until the jackpot, but also allows the player to know the number of fluctuations until the jackpot. The player can recognize the number of fluctuations until shifting to the time saving state due to conditional time saving. Furthermore, if different signals are to be output when a jackpot is hit and when special time-saving conditions are established, it is necessary to set the data lamp side so that the number of fluctuations can be reset with two signals, so one external output signal can be used for both purposes. By doing so, it becomes possible to cope with specifications in which the number of fluctuations of the data lamp cannot be reset by either of the two signals.

The period (variable period) during which the external output signal (big hit information) is output is a period determined by the switching (transition) from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving state. In addition, the period (fixed period) during which the external output signal (jackpot information) is output when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is based on the number of times the regular processing that can be executed regularly by the main control MPU 1311 is executed. This is the period to be measured. With this configuration, an external information signal is output at a fixed time (for example, a 128 ms pulse signal) when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, and if the special lottery is won, the jackpot game state is activated. Since the external information signal is output only for a continuous period, by monitoring each output time (ON time), it is possible to manage the game hall using hall consoles, etc. to determine whether it is a jackpot game state or a special condition shortening time has occurred. person can be identified.

The fixed time is measured by periodically processing a value (timer value) set in a predetermined specific area in the main control RAM 1312. For example, a fixed time is set in a specific area, the value set in the specific area is periodically subtracted a predetermined number of times, and the measurement is ended when the value reaches "0". In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a fixed time (128 ms) is set in a specific area when transitioning to a time saving state due to special condition time saving, and while the value of the specific area is set to a predetermined value, a special gaming state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)).

On the other hand, in the special gaming state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) output in the jackpot gaming state, a specific value (“0”) is set in the specific area, and the value in the specific area cannot be referred to. The output of the special gaming state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is continued by the process (timer interrupt process and process called from the timer interrupt process) that is periodically executed without interruption. That is, the time (variable time) during which the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output is a period specified by a process that is periodically executed.

Therefore, when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, a fixed time is set in a specific area and the output time is measured by an external output timer, while in the jackpot game state, no value is set in the specific area ("0" is set). Information that can be determined to be a jackpot gaming state in a process that is executed periodically (port output processing within timer interrupt processing) without using an external output timer (job counter, jackpot number, etc.) A special gaming state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output based on the information whose value is set only in the gaming state. In other words, the condition for the special gaming state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) to be output (set to ON) is that when the external output timer is set to a predetermined value, the information indicating the jackpot gaming state (job counter, jackpot number, etc.). Note that the signals to be output are not determined individually; instead, a data table is defined in advance that includes a set of reference destination addresses and setting values for specific areas corresponding to external output signals, and the records set in the data table are It is configured to repeatedly make a determination (set a value to the reference address of a specific area). At this time, by standardizing the process of referring to the data table, it is possible to control the output of the external output signal by changing the data table without modifying the program. Note that the setting value set in the data table is bit information corresponding to an external output port that outputs an external output signal.

In addition, since the number of ports that output external output signals is limited, in order to output jackpot information both at the time of a jackpot and when the special condition is shortened, multiple external output signals are output from one port. By making it possible to notify different types of information, it becomes possible to notify more information to the outside.

Further, by making it possible to notify a plurality of types of information using an external output signal output from one port, it becomes possible to notify the gaming situation in detail. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of performance modes, it is possible to measure the execution status of a special performance. To explain a specific example, in a gaming machine that always shifts to a special effect mode if a special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times, if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the special effect mode, a special effect different from the special effect mode is activated. mode. The predetermined conditions include a special performance mode transition lottery, a combination of symbols in a special lottery, and the elapse of a game time determined by a random lottery. At this time, after outputting an external output signal for a predetermined period of time when transitioning to the special performance mode, the output is stopped, and when transitioning to the special performance mode, the external output signal is output again. Further, by varying the output time depending on a predetermined condition that has been established, or by outputting the output at the end of the special performance mode, it is possible to grasp the gaming situation in more detail. By collecting information regarding the game situation in this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by specifying the execution timing of a more effective performance.

In addition, in addition to the time-saving state (normal time-saving) after the end of the jackpot game state due to winning the special lottery and the time-saving state (special condition time-saving) that enters when you do not win the special lottery a predetermined number of times, special symbols are also available. There is a gaming machine that can shift to a time saving state by making a definite stop with a predetermined combination (specific symbol time saving). When transitioning to a time saving state due to a specific symbol time saving, an external output signal (jackpot information) is output for a predetermined time (128 ms), and an external output signal (during time saving) is continuously output until the end of the time saving state. That is, the external output signal is output in the same manner as the special condition time saving. Therefore, there is no need to output signals in different ways depending on the type of time-saving state, so there is no need to increase the number of signal lines related to external output. If the number of signal lines that output external output signals increases, the management cost on the hall side will increase. Furthermore, since the board for outputting external output signals is generally installed in the frame, it is not easy to increase or decrease the external output signals according to the specifications of the game, so the signal line There is also the advantage that there is no need to deal with additions.

As described above, by notifying multiple types of information using the same signal line or outputting signals in the same manner for different types of time-saving conditions, it is possible to communicate with the outside without changing existing equipment. It is possible to accurately notify the player of the gaming situation including the gaming state.

From the above explanation, each configuration can be specified as follows.
(3) The variable period is a period determined by switching the gaming state, and the fixed period is a period measured based on the number of times a periodic process that can be periodically executed is executed by the game control means. Therefore, in the configuration shown in (3), an external information signal is output at a fixed time (for example, a 128 ms pulse signal) when transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, and if the special lottery is won, the jackpot game state Since the external information signal is output only during the period (variable period) during which This allows the administrator to be identified, making it easier to manage the gaming hall.

(4) The fixed time is defined as (during regular processing) when a predetermined value is stored in a predetermined specific area (timer value) of the main control RAM 1312 (storage means). This is a period during which a special game state signal is output, and the variable period is a period when a specific value different from the predetermined value is stored in the specific area of the storage means (in a periodic process). This is the period during which the special gaming state signal is output. That is, in the configuration shown in (4), measurement using fixed time is performed by setting a fixed time in a specific area and measuring with an external output timer, while measurement using variable time is performed periodically without using an external output timer. Measurement is performed by processing (timer interrupt processing, etc.) that is executed. By controlling the output time of the external output signal by selectively using the fixed time and the variable time in this way, it becomes possible to more accurately notify the game progress status to the outside of the gaming machine.

《External output when the game is stopped》
In the game machine of this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the game is stopped, all signals except the security signal are set to OFF, and output is stopped. Therefore, if a RAM abnormality occurs in the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the external output signal (during time saving) is set to OFF, and then the gaming state is returned to the initial state by a setting change operation. At this time, since the external output signal (during time saving) remains set to OFF, it is assumed that the time saving state due to the special condition time saving has not occurred when the game is restarted. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the time saving transition count is initialized by the setting change operation, and the game is restarted from the initial state.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (setting value abnormality/workpiece abnormality other than the setting value) when the power is turned on, or if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (setting value abnormality) in the normal gaming state, the same process will be executed. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal during the timer interrupt processing, processing related to the game (input processing, timer update processing, special pattern related processing, general pattern related processing, etc.) is skipped.

Furthermore, if the game is stopped due to fraud detection, unlike in the case of a RAM error, various timers (including timers for external output) will not be updated, so external output signals will remain in the output state. will be maintained. Note that output signals for controlling driving bodies such as solenoids are forcibly set to OFF in order to prevent failures. Furthermore, the game stop state can be canceled by, for example, turning the power back on, and may also be conditioned by a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation. Further, even if the power is turned on normally or the setting confirmation operation is performed, the game stop state may be canceled when the power is turned on while performing a special operation (for example, opening a door).

Therefore, if it is determined that the game is stopped due to detection of fraud etc. during the output of the external output signal (jackpot information) that is output for 128 milliseconds during the time reduction transition due to the special condition time reduction, the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal will be activated. By stopping the update, it becomes possible to maintain the timer value in the state before the game is stopped, and it is possible to maintain the output of the external output signal in the ON state. This eliminates the need to determine whether the external output signal was in the output state when it is determined that the game has stopped, so whether the external output signal is in the output state or not, the external It is possible to control the output of the output signal.

As mentioned above, when the game is stopped due to a RAM error, it is necessary to change the settings in order to recover, and as a result, the gaming state is initialized, so the external output is also turned off at the timing when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Set. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to fraud detection, etc., it is possible to recover by turning the power back on or detecting that the abnormality has been removed, so it is necessary to recover from the state before the game was stopped, and the external output is turned off when it is determined that the game has stopped. If it is set to , there is a risk that the signal will be erroneously detected as being output twice on the hall console side if it turns on again after returning, so the external output is maintained when the game is stopped.

Whether or not to move to the game stop state is determined by the abnormality determination process within the timer interrupt process, so the next timer interrupt process after it is determined that the game has stopped (it is detected to enter the game stop state) during the abnormality determination process. , the processing related to the game will be skipped. That is, the process related to the actual game stop is executed in the next timer interrupt process after detecting the transition to the game stop state. Therefore, since the timer is updated at the timing when it is determined that the game has stopped, the timing when it is determined that the game has been stopped and the timing at which the external output timer is updated to 0 are at the same time (within the same timer interrupt processing). In this case, the external output timer changes from 1 to 0, so the external output is turned off before the game actually shifts to the stopped state.

A security signal is output when the game is stopped due to a RAM abnormality or when the game is stopped due to fraudulent activity, but it is not possible to determine which factor caused the game to stop based on the security signal alone. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the gaming machine enters the gaming halt state upon detection of fraud such as a magnetic error, and performs different control from that in the case where the gaming is halted due to a RAM abnormality. As a result, whether the game is stopped due to fraud detection or due to RAM abnormality, it is possible to control whether the game was stopped due to fraudulent activity or due to an unexpected abnormality such as noise or malfunction. is possible to judge. Furthermore, it becomes possible to ascertain from the outside the timing when a gaming machine ceases to operate normally due to fraudulent activity, and for example, monitoring cameras installed in the hall can be used to identify the fraudulent perpetrator. In addition, the factors that cause the game to enter the stopped state are not limited to magnetic abnormalities, but also include when a vibration detection sensor detects vibration, when a radio wave detection sensor detects a radio wave, and in addition, when a large winning opening sensor, a normal electric role, etc. This includes a case where the object sensor detects a winning (a predetermined number of pieces) while the accessory is not in operation, and a case where the consistency between the winning by a specific winning opening (V attacker, etc.) and the exit opening does not match.

As described above, in the game machine of this embodiment, the first game stop condition (RAM abnormality (setting value abnormality)) and the second game stop condition (fraudulent notification of magnetic abnormality, etc.) stop the execution of specific processing related to the game. have. When stopping the progress of the game based on the first game stop condition, immediately before stopping the progress of the game, the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output for a variable period or is fixed. Stops outputting the external output signal regardless of whether it is being output during the period.

On the other hand, under the second game stop condition, the game progress is stopped like the first game stop condition, but just before stopping the game progress, the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is variable. To enable continuous output of an external output signal regardless of whether it is output in a fixed period or in a fixed period. For example, if it is determined that the game is stopped due to detection of fraud etc. during the output of the external output signal (jackpot information) that is output for a fixed period of time (128 milliseconds) during the time reduction transition due to the special condition time reduction (second game stop condition), By stopping the update of the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal, it becomes possible to maintain the timer value in the state before the game is stopped, and the output of the external output signal can be maintained in the ON state. This eliminates the need to determine whether the external output signal was in the output state when it is determined that the game has stopped, so whether the external output signal is in the output state or not, the external It is possible to control the output of the output signal.

When the game is stopped due to the first game stop condition (RAM abnormality (setting value abnormality)), it is necessary to change settings in order to return, and as a result, the gaming state is also initialized, so the external output is also caused by the RAM abnormality. It is set to OFF at the timing determined. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to the second game stop condition (false notification of magnetic abnormality, etc.), it is possible to recover by turning the power back on or detecting that the abnormality has been removed, so it is necessary to recover from the state before the game was stopped, and external output is required. If you set it to OFF when it is determined that the game has stopped, it will turn ON again after returning and there is a risk that the hole controller will mistakenly detect that the signal has been output twice, so when the game is stopped, the external I try to maintain the output.

A security signal is output when the game is stopped due to a RAM abnormality or when the game is stopped due to fraudulent activity, but it is not possible to determine which factor caused the game to stop based on the security signal alone. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the gaming machine enters the gaming halt state upon detection of fraud such as a magnetic error, and performs different control from that in the case where the gaming is halted due to a RAM abnormality. As a result, whether the game is stopped due to fraud detection (second game stop condition) or when the game is stopped due to RAM abnormality (first game stop condition), whether the game is stopped due to fraud, noise, malfunction, etc. Which control is capable of determining whether the game has been stopped due to the occurrence of an unexpected abnormality. Furthermore, it becomes possible to ascertain from the outside the timing when a gaming machine ceases to operate normally due to fraudulent activity, and for example, monitoring cameras installed in the hall can be used to identify the fraudulent perpetrator.

From the above explanation, each configuration can be specified as follows.

(5) The main control MPU 1311 (game control means) has a first game stop condition and a second game stop condition for stopping the execution of specific processing related to the game, and progresses the game based on the first game stop condition. When stopping the game, the output of the special game state signal (immediately before stopping the progress of the game), regardless of whether the special game state signal is output for a variable period or a fixed period. and under the second game stop condition, the progress of the game is stopped in the same way as the first game control means, but (immediately before stopping the progress of the game) the special game state signal (within a variable period) To enable a special game state signal to be output continuously regardless of whether it is being output (or for a fixed period).

In the configuration shown in (5), when the game is stopped due to the first game stop condition, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation in order to return to the game, and as a result, the game state is also initialized, so the external output is also stored in the RAM. Set it to OFF at the timing when it is determined that there is an abnormality. In addition, when the game is stopped due to the second game stop condition, the output can be turned on by stopping the update of the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal, so that it can be recovered by turning the power back on or detecting that the abnormality has been removed. By maintaining the state as it is, there is no need to judge whether the external output signal was in the output state when it is determined that the game has stopped, and by re-outputting the external output signal after returning to the game, the hole controller side can output the external output signal twice. Since it is possible to prevent a signal from being erroneously detected as being output, it is possible to control the output of an external output signal using a common process regardless of whether the process is an exception process (game stop) or a normal process.

《Stop updating the time-saving migration counter》
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, by repeating the fluctuation of not winning the special lottery a predetermined number of times, the game machine shifts to a time saving state based on the special condition time saving. Therefore, by erroneously detecting a prize in the starting prize slot using radio waves, magnetism, etc., there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out that fraudulently increase the number of draws in the special lottery and quickly shift to a time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving. . In order to suppress such fraudulent acts, the gaming machine of this embodiment stops updating the time saving transfer counter for a predetermined suppression period when a radio wave or magnetism is detected. This suppression period continues until the suppression period is lifted even after the fraud is resolved due to no longer detecting radio waves or magnetism. The suppression period can be canceled by, for example, a cancellation operation by an employee of the hall, turning the power back on, or opening the door. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a time reduction state due to a special condition time reduction from being fraudulently caused by fraudulent acts using radio waves, magnetism, or the like.

"others"
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of production modes are executed depending on the result of the special lottery. The plurality of performance modes have different performance modes depending on the player's interests such as gaming value and jackpot expectation level. In a special performance mode (performance mode with the highest profit for the player) among the plurality of performance modes, updating of the time saving transition count is suppressed. During this suppression period, an external output signal indicating that it is a suppression period is outputted so that the hall controller side can recognize that it is a suppression period. It should be noted that the external output signal may be used for both jackpot information and time saving information, or may be a dedicated external output signal. On the hall console side, it is possible to recognize that this is the period in which updating of the time saving transition counter is suppressed based on the external information signal output during the suppression period.

A special performance mode may be a performance mode that is executed when a specific condition is met in a look-ahead performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the reserved memory, or a performance mode that is executed when a specific jackpot is achieved. It may be an effect mode in which the symbol stops to indicate a specific jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the most prize balls). Furthermore, it may be a performance mode corresponding to a gaming state such as a high probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state.

In addition, as mentioned above, when transitioning to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving, an external output signal (jackpot information) is output to notify the hall console side of the initialization of the time-saving transition count, but other external output signals The initialization of the time saving transition count may be notified by output. For example, if you win a special lottery, the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine transmits a signal that initializes the values such as the number of fluctuations that have been counted, and when this signal is received on the hall console side, the time saving transition count is counted. It is also possible to initialize the values corresponding to . If it is not possible to increase the number of signal types to be output, or if increasing the number of signal types would increase management costs, other signals may be used for the same purpose. For example, it may be an external output signal (jackpot information), a pattern confirmation signal, or a combination of specific multiple signals (for example, signals of both time saving and jackpot information). good.

The external output signal (jackpot information) and the external output signal (during time saving) may be output at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the signal is output after a predetermined symbol confirmation period has elapsed from the symbol stoppage. It is outputting. When transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the fluctuation of the special symbol whose time saving transition count reaches 0 stops, and the output of the external output signal is started at the timer interrupt after the predetermined fixed period has elapsed, and the next timer interrupt Then (if the hold is not 0), the special symbol changes. Therefore, each external output signal indicating the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is outputted from the timing (before) even if the hold is 0. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify that the time saving state based on the special condition time saving has started even if there is no hold, and it is possible to grasp the accurate gaming situation.

In addition, the timing at which the output of the external output signal is started may be the symbol variation next to the special symbol variation in which the time saving transition count reaches 0. Further, the output of the external output signal may be started after the stop symbol is determined in the first symbol variation after the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is started. By outputting the signal after the special symbol actually starts changing after the conditions for starting the time saving state due to special condition time saving are met, the difference between the timing of the signal output and the start timing of the time saving state is minimized. This makes it possible to collect accurate information. In this case, by setting the next variation not to start when the time saving transition count is 0, the player will be able to activate the time saving state due to the special time saving condition immediately after the first variation, so the hole side It will be possible to use it as a morning service. For example, the time reduction shift count is varied until it reaches 0 from the close of business on the previous day to the start of business on the next day, and then the number of fluctuations of the data lamp is reset (returned to 0). Thereby, after the start of business on the next day, the first player can activate the time saving state based on the special condition time saving at the same time as the first symbol fluctuation starts. By allowing the symbols to change after the end of the business, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding that the game will shift to a time-saving state based on the previous day's results.

[26-3. Output of individual external output signals according to gaming status]
The output mode of the external output signal is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 425, and other modes are also possible. FIG. 426 is a modification of the time chart showing the output timing of the external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 426, individual external output signals (special condition time saving, probability variable state, etc.) corresponding to individual gaming states (for example, time saving state (special condition time saving, normal time saving), jackpot game state, probability variable state, etc.) By outputting , it is possible to manage the balls thrown according to the game state.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 425, an external output signal corresponding to jackpot information ("special prize in progress" in FIG. 426) was output for 128 ms when transitioning to a time saving state due to special condition time saving or specific symbol time saving. In the modification shown in , the external output signal (big hit information, special prize) is configured not to be output. In a type-two type mixing machine, if the signal indicating the start of the special condition time-saving and the signal indicating the special prize (jackpot information) are used, the time-saving medium signal can be used when only the substantial jackpot round that excludes small wins is considered a jackpot. may rise before the special prize signal, and it may be mistakenly recognized as the start of a time-saving state due to a specific symbol time-saving. Therefore, as in the modification shown in FIG. 426, the above-mentioned problem can be solved by separately outputting the signal indicating the start of the special condition time saving and the signal indicating the special prize (jackpot information) as external information. I can do it.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this modification, the same signal (signal during time saving) is output in both the time saving state due to normal time saving and the time saving state due to special condition time saving, so the time saving state due to normal time saving and the time saving state due to special condition time saving are output. cannot be managed separately, so if it is necessary to separate the data into the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving and the time-saving state due to the normal time-saving, a dedicated external information signal is output that is output only when the special condition time-saving is satisfied. In addition, the same applies to specific symbol time savings, and if you want to manage the ball launch (base) in each of the time savings states of normal time savings, special condition time savings, and specific symbol time savings, special condition time savings and specific symbol time savings are dedicated to each. (times t201 to t202, times t208 to t209).

Finally, the gaming machines of this embodiment and this modification output a dedicated signal when the winning probability of the special lottery is high. This makes it possible to grasp the timing to start updating the time saving transition count in the ST machine and the falling lottery machine. Since updating of the time-saving transition count is disabled during high probability (valid only during low probability), it is possible to manage the time-saving transition count from the end of the high probability state. Since the time-saving signal is output during both high-probability medium and low-probability time-saving modes, after the jackpot game state ends, it is necessary to judge whether or not the high-probability mode is in effect and update the time-saving shift count. Furthermore, when a falling lottery is executed in which the winning probability of the special lottery changes from a high probability to a low probability, updating of the time saving transition count is started at the timing when the winning probability changes to a low probability. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine that executes a falling lottery, it is necessary to initialize the time saving transfer count at the timing of winning the falling lottery.

[27. Control configuration of peripheral control board]
The special condition time reduction in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Next, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, effect control will be explained, focusing on control for displaying images on the effect display device (main display device) 1600. First, the configuration for effect control will be explained. The gaming machine of this embodiment includes a main control board 1310 as a means for controlling the game in an integrated manner, a peripheral control board 1510 as a means for controlling the performance of the game, and a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. 951 etc. The configuration and basic control of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are as explained in FIG. 17 etc., so the explanation will be omitted, and the explanation will be supplemented as necessary.

Performance control is executed by peripheral control board 1510 based on commands sent from main control board 1310. Here, the configuration and control necessary for peripheral control board 1510 to execute production control after receiving a command will be described. First, the basic configuration of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the entire effect will be explained, and in particular, the configuration for displaying images on the effect display device (main display device) 1600 of this embodiment will be explained. Furthermore, the control required from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the performance will be explained.

[27-1. Configuration of peripheral control board]
FIG. 427 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 427, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on commands sent from the main control board 1310, and a performance display device based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. 1600, a sound source IC (04TKK0030) that outputs sound, and a performance display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the 1600, a sound source IC (04TKK0030) that outputs sound, and a performance display control unit 1512 that stores performance data in advance before execution or temporarily stores decoded image data. It is equipped with an external RAM (05TKK0020) for controlling the performance, and a performance data ROM (05TKK0070) for storing programs and performance data for controlling the performance. Each configuration of the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below.

[27-1a. Peripheral control section]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU (04TKK0011), a RAM (04TKK0012), a boot ROM (05TKK0013), and further includes various I/O interfaces (not shown). The peripheral control unit 1511 may be arranged on the substrate as a separate electronic component, or may be configured as a peripheral control IC in which these components are integrated into one semiconductor chip.

The peripheral control unit 1511 further includes external input/output means such as a parallel I/O port and a serial I/O port, and receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, for example. The CPU (04TKK0011) performs various production controls based on programs and data stored in the RAM (04TKK0012). The programs include those that perform system-side processing such as initial settings of the CPU (04TKK0011) and various devices, and those that perform application-side processing that controls effects such as lamps, movable objects, sound sources, and images. It will be done.

The RAM (04TKK0012) is assigned a work area for temporarily storing data during program execution, and a program area for storing programs read from the boot ROM (05TKK0013) or the production data ROM (05TKK0070). Note that the work area and the program area may be configured as separate RAMs.

Based on the received various commands, the CPU (04TKK0011) generates game board side light emitting data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is transmitted to each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, the CPU (04TKK0011) transmits game board side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various production units provided on the game board 5. A door for outputting drive signals to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. The door side is composed of side drive data and door side light emitting data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The drive light emission data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) transmits control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to the effect display control unit 1512 from the display control unit serial I/O port based on the received various commands. or outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information to the sound source IC (04TKK0030).

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU (04TKK0011), the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. It uses an external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control. Note that the WDT (watchdog timer) may be monitored only by an external WDT without providing a built-in WDT.

Display commands output from the CPU (04TKK0011) to the effect display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU (04TKK0011) to the game board 5 side are sent to multiple serial input/output ports different from display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The boot ROM (05TKK0013) stores power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and data necessary for the processing. In the game machine of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, a power-on process is executed by processing a program stored in a predetermined area (boot area) of the boot ROM (05TKK0013). At this time, devices and input/output means (I/O) necessary for starting the peripheral control board 1510 are initialized.

[27-1b. External RAM]
The external RAM (05TKK0020) stores (preloads) the data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) in accordance with instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011), VDP (04TKK0060), and the like.

In addition, by allowing the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060) to access data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020), processing is significantly faster than when acquiring programs and data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). It becomes possible to convert into Therefore, access to external RAM (05TKK0020) needs to be made as fast (and efficient) as possible in order to quickly control the performance. For example, DDR3 SDRAM or its successor standard memory (storage medium) is used. ing.

In addition, while the external RAM (05TKK0020) can be accessed at high speed, it is not realistic from a cost standpoint to secure enough capacity to store all the data necessary for the performance, so various performance data are stored in large volumes. is stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) that can store the following. However, reading data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) requires more time than reading data from the external RAM (05TKK0020), so as mentioned above, reading data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) requires more time. By loading the performance data in advance into an external RAM (05TKK0020) from which data can be read out at high speed from 05TKK0070), the time required to read the performance data is shortened.

The data to be preloaded may be any data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), and may include not only image (video) data and sound data, but also various control data and scheduler data for controlling the performance. It may be. Furthermore, by preloading frequently displayed image data (for example, identification symbols, pending displays, etc.) and outputted sound data as resident data, performance control can be sped up.

In this way, the external RAM (05TKK0020) stores image data (which satisfies predetermined conditions) and sound data (sound data itself such as music, SE, etc.). On the other hand, the RAM (04TKK0012) of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores all programs executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) (excluding the boot program) and data used in processing by the programs (for example, scheduler data, etc.). Furthermore, a work area is allocated that is used temporarily when the program is executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, data to be preloaded is selected in advance and resides in the external RAM (05TKK0020). As described later, it is stored in the resident content data area (05TKK081) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) (see Figure 428B), and after the power is turned on, it is stored in the resident content data area (05TKK081) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) from the external RAM. By preloading (05TKK0020) into a predetermined area (external RAM resident content data storage area), it is possible to speed up production control. Note that the data to be preloaded will be described later.

[27-1c. Sound output section (sound source IC)]
The sound source IC (04TKK0030) enables high-quality performance based on sound data. The sound source IC (04TKK0030) acquires sound data based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs sound data from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. provided on the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4.

The sound data is stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and is information for outputting music, audio, sound effects, etc. In addition, the sound source IC (04TKK0030) can output sound based on sound data directly acquired from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), while it is preloaded from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020). It is possible to output sound based on the sound data that is displayed.

Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch By sending a stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than ever before.

[27-1d. Performance display control section]
[27-1d-1. Basic configuration of production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 427, the effect display control unit 1512 transfers various data stored in the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) (04TKK0060) that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 and the effect data ROM (05TKK0070). and an image RAM (04TKK0090) to be copied. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the effect display control section 1512 is arranged on the peripheral control board 1510, but it may be arranged on another board.

When the drawing instruction (liquid crystal display command list) output from the peripheral control unit 1511 is input, the VDP (04TKK0060) extracts sprite data (image data) based on the input drawing instruction and uses the effect display device. The drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Sprite data (image data) used for display is acquired from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) or external RAM (05TKK0020) and stored in the image RAM (04TKK0090).

Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept a drawing instruction from the peripheral control section 1511, the VDP (04TKK0060) outputs an execution signal to the peripheral control section 1511 to notify that fact. Note that the VDP (04TKK0060) uses a double buffer system for the frame buffer. In the double buffer method, frame buffers for two screens are secured in the image RAM (04TKK0090), one of which is used as a display buffer for displaying on the effect display device 1600, and the other as a drawing buffer for drawing the display image. When drawing to the drawing buffer is completed, the display buffer and drawing buffer are switched (bank flip), and this process is repeated. Note that a line buffer method may be adopted in which one line of drawing data for drawing in the left and right direction is held in a line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in this line buffer is output to the effect display device 1600.

The sprite data (image data) stored in the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state. Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other being set.

In the double buffer method, as described above, a sprite is drawn in the drawing buffer, and after the drawing is completed, the drawing buffer and the display buffer are switched to display it on the effect display device 1600, and this process is repeated. Since the frame buffer buffers an entire screen frame, unlike the line buffer method, there is no limit to the number of sprites that can be lined up horizontally, and the drawing speed to the image RAM (04TKK0090) by VDP (04TKK0060) and the image The sprite display performance can be improved by the increased access speed of the RAM (04TKK0090).

The basic configuration of the effect display control section 1512 has been described above, and further, the detailed configuration of the effect display control section 1512 will be explained.

[27-1d-2. VDP]
The VDP (04TKK0060) includes a CG data decoder (04TKK0061) that decodes image data read from the production data ROM (05TKK0070), a rendering engine (04TKK0062) that processes and generates one frame of image data, and a 3D display. The display controller includes a pixel shader (04TKK0063) that generates and processes images for use in production, and a display controller (04TKK0064) that controls output of images to the effect display device 1600. Other components not shown include a CG memory controller that controls reading of image data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and a VDP controller that controls each component inside the VDP (04TKK0060).

[27-1d-3. Image RAM]
As described above, the image RAM (04TKK0090) is a memory that temporarily stores data necessary for the VDP (04TKK0060) to execute drawing processing. The storage area provided by the image RAM (04TKK0090) is mostly occupied by buffers for temporarily recording characters and images to be displayed on the screen, and such buffers include frame buffers (04TKK0091). and an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092).

The frame buffer (04TKK0091) is a storage area in which image data specifying the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is temporarily stored. Further, the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) is a storage area where image data is temporarily stored during the process of creating an image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as described above, the frame buffer (04TKK0091) has a double buffer structure having a first buffer and a second buffer, and is configured to be switchable between a drawing bank and a display bank.

[27-1d-4. Overview of image display control]
Next, a procedure for displaying an image on the effect display device 1600 will be explained. The effect display control unit 1512 receives the liquid crystal display list command created by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 by processing the main command that the peripheral control unit 1511 received from the main control board 1310, and displays the received liquid crystal display. An image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the list command.

Liquid crystal display list commands are temporarily stored in a command buffer (command memory). The VDP (04TKK0060) causes the effect display device 1600 to display an image based on the liquid crystal display list command stored in the command buffer. The command buffer has a FIFO (First In First Out) structure, and the liquid crystal display list commands are stored in the order in which they are received and processed in the order in which they are stored. Note that the command buffer may be provided independently as a command memory, or may be allocated to an area in a work RAM (not shown) inside the VDP.

In addition, the liquid crystal display list command specifies each frame of the effect display device 1600, and includes control commands related to VDP control such as interrupt operations of VDP (04TKK0060), and drawing operations of the rendering engine (04TKK0062). It includes drawing commands, decode commands related to decoding operations of the CG data decoder (04TKK0061), and the like.

The VDP (04TKK0060) reads image data (image information) from the external RAM (05TKK0020) or the production data ROM (05TKK0070) using the CG memory controller, decodes the read image data using the CG data decoder (04TKK0061), and converts it into image display data. (image display information) is generated. Note that since the image data read by the CG memory controller is stored in a compressed state, the read image data is decoded by the CG data decoder (04TKK0061).

Furthermore, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes image data generated by the rendering engine (04TKK0062). Furthermore, when displaying an image on the effect display device 1600 in 3D, pixel conversion is performed using a pixel shader (04TKK0063), and the image data is converted into a lenticular image. Finally, the final image data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stored in the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Further, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as will be described later, objects such as characters displayed on the screen can be displayed in 3D. Therefore, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores 3D image (stereoscopic image) data and 2D image (plane image) data. All of these image data are compressed using the same method. In this embodiment, compression is performed in both the X-axis direction (horizontal direction) and the Y-axis direction (vertical direction). Thereby, the capacity of image data can be reduced. Note that compression may be performed only in one direction. In addition, by using the same compression method for 3D image data and 2D image data, it is possible to simplify processing when decoding data (when releasing a compressed state). Note that the CG data decoder (04TKK0061) of the VDP (04TKK0060) supports multiple types of compression methods, and any method can be selected, but a common compression method is selected during implementation. In addition, as will be described later, images for which pixel conversion is performed by the pixel shader (04TKK0063) are combined on a pixel-by-pixel basis for each dot, so it is desirable to perform reversible compression.

The VDP (04TKK0060) uses the rendering engine (04TKK0062) to process the decoded image data as necessary based on the liquid crystal display list command. Then, the image to be finally displayed on the effect display device 1600 is drawn in the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Thereafter, by bank switching (bank flip), the drawing bank is switched to the display bank (bank flip), and the effect display device 1600 displays. The bank flip execution timing is defined by the bank flip wait command included in the liquid crystal display list command, and after the VDP (04TKK0060) receives the bank flip wait command, the bank flip execution timing is determined by the bank flip wait command included in the liquid crystal display list command. A bank flip is actually executed at the screen update cycle (frame cycle).

[27-1d-4. Memory map]
When executing image processing, the VDP (04TKK0060) accesses storage areas provided by the image RAM (04TKK0090) and external RAM (05TKK0101). A common address space is allocated to this storage area. FIG. 428A is an example of a memory map of storage areas accessed by VDP (04TKK0060).

Referring to FIG. 428A, the storage areas accessed by VDP (04TKK0060) include a frame buffer (04TKK0091), an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), an expansion buffer (05TKK0093), a temporary save buffer (05TKK0094), and a decode buffer ( 05TKK0101).

The frame buffer (04TKK0091) and off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) are provided by the image RAM (05TKK0101) as described above, but they are not limited to this, for example, the frame buffer that is finally output to the effect display screen. (04TKK0091) may be provided by image RAM (05TKK0101), while off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) may be provided by external RAM (05TKK0020).

The expansion buffer (05TKK0093), temporary save buffer (05TKK0094), and decode buffer (05TKK0101) are provided by one or both of the image RAM (04TKK0090) and the external RAM (05TKK0101).

[27-1e. Performance data storage unit (performance data ROM)]
The configuration of the effect display control section 1512 has been described above. Next, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) that stores various performance data will be explained. As described above, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores data and programs necessary for executing the performance.

[27-1e-1. Configuration of production data ROM]
The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) used in the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured as a ROM board mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. The interface standard for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is serial ATA. Therefore, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is equipped with a SATA controller (05TKK0071), and performs control in response to access requests from the CPU (04TKK0011), VDP (04TKK0060), and the like.

The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) includes a storage device (05TKK0073) that stores various programs and data. The storage device (05TKK0073) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) in the gaming machine of this embodiment is a NAND flash memory. NAND flash memory is a large capacity non-volatile storage medium.

The basic unit of a NAND flash memory is a one-bit or multiple-bit storage area called a "memory cell." The effect data ROM (05TKK0070) of the gaming machine of this embodiment has a storage area of multiple bits (for example, 3 bits) in order to realize low cost. A memory cell stores data by holding charge in a charge holding region. Further, data reading is performed in units of pages made up of a plurality of memory cells. Furthermore, since the NAND flash memory has a configuration in which a plurality of cells are connected in series, it is possible to achieve high integration at low cost. Therefore, by employing a NAND flash memory for the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve both a large storage capacity and cost reduction. Note that the storage device (05TKK0073) is not limited to a NAND flash memory, and may be any other storage medium as long as the capacity, cost, etc. meet predetermined conditions.

However, NAND flash memory has a much slower data access speed than DDR3 DRAM, which is used in general RAM, so reading out image data and sound data becomes a bottleneck when performing performances. , there was a risk of delays in production. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a cache memory (05TKK0072) is installed in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to speed up data reading.

The cache memory (05TKK0072) is composed of DRAM (or SRAM) that can be read and written at high speed. When accessing data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) from the CPU (04TKK0011) or VDP (05TKK0020), if the data is stored in the cache memory (05TKK0072), the data read time can be significantly reduced. I can do it. In particular, when the amount of data read from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is large, a particularly high effect can be achieved.

The SATA controller (05TKK0071) holds management information of the production data ROM (05TKK0070). Note that the management information of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) may be held in the cache memory (05TKK0072). The management information includes memory cell arrangement information and the like. Further, the cache memory (05TKK0072) may be built into the SATA controller (05TKK0071).

In a NAND flash memory, if data stored in the same area (memory cell) is repeatedly read, the digital values of neighboring cells may change. Furthermore, if a specific area (memory cell) is not accessed for a long period of time, charges may be lost and data may not be retained. In order to solve this problem, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) installed in the gaming machine of this embodiment has a refresh function. The refresh function, for example, reads the contents of a page in which data is stored and writes back the same contents. As a result, charge is reinjected into the memory cell, suppressing unintended data changes, and preventing data read errors from occurring. Note that the page on which the refresh function is executed may be only the page to which data has been written, or may be all pages. For example, pages to which data has been written may be executed when the power is turned on, and all pages may be executed periodically or manually.

Further, the refresh function can be executed by the SATA controller (05TKK0071) independently of the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060). The effect data ROM (05TKK0070) of the gaming machine of this embodiment can automatically execute a refresh function when the power is turned on. The mechanism by which the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) detects power-on is provided in the SATA controller (05TKK0071) separately from the detection of power-on by the CPU (04TKK0011). Therefore, the refresh function can be executed independently without waiting for instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011). Furthermore, by providing the SATA controller (05TKK0071) with a power-on detection mechanism, it is possible to execute the refresh function based on the power supply to the production data ROM (05TKK0070), regardless of the power supply state on the peripheral control board 1510 side. can. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is cut off during execution of the refresh function and the refresh function is interrupted, the refresh function can be executed from the beginning when the power is turned on again.

Note that the refresh function is not executed every time the gaming machine is powered on, but when the gaming machine is powered on more than one day (24 hours) after it was last powered on. may also be executed. This is to prevent the refresh function from being executed frequently since the power may be turned on multiple times a day due to maintenance or the like. Furthermore, the period during which execution of the refresh function is suppressed is not limited to 24 hours, but may be less than 24 hours (for example, about 12 hours) or longer than 24 hours (for example, about 48 hours). good.

Furthermore, it is also possible to execute the refresh function in response to an external instruction by operating a specific operating means (power-on switch, effect button, etc.). This allows an employee of the game parlor to start the refresh function at any timing. It may also be possible to execute the refresh function based on instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011) or based on instructions from the peripheral control unit 1511 based on commands sent from the main control board 1310. .

In addition, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) can also execute a refresh function when the SATA controller (05TKK0071) detects a predetermined number of cells that are likely to cause a data error (cells with reduced electrification). However, if the refresh function is executed while the game is continuing, the data reading speed will decrease, so there is a possibility that normal performance control will not be possible. Therefore, as in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by executing the refresh function when the gaming machine is powered on, that is, before starting the game, the execution of the refresh function when playing the game is suppressed, and the performance can be executed smoothly. By configuring the game so that the player can play the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in NAND flash memory, data is read in units of pages made up of multiple memory cells, so when reading small-sized data, it is necessary to read data that does not need to be read. As a result, read efficiency deteriorates. For example, data that is frequently accessed when a gaming machine is started up (when the power is turned on), that is, frequently displayed images, is transferred to the cache memory (05TKK0072), but data that is stored within a page and is not subject to transfer Since the image data is also read out, the amount of data actually read out is much larger than the total amount of image data required. Therefore, data is preloaded from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) after a predetermined power supply voltage (3.3V) is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 until audio output and image display are actually possible. This requires a lot of time.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when preloading the external RAM (05TKK0020) with sound data and resident image data (images that are frequently read out or small-sized images), it is necessary to By changing the unit of data transfer from 16KB to 32KB, overhead is reduced and transfer time is shortened. The time required to turn on the power is directly affected by the amount of data to be preloaded, and also affects the execution of the refresh function.

In addition, when the power is turned on, as mentioned above, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) executes the refresh function (PoB; Power on Busy), so access to the storage device (05TKK0073), which is a NAND flash memory, is continuously accessed. Occur. Therefore, the speed of reading data from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) will decrease. In addition, as mentioned above, the speed reduction is particularly noticeable when reading small-sized data, so when displaying an image with a capacity of about 16 KB, which is smaller than the data amount in a page unit, when the power is turned on, the performance data ROM ( If an attempt is made to directly read image data from the storage device (05TKK0073) of 05TKK0070), a problem arises in that it takes a long time until the game can be started. Note that approximately half of the images displayed on the effect display screen 1600 have a capacity of 16 KB or less.

As a means to solve the above-mentioned problems, it may be possible to extend the standby time on the main control board 1310 side until the image can be displayed, but this would lengthen the time required for the inspection process during mass production of gaming machines. Therefore, it was necessary to shorten the startup time of the peripheral control board 1510. For example, when checking whether the display of a demo screen (including lamp effects, movable body effects, etc.) is executed normally as a test when the power is turned on, the demonstration screen is started from the main control board 1310. Since the power-on command is used, the time from when the power is turned on until the above-mentioned inspection is completed is affected by the standby time of the main control board 1310, resulting in problems such as deterioration of inspection efficiency. .

Therefore, as described above, the image data is preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) as resident data, and the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the image data from the external RAM (05TKK0020). In addition, while the refresh function is running, the bandwidth is limited and the storage device (05TKK0073) is accessed while the refresh function is running, so the time it takes for the refresh function to finish increases, but large-capacity performance can be achieved immediately after the power is turned on. Since no effects that require data are executed, virtually no problems occur.

Furthermore, the data to be preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) is not set for each image, but is set to have a capacity that minimizes the overhead when writing data to the cache memory (05TKK0072). Therefore, data with a larger capacity (for example, 32 KB) than the capacity of one image (16 KB) is transferred. This is because when you try to read small-sized data, data is actually read in page units, and specified data is extracted from the read data, so data extraction is not necessary. The increase in overhead is suppressed by setting the size to 0. For example, the size of the data to be preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) may be in units of pages, which are data read units. Note that the size of the resident image data is not necessarily limited to 32 KB or less, and may be large-capacity image data exceeding 32 KB that is frequently used.

In addition, since the access speed to the external RAM (05TKK0020) is faster than the access speed to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), it is possible to speed up the performance control by increasing the amount of preloaded data. An increase in the capacity of (05TKK0020) will lead to an increase in cost. Furthermore, as described above, the smaller the size of the image data preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020), the worse the reading efficiency becomes. In the game machine of this embodiment, about half of the image data has a capacity of 16 KB or less, and furthermore, image data of 32 KB or less accounts for 2/3 of the total. Therefore, approximately 1/2 to 2/3 of the image data may be preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) in descending order of size. When defining the threshold for the size of image data to be preloaded, the size of the image data must be included in the 1/2nd to 2/3rd of the total in descending order of size, and the capacity of 2 ⁿ bytes (page or (block unit).

As described above, by setting the size of data to be preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020), it is possible to significantly shorten the time it takes for the peripheral control board 1510 to become operational.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by providing the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) with a cache memory (05TKK0072), it is possible to shorten the data read time. Furthermore, by reading data from the cache memory (05TKK0072) and external RAM (05TKK0020), it is possible to reduce the frequency of accessing the storage device (05TKK0073), which is a NAND flash memory, thereby suppressing data deterioration. , it is possible to prevent read performance from deteriorating due to error correction, etc., and to extend the life of the storage device (NAND flash memory).

Note that, as described above, the smaller the size of the preloaded image data, the higher the reading efficiency. However, there is a possibility that there may be image data that is not preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) due to reasons such as its large size despite its relatively high read frequency. Such image data may be later loaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) when the data has been read a predetermined number of times or more. In this case, a storage area for post-residency may be secured in advance in the resident content data area (05TKK0081), or a storage area for post-response may be secured separately from the resident content data area (05TKK0081). Good too.

Further, it may be controlled so that image data that is not preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) is easily stored in the cache memory (05TKK0072) (to increase the hit rate of the cache memory). When reading data, the cache memory (05TKK0072) stores the read data, so the target image data is read at a predetermined timing (dummy read). This predetermined timing may be, for example, every predetermined time, the time of executing a predetermined effect, or the time of transition to a customer waiting state. The data to be read may be defined in advance, or may be set based on the result of counting the number of reads of image data that has not been preloaded.

[27-1e-2. Control during execution of refresh function]
The basic control regarding the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) has been explained above, but here we will explain the state and control of the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed. I will explain about it.

In principle, the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is not executed by a call from a program such as the power-on processing of the peripheral control board 1510 (FIG. 429), but is executed by a predetermined refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). is executed independently based on the supplied power supply voltage.

Furthermore, after the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 waits for a predetermined period of time until the peripheral control board 1510 can draw on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the game waits in the power-on wait process (step 02TKS0130) of the power-on startup confirmation process (step 02TKS0020 in FIG. 382; FIG. 383). Since the standby time is set to at least the time until drawing control by the effect display control unit 1512 becomes possible, execution of the refresh function of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) is completed by the time the power-on wait process is completed. controlled to do so.

That is, by the time the execution of the refresh function of the production data ROM (05TKK0070) at power-on is completed (while the refresh function is still being executed), the main control board 1310 starts supplying power to the control circuit and outputs the reset signal. After this is canceled, execution of the process at the start address (address 8000) of the program code (power-on process) is started, and the processes up to the power-on wait process are executed.

In addition, the game can be started only after the timer interrupt is permitted (step 02TKS0070 in FIG. 382), and after completion of the startup confirmation process at power-on (step 02TKS0020), that is, after the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) The game is controlled not to start until execution of the refresh function is completed.

Also, before the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the power-on wait process (step 02TKS0130), at power-on, the signal level of the setting-related operation section (setting key 971, RAM clear switch 954) is acquired. A pre-wait setting related switch acquisition process is executed (step 02TKS0120). Therefore, only the signal level of the setting-related operation section is acquired, and it is the setting operation determination process (step 02TKS0040) that determines whether the setting operation is actually performed. The setting function is never executed, and the setting function is controlled so as not to shift to the setting state (setting change state, setting confirmation state).

In addition, since the RAM clear determination process (step 02TKS0030) is executed after the power-on wait process is executed, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, the RAM clear determination process (step 02TKS0030) is not executed until the execution of the refresh function of the production data ROM (05TKK0070) is completed. RAM clearing is not executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute RAM clearing after the execution of the refresh function is completed, and RAM clearing is executed based on the result of the determination.

After starting the power-on process, the main control MPU 1311 enables at least the watchdog timer setting when performing RAM protection permission setting (step 02TKS0010). At this time, the watchdog timer is controlled so that it does not time out while waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 is initialized by the power-on wait process. This makes it possible to reliably detect the occurrence of an abnormality since the watchdog timer is activated after the power-on wait process is executed.

Further, if only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed, the execution of the refresh function is not interrupted and continues as it is. When the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted, the main control board 1310 executes the power-on process again. At this time, even if it is possible to return to the state before the power cut off based on the information stored in the main control RAM 1312, the return process is not executed and waits until the execution of the refresh function is completed. For example, the process of displaying the special symbol and the number of reserved memories before the power cut on the function display unit 1400 is performed after the refresh function is executed. Furthermore, even if the gaming state before the power cut is an advantageous gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.), the system returns to the advantageous gaming state after executing the refresh function. Furthermore, if the game media payout process before the power cut has not been completed, the game media payout process is stopped until the refresh function is completed, and the process is continued after the refresh function is completed.

Note that since the ball lending operation is controlled only by the main control board 1310 side, it may be possible to accept it even while the refresh function is being executed. When a ball lending operation is received, the ball lending may be performed even while the refresh function is being executed, or the ball lending may be performed after the execution of the refresh function is completed. Furthermore, even when the refresh function is being executed, the game ball launch control is only controlled by the main control board 1310, so there is no need to suppress the launch control.

As described above, the refresh function of the production data ROM (05TKK0070) is executed independently of the control of the main control board 1310, so even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed, the refresh function There is no need to execute the process again, and it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being placed on the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

Furthermore, while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed, even if various sensors detect the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality notification is not performed, and processing related to the abnormality notification is suppressed. While the refresh function is being executed, there is a possibility that drawing data and audio data for reporting an abnormality cannot be obtained, so this allows reliable reporting of an abnormality.

The refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is basically executed when the power is turned on, but it can also be executed while the game continues. If the refresh function is executed while the game continues, game control can be started or continued. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 is capable of receiving command input from the main control board 1310. Note that the process corresponding to the command is executed after the execution of the refresh function is completed. This makes it possible to process commands immediately after executing the refresh function, thereby minimizing time lag.

While the refresh function of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed, initialization processing of drawing control to the effect display device 1600 is not started, but initialization processing of other effect devices can be started. For example, it is possible to perform a self-check operation (initialization operation) of the movable accessory. At this time, the series of initialization operations may be terminated after the execution of the refresh function is completed, or the series of initialization operations may be terminated while the refresh function is being executed.

If there are unpaid game balls (game media) while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed during the continuation of the game, the unpaid prize balls are paid out. Moreover, when a ball lending operation is accepted, the ball lending operation can be started. Furthermore, it enables the launch device to execute launch control. These controls are not directly related to the control on the peripheral control board 1510, and therefore can be executed independently of the execution of the refresh function.

Further, if an abnormality is detected while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed while the game is being continued, an abnormality notification display is performed after the refresh function is completed. At this time, the abnormality notification display may be displayed only if the abnormality continues after the execution of the refresh function is completed, or the abnormality notification display may not be displayed if the abnormality has been resolved. However, it may be determined whether or not to display an abnormality notification depending on the type of abnormality that has occurred. Further, when a command related to abnormality notification is received from the main control board 1310 during execution of the refresh function, the abnormality notification may be made possible by means other than the effect display device 1600 (lamp, sound, etc.).

Further, when execution of the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is started while the game is continuing, the drawing control is interrupted and the drawing of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 is suppressed. At this time, the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 of the main control board 1310 continues even while the refresh function is being executed. Similarly, if there is a pending memory, the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is suppressed while the refresh function is being executed, and the display is resumed after the refresh function is completed. At this time, the pending display of the function display unit 1400 of the main control board 1310 continues even while the refresh function is being executed.

While the refresh function is being executed, the effect display device 1600 is in a specific mode. For example, while the refresh function is being executed when the gaming machine is powered on, nothing may be displayed since the game has not yet started, or the startup screen of the gaming machine may be displayed. At this time, the display image of the startup screen may be stored in a storage medium other than the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) so as not to affect the execution of the refresh function. Furthermore, when the refresh function is executed after the gaming machine is powered on, such as while a game is being continued, a dedicated image is displayed to show that the refresh function is being executed.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine can shift to the power saving mode, it will not shift to the power saving mode while the refresh function is being executed. For example, the transition to power saving mode may be suppressed when displaying a dedicated image indicating that the refresh function is being executed, and control may be controlled to release the suppression upon completion of execution of the refresh function. While being executed, the command for transitioning to the power saving mode sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 may be canceled (ignored).

Further, while the refresh function is being executed, execution of various adjustment means (volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, effect setting, etc.) is suppressed. For example, while the refresh function is being executed, execution of various adjustment means is suppressed by controlling not to accept operation inputs from the operation section such as the presentation button. In this way, stable control can be achieved by suppressing execution of various controls by the peripheral control board 1510 while the refresh function is being executed.

[27-1e-3. Storage area for storing various data]
FIG. 428B is a diagram illustrating allocation of storage areas provided by the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). In addition to image (CG) data and sound data, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) contains various programs executed by the CPU (04TKK0011), data for the programs, performance control data for controlling each performance, etc. Stored. In addition, only image (CG) data that requires a large capacity is stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), and other programs and data are stored in a separate ROM on the peripheral control board 1510. It may also be stored.

The storage areas provided by the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) include a resident content data area (05TKK0081), a peripheral control program area (05TKK0082), a drawing program area (05TKK0083), a sound data area (05TKK0084), and image (CG) data. Contains the area (05TKK0085).

The resident content data area (05TKK0081) is an area where performance data (resident content data) that is frequently used in performances and the like is stored. By preloading the resident content data into the external RAM (05TKK0020) after the power is turned on, the frequency of access to the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) can be suppressed, and it is possible to speed up the effect control and extend the life of the storage device. Further, by including a large amount of small-sized data in the resident content data, the above-described effects can be more effectively achieved. Although the resident content data area (05TKK0081) does not need to be placed in the first area of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070), it is desirable to place the data to be preloaded and made resident in a predetermined area as much as possible.

Resident content data is basically image data, but it is not limited to image data, and may include sound data, data for driving performance devices such as lamps, movable objects, etc. (including schedule data). Good too. These data are used more frequently than other data. Note that if the capacity of data for driving performance devices such as sound data, lamps, and movable objects is small, it may be stored in advance in an external RAM (05TKK0020).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to preload all the resident content data into the external RAM (05TKK0020), and it may be replaced depending on the frequency of use. For example, they may be replaced depending on the gaming state. Specifically, when displaying different decorative patterns in the normal state and time-saving state, the normal state design is preloaded in the normal state, and when transitioning to the time-saving state, the time-saving state design is replaced with the normal state decorative pattern. All you have to do is preload the decorative designs.

The peripheral control program area (05TKK0082) may include, in addition to the performance control program in the peripheral control section 1511, a program for controlling sound output and a program for controlling lamps and movable bodies. Note that an area may be allocated to each program for controlling individual performance devices.

Furthermore, the peripheral control program area (05TKK0082) also stores control data necessary for executing various production control programs. For example, it includes scheduler data that defines performances for each variation pattern. The scheduler data includes sub effect scheduler data for controlling various effect devices and drawing scheduler data for displaying the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the drawing scheduler data, the drawing program area (05TKK0083).

The sub production scheduler data includes scheduler data for generating light emitting modes to control the light emitting modes of various LEDs and lamps, scheduler data for generating sound to play BGM, sound effects, notification sounds, etc., and motors, solenoids, etc. This includes electrical drive source scheduler data for controlling the driving mode of the electrical drive source.

The drawing program area (05TKK0083) stores a program and control data for displaying an effect image on the effect display device 1600. The control data includes, for example, drawing scheduler data. The drawing scheduler data corresponds to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration. The order is specified. In addition, the drawing scheduler data includes non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which image data stored in the image data area is transferred to the buffer area (non-resident area) of the image RAM (04TKK0090) in chronological order. Contains non-resident area transfer scheduler data that is arranged and configured. The non-resident area transfer data prescribes the order in which the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the drawing scheduler data is transferred from the image data area (05TKK0085) to the buffer area of the image RAM (04TKK0090). .

The sound data area (05TKK0084) stores information that defines the sound output by the gaming machine. Furthermore, the sound data area (05TKK0084) stores data for controlling the output of sound based on the sound data stored in the sound data area (05TKK0084).

The image (CG) data area (05TKK0085) stores various image data. The image data includes an image data area for a single image and an image data area for a moving image. Furthermore, the image data area for a single image includes data for 2D images and 3D images (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 435). Regarding the image data area for moving images, the structure for storing data is as shown in FIG. 456 and the like.

[27-2. Peripheral control board power-on processing]
The configuration of the peripheral control board 1510 has been described above. Next, processing when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on will be described. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the processing executed when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. The power-on process is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing the boot program stored in the boot ROM (05TKK0013) and the peripheral control program stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

When the gaming machine is powered on and the power supply voltage necessary for the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied, the CPU (04TKK0011) reads the boot program from the boot ROM (05TKK0013) and starts it (step 05TKS0010). Furthermore, devices, input/output ports, etc. necessary for executing the boot program are initialized (step 05TKS0020). At this time, the devices to be initialized are only those necessary for executing the boot program, and are not for executing various effects, but for transferring data and programs from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) to the RAM (04TKK0012). This is for making various settings necessary for

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) loads the peripheral control program from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020) by executing the boot program (step 05TKS0030). Further, the peripheral control program is started on the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0040). The peripheral control program performs necessary processing to start production control. Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) initializes devices necessary for executing the peripheral control program (step 05TKS0050).

Subsequently, the CPU (04TKK0011) synchronously preloads the drawing program from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) into the RAM (04TKK0012) (step 05TKS0060). The drawing program is for executing processing for displaying an image on the effect display device 1600, and at this timing, for example, the program is executed to draw a logo mark that is displayed when the power is turned on. Ru.

Synchronous preloading means that the CPU (04TKK0011) directly sends a data transfer request to the external RAM (05TKK0020) or VRAM (04TKK0090) to the SATA controller (05TKK0071) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) waits until the data transfer is completed. The completion of data transfer can be confirmed by referring to the transfer completion status register of the SATA controller (05TKK0071), and the CPU (04TKK0011) periodically refers to it to confirm the completion of data transfer. (Polling). Note that the configuration is not such that the SATA controller (05TKK0071) issues an interrupt request to the CPU (04TKK0011) to confirm the completion of data transfer. Further, while the CPU (04TKK0011) is polling, other initialization processing (for example, for lamps and motors) is not executed and remains on standby.

Subsequently, the CPU (04TKK0011) asynchronously preloads the sound data (sound data) from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0070). The sound data (sound data) is data for outputting sound from the speaker by the sound source IC (04TKK0030). The preloaded sound data includes not only the sound data of the startup sound output when the power is turned on, but also the sound data of all sounds related to effects.

In the asynchronous preload, a request to transfer data to the external RAM (05TKK0020) or VRAM (04TKK0090) is sent from the CPU (04TKK0011) to the VDP (04TKK0060) or the sound source IC (04TKK0030). The end of data transfer can be confirmed by the VDP (04TKK0060) or sound source IC (04TKK0030) that received the transfer request making an interrupt request to the CPU (04TKK0011) when the transfer is completed. Therefore, the CPU (04TKK0011) can continue to execute the initialization process even after transmitting the transfer request. For example, various initial settings can be made in parallel while sound data is being preloaded.

When performing asynchronous preload, the CPU (04TKK0011) uses the transfer source address (the address of the production data ROM (05TKK0070)), the transfer destination address (the address of the external RAM (05TKK0020), the address of the VRAM (04TKK0090)), and the transfer Instruct VDP (04TKK0060) the amount of data to be processed. Based on instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011), the VDP (04TKK0060) specifies blocks (pages) of the storage device (05TKK0073) to be the transfer source to the SATA controller (05TKK0071), and sequentially reads the specified data. . When sequentially reading data from the storage device (05TKK0073), the SATA controller (05TKK0071) side can only read data in blocks/pages, so in order to read extra data, it is necessary to preload it into the external RAM (05TKK0020). In this case, only the necessary data (excluding unnecessary data) is preloaded.

Thereafter, the CPU (04TKK0011) asynchronously preloads the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0080). Resident content data is data that is frequently used when performing performances. The resident content data is mainly image data. As described above, by loading the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) in advance, the time to read the data can be shortened. Since the resident content data includes a lot of data that is used after the game starts and there is a grace period until the performance actually starts, the data is transferred from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) by asynchronous preloading. It will be done. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all the sound data is preloaded as described above, but if the volume of sound data is large, it is divided into resident and non-resident data, and only the resident sound data is powered on. It may also be preloaded at the time of input.

Finally, the CPU (04TKK0011) initializes devices necessary for drawing and outputting sound (step 05TKS0080). When the above processing is completed, it becomes possible to start the game performance.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by loading the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) in advance, the time to read the performance data can be shortened. This is because the time to read data from the external RAM (05TKK0020) is shorter than the time to read data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). As a result, the required level of read speed for the storage medium of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) can be relaxed, so a storage medium with a large capacity and low cost can be selected, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Furthermore, by shortening the readout time of performance data, it becomes possible to realize performances using a wide variety of image data, thereby making it possible to improve performance effects and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, synchronous preloading and asynchronous preloading are possible for preloading the performance data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020), so processing is performed until the data transfer is completed. If you want to stop the data transfer, you can use synchronous preload to transfer the data, while asynchronous preload allows you to use different preload methods to execute processing in parallel with the data transfer, giving you flexibility depending on the style of production control. becomes possible.

[28. Performance control on peripheral control board]
The configuration of the peripheral control board and the processing at power-on have been described above. Next, basic effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. Here, we will mainly explain the control for executing the effects based on the main commands (variation pattern commands, special figure effect synchronization commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the results of the special lottery.

[28-1. Configuration of peripheral control unit and performance control]
FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like used in performance control by the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each configuration is configured not only by hardware but also by software using a computer program executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. Part or all of the various modules may be configured as hardware.

The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores various modules (programs) for controlling the entire performance and driving each performance device, and is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. These modules include a command analysis module (04TKK0102), a liquid crystal module (04TKK0113), a sound module (04TKK0122), a lamp module (04TKK0123), a driver module (04TKK0124), etc.

Furthermore, in addition to various modules, the peripheral control unit 1511 includes buffers such as a main command buffer (04TKK0101), a liquid crystal display list command buffer (04TKK0114), a lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125), and a motor data output buffer (04TKK0126). It is provided. Also included is a serial control IC (04TKK0127) for transmitting control signals to each production device.

The main command buffer (04TKK0101) receives the main command sent from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module (04TKK0102). In this embodiment, the main command is a set of 3 bytes of information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer (04TKK0101), which is output as If it is determined to be a command, it is passed to the command analysis module (04TKK0102).

As described above, the main command includes information representing content related to the performance among the gaming status and the operating status of the gaming machine. For example, the main command includes information such as whether or not a game ball enters the starting winning hole, the result of the special drawing lottery, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever or stop button, rotation and stop of the reels, success or failure of a winning combination at the time of stop, etc. can be included. Note that the commands listed here are just examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the performance.

The command analysis module (04TKK0102) analyzes the content of the main command and determines whether the command is related to production. If the command is determined to be related to production, the production control unit (04TKK0100) executes the corresponding processing.

The performance control unit (04TKK0100) determines the performance block number corresponding to the performance content based on the analysis result of the main command, and specifies the performance block data. For example, if it is a command indicating the start of variation of a special symbol, the performance block data corresponding to the variation pattern is specified. Furthermore, in the case of an error occurrence, the effect block data corresponding to the corresponding error display is specified. The same applies when an abnormality occurs.

The performance block data includes scheduler data for executing the performance. Scheduler data is a set of functions that instruct a predetermined process to be executed among the multiple processes required depending on the performance device, in order to control the performance in each performance device, in the order in which they should be executed. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing the effect displayed on the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 1600, and "sub effect block data" for controlling sounds, lamps, accessories, etc. data". Note that "liquid crystal pattern block data" for displaying symbols variably on the effect display device 1600 may be treated separately from "liquid crystal effect block data."

The performance block control unit for controlling the performance based on the performance block data includes a liquid crystal performance block control unit (04TKK0110) and a sub performance block control unit (04TKK0120). The liquid crystal effect block control unit (04TKK0110) determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the effect display device 1600. The sub effect block control unit (04TKK0120) determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, movement of accessories, etc. The effect control based on the effect block data will be described later with reference to FIG. 431 and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit (04TKK0110) executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal rendering block data is data for executing liquid crystal display rendering, and includes one or more pieces of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, backgrounds, characters, designs, etc. are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The liquid crystal presentation block control unit (04TKK0110) executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the liquid crystal pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) for displaying patterns are activated.

The liquid crystal effect drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the liquid crystal pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) are executed at a frame period (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds), which is the screen update period. The liquid crystal effect drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the liquid crystal pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data, and execute the liquid crystal display list command by the liquid crystal module (04TKK0113). generate. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display control unit 1512 via the liquid crystal display list command buffer (04TKK0114). The effect display control unit 1512 generates display data based on the received liquid crystal display list command and outputs it to the effect display device 1600. The display data is generated, for example, by expanding character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command onto a frame buffer at a specified position.

The liquid crystal display command list is a group of commands for setting commands (data) related to display control for the registers provided for each function of the VDP (04TKK0060) in order to control the display of images on the display device. Yes, data for one frame of screen is created as a group of data (list) and then stored in the liquid crystal display list command buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit (04TKK0120) executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of lamps, sounds, and motors, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device such as a lamp, sound, and motor performs an operation predefined in the sub effect scheduler data.

The sub performance block control unit (04TKK0120) activates the sub performance scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) according to the execution cycle of various performance devices, and executes the sub performance scheduler data included in the sub performance block data. The sub performance scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) includes a sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit that controls the performance device at 1 frame intervals, and a sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit that controls the performance device at 1 millisecond intervals. In this way, by providing a scheduler execution section that corresponds to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute performances according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the performance device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize sound output, movement of accessories, etc. with the liquid crystal display. Moreover, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it becomes possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub effect block control unit (04TKK0120) executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, as an example, it controls three types of effects: sound output, lighting/blinking of lamps, and movement of accessories. Control will be explained. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of presentation device will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which a performance is performed using sound output. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the sub effect scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) starts the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module (04TKK0122) generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the specified parameters. Note that multiple schedulers can be activated; for example, by controlling the output of BGM and production sound effects with different schedulers, it is possible to generate sound source drive data in parallel and output the sound at the same time. . The sound source IC (04TKK0030) reads sound data specified by the sound source drive data from the sound ROM (04TKK0040) and outputs it from the speaker 622.

Next, a case in which an effect using lamps is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module (04TKK0123) generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

The lamp module (04TKK0123) creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125). The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp drive data generated by the lamp module (04TKK0123), and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125) a double buffer, lamp data can be created and output simultaneously in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the processing time for lamp control increases due to an increase in the number of lamp systems or overlapping of lamp layers. By using a period, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of lamp data is completed within the processing period.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125) is composed of buffer A and buffer B, for example, if buffer A stores lamp drive data created previously, buffer B stores data for the next cycle. The previously created lamp drive data is outputted from buffer A to the serial control IC (04TKK0127) by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinks. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module (04TKK0123) to buffer A, and lamp drive data stored in buffer B is output to the serial control IC (04TKK0127). Note that the control of lighting and blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with that of the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case will be described in which a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory is controlled. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for controlling the drive device, the scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler for the drive device (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a drive device control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module (04TKK0124) generates motor drive data based on the specified parameters. Note that, as in the case of sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, and multiple drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module (04TKK0124) creates motor drive data every cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer (04TKK0126). In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output in a 1 millisecond cycle. The motor data output buffer (04TKK0126) temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module (04TKK0124) and outputs it to the serial control IC (04TKK0127). Note that the motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control unit 1511 without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal to reflect the motor data to each drive device is not at the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer (04TKK0126) to the serial control IC (04TKK0127), but at the next timing after all motor data transmission. A latch signal is output periodically. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of motor data becomes longer, the wait time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, which increases the overall processing time for each frame period. This is because there will be a shortage of In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed to 0, but depending on the CPU used, multiple DMAs can be used. In this case, by serially transmitting motor drive data using DMA and outputting a latch signal with a DMA completion interrupt, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be similarly reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module (04TKK0124). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[28-2. Production control using production blocks and scheduler data]
Next, a description will be given of a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern. Here, the execution procedure of the basic performance and preview performance based on the performance scheduler data corresponding to the first half fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" will be explained. The first half of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" is a 12-second normal fluctuation, and the corresponding performance block data includes normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal performance block data (LCD03_BLK), normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal pattern block data (ZUG03_BLK), and normal fluctuation. 12-second sub effect block data (SCH03_BLK) is allocated. FIG. 431 is a diagram illustrating an overview of effect control for the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H".

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the command analysis module (04TKK0102) analyzes the received command to identify the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" and (04TKK0100).

The production control unit (04TKK0100) identifies the production device to be controlled and determines the corresponding block data number, and based on the determined block number, combines these with the block data number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H". Obtain from the table where is defined. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each performance device to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the performances of each performance device in synchronization.

Then, the production control section (04TKK0100) transmits block data numbers for the number of production devices to be controlled to the liquid crystal production block control section (04TKK0110) and the sub production block control section (04TKK0120).

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit (04TKK0110) is controlled by the liquid crystal effect drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the liquid crystal pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112), and the sub effect block control unit (04TKK0120) is controlled by the sub effect scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121). Block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the LCD effect drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) uses normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half variation, and the liquid crystal pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) uses normal variation 12 seconds liquid crystal pattern block data. “ZUG03_BLK”, the sub effect scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) executes the normal variable 12 second sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

When processing of the liquid crystal presentation block data is started, one or more liquid crystal presentation schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation block data are started, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the presentation contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes a liquid crystal presentation function (liquid crystal function information) for displaying an image on the presentation display device 1600, specifies parameters according to the presentation content, and sends the liquid crystal function information in a predetermined order to the liquid crystal module. Send to (04TKK0113). The liquid crystal module (04TKK0113) analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and sends a liquid crystal display list command to the effect display control section 1512, thereby drawing on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, when processing liquid crystal pattern block data, the liquid crystal pattern scheduler is activated and the drawing scheduler data is executed in accordance with the variable display mode of the pattern. The procedure for drawing on the effect display device 1600 is the same as that for processing liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when processing of the sub performance block data is started, one or more sub performance schedulers corresponding to the sub performance block data are activated, and the specified scheduler data is executed according to the content of the performance. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the scheduler may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As mentioned above, the scheduler data includes functions (performance data specification functions) for controlling performance devices such as lamps ("KPLAY"), speakers ("SPLAY"), and accessories ("MPLAY"). ing. It is configured to execute a specified effect by sequentially executing functions in a defined order. These functions are sent to the modules (lamp module (04TKK0123), sound module (04TKK0122), drive device (motor) module (04TKK0124), etc.) that correspond to the production device to be controlled, and each module controls the production by the various production devices. is executed.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data using the function "REQ". By executing the performance data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various performance devices. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND", control by commands rather than functions is possible. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module (04TKK0113) at the timing of executing a performance data designation function that controls the movement of an accessory, it is possible to execute a performance in which the movement and drawing of the accessory are linked.

[28-3. Functions for controlling production]
The execution procedure of the basic performance and preview performance based on the performance scheduler data corresponding to the first half fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" has been described above. As described above, in the performance scheduler data, functions for controlling the performance are defined, and the performance is executed by executing the defined functions. The functions include those that perform sequence control such as specifying the operating order of the presentation device, those that operate the presentation device by specifying parameters, and those that control the liquid crystal display. Here, some representative functions will be excerpted and explained.

FIG. 432 is a diagram showing an example of a function in performance control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, various presentation devices, and liquid crystal display.

The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of the performance. For example, "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed, and if it is executed in frame cycles, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so the number of executions is If you specify 30, you will wait for about 1 second, and if you want to execute at a 1ms cycle, if you specify 30 as the number of executions, you will wait for about 30ms. In addition, there are conditional wait functions that wait for a period of time depending on the number of executions. "REQ" is a function for starting another specified scheduler.

Functions that control the lamp include "HPLAY" and "KPLAY". "HPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, it is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "KPLAY" is similar to "HPLAY", but if the lamp is being played back with the same gradation data, the running lamp playback is continued without being reset.

The functions for controlling sound include, for example, "SPLAY" for executing phrase playback processing that outputs sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being played, it is reset and the sound starts playing from the beginning when the function is executed. On the other hand, if a sound with the same phrase number is being played and the sound is to be continued without being reset, another function is prepared. There are also functions for controlling volume, etc.

The functions for controlling the output of a motor or a solenoid include, for example, "MPLAY" that executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on a motor data number specified as a parameter. Other functions such as those for solenoids are also available.

Functions other than LCD display functions that do not belong to the groups described above are grouped as user groups for convenience, but such functions include, for example, "COMMAND" for issuing commands from within the scheduler. included. With "COMMAND", it is possible to directly issue a command to the effect display control unit 1512 and cause the effect display device 1600 to start drawing. On the other hand, there are also commands that issue a command to the peripheral control unit 1511, have it analyzed by the command analysis module (04TKK0102), and operate in the same way as the main command. In addition, functions are provided to copy the contents of the work area of a running scheduler to the work area of another scheduler.

Next, the liquid crystal presentation function will be explained. Each liquid crystal presentation function is managed by function/purpose, and is divided into groups such as coordinate settings, scale settings, rotation angle settings, α settings, 3D settings, frame settings, and Z index settings.

The coordinate setting function specifies, for example, the coordinates of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and sets the liquid crystal display object, thereby specifying and displaying the position of the liquid crystal display object. Specifically, the function "POSX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position and sets the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The scaling (scale setting) function, for example, sets the center of the display area that is specified to be enlarged or reduced when displaying it on the effect display device 1600 from the size of the image or video stored on the CGROM, Convert units. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, it is possible to display the liquid crystal display object at an appropriate position and size. Specifically, the function "SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

The rotation angle setting function sets, for example, the angle at which the liquid crystal display object is rotated and displayed. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, there is no need to store multiple liquid crystal display objects after rotation, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can. Specifically, the function "ANGLEX" rotates the liquid crystal display object by specifying the X-axis value.

The α setting function “ALPHA” specifies the α value and sets the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value that indicates transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless), which completely transmits the background color, to completely opaque, which does not transmit the background color at all.

The 3D setting function controls the 3D display of the liquid crystal display object. The gaming machine of this embodiment enables 3D display of objects displayed on the liquid crystal, although details will be described later. Specifically, the function "3D_SW" sets ON/OFF of 3D display. Further, the function "3D_DSP" instructs the effect display control unit 1512 (VDP04TKK0060) to perform 3D display control (creation of a command list for 3D control) by specifying parameters. By specifying parameters, it is possible to set objects to be displayed in 3D (background, characters, designs, and other liquid crystal display objects), and to set the 3D depth when displaying in 3D. There is.

Frame setting function The function "FRAME" sets a frame value which is the drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "ZINDEX" for setting the Z index of the liquid crystal display object sets the Z index. The Z index is a hierarchy in which liquid crystal display objects are displayed, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed in the front or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, if the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn at the backmost position.

The outline of the effect control based on the effect block data and scheduler data in this embodiment has been described above. Next, means for displaying images on the effect display device (main display device) 1600 will be explained. Specifically, first, the configuration and control for displaying a stereoscopic image will be explained, and then the configuration and control for displaying a moving image will be explained.

[28-4. 3D image display]
In the game machine of this embodiment, it is possible to display a stereoscopic 3D image (stereoscopic image) together with a flat 2D image (flat image) (3D display, stereoscopic display), and the player can Part or all of the image displayed on the display device 1600 can be viewed stereoscopically. Note that in this embodiment, a lenticular method is adopted as a means for realizing 3D display. In addition to the lenticular method, means for realizing 3D display include a parallax barrier method in which a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel is disposed on the front side of the effect display device 1600. The outline of the lenticular method will be explained below.

[28-4a. Overview of lenticular method]

Binocular parallax (the difference between the image positions seen by the right and left eyes) has the property that the closer an object is, the smaller it becomes. It can be recognized as a physical object. The lenticular method utilizes this property to display a specific image (lenticular image, stereoscopic display image, 3D display image) through a lenticular lens, thereby displaying dynamic movement with depth and depth. Can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, 3D display using the lenticular method will be further described with reference to FIG. 433.

FIG. 433 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of 3D display using the lenticular method, in which (A) shows an area that is visible from the left eye (L), and (B) shows an area that is visible from the right eye (R).

A lenticular lens is composed of a fine elongated semicylindrical convex lens arranged on its surface. When a lenticular lens is placed on the front side of the effect display device 1600 and a lenticular image (stereoscopic display image, 3D display image) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the player can see the displayed image three-dimensionally with the naked eye. Can be visually recognized.

FIG. 434 is a diagram showing an example of a lenticular image in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 434, a lenticular image is created by dividing two or more images into strips and arranging them in order so that each divided image can be viewed through a single convex lens to form a single image. do. As shown in FIG. 433, the lenticular image configured in this way is displayed using the lenticular lens by (A) viewing only the left-eye image with the left eye, and (B) viewing only the right-eye image with the right eye. images can be viewed three-dimensionally. The lenticular lens and lenticular image are configured to be optimal when a player plays a game from the front of the gaming machine at a predetermined position.

Furthermore, the pixel shader (04TKK0063) installed in the VDP (04TKK0060) of the gaming machine of this embodiment has a compositing function that enables processing of images pixel by pixel, and this compositing function can be used. Accordingly, a lenticular image is generated by dividing the left-eye image and the right-eye image into strips, arranging them alternately, and combining them into one image.

[28-4b. Image arrangement within image data area]
In the image data area (05TKK0085), an image in which a left-eye image and a right-eye image are arranged side by side (side-by-side image) is stored as an image for generating a lenticular image. That is, the image is stored in the manner shown in FIG. 434(A). The left-eye image and the right-eye image are arranged in a continuous area.

Further, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to display a mixture of 2D images and 3D images. Therefore, both 2D images and 3D images are stored in the image data area (05TKK0085). 3D images are compressed in a lossless manner. By compressing image data in a reversible manner, it becomes possible to display the compressed image without deteriorating the image quality when the compressed image is decoded. Furthermore, 2D images are basically compressed using an irreversible method to suppress an increase in capacity. However, since the symbols are the objects (characters) that the player pays the most attention to, it is preferable to perform reversible compression even when displayed on a flat surface. This is because in irreversible compression, the color tone and shape (outline) may deteriorate compared to the original image before compression, and there is a possibility that the image may be slightly shifted (different) from the image before compression. It should be noted that even if the symbols are irreversibly compressed, there is not much difference from the player's perspective than when the symbols are reversibly compressed, and if deterioration of the color, outline shape, etc. is difficult to recognize, then irreversible compression may be used. Furthermore, when reversible compression is performed, 2D images and 3D images are compressed using the same method.

FIG. 435 is a diagram explaining the arrangement of images stored in the image data area (05TKK0085), where (A) shows the arrangement of the entire image data area (05TKK0085), and (B) shows the area where 3D images are stored. The details of the arrangement are shown below.

As shown in FIG. 435(A), in the image data area (05TKK0085), a 2D image storage area for storing 2D images and a 3D image storage area for storing 3D images are separately allocated. . Note that a blank area in which nothing is stored may be allocated between the 2D image storage area and the 3D image storage area. As a result, even if there is an increase or decrease in the capacity of stored images, changes in definition information such as address information can be kept to a minimum, and corrections to programs and definition information can be kept to a minimum. Furthermore, storage areas that can store a mixture of 2D images and 3D images may be arranged depending on the function and purpose.

The 2D image displayed in the performance in the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a background image, a pattern, a character image, and the like. Furthermore, in addition to these images for presentation, images other than presentation for displaying an error or notifying an abnormality are also included. These images may be arranged according to function or purpose as needed, and when used in a continuous series of performances, they may be arranged in the order of display.

Furthermore, a 3D image is basically composed of only presentation-related images. For example, it may be a character (object) that appears in a preview performance or a design for the performance. Furthermore, a background image used during 3D display may also be stored in the 3D image storage area. The background image stored at this time is not necessarily limited to an image that can be displayed in 3D, as long as it can be used during 3D display. Furthermore, background images used only during 3D display may be stored in the 3D image storage area, or only background images that can be displayed in 3D may be stored in the 3D image storage area.

As shown in FIG. 435(B), a series of images of the performance character from appearance (start of performance) to exit (end of performance) are stored. In this embodiment, each character (notice presentation) is stored in chronological order (display order). By setting the address of the first image displayed at the start of the preview (when a character appears), the address is updated to obtain the image as the production progresses, and a value corresponding to the image size is added. This makes it possible to simplify the series of processes. Furthermore, since images related to a series of performances are stored together, it is possible to easily manage the arrangement of images.

[28-4c. Layer structure]
In this embodiment, when displaying an image on the effect display device 1600, the image is drawn in a layer corresponding to the content of the image to be displayed, in principle. FIG. 436 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of layers on which images displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the gaming machine of this embodiment are drawn.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to display a mixture of 2D images and 3D images, but the 2D images and 3D images are drawn separately in separate layers. Then, the images drawn in each layer are combined on a frame buffer (or off-screen buffer) and displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, the hierarchy (order) of each layer is determined in advance, and the order is not changed in principle. In this embodiment, a layer that displays images for error display and abnormality notification is placed in the forefront (top layer), and nothing is displayed while normal gaming is in progress. . On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the relevant layer, such as when an error occurs, the image or message is displayed in front (frontmost) of the other images being displayed, ensuring that players, hall employees, etc. It is structured so that it can be presented.

In addition, a reservation layer for displaying a reservation, a preview layer for displaying an image for preview production, a pattern layer for displaying production patterns, and a background layer for displaying the background are arranged in this order. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the reserved layer and the background layer display 2D images, but when performing 3D display, in addition to the 2D display layer, the 3D display layer (if 2D display is not performed) (only a 3D display layer) is provided, and images are displayed on the 3D display layer.

Furthermore, the preview layer is configured to display only 3D images. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, although the detailed procedure will be described later, it is possible to switch so that the effect is executed only in 2D display without 3D display. In this case, a layer for executing the preview effect in 2D display may be prepared, but if the 3D image is to be displayed as a 2D image, a layer for 3D display may be prepared without preparing a layer for 2D display. May be displayed in layers. In this embodiment, in order to process and display an image for 3D display as described later, the image is drawn on a preview layer for 3D display.

Note that if an image for 2D display and an image for 3D display are prepared in advance for a common purpose, both a layer for 2D display and a layer for 3D display are prepared. For example, if an image of a performance pattern for 2D display and an image of a performance pattern for 3D display are prepared in advance, as shown in FIG. Prepare both for

As described above, by providing a layer dedicated to 3D display (2D display), when executing processing related to that layer, processing exclusively for 3D display is always executed, so whether 2D display is performed or 3D display is performed. There is no need to identify whether the data is to be displayed, processing that takes into account differences in display methods such as data handling, and display control can be simplified.

Note that when a layer for 2D display and a layer for 3D display are provided for the same image, the same image (for example, a pattern, etc.) is not displayed on multiple layers, so the layers that are not drawn are set to be hidden. At this time, a parameter (rendering SW) may be defined in the drawing scheduler data that can set whether or not to display the layer (ON/OFF). Thereby, by setting the parameter (rendering SW), it is possible to set display/non-display of layers all at once. Furthermore, it is no longer necessary to set display/hide for each layer in order to switch between a layer for 2D display and a layer for 3D display, which simplifies the control for switching between 2D display and 3D display. becomes possible.

Next, a procedure for generating a display screen on the effect display device 1600 by drawing an image on each layer and composing each layer will be explained. FIG. 437 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for writing an image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the gaming machine of this embodiment into the frame buffer.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, images of upper (front side) layers are drawn sequentially from the lower (back side) layer. Specifically, first, an image to be drawn as a background is obtained from the image data area (05TKK0085) of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) and drawn on the background layer. In the example shown in FIG. 437, the acquired background image is not displayed as is, but is enlarged vertically and displayed, so the image drawn on the background layer is copied to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), and the image drawn on the background layer is copied to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) The image on the buffer (04TKK0092) is processed by the rendering engine (04TKK0062).

Subsequently, an image corresponding to the effect pattern is drawn on the pattern layer placed in front of the background layer based on the instruction of the liquid crystal display list command. Furthermore, the contents of the pattern layer are combined with the image of the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) in which the processed background is drawn (overlaid on the front side of the background image), and the combined image is added to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Draw (copy).

Furthermore, a three-dimensional image of a tree and an airplane is displayed as a preview display on the preview layer for 3D display. The image drawn on the preview layer is combined with the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Finally, a pending display is drawn on a pending layer further placed on the front side, and combined with the image in the frame buffer (04TKK0091) to complete the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the frame buffer (04TKK0091) that generates the display image is a drawing bank, it is then switched to the display bank by bank flipping, and the generated screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[29. Basic procedure for generating 3D display images]
Next, a side-by-side 2D image (background image, etc.) is combined with a 3D display image (character, etc.) aligned with the left-eye image and right-eye image to generate a 3D display image (lenticular image). Outline the steps. Details of the specific display image generation procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 439 and subsequent figures.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a 3D display image (lenticular image) is generated by applying the side-by-side image synthesis effect of the pixel shader (04TKK0063) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060).

FIG. 438 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for generating a 3D display image (lenticular image) by compositing a side-by-side 2D image (such as a background image) with a 3D image in which a left-eye image and a right-eye image are arranged side by side. be.

First, a 3D image (an image in which a left-eye image and a right-eye image are arranged) in which a stereoscopic object (a logo mark in FIG. 438(A)) is drawn is obtained from the image data area (05TKK0085). In this 3D image, areas other than the object are transparent, and an α channel is set. As described above, the α channel is auxiliary data that is held separately from the color expression data for each pixel, and generally indicates the opacity of the pixel. By arranging this image in front of a non-transparent image and composing it, it is possible to generate an image in which the compositing image is the background.

In the example shown in FIG. 438, the 3D image (A) is synthesized with the background image (2D) filled in black stored in the buffer. This results in an image in which a logo mark (object) is placed in front of the background image, as shown in (B).

When the side-by-side image synthesis effect of the pixel shader (04TKK0063) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060) is applied in the state of (B), a 3D display image (lenticular image) shown in (C1) is generated. At this time, as shown in (C1), blurring occurs around the three-dimensional logo mark. The reason for this is that when generating the stereoscopic parallax part of the left-eye image and the right-eye image, and when combining the pixels of the object drawing part and the non-drawing part (transparent part), the image is generated based only on the color information of the drawing part. It is possible that you may end up doing this. In this way, if a side-by-side image synthesis effect is applied to a plurality of images acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) that are directly superimposed, unintended blurring may occur.

Therefore, in this embodiment, before applying the side-by-side image composition effect, transparency is removed from the image by deleting the alpha channel that expresses the opacity of the image, and the composition is performed using only the drawn parts (non-transparent parts). do. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended display such as blur.

Note that transparency may be eliminated at the time of compositing the 3D images by setting the α value of the 2D images such as the background images on which the 3D images are combined to 255 (opaque). In particular, since the background image is the size of the entire display screen (full screen size), by making the background image non-transparent, it can be expected to suppress the occurrence of blurring without explicitly deleting the α channel.

[30.3D display effect]
The basic configuration etc. for executing the 3D display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment have been described above. Next, the 3D display effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. First, a basic procedure for generating a display screen (image) when executing a 3D display effect will be explained.

[30-1. Basic procedure for generating 3D display screen]
FIG. 439 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for creating image data in a 3D display effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, a procedure will be described in which an object (logo mark) for 3D display placed on a background image for 2D display is synthesized and an image displayed in 3D is generated by viewing the image through a lenticular lens.

The image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is generated (drawn) from the layer on the back side, and transferred (combined) to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) layer by layer. When processing images or compositing multiple layers, the data is processed in the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) and then transferred to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Below, a procedure for creating image data in the 3D display effect of the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained.

The VDP (04TKK0060) first obtains the background image specified in the liquid crystal display list command sent from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the image data area (05TKK0085) and draws it on the background layer. (A) shows the state of the background layer on which the background image acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) is drawn. Each layer is created and managed by a program executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. The liquid crystal display list command is created for each layer and sent to the VDP (04TKK0060). The VDP (04TKK0060) processes liquid crystal display list commands sent in layer units, thereby performing drawing in layer units. Further, each layer is drawn sequentially from the lowest layer to the upper layer.

Next, VDP (04TKK0060) converts the background image side-by-side to generate an image for 3D display. Note that the background image is a 2D image, and what is actually displayed in 3D is the image of the preview layer (for 3D image display) arranged in front of the background layer. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the background image, which is a 2D image, is made side-by-side, and the background image is combined with each of the left-eye image and right-eye image that make up the 3D image of the preview layer, and then the 3D display image is created. generate.

(B) shows a state in which a side-by-side background image is drawn in an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092). Note that in this embodiment, the background image drawn on the background layer is transferred to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), and side-by-side is created on the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092). As a result, the image quality can be improved by the effect of the filter (function to smooth pixels during reduction) by VDP (04TKK0060) compared to transferring the background image directly to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) and converting it side-by-side (reduction). can. Note that the specific procedure for converting the background image side-by-side will be explained with reference to FIGS. 440 to 442.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads an object to be displayed in 3D on the preview layer for 3D image display from the image data area (05TKK0085). As described above, objects to be displayed in 3D are stored in the 3D image storage area of the image data area (05TKK0085). In addition, as shown in (C), the image for 3D display is made side-by-side in advance, and a side-by-side image synthesis effect is applied using a pixel shader (04TKK0063) to synthesize the left-eye image and the right-eye image. is converted into a 3D display image. Note that the value of the α channel is set so that areas other than the object to be displayed in 3D are transparent.

Furthermore, VDP (04TKK0060) combines the object drawn in the preview layer onto the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) in which the side-by-side background image is drawn, and transfers it to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). . As a result, as shown in (D), an image is generated in which a 3D display object is superimposed on the left-eye image and the right-eye image on the background image.

Finally, VDP (04TKK0060) applies a pixel shader ( By applying the side-by-side image synthesis effect according to 04TKK0063), the 3D display image shown in (E) can be generated.

The procedure for creating image data for 3D display performance in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Through the above procedure, it is possible to create a display that enables stereoscopic viewing by combining objects such as characters in 3D images while using a 2D image as a background image.

In addition, by holding a non-stereoscopic background image in full screen size in the image data area (05TKK0085), converting it side-by-side and compositing it with the 3D image during 3D display, the background image can be shared between 2D display effects and 3D display effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the image data area (05TKK0085).

[30-2. Generation of side-by-side images]
Next, a procedure for converting a background image side-by-side will be explained. In this embodiment, as described above, when converting a background image side-by-side, the image acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) is reduced by 1/2 in the horizontal direction, and the same image is used as a left-eye image and a right-eye image. Draw left and right. Furthermore, when applying the side-by-side image composition effect, it is expanded horizontally again, so image information is lost, resulting in a decrease in resolution (deterioration in image quality) and jaggies that are not present in the original image. Ta. This is because the same reduced images are combined, so image information missing during reduction cannot be supplemented, and there is a limit to image quality improvement by the pixel shader (04TKK0063).

For the reasons described above, if the image quality of the display screen deteriorates, there is a risk that the interest in playing the game will decrease. Therefore, this embodiment proposes a side-by-side image generation procedure that can suppress the loss of image information when creating a side-by-side image.

[30-2a. Side-by-side image generation procedure 1]
As described above, if two of the same horizontally reduced images are simply arranged, the missing image information will be completely the same, making it difficult to supplement using the VDP function or the like. Therefore, by making the missing image information different when creating left-eye and right-eye images by reducing the size of a full-screen image, it is possible to avoid missing image information when combining the image information of the left and right images. Keep in mind that by suppressing the image information of the original image as much as possible can be restored. A method for generating side-by-side images will be described below.

FIG. 440 is a diagram illustrating a first method for generating side-by-side images. When reducing an image, for example, pixels are extracted at equal intervals according to the reduction magnification, and the extracted images are arranged in order. For example, when converting a background image acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) as shown in (A) side-by-side, the base background image is reduced by 1/2 in the horizontal direction, so it is composed of only even-numbered dots. An image is generated ((C) left eye image in FIG. 440).

On the other hand, when generating an image for the right eye, in order to prevent the same image information as the image for the left eye from being omitted, an image composed of as many odd number of dots as possible is generated. Therefore, in the first method, as shown in (B), the base background image is shifted in advance by one dot (to the left) and then reduced by 1/2 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the pixels of the odd dots are moved to the positions of the even dots, so that the reduced image can be composed of the odd dots ((C) right-eye image in FIG. 440). Note that for the blank area for one column at the left end that occurs when shifting one dot to the left, by transferring the image with the area in the buffer filled in black, the blank area will be rendered non-transparent (black) instead of transparent. ) and then reduce the image. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of blurring that occurs when images having transparency are combined.

[30-2b. Side-by-side image generation procedure 2]
Next, the second method will be explained. The basic principle is the same as the first method, and the purpose is to suppress the loss of image information of the original image when the image information of the left and right images is combined. FIG. 441 is a diagram illustrating a second method for generating side-by-side images.

In the second method, a reduced image is generated by specifying a region of the base image to be reduced. For example, if the base image is n×m dots, the area from 0 dots to n−1 dots in the horizontal direction is targeted. That is, when generating a left-eye image, a reduced image is generated covering the entire area of the base image. As a result, similarly to the first method, a reduced image composed of an even number of dots is generated as the left-eye image. On the other hand, when generating an image for the right eye, an area from 1 dot to n dots in the horizontal direction is targeted. Thereby, similarly to the second method, it is possible to generate a reduced image composed of an odd number of dots as the right eye image.

As described above, according to the first method and the second method, by making the image for the left eye a reduced image made up of only even numbered dots, and making the image for the right eye a reduced image made up of only odd numbered dots, , it is possible to apply a side-by-side image synthesis effect while minimizing the loss of image information, suppressing deterioration of image quality and suppressing the occurrence of jaggies.

[30-2c. Side-by-side image generation procedure 3]
Next, the third method will be explained. The basic policy is the same as the method explained so far, but in the third method, each dot row of the base image is divided into a left-eye image and a right-eye image for each color element, and the left and right images are The purpose is to suppress the loss of image information of the original image when the information is combined. FIG. 442 is a diagram illustrating a third method for generating side-by-side images.

Image information indicating the color of each dot is expressed by a combination of values of three primary colors (red (R), green (G), blue (B)) and an α channel (alpha value). The value of each color is composed of 8 bits, and the value of the α channel (alpha value) is also 8 bits.

In the third method, first, as shown in FIG. 442(A), the colors of each dot are divided into elements, that is, the three primary colors are individually divided into a left-eye image (B1) and a right-eye image (B2). In the example shown in FIG. 442, the 0th dot R element of the original image is the 0th dot R element of the right eye image, and the 0th dot G element of the original image is the 0th dot G element of the left eye image. do. Furthermore, the B element at the 0th dot of the original image is set as the B element at the 0th dot of the right eye image. Similarly, the R element and B element of the 1st dot of the original image are the R element and B element of the 1st dot of the left-eye image, and the G element of the 1st dot of the original image is the G element of the 1st dot of the right-eye image. element. That is, image information for two dots of the original image is distributed to an image for the left eye and an image for the right eye, one dot each. A side-by-side image is generated by distributing all dots in the same way.

By using the above procedure to separate the color elements of the base image and individually distributing the three primary colors to generate side-by-side images, it is possible to reliably suppress the loss of image information. Note that color element separation is performed by a pixel shader (04TKK0063). This is because VDP (04TKK0060) is not efficient in processing pixel-by-pixel operations, so the pixel shader (04TKK0063) complements this. The pixel shader (04TKK0063) is a dedicated circuit that allows arbitrary complex calculations to be performed on a pixel-by-pixel basis at extremely high speed.

[30-3. Side-by-side image composition effect]
Next, a procedure for converting a side-by-side image into a full-screen image by applying a side-by-side image composition effect will be described. Here, the side-by-side image generated by the third method described above is converted into a full-screen image.

FIG. 443 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for synthesizing a full-screen image from side-by-side images. In the third method, a side-by-side image is generated by decomposing the image information (color information) of each dot of a full-screen image as a base and distributing it into a left-eye image and a right-eye image. Therefore, the image information of each dot of the left-eye image and the right-eye image that make up the side-by-side image is aggregated, and the images are combined to reconstruct the image information of the full-screen image.

For example, as shown in FIG. 443, the R element, G element, and B element of the 0th dot of the left eye image are replaced with the R element of the 1st dot, the G element of the 0th dot, and the B element of the 1st dot of the composite image. do. Furthermore, the R element, G element, and B element of the 0th dot of the right eye image are set as the R element of the 0th dot, the G element of the 1st dot, and the B element of the 0th dot of the composite image.

In this embodiment, the pixel shader (04TKK0063) executes the above procedure. Although an example of application to a 2D image is shown in FIG. 443, when applied to a 3D image composed of a left eye image and a right eye image, the specifications of the lenticular lens provided in the effect display device 1600 In a corresponding manner, the image information (color information) of the left-eye image and the right-eye image are converted and combined to generate a 3D display image. A lenticular lens has a structure in which elongated semicylindrical convex lenses are arranged on its surface, and a 3D display image is generated based on the image size, the density of semicylindrical protrusions (the number of lines), and the shape of the convex lenses. The generated 3D display image is generated so that when the player plays the game in a normal posture, parallax is created between the left and right eyes so that stereoscopic viewing can be effectively performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 439, the side-by-side side-by-side background image is combined with an object for 3D display (for example, a preview character) (for example, the image in FIG. 439(D)). By applying the synthesis effect, 2D images such as background images can be converted while suppressing the loss of image information, while 3D images can be converted into 3D display images that comply with the specifications of the lenticular lens.

As described above, by recombining images that have been converted side-by-side using the third method described above, a full-screen base image can be combined (restored) while preventing image information from being lost. By configuring as described above, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the effect display by preventing the loss of image information, so it is possible to suppress the increase in the capacity for storing image information and improve the image quality of the image. By suppressing deterioration, it is possible to bring out the performance effect and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[30-4. Drawing procedure]
Next, a procedure for drawing on the effect display device 1600 will be explained. First, a case where there is a single 3D layer will be explained, and then a case where there are a plurality of 3D layers will be explained.

[30-4a. Drawing procedure (when there is a single 3D layer)]
FIG. 444 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer structure when there is a single 3D layer. FIG. 445 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure of FIG. 444.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first issues a group of drawing commands for all materials necessary to draw the lowest layer 1 (step 04TKS0010). The issued drawing command group includes a command to acquire an image from the image data area (05TKK0085) and a command to convert the acquired image side-by-side. Layer 1 is a layer for drawing a 2D image, and since it is the lowest layer, it is usually a background layer.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for all materials for layer 2 for drawing images to be displayed in 3D (step 04TKS0020). The issued drawing command group includes a command to acquire an image for 3D display from the image data area (05TKK0085) and a command to combine the acquired image with the image converted side-by-side in the process of step 04TKS0010. Furthermore, a command (pixel conversion command (3D display image conversion command)) for generating a 3D display image by applying a side-by-side image synthesis effect using a pixel shader (04TKK0063) is included.

Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for drawing an image on layer 3 arranged at the forefront (step 04TKS0030). After that, when all drawing commands necessary for drawing layer 3 are sent, a bank flip wait command is sent to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040).

As described above, the processing up to step 04TKS0040 is performed by a program executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. The processing after step 04TKS0050 is executed by the effect display control unit 1512 (VDP (04TKK0060)). When the bank flip is executed, the VDP (04TKK0060) outputs an image to the effect display device 1600 by processing the drawing command group stored in the command buffer.

When the effect display control unit 1512 receives a command from the peripheral control unit 1511, it stores the received command in a command buffer. In this embodiment, the command buffer also has a double buffer configuration, including a storage command buffer for storing the drawing command sent from the peripheral control unit 1511 and a drawing command buffer for reading out the drawing command to be processed by VDP (04TKK0060). Equipped with. The storage command buffer and the drawing command buffer are configured to be switched by a bank flip.

Next, when the drawing of the frame buffer (04TKK0091) currently being drawn is completed and the frame buffer (04TKK0091) is switched by a bank flip, the VDP (04TKK0060) transfers data from the drawing command buffer that was switched from the storage command buffer. The drawing command group is read out, and drawing is performed in the frame buffer (04TKK0091) of the drawing bank based on the read drawing command (step 04TKS0050).

Furthermore, when the VDP (04TKK0060) processes a bank flip wait command, it executes a bank clip at a predetermined interrupt timing, switches the drawing bank to the display bank, and displays the image drawn in the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Display on the device 1600 (step 04TKS0060). Through the above processing, drawing for one screen can be completed.

Here, a detailed description will be given of a procedure in which the VDP (04TKK0060) generates an image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the drawing command issued by the peripheral control unit 1511 in the processing of steps 04TKS0010 to 04TKS0030.

As described above, the command buffer stores the drawing commands in the order in which they are received, and the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing commands in the order in which they are stored, and executes processing based on the read drawing commands. In the example shown in FIG. 445, drawing commands for drawing each layer in the order of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 3 are stored in the command buffer, and each drawing command is processed in this order. Hereinafter, a procedure will be described in which the VDP (04TKK0060) combines images drawn on each layer based on the received drawing command.

The VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command for drawing layer 1, which was initially stored in the command buffer. First, the image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 1. The image drawn on layer 1 is a 2D image, and this image is drawn on an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) and rendered side-by-side.

Subsequently, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing layer 2 from the command buffer. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 2. Further, the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) in which the side-by-side layer 1 image is configured is overwritten (combined) with the image drawn on layer 2. The image drawn on layer 2 is a 3D image, and by applying a side-by-side composition effect, a stereoscopic display image is generated and drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Finally, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command for drawing layer 3 from the command buffer. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 3. By overwriting (combining) the image drawn on layer 3 with the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091), the synthesis of the images of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 3 is completed and displayed on the effect display device 1600. The image is completed.

Note that in the above explanation, images to be drawn in each layer are read from the image data area (05TKK0085), but may be read from the image RAM (04TKK0090). For example, since a common background image is used in a series of effects, when a background image is drawn on layer 1, the background image is stored in advance in the image RAM (04TKK0090), which has a faster access speed than the effect data ROM (05TKK0070). By storing the background image and reading the background image from the image RAM (04TKK0090) while the series of effects is being executed, it is possible to speed up the entire image processing.

[30-4b. Drawing procedure (when there are multiple 3D layers)]
Next, a case where there are multiple 3D layers will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer structure when there are multiple 3D layers. FIG. 447 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure of FIG. 446. Note that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those in the case of a single 3D layer (FIG. 445), and the description thereof will be omitted.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first issues a group of drawing commands for all materials in order to draw the lowest layer 1 (step 04TKS0010). Next, a group of drawing commands for all materials is issued for layer 2 for drawing images to be displayed in 3D (step 04TKS0320). At this time, no side-by-side image synthesis effect is applied, and at the end of the process in step 04TKS0320, the image of layer 1 is overwritten and synthesized with the image of layer 2, and the image remains side-by-side.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for all materials to layer 3 (step 04TKS0330). Since layer 3 is a 2D display area, it includes a command to acquire an image from the image data area (05TKK0085) and a command to convert the acquired image side-by-side. In the process of step 04TKS0050, which will be described later, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes these commands, so that the layer 3 image side-by-side with the composite image of layers 1 and 2 is stored in the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091). are transferred and overwritten and synthesized.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for all materials for layer 4 for drawing images to be displayed in 3D (step 04TKS0340). In the process of step 04TKS0050, which will be described later, an image for 3D display is acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) by processing the drawing command group issued by the VDP (04TKK0060), and is stored in the frame buffer (04TKK0091). The obtained image is overwritten and synthesized on the image in which layers 1 to 3 are synthesized. Further, the VDP (04TKK0060) generates a 3D display image by applying a side-by-side image synthesis effect using a pixel shader (04TKK0063).

Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for an image to be drawn on layer 5, which is placed at the forefront (step 04TKS0350). Thereafter, a bank flip wait command is sent to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040).

When the effect display control section 1512 receives a drawing command or a bank flip wait command from the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512 stores them in a command buffer. The subsequent processing is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 445. When the VDP (04TKK0060) processes the bank flip wait command, it executes the bank flip at a predetermined interrupt timing, switches the drawing bank to the display bank, and displays the frame. The image drawn in the buffer (04TKK0091) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (step 04TKS0060).

Here, a detailed description will be given of a procedure in which the VDP (04TKK0060) generates an image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the drawing command issued by the peripheral control unit 1511 in the processing of steps 04TKS0010 to 04TKS0350.

In the example shown in FIG. 447, drawing commands for drawing each layer in the order of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are stored in the command buffer, and each drawing command is processed in this order. do. Hereinafter, a procedure for composing images drawn on each layer based on the received drawing command will be described.

VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing layer 1. Then, the image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 1. The image drawn on layer 1 is a 2D image, and this image is drawn on an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) and rendered side-by-side.

Subsequently, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing layer 2 from the command buffer. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 2. Further, the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) in which the side-by-side layer 1 image is configured is overwritten (combined) with the image drawn on layer 2.

Subsequently, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing layer 3. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 3. The image drawn on layer 3 is a 2D image, and this image is rendered side-by-side and drawn in an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092).

Subsequently, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing layer 4 from the command buffer. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 4. Furthermore, the image drawn on layer 4 is overwritten (combined) on the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) in which the images of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 3 are combined. The image drawn on layer 4 is a 3D image, and by applying a side-by-side composition effect, a stereoscopic display image is generated and drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Finally, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command for drawing layer 5 from the command buffer. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn on layer 5. By overwriting (combining) the image drawn on layer 5 with the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091), the synthesis of images from layer 1 to layer 5 is completed, and the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is Complete.

In summary, all layers on the back side (lower layer) than the 3D layer are side-by-side. At this time, the 3D image can be viewed stereoscopically through the lenticular lens after applying the side-by-side image synthesis effect (pixel conversion), so it appears to be a side-by-side planar image (2D image). The frontmost 3D layer and all layers below the 3D layer are combined, a side-by-side image synthesis effect (pixel conversion) is applied to generate a stereoscopic display image, and the resulting image is drawn in a frame buffer. If the foreground layer is 2D, it can be viewed as a normal 2D image even through a lenticular lens by drawing it as it is on the frame buffer without converting it side-by-side. Similarly, the 2D layer arranged on the front side (upper layer) than all the 3D layers may be drawn as is in the frame buffer without performing side-by-side conversion.

Note that, as will be described later, when 3D display is set to OFF and 2D display effect is executed, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs 3D display such as side-by-side image synthesis effect (pixel conversion). Since the VDP (04TKK0060) does not issue a command for 3D display control, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is visually recognized as a 2D (plane) image even through the lenticular lens.

As described above, overwrite compositing is performed with side-by-side (left-eye image and right-eye image placed left and right without any gaps) until all 3D layers are composited, and after all 3D layers have been composited. , a 3D display image is generated by applying a side-by-side image synthesis effect. If a layer displaying a 2D image remains on the front side, the image of the 2D layer may be overwritten and synthesized on the front side of the generated 3D display image. Examples of layers that are placed in front of the front or in front of the 3D layer (upper layer) include error notification displays, volume/brightness adjustment displays, 3D switching displays, etc., and these displays do not need to be 3D displays. It is a 2D display. Note that images of all layers may be side-by-side, overwritten and synthesized in the order of the layers, and finally a side-by-side image synthesis effect may be applied.

[30-5. Switching between 2D display effect and 3D display effect]
The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to switch between 2D display and 3D display. On the other hand, if images for 2D display and images for 3D display are respectively stored, the capacity required for the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) increases. Therefore, by using images for 3D display effects for 2D display effects, an increase in the capacity of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) is suppressed.

[30-5a. Display mode selection screen example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a realistic effect is achieved by displaying images that can be viewed stereoscopically, but even with such a gaming machine, players cannot necessarily see images that can be viewed stereoscopically. In some cases, users may prefer a conventional presentation using two-dimensional images rather than a presentation that displays images. Therefore, as described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured so that the 2D display performance mode and the 3D display performance mode can be switched and selected by the player.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in the performance selection mode of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the screen example of FIG. 448, the effect mode can be selected by selecting either the 3D effect display mode or the 2D effect display mode, selecting the enter button, and operating the effect button. In this embodiment, the production selection mode screen is a layer placed immediately after the layer that notifies the abnormality, and is a layer in front of the area where the preview production and production patterns are displayed. Note that since the screen for the production selection mode is displayed while waiting for a customer, it may be a layer on the back side of the layer on which images for 3D display production are displayed (notice layer, pattern layer). In this case, the layer is dedicated to the screen of the effect selection mode. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a layer that is not displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, a notice layer or a pattern layer).

Note that switching between 2D/3D display effects is only permitted when specific conditions such as waiting for customers are met, and when the specific conditions are not met, especially during the period when the 3D display effect is being executed, the mode will be switched. By setting a non-switchable suppression period, it is possible to switch the effect display mode without checking whether the current gaming state is in a state where 3D display effects can be executed, simplifying the processing related to 3D effect control. can be converted into

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, switching of the 2D/3D display effect display mode is permitted only while waiting for a customer. In addition, the default performance display mode is 2D display mode, and even if the game machine is set to 3D display mode, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and then restored, it will be set to the default 2D display mode. It has become so. Note that the default effect display mode may be a 3D effect display mode, and for example, may be settable by a changeover switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Further, although the cursor is displayed on the default setting side in the setting screen of FIG. 448, the cursor may be displayed on the currently set effect display mode side.

The presentation mode is selected by operating the presentation button while waiting for a customer and not during the variable display of symbols. In addition, it may be possible to change the timing when the symbols are not being displayed while changing, such as during a jackpot game state, or when the 3D display effect (stereoscopic display effect) is not being executed. It may also be possible to change the symbols even while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the screen may be forcibly returned to the display screen at the timing of displaying the lottery results. In addition, when displaying the selection screen while the symbols are being displayed, the effect will continue to be displayed in the background (the layer behind the selection screen), and if the selection screen in the front is deleted, the effect will continue as it is. Good too. In addition, when changing the display mode while a symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to switch by performing a specific operation on the operation section such as a production button, without displaying the selection screen or using video. You can. At this time, a notification indicating that the change operation has been accepted (for example, displaying a specific mark at the edge of the screen) may be displayed on the screen, or notification may be made by outputting a specific sound.

In addition to the ability to switch performance modes, the player is also able to adjust the brightness of the performance display device 1600, adjust the volume of audio output, etc. from the screen. Adjustment of the brightness of the performance display device 1600 and adjustment of the volume of the audio output are different from the function of switching the performance mode, and are not performed using a performance button or the like used during the game, but are operated using a dedicated operation unit. Good too. In addition, the function to switch the production mode is to turn on/off the 3D production display, so it is possible to switch by performing a specific operation without displaying the selection screen, but the brightness adjustment and volume adjustment are done in stages. Since adjustments need to be made, the screen is configured so that it is always displayed, and it is done while waiting for customers.

Furthermore, when performing brightness adjustment, volume adjustment, and setting ON/OFF of 3D effect display, it may be possible to reflect them at the same time, or only one of them may be reflected. If you do not enable it to be reflected at the same time, for example, the result of brightness adjustment may affect the 3D effect display, so if you change it at the same time, only the result of brightness adjustment will be reflected and the 3D effect display will be turned ON/OFF. The settings may be performed after the settings are reflected.

When ON/OFF of the 3D effect display is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the setting to be reflected in the parameters of the function "3D_SW" described above. This eliminates the need for branching processing based on program code, making it possible to use common effect block data and scheduler data regardless of whether the 3D effect display is ON or OFF, and simplifying the effect data and program code. I can do it.

[30-5b. Drawing procedure when executing 2D display effect]
Next, a procedure for using an image for 3D display effect for 2D display effect will be explained.
FIG. 449 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for using an image for 3D display performance in the 2D display performance mode in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing a procedure for using an image for 3D display effect in the 2D display effect mode shown in FIG. 449. The procedure shown in FIG. 450 corresponds to the procedure for performing 3D display effects when there is a single 3D layer, and common procedures are given the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when performing a 3D display effect with the same content at a possible timing, as shown in FIG. Draw the image as is without processing it. Specifically, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for all materials for drawing layer 1 for background drawing and stores them in the command buffer. The VDP (04TKK0060) reads a group of drawing commands from the command buffer, acquires a background image from the image data area (05TKK0085) according to the information specified in the group of drawing commands, and transfers the image to the frame buffer without converting the image side-by-side. (04TKK0091) or draw in an off-screen buffer (step 04TKS0410).

Subsequently, the 3D display image displayed when the 3D effect display is executed is displayed as a 2D display image (FIG. 449(B)). At this time, the layer to be drawn is not a 2D-dedicated layer, but a 3D display layer on which a 3D display image is displayed when 3D effect display is executed. This makes it possible to manage the relationship between the content of the production and the layer by drawing on the same layer when the content is the same regardless of whether the production is executed in 2D or 3D display. This makes it possible to simplify the effect display control.

To specifically explain the procedure for displaying a 3D display image as a 2D display image, the VDP (04TKK0060) first obtains an image side-by-side for 3D display from the image data area (05TKK0085). The left eye image is extracted from the acquired image and drawn in the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) (step 04TKS0420). Further, the left-eye image in the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) is enlarged twice in the horizontal direction and overwritten and synthesized with the background image already drawn in the frame buffer (04TKK0091) (step 04TKS0430).

The peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for performing the above procedure to the effect display control unit 1512, so that the VDP (04TKK0060) can perform side-by-side image synthesis without applying side-by-side image synthesis effects using the pixel shader (04TKK0063). A 2D display image is generated without issuing a drawing command (pixel conversion command) related to the effect (FIG. 449(C)).

Further, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a group of drawing commands for an image to be drawn on layer 3, which is placed at the forefront (step 04TKS0440). Thereafter, a bank flip wait command is sent to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040). The transmitted drawing command group is stored in the command buffer of the effect display control unit 1512, and the processing from step 04TKS0050 is executed by VDP (04TKK0060). The processing after step 04TKS0050 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 445, and when the drawing process is finished and the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091) is switched to the display bank, the drawn image is transferred to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, when executing the 2D display effect, by enlarging and using the image for the 3D display effect, specifically, the image for the left eye (or the image for the right eye), the image exclusively for the 2D display effect can be used. Since it is no longer necessary to hold the data redundantly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

Furthermore, when displaying a 3D image in a plane (2D), there is a risk that the image quality will deteriorate due to enlarging processing, so for 3D images that may be displayed in 2D, the image for 2D display is It may also be held in the area (05TKK0085). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in image quality during 2D display performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[30-6. Handling abnormalities during execution of 3D display effects]
FIG. 451 is a diagram showing an example of an abnormality notification screen that is displayed when an abnormality occurs during execution of a 3D display effect. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs during 3D display performance, a predetermined message (abnormality notification image) is displayed on the foreground layer (2D) that displays abnormality notifications, etc. An example of screen display will be described below with reference to FIG. 451.

FIG. 451(A) shows the state before the occurrence of an abnormality, in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbol (04TKM0010) are temporarily stopped at the same number, and a reach has occurred. At this time, as a preview performance, a performance in which a stereoscopically visible car (3D display image) runs on a road drawn on the background (2D) is started.

After that, an abnormality such as a magnetic abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and an abnormality notification image (04TKM0030) containing a warning message "Abnormality has occurred!!" is displayed on the topmost abnormality notification layer. At this time, due to the drawing of the warning message, the performance on the performance display screen becomes difficult to see, but the 3D display image of the car driving continues, and as shown in FIG. As time passes, it has moved to the back side of the abnormality notification image (04TKM0030). Thereafter, the performance control of the preview performance continues even while the recovery process is being executed. Therefore, even if the player cannot see the back side of the abnormality notification image (04TKM0030), the drawing control of the car, which is a 3D display image, continues.

Thereafter, when the main control board 1310 is initialized (power cut off) in the process of returning from the abnormal state to a state in which play is possible, a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 interrupts the control of the 3D display effect, and stops displaying the preview character (04TKM0020), which is the 3D display image, as shown in FIG. 451(C). The background image may continue to be displayed as it is, may be switched to another image (for example, a background image dedicated to when power is restored), or may be deleted.

In the example shown in FIG. 451, the abnormality notification image (04TKM0030) occupies most of the area of the display screen, but it is sufficient for the player to be able to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality, and the player can recognize it in the foreground layer. The abnormality notification image (04TKM0030) may be displayed in any possible form.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by arranging a layer for notifying abnormalities at the forefront, players can be assured that even while performances including 3D display performances are being executed. It becomes possible to notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Furthermore, since there is no need to stop the production control, it is possible to promptly notify abnormalities with the highest priority.

[30-6a. Control when the main control board power is cut off]
Next, control when power supply is cut off only to the main control board 1310 during 3D display performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453.

FIG. 452 is a timing chart showing the states of each component when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off during 3D display performance. FIG. 453 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off during 3D display performance.

In the example shown in FIGS. 452 and 453, in the normal game state, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off at time t11 during the variable display of special symbols. Thereafter, at time t12, power supply is restarted. At this point, the power supply from the backup power source is also cut off, and the power supply to the main control board 1310 is completely interrupted.

As shown in FIG. 452, special symbols are displayed in a normal gaming state until time t11. At this time, as shown in FIG. 453(A), the left and right symbols of the identification symbol (04TKM0010) stop at the same symbol, and a reach occurs. Along with this, a preview character (04TKM0020) modeled after a car will appear as a preview effect. The preview character (04TKM0020) is a 3D display image, and an effect of running on the road drawn on the background image (2D) is executed. As described above, the preview character (04TKM0020) is stored in the 3D image area of the image data area (05TKK0085), and images from the character's appearance to exit are stored in chronological order.

Thereafter, at time t11, power supply to the main control board 1310 is stopped. At this time, the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is continued, but the symbol stop command etc. is not sent to the main control board 1310, so the symbol fluctuation display continues until time t13 (Fig. 453 (B)). On the other hand, the 3D display performance ends when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed) is satisfied (time t12) (FIG. 453(C)). The fluctuating display of symbols can continue until a stop command is received, but since the preview performance has a performance time set, it is configured to end the performance when the performance ends. Note that, in the case where a predetermined performance is repeatedly performed, the preview performance may be continued as is.

At time t13, power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted. At this time, the main control board 1310 executes a power-on process to start up the gaming machine. At this time, a command associated with the startup of the gaming machine is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the continued fluctuating display of symbols and performance are stopped, and the startup screen of the gaming machine is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 453(D)). Note that the startup screen becomes a 2D display regardless of the effect display mode. Thereby, the load upon restarting the game can be reduced.

[30-6b. Control when power to peripheral control board is cut off]
Finally, control when power supply is cut off only to the peripheral control board 1510 during 3D display performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 454 and 455, a case is explained in which the power supply is cut off only to the peripheral control board 1510 during the 3D display performance in the jackpot game state, but this is just an example. The same process is performed even if the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the 3D display performance in the variable display.

FIG. 454 is a timing chart showing the state of each component when the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during 3D display performance in the jackpot game state. FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during 3D display performance in the jackpot game state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 454 and 455, the game enters the jackpot game state by winning the special lottery (time t21). In the example shown in FIG. 454, the jackpot game state ends after 15 rounds. Each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole 2005, and at the start of the Nth round, a big winning hole opening Nth display command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to display the big prize opening opening for the Nth time, it executes an effect corresponding to each round, such as displaying the number of rounds (N). Note that the performance corresponding to each round (performance in the jackpot game state) is a 3D display performance.

As shown in FIG. 454, at time t20, the variable display of the special symbols stops and the special lottery is won, and the jackpot is announced while the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (FIG. 455(A)). Thereafter, at time t21, the jackpot game starts and the first round starts (FIG. 455(B)). At this time, the first round (round 1) is started upon reception of the first time display command for opening the big prize opening from the main control board 1310.

Thereafter, in the middle of round 3 of the jackpot game (time t22), the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off. In this embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 is not equipped with power supply from a backup power source, the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is completely interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 455(C), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, the main control board 1310 continues to control the game, and the round continues to progress while the screen remains hidden.

At time t23, when the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is restarted, a display to that effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 455(D), a message "Restoring" is displayed. Note that the message "Restoring" is displayed in 2D, regardless of whether the effect display mode is 2D or 3D.

In the example shown in FIG. 454, the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is resumed in the middle of round 14, and the trigger for starting the performance of each round is the reception of the Nth display command to open the big prize opening. Since the peripheral control board 1510 could not receive the 14th grand prize opening display command during the power outage, the performance corresponding to the round could not be executed, and a display indicating that the game would be restarted is made. This display becomes a 2D display regardless of the effect display mode. Thereby, the load upon restarting the performance can be minimized, and the regular performance (in this case, the performance corresponding to the round) can be quickly transitioned to.

When the round 14 of the jackpot game ends and the round 15 starts (time t24), the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to display the 15th opening of the jackpot, thereby starting the production corresponding to the 15th round. (Figure 455(E)).

In the game machine of this embodiment, the performance display mode cannot be maintained due to the power supply cut off to the peripheral control board 1510, and therefore the 2D display or the 3D display cannot be recognized before the power is cut off. Therefore, the game is restarted by setting the default effect display mode. In the game machine of this embodiment, the default effect display mode is 2D display, and even if the effect is being executed in 3D display before the power is cut off, the effect will be executed in 2D display after restarting. Note that if the default effect display mode is 3D display, the effect will be executed in 3D display after restarting.

Thereafter, when the jackpot game ends, the variable display of special symbols is started based on the suspended starting memory, and the game is continued (time t25).

With the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510, the screen display immediately after recovery is a 2D display regardless of the effect display mode, thereby minimizing the drawing load. After receiving the command from the main control board 1310, the performance can be quickly resumed. Further, by setting the performance display mode at the time of return to the default performance display mode, it is not necessary to perform processing such as storing the performance display mode before the occurrence of an abnormality, so that it is possible to suppress complexity of performance control.

[31. Video display control]
The three-dimensional display of performance images has been described above. Next, a configuration for displaying moving images in this embodiment will be described. In the game machine of this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 can display images (moving images) of moving character images and the like to enhance the performance effect. Performances that include moving images can attract more attention from players than performances that consist of static images, and can be expected to make a significant contribution to increasing the interest of games.

A moving image expresses an action by continuously displaying a plurality of images, and utilizes the apparent movement caused by continuously changing pictures or objects. Therefore, more storage capacity is required than when displaying an image alone. On the other hand, in order to reduce the required image capacity, it may be possible to reduce the number of required images by partially processing the images, but this has the problem of increasing the image processing load.

Therefore, reference frame data is provided for each predetermined number of frames, and between the reference frame data and the next reference frame data, each frame's image is By generating , the capacity of image data is compressed.

However, when generating video data based on differential frame data, it is necessary to retain the image data of the immediately previous frame, and a storage area must be secured at any time to retain the image data of the previous frame. There was a possibility of a shortage. Furthermore, since the generation of a moving image imposes a heavy load on VDP (04TKK0060), etc., there is a risk of processing delays even if image data compression is realized.

Therefore, the present invention suppresses an increase in the storage capacity required for displaying a moving image while compressing image data for displaying a moving image stored in a performance data ROM (image ROM, CGROM). ), the purpose is to stabilize performance control of a gaming machine, make it possible to realize a more effective performance, and improve the interest of the game.

[31-1. Configuration for displaying videos]
First, the moving image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. The video displayed in this embodiment does not express movement by preparing one screen's worth of images in advance and displaying them continuously in chronological order. ) to generate the next image to be displayed, and by continuously displaying the generated images, motion is expressed.

[31-1a. Image data arrangement]
First, a basic configuration for generating a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. The image data is stored in the image data area (05TKK0085) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

As described above, the moving image in this embodiment expresses movement by changing (updating) parts that are different from the image displayed immediately before. Therefore, the video image data includes reference image data (reference frame data) and differential image data (difference frame data). In addition, since a moving image expresses movement by continuously displaying one frame of image data generated from reference frame data and differential frame data, each image data is one frame within the image data area (05TKK0085). They are arranged in chronological order (display order) starting from the top.

Next, a structure for storing image data for generating a moving image will be explained. FIG. 456 is a diagram illustrating an example of a structure for storing frame data for generating a moving image. As shown in FIG. 456, the image data forming a series of moving images are arranged in chronological order (display order) with reference frame data at the beginning. Furthermore, the reference frame data is arranged in predetermined numbers, and a predetermined number of differential frame data is arranged between one reference frame data and the next reference frame data. By arranging the reference frame data at regular intervals in this manner, a moving image can be generated by simple loop processing, so the program can be simplified.

Each frame data also includes header information. The header information includes information indicating whether the corresponding frame is a reference frame or a differential frame. Therefore, since it is possible to determine whether the frame is a reference frame or a differential frame by referring to the header information, it is also possible to arrange the reference frame data at intervals other than a fixed number. In this case, it becomes easy to arrange the reference frame data at the scene change timing, etc., thereby increasing the degree of freedom in data arrangement and increasing the efficiency of creating and managing image data for moving images.

Further, the header information of the frame data may include display position, display size, deformation state (scaling, rotation, etc.) in addition to information identifying whether the frame is a reference frame or a differential frame. In addition, as described later, it holds information (address information, etc.) that identifies the frame data of the preceding frame (frame), and can play the video from any frame data or play the video in reverse order. It is also possible.

The reference frame data includes all display contents of the image to be displayed, while the difference frame data includes only difference information with the image (frame) displayed immediately before. Therefore, the capacity of the reference frame data becomes large. Therefore, by reducing the proportion of reference frame data (by increasing the proportion of differential frame data), the total capacity of image data for generating a moving image can be reduced. On the other hand, with reference frame data, it is sufficient to display the image as is, but when generating an image using difference frame data, the reference frame data and the image data from the reference frame data to the immediately preceding difference frame data are required. There is a problem in that the processing load for synthesizing the image data of two images becomes high.

FIG. 457 is a graph showing the relationship between the interval at which one reference frame data is arranged and the amount of data. The horizontal axis is the number of data (GOP) including the reference frame data until the next reference frame data appears. Therefore, when the value of the horizontal axis is 1, all frames are composed of reference frames, and when the value is 60, a reference frame is arranged every 60 frames. The vertical axis represents the amount of data when the case of GOP=60 is set to 1. In the example shown in FIG. 456, GOP=30, and reference frame data is arranged every 30 frames.

Referring to FIG. 457, when differential frame data is not included (GOP=1), the capacity is approximately 1.8, which means that approximately 1.8 times the capacity is required compared to the case where GOP=60. It has become. Further, up to GOP=10 (1.06), there is no big difference from GOP=60, and up to about 1.2 times, it is possible to reduce the processing load while suppressing the increase in capacity. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 457, the value exceeds 1.2 when GOP=3, so it is considered that GOP=4 or 5 provides a good balance between suppressing data capacity increase and reducing processing load. Note that the GOP values shown in the specification of this application are experimental data for the production data in the gaming machine of this embodiment, so they are not common to all gaming machines, and may vary depending on the VDP (04TKK0060) and image RAM (04TKK0090). The appropriate value may differ due to factors such as performance differences.

[31-1b. Image arrangement (layer structure)]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of areas are allocated to the display area, and a static image or moving image is drawn in each area. Each region includes an area smaller than the entire display area. FIG. 458 is a diagram illustrating an example of arrangement of areas for displaying images. In the example shown in FIG. 458, an area A0 that corresponds to the entire display screen of the effect display device 1600 and displays the entire background, and eight areas (A1 to A8) smaller than the area A0 are allocated.

In addition, each area corresponds to a layer, and by drawing the image developed in the decode buffer (05TKK0101) on each layer and transferring (combining, drawing) to the frame buffer (04TKK0091), one screen's worth of images can be created. Generate display images. Note that positional information indicating the arrangement of the display screen is defined directly or indirectly in each area, but the decoding buffer only secures a storage area of the size that matches the image size, and the screen display Time location information is not supported. The arrangement information of each area may be held collectively as management information as described later with reference to FIG. 460, or may be included in the header information of frame data as described above. By including it in the header information of the frame data, it becomes possible to move the area itself, which can be expected to further enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 459 is a diagram illustrating images corresponding to each region, with the upper row showing images corresponding to each region, and the lower row showing display images generated as a result of drawing images corresponding to all regions. Further, FIG. 460 is a table showing configuration information of each area. Each area is associated with an area name, drawing content, area position, area size, and corresponding layer name. Although each piece of information is shown in a table format in FIG. 460, instead of holding information all at once as management information, for example, information that associates areas and layers is held, and information such as position and size is It may also be retained as layer attribute information. Note that the display of the area A0 corresponding to the background layer is omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the performance content is determined based on the result of a special lottery, etc., and an image corresponding to each area is drawn in accordance with the determined performance content, thereby completing a display image for one screen. Therefore, it is possible to change the combination of images to be drawn for each area, and it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects with a small number of images. Furthermore, by reducing the number of images, the capacity of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) can be saved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the size of the drawing area on the performance display screen is 1600 dots horizontally and 1200 dots vertically, and the position is defined by a coordinate system with the upper left as the origin. The size of the drawing area is not limited to this, and may be set according to the performance of the effect display device 1600. Further, the origin of the coordinate system may be set at another position, for example, the lower left.

Furthermore, since the areas in which each image is drawn correspond to layers, a context is defined for each layer. FIG. 461 is a diagram illustrating the context of each layer. As shown in FIG. 461, the background layer is placed at the backmost layer, and the fourth pattern layer is placed at the forefront. In addition, when an error occurs, a message or image is displayed on a layer for displaying an error (an error (warning) display layer) arranged further in front of the fourth symbol layer. This layer is used to display still images (described later), and in addition to displaying a single image, it is also possible to display moving images by displaying images continuously. ing. In addition, a layer for instructing the operation of the production button and notifying the player of hitting the right hand is also set separately. These layers may be a common layer or may be individually dedicated layers.

Next, each area will be explained. Area A0 corresponds to the background layer, and the size corresponds to the entire drawing area. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the content to be drawn is a single image, but it may be a moving image, or all moving images may be managed as moving images without movement. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since each area has a rectangular shape, the top left vertex is set as the position. The arrangement of areas can be specified from the position information and size information.

In area A1, a "cloud" shaped object is displayed, and a moving image of the object changing to "rain" or "lightning" can be displayed. The appearance changes based on the fluctuation pattern of the symbols and the results of the special lottery. Changes in the object are completed within the area and do not affect the drawing state of other areas. In other words, it is possible to display effects independently in each area. By defining the drawing scheduler data corresponding to each area in the liquid crystal effect block data, it becomes possible to link the images displayed in each area as a series of effects.

In area A2, an "airplane" shaped object is displayed, which appears from the left side of the screen at the start of the performance and moves to the right. In this embodiment, the area A2 is the entire moving area of the airplane, but an area of a size that allows the airplane to be drawn may be defined, and the position may be reset as the performance progresses.

In area A3, an object in the shape of a "building" is displayed, and is drawn as a single image that does not change from the start of the performance. Even in such a case, by separating the moving object from the background, it is possible to select whether to place the moving object in front of or behind the stationary object. For example, in the example of this embodiment, it is easy to set whether the airplane should pass in front of the building or behind the building by arranging the layers, and the image can be drawn in either case. It becomes possible to perform common drawing processing by simply changing the layer position. Further, it is possible to easily create a warning effect that increases expectations when an airplane passes in front of a building. In this way, effects can be diversified while simplifying effect control and reducing program capacity.

Objects indicating pending display are arranged in areas A4 to A7, and the display contents are changed based on commands from the main control board 1310. Note that if the display mode of the hold display does not change, a single image may be used. Furthermore, all pending displays may be displayed in one area without dividing the area for each starting memory, or even if the area is divided, they may be drawn on the same layer.

Area A8 is an area for displaying the fourth symbol. The movement of the fourth symbol is expressed through sprite processing. Specifically, the elements constituting the fourth pattern are held as a plurality of small parts (images), and these are combined and displayed at an arbitrary position on the screen. Note that movement is similarly realized for the performance symbols (first to third symbols) by switching and deforming the display position of the symbol image (sprite).

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to play back moving images for each area. The playback time of the moving image in each area is managed by a timer (not shown), and all the areas may be managed by one timer, or a timer may be provided for each area and each area may be managed individually.

Furthermore, a suppression layer for displaying an image that suppresses the visibility of the preview effect may be placed on the front side of a layer for displaying the preview effect (for example, a layer corresponding to areas A0 to A3). . The suppression-only layer may display a monochrome opaque image, or may display an image (video) different from the preview effect. When displaying a monochromatic opaque image (filling a layer with a specific color), for example, a blackout effect that temporarily turns the display screen black can be achieved simply by controlling a specific layer. Additionally, when displaying an image (video) that is different from the preview effect, you can immediately return to the preview effect by making the layer invisible (transparent), making it possible to switch effects without performing complicated controls. In addition, by temporarily executing another performance, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and improve the interest of the game.

The suppression-only layer is arranged on the back side of the layer (for example, the layer corresponding to areas A4 to A8) on which regularly displayed objects (for example, pending display, fourth symbol, etc.) are drawn, and is shown in FIG. 461. In the example, it is placed between the layer corresponding to area A2 and the layer corresponding to area A4. By arranging it in this way, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of the preview performance while continuing to view the hold display and the like. Note that the suppression-only layer may be placed in front of a layer in which regularly displayed objects are drawn, and the effects of the suppression-only layer may be performed on the entire screen. Even in this case, the suppression layer is placed on the back side of the error (warning) display layer, so that notification can be made if an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of an abnormality while enhancing the performance effect.

[31-2. Controls for displaying videos]
The configuration of layers for displaying videos has been explained above. Next, a procedure for generating images of each frame (frame) and displaying a moving image will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, an image is generated for each frame using the reference frame data and the difference frame data, and the images are sequentially displayed to display a moving image. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two types of methods for generating an image using reference frame data and differential frame data will be described.

[31-2a. Video generation procedure 1]
FIG. 462 is a diagram illustrating the first procedure for generating a moving image. In the procedure shown in FIG. 462, reference frame data is arranged every 30 frames, and the compression efficiency of the capacity for storing image data is high.

In the first step, an image corresponding to each area is drawn in a designated area (layer), and the image drawn in each area (layer) is drawn in a frame buffer (04TKK0091). In the procedure shown in FIG. 462, in the 1st frame and the 31st frame, one screen worth of images is generated using reference frame data. Therefore, the image data stored in the image data area of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) or the image data preloaded in the external RAM (05TKK0020) is developed into the decode buffer (05TKK0101) reserved for each area (layer). . For example, as shown in FIG. 462, image data to be drawn in area A1 is developed into a decode buffer for area A1 allocated to external RAM (05TKK0020). Note that a single image or an image subjected to sprite processing may be directly expanded to the frame buffer.

Here, if part or all of the image data of the video to be generated is not preloaded in the external RAM (05TKK0020), the image data stored in the image data area of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) at the time of image generation is read. There is a need. Therefore, the necessary image data may be read out in advance from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) based on the determination of the moving image to be generated. This eliminates the need to directly access the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) when generating a moving image, so it is possible to speed up effect control. At this time, by reading out the image data in the playback order (display order), the time lag between the generation of the moving image and the readout of the image data can be minimized.

Next, a case will be described in which drawing is performed based on frame data other than the reference frame data, that is, differential frame data. Here, a case will be described in which an image for area A1 of the fourth frame is generated. As described above, the difference frame data is a difference from the image of the immediately previous frame, so the image data of the immediately previous frame is required to generate complete image data. The difference frame data of the fourth frame is an image showing a single drop, and when combined with the image stored in the decoding buffer of the third frame, it becomes complete image data drawn in the area A1. In this way, the image data stored in the decode buffer for each area is superimposed in the order of layers to generate data for one screen.

As described above, according to the first procedure, the ratio of differential frame data can be increased, so the data capacity can be compressed. Furthermore, since a decode buffer of a size corresponding to the area of each layer is allocated, the storage area can be saved compared to when an area for one screen is allocated to the decode buffer.

However, in the first procedure, it is necessary to hold the image data of the immediately previous frame in the decoding buffer for all areas in which a moving image is displayed. Therefore, when increasing the number of areas for displaying videos in order to enhance the production effect, the storage capacity for allocating the decoding buffer (05TKK0101) increases, and the storage area provided by the external RAM (05TKK0020) becomes insufficient. There is a risk.

FIG. 463 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of the decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated in the first procedure. Although there are six videos described in this embodiment, a dedicated decoding buffer must be allocated for each video. Furthermore, since more moving images are displayed in the actual performance, even if the decoding buffer secured in the storage area is released at the end of a series of performances, there is a risk that the storage capacity will temporarily run out. As a result, there is a delay in executing a performance that catches the player's attention, and there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced.

[31-2b. Video generation procedure 2]
The first procedure has a problem in that the capacity of the decode buffer allocated to the external RAM (05TKK0020) increases. Therefore, a second procedure that can suppress an increase in the capacity allocated to the decode buffer (05TKK0101) more than the first procedure will be described.

In the second procedure, in order to suppress an increase in the capacity of the decode buffer, a decode buffer is not secured for each area, but a single decode buffer (common decode buffer) that is common to all areas is provided. Like the frame buffer, the common decoding buffer corresponds to a display area for one screen, and directly draws image data for each area in order (display order) starting from the lower layer. Note that since there is a single common decoding buffer, it may be allocated to the image RAM (04TKK0090) instead of the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Note that instead of making the common decoding buffer correspond to the display area of one screen, it may be made to correspond to the largest display area among the plurality of layers to be drawn. In addition, if the display area of each layer is far apart, and if the display area of all layers cannot fit in the maximum display area, at least the minimum display area that can include the display area of all layers is A common decoding buffer may be allocated correspondingly. This makes it possible to make the common decoding buffer correspond to an area smaller than the frame buffer, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for buffer allocation.

As described above, the common decoding buffer does not necessarily have to correspond to the display area of one screen, but may correspond to the necessary area. If the common decode buffer corresponds to one screen's worth of display area, the common decode buffer may be allocated to the external RAM (05TKK0020) during power-on processing of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a common decoding buffer may be allocated for each performance. As a result, buffers can be allocated and released as needed, so that storage area allocation efficiency can be improved and used effectively.

Furthermore, when generating an image based on differential frame data other than the reference frame data, all the reference frame data immediately before the frame to be generated and the differential data after the reference frame data are drawn in a common decoding buffer. Therefore, as in the first procedure, when the arrangement interval of the reference frame data becomes large, the amount of image data to be developed at the same time increases, and the image processing time increases, so the arrangement interval of the reference frame data is reduced. The details of the second procedure will be explained below.

FIG. 464 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement interval of reference frame data when a moving image is generated in the second procedure. In the example shown in FIG. 464, the reference frame data is arranged every 4 frames, which requires about 1.17 times the capacity compared to the case where the reference frame data is arranged every 60 frames. , the capacity is about two-thirds that of the case where all of the data is used as reference frame data (see FIG. 457). The second procedure will be described below with reference to FIG. 465.

FIG. 465 is a diagram illustrating the second procedure for generating a moving image. As described above, in the second procedure, a decoding buffer is not reserved for each region where a moving image is played, but drawing is performed directly in a common decoding buffer. Specifically, image data corresponding to each area is drawn in the common decoding buffer in order (display order) starting from the area (layer) on the back side. When the drawing of image data in all areas is completed, it is transferred to the frame buffer and output to the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

Further, instead of transferring the drawing to the frame buffer after the drawing of all the layers is completed in the common decoding buffer, the drawing may be transferred to the frame buffer and overwritten each time the drawing of each layer is completed. At this time, the image of the next layer may be overwritten without clearing the common decode buffer, or the image of the next layer may be drawn after clearing the common decode buffer. When the common decode buffer is cleared, the amount of memory used can be reduced, and when the common decode buffer is not cleared, the processing load associated with buffer clearing can be reduced.

First, when drawing (expanding) the reference frame data, it is sufficient to draw the read image data in order from the region (layer) on the back side. On the other hand, when drawing differential frame data, for example, when generating an image for the second frame, an image based on the differential frame data for the second frame is drawn in addition to the reference frame data for the first frame. The drawing order is such that drawing starts from the lowest region (layer), and within the same region, drawing is performed in chronological order starting from the reference frame data. In the example of FIG. 465, after drawing the background image, the reference frame data (first frame image) of area A1 is drawn, and then the difference frame data of the second frame is drawn. Next, draw a single image of the building. Further, the reference frame data and the differential frame data of the area A2 are drawn in this order, and the remaining areas are drawn in the same manner. After drawing the image data for all areas, the image in the common decode buffer is transferred to the frame buffer and output to the effect display device 1600. By controlling in this way, a moving image can be generated using only the common decoding buffer without allocating a decoding buffer for each area to the external RAM (05TKK0020) or the image RAM (04TKK0090).

When generating the third frame image, drawing is similarly performed in order from the lowest region (layer). In the third frame image, similarly to the second frame, after drawing the image of the background layer in area A0, the preview layer in area A1 is drawn. At this time, reference frame data, which is the image of the first frame, is drawn, and then differential frame data of the second frame is drawn. Further, by drawing the difference frame data of the third frame, the drawing of the area A1 is completed. Then, the remaining areas are drawn in the same manner, and the drawing for one screen of the third frame is completed.

Note that the positions of the reference frame data do not necessarily have to match for the moving images drawn in each layer. Specifically, there may be a mixture of layers that start drawing from the start of the production and layers that start drawing from the middle of the production. For example, if a character is displayed in the middle of the production, the character Rendering starts at the timing when the layer appears, and this timing becomes the reference frame start position (rendering start position) of the layer. Further, the presentation ending position of each layer may also be set to the timing at which the character exits, rather than the timing at which the presentation ends.

Generally, a "video" expresses movement by continuously displaying images ("video" in a broad sense), but in the performance of the gaming machine of this embodiment, each image (frame) is A video in which a difference is provided is defined as a "moving image" in a narrow sense, and a video composed of reference frame data and difference frame data as described above falls under this category. On the other hand, a "still image" is defined as a complete image (reference frame data) rather than a difference, and it is not only a single image with no movement, but also a continuous complete image (reference frame data). Images that express movement by displaying them are also considered "still images."

Since a "moving image" in a narrow sense includes differential images (differential frame data), the capacity for storing images can be compressed, but the image quality may deteriorate. On the other hand, since each frame of a "still image" is in a perfect state, deterioration in image quality can be suppressed. Therefore, we use "still images" for displays that may cause problems if players misunderstand, such as notifications of lottery results (for example, displays of decorative patterns), while we use "still images" for displays to increase the interest of the game (for example, display of decorative patterns, etc.). In cases where the lottery results are not directly displayed, such as preview performances, video displays, etc., they are referred to as "videos" (in a narrow sense). In addition, when expressing movement, the image quality is adjusted by adjusting the interval of reference frame data, etc., and by making it a "moving image" in a narrow sense that includes all differential frame data, it is possible to unify control and reduce the image capacity. It may be possible to reduce the number of frames, but by using "still images" that do not include differential frame data, it is possible to simplify control by eliminating the need for processing to combine the reference frame data and differential frame data. Good too.

Furthermore, since the layer for displaying moving images is composed of a plurality of objects, the number of layers is greater than the number of layers for displaying still images. This makes it possible to realize detailed performances. Further, by allocating an area according to the size of the object to be displayed for each layer, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity from being exhausted due to excessive area allocation. The number of layers for displaying still images can be kept to a minimum because objects to be drawn do not operate independently. Note that depending on the type of presentation, the number of layers for displaying moving images may be smaller than the number of layers for displaying still images.

Furthermore, in the second procedure, the decode buffer for each area is not held and the common decode buffer is also discarded, so when drawing differential frame data, it is necessary to identify the most recent reference frame data. As described above, the frame data includes header information that identifies whether the frame data is reference frame data or differential frame data. Further, since the frame data of the preceding frame can be specified, it is possible to trace back to the reference frame data by sequentially checking the contents of the header information of the frame data of the preceding frame.

Note that even if you do not allocate the decode buffer (05TKK0101) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) and allocate the decode buffer to the VDP's built-in RAM or image RAM (04TKK0090), the storage space provided by these RAMs will be free. This allows it to be used for other controls, making it possible to stabilize performance control.

FIG. 466 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of the decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated in the second procedure. In the second procedure, since it is sufficient to provide one common decoding buffer for one screen regardless of the number of areas in which the moving image is played back, the memory usage amount can be kept constant regardless of the content of the presentation. Although the number of videos described in this embodiment is six, as described above, in actual production, even more videos are displayed, so the memory capacity that can be reduced becomes large. On the other hand, by generating videos using the second procedure, the capacity of the decoding buffer can be kept constant, making it possible to achieve stable performance control, and creating performances that catch the attention of players by playing many videos. Even in the case where the game is played, it is possible to suppress disruption of performance such as delay, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As described above, in the video playback method according to the second procedure, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the decoding buffer required when performing an effect in which multiple videos are displayed simultaneously on one screen, and the delay in image display is reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence and stabilize production control. In particular, after the peripheral control board 1510 is manufactured, it is very difficult to increase the capacity of the external RAM (05TKK0070) by retrofitting, so it is possible to reduce costs by adopting an external RAM (05TKK0070) with a smaller capacity. . Furthermore, by being able to play more moving images with a smaller capacity external RAM (05TKK0070), the degree of freedom in presentation increases, making it possible to create more interesting presentations.

In addition, in all of the video playback procedures described above, it was possible to play back the video from the reference frame data, but in particular, in the first procedure, the interval between the reference frame data was long, and the video had to be played from the beginning. was occurring. In contrast, in the second step, while achieving a certain level of data compression, the interval between reference frame data is made shorter than in the first step, making it easy to play the video from any position (in the middle). becomes. This facilitates the performance design of the gaming machine. Further, when a long version performance and a short version performance are defined, frame data can be shared by making part of the long version performance common to the short version performance.

Further, in the video playback method using the second procedure, the amount of data developed for each frame is larger on average, so there is a problem in that the processing load is greater than that in the first procedure. However, the performance of VDP has improved in recent years, and experimental results have shown that if the interval between reference frame data is up to about 5 (GOP=5), the performance is sufficiently practical.

Furthermore, in the video playback method according to the second procedure, since the interval between the reference frame data is shorter than that in the first procedure, the amount of data compression decreases, resulting in an increase in capacity. However, as shown in FIG. 457, if the interval between the reference frame data is set to about 5, it will be about 1.13 times smaller than when the interval between the reference frame data is set to 60, so the increase in capacity is not a big problem. Must not be. Furthermore, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) of this embodiment uses a NAND flash memory to reduce costs and increase capacity, making it possible to store more image data. Furthermore, the time it takes to read data from the NAND flash memory can be shortened by installing a cache memory (05TKK0072) or preloading image data to external RAM (05TKK0020), so the above points are not a practical problem. It won't be.

Further, in the above example, the common decode buffer corresponds to an area for one screen, but a plurality of common decode buffers may be provided. Specifically, a common decoding buffer is provided for each of a plurality of related layers. With this configuration, when a common character appears in multiple preview performances, it is possible to share the data and buffer settings for that character, and by reducing duplicate data, the storage capacity can be saved. It becomes possible to save money.

By the way, if a common decoding buffer is used for all regions (layers), when the number of video layers increases, the processing load for display control increases, and there is a risk that the drawing processing will not be able to be completed in time. In order to solve this problem, if the value of the GOP is set to a small value, a problem arises in that the capacity of the image data ends up increasing. Therefore, among the regions (layers) in which a moving image is drawn, a common decoding buffer is used for large-sized regions (layers), and individual decoding buffers are used for small-sized regions (layers). A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG. 467.

FIG. 467 is a diagram illustrating the capacity of the decoding buffer required when a moving image is generated by combining the first and second procedures. In the example shown in FIG. 467, areas A0 to A3 are drawn in a common decode buffer, and areas A4 to A8 are drawn in separate decode buffers. As shown in FIG. 458 and the like, areas A4 to A8 are small in size, while areas A0 to A3 are relatively large in size. Note that since areas A0, A3, and A8 are areas where still images or single images are drawn, they may be drawn directly on the frame buffer.

As described above, the common decoding buffer is not limited to one buffer for all video layers, but may be a common buffer for some layers among all video layers. Video generation is performed by combining the first and second steps. When using a common decoding buffer, the second step is used, and when using individual decoding buffers, it is performed based on the first step. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load for display control while suppressing an increase in the capacity of image data.

[31-2c. Modification of video generation procedure 2]
The video playback method according to the second procedure has been described above. In the video playback method according to the second procedure, when the frame to be generated is differential frame data, the reference frame data immediately before the frame to be generated and All differential frame data after the reference frame data was identified and drawn in a common decoding buffer. Reference frame data and differential data have been identified based on identification information included in header information.

However, since it is necessary to individually confirm the frame data to be specified, processing for specifying the frame data is required. Therefore, in this modified example, by providing image management information corresponding to each frame data, it is possible to efficiently specify the basic frame data and the difference data.

FIG. 468 is a diagram showing an example of image management information, in which (A) shows a case where the interval between basic frame data is fixed, and (B) shows a case where the interval between basic frame data is variable. Image management information consists of the interval of basic frame data (frame interval) that serves as a reference, video type information for identifying videos, and frame identification information that indicates whether it is standard frame data or differential frame data. be done. Frame identification information is set corresponding to each frame. Note that the image management information may include the storage location (address) of the image information of each frame. This makes it possible to directly acquire frame data (image information) and simplify processing.

In the example shown in (A), a reference frame interval is defined at the beginning of the image management information, and video type information is defined for each video. Furthermore, frame identification information of frame data corresponding to frames included in each moving image is defined. In this embodiment, in the case of basic frame data, the frame identification information is set to "1", and in the case of differential frame data, the frame identification information is set to "2". Further, an end code indicating the end of the video is set after the frame identification information of the last frame.

In the example shown in (B), video type information and reference frame intervals are defined for each video. The frame identification information is the same as the example shown in (A).

If the reference frame interval is fixed as shown in (A), the reference frame data is always arranged at equal intervals, so that control can be simplified. On the other hand, if the reference frame interval is made variable as shown in (B), detailed settings can be made for each video. For example, for a moving image with little movement (small change), the capacity of differential data is small, so it is possible to save image capacity by setting a long reference frame interval. In addition, for videos with a lot of movement (large changes), the capacity of the difference data increases, so even if you set a long reference frame interval, you cannot expect to reduce the capacity, so draw by shortening the reference frame interval. It is possible to reduce the processing load for frame generation by reducing frame data.

[32. External RAM inspection]
In conventional gaming machines, temporary storage means for performance control by the peripheral control board 1510 include a RAM (04TKK0012) used when executing a program for performance control and an image RAM (VRAM) (04TKK0090) used for display control of images, etc. )was there. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned temporary storage means, an external RAM (05TKK0020) is used for peripheral control in order to speed up performance control by storing performance data and decoded image data in advance before execution. It is located on the substrate 1510 (FIG. 427).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a DDR3 SDRAM is adopted as the external RAM (05TKK0020), and can be accessed from each component such as the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512.

Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with an inspection function for diagnosing whether each component operates normally. The inspection function is implemented as a function of a calculation means such as a CPU (04TKK0011) or a VDP (04TKK0060), or is implemented by a program executed by these calculation means. For example, the inspection of the RAM (04TKK0012) included in the peripheral control unit 1511 is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011). Further, the image RAM (04TKK0090) is included in the effect display control section 1512, and is inspected by the VDP (04TKK0060). Due to reasons such as the VDP (04TKK0060) having a configuration that only executes image control, or the VDP (04TKK0060) and image RAM (04TKK0090) having independent configurations, the inspection of the image RAM (04TKK0090) is performed by the CPU (04TKK0011). ) may be executed.

In order to ensure normal operation (performance control) of the gaming machine, it is necessary to provide a configuration for similarly testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) newly added to the gaming machine of this embodiment. Since the external RAM (05TKK0020) can be accessed from both the CPU (04TKK0011) and the VDP (04TKK0060), either the CPU (04TKK0011) or the VDP (04TKK0060) may perform the inspection.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the external RAM (05TKK0020) is inspected by the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060). The configuration for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) by the CPU (04TKK0011) is the same as the conventional configuration, so first, the configuration for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) by the VDP (04TKK0060) will be described. Next, the inspection contents of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be explained. Finally, control during execution of testing of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be explained.

[32-1. Configuration for inspecting external RAM]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the VDP (04TKK0060) includes a memory controller (06TKK0010) that controls access to the external RAM (05TKK0020), and inputs and outputs signals from various terminals to the external RAM (05TKK0020).

FIG. 469 is a block diagram excerpting the configuration for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020). In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 427, the VDP (04TKK0060) includes a memory controller (06TKK0010), which controls access to the external RAM (05TKK0020) from each configuration of the VDP (04TKK0060).

The memory controller (06TKK0010) includes a controller core (06TKK0011). The controller core (06TKK0011) receives commands for each component of the VDP (04TKK0060) to access data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020), and stores them in the command queue (06TKK0012). Furthermore, the command stored in the command queue (06TKK0012) is processed and sent to the command scheduler (06TKK0015) by the selection logic (06TKK0013). The command scheduler controls the execution timing of commands received by the VDP (04TKK0060). The command scheduler (06TKK0015) transmits various signals for reading/writing from the corresponding terminal (06TKK0018) to the memory device (06TKK0022) of the external RAM (05TKK0020) based on the received command.

Furthermore, the memory controller (06TKK0010) includes a RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020), which tests whether the bus and terminals connected to the external RAM (05TKK0020) are functioning properly.

The signals output from the terminal (06TKK0018) provided in the memory controller (06TKK0010) and input to the external RAM (05TKK0020) via the terminal (06TKK0021) include a reset signal (RESET#) and a clock signal (CK/CK). #), chip select signal (CS[1:0]#), row address strobe signal (RAS#), column address strobe signal (CAS#), write enable signal (WE#), address signal (A[15:0] ) and data signals (DQ[31:0]).

The reset signal (RESET#) causes the external RAM (05TKK0020) to perform a reset operation. The clock signal (CK/CK#) determines the timing at which the external RAM (05TKK0020) operates (read/write data, etc.).

The chip select signal (CS[1:0]#) is a signal for specifying a memory chip to be accessed. The row address strobe signal (RAS#) is a signal for specifying the row address of the memory element (memory device) to be accessed, and the column address strobe signal (CAS#) is a signal for specifying the column address of the memory element to be accessed. This is a signal for specifying. A memory element to be accessed is specified by a row address strobe signal and a column address strobe signal. The write enable signal (WE#) is a signal for enabling writing to the memory element to be accessed.

The address signal (A[15:0]) specifies the address of the cell in which the data to be accessed is stored. The data signal (DQ[31:0]) inputs and outputs data specified by the address signal. There are 16 (0 to 15) terminals for outputting address signals, and each terminal is connected to an address bus. Further, 32 (0 to 31) terminals for outputting data signals are provided, and a data bus is connected to each terminal.

Terminating resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) are connected to the address bus and the data bus. The resistance values of the terminating resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) can be adjusted, and in this embodiment, they can be switched to at least three types: 36Ω, 40Ω, and 60Ω. The inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) is performed while changing the resistance value of the terminating resistor. The RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) may be provided with a termination resistance setting register, and the external RAM (05TKK0020) may be tested by specifying any termination resistance in the termination resistance setting register.

[32-2. External RAM inspection]
The configurations of the VDP (04TKK0060) and external RAM (05TKK0020) have been described above. Next, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be explained. The test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) is performed based on a test command received via a terminal provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and when a predetermined condition for performing the test is satisfied. There are cases. The terminal for receiving inspection commands is a serial input/output interface capable of receiving commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 as well as commands transmitted by the inspection device connected to inspect the gaming machine at the time of factory shipment. It has become.

In addition, the external RAM (05TKK0020) is tested by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing the test program, and by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060). There is something to do.

The test based on the test program is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing the corresponding test program based on the reception of the test command. First, the command receiving unit (communication port) of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the transmitted inspection command and stores it in the command buffer. The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the inspection program corresponding to the inspection command stored in the command buffer. Note that the inspection command is received by the same command receiving unit (communication port) that receives the production-related commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the inspection command is received by the command receiving unit (communication port) dedicated to inspection ( A command input port, a communication port) may receive the information.

[32-2a. Inspection command]
First, the inspection command will be explained. In addition to the external RAM (05TKK0020), the inspection targets include the VDP (04TKK0060), the sound source IC (04TKK0030), and the operational aspects of various production devices. Furthermore, the inspection program is not limited to the CPU (04TKK0011), but may be executed by another calculation means such as the VDP (04TKK0060) depending on the object to be inspected. The command that targets the external RAM (05TKK0020) for inspection will be described below.

FIG. 470 is a diagram illustrating an example of a command for inspecting the external RAM (05TKK0020). The system of inspection commands is the same as or similar to the game commands. When the gaming commands are not the same but similar, for example, the gaming command is composed of a command value + checksum, whereas the inspection command is composed of only the command value. Furthermore, even if they are similar, the command values are not duplicated between the game command and the test command. Thereby, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command, it is possible to execute processing based only on the command value without distinguishing whether it is a gaming command or an inspection command.

The inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) in the gaming machine of this embodiment can be roughly divided into two types: R/W (Read/Write) test (first inspection means) and glitch margin check (second inspection means). be. Furthermore, each test is subdivided by the number of trials. The R/W (Read/Write) test and glitch margin check (inspection) will be described below.

[32-2b. R/W test]
The R/W (Read/Write) test determines whether data can be normally read and written to the storage area provided by the external RAM (05TKK0020). The R/W test is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing an inspection program for executing the R/W test.

In the R/W test, after writing a predetermined value to the entire storage area, it is determined whether or not the written value can be accurately read. If the data cannot be read correctly, the test result will be a failure, and the test being executed will be terminated at this point. At this time, the test itself may be terminated, or the test may be continued by receiving a test command to be executed next. Note that when the test is completed, the test result can be output from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GPIO) of the CPU (04TKK0011), and, for example, the test result is sent to the test device that sent the test command. Upon receiving the test result, the test device displays the test result, transmits the next test command as necessary, and continues the test. For example, after transmitting the R/W test 1 command to the peripheral control board 1510 and receiving and displaying the inspection results, the R/W test 2 command is transmitted. Furthermore, a glitch margin check 1 command, a glitch margin check 2 command, etc. are sequentially transmitted. The inspection contents corresponding to each command will be described later. Note that the general-purpose input/output terminal that outputs the inspection results is a terminal that is not used for gaming, and as a result, the configuration required for inspection can be managed independently of the configuration for gaming, and the It is possible to suppress the complexity of configuration management.

The R/W test command includes commands for executing three types of tests depending on the type of data to be written. R/W test 1 is performed by writing a predetermined value (“0x55aa55aa”). R/W test 2 is performed by writing a value different from the value written in R/W test 1 (“0xaa55aa55”). The predetermined value written in R/W test 1 is "01010101101010100101010110101010" in binary notation, and the predetermined value written in R/W test 1 is "10101010010101011010101001010101". By executing R/W test 1 and R/W test 2, "0" and "1" are written in all areas, and inspection accuracy can be improved.

Further, R/W test 3 is performed by writing a 2-byte random value. If it takes a long time to perform both R/W Test 1 and R/W Test 2 due to limited memory capacity, etc., you can write a random value to perform a test with less bias. , inspection accuracy can be improved. Note that the random number value generated during writing is the same as the random number value generated during reading (during comparison), and the random number values are generated by random number generation processing (function) of the same program. Furthermore, instead of generating random numbers by a program (software), they may be generated by hardware such as a random number generation circuit.

As described above, by making it possible to perform tests that write multiple types of values, tests can be performed according to the situation, and by improving test accuracy, it becomes possible to realize stable performance control, and It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[32-2b. Glitch margin check (inspection)]
The glitch margin check (inspection) determines the durability of the memory module when a glitch occurs. A glitch is a phenomenon in which a clock momentarily turns ON/OFF due to the occurrence of noise near a limit voltage during the rising/falling of a clock signal, resulting in malfunction. In the glitch margin check, by measuring the allowable range (margin) when a glitch occurs, the durability against an unexpected defective signal input due to noise or the like is tested. Adequate durability is usually ensured at the design stage, but margins can be inspected after the fact, as durability may change due to errors that occur during mass production of memory modules, deterioration over time, etc. This increases safety.

The glitch margin check is executed by the diagnostic function of the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060). The glitch margin check command is a command for executing a glitch margin check (inspection), and two types of commands are prepared depending on the number of inspections (3 times, 30,000 times). Note that the number of inspections is not limited to the number shown in FIG. 470, and may be a different number. Further, as described above, the glitch margin check is performed by switching the value of the terminating resistor, and a predetermined number of tests are performed for each type of terminating resistor resistance value. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, three types of resistance values can be set as the terminal resistor, so a predetermined number of tests are performed three times. In other words, when the number of tests is 3, the test is performed once (predetermined number of times) for each resistance value, and when the number of tests is 30,000 times, the test is performed 10,000 times (predetermined number of times) for each resistance value. become.

When the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the glitch margin check command, it instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to execute a glitch margin check. When the VDP (04TKK0060) is instructed to execute a glitch margin check, it sets values in registers that set inspection parameters, execution results, etc., and uses the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) to perform a glitch margin check (inspection). Execute. Inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) will be described below.

[32-2c. Inspection by RAM diagnostic circuit]
Next, the inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) will be explained. The VDP (04TKK0060) of the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020), which sets parameters in a test register and executes a test based on the contents of the register. The RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) tests the external RAM (05TKK0020), but may be configured to also test the image RAM (04TKK0090).

As described above, the test by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) is executed based on the receipt of a test execution instruction from the peripheral control unit 1511 to the VDP (04TKK0060). Further, even if an execution instruction from the peripheral control unit 1511 is not received, the inspection may be executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is turned on or when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, the inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) is executed by setting various parameters in the inspection register, which will be described later. ) The test is performed multiple times while changing the resistance values of the terminal resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) of the address bus and data bus. Specifically, the resistance is changed in the order of 40Ω, 36Ω, and 60Ω. By performing the test while changing the resistance value of the terminating resistor in this way, the accuracy of the glitch margin check can be improved.

Next, registers (inspection registers) set for executing inspection will be explained. Values of various parameters at the time of test execution are set in registers provided in the VDP (04TKK0060). In addition to setting parameters, the registers are also used to output test results and instruct the start of test execution.

FIG. 471 is a diagram illustrating the registers set for executing the test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) by the RAM diagnosis circuit (06TKK0020). Each register consists of 32 bits, and parameters etc. are set by writing values to the corresponding bits.

The registers for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) include a control register, a start address register, and an expected value mask register. The control register is a register for controlling testing, and outputs test results, inputs test execution instructions, and the like. The start address register is a register for setting the test start position of the external RAM (05TKK0020). The expected value mask register is a register for specifying the inspection location of the external RAM (05TKK0020). Each register will be explained below.

[32-2c-1. control register]
The control register is a register for controlling testing, as described above. The control registers include two types of registers: control register 0 and control register 1. The functions corresponding to each bit of each control register will be explained below.

(control register 0)
Control register 0 has the address check result (RESULT_A) in the 25th bit, the data check result (RESULT_D) in the 24th bit, the test execution instruction (TEST_GO) in the 16th bit, and the MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15: 0]) is stored. Other bits are set to "0b".

The address check result (RESULT_A) stores the result of checking for defects related to address/command terminals. The stored value is read-only. As a result of the inspection, if there is a defect (abnormal), "0b" is set, and if there is no defect (normal), "1b" is set to the bit. Note that in the address check, only the presence or absence of a defect is determined, and the location of the defect is not specified.

The data check result (RESULT_D) stores the result of checking all bits of the external RAM (05TKK0020) for defects. The stored value is read-only. As a result of the inspection, if there is a defect (abnormal), "0b" is set, and if there is no defect (normal), "1b" is set to the bit. Note that in the data check, defective locations are recorded in a separate register or the like, and the memory controller is controlled to prevent data from being read or written to the locations.

The test execution instruction (TEST_GO) is set to "1b" if the test is being performed, and "0b" if the test is not being performed. The test execution instruction (TEST_GO) is write-only, and the test is started when the relevant bit is set to "1b". Further, the end of test execution (TEST_DONE) is set to "1b" when the test is being executed, and is set to "0b" when the test is not executed (test execution has ended). The VDP (04TKK0060) determines the end of the test when the value of TEST_DONE becomes "0b" and reads each test result (RESULT_A, RESULT_D). Further, at the end of the test, the VDP (04TKK0060) always sets TEST_GO to "0b", thereby making it possible to perform the test again.

MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15:0]) is composed of 16 bits. The value of MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15:0]) can be read and written.

When the gaming machine is reset, each register is set to a predetermined initial value. At this time, initial values are set for bits related to the start/end of test execution (for example, TEST_GO, TEST_DONE) so that the test can be executed. Specifically, "0b" (test not executed) is set in TEST_GO, and "0b" (test not executed) is set in TEST_DONE. With this configuration, inspection can be performed normally from the time the power is turned on.

(control register 1)
Control register 1 has 16 bits as to whether or not an address check can be executed (ADDR_CHECK), 8 bits as to whether or not a data check can be executed (DATA_CHECK), and 5 to 0 bits as the (DDR) memory capacity to be checked (ADDR_SPACE[5:0] ) is stored. Other bits are set to "0b".

The address check execution capability (ADDR_CHECK) is set to "0b" if the address check is not to be performed, and "1b" if the address check is to be performed. The address check is a simple check such as changing the address bus one bit at a time. For example, address 0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x04, . ．． ．． and change it. Note that when executing the address check, it is necessary to set the start address (described later) to a predetermined value (0_0000_0000h).

The data check execution possibility (DATA_CHECK) is set to "0b" when the data check is not executed, and "1b" when the data check is executed. Data check checks all address areas based on a test algorithm. Inadequate data can cause unexpected behavior in the performance device and cause it to malfunction, so the test algorithm is not a simple one, but one that enables quality-oriented inspection.

When it is set to execute both address check and data check (when ADDR_CHECK and DATA_CHECK are set to "1b"), data check is executed after address check is executed. Furthermore, if a defect is found in the address check, the process ends without executing the data check. This is because the data check is a quality-oriented inspection that can identify the defective location, so it is not possible to identify the defective location at the time there is a defect in an address.

The memory (storage) capacity (ADDR_SPACE[5:0]) is a value indicating the area to be inspected in the external RAM (05TKK0020), and the actual area is 2 ^ADDR_SPACE . Since ADDR_SPACE is 6 bits, a value from "00h" to "3Fh" can be specified. Note that if the inspection target area is small, inspection efficiency will deteriorate, so in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a value of at least 6 ("06h";"000110b") or more is set. Normally, there is no need to exclude a specific area from the inspection target, so by setting ADDR_SPACE to the maximum value (“3Fh”) and specifying the start address of the area (“0_0000_0000h”) as the inspection start address, the maximum storage capacity can be set. The configuration is such that the test is executed on the entire storage area regardless of the size of the storage area.

In addition, since the value of each bit of ADDR_SPACE is set to "0b" as an initial value, even if the test is executed by mistake (when "1b" is set to TEST_GO), the area to be tested is Since ⁰ = 1 (bit), no test is actually performed. As a result, even if "1b" is unintentionally set to TEST_GO due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the test from being executed and the performance to be interrupted.

[32-2c-2. Start address register]
The start address register specifies the start address (start address; (START_ADDRESS[34:0])) of the area to be inspected. The start address is defined by 35 bits, and since the register capacity is 32 bits, it is composed of two registers: an upper start address register and a lower start address register.

The upper start address register stores the value of the upper 3 bits of the start address (START_ADDRESS[34:32]). The value of the upper 3 bits is stored in bits 2 to 0, and "0b" is set in the remaining 31 bits to 3 bits. Note that the upper two bits (START_ADDRESS[34:33]) of the upper start address are set to “0b”.

The lower start address register stores the value of the lower 32 bits of the start address (START_ADDRESS[31:16], (START_ADDRESS[15:0]). The value of the lower 32 bits of the start address is as shown in Figure 471. The lower 5 bits (START_ADDRESS[4:0]) of the lower start address are always set to "0" (32-byte boundary).

As mentioned above, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) usually targets the entire area, so both the upper start address register and the lower start address register are set to "0", and the first address (0 address) is inspected. Make it so that

[32-2c-3. Expected value mask register]
The expected value mask is used to enable/disable testing of a specific terminal, and is set to "0b" when testing is to be performed, and "1b" when not to be tested. This allows only specific terminals to be inspected. The expected value mask register is defined for each of the four types of addresses (“00”, “01”, “10”, “11”) specified as the column address of the external RAM (05TKK0020) (expected value mask register 00 , expected value mask register 01, expected value mask register 10, expected value mask register 11). The configuration of each expected value mask register is common.

The expected value mask register is divided into four areas (A to D) corresponding to storage elements (memory devices (06TKK0022)) every 8 bits (31 bits to 24 bits; MASKD_DQ[7:0], 23 bits to 16 bits; MASKC_DQ[7:0], 15 bits to 8 bits; MASKB_DQ[7:0], 7 bits to 0 bits; MASKA_DQ[7:0]). Normally, to test all terminals, all bits are set to "0b". On the other hand, if "1b" is set in the register to exclude it from the inspection target, it will be ignored even if the expected value fails. Note that if "1b" is set in the register to exclude the object from being inspected, the inspection itself may not be executed.

[32-3. Control for executing external RAM inspection]
Next, control for executing the test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the external RAM (05TKK0020) is inspected when the power is turned on and before the gaming machine is ready to start playing. It is also possible to test the external RAM (05TKK0020) after the power is turned on (after the power-on processing is completed). Note that it is not necessarily necessary to implement the function of executing the test when the power is turned on. It is sufficient that the peripheral control board 1510 is able to receive inspection commands after the gaming machine is powered on, and then the inspection can be executed as necessary. There is no need to implement inspection processing in the control program.

First, basic control during inspection execution will be explained. After the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 receives an inspection command, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the inspection program (R/ In the case of W test), parameters are set in the test register of VDP (04TKK0060), and the test is executed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the memory controller (06TKK0010) (in case of glitch margin check).

When the test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) is completed, the CPU (04TKK0011) reads the test result and outputs it via the general-purpose input/output terminal (GPIO). The CPU (04TKK0011) outputs the test results (commands, information) to the test device without particularly determining whether the test results are normal or abnormal. Note that the end of the test is determined based on the value of TEST_DONE in the test register, an interrupt request from the VDP (04TKK0060), and the like. When the inspection device receives the inspection results, it displays the received inspection results, and when executing another inspection, further transmits an inspection command to continue the inspection.

Hereinafter, the inspection at the time of power-on (power-on processing) and the inspection after the end of the power-on processing will be described with reference to flowcharts.

[32-3a. Inspection at power-on (power-on processing)]
As described above, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) in the gaming machine of this embodiment includes the R/W test and the glitch margin check. The R/W test is executed by processing a test program. The inspection program is included in the peripheral control program. Therefore, the R/W test cannot be performed before the peripheral control program is read and executed when the power is turned on. Furthermore, since the glitch margin check is executed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) based on the test register, it can be started before the peripheral control program is executed.

In the power-on process, as shown in FIG. 429, the boot program is first started, and then the peripheral control program is started. The R/W test is executed as an inspection process included in the peripheral control program (step 05TK0040). Furthermore, since the glitch margin check is executed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the memory controller (06TKK0010) of the VDP (04TKK0060), it can be executed in the boot program inspection process (step 05TKK0010). Note that the test at power-on may be controlled to be executed by a program instead of by a test command.

The case where the test is executed when the power is turned on will be described below, including the execution timing of each test. First, a case in which an executable glitch margin check is executed will be explained, and then a case in which an R/W test is executed will be explained.

[32-3a-1. Glitch margin check]
FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external RAM (05TKK0020) inspection process (glitch margin check) in the boot program.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first sets various registers in the test register of the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 06TKS0010). The contents of the register to be set are as explained in FIG. 471. Note that a register setting instruction may be sent to the VDP (04TKK0060), and the VDP (04TKK0060) or the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) may set the test register.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to execute an inspection (step 06TKS0020). At this time, the CPU (04TKK0011) may issue a test execution instruction by setting "1b" in the test register TEST_GO, or the VDP (04TKK0060), which has received the test execution instruction, may set the test register TEST_GO to "1b". may be set to "1b".

Finally, when the test is completed, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the test result from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) (step 06TKS0030). If an inspection device is connected to the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) of the peripheral control board 1510, the received inspection results are displayed on the inspection device.

[32-3a-2. R/W test]
FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing the procedure for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) (R/W test) in the peripheral control program.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes an inspection program for executing an R/W test (step 06TKS0110). In the R/W test, three types of tests can be executed depending on the value to be written. The value written in R/W test 1 (“0x55aa55aa”) and the value written in R/W test 2 (“0xaa55aa55”) are values obtained by inverting the bits of one value when the other value is expressed in binary notation. Therefore, by executing both tests, values of "0" and "1" can be written in all areas, and inspection accuracy can be improved. R/W test 3 is a test that writes a 2-byte random value, and the accuracy is improved compared to executing only one of R/W test 1 and R/W test 2. The inspection can be completed in half the time compared to the case where both tests of Test 2 are executed.

Finally, when the test is completed, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the test result from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) (step 06TKS0120). If an inspection device is connected to the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) of the peripheral control board 1510, the received inspection result is displayed on the inspection device, as in the case of glitch margin check. Note that the process at step 06TKS0120 is similar to step 06TKS0030 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 472.

Although the execution of the test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) at power-on has been described above, the R/W test and glitch margin check may be executed at the end of the power-on processing. Even if there is a defect in a part of the storage area of the external RAM (05TKK0020), the power-on process can be continued by writing data to another area, so it is possible to perform the inspection at the end. Further, if a fatal failure has occurred in the external RAM (05TKK0020), the power-on process cannot be completed without inspection, and the subsequent process (startup of the game machine) is canceled. By performing the inspection at the end of the power-on process, it is possible to discover defects before the start of the game, thereby reducing the possibility that a failure will occur in the game machine during the game.

[32-3b. Inspection after completion of power-on processing]
Next, a case will be described in which the external RAM (05TKK0020) is tested after the power is turned on. The inspection process shown in FIGS. 472 and 473 is called from the power-on process and completes the inspection before starting the game. Here, a process for executing an inspection after the power is turned on and after the initialization of various devices of the gaming machine is completed will be described.

FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the procedure for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020) (glitch margin check and R/W test) executed after power is turned on. This process is included in the peripheral control program, and is configured to be able to execute both the glitch margin check and the R/W test.

Furthermore, the timing of executing this process may be such that it is executed periodically by timer interrupt processing or the like, or it may be executed when a predetermined search condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the case where the test is executed in the power-on process described above, if the test is executed at the end of the power-on process, this process may be called at the end of the power-on process.

Furthermore, when executing this process, as described above, it is not necessary to execute the inspection process (FIGS. 472 and 473) when the gaming machine is powered on, that is, during the power-on process. Conversely, if the inspection process is executed in the power-on process, this process does not need to be executed (implemented). Furthermore, these inspection processes do not need to be executed every time the power is turned on; for example, they may be executed only when the inspection device is connected, or they may be executed only once a month (for example, at the beginning of the month). You can do it like this.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether the test execution conditions are satisfied (step 06TKS0210). The test execution conditions include, for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since entering the customer waiting state and when an test command has been received, when the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the test device, and when the power is turned on. There are cases where an inspection is executed at the end. Note that when a game performance is being executed, for example, when the performance symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the test is not executed and the search execution condition is not satisfied.

If the test execution condition is not satisfied (the result of step 06TKS0210 is "NO"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 further determines whether the test is being executed (step 06TKS0270). If the test is not being executed (the result of step 06TKS0270 is "NO"), this process ends. On the other hand, if the test is in progress (the result of step 06TKS0270 is "YES"), it is determined whether or not to stop the test in progress (step 06TKS0280). A case where the test execution condition is no longer satisfied during the execution of the test is, for example, a case where the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command (gaming command) for starting or continuing the game while the test is being performed.

When canceling the test in progress (result of step 06TKS0280 is "YES"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 stops the test in progress (step 06TKS0290), and then ends this process. . This case corresponds to a case where the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command (gaming command) to start or continue a game while the test is being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prioritize the continuation of the game without interrupting the game. Even if a part of the storage area is defective, if the external RAM (05TKK0020) is usable, the game can be continued without interruption, thereby preventing the game from becoming less interesting.

On the other hand, if the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 does not cancel the test being executed (the result of step 06TKS0280 is "NO"), the CPU (04TKK0011) continues the test and ends this process.

Note that whether or not to cancel the test is determined based on the type of test being performed, the cause of the test execution condition being canceled, and the like. For example, as described above, when a game command (command for performance) is received, the test is stopped and performance control is executed based on the received command. On the other hand, if a command other than a gaming command (command for performance) is received, the test may be continued. Furthermore, when continuing the examination, reception of commands may be ignored until the examination is completed, or processing based on the received command may be executed after the examination is completed.

If the test execution conditions are satisfied (the result of step 06TKS0210 is "YES"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a means (calculation means) for performing the test (step 06TKS0220). If the means for executing the test is the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 (the result of step 06TKS0220 is "CPU"), the program corresponding to the designated test is executed (step 06TKS0230). The designation of the test may correspond to a received test command, or may be specified based on a predefined test execution list, for example. This corresponds to the case of executing the R/W test described above.

On the other hand, if the means for executing the test is VDP (04TKK0060) (the result of step 06TKS0220 is "VDP"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the VDP (04TKK0060) so as to correspond to the specified test. 04TKK0060)), various registers are set in the test register (Step 06TKS0240). Note that the process of step 06TKS0240 is the same as the process of step 06TKS0010 in FIG. 472, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, the designation of the test is the same as when the test is executed by the test program.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to execute an inspection (step 06TKS0250). Note that the process of step 06TKS0250 is the same as the process of step 06TKS0020 in FIG. 472, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, when the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 completes the execution of the test, it outputs the test result from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) (step 06TKS0030). The output of the test results is executed in the same process as step 06TKS0030 in FIG. 472.

Note that even if the test result of the external RAM (05TKK0020) indicates an abnormality, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 does not refuse (suppress) acceptance of gaming commands from the main control board 1310. It executes processing based on the received gaming command and continues to control various production devices. This allows the game to continue even if there is a defect (abnormality) in a part of the external RAM (05TKK0020), and the external RAM (05TKK0020) is used for performance control and does not add gaming value. This is because since it is not used for control related to the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to interruption of the game. Note that if the inspection is being executed based on the inspection command sent from the inspection device, the game is not being continued, so the operation (use) of the gaming machine may be stopped.

[32-3c. Modified example of inspection after completion of power-on processing]
The case where the test is executed after the power-on processing is completed has been described above. If a test such as an R/W test that writes a predetermined value to the entire storage area of the external RAM (05TKK0020) is executed during the game, the data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be destroyed. Therefore, even if a production command is received after the start of the test, it is no longer possible to perform normal production control.

Therefore, when the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) is started, reception of production commands may be stopped. For example, if the test execution conditions are satisfied (the result of step 06TKS0210 is "YES"), reception of production commands is stopped. After the start of the test, the test result is notified to the outside of the peripheral control board 1510 via the communication port while executing the corresponding test every time a test command is received, and no production commands are accepted during this period.

Furthermore, after the inspection is completed, since the data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020) is destroyed, the power to the gaming machine is turned on again and the gaming machine is restarted before playing is resumed.

Further, the test command may not be accepted (not received) after the game machine is powered on again and the game is started, that is, while the game is being played. That is, the external RAM (05TKK0020) may be inspected only after the power is turned on and before the game starts. In other words, the test is executed when the first command received by the peripheral control board 1510 after the power is turned on is a test command, or when the test command is included in the command received before receiving the command indicating the start of the game. . With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game due to a test being performed during the game.

In addition, if the reception of production commands is stopped after the inspection has started, the production of the game will not be started unless conditions such as powering on the gaming machine again or initializing the peripheral control board 1510 are satisfied. It may also be possible to disable it (without canceling the suspension of reception of production commands). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a performance from being performed based on performance data that has been destroyed due to execution of an inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020).

In addition to specific tests such as R/W test and glitch margin check, the tests performed on the peripheral control board 1510 include tests that do not destroy data stored in temporary storage means such as external RAM (05TKK0020). Also included is a test that can maintain data, that is, a test that allows the game to be restarted after the test is executed (third test means). Such inspections include, for example, a display check of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and a connection check of the production data ROM (05TKK0070).

If the data stored in the temporary storage means such as the external RAM (05TKK0020) is not destroyed even if the test is executed, the test may be made possible after the start of the game. Further, regarding a test that allows the game to be restarted after the test is completed even if the test is performed after the game has started, it may be possible to start the game after the test ends even if a condition such as turning on the power of the gaming machine is not satisfied. That is, depending on the type of test, conditions such as whether or not the test can be executed after the start of the game and whether or not the game can be started after the test has been completed may be set. With this configuration, predetermined inspections can be performed during the game, thereby allowing the gaming machine to operate stably while reducing the time for stopping the gaming machine for inspection.

[32-3d. others]
If the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off while the external RAM (05TKK0020) is being tested, the test is interrupted. At this time, even if the power is turned on again, the interrupted test will not be restarted and will be stopped as is. This is because managing the progress of the test complicates control, and if necessary, the test can be executed from the beginning.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the execution of the glitch margin check and R/W test is completed in a short time, but the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) takes a long time as the storage capacity increases. Therefore, it is conceivable to divide the test of the external RAM (05TKK0020) into regions and storage elements (memory devices), and to perform the test for each divided region as needed. At this time, when testing all areas, it is possible to manage the progress of the testing by managing the areas where testing has been completed. In a gaming machine where the progress of inspection is managed in this way, if the gaming machine's power is turned off and then turned on again, or in the case of a hot start, the inspection before the power outage will continue to be performed. . On the other hand, in the case of a cold start, the progress status of the test is not maintained, so the test execution is immediately stopped. With this configuration, even when performing a long-term test, it is possible to continue the test when the power is turned on again.

[33. Detection of fraudulent winnings in gaming machines that can generate multiple types of wins]
[33-1. Game Overview]
In the gaming machine described so far, when a special lottery is won, a special gaming state is generated in which the big prize opening is opened for a predetermined period of time. In the special game state, after the grand prize opening is in an open state that can accept game balls, if a predetermined condition is met, the game ball is closed for a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds). The players were given gaming value. This predetermined condition is such as when a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described below, in a special gaming state that occurs after a special lottery win, a win occurs in which the grand prize opening is opened to accept game balls for one round. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, at least two types of such wins (special gaming states) occur based on the results of the special lottery. FIG. 475 is a diagram illustrating the types of hits of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The first win is set so that the probability of winning the special lottery after the end of the special game state (first special game state) is high, and is controlled so that the first win is likely to occur continuously. For example, the probability of winning the first lottery is set to be high until the special lottery is executed 20 times.

In addition, the number of consecutive wins that can be won in the first win is set in advance, and if the first win is won four times in a row, the probability of winning next time after the special game state ends is set to return to the normal probability. . Therefore, the number of consecutive winnings of the first prize is stored in the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, if the player does not win the special lottery a predetermined number of consecutive times after winning the first prize, it is not considered as a consecutive winning, and the number of consecutive winnings of the first prize is cleared. Furthermore, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first winning, it may not be considered as consecutive winning.

On the other hand, after the second winning special game state (second special game state) ends, the winning probability of the special lottery is set to the normal winning probability. Further, although the second winnings are basically single wins and do not occur consecutively, the probability of winning the second winnings may be set to be high by lottery or the like. Note that for the second win, there is no need to store the number of consecutive wins.

In addition, in the first win, although the amount of game value given (number of prize balls) in one special game state is not large, the special game state can occur consecutively, so as a result, the number of game values awarded is more than in the second win. A gaming value (prize ball) will be awarded. In the example shown in FIG. 475, if the first winning is won four times in a row, the prize ball will be the prize corresponding to 2×4=8 balls, while in the second winning, the prize will be the prize corresponding to the winning ball of 6 balls. It becomes a ball. Note that the number of fraudulent prize winnings determined and the number of consecutive winnings shown in FIG. 475 are merely examples, and are not limited to these values.

Further, in either case of the first winning or the second winning, if game balls enter the grand prize opening in excess of the predetermined number of balls that can be entered, it is determined that the winning is fraudulent. Since the opening time of one big winning opening is short for the first winning, the total number of winnings is determined based on the total number of winnings when the first winning occurs four times (maximum) in a row. On the other hand, the second win is determined by the total number of prizes won in one win. The procedure for determining whether each winning is fraudulent will be described later.

In addition, when winning the first win, the probability of winning the first win is set so that there is a high possibility that the first win will occur consecutively, but even if the probability of winning the first win is high, the probability of winning the second win will be higher. The possibility of winning is not excluded. After winning the first win, if you win the second win before the upper limit number of times (4 times) of the first win occurs, even if the special gaming state due to the second win ends, the first win will still be held. The probability of winning is not high.

Further, even if the game ball enters either the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, it is possible to win both the first winning and the second winning. Note that the probability of winning each hit may be varied depending on the starting hole into which the game ball enters.

In addition, the third hit may be a hit in which the opening of the big winning opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (rounds) like in the conventional jackpot, or the second winning can be generated by opening the big winning opening like in the conventional jackpot. The opening may be repeated a predetermined number of times (rounds).

Further, both the first win and the second win may be a plurality of rounds of jackpots. At this time, the number of rounds is set smaller for the first win than for the second win. This makes it possible to improve the system for determining fraudulent prize winnings by grouping together a plurality of wins in a small number of rounds.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the winning probability to a high probability after the first win. For example, there may be a case where the probability of winning the first prize is originally set higher than the probability of winning the second prize, and it is easy to win the first prize consecutively. Furthermore, even if the probability of winning after the first win is normal, the probability of winning per unit time may be increased by creating a time saving state in which the variation time of the special symbols is shortened. At this time, the number of fluctuations to be considered as consecutive winnings may be set to be larger than normal.

Further, the first win and the second win may open and close the same big winning hole, or may open and close separate big winning holes.

[33-2. Hit judgment]
Next, the lottery method (win determination method) of the special lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. The lottery method for the special lottery is similar to the conventional method, in which random numbers within a predetermined range are generated, and if the value of the generated random number matches a preset winning value, it is determined that the lottery is a win. Note that the winning value may be set as a range, and in this case, if the generated random number value is included in the winning range, it is determined that the winning value is a winning value.

FIG. 476 is a diagram illustrating the random numbers for determining a win in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in which (A) is pattern 1 and (B) is pattern 2.

In pattern 1 shown in (A), corresponding ranges are set for each of miss, first hit, and second hit. Then, the lottery result corresponds to the range that includes the value of the generated random number for hit determination. This makes it possible to specify even the type of winning with a single random number, and it is possible to simplify the processing and data related to determination.

In pattern 1 shown in (B), there are two stages of lottery. First, a random number for determining a win is generated, and a win or a loss is determined. Furthermore, when it is determined that the game has won, a random number for the type of win is generated and the type of win is determined. By making the step-by-step determination in this way, it becomes possible to set the winning type (type of winning) in detail. Furthermore, compared to pattern (A), it is possible to separate the hit determination and the hit type determination and set the ranges for each separately, so data management can be facilitated.

Incidentally, if the first win and the second win are the same regardless of the starting hole where the game ball won, the win determination is executed by the common process including the hit determination value. On the other hand, if the winning probabilities of the first win and the second win are different for each starting opening in which a game ball wins, a winning determination value may be defined for each starting opening.

[33-3. Determination of fraudulent prize winnings]
[33-3a. overview]
When you win a special lottery and enter the special gaming state, the number of game balls that can be accepted while the grand prize opening is open is determined in advance, and if the number of winning game balls reaches the predetermined number. If it exceeds the limit, the grand prize opening will shift to a closed state. At this time, since there is a time lag between when the predetermined number is reached and when the grand prize opening shifts to the closed state, it is allowed to exceed a certain number of winning game balls, but the number of winning game balls greatly exceeds the predetermined number. If the amount exceeds the above amount, it will be determined that the prize has been won fraudulently.

However, in the first win in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the game value (prize ball) is acquired by continuously opening the big prize opening in a relatively short period of time. If fraudulent winnings are determined, the accuracy of detecting fraud may decrease.

Therefore, in the first winnings that occur consecutively, fraudulent winnings are determined based on the total number of winnings until the consecutive winnings end. For example, the threshold value for fraud determination is calculated by multiplying the number of consecutive occurrences of the first hit by the number of possible balls entered for one first hit. Then, the threshold value calculated when the consecutive winnings are completed is compared with the number of winnings counted in the series of consecutive jackpots, and fraudulent winnings are determined. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the number of consecutive winnings in the first win reaches the upper limit (four times), the total number of winnings is compared with the fraud determination value to determine whether the winning is fraudulent.

In addition, in the case of the second win, as in the conventional case, if a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the grand prize opening, it is determined that the prize is fraudulently won.

[33-3b. Fraudulent act detection processing]
Next, a process for determining fraudulent winnings will be explained. The determination of fraudulent winning is executed in the fraudulent act detection process (step 01TKS0060 in FIG. 354) of the game-enabled process (FIG. 354) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329). The fraud detection process will be explained below.

FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud detection processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The fraud detection process detects fraudulent winnings to the big prize opening or the starting prize opening, or detects fraudulent magnetism.

To explain specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first executes a big winning opening fraud detection process (step 07TKS0010). In the big winning opening fraud detection process, fraudulent winnings to the big winning opening are detected. Details of the big winning opening fraud detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 478.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes magnetic fraud detection processing (step 07TKS0020). In the magnetic fraud detection process, when a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet is input to the main control MPU 1311, a number corresponding to the game stop due to magnetic detection is set as the game stop factor number. and stop playing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal electric accessory fraud detection processing (step 07TKS0030). In the ordinary electric accessory fraud detection process, an illegal operation of the ordinary electric accessory is detected. For example, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 even though the second starting port 2004 is not able to receive a game ball, that is, the second starting port door member 2549 is not in an open state. For example, when If fraud is detected, a fraud notification setting process is executed to store a normal electric accessory prize winning abnormal command in a command buffer, and output a signal notifying fraud to the outside (hall computer).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a hardware error detection process (step 07TKS0040). In the hardware error detection process, for example, an abnormality in a hardware random number generation circuit is detected. If an abnormality is detected, a hard error command is stored in the command buffer. In this case, since it is considered to be a hardware failure, there is no need to output a signal to the outside (hall computer) to notify the fraud since it is distinguished from fraud. Further, a signal different from the signal output when fraudulent activity is detected may be output to the outside.

[33-3c. Big winning opening fraud detection process]
Next, the big winning opening fraud detection process will be explained. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big winning opening fraud detection process in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the player has won the special lottery and the gaming state has shifted to the winning state (special gaming state) (Step 07TKS0110). This is because the gaming state needs to be in a winning state (special gaming state) in order for the game ball to be able to win by opening the big prize opening. If it is not a winning state (the result of step 07TKS0110 is "No"), the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening, so the process is ended without checking for unauthorized winning. In addition, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening even though the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening unless it is in a winning state, it is clearly an illegal winning, so the ball cannot enter the grand prize opening. It is also possible to perform only a check and, if a ball is detected, to process it as an illegal prize winning.

If the gaming state is a winning state (the result of step 07TKS0110 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines the type of winning (step 07TKS0120). As described above, there are two types of winnings in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the method for determining fraudulent winnings differs depending on the type of winning, so settings necessary for each determination are made.

If the type of win is the first win (the result of step 07TKS0120 is "first win"), the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of consecutive wins of the first win (step 07TKS0130). As mentioned above, the first hit is a series of hits with relatively few prize balls, and the determination of fraudulent winning is not based on one hit, but on the number of consecutive first hits up to a predetermined upper limit. When a winning occurs (winning a special lottery), fraud is detected by comparing the total number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening with a fraud judgment value.

After acquiring the number of consecutive first winnings, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of consecutive first winnings has reached the upper limit (step 07TKS0140). If the number of consecutive winnings of the first prize has not reached the upper limit (the result of step 07TKS0140 is "No"), this process ends. In addition, even if the number of consecutive winnings in the first win has not reached the upper limit, a fraud judgment value corresponding to the number of consecutive winnings at the time of determination is defined or calculated, and compared with the total number of winnings, the big winning opening is determined. Fraud detection may also be performed.

The main control MPU 1311 sets the fraud determination condition for the first winning when the number of consecutive winnings of the first winning reaches the upper limit (the result of step 07TKS0140 is "Yes") (step 07TKS0150). The conditions for determining that the first win is fraudulent are that the total number of wins entered into the big winning slot after the first consecutive winnings have started is greater than a predetermined fraud determination value; Setting the fraud determination conditions means setting the first determination value as the fraud determination value.

In addition, if the number of consecutive first wins does not reach the upper limit and the fraud of the big winning opening is detected, for example, if the first winning continues for more than half of the upper limit, fraud of the big winning opening is detected. Perform detection. At this time, the fraud determination value may be set to the same value (first determination value) as in the case where the first number of consecutive wins is the upper limit, or may be changed according to the number of consecutive wins. By using a common fraud determination value, the area for storing determination values can be reduced, and the procedure for setting values can be omitted, so that processing can be simplified. On the other hand, by setting the fraud determination value in accordance with the number of consecutive wins, it becomes possible to perform more accurate determination.

On the other hand, if the type of win is the second win (the result of step 07TKS0120 is "second win"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the second win fraud determination condition (step 07TKS0160). The second win is determined based on the total number of prizes entered into the big prize opening in one winning. The condition for determining that the second winning is fraudulent is that the total number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole after the start of the special gaming state due to the second winning is greater than a predetermined fraud determination value, and it is determined that the second winning is fraudulent. The second judgment value will be set to the value. Note that the process may be shared with the first win by setting the upper limit of the number of consecutive wins for the second win to 1.

When the determination value corresponding to the type of win is set as the fraud determination value, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the total number of winnings to the big winning opening (step 07TKS0170). The total number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening is counted by other processing, for example, the grand prize opening opening process. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the counter that stores the total number of winnings is commonly used for the first winning and the second winning. As a result, if a second win occurs while the first win continues, the total number of wins in the first win is cleared, and the initialization process can be omitted, simplifying the process. be able to. Furthermore, by using a common counter, it is possible to standardize the process of obtaining the total number of winnings corresponding to the winnings. Note that the counter that stores the total number of winnings may be different for the first win and the second win.

When the main control MPU 1311 acquires the total number of winnings to the big winning opening, it compares the total number of winnings with the determination value set in the process of step 07TKS0150 or step 07TKS0160 (step 07TKS0170). If the total number of winnings is greater than the determination value (the result of step 07TKS0180 is "No"), it is not an illegal winning, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the total number of winnings is less than or equal to the determination value (the result of step 07TKS0180 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines that the winning is fraudulent, and issues a fraudulent winning command indicating the fraudulent winning (step 07TKS0190). In addition, in the process of step 07TKS0190, the fraudulent winning command is used as a common command, but the command may be differentiated between the first winning fraudulent winning and the second winning fraudulent winning. This makes it possible to distinguish the form of fraudulent notification according to the type of winning, and it is possible to specify in more detail the situation in which the fraudulent act was committed.

Further, a fraud notification setting process for reporting fraudulent winnings is executed (step 07TKS0200). The fraud notification setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 479.

When the execution of the fraud notification setting process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the total number of wins in the big winning slot and the number of consecutive first wins (step 07TKS0210), and ends this process. Note that the values of the total number of prizes entered into the big prize opening and the number of first consecutive wins may be initialized at the timing of starting the special game state when winning the special lottery. In this case, it is determined whether or not the first win is a consecutive win, and if it is not a consecutive win, the process is initialized. In the case of a second win, it may be initialized every time the second win is won. In addition, the timing to initialize the values of the total number of wins into the big winning opening and the number of consecutive wins of the first win may be at the time of winning the second win, or at the end of the special gaming state due to the second win. Good too. With this configuration, it is not necessary to initialize the number of consecutive wins by determining whether or not the first consecutive winnings are being won at the time of winning the first winning, and the processing can be simplified.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the initial value of the counter for the total number of winnings is set to 0, and the counter is incremented every time a game ball wins, and it is determined whether or not the winning is fraudulent based on whether or not the addition result is greater than or equal to the fraud determination value. However, the initial value of the counter may be initially set as a fraud judgment value, and the value is subtracted every time a game ball wins, and when it reaches 0 (the calculation result is negative), it may be determined that it is fraud.

[33-3d. Unauthorized notification setting process]
Next, the unauthorized notification setting process will be explained. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud notification setting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In addition, the fraud notification setting process can be used not only for the big prize opening fraud detection process, but also when other fraud is detected. It is also executed in case.

The main control MPU 1311 first stores a command indicating that fraud has been detected, which was issued when calling the fraud notification setting process, from a predetermined register (HL register) into the transmission buffer (Step 07TKS0310). By storing the command to be sent in a predetermined register in the process of calling the unauthorized notification setting process, it becomes a general-purpose process. Then, based on the transmitted command, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, lights up or flashes a decorative lamp on the game board or frame, outputs audio, sound effects, and warning sounds, etc. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a signal indicating fraud to the outside (the hall computer) via the external terminal board 784 (Step 07TKS0310). The gaming machine of this embodiment outputs a common signal (security signal) indicating that fraud has been detected. This makes it possible to standardize the process as the unauthorized notification setting process, and to simplify control. Note that commands may be set and signals output in each process for detecting fraud, without using the generalized fraud notification setting process. With this configuration, it becomes possible to transmit commands and output signals depending on the type of fraud.

The signal indicating fraud (external output signal) may be output only for a predetermined period after it is determined to be fraud, or may continue to be output until the RAM clear switch is operated. Further, if the game is configured to stop when fraud is detected, the output may be continued until the power of the gaming machine is turned on again.

Above, the process for detecting illegal winnings to the big winning opening has been explained. In addition, in the flowchart of the big winning opening fraud detection process shown in FIG. 478, fraudulent winnings were determined based on the total number of wins to the big winning opening, but the maximum possible winnings were determined based on the total number of winnings to the big winning opening. The number of winnings in excess of the number of winnings (the upper limit of the number of winnings) may be counted, and fraudulent winnings may be determined based on the excess number of winnings.

[33-4. Timing chart]
[33-4a. 1st winning fraudulent prize determination]
Next, a case in which an illegal winning to the big winning opening is detected will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the first winning is won in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 480, if the first win occurs four times (upper limit) in a row and 10 or more game balls enter the game, it is determined that the winning is illegal. Please note that the numerical information and time values shown in the timing chart are just examples, and are not limited to these values. For example, the number of consecutive first wins and the value that determines fraudulent winnings (judgment value) may be different. It may be a value.

First, at time t11, the player wins the first prize of the first time, the grand prize opening is opened for a predetermined period, and it becomes possible to win the game ball. Then, at time t12 and time t13, the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole is detected by the big winning hole switch (SW). Furthermore, at time t14, the second first win occurs, and similarly, the third first win occurs at time t15, and the fourth first win occurs at time t16. In the special game state due to each first win, a game ball enters the big prize opening, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each winning (game value is given) ).

At time t17, the total number of winnings since the start of consecutive winnings reaches the fraud determination value (=10), and output of the security signal (external output signal) is started. At this time, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and fraud notification is performed by displaying a warning on the effect display device 1600, outputting a warning sound from the speaker, lighting a lamp, etc. If it is determined that it is fraudulent, the prize ball command will not be transmitted and the prize ball will not be paid out.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the second prize will be won before the number of consecutive wins of the first prize reaches the upper limit. FIG. 481 is a timing chart showing a case where the second winning is won before the number of consecutive winnings of the first winning reaches the upper limit in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

After winning the first prize at time t21, if you win the second prize even though the probability of winning the first prize is high (time t22), the number of consecutive wins and the total number of prizes won for the first prize are cleared. be done. Further, the special game state due to the second winning continues until time t23. At this time, the area for storing the cleared total number of winnings is used for counting based on the second winning, and it is also determined whether or not there is an illegal winning with respect to the second winning. In this way, storage capacity can be reduced by making the area for storing the total number of winnings common regardless of the type of winnings. Note that a timing chart regarding the determination of fraudulent winnings for the second win will be described later with reference to FIG. 482.

When the first prize is won at time t24, a special game state is started with the number of consecutive wins cleared. Specifically, the number of consecutive wins was 1 at time t22, but the number of consecutive wins for the first win is cleared by winning the second win. Thereafter, at time t25, the player wins the first prize for the second consecutive winning number, and similarly, at time t26, the player wins the first prize for the third time, and at time t27, the first prize wins for the fourth time.

At time t28, the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit of 4, and the total number of wins since the start of the consecutive wins reaches the fraud determination value (=10). At this time, as described at time t17 in FIG. 480, the unauthorized notification is performed by starting output of the security signal (external output signal) and transmitting the unauthorized notification command to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the opening time of the big prize opening is short and consecutive winnings that can be won occur, such as the first winning, a series of consecutive winnings occur. Unauthorized winnings will be determined based on the total number of winnings until the end of the game. If the opening time of the grand prize opening is short, it is impossible to win much more than the specified number of prizes, but if the number of prizes exceeded is small (for example, about 1) and determined to be fraudulent, the game will be smoother. There is a risk that the provision of services may be hindered. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by collectively determining fraudulent winnings based on a series of consecutive winnings, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining fraudulent winnings, and it is possible to prevent games from being frequently stopped. can.

[33-4b. 2nd winning fraudulent prize determination]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the second prize is won, it is determined whether the prize has been won illegally. As mentioned above, fraud is determined based on the total number of winnings during consecutive winnings in the first winning, but fraud is determined in the second winning based on the total number of winnings in one winning.

FIG. 482 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the second winning is won in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As mentioned above, the second winning illegally is determined for each winning.

At time t31, if the second prize is won, the big prize opening is released and it becomes possible to enter the game ball. After that, a game ball enters the big prize opening (time t32), and the game continues. In this example, the number of balls that can be entered (the upper limit of the total number of winnings) is 6, and the opening of the grand prize opening (second win) ends when 6 game balls enter (time t33).

Even after the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches the number that can be entered, a time lag occurs until the grand prize opening is actually closed. Therefore, even if the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening exceeds the number of balls that can be entered, up to a predetermined number is allowed. Taking the second win of the gaming machine of this embodiment as an example, as shown in FIG. 475. While the number of balls that can be entered is set to six, seven or eight balls are allowed, and nine balls are determined to be illegal.

At time t34, when the ninth ball that enters the fraud judgment value is detected by the big prize opening SW, output of a security signal (external output signal) is started, and a fraud notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Sending this information will result in fraudulent notification.

[33-5. Response in case of power outage]
In the gaming machine described above, the counter that stores the total number of wins and the number of consecutive first wins is an area of the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1312 that retains its contents in the event of a power outage (backup possible area). will be placed in Therefore, even if the power is cut off, the counter value is maintained, but if a predetermined condition is met, the counter value is initialized regardless of the counter value. That is, the value of the counter is cleared to 0 or set to an initial value (fraud determination value). The predetermined conditions include, for example, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, when an error that cannot be returned to the game (RAM error, etc.) occurs, when a setting change is executed, and when the game cannot be continued. be.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the power to the gaming machine is cut off, the value of the counter for determining fraudulent winnings is retained, so that the determination of fraudulent winnings cannot be continued. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the counter from being initialized due to an unauthorized power outage, thereby preventing detection of fraudulent acts from being avoided.

[33-6. Modification example (simultaneous variation of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2)]
[33-6a. Application to gaming machines that enable simultaneous variation of multiple types of special symbols]
In the above-mentioned example, the game is based on the premise that only one of the special symbols 1 and 2 is displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters both the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004. , and is configured so that the symbol variation of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the winning starting hole is executed. On the other hand, in the example shown below, when game balls land in both the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the symbol changes of each special symbol (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) are executed at the same time. It is possible.

When the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, both of the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the function display unit 1400. Although the effect display device 1600 can display any effect pattern (decorative pattern), the main effect pattern is displayed so as to be easily recognized. For example, in addition to the first to third symbols that are performance symbols, a fourth symbol may be displayed in an inconspicuous position on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the main special design is the first to third symbols. and the fourth symbol are displayed, and for the other special symbol, only the fourth symbol is displayed.

Also, if special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are fluctuating at the same time and a hit occurs in one symbol, the other symbol will be forced to stop as a miss or the fluctuating display of the symbols will be interrupted. After the special game state corresponding to the winning special symbol ends, the fluctuating display of the symbols is restarted, so that winnings do not occur at the same time.

An example will be described in which the game that generates the first and second wins described above is implemented with a gaming machine that allows two types of special symbols to fluctuate simultaneously. For example, if a first hit occurs due to the symbol variation of special symbol 1 while simultaneous variation is being executed, the symbol variation of special symbol 2 is interrupted. Then, when the special game state due to the first winning ends, the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is restarted. At this time, even if the first winning occurs due to the symbol variation of the special symbol 2, the continuous winning of the first winning is continued. In this way, it is determined whether the winning streak continues or not, depending on the type of winning that occurs, regardless of the starting slot in which the game ball wins.

Also, if a hit occurs due to the symbol fluctuation of one special symbol while special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are fluctuating simultaneously, instead of stopping or interrupting the symbol fluctuation of the other as described above, The variation time may be extended. Furthermore, the behavior of the other symbol variation may be changed depending on whether the hit that occurred is the first hit or the second hit. Further, the variation time of each special symbol may be changed depending on the gaming state.

[33-6b. Changing the behavior of symbol fluctuations based on the gaming state and the results of fluctuation display]
Here, in addition to making the symbols fluctuate according to the gaming state, if the fluctuating display of one special symbol starts or stops while the other special symbol is fluctuating, the result of the fluctuating display (hit/miss) An example of changing the behavior of the other symbol variation will be explained.

The starting hole for starting the variable display of the special symbol 1 is placed in the left side of the game area, and the starting hole for starting the variable display of the special symbol 2 is placed in the right side of the game area. In the normal game state, the special symbol 1 executes a symbol variation in a normal variation time, while the special symbol 2 executes a symbol variation in a special variation time (for example, a long variation time of several minutes or more). In such a gaming machine, in a normal gaming state, unless the player aims at the left side of the gaming area, the possibility of winning is extremely low.

When a win occurs as a result of the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 and the game state changes, the variation time of the special symbol 2 is changed to the normal variation time. This allows the player to aim at the area on the right side of the gaming area. At this time, an opening/closing member (for example, the second starting opening door member 2549) is provided so that the winning frequency of the starting opening (second starting opening 2004) that starts the variable display of the special symbol 2 is increased, and this opening/closing member is opened. By doing so, the player may be encouraged to aim at the starting opening that starts the variable display of the special symbol 2.

Also, it is possible to continue aiming at the left area even after a hit occurs due to the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 1, but in this case, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 can be changed to a special fluctuation time ( For example, the player may be made to aim at the area on the left side by setting a long fluctuation time of several minutes or more.

Furthermore, when a win occurs due to the symbol variation of special symbol 1, if the gaming state is changed to set the winning probability of the first win to be high, the first win will continue until the second win occurs. Hits are more likely to occur. With this configuration, while the first winnings are being won consecutively, fraudulent winnings are determined based on the total number of winnings until the number of consecutive winnings reaches the upper limit. As a result, if the number of possible wins per first win is small, it is possible to make a more accurate determination than determining fraud for each win.

When the number of consecutive winnings of the first winning reaches the upper limit value, or when winning the second winning, the normal gaming state is restored and the player starts aiming at the right side area of the gaming area again. In addition, the second win includes a win that returns to the normal gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and a win that clears the number of consecutive wins of the first win and continues the gaming state that sets the probability of winning the first win high. You may also do so. In addition, when the special gaming state due to the second winning ends or when the number of consecutive winnings of the first winning reaches the upper limit, it is possible to decide whether to restart the gaming state that sets the winning probability of the first winning to be high. A lottery to be determined may be executed, and if the player wins, the game may be continued in a gaming state in which the first winning probability is set high.

Furthermore, a game state may be generated in which the probability of winning the first win is set high when the second win is won. At this time, the probability of winning the first prize may be set high only when the second prize is won.

Further, the winning probability of the first winning may be always constant at a high probability, and winning may be possible only by symbol variation due to the special symbol 2. In the normal game state, since the variation time of the special symbol 2 is a special variation time, it is difficult to win the first win. Therefore, first, a game is played with the aim of winning the second prize using the special symbol 1, and the second prize is won by changing the symbol of the special symbol 1. As a result, when the special symbol 2 reaches the normal variation time, the player aims at the second starting hole 2004 in order to start the symbol variation of the special symbol 2, and it becomes possible to generate the first win. Thereafter, the gaming value (prize ball) given by consecutive winnings of the first winning is increased until a second winning occurs due to the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 or the number of winnings of the first winning reaches a predetermined number of times. I can do it.

In this way, by making it possible to win the first win by changing the special symbol 2 only if you win the second win by changing the symbol of special symbol 1, consecutive wins of the first win will result in winning the second win. It will start after that. In addition, the number of consecutive winnings for the first winning is initialized at the timing when the first winning occurs for the first time due to the symbol change of special symbol 2 after winning the second winning. Judgment control is also started at this timing. In this way, by clarifying the execution conditions for the control that determines fraudulent winnings (when the first hit occurs due to the symbol variation of special symbol 2 after the second hit occurs due to the symbol variation of special symbol 1), It is possible to prevent illegal winning determination control from being executed at unnecessary timing, and to suppress an increase in the processing load of game control and complication of game control.

As mentioned above, even if the game is diverse in that its behavior changes depending on the gaming status and the relationship between special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, fraudulent winnings can be prevented depending on the gaming status and the type of winnings. It becomes possible to switch the conditions for determination. In order to enable appropriate detection of fraudulent winnings while providing a wide variety of games, it is possible to prevent continuation of gaming by detecting excessive fraud, or to cause damage by overlooking fraudulent activities. can be restrained from doing so.

In addition, since the number of balls that can be entered per time is small, the first win is considered a small win with a short opening time of the big winning opening, and the second winning is a jackpot with a long opening time of the big winning opening. A determination method may also be applied.

[34. How to update the continuous time reduction count]
[34-1. Game Overview]
Here, a gaming machine that has an upper limit on the number of times that a time-saving state can occur consecutively will be described. For example, when a jackpot is won consecutively as a result of a special lottery, the time-saving state is prevented from occurring consecutively for more than a predetermined number of times after the special game state due to the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a restriction on the number of continuous time reductions is applied to the so-called type 1 + type 2 type gaming machine. In this game machine, a jackpot occurs when three types of decorative symbols line up like a type 1 type game machine, and a small hit occurs in a specific area (V area) like a type 2 type game machine. ), and when the game ball passes through the specific area, a jackpot is generated.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with two types of starting ports (a first starting port 2002 and a second starting port 2004). The first starting opening 2002 is arranged in the left area of the gaming area, and it is possible to win by hitting left-handed. On the other hand, the second starting opening 2004 is arranged in the right area of the gaming area, and it is possible to win by hitting the player to the right.

With the special symbol 1 that is displayed variably upon winning the first starting opening 2002, it is possible to win only in the jackpot. On the other hand, with the special symbol 2 that is variably displayed by winning the second starting opening 2004, it is possible to win either a small hit or a jackpot. When a small hit or a jackpot is won, a special game state is generated in which a big prize opening is opened for a predetermined time. In the special gaming state, the time for opening the big winning hole and the number of times (number of rounds) to open the big winning hole are set depending on the type of win, and the person who wins the jackpot wins more than the person who wins the small win. Also, the gaming value given to players has become higher. In addition, there are multiple types of jackpots, and the opening time of the jackpot and the number of rounds vary depending on the type. Alternatively, two types of big winning openings may be arranged, and one big winning opening may be operated when a jackpot is won, and the other big winning opening may be operated when a small winning is won.

To explain the flow of the game of the gaming machine of this embodiment, first, a left-handed player aims at the first starting opening 2002 and wins a jackpot due to symbol variation of the special symbol 1 to generate a special gaming state. When the special game state ends and shifts to the time saving state, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second starting opening 2004. At this time, the player can start the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 by aiming at the second starting hole 2004 with a right hand.

With the symbol variation of special symbol 2, as mentioned above, it is possible to win a small hit. When a small hit is won, a corresponding special game state occurs, and the opening and closing of the big prize opening placed on the right side of the gaming area is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds). This allows the player to win the game ball into the grand prize opening by continuing to hit the ball to the right. A specific area (V area) is arranged inside this big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to win the jackpot. In addition, even if a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the game ball does not necessarily pass through a specific area.

When the game ball passes through a specific area and wins a jackpot, a special game state is generated due to the jackpot. The special game state that occurs at this time is the same as the special game state based on the jackpot of special symbol 1, and as long as the predetermined conditions are met, the big prize opening is kept open a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds). .

Furthermore, when winning a small hit, the game state before winning is maintained. That is, if the gaming state is a time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained, and if the gaming state is a non-time-saving state, the non-time-saving state is maintained. When the game ball passes through a specific area and wins a jackpot, after the special game state due to the jackpot ends, a time saving state is entered based on the type of the jackpot.

[34-2. How to update the continuous time saving number (1st example: Specification where time saving continues even if there is a small hit)]
Next, the procedure for updating the number of consecutive time saving cycles will be explained in chronological order. In the above-described gaming machine, when a special symbol changes to win a jackpot (or when a special lottery is won), a special gaming state occurs and then shifts to a time saving state when a predetermined condition is met. If a jackpot (special lottery) is further won while the time saving state continues, the time saving state is more likely to occur after the special game state ends up to a predetermined number of times (limit number of times, upper limit, for example 4 times). On the other hand, when the number of consecutive occurrences of the time-saving state (time-saving continuous number) reaches a predetermined number (limit number), the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the game shifts to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) after the special game state occurs. With this configuration, if the player wins the jackpot once, he or she can expect the time-saving state to occur a predetermined number of times (limit number of times), which increases the player's expectations and increases the interest in the game. can.

The continuous time saving number is updated at the timing when the time saving state starts after the end of the special game state. In this embodiment, the initial value of the continuous time saving number is set to "0" and is added at the start of the time saving state (at the time of transition). Note that an upper limit number (limit number) may be set as the initial value of the continuous time saving number, and the count may be subtracted at the time of starting the time saving state (at the time of transition).

In the above-mentioned type 1 + type 2 type gaming machine, a special gaming state occurs even when a small win occurs, and the large prize opening is opened. In addition, when winning a small hit, the game state before winning is maintained. The procedure for updating the number of consecutive time reductions in a gaming machine with such specifications will be explained in chronological order with reference to FIG. 483.

FIG. 483 is a timing chart illustrating the operation when a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won in a gaming machine designed to maintain the gaming state when a small hit is won.

First, since the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is started by hitting the left hand and aiming at the first starting opening 2002 (time t41). Thereafter, the symbol variation stops at time t42, and a stopped symbol is displayed. When the result of the symbol variation (special lottery) of the special symbol 1 is a jackpot, the condition device is activated (time t43), and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) due to the jackpot occurs. Furthermore, after the operation of the conditional device ends (after the end of the special game state), the time saving state is entered (time t44). At this time, due to the transition to the time saving state, 1 is added to the continuous time saving number, and the continuous time saving number is updated from 0 to 1.

Furthermore, by shifting to the time saving state, a game ball can be placed in the second starting hole 2004, and the player aims at the second starting hole 2004 with a right-handed hit. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004, symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is started (time t45). With the pattern variation of special pattern 2, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small hit.

In the example shown in FIG. 483, at time t46, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is stopped, and as a result of the variable display, a small hit is won. When a small hit is won, the conditional device is not activated, and the gaming state (time saving state) before the small win is maintained. In addition, since the time saving state has not been newly entered, the number of consecutive time saving states is maintained as is. Note that there may be one or more losing fluctuations between winning the jackpot and the occurrence of the small winning.

At time t47, a special game state occurs due to the small winning, the large prize opening is opened, and game balls can be won. Further, when the game ball passes through a specific area arranged inside the jackpot, winning of the jackpot is confirmed and the condition device is activated (time t48). Further, the special game state due to the winning of the small hit ends and the special game state due to the winning of the jackpot starts (the special gaming state due to the winning of the small hit is switched to the special game state due to winning the jackpot).

Then, with the end of the special game state due to the jackpot, the operation of the conditional device is ended, and a new time saving state is started (time t49). At this time, the number of continuous time savings is updated from 1 to 2 based on the new start of the time savings state.

In the gaming machine described above, when winning a small hit, the gaming state is maintained, and when winning a jackpot and starting a new time saving state, the number of continuous time saving times is updated. In addition, if the time saving state is not newly started even if a jackpot is won, the number of consecutive time saving states is initialized. Furthermore, if you win a small hit and the game ball does not pass through a specific area and you do not win the jackpot, the system will maintain the number of consecutive time reductions before winning the small hit while maintaining the gaming state. It is composed of

[34-3. How to update the number of continuous time-savings (Second example: Specification to shift to non-time-saving state when winning a small hit)]
In the gaming machine configured as described above, since the gaming state is maintained when a small win occurs, it is possible to accurately count the number of continuous time savings by updating the number of consecutive time savings when switching the gaming state. However, due to the diversification of game specifications, the conditions for switching the game state may not be limited to the end of the special game state, and the above-described procedure may not be able to accurately count the number of continuous time savings.

For example, if you win a small hit, the big prize opening will be opened and you can expect to receive a prize ball, and when you win a small hit, you will be rewarded by temporarily shifting to the non-time saving state. This prevents the gaming value from deviating from the specified range. In a gaming machine with such specifications, the number of consecutive time savers is cleared at the timing of transition to a non-time saver state, so the above-described method of updating the number of consecutive time savers cannot accurately count the number of consecutive time savers. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485, a procedure for accurately counting the number of continuous time reductions in a gaming machine having the above specifications will be explained. Note that the game enters the non-time saving state at the timing of winning a small hit, but the number of continuous time saving times is cleared after the special game state ends due to the small winning.

FIG. 484 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) when winning a small hit. It is a figure which shows the case where it does not pass.

FIG. 484 shows the behavior in chronological order from the state where the game continues in the non-time saving state. The initial value (0) is set for the number of continuations of time saving, and when the time saving state is entered, 1 is added to the number of times of continuation of time saving. On the other hand, when the state shifts to a non-time saving state, the number of consecutive time saving times is cleared and the initial value (0) is set. Since the control executed from time t51 to time t56 in FIG. 484 is the same as the control executed from time t41 to time t46 in FIG. 483, the explanation will be omitted if necessary.

As shown in FIG. 484, the variable display of the special symbol stops at time t56, and as a result of the variable display, a small hit is won. If a small win is won, the conditional device is not activated and the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state.

At time t57, a special game state (first special game state) due to a small win occurs, and the big winning hole is opened, and a game ball can be won in the big winning hole. At this time, if the game ball passes through a specific area (V area) placed inside the big winning hole, you win a jackpot, but in the example shown in FIG. 484, the game ball does not pass through the specific area and the small hit After the special game state ends, the number of time saving consecutive times is cleared (initialized), and the state shifts to the normal game state (time t58).

Next, a case will be described in which a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) arranged inside the big winning opening after winning a small hit and winning a big hit. FIG. 485 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time saving state when winning a small hit, and shows a case where a game ball passes through a specific area after winning a small hit. It is a diagram. Since the control executed from time t61 to time t67 in FIG. 485 is the same as the control executed from time t51 to time t57 in FIG. 484, the explanation will be appropriately omitted.

At time t67, a special game state occurs due to the small winning, the large prize opening is opened, and the game ball can be won. Further, when the game ball passes through a specific area arranged inside the jackpot, winning of the jackpot is confirmed and the condition device is activated (time t68). Further, the special game state due to the winning of the small hit ends, and the special game state due to the winning of the jackpot starts. At this time, since the state shifts to a non-time saving state, the number of consecutive time saving times is cleared (initialized) at the timing when the special game state due to the winning of the small winning ends.

Then, as the special game state due to the jackpot ends, the operation of the conditional device ends, and a new time saving state starts (time t69). At this time, the continuous time saving count is updated from 0 to 1 based on the fact that a new time saving state has started.

[34-4. How to update the continuous time saving number (3rd example: Specification to shift to non-time saving state when winning a small hit: improvement)]
By the way, when you win a jackpot with the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 1 and move to a time saving state, and when you win a small hit with the fluctuation of special symbol 2, you win the jackpot when the game ball passes through a specific area (V area). When a time-saving state is entered, it is natural to assume that the time-saving state has occurred continuously, even if the time-saving state is actually temporarily shifted to a non-time-saving state. In other words, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the machine temporarily shifts to a non-time-saving state through a small winning win, the game ball passes through a specific area in the special gaming state due to the small winning winning and the jackpot is won. Even if the time-saving state occurs again due to the above-mentioned actions, the time-saving state is considered to have occurred continuously.

However, if you update the number of consecutive time savers using the above procedure, the number of consecutive time savers will be initialized to transition to a non-time saver state once you win a small hit, so it may not be possible to determine that the time saver state has occurred continuously. I become unable to do so.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured such that by setting an upper limit on the number of consecutive time savers, it is easier to shift to the time saver state if the number of consecutive time savers is less than the upper limit, and the number of consecutive time savers is not as high as the intended number. If the game is initialized first, there is a risk that time-saving states will occur more often than expected, resulting in a problem that more gaming value will be awarded. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, we propose an improved method for updating the number of continuous time saving cycles.

In the improved updating method, it is determined whether or not to update the continuous time saving number at the timing when the special game state ends, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the continuous time saving number is updated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to update the continuous time saving number based on whether or not the conditional device is in operation at the end of the special game state.

If the game ball passes through a specific area while the special game state due to the small hit continues, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed and the condition device is activated. In this case, when the special gaming state due to the small hit ends, a special gaming state due to the jackpot starts (switching from the special gaming state due to the small winning to the special gaming state due to the jackpot), and after the special gaming state ends, the time saving state is entered. there is a possibility. Therefore, the update of the number of consecutive time-savers at the end of the special game state due to a small win is suspended (the value of the number of consecutive time-savers is maintained). Then, after the special game state due to the jackpot ends, the number of continuous time-savings is added (updated) or cleared (initialized) based on whether or not to shift to the time-saving state. On the other hand, since the condition device does not operate unless the game ball passes through a specific area during the continuation of the special game state due to a small win, the number of consecutive time reductions is cleared (initialized) at the end of the special game state due to a small win.

By configuring this way, if there is a possibility of re-entering the time saving state after the special gaming state ends, clearing (initialization) of the continuous time saving number is suspended, and updating of the continuous time saving number is performed when the special gaming state ends. Alternatively, by performing initialization, it is possible to set an accurate value for the number of consecutive time saving cycles. Below, we will explain in chronological order the cases where the game ball clears the number of continuous time savers without passing through a specific area, and the cases where the game ball passes through a specific area to update the number of consecutive time savers, while referring to the timing chart. I will explain along.

In addition, if the game ball does not pass through a specific area when winning a small hit, the number of time saving updates is initialized (cleared) after the special game state due to winning a small hit ends, and even if the improved update method is applied, The behavior is the same as in the timing chart shown in , and illustration thereof is omitted.

FIG. 486 is a timing chart for improving the timing of updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time saving state when a small hit is won, and shows a case where a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won. It is a diagram. The control executed from time t71 to time t75 in FIG. 486 is the same as the control executed from time t61 to time t65 in FIG. 485, so a description thereof will be omitted.

At time t76, the symbol fluctuation stops and the small hit is won, similar to the example shown in FIG. 485. Furthermore, when the time-saving state shifts to the non-time-saving state and time t77 comes, a special game state occurs due to the small winning, the big prize opening is opened, and the game ball can be won. Furthermore, while the special game state due to the small hit continues, when the game ball passes through a specific area placed inside the big winning hole, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed and the conditional device is activated (time t78 ). At this time, the special game state due to the winning of the small hit ends, and the special game state due to the winning of the jackpot starts.

In the improved method for updating the continuous time saving number, it is determined whether or not to update (maintain) the continuous time saving number at the timing when the special game state due to the winning of the small winning ends. Whether or not to update the continuous time saving number is determined based on whether or not to start the special game state due to the winning of the jackpot at the timing when the special game state due to the winning of the small hit ends. At this time, the determination may be made based on whether or not the conditional device is activated at the timing when the special game state due to the winning of the small winning ends. In the example shown in FIG. 486, a jackpot is won when the game ball passes through a specific area, and the conditional device is activated, so it is certain that the special game state will occur continuously, and the number of consecutive time-savers will not be updated. The value remains unchanged.

Then, with the end of the special game state due to the jackpot, the operation of the conditional device is ended, and a new time saving state is started (time t79). At this time, the continuous time saving number is 1 because the value was maintained at the end of the special game state due to the small win, and 1 is added based on the new time saving state starting, and it is updated to 2. Ru. In addition, if you do not move to the time saving state after the end of the special game state, for example, if the number of continuous time saving times reaches the upper limit and you move to the normal gaming state without moving to the time saving state, the number of continuous time saving states may be cleared ( initialization) and update the value of the continuous time saving count to 0.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a jackpot is not won in the special gaming state due to a small hit, the special gaming state is not continued (the conditional device is not activated), so the number of consecutive time reductions is initialized. Perform the update. On the other hand, if you win a jackpot in a special game state due to a small win, the special game state continues when the special game state due to a small win ends, and the condition device is activated, so the number of consecutive time reductions is updated (initialized) At the end of a special game state due to a jackpot (when the operation of a conditional device is completed), the number of consecutive time reductions is updated based on the game state after the end of the special game state. As a result, the number of continuous time reductions can be accurately counted as intended by the designer, so that the game value can be awarded as expected, and the above-mentioned problems can be solved.

Furthermore, in the control shown in FIGS. 484 and 485, the number of continuous time-savings is updated based on whether or not the time-saving state shifts to the non-time-saving state at the timing when the special game state ends. Therefore, if the specification is to control the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state after the end of the special gaming state due to a small hit, the game ball will pass through a specific area in the special gaming state due to a small hit, and the special gaming state will change to the special gaming state due to a jackpot. Even in the case of switching, the number of continuous time reductions was to be cleared.

On the other hand, in the improved updating method of the continuous time saving number shown in FIG. If the time saving mode is not continued, the number of consecutive time saving periods is updated based on whether or not the time saving state shifts to a non-time saving state. As a result, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the special gaming state due to a small hit and the game changes to the special gaming state due to a jackpot, the continuous time saving number is not cleared, and the continuous time saving number is reset at the end of the special gaming state due to a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special game state due to the small win ends as it is, it becomes possible to clear the continuous time saving number, and the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

In addition, in the special game state due to the small hit, when the game ball passes through a specific area and the state is switched to the special game state due to the jackpot, the small win ending is not executed. Therefore, in this case, the big winning opening opening end interval process that is executed at the end of the special gaming state due to the small hit is not executed, but the interval process before the opening of the big winning opening to start the special gaming state due to the big winning is executed. It will be executed. Therefore, by updating (clearing (initialization) or updating (addition, subtraction)) the number of time saving consecutive times in the big winning opening opening end interval process, the process can be made common regardless of the type of win. Further, the big winning opening opening end interval process may be different for the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, and in this case, it can be made common by making the process of updating the continuous time saving number into a subroutine. By configuring as described above, it is possible to suppress the complexity of game control while compressing the program capacity, simplify the program code, and improve the development efficiency of the game machine (game control program).

[34-5. Method for updating the continuous number of time-savings (4th example: Specification in which the state shifts to a non-time-saving state when a small hit is won, and after the special gaming state due to a small hit ends, the special gaming state due to a jackpot is started)]
Next, unlike the control shown in FIG. 486, even if a game ball passes through a specific area while the special game state due to winning a small hit continues, the special game state due to winning a jackpot is not immediately started. First, a procedure for updating the continuous time saving number in a gaming machine that starts a special game state due to a jackpot win after the special game state due to a small win ends will be explained.

Figure 487 shows a case where a game ball passes through a specific area when a small hit is won in a gaming machine that is designed to shift to a non-time-saving state when a small hit is won and start a special game state due to a jackpot after the special game state due to a small hit ends. 3 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of FIG. Since the control executed from time t81 to time t88 in FIG. 487 is the same as the control executed from time t71 to time t78 in FIG. 486, the explanation will be omitted if necessary.

At time t87, a special game state based on a small winning is started. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the game ball can pass through a specific area while the special gaming state due to the winning of a small hit continues. Even after the game ball passes through, the special game state due to the winning of the small hit continues.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined valid period (during the special game state due to the winning of a small hit) (time t88), a specific area passing flag (V passing flag) is set. After that, the special game state due to the winning of the small winning ends.

In the grand prize opening end interval process that is executed when the special game state ends due to a small winning win, the number of prizes entered into the large winning hole and the number of prizes discharged from the large winning hole are compared to detect malfunctions and fraudulent activities. Determine occurrence. In addition, since there is a possibility that a time lag may occur between when the game ball enters the big winning hole and when it is ejected, the determination is executed after waiting for a certain period of time. If the number of prizes won does not match the number of ejections, the special game state due to small winnings will be terminated and an alarm will be output as necessary, regardless of whether the specific area passing flag is set or not. or output signals externally. At this time, the continuous time saving count is cleared.

If the number of winnings matches the number of ejected prizes and no malfunction or fraudulent activity has occurred, it is determined whether or not a specific area passing flag is set. If the specific area passage flag is not set, the number of consecutive time saving times is cleared, the special game state due to the winning of the small hit is ended, and the game state is shifted to the normal game state while continuing the non-time saving state. In this case, the behavior is similar to the timing chart shown in FIG. 484.

On the other hand, if the specific area passage flag is set, the special game state due to the small winning is ended (time t89). At this time, the value is maintained without updating the continuous time saving number. Furthermore, a special game state based on winning the jackpot is started, and a conditional device is activated (time t90).

Thereafter, with the end of the special game state due to the jackpot, the operation of the conditional device is ended, and a new time saving state is started (time t91). At this time, the continuous time saving number is 1 because the value was maintained at the end of the special game state due to the small win, and 1 is added based on the new time saving state starting, and it is updated to 2. Ru. Note that if the time saving state is not entered after the end of the special game state, the number of consecutive time saving times is cleared (initialized) and the value of the number of consecutive time saving times is updated to zero. The process at time t91 is the same as the process executed at the timing when the special gaming state ends at time t79 in FIG. 486.

In the fourth embodiment, when the occurrence of a jackpot is determined by the specific area passage flag, the continuous time saving number is maintained. Furthermore, the number of consecutive time saving times is updated based on whether or not the time saving state is transitioned to at the end of the special game state due to winning a jackpot. By performing control based on the specific area passage flag in this manner, the above-mentioned problems can be solved as in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[34-6. Configuration of gaming machine of this embodiment]
To summarize the configuration of the gaming machine that implements the improved method of updating the continuous time saving number described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters the starting prize slot, and the result of the lottery is Based on this, a variable display of special symbols is started, and a special gaming state can be generated based on the result. The special gaming states occur depending on the lottery results, and include, for example, a special gaming state (first special gaming state) due to a small winning win, and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) due to a jackpot winning.

Further, while the first special game state (small hit) is occurring, the game ball can pass through a specific area, and when the game ball passes through, the second special game state (big hit) can occur. Further, after the special game state (second special game state) due to winning the jackpot ends, a time-saving state (advantageous game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can occur.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of consecutive time saving states (consecutive times) indicating the number of times the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) has occurred consecutively is recorded, and while the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) is occurring, If you win a small hit (the first special gaming state occurs), the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) changes from the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) to the non-time saving state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol that generates the small winning or at the start of the special gaming state. (Normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of consecutive time saving times is not updated at the timing of transition from the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), but maintains the value before shifting to the non-time saving state.

If the number of consecutive time savings does not reach the predetermined upper limit (predetermined conditions are met), the special gaming state after transitioning from the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) ends. The number of continuous time reductions is updated (added or subtracted) at the same timing.

If the number of consecutive time reductions reaches the upper limit (specific conditions are met), the number of consecutive time reductions will not be added or subtracted at the timing when the special gaming state ends after transitioning from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. initialize. At this time, after the special gaming state ends after transitioning from the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state) to the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state), the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state) does not change and the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) ends. ) remain as is.

Incidentally, if the game ball does not pass through a specific area in a special game state due to winning a small hit and the jackpot is not won, the number of consecutive time reductions may be initialized without comparing it with the upper limit value.

[34-7. How to update the continuous time saving number (modified example)]
The method for updating the number of continuous time reductions in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Next, a modification example will be described in which the variation time of the special symbol is varied depending on the number of continuous time reductions (remaining limit number). In the example described here, the upper limit of the number of continuous time reductions is set to 10 times, and the types of variation time of special symbols are three types. The variation time of the special symbol is defined by a variation pattern table, and in this modification, three types of variation pattern tables are defined.

FIG. 487 is a diagram illustrating the types of variation pattern tables that are set during the variation display of special symbols in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 487 shows the fluctuation time when each fluctuation pattern table loses, and is the shortest fluctuation time in which no effects such as reach occur.

Referring to FIG. 487, in the symbol variation based on the variation pattern table A, if the variation pattern that provides the shortest shortening variation time is selected, the variation time will be 5.000 seconds. Similarly, the symbol variation based on variation pattern table B has a variation time of 1.000 seconds, and the symbol variation based on variation pattern table C has a variation time of 3.000 seconds.

The variable pattern table may be selected based on the gaming state or the like. For example, in the time saving state, the variation pattern table B with the shortest variation time is selected, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern table C with the intermediate variation time is selected, and in a specific production mode or gaming state, the variation pattern table B with the longest variation time is selected. A is selected.

Here, a specification will be described in which the variable pattern table is not selected based on the gaming state, but is selected in accordance with the remaining number of times up to the upper limit in which the time saving state can occur consecutively. FIG. 488 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern in which a variation pattern table is selected according to the remaining number of times up to the upper limit in which a time-saving state can occur continuously.

In the example shown in FIG. 488, pattern 1 selects the same fluctuation pattern table regardless of the remaining number of times, pattern 2 selects a fluctuation pattern table with a shorter fluctuation time at the time of failure as the number of remaining times increases, and A pattern 3 is defined in which a variation pattern table with a short variation time at the time of deviation is selected.

In pattern 1, the same variation pattern table is always selected when the time saving state is entered. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to stably continue the common game. Further, by setting a variable pattern table (for example, variable pattern table C) different from that in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to provide a different game and increase interest. In the example shown in FIG. 488, the variation pattern table with the longest variation time at the time of failure is selected, so that the time when expectations are heightened can continue for a long time. Furthermore, since the same variation pattern table is selected, game control in the time saving state can be simplified.

Note that in pattern 1, the same variable pattern table may be selected regardless of the remaining number of times, and pattern table B or pattern table C may be selected instead of pattern table A. In this way, by selecting a variation pattern table with a short variation time, it is possible to advance the game at a good tempo, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In pattern 2, as the remaining number of times increases, a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time at the time of failure is selected. Therefore, in the initial stage of continuous occurrence of time saving states, the next time saving state occurs at short intervals, which increases the player's expectations. By increasing the player's sense of expectation and making the fluctuation time longer as the upper limit approaches, it is possible to maintain a state in which the player's sense of expectation is heightened for a long time.

In pattern 3, the smaller the remaining number of times, the shorter the fluctuation time at the time of failure is selected, so the player's expectations are gradually increased by lengthening the fluctuation time at the initial stage of successive occurrences of time-saving states. However, by shortening the variation time as it approaches the upper limit, the player's expectations can be increased at once. In pattern 3-1 shown in FIG. 488, the variation pattern table is selected so that the variation time gradually increases from the initial stage to the final stage. In pattern 3-2, after selecting the variation pattern table A with a long variation time, the variation pattern table B with a short variation time is successively selected. Furthermore, the variation pattern table A is selected again, and the variation pattern tables with shorter variation times are gradually selected. In patterns 3-3 and 3-4, the variation pattern table A with a long variation time is selected first, and the variation pattern table C with a short variation time is selected last. At the intermediate stage, by selecting variable pattern tables with different variation times, a game rich in variety is realized and the interest of the game is increased.

[34-8. Fraudulent winning detection method]
Next, an example of a means for detecting fraudulent winnings in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. In the method of detecting fraudulent winnings explained in FIG. Fraud was determined based on the number of game balls that entered the jackpot in one special game state.

Here, if the time-saving state occurs continuously, fraud is determined based on the total number of winnings of game balls into the big winning opening in multiple special gaming states (first fraudulent winning determination means), and whether a single jackpot or small When a winning occurs, fraud may be determined based on the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning opening in one special game state (second fraudulent winning determining means). That is, the above-described method of detecting fraudulent winnings is applied by treating a jackpot or small hit while the time-saving state occurs continuously as a first win, and a single jackpot or small hit as a second win.

Alternatively, the first fraudulent winning determination means may determine whether a winning is fraudulent only when the number of consecutive time savings reaches an upper limit value. On the other hand, each time a time saving state occurs (the special game state ends), a determination value may be set based on the number of consecutive time saving states to determine whether there is an illegal winning. This makes it possible to determine fraudulent winnings according to the progress of the game, and improves the accuracy of determining fraudulent winnings.

The determination of illegal winning is executed in the big winning opening opening end interval process that is executed at the end of the special game state. Therefore, when determining fraudulent winnings based on the total number of winnings of game balls into the big winning slot in the special gaming state until the number of consecutive time savers reaches the upper limit, the last (when the number of consecutive time savers reaches the upper limit) The determination is made in the big winning opening opening end interval process that is executed when the special game state ends, and the determination is not made in the big winning opening opening ending interval process that is executed before this. On the other hand, if a judgment value is set based on the number of continuous time-savings each time a time-saving state occurs (the special game state ends) and fraudulent winnings are determined, the special game must be played until the number of consecutive time-savings reaches the upper limit. Unauthorized winning is determined in the big winning opening opening end interval process that is executed at the end of the state.

In addition, the timing to determine fraudulent winnings may be the timing when the continuous time saving number is cleared, and fraudulent winnings can be detected by limiting the timing to cases where time saving conditions that allow a large amount of prize balls occur continuously. This reduces the frequency with which prize balls are paid out excessively due to fraudulent acts, while suppressing an increase in processing load.

Furthermore, if you want to determine fraudulent winnings by setting a judgment value based on the number of continuous time reductions each time a time saving state occurs (the special gaming state ends), you may set the judgment value before making the judgment. Alternatively, the determination value for the next determination may be set after the determination. Note that when setting the judgment value for the next judgment, it is necessary to initialize the judgment value before making the first judgment.For example, if you initialize the judgment value at the timing when initializing the number of continuous time saving good.

In addition, even if you do not win the jackpot because the game ball does not pass through a specific area before the number of time saving consecutive times reaches the upper limit, if you set the judgment value immediately before the judgment, the judgment will be made at this timing. There is no need to initialize the value. On the other hand, when setting the judgment value for the next judgment after the judgment, the judgment value for the first judgment may be set, or the judgment value may be initialized when the time-saving state occurs for the first time.

The determination value for fraudulent winning is defined depending on the type of special gaming state. For example, a value corresponding to a special gaming state due to a small winning win and a value corresponding to a special gaming state due to a jackpot winning are defined. If there are many types of special gaming states, a table for storing judgment values may be defined in advance, or the judgment values may be calculated based on the opening time of the big prize opening. Furthermore, the judgment value when determining fraudulent winnings based on the number of consecutive time savers may be calculated based on the number of consecutive time savers, or a table may be provided in which values corresponding to the number of consecutive time savers are defined. good.

Further, the first fraudulent prize determining means and the second fraudulent prize determining means may be used together. For example, while the second fraudulent winning determination means determines fraudulent winning every time a special gaming state occurs, when the number of continuous time saving states reaches the upper limit, the first fraudulent winning determining means determines whether the consecutive time saving states occur. Unauthorized winnings are determined based on the total number of winnings since the start.

Further, while the second fraudulent winning determination means determines fraudulent winnings each time a special gaming state occurs, the first fraudulent winning determining means determines the special winnings based on the total number of winnings since the continuous occurrence of the time saving state has started. Unauthorized winning may be determined each time a gaming state occurs.

When determining fraudulent winnings by the second fraudulent winning determining means, for example, the determination value in one special game state is set to 20. At this time, the judgment value in the first fraudulent winning judgment means is 1 x 20 and the judgment value is 20 when the number of consecutive time savings is 1, and 5 x 20 and the judgment value is 100 when the number of continuous time savings is 5. . In this case, if the total number of wins is 76 when the number of time saving consecutive times is 4, and the number of wins is 21 in the 5th special game state, it will be considered a fraudulent winning by the second fraudulent winning determination means, but the total winnings Since the number is 97, it is not determined that the winning is fraudulent (determination value is 5×20=100). In this case, it may be arranged that the winning is not determined to be fraudulent unless both the first fraudulent winning determination means and the second fraudulent winning determining means determine that the winning is fraudulent. This is because the prize balls that are paid out as a result are within the expected range, so there is no damage to the gaming hall, and it may be desirable to allow the game to proceed smoothly.

[35. Lottery execution control]
Updating the continuous time saving count has been described above. Next, control at the time of lottery execution in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. For example, control of a special lottery executed based on random numbers (starting memory, pending memory) acquired when a game ball enters the starting slot will be explained. As mentioned above, when a special lottery is won, a special gaming state is generated. At this time, in the special lottery, not only does it determine whether the lottery result will be a "big hit", "small win", or "miss", but also a special game state that will occur if a jackpot (or small win) is won. The aspects (number of rounds, etc.), the game state to which the special game state will be transferred after the end of the special game state, the fluctuation pattern when the special symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, etc. are also drawn.

[35-1. Random number type]
The special lottery is executed based on a random number (starting memory) obtained when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting slot), but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control A random number value is generated by a hardware random number generation circuit built into the MPU 1311. Furthermore, the range of random numbers generated differs depending on the lottery target, and will be explained with reference to a specific example in FIG. 490. Note that generation of random numbers need not be limited to hardware random numbers, and may be software random numbers generated by executing a program.

FIG. 490 is a diagram showing an example of the type of random number and the range of the random number obtained when the game ball enters the starting slot. In the example shown in FIG. 490, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variation patterns, random numbers for variation type, and random numbers for special symbols are included.

The jackpot determination random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special lottery is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss." A 2-byte area is allocated to the random number for jackpot determination, and values from 0 to 65535 can be stored.

In the special lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a random number for jackpot determination is acquired, and it is determined whether the acquired random number is included in a predetermined range. Further, as described above, this predetermined range differs depending on the setting value of the gaming machine.

FIG. 491 is a diagram showing an example of a range in which the result of the special lottery for each setting value of the gaming machine is a jackpot. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 491, threshold values (upper limit value and lower limit value) are defined corresponding to the gaming state (high probability, low probability) and set value (1 to 6). Furthermore, by setting the upper limit to a common value (63534), the storage capacity for storing the threshold values is reduced. Further, as shown in FIG. 491, the settings are made so that the possibility of winning the jackpot is higher when the set value is 6 than when the set value is 1.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper limit for generating random numbers is set to 63534, but the upper limit value is set to 65535 to prevent the generation of values outside the generation range for random numbers for jackpot determination, so that all 2 bytes are It is desirable to set the value as a generation range.

The random number for reach determination is a random number for determining whether or not to generate a reach, a 1-byte area is allocated, and a value from 0 to 255 is stored. The random number for variation pattern and the random number for variation type are random numbers for determining a variation pattern for displaying a special symbol in a variable manner. A 1-byte area is allocated to these random numbers, and values from 0 to 255 can be stored therein, but the random number generation range of the random numbers for the variation pattern is from 0 to 149.

The special symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (aspect of the special game state, the game state after the end of the special game state, etc.) when a jackpot is won as a result of the special lottery. A 1-byte area is allocated to the special symbol random number, and it is possible to store values from 0 to 255, but the random number generation range is from 0 to 199. This is to obtain a special symbol number corresponding to the result of the special lottery, and with the special symbol number, it is possible to specify not only the results of jackpot, small hit, and loss, but also the types of jackpot and small win.

In addition, if random numbers cannot be generated normally due to a problem with the random number generation circuit, for example, the value generated as a random number always becomes a specific value, or the random number cannot be obtained normally, and the obtained random number does not change when the random number is obtained. It is possible that a problem may occur where a specific value is reached. In such a case, since there is a high possibility that the specific value will be 0, it is preferable to set the lottery contents so that if the various random numbers become 0, it will hardly affect the game. For example, the winning range is set so that if the random number for determining a jackpot is 0, there will always be a miss. Furthermore, if the special symbol random number is 0 in the case of a jackpot, it is certain that the jackpot will be a jackpot, so the jackpot symbol type that is least disadvantageous to the player is selected. Furthermore, when the random number for jackpot determination is 0, the fluctuation pattern is selected so that the random number for determining reach is non-reach, and the random numbers for fluctuation patterns are such that the fluctuation time is the shortest. Thereby, a game affected by noise or the like can be quickly ended, and the stability of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment mainly uses random numbers (hardware random numbers) generated by a hardware random number generation circuit, but as described above, some or all of the generated random numbers are generated by the execution of a program. It may be a software random number generated.

Furthermore, the means for generating random numbers may be different depending on the type of random numbers. For example, the random numbers used in the lottery for special symbols may be generated by a hardware random number generation circuit, while the random numbers used in the lottery for normal symbols may be generated by software random numbers by a program. Furthermore, the random numbers related to winning or losing the lottery (for example, the random numbers for jackpot determination) may be hardware random numbers, and the random numbers only related to the fluctuating display of symbols (for example, random numbers for fluctuating patterns) may be software random numbers.

[35-2. Lottery-related controls]
Next, control for executing the special lottery will be explained. As mentioned above, the special lottery is executed based on the random number obtained when a predetermined condition is met (when a game ball enters the starting slot). The process to be carried out will be explained, and then the process to actually execute the lottery after random numbers have been obtained will be explained.

[35-2-1. Preparation process for random number generation]
The random numbers used for the special lottery are initialized in the power-on process (FIG. 382) that is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in the random number setting activation process of step 02TK0050, a hardware random number generation circuit built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated. Furthermore, the maximum value of random numbers to be generated (random number generation range) is set. As for the random number generation range, values are stored in registers corresponding to whether the random number is 8 bits (1 byte) or 16 bits (2 bytes), variable length or fixed length. Furthermore, it is not necessary to specify the generation range of all random numbers in the random number setting activation process, and the range may be set at the time of random number acquisition.

[35-2-2. Processing related to special lottery]
As mentioned above, in the special lottery, various random numbers (reserved memory) are acquired when a predetermined condition is met (when a game ball enters the starting slot), and the special lottery is executed when the variable display of special symbols based on the retained memory starts. Ru. Below, the determination of whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (random numbers for jackpot determination), the determination of the special gaming state that occurs due to winning the jackpot, and the gaming state after the special gaming state ends (random numbers for special symbols), special symbols Determination of the variation display mode (random numbers for variation patterns, etc.) will be explained.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special lottery is executed in special symbol determination processing. The special symbol determination process is called from the special symbol/flag setting process of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol fluctuation waiting process is a process that is executed when the special symbol starts changing, and is a process that is executed when the special symbol changes. It is a process that is executed when the special symbol changes. It is a process that is executed when the special symbol changes. It is called from step 01TKS0080). The timer interrupt processing (Fig. 329) and the game-enabled processing (Fig. 354) are as described above, so their explanation will be omitted. Regarding the processing after the special symbol/special electric accessory control processing, the processing up to the execution of the special lottery will be omitted. The process and the process of executing various lottery will be explained.

[35-2-2a. Processing until special lottery is executed]
(Special design/special electric accessory control processing)
First, the special symbol/special electric accessory control process will be explained as the process up to executing the special lottery. In the special symbol/special electric accessory control process, when a game ball enters the starting hole, various random numbers (pending memory, starting memory) are acquired and processing is executed according to the current progress of the game. Each process will be specifically explained below.

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol/special electric accessory control processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol/special electric accessory control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 (step 08TKS0110). If a game ball wins in the first starting slot 2002 (result of step 08TKS0110 is "Yes"), the starting slot winning process is executed, various random numbers (reservation memory, starting memory) are acquired, and a predetermined area is (Step 08TKS0120).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs processing when the game ball does not win in the first starting port 2002 (the result of step 08TKS0110 is "No"), or when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2002. When the execution of has been completed, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 (step 08TKS0130). If the game ball wins in the second starting port 2004 (the result of step 08TKS0130 is "Yes"), similarly to the case of winning in the first starting port 2002, the starting port winning process is executed, and various random numbers are (holding memory, starting memory) is acquired and stored in a predetermined area (step 08TKS0140).

After completing the processing related to winning in the starting slot, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing according to the progress of the game (steps 08TKS0210 to 08TKS0290). The progress of the game is specified by the special symbol/motorized accessory operation state number, and is updated in each process. Specifically, in a state (customer waiting state) where there is no pending memory (starting memory), the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is TZ_IDOL, and in this case, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol change waiting process. (Step 08TKS0210). TZ_IDOL is set as the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number at the start of the game.

The special symbol variation waiting process is executed until a game ball enters the starting hole, and when a game ball enters the starting hole, various random numbers (pending memory, starting memory) are obtained. Furthermore, by updating the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number to TZ_HEND, the next time the special symbol/special electric accessory control process is executed, the special symbol fluctuation process for displaying the special symbol fluctuation is executed. . Details of the special symbol change waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 493.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TZ_HEND, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol variation processing (step 08TKS0220). In the special symbol variation processing, processing for controlling the variation display of the special symbol, etc. is performed. Specifically, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a special symbol jackpot determination transition setting process (not shown) is executed, a special symbol stop command is set, and a special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is set. Update to TZ_JUDG.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TZ_JUDG, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol jackpot determination process (step 08TKS0230). In the special symbol jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol will generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state), and the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is set to correspond to the result of the special lottery. Update to the value (TZ_HSTOP or TZ_ASTOP).

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TZ_HSTOP, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol deviation stop processing (step 08TKS0240). In the special symbol deviation stop processing, if a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) does not occur, processing is performed to stop the fluctuating display of the special symbol and notify that fact, and also to notify the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number. Update to TZ_IDOL and execute special symbol change waiting process.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TZ_ASTOP, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol jackpot stop processing (step 08TKS0250). In the special symbol jackpot stop processing, when a jackpot game state is to be generated, processing is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol and notify that effect. Furthermore, in order to open the big winning hole by shifting to the special game state (jackpot game state), the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is updated to TD_FINT, and the interval process before opening the big winning hole is executed.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number reaches TD_FINT, the main control MPU 1311 executes the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step 08TKS0260). In the interval process before opening the big winning hole, a special game state (jackpot game state) is generated to notify that the jackpot operation has started, and the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is set to TD_OPEN. and execute the big winning opening opening process.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TD_FOPEN, the main control MPU 1311 executes the big winning opening opening process (step 08TKS0270). In the grand prize opening opening process, processing related to the jackpot operation that makes it easier for game balls to enter each grand prize opening by opening the grand prize opening is performed, and the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is set to TD_CLOSE. and execute the process while the big prize opening is closed.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number becomes TD_CLOSE, the main control MPU 1311 executes the big prize opening closing process (step 08TKS0280). In the grand prize opening closing process, processes related to jackpot operations that make it difficult for game balls to enter each grand prize opening by changing the grand prize opening from an open state to a closed state are performed, and special symbol/electric accessory operations are performed. The state number is updated to TD_CLOSE, and the big winning opening opening end interval process is executed.

When the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number reaches TD_EINT, the main control MPU 1311 executes the big prize opening opening end interval process (step 08TKS0280). In the big winning opening closing process, when the jackpot operation has ended, a process is performed to notify that fact. Furthermore, the game state after shifting to the special game state (big hit game state) is set, and the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number is updated to TD_IDOL.

As described above, by updating the special symbol/electric accessory operation state number, it is possible to execute processing according to the progress of the game.

(Special symbol change waiting process)
Next, a special symbol change waiting process will be described as a process until the special lottery is executed. In the special symbol change waiting process, as mentioned above, the special symbol change waiting process is executed until a game ball enters the starting hole, and when a game ball enters the starting hole, various random numbers (pending memory, starting memory ) to obtain. The details of the special symbol change waiting process will be explained below.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol fluctuation waiting process is started, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the number of special symbols pending, in which the variable display of the special symbols is suspended, is 0 (step 08TKS0310). If the number of reserved special symbols is 0 (result of step 08TKS0310 is "Yes"), the special symbols cannot be displayed in a variable manner and the special lottery is not executed, so this process ends.

When the number of reserved special symbols is not 0 (the result of step 08TKS0310 is "Yes"), that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the main control MPU 1311 determines that the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 1 or more. It is determined whether there is one (Step 08TKS0320).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the variable display by the special symbol 2 is given priority over the variable display by the special symbol 1, if the number of pending special symbols 2 is 1 or more (the result of step 08TKS0320 is "Yes") ), sets special symbol 2 variation setting data (step 08TKS0330), and performs settings for executing variation display by special symbol 2. On the other hand, if the number of reservations for special symbol 2 is not 1 or more (result of step 08TKS0320 is "Yes"), that is, if the number of reservations for special symbol 2 is 0 and the number of reservations for special symbol 1 is 1 or more. In this step, special symbol 1 variation setting data is set (step 08TKS0340), and settings for executing a variation display by special symbol 1 are performed.

The special symbol variation setting data is information for identifying whether the execution target of the process is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. That is, when the execution target of the process is special symbol 1, special symbol 1 variation setting data is set, and in case of special symbol 2, special symbol 2 variation setting data is set. In this way, by setting the special symbol fluctuation setting data in advance, the work area and data table corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation setting data can be referenced for the processing to be executed thereafter, so that the special symbol 1 A common process can be executed with the special symbol 2 and special symbol 2.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a hold command at the start of hold display variation in order to update the hold display of the effect display device 1600 and reflect it in the effect (step 08TKS0350).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol/flag setting processing (step 08TKS0360). The special symbol/flag setting process is a process for executing a special lottery, and when a special lottery is won, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the lottery result, that is, the mode of the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state ends. Execute processing etc. Details of the special symbol/flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 494.

When the result of the special lottery is derived by the special symbol/flag setting process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol variation pattern setting process to set the correspondence of the variable display of the special symbol (step 08TKS0370). Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 500.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 updates the pending memory (step 08TKS0380). Specifically, the various random numbers stored in the area storing the reserved memory are shifted, and the various random numbers of the special symbol whose variable display is to be started are cleared. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol fluctuation transition setting process that sets the data necessary to start the special symbol fluctuation display (step 08TKS0390). In the special symbol variation transition setting process, processing related to symbol variation display such as special symbol change time, processing related to a special symbol test signal outputted to the outside, etc. are performed.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets various commands to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step 08TKS0400). The various commands to be set include a state display count command, a special symbol variation pattern command, a special symbol symbol type command, and a variation start state command.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 updates the special symbol reservation identification history (step 08TKS0410). The history of information regarding the variable display of special symbols is stored in the special symbol reservation identification history in chronological order, and for example, the type of the reserved special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is stored. When special symbol 1 is set to "1" and special symbol 2 is set to "2", and "0" is stored when it is not reserved, it is determined whether the special symbol retention identification history is 0 at the start of fluctuation, If it is 0, the process can be controlled to end (step 08TKS0310).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 updates the special symbol/electric accessory operating state number from waiting to change (TZ_IDOL) to changing (TZ_HEND) (Step 08TKS0420).

(Special design/flag setting process)
Finally, the special symbol/flag setting process (step 08TKS0360) will be explained as the process up to executing the special lottery. FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol/flag setting processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol/flag setting process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires various random numbers (pending memory) to be the target of the special lottery, and stores the starting storage area (pending memory for starting the variable display of the special symbol). (step 08TKS0510).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the result of the special lottery (Step 08TKS0520). In the special symbol determination process, it is determined whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a small win, or a loss based on a random number for jackpot determination from various random numbers stored in the starting storage area. Furthermore, a special symbol number (jackpot symbol number) is drawn based on the special symbol random number.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a stop symbol/flag setting process for setting a stop symbol of the special symbol to be variably displayed (step 08TKS0530). Finally, special symbol conversion processing is executed to convert the special symbol number into a symbol information value (step 08TKS0540).

[35-2-2b. Processing to execute various lottery]
The processes up to the execution of various lottery selections have been described above. Next, the procedure for actually conducting the lottery will be explained. Here, we will explain the special symbol determination process for determining jackpot and drawing stop symbols (special symbols, jackpot symbols), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process (fluctuation pattern selection and determination processing) for drawing variation patterns for the variation display of special symbols. do.

(Special symbol determination process)
FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol determination processing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a random number for jackpot determination from the random number buffer for jackpot determination in the starting storage area (step 08TKS0610). Furthermore, when the setting values of the gaming machine are obtained (step 08TKS0620). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, values from 1 to 6 can be set as the setting value of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 491, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the special lottery. It has become. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the gaming state (probability state) (step 08TKS0630). The gaming state (probability state) indicates whether the winning probability of the special lottery is high probability or low probability, and can be obtained based on, for example, a probability variable flag that is set when the probability is high.

Here, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the random number value for jackpot determination is within the generation range. At this time, if the random number value for jackpot determination is within the generation range, the processing from step 08TKS0640 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if the random number value for jackpot determination is not within the generation range, the determination result may be set as a "loss" and the loss setting process (step 08TKS0780) may be executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains an upper limit value for determining a jackpot (step 08TKS0640). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is determined based on whether the value of the random number for jackpot determination is between a predetermined lower limit value and an upper limit value. Ru. At this time, the upper limit value and lower limit value may be held in a table format, or a reference value may be set and derived using a calculation formula. Further, either the upper limit value or the lower limit value may be a fixed value. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the area that stores the threshold values (upper limit value, lower limit value) for jackpot determination. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 490, the upper limit value is a common value.

The main control MPU 1311 compares the random number for jackpot determination with the upper limit value and determines whether the random number for jackpot determination is less than or equal to the upper limit value (step 08TKS0650). If the random number for jackpot determination is less than the upper limit value (the result of step 08TKS0650 is "Yes"), the lower limit value for jackpot determination is acquired (step 08TKS0660). Furthermore, the random number for jackpot determination is compared with the lower limit value, and it is determined whether the random number for jackpot determination is greater than or equal to the lower limit value (step 08TKS0670). If the random number for jackpot determination is equal to or greater than the lower limit (the result of step 08TKS0670 is "Yes"), the result of the special lottery becomes a jackpot. Further details of the jackpot determination will be described later.

When the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a jackpot setting value (flag) (step 08TKS0680). Furthermore, special symbol determination data is set (step 08TKS0690), and a random number for special symbol is stored in a predetermined area (register) (step 08TKS0700).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches the special symbol determination data for the jackpot symbol type number (special symbol) based on the special symbol random number (step 08TKS0710). The special symbol determination data is configured in a table format having a plurality of records, with one record being a combination of a threshold value and a jackpot symbol type number. In the search for the jackpot symbol type number, the special symbol random number and the threshold are compared to identify the jackpot symbol type number (symbol type number) that meets the conditions.

In this embodiment, the threshold value is a lower limit value, and the special symbol determination data is composed of a combination of the lower limit value and the jackpot symbol type number. The specific search procedure will be described later. Note that the threshold value may be configured with only an upper limit value. Further, the threshold value may be composed of an upper limit value and a lower limit value, and the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be compared as in the case of jackpot determination. In addition, the process from step 08TKS0640 to step 08TKS0670 for acquiring the jackpot symbol type number is referred to as the jackpot setting process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a type command setting process for setting a type command based on the specified jackpot symbol type number (step 08TKS0720). Furthermore, a special symbol number (jackpot symbol number) is set (step 08TKS0730). The special symbol number (big hit symbol number) is data to be converted into a symbol information value in a special symbol conversion process (not shown) described later. The special symbol number is determined based on the value of the special symbol random number. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special symbol random number is set to a value from 0 to 199, but by adding 1, it is corrected to a value from 1 to 200, and the special symbol number (jackpot symbol number). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the random number for jackpot determination is larger than the upper limit (the result of step 08TKS0650 is "No"), or if the random number for jackpot determination is smaller than the lower limit (the result of step 08TKS0670 is "No"), The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the small win has been won (Step 08TKS0740). The process of step 08TKS0740 corresponds to the process from step 08TKS0640 to step 08TKS0670 in the case of jackpot determination.

The procedure for determining whether or not you have won a small hit may be done by comparing the upper limit value and lower limit value, as in the case of jackpot determination, or by retaining the winning value. good. When comparing the upper limit value and the lower limit value, they are set to be different from the winning range of the jackpot. Further, the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be fixed regardless of the set value. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the storage area for storing the threshold value necessary for determining the winning of the small win.

If the small win is won (the result of step 08TKS0740 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the small win setting process (step 08TKS0750). In the small hit setting process, the small hit symbol type number (symbol type number) is specified similarly to the jackpot setting process. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a type command setting process for setting a type command based on the specified small winning symbol type number (step 08TKS0760).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a special symbol number (small winning symbol number) (step 08TKS0730). The special symbol number (small winning symbol number) is based on the special symbol random number, similar to the jackpot symbol number, and therefore has a value in the range from 0 to 199. However, in order to avoid duplication with the jackpot symbol number, the special symbol random number is converted to a value from 0 to 49 by dividing it by a quarter. Furthermore, by adding the converted value to 200, which is the upper limit of the jackpot symbol number, and then adding 1, the value can be converted to a value from 201 to 250. As a result, the jackpot ranges from 1 to 200, the small win ranges from 201 to 250, and the type of win can be specified by the special symbol number. When the setting of the special symbol number (small winning symbol number) is completed, this process is then terminated.

On the other hand, if the small winning is not won (the result of step 08TKS0740 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a loss setting process because the special lottery result is a loss (step 08TKS0790). In the loss setting process, the special symbol number is set to 0. As a result, the special symbol number will be set in the range from 0 to 250.

(Jackpot judgment)
Here, a lottery based on random numbers for jackpot determination will be explained. FIG. 496 is a diagram for explaining the lottery result determination means. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, a small hit is also determined based on the random number for determining a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the probability state, the setting value of the gaming machine, etc. (A) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 1 in a high probability state, (B) is the setting value of the gaming machine in a high probability state (C) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when is 6, and (C) is the table for determining the result of variable display of special symbol 1 (special (D) is a table for determining the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 6 in a low probability state; (E) ) shows a table for determining the result of the variable display of the special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting value of the gaming machine is 1 in a low probability state.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the small win is set to be won in the case of a special lottery based on the special symbol 2. In the case of special symbol 1, a small hit is won only when the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 60254, and it is set so that it almost never happens. Furthermore, since the probability state indicates the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of winning a small win is the same whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. In addition, the winning range for the small hit is fixed depending on the type of special symbol, and for special symbol 1, the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 60254, and for special symbol 2, the value of the random number for determining jackpot is only 60254. If it is between 60050 and 60254, you will win a small prize.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the common value (range) for the jackpot determination value is set for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, regardless of the probability state and the setting value of the gaming machine. . On the other hand, although the small hit determination value is not common between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, it may be common between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. It should be noted that the illustrated winning ranges for the jackpot and small jackpot are merely examples, and the winning ranges are not limited to these values.

Also, as shown in Figure 490, the random numbers for jackpot determination are values from 0 to 63534, but since a 2-byte area is allocated, it is actually not possible to store values up to 65535. can. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the values from 63535 to 65535 are reserved as a reserve area and are outside the random number generation range.

Further, as shown in FIG. 491, the upper limit of the jackpot range matches the upper limit of the jackpot determination random number generation range. Further, the upper limit of the jackpot range is the same regardless of the probability state, the setting value of the gaming machine, and the type of special symbol, and the lower limit value is changed according to the probability state and the setting value of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, since the area for storing the jackpot determination random number is 2 bytes, it is possible to store values that exceed the generation range of the jackpot determination random number. Normally, whether it is a hardware random number or a software random number, a random number outside the specified range will not be generated, but when obtaining the generated random number, it will be outside the range (more than the upper limit) due to factors such as noise. There is a risk that random numbers for jackpot determination may be obtained.

FIG. 497 is a diagram illustrating a process in which some bits of the random number for jackpot determination are changed due to factors such as noise and change to values outside the range.

In the example shown in Figure 497, "48172" ("1011110000101100b") is generated as a random number for jackpot determination, but if the second bit "0" changes to "1" due to the influence of noise etc. It shows. As a result, the acquired random number for jackpot determination becomes "1111110000101100b" ("64556"). In this way, the upper limit value of the random number for jackpot determination is "63534", which exceeds the upper limit value.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the judgment based on the jackpot judgment random number is compared with the upper limit value and the lower limit value, even if the jackpot judgment random number is obtained outside the range, It will not be judged as a jackpot. Specifically, since the determination result at step 08TKS0650 in FIG. 495 is "No", the small win determination process is directly executed. In addition, if it is outside the range below the lower limit value, the determination result in step 08TKS0670 in FIG. 495 becomes "No", and the process of determining the small win is executed in the same way as in the case where it is outside the range above the upper limit value.

In other words, even if the random number for jackpot determination is outside the range, normal control continues without going through exception processing such as determining whether the range of the acquired random number exceeds a predetermined range. That will happen. Similar to the determination of a jackpot, the determination of a small hit is also compared with the upper limit value and the lower limit value, so that normal control can be continued without executing exception processing. Further, even if the obtained random number is outside the range, it is controlled so that it does not result in a jackpot, thereby preventing the hole from suffering damage.

Note that if the random number for jackpot determination falls outside the range, it is certain that the jackpot is a miss, so the occurrence of a reach may be suppressed. For example, the value of the random number for reach determination may be updated to a value that indicates non-reach. At this time, a variation pattern with the shortest variation time may be selected. Thereby, a game affected by noise or the like can be quickly ended, and the stability of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the random number for jackpot determination is a value outside the range, it is handled in the same way as if it was determined to be a loss, without providing exception handling. Processing can continue under normal control. As a result, it is possible to simplify game control, suppress an increase in processing load, and improve the development efficiency of gaming machines.

(Jackpot pattern judgment)
Next, a procedure for specifying (searching) the jackpot symbol type from the special symbol determination data based on the special symbol random number will be described (step 08TKS0710 in FIG. 495). FIG. 498 is a diagram showing an example of special symbol determination data, in which (A) shows the case of special symbol 1, and (B) shows the case of special symbol 2. As for the special symbol determination data, tables for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are defined, but a common table may be used, or one may be set to a fixed value.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the case of special pattern 1, the order is special pattern 1 jackpot pattern type 3, special pattern 1 jackpot pattern type 2, special pattern 1 jackpot pattern type 1, special pattern 1 jackpot pattern type 0. It is set so as not to put players at a disadvantage. In the case of the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol type 9 is similarly set so as not to be most disadvantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 490, special symbol random numbers are generated in the range of 0 to 199. For example, special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 3 is selected when the value of the special symbol random number is between 190 and 199 in the variable display of special symbol 1.

The procedure for identifying (searching) the jackpot symbol type from the special symbol determination data based on the special symbol random number is to first identify either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and then search for the special symbol random number from the first record of the corresponding table. Compare threshold values (lower limit values). As a result of the comparison, if the special symbol random number is greater than or equal to the threshold value, the corresponding jackpot symbol type is selected. On the other hand, if the special symbol random number is smaller than the threshold, the next record is compared in the same way. Since the threshold value (lower limit value) of the final record is 0, the special symbol random number will always be equal to or greater than the threshold value at the end, and the jackpot symbol type will be selected.

Next, a case where a special symbol random number outside the generation range is acquired will be described. FIG. 499 is a diagram explaining the symbol types corresponding to the special symbol random numbers, (A) shows the case of special symbol 1, and (B) shows the case of special symbol 2.

A 2-byte area is allocated to the special symbol random number, and values from 0 to 255 can be stored. As shown in FIG. 499, since the special symbol random number generation range is from 0 to 199, values from 200 to 255 are outside the generation range. Therefore, as in the case of the random numbers for jackpot determination, there is a risk that special symbol random numbers outside the range may be acquired due to the influence of noise and the like. In the method for specifying the jackpot symbol type described above, when a special symbol random number outside the range is acquired, it becomes a value larger than the lower limit value compared first, so special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 3 is searched. In other words, if the threshold value is the lower limit value, the comparison is made in descending order of the threshold value, so values outside the range will be larger than the original generation range, so the condition will be satisfied in the first comparison. Become. In the example described above, the jackpot symbol type that is most advantageous to the player is selected.

If the random number for jackpot determination falls outside the range, the player is controlled to be at the most disadvantageous, but it is confirmed that it will be a jackpot (or small hit) even if the special symbol random number falls outside the range. Therefore, if the control is made so that the player is at the greatest disadvantage, the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the control is performed so as not to be the most disadvantageous (it is desirable to be controlled so as to be the most advantageous).

Therefore, by arranging the jackpot symbol type to be selected when the value of the special symbol random number is outside the generation range in the first record, it is possible to control the player to intentionally select a specific jackpot symbol type. Furthermore, by setting the upper limit of the generation range in the first record, it is possible to set a jackpot symbol type that is selected only when a random number outside the generation range is obtained.

In addition, if the threshold value is set as the upper limit value, the comparison will be made in descending order of the threshold value, so the condition will be met in the last comparison, so the jackpot symbol type selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained is set in the final record. do it.

With the above configuration, it is possible to set the jackpot symbol type that will be selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained simply by arranging and adding data without adding exception handling to the program. Even if a random number outside the generation range is obtained, normal game control can be continued, so by simplifying game control, processing load can be reduced and stability can be improved.

(Special symbol variation pattern setting process)
Next, a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process (step 08TKS0370) for setting a fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation display will be explained. The special symbol variation pattern setting process includes a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern determination process). FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol activation reserved balls (step 08TKS0810). The special symbol activation pending ball number is stored in the reach probability selection pending ball number area.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls and the jackpot flag (step 08TKS0820). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 501.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process, and searches for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step 08TKS0830).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step 08TKS0840). Set the fluctuation type type value obtained by the fluctuation type determination process.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step 08TKS0850). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time depending on the number of pseudo-runs. Furthermore, the retrieved variation time addition value is stored in the special symbol addition timer area, and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

(Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process)
Next, the variation pattern selection determination process (step 08TKS0820) will be explained. FIG. 501 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. Further, this process is also called in the pre-reading process that is carried out at the time of starting winning.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a special symbol-specific variation distribution information source table based on the variation table number (step 08TKS0910). A plurality of special symbol variation distribution information source tables are defined corresponding to variation table numbers. In the special symbol-specific variation distribution information source table, a hit variation selection information table, a reach variation selection information table, a loss variation selection information table, and a special symbol reach probability table are specified for each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. .

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or a small jackpot (step 08TKS0920). If the jackpot or small win has not been won (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "No"), that is, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs (step 08TKS0930). Whether or not a reach occurs is determined by specifying a special symbol reach probability table (reach probability data) based on the gaming state, the number of reserved balls, etc., and drawing a lottery based on a random number for reach determination.

If it is determined that a reach does not occur (the result of step 08TKS0930 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 selects the deviation variation pattern selection table (step 08TKS0940). In addition, when the random number for jackpot determination is out of range, it may be determined that a reach is not necessarily generated. To minimize the influence on a game by quickly shifting to the next variation.

When the deviation variation pattern selection table is created, the main control MPU 1311 executes the deviation variation pattern selection process (step 08TKS0950). In the loss fluctuation pattern selection process, a loss fluctuation pattern selection value data table is specified, and one loss fluctuation pattern selection data is selected from a plurality of loss fluctuation pattern selection data based on the gaming state (time saving state, etc.), the number of reserved balls, etc. Identify. In addition, if the random number for jackpot determination is out of range and the time is shortened, control is performed so that the influence on the game is minimized by selecting a variation pattern with the shortest variation time. The selection of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time may be determined based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls in addition to the time saving state. For example, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time may be forcibly selected only when the number of special symbol activation reserved balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

On the other hand, if it is determined that reach occurs (the result of step 08TKS0930 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 selects the reach variation pattern selection table (step 08TKS0960), and executes the reach variation pattern selection process ( Step 08TKS0970). The reach variation pattern selection process performs the same process as the loss variation pattern selection process. Specifically, a reach variation pattern selection value data table is specified, and a variation pattern is selected based on the gaming state, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

It should be noted that if the jackpot or small win has not been won (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "No"), this also includes the case where it is called from the pre-reading process. Moreover, when called from the pre-reading process, a variation pattern selection table is selected based on the random number for reach determination and the reach probability data for pre-reading.

If the jackpot or small hit is won (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 selects the winning variation pattern selection table (step 08TKS0980), and executes the winning variation pattern selection process ( Step 08TKS0990). The winning variation pattern selection process is similar to the losing variation pattern selection process. Specifically, a winning variation pattern selection value data table is specified, and a variation pattern is selected based on the gaming state, the number of reserved balls, etc. In addition, when the random number for the special symbol is out of range, a variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected from among the selectable variation patterns to suppress the influence on the game.

When the variation pattern selection process (loss variation pattern selection process, reach variation pattern selection process, winning variation pattern selection process) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation setting process (08TKS1000). In the variation setting process, a variation pattern number is specified from the variation pattern selection data (loss variation pattern selection data, reach variation pattern selection data, hit variation pattern selection data) specified in each variation pattern selection process. After the variation setting process ends, the variation pattern selection determination process ends.

Here, a case will be described in which the random number for the variable pattern falls outside the range when the special lottery result is a loss and a reach occurs. FIG. 502 is a diagram illustrating an example of reach variation pattern selection data. Note that the loss variation pattern selection data and the winning variation pattern selection data have a similar configuration.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a variation pattern is selected from the reach variation pattern selection data based on the random number for variation patterns. The method of selecting a fluctuation pattern is the same as when selecting the jackpot symbol type, by comparing the threshold value and the random number (fluctuation pattern random number) from the beginning of the reach fluctuation pattern selection data, and the fluctuation pattern random number is larger than the threshold value. A variation pattern corresponding to the case is selected.

A 1-byte area is allocated to the random number for the fluctuation pattern, and values from 0 to 255 can be stored. As shown in FIG. 490, since the generation range of random numbers for variation patterns is from 0 to 149, values from 150 to 255 are outside the generation range. Therefore, as in the case of jackpot determination random numbers and special symbol random numbers, there is a risk that a value outside the range will be acquired due to the influence of noise. As mentioned above, when identifying a fluctuation pattern, since the threshold is the lower limit, values outside the range will be larger than the original generation range, so the condition is met at the first comparison. The SPSP reach, which is the most expected variation pattern, will be searched. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as in the case of random numbers for special symbols, control is performed so as not to select the most disadvantageous variation pattern, and by configuring this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to.

[35-3. Effects/Other]
As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the random number for jackpot determination is outside the range, exception processing such as determining whether the range of the acquired random number is beyond a predetermined range is performed. Normal control will continue without going through. Similar to the determination of a jackpot, the determination of a small hit is also compared with the upper limit value and the lower limit value, so that normal control can be continued without executing exception processing. As a result, it is possible to simplify game control, suppress an increase in processing load, and improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. Further, even if the obtained random number is outside the range, it is controlled so that it does not result in a jackpot, thereby preventing the hole from suffering damage.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to set the jackpot symbol type and fluctuation pattern to be selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained simply by arranging and adding data without adding exception handling to the program. This makes it possible to continue normal game control even if a random number outside the generation range is obtained, making it possible to simplify game control, reduce processing load, and improve stability. Furthermore, if the random numbers obtained for selecting the jackpot symbol type or variation pattern are outside the range, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game by controlling the most disadvantageous result not to be selected. .

(Normal pattern)
Note that the lottery can be executed not only with special symbols but also with normal symbols. Specifically, the "Random number for jackpot determination" is changed to "Random number for hit determination", the "Random number for special symbol" is changed to "Random number for hit symbol", and the "Random number for fluctuation pattern" for special symbol is changed to "Random number for fluctuation pattern" for normal symbol. What is necessary is to replace it with "Random Number for Pattern" and apply the process for the special symbol described above. At this time, random numbers related to special symbols may be generated using hardware random numbers, and random numbers related to normal symbols may be generated using software random numbers.

In addition, the lottery with special symbols (special lottery) has many types of jackpots, and the lottery with regular symbols (regular lottery) has fewer types of hits, so the generation range of random numbers for jackpot determination of special symbols is limited to all 2 bytes. By setting the range (0 to 65535), the outside of the range is eliminated, while the generation range of the random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol may be a part of the area instead of the entire range of 2 bytes. As a result, it is possible to make detailed drawings for special drawings, and to set an appropriate range for ordinary drawings.

(others)
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the case where the obtained random number is out of range is not limited to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit is out of range. For example, even if the generated random number is normal, it may become a value out of the range due to noise etc. when it is stored in the main control RAM 1312, or it may be read out as a value out of the range in the process of reading the value from the main control RAM 1312. This also includes cases where

In addition, even if the generation range is the value of all 2 bytes for the random number for jackpot determination, if an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit, the game The determination result is derived so that the result is the most disadvantageous for the person, and the subsequent processing is continued. Note that an abnormality in the random number generation circuit can be detected from the value of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1311. Furthermore, if an abnormality is detected from a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1311, the game may be stopped without continuing the process, and control may be performed such that a security signal is output. Restoration from a game stop may be performed by turning off the power and turning it on again.

As mentioned above, the game is stopped when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit itself, but if there is no abnormality in the random number generation circuit itself and the obtained random number is outside the generation range, the magnet, Unlike in the case of an abnormality when detected by a vibration sensor, the game is not stopped and the fact that the random number is abnormal (outside the generation range) is not notified. This is because a gaming hall is an environment where noise is likely to occur, and frequent suspension of the game may reduce the interest in the game.

It should be noted that an abnormality may be reported regarding the random number for jackpot determination, and the game may be stopped. Abnormalities in the random numbers used to determine jackpots may also be closely related to the provision of gaming value, and if random numbers outside the generation range are obtained, the most disadvantageous result for the player will occur, reducing the interest in the game. That's because it is. Since the random numbers for special symbols and the random numbers for variable patterns do not affect the jackpot determination result, the game is continued without stopping the game or reporting an abnormality as described above.

Furthermore, if the random number for jackpot determination is outside the range, a security signal may be output as in the case of an abnormality when detecting a magnet or vibration sensor or when changing/confirming settings. Further, if an external output terminal is available, a signal other than the security signal may be output. Regarding an abnormality in the special symbol random number or the variable pattern random number, the game is continued without outputting an external signal, as in the case of stopping the game or notifying the abnormality.

(Summary of inventions related to random number range)
Representative aspects of the invention disclosed in this specification include the following.

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
Lottery result determining means that acquires the random number generated by the random number generating means and determines the result of the lottery based on the random number;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the lottery result determining means determines the result of the lottery to be a result that is not advantageous to the player if the random number obtained from the random number generating means is not within the specified range. .

(2) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
a symbol variation display means for displaying a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
If the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, the lottery result determination means determines the lottery result as the most disadvantageous result for the player, and
The symbol fluctuation display means executes the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the lottery result by the lottery result determination means even if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range. A gaming machine with special features.

With configurations (1) and (2), even if the random value obtained is out of range due to the influence of noise, etc., the result is determined to be the most disadvantageous for the player, without providing any exception handling. Processing can continue under normal control. For example, even if the random number for determining a jackpot is outside the range, it can be determined as a loss (a result that is not advantageous to the player), and the process can be continued with normal control without providing exception handling. The development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved while simplifying the process and suppressing an increase in processing load. Further, even if the obtained random number is outside the range, it is controlled so that it does not result in a jackpot, thereby preventing the hole from suffering damage (FIGS. 495 to 497).

(3) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met, and that makes it possible to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (special gaming state due to jackpot) and a second special gaming state (special gaming state due to small winning) different from the first special gaming state,
The lottery result determination means is
After determining whether or not to generate the first special gaming state, determining whether or not to generate the second special gaming state,
Even if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, after determining whether or not to generate the first special gaming state, generate the second special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it determines whether or not.

In configuration (3), even if the random number for determining a jackpot is outside the range, it is determined that the game has lost (the most disadvantageous result for the player), and thereafter, the determination of a small hit is continued. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figures 495 to 497).

(4) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The said lottery consists of a first lottery (e.g., a lottery based on random numbers for jackpot determination) that determines whether or not the person has won the lottery, and a second lottery (e.g., a lottery for special symbols) that is performed following the first lottery. (a lottery based on random numbers or random numbers for fluctuating patterns);
The generated random numbers include a first random number for determining the result of the first lottery (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot) and a second random number for determining the result of the second lottery (for example, a special symbol). Random numbers for random numbers, random numbers for fluctuating patterns), and a generation range is specified for each random number,
The lottery result determination means executes the second lottery even if the first random number is not within the specified range, and when the second random number is not within the specified range, A gaming machine characterized in that the result of the second lottery is the least disadvantageous result for the player.

In the configuration (4), even if the random number for jackpot determination is outside the range, it is determined that it is a loss (the most disadvantageous result for the player), and then a lottery is executed based on the random number for special symbols and the variable pattern random number. Even if the random number is outside the range, the normal processing is continued as it is as the result is least disadvantageous to the player. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 495, Figure 498, Figure 499). Note that the configuration (4) can also be applied to the lottery of normal symbols.

(5) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The said lottery consists of a first lottery (e.g., a lottery based on random numbers for jackpot determination) that determines whether or not the person has won the lottery, and a second lottery (e.g., a lottery for special symbols) that is performed following the first lottery. (a lottery based on random numbers or random numbers for fluctuating patterns);
The generated random numbers include a first random number for determining the result of the first lottery (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot) and a second random number for determining the result of the second lottery (for example, a special symbol). Random numbers for random numbers, random numbers for fluctuating patterns), and a generation range is specified for each random number,
The lottery result determining means determines the result of the second lottery to be the least disadvantageous result for the player if the first lottery is won and the second random number is not within the specified range. A gaming machine featuring:

In the configuration (5), even if the special symbol random number or the variable pattern random number is out of range, the result is always the least disadvantageous to the player, and normal processing continues as it is. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 495, Figure 498, Figure 499). Note that the configuration (4) can also be applied to the lottery of normal symbols.

(6) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The generated random numbers include a winning determination random number (a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for winning determination) for determining whether or not you have won the lottery, and a mode of the special game state when you win the lottery. A pattern random number to be determined (a random number for a special pattern or a random number for a normal pattern), and a generation range is specified for each random number,
The lottery result determining means selects a lottery result based on the random number of symbols that is the least disadvantageous to the player if the symbol random number is not within the specified range and the player wins the lottery based on the winning determination random number. A gaming machine characterized by:

In configuration (6), in addition to the same effects as in (5), even if the random symbol number is outside the range, the result is always the least disadvantageous to the player, and normal processing continues as it is. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 495, Figure 498, Figure 499).

(7) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The generated random numbers include a winning determination random number (a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for winning determination) for determining whether or not you have won the lottery, and a mode of the special game state when you win the lottery. A pattern random number to be determined (a random number for a special pattern or a random number for a normal pattern), and a generation range is specified for each random number,
having symbol determination information constituted by a plurality of records including a combination of a threshold value to be compared with the symbol random number and an aspect of the special gaming state;
The said lottery result determination means is configured to select a lottery result based on said random number for winning, and when said symbol random number is not within said specified range, to write the result of said lottery based on said symbol random number at the beginning of said symbol determination information. A gaming machine characterized in that the result corresponds to a record or a final record. "

In the configuration (7), in addition to the same effect as (5), even if the random symbol number is outside the range, the first or last record of the symbol determination data (special symbol determination data or normal symbol determination data) is always used. Select it and continue normal processing. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 495, Figure 498, Figure 499).

(8) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met, and that makes it possible to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
a symbol variation display means for displaying a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The generated random number includes a winning determination random number (a jackpot determination random number or a hit determination random number) for determining whether or not you have won the lottery, and a fluctuating pattern random number that determines the mode of the fluctuating display. In addition, a generation range is specified for each random number,
The lottery result determining means determines that the lottery result based on the symbol random number is the most unfavorable for the player if the player wins the lottery based on the winning determination random number and the fluctuating pattern random number is not within the specified range. A gaming machine characterized in that the result is not.

In configuration (8), in addition to the same effect as (5), even if the random numbers for variable patterns (for special symbols and normal symbols) are outside the range, the result will always be the least disadvantageous for the player, and the result will be the same as normal. Continue processing. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 501, Figure 502).

(9) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
a symbol variation display means for displaying a variation of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The generated random number includes a winning determination random number (a jackpot determination random number or a hit determination random number) for determining whether or not you have won the lottery, and a fluctuating pattern random number that determines the mode of the fluctuating display. In addition, a generation range is specified for each random number,
having fluctuation pattern determination information constituted by a plurality of records including a combination of a threshold value to be compared with the fluctuation pattern random number and an aspect of the special gaming state;
The lottery result determining means is configured to determine the lottery result based on the winning determination random number when the lottery is won based on the winning determination random number and the fluctuating pattern random number is not within the specified range. A gaming machine characterized in that the result corresponds to the first record or the last record of information.

In the configuration (9), in addition to the same effect as (5), even if the random number for the variable pattern (for special symbols and normal symbols) is out of range, the variable pattern selection data (for special symbols and for normal symbols) Select the first or last record and continue normal processing. In this way, it is possible to continue processing with normal control without providing exception handling, which simplifies gaming control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. (Figure 501, Figure 502).

(10) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
a symbol variation display means for displaying a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The generated random number includes a winning determination random number (a jackpot determination random number or a hit determination random number) for determining whether or not you have won the lottery, and a fluctuating pattern random number that determines the mode of the fluctuating display. In addition, a generation range is specified for each random number,
If the hit determination random number is not within the specified range, the symbol variation display means displays the symbol based on the variation pattern random number with the shortest variation display time, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number. A gaming machine characterized by displaying symbols in a variable manner.

In the configuration (10), in addition to the effect of (1), if the value of the winning judgment random number is outside the range, the fluctuation time of the symbol display is minimized, thereby quickly ending the game affected by noise etc. The stability of the game can be improved (Fig. 495).

(11) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is satisfied, and that makes it possible to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
Random number generation means for generating random numbers within a specified range in order to execute the lottery;
lottery result determining means for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generating means and determining the result of the lottery;
a symbol variation display means for displaying a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
If the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, the lottery result determining means determines the lottery result as the most disadvantageous result for the player, and
A gaming machine characterized in that the symbol variation display means suppresses execution of a reach effect in the process of executing an effect of displaying the symbols in a variable manner.

In the configuration (11), in addition to the effect of (1), if the value of the random number for jackpot determination is outside the range, the execution of the reach effect is suppressed, so that games affected by noise etc. can be quickly stopped. The stability of the game can be improved (FIG. 495).

[36. Return control from game stop]
The lottery control has been explained above. Next, a description will be given of recovery control when the game is stopped due to an abnormality occurring while the game is in progress. In order to return from a game stop, the power is turned off and then back on, but because the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained by the backup power source, it may not be possible to return from a game stop. In such a case, the game stoppage can be canceled by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, but it is not possible to return to the state before the game stoppage. However, depending on the cause of the game stop, it may be possible to return to the game without clearing the RAM, so by canceling the game stop without clearing the RAM, it is possible to continue the game from the state before the stop. This can contribute to suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of this embodiment includes a plurality of game stop canceling means, and selects and executes these game stop canceling means depending on the gaming state and the like. The game stop release means may be executed by operating a corresponding operation means (game stop release operation means), or may be executed by operating an existing operation means that also serves other functions (for example, RAM clear switch 954 or power supply). It may also be executed by operating a switch 932, etc.). Further, the operations of a plurality of operating means may be combined, or the operations of a dedicated operating means and an existing operating means may be combined and executed. Hereinafter, the causes of stopping the game will be explained, and then the outline of the means for canceling the stop of the game will be explained. Finally, a specific example of the game stop canceling means will be explained.

[36-1. Game stoppage factor]
[36-1-1. overview]
The first factor that causes the game to stop is when a signal is detected by a fraud detection sensor that detects magnetism, vibration, radio waves, etc. Detection of these signals may be caused by fraudulent activity, making it difficult to continue the game, and when canceling the game stoppage, it is necessary to restart the game from the initial state by clearing the RAM or the like.

In addition to the cases that may be caused by the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, errors may occur in game control due to factors such as noise, and the game control program may not operate normally. In this case, there is a high possibility that the game cannot be continued normally even if the game stop is simply canceled, so it is necessary to restart the game from the initial state by clearing the RAM or the like when canceling the game stop. Furthermore, if the game is stopped due to the influence of noise, etc., the cause of the game stoppage may not be identified due to poor reproducibility. In this case, the game is restarted from the initial state by clearing the RAM or the like when canceling the game stop, as in the case where an abnormality that makes it difficult to continue the game occurs. Similarly, the game is also stopped when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 1310, such as when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit built in the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, if the entry of a game ball is detected when the jackpot opening is closed, or if a predetermined number of wins or more are detected in the jackpot game state, the game ball will not pass through the variable probability area (V-AT area). The game is controlled to be stopped even when an abnormality occurs, such as when a game ball passes through a probability variable area despite the occurrence of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case of a minor abnormality such as a ball jam or a full tank error, the game itself continues, and the game continues after the abnormality is resolved (however, the payout of game value (prize balls) is stopped).

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a mechanism (excess balls) that stops the game when the difference between the expected balls to be played and the actual balls to be played (difference balls) is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (excess balls). control measures). By providing the means for suppressing excessive winning balls, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being excessively stimulated. The means for suppressing excessive prize balls will be described later.

Note that even if another game stop factor occurs in a state where the game is stopped, a new determination to stop the game is not made. For example, even if a magnetic sensor detects a magnetic abnormality while the game is stopped due to excessive winning balls, the game remains stopped without being notified. This is because in this case, since the game has already been stopped, problems such as illegally acquiring prize balls will not occur.

[36-1-2. Measures to suppress excessive prize balls]
(Determination of excessive prize balls)
First, a method of calculating the difference ball (comparison value) for activating the excessive prize ball suppression means will be explained. The difference ball is a value counted based on the game balls (launched balls, out balls, safe balls) consumed in the game (first count value), and a value counted based on the prize balls (second count value). This is the difference between The comparison value is calculated based on the difference balls. FIG. 503 is a diagram for explaining comparison values for operating the excessive prize ball suppression means.

In the excessive prize ball suppression means, the maximum value of the difference balls (first comparison value) when the start of the measurement period is set to 0, and the minimum and maximum value of the difference balls within the measurement period are used as values to be compared with the threshold value. There is a difference from the value (second comparison value). For example, if the maximum value of the difference balls within the measurement period is 6000 and the minimum value is -2000, the first comparison value will be 6000 and the second comparison value will be 8000.

Note that the measurement period is the period from when the value of the difference ball is cleared until the next time it is cleared. (1 day) until the start of business. In this case, the information may be cleared in the initialization process when the gaming machine is powered on. Further, the counting of the difference balls may be cleared when the hall is closed. In this case, the information may be cleared by processing when the power is turned off (power outage processing).

Furthermore, the counting of the difference balls may be manually cleared by performing a predetermined operation. For example, a button for clearing the difference ball count may be provided, and the number of difference balls may be cleared by turning off and on the power while operating the button. This makes it possible to clear the difference ball count at any timing, and even if an abnormality is detected in the count such as the number of prize balls due to noise, it is possible to continue playing after clearing the count. becomes.

Further, even when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated, the game control itself is operating normally, so it is also possible to control the timing at which the game is stopped. Specifically, (1) Immediately after the comparison value exceeds the threshold regardless of the gaming state, (2) If it exceeds the threshold during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, (3) In the time saving state (a predetermined number of times) (4) After the end of the symbol change (if there is a hold, after all holds are extinguished), if the threshold is exceeded in a certain state (if the value continues) or in a probability change state, (5) If the symbols are changing to result in a jackpot, after the jackpot gaming state ends; (6) If the symbols are changing to result in a jackpot, the lottery result is forcibly changed to a loss, and after the symbol changes are finished, etc. Conceivable.

By stopping the game when the comparison value exceeds the threshold value as in (1), it is possible to strictly manage the balls put out. Further, by continuing the game until the situation advantageous to the player ends as in (2) to (5), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. By controlling as in (6), it is possible to prevent the game from stopping once a jackpot has been reached, and it can be suppressed from significantly reducing the interest in the game because the player does not realize that he has actually won the jackpot. can do.

A program for executing a process for determining excessive prize balls (excess prize balls suppressing means) is placed in an area outside the game control area 13126. For example, it may be placed in the base calculation area 13128 as in the base calculation process, or it may be placed in another area.

Furthermore, the area for storing the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches counted by the excessive award ball suppression means is stored in a different area of the main control RAM 1312 from the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches counted for base calculation. Ru. The number of out pitches and safe pitches counted by the excessive award ball suppression means may be cleared as necessary, so if they are stored in a common area, it may not be possible to accurately calculate the base. It is.

Note that if processes for clearing the values of the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches are prepared separately, the processing (program) for counting the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches can be made common. For example, an area for storing the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches may be specified, and the stored values may be updated according to the detection result by the sensor. This allows the program capacity to be reduced.

Further, the process of counting the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches by the excessive award ball suppression means and the process of counting the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches for base calculation are each called within the same timer interrupt process.

(Operation when excessive prize ball suppression means is activated)
Next, the operation of the gaming machine when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated will be explained. When the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated, the progress of the game is stopped at the above-mentioned timing and various operations are performed. Further, instead of stopping the game, the firing of game balls may be stopped, or both the game and the firing may be stopped.

Furthermore, if there are unpaid prize balls when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated, the game is stopped after all the prize balls are paid out. In this case, since the excessive prize balls are paid out at the timing when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated (timing when the comparison value exceeds the threshold value), the game may be stopped immediately. It is also possible to stop the game while there are unpaid prize balls when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated, and in this case, the unpaid prize balls may be paid out after the game stop is released.

In addition, the threshold value is set in stages, and when the accessory is activated, such as in a jackpot game state, when the first stage threshold is reached, the operation of the excess prize ball suppression means is determined, and the activation of the accessory is determined. Stop the game after finishing. On the other hand, if the accessory is not operating, the game is stopped at the timing when the comparison value reaches the second stage threshold. This makes it possible to suppress an excessive increase in gaming value.

The gaming state that continues when the excessive prize balls suppressing means is activated may be forcibly shifted to the normal gaming state.

As the game stop condition, comparison and determination may be made using only either the first comparison value or the second comparison value. Further, the first comparison value and the second comparison value may be alternately switched each time the power is turned on, and whether the first comparison value or the second comparison value is to be used can be arbitrarily determined by the staff at the gaming parlor. It may also be possible to switch to . As the switching means, a substrate volume for volume adjustment may also be used. For example, a portion of the substrate volume may be used as a volume value and a portion as a comparison value. Specifically, if it is a rotary switch, it is possible to set 16 levels with one switch, so 0 to 7 are the board volumes, and 8 to F are the comparison values. More specifically, "8" is the first comparison value, "9" is the second comparison value, "A" switches between the first comparison value and the second comparison value after power is turned on, and "B" to "F" are Used as a reserve.

Note that when the game is stopped by the excessive prize balls suppressing means, the means for canceling the game stop is basically the same as when the game is stopped due to other factors. Note that if the RAM is not cleared, the count of difference balls (comparison value) is cleared as necessary.

(Notification of activation of excessive prize ball suppression means)
Next, the notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means will be explained. When the game is to be stopped by the excessive prize balls suppressing means, the player is notified to that effect. Types of notifications include notifications that suggest that the comparison value is approaching the threshold, notification that the comparison value has reached the threshold, and notification that the comparison value exceeds the threshold and the game will be stopped. In addition, an external output signal is output for notifying the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall console). The external output signal may also be used as a security signal, or a dedicated signal may be provided.

In addition, when the threshold is exceeded by a prize ball caused by a game ball entering a jackpot in a jackpot game state, and a case where the threshold is exceeded by a prize ball caused by a game ball winning a prize by a game ball entering a general winning hole or a starting prize hole other than the big winning hole. The mode of notification may be different depending on the case where the number exceeds 1000 yen. In the former case, the threshold may be significantly exceeded, so management may be easier if the administrator is made aware of it. In addition, unless the threshold value is exceeded by the prize balls due to the game balls entering the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls consumed in the game will not significantly exceed the number of prize balls, so it is common without distinction. It is also possible to use the notification mode as follows.

Next, an example of notifying the player will be explained. As a mode of notification, for example, a specific lamp is turned on. At this time, the lamp is turned off under normal conditions, and when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold value is within a predetermined value, the lamp is blinked, and when the comparison value reaches the threshold value, the lamp is turned on. It may be possible to notify the With this configuration, the player can recognize that the game is about to stop due to the flashing of the lamp, and can recognize that the game will be stopped when the lamp is turned on.

Further, the notification may be performed using a performance sound or voice. At this time, the output of the performance sound is stopped or the volume is lowered and the notification sound is output. Furthermore, when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold value is within a predetermined value, the output of the notification sound is started, and when the comparison value reaches the threshold value, the output of the production sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to notify the excessive prize ball suppression means. At this time, the notification content is displayed on the topmost (frontmost) layer or the topmost (frontmost) layer of the presentation layer. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue the effect on the back side, and for example, when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold value becomes within a predetermined value, it is possible to continue the effect while giving advance notice. At this time, the advance notice of the excessive prize ball suppression means is made not to affect the advance notice or the pending display. This is because the game is progressing normally, so by interfering with the normal performance, the interest in the game is suppressed from decreasing. On the other hand, since the game cannot proceed when the game is stopped, priority may be given to making the player aware of this.

In addition to the above-mentioned notification means, the notification may be made by causing a movable accessory to perform a predetermined action. If it is difficult for the player to recognize the notification by the movable accessory, the notification may be made by other means, such as by activating the movable accessory to notify that the game has been stopped. At this time, the initial operation may be performed as when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, or the operation may be performed in a specific manner (a manner for executing the excessive prize balls suppressing means). For example, in the case of a movable accessory that can cover the entire screen during operation, the movable accessory covers the liquid crystal display device. At this time, although it appears on the liquid crystal display screen in the same way as during the performance, it is prevented from returning to the initial position as during the performance. Furthermore, if a movable accessory is provided with a lamp or the like, it may emit light during performance, but may not emit light when the game is stopped, or may have a different light emission mode from that during performance. In this way, by operating the movable accessory in different manners during normal times and when the game is stopped, the player is made aware that the game has stopped.

Regarding the notification example explained above, the notification may be made by multiple means instead of being notified alone. For example, lighting of a lamp and sound output may be used together, or a notification sound may be output while displaying a notification screen on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as a performance. Further, a notification screen may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to give advance notice of the excessive prize balls suppressing means, and when the actual game is stopped, a lamp may be turned on or a notification sound may be output.

(Notification to peripheral control board)
As described above, when notifying the excessive prize ball suppression means, it is necessary to notify the peripheral control means 1510 of the execution of the excessive prize ball suppression means. Further, when giving advance notice of the execution of the excessive prize ball suppression means (for example, displaying the number of balls remaining until the excessive prize ball suppression means is executed), it is necessary to notify information regarding this.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the remaining number of games until the comparison value reaches the threshold value. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify or advance notice of game stoppage by the excessive prize balls suppressing means. The command may be sent whenever the comparison value (difference ball) changes, or may be sent every time a predetermined number is reached.

The command to be transmitted (difference ball command) is configured such that, for example, the upper part is "31H" indicating the difference ball command, and the lower part is the number of remaining balls. Because there is a limit to the area in which to store the remaining number in a command, it may not be possible to store it as is. Therefore, the command may not be transmitted until the difference from the threshold value becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. For example, the command may be sent when the remaining number reaches 1000.

Alternatively, the remaining number may be notified by associating the content of the lower command with the remaining number. For example, when the remaining number reaches 1000 pieces, command transmission is started, and the value of the lower command at this time is set to “01H”, and then every 100 pieces are sent with “02H” (990 pieces), “03H” (980 pieces), etc. ), ..., "80H" (100 pieces). When the remaining number reaches 100, a command will be sent every 10 pieces, for example, "81H" (90 pieces), "82H" (80 pieces), ..., "89H" (10 pieces). do. At this time, a table is maintained that stores the correspondence between the command contents and the remaining number.

FIG. 504 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the relationship between commands and the remaining number. By providing a table as shown in FIG. 504, the remaining number can be flexibly notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 504, even if the threshold value differs depending on the setting or model of the gaming machine, the display of the remaining number can be adjusted for each threshold value. At this time, the upper byte of the command may be different for each threshold. For example, when the threshold value is 100,000, it is set as "31H", and when the threshold value is 60,000, it is set as "32H". Note that when suggesting to the player to stop the game, it is not necessarily necessary to notify the remaining number itself, so the number of jackpots until the game is stopped may be used instead of the remaining number.

[36-2. Game stop release means]
Next, a description will be given of means for canceling the gaming stoppage of the gaming machine. The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with multiple types of game stop cancellation means, and each game can be activated by operating a combination of the game stop cancellation operation means and existing operation means (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971, etc.). Make the stop release means function. The game stop canceling operation means may be an operation means dedicated to canceling the game stop, or may use another operation means not directly related to canceling the game stop to cancel the game stop.

(Game stop first release means)
In the game stop first release means, while operating the game stop first release operation means (from OFF to ON), the game stop second release operation means is operated (from ON to OFF). As a result, only the game stoppage is canceled without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the game stop second release operation means is operated (from ON to OFF) without operating the game stop first release operation means (maintains OFF), the game stop first release is performed without canceling the game stop. Only the functions corresponding to the operating means are executed. Hereinafter, the control will be explained in chronological order with reference to FIG. 505.

FIG. 505 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of canceling the game stop by the game stop first canceling means.

First, at time t101, the game is forcibly stopped due to an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine. At this time, a security signal is output to the outside. Note that another signal indicating game stop may be used instead of the security signal. Further, the game stop cancellation confirmation means switches from the "normal display" to the "stop display".

Subsequently, in order to cancel the game stop, the first game stop release operation means is operated (time t102). Furthermore, the game stop second release operation means is operated while the game stop first release operation means is being operated (time t103). As a result, the process for canceling the game stop is started, and the game state shifts to "returning". At this time, the game stop cancellation confirmation means is turned off. In this way, by simultaneously operating a plurality of game stop canceling operation means, it is possible to prevent the game stop from being canceled easily and to prevent erroneous operations.

Thereafter, the operation of the game stop second release operation means is ended (time t104), and furthermore, the operation of the game stop first release operation means is ended (time t105). As a result, the game stop cancellation confirmation means is "all lit" and the game state shifts to a preparation period for restarting the game. Thereafter, when preparations for restarting the game are completed (time t106), the game stop cancellation confirmation means becomes "normal display", and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

(Game stop second release means)
In the second game stop cancellation means, after performing the same operation as the first game stop release means, if the game stop can be canceled, select whether to cancel or continue the game stop from the game stop cancellation confirmation means. It becomes possible to do so. It is determined whether or not to cancel the game stop by the third game stop release operation means, and when the release is selected, the game shifts to the normal game state and the game is restarted.

In this case, it is necessary that only the employees of the game parlor be able to cancel the game stop, and the player cannot perform the operation. This is because if a player is allowed to cancel a suspension of play due to fraudulent activity, etc., the game will be restarted, and if a failure occurs, an employee will need to check the situation.

Further, if the player is in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by continuing the game as much as possible. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, even if the game can be continued, the possibility of the game being stopped again can be reduced by clearing the RAM and restarting the game. In this way, it is possible to select whether or not to restart the game while checking the situation according to the game state before the game was stopped.

The game stop third release operation means may be a dedicated operation means or may be an existing operation means such as a production button.

FIG. 506 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of canceling the game stop by the second game stop canceling means. Note that the timing chart shown in FIG. 505 and time t101 to time t105 are the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

At time t106, the preparation period for restarting the game is completed, and the player is in a state where it is possible to accept a selection as to whether or not to cancel the stoppage of the game. At this time, the display of the game stop cancellation confirmation means becomes "selecting", and the game state becomes a standby state. Thereafter, when restarting the game is selected (time t107), the game stop cancellation confirmation means becomes "normal display" and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. Note that if restarting the game is not selected using the third game stop release operation means, the selected state may be maintained without restarting the game, or the game may be returned to the stopped state.

(Game stop third release means)
The third game stop release means restarts the game with the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 954. In this case, the game is restarted not in the game state before the game was stopped, but in the initialized state.

(Game stop fourth release means)
The fourth game stop cancellation means cancels the game stop by executing a setting change operation. When the setting change operation is executed, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are cleared, so the game is restarted in the initialized state instead of the game state before the game was stopped. Note that a specific example of canceling the game stop by the fourth game stop canceling means will be described later. Further, when performing a setting confirmation operation, the game stop is continued (maintained) without being canceled after the setting confirmation.

(others)
Depending on the type of game stop factor, the game may be automatically returned after the game is stopped. For example, when the game is stopped by the excessive prize balls suppressing means, the comparison value may be automatically initialized and the game may be continued after a notification (performance) that the game has been stopped is executed. Further, the game may be stopped and the game may be automatically resumed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. For example, after the game is stopped, the game may be automatically resumed so that the game can be resumed as usual at the start of business the next day.

Note that when the game is restarted without clearing the RAM when the game is stopped by the excessive prize ball suppression means, counts such as the number of out balls and the number of safe balls (comparison value) are cleared. At this time, the count values for base calculation (total number of out pitches, base value, number of safe pitches) are not cleared. That is, by executing the game stop canceling means without clearing the RAM, the counted value by the excessive prize balls suppressing means is cleared, while the counted value for base calculation is maintained. In other words, on the condition that the game stop first release means is executed, the count value for base calculation is not cleared, but the count value by the excessive prize ball suppression means is cleared without the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312 being executed. . Thereby, it is possible to continue calculating the base after restarting the game, and at the same time, it is possible to newly start counting the comparison value used by the excessive prize ball suppression means.

Further, the game stop canceling means may be executed in response to the game stop factor. For example, when a setting value abnormality occurs, the fourth game stop canceling means is executed to cancel the game stop while executing the setting change function.

Furthermore, priorities may be assigned according to the game stop factors, and a means for canceling the game stop may be selected based on the game stop factors having a high priority. For example, if a serious abnormality such as a setting value abnormality or a RAM abnormality occurs, it will be given the first priority, and if a malfunction is detected by a magnetic sensor, a wrong ball abnormality due to the activation of an excessive prize ball suppression means, or other malfunctions, etc. may be set as the second priority, and the game stop canceling means to be executed may be different depending on the priority.

Specifically, in the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor of the first priority, the game stop is canceled by the game stop canceling means whose settings are changed. On the other hand, the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor of the second priority cancels the game stop by the game stop canceling means that does not change the settings. Further, the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor having the first priority may clear the RAM, and the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor having the second priority may not clear the RAM.

Since the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor of the first priority involves a setting change (RAM clear), it becomes possible to cancel the game stop even if the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor of the second priority cannot cancel the game stop. On the other hand, if the game stop canceling means for the game stop factor of the second priority can cancel the game stop without clearing the RAM, the game can be restarted from the state before the game stop. Note that, unless the game is restarted from the state before the game was stopped, even if the game stop factor is the second priority, the game stop canceling means can cancel the game stop for the first priority game stop factor.

Further, when the game is stopped, the game stop cancellation means to be executed according to the priority of the game stop factor may be indicated by a notification means such as a liquid crystal display screen, and the game stop cancellation operation by the hall employee may be assisted. In addition, even in the case where a plurality of game stop factors overlap and occur before the game is stopped, notification may be performed according to the priority, and the game stop canceling means may be selected.

[36-3. Specific example of game stop cancellation means]
Next, a specific example of the game stop cancellation operation means will be explained. As described above, the game stop canceling means is executed by combining one or more game stop canceling operation means and operations of existing operation means such as the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. Further, the game stop canceling operation means may be assigned to an existing configuration provided in the gaming machine. Further, the game stop cancellation operation means does not necessarily need to be a switching means such as a button or a switch, as long as the ON/OFF change can be detected by a sensor or the like.

Further, the game stop cancellation confirming means is provided with a dedicated display section (game stop state display section) that can confirm whether or not the game stop has been canceled. For example, it may be composed of one or more LEDs, and may be turned on when the game is stopped and turned off when the game is stopped. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are used, notification may be made in a different manner depending on a related state other than the above, for example, whether a setting change/setting confirmation is being executed. Furthermore, the game stop state display section may be a 7-segment LED, and when a setting change/setting confirmation is in progress, a setting value may be displayed.

[36-3-1. Cancellation of game stoppage conditioned on door opening]
In the gaming machine described below, the game stop first release operation means is used to open/close (ON/OFF) the door (frame, one or both of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4), and the game stop second release operation means is used to open/close (ON/OFF) the door (frame, one or both of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4). The power switch 932 is turned ON/OFF. The first game stop release operation means may determine ON/OFF based on the detection result of a door open sensor (specifically, a body frame sensor, etc.). At this time, the game stop first release means releases the game stop by turning off the power and then turning it on again while opening the door. Note that it is sufficient that the door is open when the power is turned on, and it is not necessarily necessary that the door be in the open state before the power is turned on. For example, the power may be turned on at the same time as the door is opened.

Hereinafter, as a specific example of the first game stop canceling means, control for canceling the game stop on the condition that the door is opened will be explained with reference to the drawings and a timing chart. Note that in each timing chart, it is assumed that the same event occurs at a common time, and a description of the event will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 507 is a timing chart showing an example of control for canceling the game stop by turning on the power again when the door is opened. FIG. 508 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which the game stoppage is not canceled by turning on the power again when the door is closed.

Referring to FIG. 508, at time t201, the game is forcibly stopped due to an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine. At this time, a security signal is output to the outside. In the game machine of this embodiment, it is necessary to turn on the power again while opening the door while the game is stopped. Therefore, first, the door is opened (time t202), the power is turned off (time t203), and then the power is turned on again (time t204).

Opening of the door can be detected by a door frame release switch and a main body frame release switch (not shown), and a detection signal is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The door frame release switch detects the release of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the main body frame release switch detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. In this embodiment, when a detection signal (door open detection signal) is output from either switch, it is determined that the door is in the open state, but only one door (for example, the main body frame 4) is opened. The detection target may be an open state, or the open state may be recognized when detection signals are output from both the door frame release switch and the main body frame release switch. Furthermore, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are retained by the backup power source from when the power to the gaming machine is turned off until it is turned on again.

When the power is turned on again, the main control board 1310 starts starting up the gaming machine and cancels the gaming stop based on the door open detection signal in the initial setting process. At this time, the game stop state display section is in an extinguished state. Thereafter, when the start-up of the gaming machine is completed, a preparation period for transitioning to the normal gaming state (game startable state) begins (time t205). During the preparation period, the game stop state display section is fully lit. Note that the game stop state display section may be fully lit while the gaming machine is being started. In this case, the light may be turned on in a manner different from that during startup during the preparation period. Further, the lighting mode of the gaming stop state display section during the preparation period may be different from that when clearing the RAM (when starting the gaming machine while operating the RAM clear switch 954).

Here, I would like to add some additional information about canceling the game stoppage. When stopping the game due to an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine, the main control MPU 1311 sets a game stop flag in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312. Then, the power to the game machine is turned on again, and the game stop flag is cleared by detecting the door open detection signal when the game machine is started. Also, while the game stop flag is set, the abnormality notification is continued, and when the game stop flag is cleared, the abnormality notification (abnormal state notification period) is forced to end (in the middle of the notification period). You may also do so. With this configuration, if an abnormality occurs after the gaming machine is powered on again, the game stop flag is set again and an abnormality notification is started, so it is immediately determined whether or not the game can be continued. becomes possible. If the abnormality notification continues, the game cannot be continued in the state before the power cut, so the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again. Furthermore, if the abnormality notification has ended, it is possible to continue playing the game.

When the preparation period ends (time t206), the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal gaming state. At this time, the game stop state display section is turned off to indicate that the game stop has been canceled, that is, it is in the normal state.

Further, referring to FIG. 508, the power is turned off and turned on again without opening the door. Therefore, since the conditions for canceling the game stop are not satisfied, the game stop state continues even after the preparation period ends. Note that the power switch 932 may be located on the back side of the gaming machine, but since it is possible to access the back side of the gaming machine from the opposite side of the island, it is possible to turn on the power switch 932 without opening the door. It is also possible to operate it.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to attempt to cancel the game stoppage without clearing the RAM, so it can be expected that the game can be continued from the state before the stoppage. Further, even if the game stoppage cannot be canceled, the game stoppage can be canceled by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and clearing the RAM in the conventional procedure.

Therefore, unless the player is in a state where it is impossible to continue playing, it is possible to continue playing even after the game has stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, it is also possible to control the game so that the game is temporarily stopped when minor malfunctions occur continuously. For example, if random numbers outside the generation range are obtained more than a predetermined number of times during random number generation in the aforementioned special lottery, the game may be temporarily stopped, the status of the gaming machine checked, and then the game restarted without clearing the RAM. is also possible.

[36-3-2. [Cancellation of game stoppage when changing/confirming settings]
Next, a case where settings are changed or settings are confirmed when returning from a game stop will be described. Canceling the game stop by changing settings corresponds to the above-mentioned fourth game stop canceling means. First, the case of setting change will be explained, and then the case of setting confirmation will be explained. Finally, a case will be described in which the opening of the door is used as a condition for executing the setting change function.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, setting changes are executed by turning on the power while operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954. Also, setting confirmation is executed by turning on the power while operating the setting key 971 without operating the RAM clear switch 954.

(setting change)
FIG. 509 is a timing chart showing an example of control for changing settings while opening the door after the game is stopped. FIG. 510 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which settings are changed while opening the door after the game is stopped, and the door is closed after the gaming machine is started. FIG. 511 is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting changes while closing the door after the game is stopped.

Referring to FIG. 509, similar to the example shown in FIG. 507, the game is forcibly stopped at time t201. Furthermore, after opening the door (time t202) and turning off the power (time t203), the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 (time t204).

Furthermore, once the gaming machine has been started up, a setting change function is executed (time t205). At this time, a security signal is output similarly to when the game is stopped. While the setting change function is being executed, the game stop state display section takes a display mode indicating that the setting change function is being executed, but may also display the setting value itself. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the set value that is being changed (unconfirmed) is displayed in a blinking state, and the set value is displayed in a display mode indicating that the setting value is being changed.

Thereafter, when the setting key 971 is turned OFF and the setting change is completed (time t207), the game enters the normal gaming state after a preparation period (time t208). The game stop state display section during the preparation period is in a mode (for example, fully lit) indicating that the preparation period is in progress.

Note that the preparation period after changing the settings may be different from the preparation period after starting the gaming machine. For example, during the preparation period after the setting change, the display mode of the game stop state display section may be set to a high-speed flashing display instead of a full-light display. Furthermore, the display mode may be made different from when the setting value is being changed, such as by making the brightness of the game stop state display section different.

Subsequently, in the example shown in FIG. 510, the process from time t201 to time t208 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 509. The preparation period ends at time t208, and the preparation process necessary to start the game has been completed (though the game stoppage has been canceled), but the door is not closed and the game is in a standby state. ing. Thereafter, by closing the door, the state becomes ready to start playing, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state (time t209).

Finally, referring to FIG. 511, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 509, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is turned off with the door closed (time t203), and the setting key 971 is turned off. Then, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 (time t204).

Furthermore, once the gaming machine has been started up, a setting change function is executed (time t205). When the setting change is completed (time t207), the game enters a normal gaming state after a preparation period (time t208).

In this way, even if the door is closed, the game stop is canceled by executing the setting change operation (without executing the game stop first release operation means). This is because, upon completion of the setting change, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in the same way as when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954. It should be noted that the game stop third release means for clearing the main control RAM 1312 by operating the RAM clear switch 954 can also cancel the game stop without executing the game stop first release operation means.

(Setting confirmation)
Next, the case of setting confirmation will be explained. FIG. 512 is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting confirmation while opening the door after the game is stopped. FIG. 513 is a timing chart showing an example of control for executing setting confirmation while closing the door after the game is stopped.

Referring to FIG. 512, similar to the example shown in FIG. 507, the game is forcibly stopped at time t201. Furthermore, after opening the door (time t202) and turning off the power (time t203), the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 (time t204). At this time, since the power to the game machine is turned off and turned on again with the door open, it means that the game stop first release operation means has been executed.

When the start-up of the gaming machine is completed, a setting confirmation function is executed (time t205), and a security signal is output as in the case of stopping the game or executing the setting change function. While the setting confirmation function is being executed, the game stop state display section has a display mode indicating that the setting confirmation function is being executed, but it may also display the setting value itself. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting value that has been set is displayed in a different manner from the case where the setting value that is being changed is displayed.

Thereafter, when the setting confirmation is completed (time t207), since the game stop first release operation means has been executed, the game transitions to the normal gaming state after a preparation period (time t208). Note that the duration of the preparation period may be the same as the setting change, or may be different.

Next, referring to FIG. 513, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 512, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is turned off with the door closed (time t203), and the setting key 971 is turned off. The power is turned on while operating (time t204).

Furthermore, when the startup of the gaming machine is completed, a setting confirmation function is executed (time t205). After that, when the setting key 971 is turned OFF and the setting confirmation is completed (time t207), the game stop cancellation operation means is executed because the door is closed and the RAM has not been cleared even after the preparation period has ended. Since this is not the case, the game is kept suspended (time t208).

Note that even when performing setting confirmation, the game stoppage may be canceled in the same way as when changing settings. That is, when a function related to the setting value of the gaming machine (a function that enables display of the setting value) is executed, the game stoppage may be canceled. At this time, if only the setting value display function is executed, the game stoppage may be canceled without RAM clearing, and if the setting value changing function is executed, the RAM may be cleared. Furthermore, when the setting value display function is executed, the RAM may be cleared in the same way as when the setting value changing function is executed.

(When opening the door is the start condition for changing settings)
FIG. 514 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which the opening of the door is used as a condition for canceling the game stop and as a condition for starting a setting change. In FIG. 514, an example in which the door is closed will be described.

Referring to FIG. 514, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 511, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is turned off with the door closed (time t203), and the setting key 971 is operated. While doing so, the power is turned on (time t204).

At time t205, even after the startup of the game machine is completed, the door is not opened, so the setting change function is not executed, and the game remains suspended even after the preparation period ends (time t206).

In the example shown in FIG. 514, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated by the setting change operation, but since the start conditions for the setting change function are not satisfied, the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared and the game is stopped. This is different from the example shown in FIG.

Note that the game stop state display section may use an existing display section, for example, a performance display monitor or the like. When the game stop state display unit is also used as a performance display monitor, the base value is displayed in the normal game state. Further, in the setting change/setting confirmation, a display mode may be used to indicate that the function is being executed, or the setting value itself may be displayed. Further, the lights are turned off when the gaming machine is started up, and are turned off completely during the preparation period after changing the settings or confirming the settings. While the game is stopped, the base value may be displayed as in the normal gaming state, or it may be displayed exclusively when the game is stopped.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can restart the game from the state before the game was stopped without clearing the RAM when the game is stopped, which can contribute to suppressing a decline in interest in the game. can.

(Summary of inventions related to return control from game stop)
The following are typical aspects of the invention regarding control for returning from a game stop disclosed in this specification.

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
a game stop canceling means for canceling the stop of the game when the game is stopped;
a game stop canceling operation means operated to execute the game stop canceling means;
Equipped with
The game stop release operation means includes a game stop first release operation means (opening/closing the door) and a game stop second release operation means (power switch) different from the game stop first release operation means,
The game stop release means releases the stop of the game by operating the second game stop release operation means while operating the first game stop release operation means, and resumes the game from the point at which the game was stopped. A gaming machine featuring:

With the configuration (1), even if the progress of the game is stopped for some reason, it is possible to try to cancel the stoppage of the game without clearing the RAM, so it is possible to continue the game from the state before the stoppage. You can expect it. Note that even if the game stoppage cannot be canceled, it does not prevent the game stoppage from being canceled by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and clearing the RAM in the conventional procedure. Further, by simultaneously operating a plurality of game stop cancellation operation means, it is possible to prevent the game stop from being canceled easily and to prevent erroneous operations. Therefore, unless the player is in a state where it is impossible to continue playing, it is possible to continue playing even after the game has stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, it is also possible to control the game so that the game is temporarily stopped when minor malfunctions occur continuously (FIGS. 505 and 506).

(2) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
a setting change means capable of changing setting values of the gaming machine;
a game stop canceling means for canceling the stop of the game when the game is stopped;
a game stop canceling operation means operated to execute the game stop canceling means;
Equipped with
The game stop release operation means includes a game stop first release operation means and a game stop second release operation means different from the game stop first release operation means,
The game stop cancellation means releases the game stop by operating the game stop second release operation means while operating the game stop first release operation means, and resumes the game from the point at which the game was stopped;
If the setting changing means is executed while the game is stopped, the stop of the game is canceled without executing the game stop canceling means, and the game is restarted after initialization instead of when the game is stopped. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to start.

In the configuration (2), in addition to the same effect as the configuration (1), the game stop is canceled by executing the setting change operation without executing the game stop first release operation means. This prevents the game from being restarted in the game state before stopping after changing the settings, and enables stable game control, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game (FIGS. 509 to 511).

(3) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met, and that makes it possible to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
a game stop canceling means for canceling the stop of the game when the game is stopped;
a game stop canceling operation means operated to execute the game stop canceling means;
Equipped with
The game stop release operation means includes a game stop first release operation means and a game stop second release operation means different from the game stop first release operation means,
When the game stop second release operation means is operated while operating the game stop first release operation means, the game stop release means operates the game stop first release operation means and the game stop second release operation. A gaming machine characterized in that the stoppage of the game is canceled after the operation of the means is completed, and the game is resumed from the point at which the game was stopped.

In the configuration (3), in addition to the same effect as the configuration (1), it is possible to adjust the timing of canceling the game stop. This makes it possible to restart the game at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to restarting the game at an unintended timing (FIG. 510).

(4) A gaming machine that has a plurality of winning slots and is capable of executing a lottery based on balls entering the starting slot and generating a special gaming state based on the results of the lottery,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on winnings in the entry prize slot;
a first counting means for counting a first count value based on the number of game balls consumed in the game;
a second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize ball;
Difference ball counting means for counting the difference balls for a predetermined period based on the first count value and the second count value;
A game stopping means for stopping the progress of the game based on the counted difference balls;
a game stop canceling means for canceling the stop of the game progress;
a game stop canceling operation means operated to execute the game stop canceling means;
Prepare,
The game stop release operation means includes a game stop first release operation means and a game stop second release operation means different from the game stop first release operation means,
When the game stop second release operation means is operated while operating the game stop first release operation means, the game stop release means resumes the game from the point at which the progress of the game was stopped. , the first count value and the second count value are initialized.

In the configuration (4), the game stopping means (excess prize balls) stops the game when the difference between the expected balls and the actual balls (difference balls) exceeds a predetermined threshold value (excess prize balls). Since it is equipped with a ball suppression means), it is possible to prevent excessive gambling. In addition, it is possible to continue the game even after the game is stopped by the game stop canceling means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game (FIGS. 503 and 505).

(5) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when a starting condition is met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
a setting confirmation means capable of confirming setting values of the gaming machine;
a game stop canceling means for canceling the stop of the game when the game is stopped;
a game stop canceling operation means operated to execute the game stop canceling means;
Equipped with
If the setting confirmation means is executed while the game is stopped, the stop of the game is maintained after the setting confirmation is completed, and when the setting confirmation means is executed while operating the game stop cancellation operation means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the game resumes from the point at which the game was stopped after setting confirmation is completed.

With configuration (5), if the progress of the game is stopped, it is possible to try to cancel the stoppage of the game without clearing the RAM, so it is possible to continue the game from the state before the stoppage after checking the set value. (Figure 512, Figure 513). Furthermore, "when the setting confirmation means is executed while the game is stopped" means that the setting confirmation means is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned off while the game is stopped, and then when the power is turned on again. This also applies to the execution of functional means.

(6) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and generates a special gaming state based on the result of the lottery,
a setting change means capable of setting a setting value of the gaming machine;
a setting confirmation means capable of confirming setting values of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
If the setting changing means is executed while the game is stopped, the stoppage of the game is canceled and the gaming machine is initialized so that the game can be restarted, while when the setting confirming means is executed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to maintain the stoppage of the game even after setting confirmation is completed.

With the configuration (6), when changing the settings when the game is stopped, the game can be resumed after being reliably initialized, while when checking the settings, the game is stopped after confirming the setting values. It is possible to maintain this and determine whether or not to restart the game as necessary. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to restart the game after checking the state of the gaming machine, allowing for flexible operation (FIGS. 511 and 513). Furthermore, "when the setting change means is executed while the game is stopped" means that the settings are changed when the power of the gaming machine is turned off while the game is stopped, and then when the power is turned on again. This also applies to the execution of functional means.

[37. Player participatory production]
The control for returning from a game stop has been described above. Next, a player participation type performance using an accessory and an operation means that can control the operation of the accessory will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the moving speed of the accessory imitating a vehicle such as a car is controlled by controlling not only the start/stop of the action of the accessory but also the driving strength of the drive body. It also controls the intensity with which percussion instruments (actual objects that can output sound) such as drums are struck.

In conventional gaming machines, there were many performances that enabled relatively simple operations such as controlling the start of the action of the accessory and the timing of the end of the action. Therefore, there was a problem that the performance became monotonous and it was difficult to improve the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of this embodiment increases the variety of performances by making it possible to change the performance mode with a relatively simple operation, and allows players to enjoy a variety of performances while realizing a variety of performances. The purpose is to improve the interest of the game by having the players actively participate in the performance.

[37-1. Performance overview]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, worshipers line up to ring the bell on New Year's Eve, and a performance in which they ring the bell in order (hereinafter referred to as a "bell tolling performance") is performed. FIG. 515 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration for executing the bell-throwing effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

In the bell ringing performance, worshipers line up in order to ring the New Year's Eve bell, and their expectations for the lottery results are announced by the tone and volume of the bell. Furthermore, the tone and volume vary depending on the intensity with which the bell is struck, and the intensity with which the bell is struck can be adjusted by the player's operations. It is also possible to indicate the level of expectations for the lottery results based on the number of worshipers.

The configuration for performing the bell-tolling performance includes a bell 8000, a bell-tolling rod 8001, and a roof 8002. In the bell striking performance, the sound of a bell is output by striking a bell 8000 with a bell striking stick 8001. The sound of the bell changes depending on the strength with which the bell striking rod 8001 strikes the bell 8000, and specifically, the type and volume of the sound change. The bell-pulling stick 8001 is movable in the left-right direction by a driving body (solenoid or motor), and the amount of movement (driving strength) can be adjusted by the player using a production operation unit (operation means) 301, which will be described later. .

When the bell 8000 is struck by the bell striking rod 8001, it swings left and right depending on the strength. The bell 8000 is oscillated by a driving body such as a motor. Note that the bell 8000 may be swingably attached to the roof 8002 so that the bell 8000 may be rocked by physical contact with the bell ringing rod 8001.

In this embodiment, the bell 8000 and the bell striking stick 8001 can be accommodated on the roof 8002 of the bell hall, and when the bell striking performance starts, the roof 8002 with the bell 8000 and the bell striking stick 8001 accommodated therein. moves to a predetermined position (above the liquid crystal display device 1600). When the roof 8002 stops at a predetermined position, the bell 8000 and the bell striking rod 8001 housed inside the roof 8002 move downward, allowing the bell striking rod 8001 to strike the bell 8000 (start the performance). It becomes possible to perform.

When the performance is enabled, an image of worshipers ringing a bell is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The bell ringing performance is composed of a combination of an accessory such as a bell 8000 and an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, by applying technology that displays 3D images (stereoscopic images) of the worshipers ringing the bell and the bell ringing hall other than the roof, we are able to realize a performance that is integrated with the role objects, and by increasing the performance effect, it is possible to enhance the game. It may be done to increase interest.

The images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 are a worshiper ringing the bell 8003 and a waiting worshiper 8004 waiting until the bell is rung, and also include other objects such as the pillars and base of the bell ringing hall. . In addition, the entire bell hall may be used as an ornament.

When the bell-ringing performance becomes possible to perform, the performance operation unit 301 that specifies the operation of the bell-ringing stick 8001 becomes operable. The performance operation section 301 includes a rotation operation section 302 (first operation section) and a pressing operation section (second operation section) 303. The rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape and can be rotated by the player. The pressing operation section 303 has a button shape arranged at the center of the rotation operation section 302. The configuration of the performance operation section 301 will be described in detail later.

The strength of striking the bell is the driving strength of the driving body that operates the bell striking rod 8001, and is set (adjusted) based on the amount of operation (rotation) of the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, the strength with which the bell-struck rod 8001 strikes the bell (the amount of movement of the bell-struck rod 8001) also affects the swing width of the bell 8000 after being struck. The amount of movement of the bell-struck rod 8001 and the swing width of the bell 8000 may be made to be proportional to each other, or may be made to vary depending on the attributes (for example, gender, adult/child) of the worshiper 8003 who rings the bell. good. Furthermore, the volume and type of sound of the bell may vary depending on the strength with which the bell is struck, and this may indicate the degree of expectation of symbol fluctuations during reach. Note that the strength with which the bell-struck rod 8001 strikes the bell is not limited to the amount of movement of the bell-struck rod 8001, but may vary depending on the operating speed of the bell-struck rod 8001. For example, even if the amount of movement of the bell ringing rod 8001 is the same, the movement speed may be varied to vary the amplitude of swing of the bell 8000 and the sound of the bell.

The timing for ringing the bell may be specified by the player or may be set automatically. If the player specifies the timing at which the bell-ringing effect is started, for example, the timing at which the rotation operation section 302 is operated is set. At this time, the standby state (operation waiting state, standby display) continues until the player operates the operation unit (rotary operation unit 302), and after the operation (after touching the rotation operation unit 302), the performance is A start display is displayed. Furthermore, if the timing of ringing the bell is to be automatically set, for example, worshipers may appear at a location where they can ring the bell at predetermined intervals. In this case, the player operates only the strength with which the bell is struck using the rotary operation section 302. Furthermore, in cases where expectations are reported based on the number of worshipers, by automatically ringing a bell, it is possible to ensure that the number of worshipers corresponding to the expectation level appears.

Further, while the bell is controlled to ring automatically at predetermined intervals, the operation of the bell striking bar may be stopped while the pressing operation section 303 is being operated. As a result, the ringing of the bell is interrupted while the pressing operation unit 303 is operated.For example, if the level of expectation is announced in stages during the progress of the performance, the person can visit the shrine when the level of expectation has risen to a certain level. It is also possible to stop the ringing of the bell and further heighten the sense of anticipation after the ringing of the bell until the notification presentation or lottery results are presented.

When all the worshipers ring the bell, an announcement is made that indicates the result (expectation level) of the symbol change. The notification performance to be executed may vary depending on the process of the bell ringing performance. For example, if a player participates in a bell-ringing performance and all worshipers ring the bell, a highly reliable announcement performance or a special performance that is executed only when the player participates in the bell-ringing performance is performed. You may also do so. In this way, by executing a more interesting performance when participating in the bell-ringing performance, it is possible to increase the player's desire to participate.

When the bell toll performance ends, the bell 8000 and the bell toll stick 8001 are housed inside the roof 8002, and the roof 8002 moves to the standby position. The result of the symbol variation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. If the result of the symbol variation is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state) and awards a prize ball to the player. If the result of the symbol variation is a loss, the next symbol variation is started based on the suspended starting memory.

Note that the bell 8000, the bell ringer 8001, and the roof 8002 may be displayed as images instead of accessories, and the effect may be composed of all image displays.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by having the player actively participate in the player participation type performance, it is possible to provide a special performance that is more interesting than usual. There is. Hereinafter, the configuration and specific performance for executing the bell-ringing performance will be explained.

[37-2. composition]
First, the configuration for executing the bell performance will be described. In particular, the operating means for operating the bell ringer 8001 will be explained. First, the arrangement of the operating means operated by the player in the gaming machine will be explained, and then the configuration and function of the operating means will be explained.

[37-2-1. Pachinko machine front view]
FIG. 516 is a front view (surface view of the door frame) of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. The basic configuration of the gaming machine is the same as that of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1, etc., so a description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, like the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1 etc., has a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and the front side of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed. A door frame 3 that closes to the outer frame 3, a main body frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a door frame that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. 3, the game board 5 has a game area 5a which is visible from the player's side and into which a game ball is hit by the player.

The door frame 3 is attached to the lower front side of a frame-shaped door frame base unit that has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and includes a tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls. , a left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit above the dish unit 200, and a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit. , the top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit above the left side unit 400 and the right side unit 450, the handle unit 500 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit, and the door frame. A glass unit 560 is detachably attached to the base unit and closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front.

The performance operation unit 300 includes operation means for the player to participate in the bell-throwing performance. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and decorates the plate unit 200 and is operated by the player when a player participation type production such as a bell-ringing production is executed. It is equipped with a performance operation section 301 (operation means) that enables participation in the performance.

[37-2-2. Configuration of production operation unit (production operation section)]
Next, the presentation operation unit 300 will be explained, and in particular, the presentation operation section 301 operated by the player will be explained.

The production operation section 301 is composed of a rotation operation section 302 that allows the player to perform a rotation operation (first operation), and a press operation section 303 that allows the player to perform a pressing operation (second operation). There is. In the production operation section 301, a rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and a pressure operation section 303 is arranged within the ring. . Further, the pressing operation section 303 is composed of a pressing section (operation receiving section) 303a and an outer peripheral section 303b. Note that the pressing operation section 303 does not necessarily need to be disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302, and may be provided so as to protrude from the outer edge (side surface) of the rotation operation section 302, or may be provided outside the rotation operation section 302. It may also be placed in

FIG. 517 is a diagram showing a pan unit including the production operation section 301, (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position. (C) is a front view of the dish unit when the central press operation section of the press operation section is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a large annular rotary operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. Further, the effect operation unit 300 may be provided with unevenness on which the player can place his/her finger when operating the rotary operation section 302. These uneven portions make it easier to perform rotation operations smoothly by placing your fingers on them, thereby increasing your enjoyment of the game.

The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of an imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation section 302 is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation section 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Note that in a normal state, the pressing operation section 303 may be arranged such that a part thereof is hidden within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by the player. The rotation (rotation amount) of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected by a rotation detection sensor (not shown). Further, a sensor that detects the rotation speed may be provided.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the bell-throwing performance, the operating strength of the bell-throwing stick 8000 can be specified by a rotational operation. Note that by configuring the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotationally driven by a motor, it can be rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction to lighten the rotation operation and assist, or rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the rotation operation direction. By doing so, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier. Further, normally, the operational feel of the rotation operation does not change depending on the amount of rotation, and for example, even if the amount of rotation is increased, the rotation operation does not become heavier. Furthermore, it is also possible to return the rotational position of the rotational operation section 302 to the reference position at the start of the performance.

The rotation operation section 302 is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. In other words, the rotation operation section 302 is formed in a donut shape. Since the rotary operation section 302 is attached with a portion of the outer circumferential surface, upper surface, and inner circumferential surface exposed, it is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand.

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation section 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation section 302 in any manner that is convenient for the player. sex is enhanced. Further, when operating the rotation operation unit 302 from the reference position, only clockwise rotation may be possible. In this case, the rotation operation section 302 rotated to the right may be automatically returned to the reference position at the end of the performance or after the rotation operation is completed (when the player releases his/her hand from the rotation operation section 302). Further, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated even when the push operation section 303 is in either the initial position or the raised position. Note that the rotary operation section 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile because the lower surface side is attached to the operation section base.

Note that LEDs may be arranged in an annular shape on the rotary operation section 302 to decorate the rotary operation section 302 with light. By sequentially causing a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row to emit light in accordance with the rotation of the rotary operation section 302, only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation section 302 may be decorated with light. Furthermore, the reference position can be presented to the player by emitting light from only a specific part. Further, a light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged on the pressing part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 to decorate it with light.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in its initial position, protruding slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the press operation section 303 can be pressed. When the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the upper surface of the press operation section 303 is lowered, and the press is detected by a press detection sensor (not shown).

In a normal state, when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated clockwise, the outer peripheral section 303b extends upward, and the entire pressing operation section 303 rises (see FIG. 517(B)). In the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303 is located higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Note that even if the rotating operation section 302 is further rotated in the clockwise direction at the raised position, the pressing operation section 303 does not rise. Note that although the press operating section 303 is enabled to be operated by pressing in the initial position, it may be configured such that it cannot be operated by rotating the rotation operating section 302 unless it is rotated clockwise.

Further, when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated counterclockwise in the raised position, the press operation section 303 is lowered (see FIG. 517(C)). Note that even if the rotating operation section 302 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction at the initial position, the pressing operation section 303 does not descend. Further, when the pressing operation section 303 is at a position between the raised position and the initial position (projected position), it is raised or lowered depending on the rotational direction of the rotation operation section 302.

[37-2-3. Operation of the production operation unit (production operation section)]
Furthermore, the operation of the effect operation section 301 will be explained. FIG. 518 is a diagram showing the initial position of the production operation section 301, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along a plane including the center. FIG. 519 is a diagram showing the raised position of the production operation section 301, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along a plane including the center. The reference mark 302a is a mark for determining the amount of operation of the rotation operation section 302. Note that the reference mark 302a may be formed by emitting light from LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the rotary operation section 302.

As shown in FIG. 518, at the initial position, the reference mark 302a is at the lower position (reference position), and the tip position of the pressing part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 is at the lowest position. When the rotary operating section 302 is rotated clockwise at the initial position, the pressing operating section 303 rises as shown in FIG. 519.

As described above, the pressing operation section 303 is composed of the pressing section 303a and the outer peripheral section 303b. The outer peripheral portion 303b gradually extends upward until the rotation operation portion 302 rotates by a predetermined amount, and the pressing portion 303a rises. Note that the height of the pressing operation section 303 may be changed in conjunction with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, or may be changed stepwise for each predetermined amount of rotation. Further, the initial position may be changed to the raised position when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 exceeds a predetermined amount. That is, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated (rotated) during performance execution, the raised position may be maintained continuously during performance execution. Therefore, by raising the push operation section 301 when operating the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to prevent the push operation section 303 from being erroneously pressed while operating the rotation operation section 302. Note that if the pressing operation section 303 is not arranged within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 but is provided so as to protrude from the outer edge (side surface) as described above, the extension direction of the pressing section 303a The most extreme position (tip position) is displaced by operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, it is possible to suppress erroneous operations during execution of player participation type performance, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

At the end of the bell-ringing performance, the performance operation section 301 is returned to the normal state. The reference mark 302a of the rotation operation section 302 is returned to the reference position, and the pressing operation section 303 is returned to the initial position. When returning the rotary operating section 302 and the pressing operating section 303 to their normal states, they may be returned to their initial positions by a driving body such as a motor, or may be returned using a spring or the like.

Further, by grasping and lifting the pressing portion 303a of the pressing operation portion 303, the pressing operation portion 303 can be pulled upward by the player's hand. Further, when the player releases his/her hand, the pressing operation section 303 is returned to the position before being lifted. This case will be explained with reference to FIG. 520.

FIG. 520 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 when the press operation unit 303 is lifted. This shows the state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. The pressing operation section 303 can be lifted up to a height at which the rotation amount of the rotation operation section 302 becomes a predetermined amount.

Further, the press operation section 303 may be able to be lifted up to the raised position, but in order to prevent the production operation section 301 from malfunctioning, the liftable distance is set to be small (lower than the raised position), and the press operation section 303 is raised. I try not to move it to the elevated position. For example, in a bell-ringing performance, by lifting the pressing part 303a, the amount of rotation is such that the worshiper is moved to the bottom of the bell (the position where the bell is struck), and in the performance in which the worshiper actually strikes the bell, the rotating operation part 303a The complexity of the performance operations is suppressed by limiting the operations to those performed by .

[37-3. Bell performance]
The operating means for executing the bell ringing performance has been described above. Next, I will explain the bell performance in detail. The ringing effect of this embodiment can be executed at various timings such as during a variable effect or during a jackpot game, and one example is a variable effect that is executed after the start of variable display of special symbols and after a reach occurs. I will explain the production pattern inside. In this performance pattern, if the bell is successfully hit, a preview performance or special performance will be executed to notify the expected level of the result of symbol variation.

Here, the bell-strike performance includes a basic performance (single-shot performance) in which worshipers notify their expectation of symbol change by striking the bell once, a strength-specified performance in which the bell is struck with a specified strength, and a performance in which multiple worshipers strike the bell with a specified intensity. We will explain a continuous performance in which bells are struck in sequence, and finally, a point performance in which multiple worshipers add up points by striking the bell at a specified intensity, and execute a performance based on the total points.

[37-3-1. Basic performance]
First, we will explain the basic performance (single performance) in which worshipers notify their expectation of symbol change by ringing the bell once. FIG. 521 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition when one worshiper rings the bell once and is successful. The transition from the occurrence of a reach to the determination of a stop symbol will be described below.

In (A), the suspended starting memory has been digested, and the special symbol variable display has started, the left and right decorative symbols have stopped at the same symbol ("7"), and a reach has occurred. . From here, the bell ringing performance begins as shown in (B).

At this time, the accessories on the roof 8002 move to the upper part of the screen, and the bell 8000 and bell ringing rod 8001 housed in the roof 8002 are placed at predetermined locations. Afterwards, worshipers move to the stairs of the bell hall. The decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size so that it can be viewed, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen. Further, an operation instruction prompting the user to operate the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed.

When the player touches the rotary operation section 302 after the rotary operation section 302 is in a state where it can accept operations, a sound indicating the start of the performance may be output or music for the bell-ringing performance may be played. . By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to strongly recognize that he/she has participated in the bell ringing performance, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation and increasing the interest of the game. At this time, the sound or music to be output may be set depending on the result of the symbol variation or the variation pattern.

Thereafter, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the worshiper moves below the bell-struck rod 8001 and becomes ready to ring the bell, as shown in (C). Afterwards, worshipers ring the bell at the designated timing. At this time, the bell may be struck automatically after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the bell-tolling performance (after the occurrence of a reach), or the bell may be struck when the player operates the rotary operation section 302. Note that when the bell is to be struck by operating the rotary operating section 302, the bell-strike bar may be configured to finish operating after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the operation of the rotating operating section 302.

As mentioned above, the strength with which the bell-struck rod 8001 strikes the bell (the operating speed of the bell-struck rod 8001, the drive of the drive body for operating the bell-struck rod 8001) depends on the amount of operation (amount of rotation) of the rotation operation unit 302. strength) are different. As a result, the movement of the accessory changes depending on the amount of operation of the operation section, so that the player feels more involved in the performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(D) shows the result of ringing the bell, indicating a successful state. In the example shown in (D), the bell is struck with greater intensity by increasing the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, and as a result, the bell-tolling performance is successful. The success or failure of the bell-ringing performance may be determined by specifying the strength, or the success or failure may be determined by lottery when the player operates the rotary operation section 302 without specifying the strength. By determining the success or failure of the ringing of the bell according to the amount of rotation of the rotary operation section 302, it is possible to improve the game quality of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Thereafter, as shown in (E), the worshipers leave. Furthermore, since the ringing of the bell has been successful, as shown in (F), an announcement of the degree of expectation (preliminary effect) is executed. After the bell-ringing performance ends, the decorative pattern is enlarged again and the stop pattern is displayed, as shown in (G).

Next, a case where the bell ringing fails in the bell ringing performance will be explained. FIG. 522 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition when one worshiper rings the bell once and fails. (A) to (C) are the same as the success example shown in FIG. 521, so their explanation will be omitted.

(D) shows a state in which the amount of rotation of the rotary operation section 302 is insufficient and the bell cannot be struck properly, resulting in failure. In order to actually strike the bell, it is necessary to strike the bell with a certain degree of strength. When the amount of operation is greater than or equal to the amount of operation), the driving strength of the driving body becomes equal to or higher than the specific driving strength, and the bell is successfully struck. The position of the reference mark 302a at this time becomes the operating position. This makes it possible to perform preview effects and special effects. The special effects include, for example, the bell 8000 making a special movement (specific action effect), or displaying a special character or image on the effect display device 1600 (specific display effect). In other words, when the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is less than a predetermined value, the force for striking the bell, that is, the driving strength of the driving body for operating the bell striking rod 8001 is weak, and the bell striking rod 8001 is likely to fail. If the bell ringing fails, no preview performance or special performance will be performed, so that the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game.

Thereafter, as shown in (E), the worshipers leave. Furthermore, since the bell ringing failed, the worshipers simply left the shrine without executing the preview performance (notifying the level of expectations), as shown in (F). Note that in the example of FIG. 522, no preview performance is executed, but a preview performance with low reliability may be executed, or a performance for failure may be executed.

After the bell-ringing performance ends, the decorative pattern is enlarged again and the stop pattern is displayed, as shown in (G). Furthermore, since the success or failure of the bell ringing performance is not related to the result of the symbol variation (result of the special lottery), even if the game during the performance execution fails, as shown in (G), the player will win the jackpot.

Furthermore, if the player does not operate the performance operation section 301 at a predetermined timing, the ringing of the bell will similarly fail and the expectation level notification (advance performance) will not be executed. Furthermore, if the rotation amount (operation amount) of the rotation operation section 302 is less than a predetermined amount, ringing of the bell also fails. Note that if the result of the symbol variation (result of the special lottery) is a jackpot, a preview performance (jackpot confirmation performance) may be executed as a special performance even if the bell ringing fails.

[37-3-2. Single performance (intensity specified)]
Above, we have explained the basic performance (single performance) in which worshipers notify their expectation of symbol change by ringing the bell once. Next, a specific example of a bell ringing effect that specifies the rotation amount (operation amount) of the rotation operation section 302 will be explained. First, the relationship between the operation amount of the rotary operation unit 302 and the strength of striking the bell (the driving strength of the driving body that operates the bell striking rod 8001) will be explained.

FIG. 523 is a diagram illustrating the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation of the bell 8000 corresponding to the intensity with which the bell 8000 is struck in a bell-beating performance, where (A) the intensity is "strong" and (B) the intensity (C) is a case where the strength is "weak", and (D) is a case in which the bell fails because the strength is less than a predetermined value.

In the example shown in FIG. 523, the maximum amount of rotation of the rotation operation section 302 in the bell performance is 180 degrees, and the rotation operation section 302 may be configured not to rotate more than 180 degrees, or even if it is The strength may be kept unchanged.

Regarding the sound of the bell when the bell 8000 is struck by the bell striking stick 8001 in the bell striking performance, the volume is proportional to the intensity with which the bell is struck. On the other hand, the tone of the bell may be changed depending on the gaming state, the degree of expectation (variation pattern), etc.

Furthermore, in the bell-strike performance, the swing width of the bell when the bell 8000 is struck by the bell-strike rod 8001 is proportional to the intensity with which the bell is struck, as shown in (A) to (C). If the strength of striking the bell is below a predetermined level, it is treated as a failure, and either no bell sound is output or a special sound (failure-specific sound) is output, as shown in (D). By outputting a special sound, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that he/she has failed, and when the intensity is set to "weak", the player is able to distinguish, and the amount of rotation can be adjusted accordingly. It becomes possible. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the next performance of the bell ringing effect, encouraging him to continue playing the game, and preventing him from losing interest in the game.

The strength of striking the bell is divided into three levels: "strong," "medium," and "weak," but it may be further subdivided. For example, when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is set from 0 degrees to 180 degrees, it may be divided into 10 steps every 18 degrees. At this time, stage 1 is considered a "failure" due to insufficient strength, stages 2 to 4 are set to "weak," stages 5 to 7 are "medium," stages 8 to 10 are "strong," and the ringing is performed according to each range. What is necessary is to set the driving strength of the driving body that moves the rod 8000.

Next, a specific example of a bell ringing effect when the intensity is specified will be explained. FIG. 524 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transitions when the intensity of ringing the bell is specified in a bell ringing performance in which one worshiper rings the bell once. Note that the flow of the effect is similar to that shown in FIGS. 521 and 522.

In (A), a display for specifying the intensity is made. Note that (A) corresponds to the timing when (C) in Figure 521 is displayed, and the strength specification may be displayed when the worshiper is in a prepared state (a state where the bell can be struck), or it may be displayed in a staged manner. It may be displayed in a state where it is possible to start (for example, (B) in FIG. 521).

In (A), intensity “medium” is specified. At this time, if the rotation operation unit 302 is not operated or the amount of operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is insufficient, and the strength to strike the bell is insufficient, a failure may be notified. What is necessary is to execute the failure effect shown in FIG. 522. The effect when the bell is struck at any of the strengths will be explained below.

As shown in (B1), when the bell is struck with an intensity of "strong", the bell shakes greatly and the sound of the bell is output at a high volume. However, since it is not the specified intensity, the bell sound is output with a tone for failure, instead of a beautiful tone, and as shown in (B2), an effect or display indicating failure is executed. . At this time, a display may be displayed to specify the correct intensity (rotation amount) such as "Please strike the bell at medium intensity." After this, an effect that fails to notify the expectation level may be executed, or a screen that directly stops the symbols may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in (C1), when the bell is struck at "medium" intensity, the bell sways moderately and the sound of the bell is output at a medium volume. Since the bell is struck with the specified intensity, the bell sound is output with a beautiful tone (tone for success), and a success effect is displayed as shown in (C2). After this, an effect (for example, FIG. 521(F)) for notifying the expectation level is executed.

Further, as shown in (D1), when the bell is struck with a "low" intensity, the bell sways a little and the sound of the bell is output at a low volume. However, since it is not the specified volume, the bell sound is output with a failure tone instead of a beautiful tone as in the case of the "strong" intensity, and as shown in (D2), a bell sound is output with a failure tone. A performance or display indicating this is executed. As a performance or display indicating failure, for example, a display specifying the correct strength (amount of rotation) such as "Please ring the bell at medium strength" may be provided. Thereafter, an effect that fails to notify the expectation level may be executed, or a screen that directly stops the symbols may be displayed.

Note that the failure of the bell-ringing performance may be determined not only when the specified intensity and the intensity at which the bell is struck are different, but also based on the amplitude of shaking of the bell 8000 or the number of shakings caused by the ringing of the bell. For example, a sensor that detects the amount of rotation of the bell 8000 may be used to determine the swing width, or whether a part of the bell 8000 has passed a predetermined position when the bell 8000 swings by striking the bell. The determination may be made by detecting whether or not this is the case using a sensor.

Furthermore, if the result of the symbol variation (result of the special lottery) is a jackpot, regardless of the success or failure of the bell-throwing performance, ), a special performance may be executed. At this time, a special performance may be executed before the bell is rung, or a transition may be made directly from (A) to (E). Further, after the bell is rung, the transition may be made from (B2) to (E) instead of (D2). At this time, the special performance may be executed even if the rotation operation section 302 is not operated or the bell is struck with insufficient strength.

As described above, the interest of the game can be increased by adding changes to the performance through the player's operations. In addition, we add a game feel to the production, and when the game is successful (for example, when the bell is struck with a specified strength), we actively encourage the player to play by notifying them of the expected level of symbol change. can be made to participate. Further, in addition to the expectation level of symbol fluctuations, the setting value of the gaming machine and the gaming state may be suggested.

[37-3-3. Continuous performance]
Above, I have explained the bell ringing performance, in which each worshiper rings the bell once. Next, we will explain the performance in which multiple worshipers ring the bell in succession at predetermined intervals. FIG. 525 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions for a bell-ringing performance in which a plurality of worshipers ring the bell one after another.

When the bell-ringing effect starts, as in the case of the basic effect, in (A), the suspended starting memory is digested and the variable display of special symbols starts, and the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbol ( It stops at “7”), and a reach has occurred. After that, accessories such as the roof 8002 are placed, and the bell hall is formed. At this time, as shown in (B), multiple worshipers attend the bell ringing hall to ring the bell.

Furthermore, if the variation pattern has a high degree of expectation, the symbol variation time will be longer. Furthermore, since the bell ringing by worshipers is performed at predetermined intervals, and the number of times the bell ringing is possible per unit time is determined in advance, the upper limit number of worshipers is determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the number of worshipers increases or decreases depending on the level of expectation (fluctuation pattern).

Furthermore, instead of having all the worshipers attend from the beginning, the first worshiper may ring the bell and after leaving the venue, new worshipers may appear. Furthermore, the pattern of attendance may be varied so that worshipers may leave the venue midway through their attendance. By configuring it in this way, it is possible for players to grasp their expectations first and prevent them from discontinuing to participate in the performance.In addition, it is possible to prevent players from discontinuing to participate in the performance by understanding their expectations. Since the player has to proceed, the game can be continued while the player's expectations are heightened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the worshiper moves to the position where he/she can ring the bell and the state where the bell can be run (the rotary operation unit 302 can be operated), the worshiper moves at a predetermined interval as shown in (C) and (D). The bell will be replaced, and a performance will be performed in which worshipers will ring the bell at a predetermined timing. For example, the worshipers are replaced every 2 seconds, and the worshiper moves to a predetermined position (the position where the bell is to be struck) at a timing 1.5 seconds after the designated time, with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (amount of rotation) of the rotary operation section 302. Ring the bell. After that, the next worshiper moves to a predetermined position, and the bell ringing performance continues. Although the intervals at which worshipers appear are fixed, they may be set at different intervals. In this case, it is preferable to allow the player to know the timing to ring the bell. Furthermore, the appearance interval may be determined according to the attributes of the worshipers (gender, adult/child, etc.).

In the continuous performance described in FIG. 525, worshipers are automatically replaced at predetermined intervals, but as shown in (E), when the press operation section 303 is operated, the replacement of worshipers is temporarily stopped. There is. Therefore, even if the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the operation of the bell ringing rod 8001 (operation of the driving body) is stopped. At this time, there is no need to extend the variation time of the symbols, so it is not necessary for all the scheduled worshipers to appear.

Note that when the pressing operation section 303 is pressed, the operation may be stopped for a predetermined time, or it may be stopped while the pressing operation section 303 is being pressed. Furthermore, instead of stopping the replacement of worshipers when the pressing operation section 303 is pressed, the worshipers may be allowed to leave and the replacement of worshipers may proceed.

In this way, while the game (performance) is progressing by operating the rotary operating unit 302, by operating the pressing operating unit 303, you can change the number of worshipers or operate the driving body that operates the bell-pull bar 8001. Operation can be stopped. Further, by stopping the operation of the press operation section 303, the progress of the game (performance) can be immediately resumed. This allows the player to easily intervene in the progress of the game (progress of performance), thereby further enhancing the performance effect and improving the interest of the game.

In addition, while the continuous performance continues, worshipers are replaced at a predetermined interval, but if the rotary operation unit 302 is not operated, the worshipers are asked to exit through the stairs without moving to the predetermined position (the position where the bell is struck). You can also do this. At this time, a message may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to prompt the player to operate the rotary operation section 302, or the progress of the bell ringing performance may be stopped. Further, the sound effects and music may be made different depending on whether the player is touching the rotary operation section 302 or when the player is not touching the rotary operation section 302, or the background color on the display screen may be different. You can also do this.

On the other hand, if the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, the worshiper moves to a predetermined position (the position where the bell is struck), but if the rotation amount is 0 when the player only touches it, the rotation operation is performed. It may be assumed that the section 302 is not operated.

Here, as described above, when the press operation section 303 is lifted upward, the rotation operation section 302 rotates (FIG. 520). Therefore, as shown in (F), when the pressing operation unit 303 is lifted upward during execution of a continuous performance, the bell ringing bar 8001 operates (the driving body operates), but the amount of rotation (the driving body of the driving body) Due to a lack of strength (power), the bell ringing performance itself has begun to fail. Note that under certain conditions, for example, when the worshiper is a child, the required amount of rotation may be set to be reduced in accordance with the child's physical strength to ensure a successful bell ringing performance. With this configuration, although the bell-ringing performance normally fails, it is possible to make the bell-ringing performance succeed under specific conditions.

Thereafter, as shown in (F), the bell-ringing performance continues, and when the last worshiper rings the bell, the bell-ringing performance ends. The result of the symbol change may be announced by executing a preview performance like (F) in Figure 521 after the bell-thrilling performance ends, or the number of worshipers in the bell-thrilling performance and the tone when the bell is struck. The result of the symbol change may be notified by music or the like during performance. After the end of the bell-ringing performance, a stop symbol is displayed as shown in (G).

As described above, in the continuous performance, since the rotary operation section 302 is operated for the worshipers who appear continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a highly game-like performance. In addition, since worshipers automatically appear at predetermined intervals, the player can provide different effects simply by adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, making it easier for the player to participate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[37-3-4. Point performance]
Finally, we will explain a point performance, such as a continuous performance, in which multiple worshipers appear in succession and play a game in which points (scores) are added up when each worshiper hits a bell with a specified intensity. The point performance is a bell-strike performance that increases the gameplay by specifying the intensity with which each worshiper hits the bell in a continuous performance. Highly reliable preview performances and special performances are performed using the points earned during the performance period. Furthermore, if the player does not participate in the game, or if the points are low, a failure effect is executed, or the result is displayed as is without executing the effect.

First, an example of the screen configuration of point effects will be explained. FIG. 526 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration for executing a point performance of a bell-throwing performance in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Compared to the configuration shown in FIG. 515, a score display section 8101 that displays the total points and an intensity designation section (gauge) 8102 that designates the action strength of the bell-pulling stick 8001 are added. Note that the other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 515, and their explanation will be omitted.

In the point production, points are added when the bell is struck with a specified intensity, and the total points are displayed on the score display section 8101. At this time, points added each time the bell is run (obtained points) may be displayed at any time (FIG. 529). In the example shown in FIG. 526, the total points (score) are displayed numerically, but it may be displayed other than numerical values. For example, it may be displayed in white at the start and the color may change each time points are added, or it may be displayed to indicate the degree of achievement and expand each time points are added.

The strength designation section (gauge) 8102 designates the strength with which the bell is struck. In the example shown in FIG. 526, the intensity is specified by the length of the gauge, but it may be expressed numerically, or an image specifying the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be displayed. Alternatively, the intensity may be directly displayed (“strong,” “medium,” or “weak”).

In the point performance, the intensity of ringing the bell is specified for each worshiper by the intensity specification section 8102, and the player operates the rotation operation section 302 to adjust the amount of rotation according to the specified intensity. At this time, points are added each time the bell is struck with the specified intensity. Furthermore, if the bell cannot be struck with the specified strength, the total points may be maintained, or the total points may be deducted as a penalty. This may be done in the same way as when the rotary operation unit 302 is not operated or when the bell ringing fails, or points may be deducted only in this case. Points may be deducted only when the bell is not struck with the designated intensity, and points may be maintained when the rotary operation section 302 is not operated.

When the last worshiper finishes ringing the bell, a preview performance or special performance is performed based on the total points. Regarding the preview performance, if the total point value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, a highly reliable preview performance or special performance will be executed, and if it is less than the predetermined value, a less reliable preview performance or normal performance will be executed. Ru. Furthermore, if the player does not participate in the game and the total point value is 0, the stop symbol may be displayed after a predetermined period of time without executing the preview effect. Furthermore, if the total point value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value when the jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot confirmation effect may be executed as a special effect (for example, FIG. 524(H)).

Next, the setting of point presentation according to the level of expectation will be explained. FIG. 527 is a diagram illustrating the setting of point effects. In this embodiment, the expectation level corresponds to a fluctuation pattern, and a "high" expectation level corresponds to a fluctuation pattern with a high probability of winning the jackpot. Further, the result of symbol variation (special lottery) may be taken into account in the expectation level, and for example, a preview effect that is executed only when a jackpot is confirmed may be prepared.

The table shown in FIG. 527 is held by the storage section of the peripheral control board 1510, and specifies the point performance setting information (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation (fluctuation pattern) corresponds to the time of fluctuation, and the higher the degree of expectation, the longer the time of fluctuation. Therefore, the number of worshipers in the bell ringing performance can be increased, and the player can recognize the level of expectation based on the number of worshipers. Furthermore, by setting an upper limit on the number of worshipers that can be displayed on one screen, players will not be able to grasp the actual number of worshipers unless they participate in the game, so it is important to encourage players to actively participate in the game. I can do it.

Referring to FIG. 527, when the expectation level is "high", the number of worshipers is set to be large, and accordingly, the upper limit of points is 50 points. If the expectation level is "medium", the number of worshipers is set to be medium, and the upper limit of points is 30 points. If the expectation level is "low", the number of worshipers is set to be small, and the upper limit of points is 20 points.

When the bell ringing is successful, points may be added by adding a certain number of points (for example, 5 points) for each worshiper, or by setting points for each worshiper's attribute (for example, gender, physique, age, etc.). You may also do so.

The reliability of the preview performance executed after the end of the point performance is set for each acquired point. The more points earned, the more reliable the preview performance will be executed. Further, when the points are 0, a stop symbol is displayed without performing a failure performance or a preview performance. The failure performance may be a fixed performance regardless of the level of expectation.

Next, the transition of points when the point performance is executed will be explained. FIG. 528 is a diagram illustrating the transition of points acquired from the start of point production. FIG. 528 shows a case where N worshipers appear and strike the bells one after another with a specified intensity. Also, expectations are high, and the performance is expected to attract many worshipers.

First, the first worshiper appears and is designated with a strength of 5 gauges, ``Strong''. At this time, the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 so that the strength becomes "strong" and obtains 5 points. After that, the third worshiper specifies "medium" strength, which is equivalent to 3 gauges, but fails to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the strength becomes "weak", so he cannot earn points. It looks like this.

In the manner described above, the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is continued until the last (Nth) worshiper finishes ringing the bell. In the example shown in FIG. 528, since the points have reached 45 points, an effect with high preview reliability is executed as shown in FIG. 527. If the result of the symbol variation (special lottery) is a jackpot, a special performance indicating confirmation of the jackpot may be executed.

Next, screen transitions for point production will be explained. The basic flow is the same as the above-described continuous performance (FIG. 525), and the strength of the bell ringing is designated by the strength designation section 8102 when a worshiper appears. In this embodiment, worshipers appear at regular intervals, and the player specifies the intensity with which the bell is struck by operating the rotary operation section 302. Furthermore, by operating the press operation unit 303, it is possible to temporarily stop the appearance of worshipers.

FIG. 529 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of point production. When the bell ringing performance begins, worshipers attend as shown in (A). Thereafter, as shown in (B) to (D), the worshipers ring the bell one after another, and when the last worshiper finishes ringing the bell, a preview performance is executed.

As mentioned above, the preview performance is executed based on the total points earned when all worshipers ring the bell. FIG. 530 is a diagram showing an example of a preview performance executed based on the total points acquired in the point performance, in which (A) shows a case where the total point is 0, (B) shows a case where the total point is 20, (C) is a case where the total points are 50. The result of the symbol change is a jackpot.

As shown in (A), when the total point is 0, since the player is not actually participating in the game, the point performance is ended without executing the preview performance, and a stop symbol is displayed.

Further, as shown in (B), if the total points are 20, the player participates in the game but has few points earned, and a preview effect with low reliability is executed. In a preview performance with low reliability, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not he or she has won the jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in (C), when the total points are 50, the points have been acquired up to the point upper limit, so a preview effect with high preview reliability is executed. However, if a highly reliable preview effect is executed when the result is a loss, the player may know that the result is a loss and may become disappointed before the symbols stop. Therefore, in addition to the performance notifying the jackpot, a special performance that cannot normally be seen may be performed. Thereby, even if the result of the symbol variation (special lottery) is wrong, the player is less likely to be disappointed, and the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Note that if a different intensity is specified each time for worshipers who appear continuously, such as in a continuous performance or a point performance, the difficulty level may become too high and the interest of the game may decrease. Therefore, the difficulty level may be adjusted by continuing to specify the same intensity for a predetermined period of time, and specifying a different intensity after the elapse of the period. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the difficulty level of the game performance of the player participation type performance and increase the interest of the game to the maximum.

Further, the points acquired in the point presentation may be recorded, and the difficulty level may be adjusted based on the recorded points. As a result, the difficulty level is adjusted according to the player's skill, so it is possible to realize a player participatory performance at a difficulty level suitable for many players, and the game machine of this embodiment provides a can increase interest.

Note that the point performance described above is a performance during reach, but it may also be a performance during a jackpot (jackpot game state). In the case of a performance during a jackpot, it may be possible to earn points in accordance with entering the jackpot. Furthermore, the gaming state after the jackpot may be suggested in accordance with the acquired points; for example, it may be reported whether or not the player will be in an advantageous state after the jackpot is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player actively participate in the performance even during the jackpot game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the case of a performance during a jackpot, the display color of points, background color, etc. may be changed in stages according to the acquired points. Furthermore, when the acquired points reach a specific point, the performance during the jackpot (bell-throwing performance) may be ended. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the jackpot game state by allowing points to be earned according to the number of wins in the jackpot opening.

[37-3-5. Another example of point production]
Finally, another example of point presentation will be explained. In the point presentation described above, the intensity of bell-ringing is specified by the intensity specifying section 8102, but the intensity of bell-ringing is specified according to the attributes (gender, age, etc.) of the worshipers. FIG. 531 is a diagram illustrating an example of bell ringing intensity depending on the attributes of worshipers. Referring to FIG. 531, the strength is set high for a man with strong arms, and the strength is set low for a child with weak arms. With this configuration, point presentation can be performed without displaying the strength designation section 8102. At this time, the ringing strength may be displayed auxiliary.

FIG. 532 is a diagram illustrating the transition of points acquired from the start of the point production when the bell ringing intensity is specified according to the attributes of the worshipers. FIG. 528 shows a case where N worshipers appear and strike the bells one after another with a specified intensity. Also, expectations are high, and the performance is expected to attract many worshipers.

First, the first worshiper appears, and since he is a man, the strength of the bell ringing is set to "strong." At this time, the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 so that the strength becomes "strong" and obtains 5 points. Since the next worshiper who appears is a child, the intensity is designated as "weak." However, since the bell was struck at medium intensity, no points were earned, and the total points remained the same.

In the manner described above, the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is continued until the last (Nth) worshiper finishes ringing the bell. When all the worshipers have finished ringing the bells, the preview performance shown in FIG. 530 is executed based on the total points earned.

As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can increase the interest of the game by providing a participatory performance that allows players to participate with relatively simple operations.

[37-4. Summary of player participatory performances]
The following are representative aspects of the invention regarding the player participation type performance disclosed in this specification.

The gaming machine that realizes the player participation type performance disclosed in this specification is
a game board having a game area; a main body frame that removably supports the game board;
a door frame provided with a game window that is supported so as to be openable and closable on the front surface of the main body frame and allows a player to view the gaming area of the game board supported by the main body frame from the front when the door frame is closed; ,
A starting prize opening that can accept game balls;
a display device capable of displaying the results of a special lottery that can be executed in response to acceptance of game balls into the starting prize opening;
A driving body operated by power.

Further, at a lower position of the game window provided in the door frame, there is a ball tray part that can store game balls that are paid out in response to receiving game balls into the starting prize opening, and a ball tray part that accepts operations by the player. An operation means (effect operation section 301) capable of changing the display of the display device is provided.

Furthermore, the game board is provided with a special prize opening that operates to accept game balls when the result of the special lottery is a special result.

The operating means is capable of accepting an operation by a player to change the display on the display device, enables the driving body, and has a first operation capable of accepting a first operation (rotation operation) from the player. (rotary operation section 302) and a second operation section (rotary operation section 303) capable of receiving a second operation (press operation) by the player different from the first operation.

By adding the above-described configuration to the gaming machine and further having the following characteristic configuration, the unique effects of the present invention can be achieved.

(1) The driving strength of the driving body can be changed depending on the amount of operation of the first operation by the player on the first operation part,
The display effect that can be executed on the display device includes a specific display effect that can be executed only when the operation amount of the first operation is equal to or greater than a specific operation amount and the driving body operates with a specific drive strength or higher. It is characterized by

By having the configuration (1), in a player participation type performance, if the amount of operation of the first operation section (rotary operation section 302) is appropriate, the drive strength necessary for the game (bell ringing) is applied to the drive body. If the application is successful and the amount of operation is insufficient, the game (bell ringing) will fail. When the game is successful, a specific display effect that is not executed when the game fails can be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this way, it is possible to give a game feel to the performance, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the game by, for example, executing a specific performance when the game is successful.

(2) The first operation section (rotary operation section 302) included in the operation means is located at a reference position when no rotation operation by the player is accepted;
The second operation unit capable of accepting an operation different from a rotation operation is configured to be able to accept a pressing operation by a player,
When the first operating section is operated by the player from the reference position to the operating position, a tip of a receiving section that receives a player's pressing operation on the second operating section in response to the player's operation on the first operating section; It is characterized by a change in position.

With the configuration (2), the pressing section (pressing section 303a) of the second operating section (pressing operation section 303) is displaced by operation of the first operating section (rotary operating section 302). In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotary operation section 302 causes the outer peripheral section 303b to extend upward, and the pressing section 303a to rise. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation section 303 from being erroneously pressed while operating the rotary operation section 302, and it is possible to suppress erroneous operations during execution of a player participation type performance and increase the interest of the game. can.

(3) While the driving body is in operation, the operation of the driving body can be stopped by the second operation by the player on the second operation section.

By having the configuration (3), it is possible to temporarily interrupt the performance in a player participation type performance, and the performance effect can be improved by allowing the player to easily intervene in the progress of the game (progress of the performance). It is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

The second operation section (press operation section 303) included in the operation means has a tip position of an operation receiving section (press section 303a) that receives a press operation by a player at an initial position and a position protruding from the initial position. configured to be movable between the protruding position and the protruding position;
When the tip position of the operation receiving part of the second operation part is at the initial position, the player can grab the operation receiving part and displace the tip position of the operation receiving part to the protruding position. Ori,
When the player displaces the tip position of the operation receiver from the initial position to the protruding position, the first operation section (rotary operation section 302) operates according to the displacement of the tip position of the operation receiver. shall be.

With the configuration (4), the tip position of the second operating section (pressing operation section 303) is displaced by the operation of the first operating section (rotating operating section 302), but the player can By displacing the tip position of the operating section 303), it is possible to rotate the rotating section of the first operating section (rotary operating section 302). Thereby, it is possible to realize a variety of performance operations and increase the interest of the game.

Note that by displacing the second operation section (press operation section 303), even if the first operation section (rotation operation section 302) is rotated, the strength required for the driving body to operate It has become impossible to secure the driving strength necessary for hitting the ground. Thereby, the operation by the driving body is limited to that by the operation of the first operation section (rotary operation section 302), thereby suppressing the complexity of the performance operation.

(5) When the drive strength of the drive body is specified, if the drive strength of the drive body set based on the operation amount of the first operation unit does not satisfy the specified drive strength, It is characterized by the fact that notification is made.

By having the configuration (5), it is possible to increase the interest of the game in a player participation type performance by adding changes to the performance by the player operating the rotary operation unit with a specified amount of operation. . In addition, we add a game feel to the production, and when the game is successful (for example, when the bell is struck with a specified strength), we actively encourage the player to play by notifying them of the expected level of symbol change. can be made to participate.

(6) The driving strength of the driving body can be specified by specifying a period,
If a predetermined drive strength is designated as the drive strength of the driving body during the specified period, a drive strength different from the predetermined drive strength can be specified after the specified period has elapsed. shall be.

As with the continuous performance and point performance in the game machine of this embodiment, if a different strength (driving strength of the driving body that operates the bell-pulling stick) is specified each time for worshipers who appear continuously, the difficulty level becomes high. If this happens too much, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, by having the configuration (6), the difficulty level can be adjusted by continuing to specify the same intensity for a predetermined period and specifying a different intensity after the elapse of the period, thereby improving the game quality of player participation type production. It is possible to adjust the difficulty level and maximize the interest of the game.

(7) If the player does not touch the operating means, the progress of the game stops;
The present invention is characterized in that when a player touches the operation section while the progress of the game is stopped, a predetermined effect is executed.

By having the configuration (7), when the player touches the rotary operation section 302 after the rotary operation section 302 is in a state where it can accept operations during execution of the bell-ringing effect, a sound indicating the start of the effect is heard. I am trying to output it and play music for the bell performance. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to strongly recognize that he/she has participated in the bell ringing performance, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation and increasing the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, a game machine mainly applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and other than pachislot machines, a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. It may also be applied to, and even in this case, similar effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 300 Production operation unit 301 Production operation section 302 Rotary operation section (first operation section)
303 Press operation section (second operation section)
303a Pressing part (operation receiving part)
931 Power supply board 932 Power switch (setting change mode confirmation means, setting change mode starting means)
951 Payout control board (ball information control means)
954 RAM clear switch (means for checking setting change mode, means for starting setting change mode)
971 Setting key (means for checking setting change mode, means for starting setting change mode)
974 Setting display 1310 Main control board (game control means)
1311 Main control MPU (CPU, calculation means, calculation device, control means, master)
1312 Main control RAM (setting value information storage means)
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Accessory ratio display (base display, performance display monitor)
1400 Function display unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means, effect control board)
1511 Peripheral control unit 1512 Effect display control unit 1600 Main liquid crystal display device (display device, effect display device, effect display means)
2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 2007 Counting ball entry port unit 2007b Counting ball entry port 4000 Slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4600 Main board (game control device, game control means)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I/O area 4940 Parameter information setting area 6100 First area 6101 Non-mounted area 6102 Component mounting area 6200 Second area 6300 Inspection component mounting area 1341 Parallel/serial conversion circuit (slave )
1342, 1343, 1345, 1346 Serial-to-parallel conversion circuit (slave)
04TKK0010 Peripheral control IC (effect control means)
04TKK0011 CPU
04TKK0012 RAM
04TKK0030 Sound source IC
04TKK0040 Sound ROM
04TKK0060 VDP (image display control means, video control means)
04TKK0061 CG data decoder (image information conversion means)
04TKK0063 Pixel shader (image processing means)
04TKK0090 Image RAM (VRAM, image temporary storage means)
04TKK0091 Frame buffer 04TKK0092 Off-screen buffer 05TKK0013 Boot ROM
05TKK0020 External RAM (temporary storage means)
05TKK0070 Performance data ROM (image ROM, CGROM, image information storage means)
05TKK0071 SATA controller (data management means)
05TKK0072 Cache memory (second storage medium)
05TKK0073 Storage device (first storage medium)
05TKK0101 Decode buffer (temporary storage means, common decode buffer, common buffer area, individual decode buffer)
06TKK0010 Memory controller 06TKK0020 RAM diagnostic circuit 06TKK0016, 06TKK0017 Termination resistor 06TKK0018, 06TKK0021 Terminal 06TKK0022 Memory device (storage element)

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area; a main body frame that removably supports the game board;
a door frame provided with a game window that is supported so as to be openable and closable on the front surface of the main body frame and allows a player to view the gaming area of the game board supported by the main body frame from the front when the door frame is closed; ,
A starting prize opening that can accept game balls;
a display device capable of displaying the results of a special lottery that can be executed in response to acceptance of game balls into the starting prize opening;
A driving body operated by power,
At a position below the gaming window provided in the door frame, an operating means is provided that accepts an operation by a player and can change the display of the display device,
The game board is equipped with a special prize opening that operates to accept game balls when the result of the special lottery is a special result,
The display device is capable of displaying a specific display effect,
The specific display effect can be displayed when the result of the special lottery is a special result,
The operating means capable of accepting an operation by a player to change the display of the display device includes a first operating section capable of accepting a rotating operation by the player, and an operation different from the rotating operation on the first operating section. having a second operation section;
The second operation unit capable of accepting an operation different from a rotation operation is configured to be able to accept a pressing operation by a player,
When the tip position of the second operating section is at the initial position, the player can pull out the second operating section and displace the tip position of the second operating section to the protruding position. A gaming machine with special features.

Images